GEOGRAPHIE DELINEATED FORTH IN TWO BOOKS▪ CONTAINING The Spherical and Topical parts thereof, By NATHANAEL CARPENTER, Fellow of Exeter College in Oxford. THE SECOND EDITION CORRECTED. ECCLESIAST. 1. One generation cometh, and another goeth, but the Earth remaineth for ever. OXFORD, Printed by john Lichfield, for Henry Cripps; and are to be sold by Henry curtain. Anno Domini, M. DC. XXXV. TO THE RIGHT HONOURABLE WILLIAM, EARL OF PEMBROKE, LORD CHAMBERLAINE to the Kings most excellent Majesty, Knight of the most Noble Order of the Garter, and Chancellor of the University of Oxford. Right Honourable, THis poor Infant of mine, which I now offer to Your Honourable acceptance, was consecrated Yours in the first conception: If the hasty desire I had to present it, makes it (as an abortive brat) seem unworthy my first wishes, and Your favourable Patronage; impute it (I beseech You) not to Self-will but Duty; which would rather show herself too officious, then negligent. What I now dedicate rather to Your Honour, than mine own Ambition, I desire no farther to be accounted Mine, than Your generous approbation: wishing it no other fate, then either to dye with Your Dislike, or live with Your Name and Memory. The general Acclamation of the Learned of this Age, acknowledging with all thankful Duty, as well Your Love to Learning, as Zeal to Religion, hath long since stamped me Yours. This arrogant Desire of mine, grounded more on Your Heroic virtues, than my private ends, promised me more in Your Honourable Estimation, than some others in Your Greatness. The expression of myself in these faculties beside my profession, indebted more to Love, than Ability, sets my Ambition a pinch higher than my Nature. But such is the Magnificent splendour of Your Countenance, which may easily lend Your poor Servant so much light as to lead him out of Darkness; and, as the Sun reflecting on the base earth, at once both view and gild his Imperfections. My language and formality I owe not to the Court, but University; whereof I cannot but expect Your Honour to be an impartial Umpire, being a most vigorous Member of the one, and the Head of the other Corporation. If these fruits of my Labours purchase so much as Your Honours least Approbabation, I shall hold my wishes even accomplished in their ends, and desire only to be thought so worthy in Your Honourable esteem, as to live and dye Your Honours in all duty and service to be commanded NATHANAEL CARPENTER. The Analysis of the first Book. Geography, whose object is the whole earth, is either Spherical, which is twofold either Primary, which considers the Terrestrial Sphere either as it is Natural wherein are to be considered two things: the Principles whereof it consists, to wit, Matter and Form. Chapter 1. Proprieties arising out of them; which again are either Real: such as are assigned in respect of the Earth itself: which are either Elementary: as the conformity of all the parts concurring to the constitution of the Sphere. Chapter 2. Magnetical; which are either Partial as the Coition, Direction, Variation, Declination: Chap. 3. Totall: as the Verticity and Revolution: Chap. 4. Heaven's: wherein we treat of the Site, Stability, and proportion of the Earth in respect of the Heavens. Chap. 5. Imaginary: such as are the Circles and Lineaments of the Globe, of whose Invention and Expression. Chap. 6. Artificial: in the Artificial Sphere representing the Natural unto us: which is either Common or Magnetical. Chap. 7. Secondary, which handles such matters in the Sphere as secondarily arise out of the first. Such are Measure of the Earth, with the divers manner of Invention. Chap. 8. Distinction which are either Spaces considered Simply in themselves, in which sort they are divided into Zones, Climates, and Parallels. Chap. 9 In respect of the Inhabitants: which suffer manifold Distinction. Chap. 10. Distances which are either Simple: wherein is considered the Longitude & Latitude of places. Chap. 11. Comparative: wherein two places differing either in Longitude or Latitude, or both, are considered. Chap. 12. Topical Libro 2ᵒ. OF THE SPECIAL Contents of each Chapter of the first Book according to the several Theorems. CHAP. I. Of the Terrestrial Globe, the Matter and Form. 1 IN the Terrestrial sphere is more Earth than Water. pag. 8 2 The Earth and Water together, make one Sphere. pag. 10 CHAP. II. Of the Conformity of parts in the constitution of the Terrestrial Sphere. 1 The parts of the terrestrial sphere do naturally conform and dispose themselves, as well to the Production and Generation, as to the continuance and preservation of it. pag. 14 2 All Earthly bodies incline and approach to the centre as near as they can. 16 3 Of two heavy Bodies, striving for the same place, that always prevaileth, which is heaviest. 22 4 Hence it comes to pass, that the Earth enjoys the lowest place, the next the Water, and the last the Air. ibid. 5 The Centre of the Earth is not an Attractive, but a mere Respective point. 25. 6 The same point is the centre of Magnitude, and weight in the Terrestrial sphere. 26 7 Every point or centre of a weighty body, is moved towards the centre of the terrestrial Globe by a right line. 27 8 A heavy point moving toward the centre, will move faster in the end, then in the beginning. 28 9 The motion of a magnitude towards the centre, is not merely natural, but mixed with a violent motion. 29 10 The lines wherein the centres of two heavy bodies are moved downewardly, being continued, will meet in the centre of the Earth. 31 11 Two heavy body: of the same figure and matter, whether equal or unequal, will in an equal time, move in an equal space. 32 12 The Terrestrial Globe is round and spherical. 33 13 The Rugged and unequal parts of the Earth, hinder not the spherical roundness of it. 36 14 The Water concurring with the Earth in the Globe, is also spherical. 38 CHAP. III. Of the Partial Magnetical affections in the sphere of the Earth. 1 The Terrestrial sphere is of a magnetical Nature and disposition. pag. 46 2 The magnetical motion is excited in a small and unperceivable difference of time. 49 3 The motive quality is spread spherically through every part of the magnetical body. 49 4 The motive quality of the magnetical body, is strongest of all in the poles, in other parts so much the stronger by how much they are situated near the poles. 50 5 Magnetical bodies move not uncertainly, but have their motions directed and conformed to certain bounds. 52 6 The Magnet communicates his virtue to iron or steel, if it be touched with it. 55 7 The Magnetical Coition is strongest of all in the poles. 56 8 The South part of the Loadstone turns to the North, and the North to the South. 57 9 The contrary motion in magnets is the just Confluxe and Conformity of such bodies to magnetical union. 59 10 If any part southward of the magnetical body be torn away or diminished, so much shall also be diminished of the North part. 50 11 The Magnetical variation hath no certain Poles in the terrestrial Globe. 63 12 The point of Variation, as of Direction, is only Respective not attractive. 65 13. The variation of every place is constant not variable. 66 14 The variation is greater in places near the poles. ibid. 15 The magnetical Declination is answerable to the Latitude, not in equality of degrees, but in proportion. 69 16 The magnetical declination is caused, not of the attractive, but of the Disponent and Conuersive virtue of the Earth. 70 17 The Magnetical Declination hath a variation. 71 CHAP. IV. Of the total Motions Magnetical. 1 The sphere of the Earth by her magnetical vigour, is most firmly seated on her Axle, whose ends or poles respect always the same points in the Heavens without alteration. 72 2 It is probable, that the terrestrial Globe hath a circular Motion. 76 CHAP. V. Of the site, Stability, and Proportion of the Earth in respect of the Heavens. 1 The terrestrial Globe is the centre of the whole world. 99 2 The position of the Earth in the centre of the world may be reconciled, as well with the diurnal motion of the Earth, as the Apparences of the Heavens. 110 3 The Earth is firmly seated and settled in her proper place. 115 4 The Earthly Globe compared in quantity with the Firmament, & supreme orbs of the Planets, hath no sensible magnitude. 118 5 The terrestrial Globe compared with the inferior Orbs hath a sensible magnitude. 121 CHAP. VI Of the circles of the Terrestrial Spheare· 1 A circle though imaginary in itself, hath his ground in the nature of the terrestrial sphere. 123 2 The distinction of a circle into a certain number of parts hath no certain ground in the nature of the terrestrial sphere, but only in conveniency. 124 3 By Astronomical observation to find out the Meridian. 127 4 To find out the Meridian magnetically. 129 5 By the Incision of a tree, the Meridian may be found out. 131 6 The Meridian being found to find out the Equatour. 137 7 Without the help of the Meridian to find out the Equatour. 138 8 To find out the Equatour magnetically. 138 9 The Equatour is an unmoveable circle, whose Poles never vary from the Fixt-Poles of the Earth. 140 10 How to know the number of degrees in a lesser circle answerable to the greater. 147 11 The sensible and Rational Horizon in the Earth, are much different: in respect of the Firmament all one. 151 12 The sensible Horizon may be greater or less, according to the Nature and Disposition of the place. 153 13 the Eye may be so placed on the Earth, as it may behold the whole Hemisphere of the Heavens, and yet no part of the terrestrial sphere. 154 14 From the horizontal circle is reckoned the Elevation of the Pole in any place assigned. 155 15 How to find out the Horizon for any place assigned. 156 16 How to find out the horizontal plain. 157 17 The distinction of Orisons. ibid. CHAP. VII. Of the Artificial Representation of the Terrestrial sphere. 1 Of the parts whereof the Globe is Geographically compounded. 163 2 The use of the Artificial Globe is to express the parts of the Earth, so far forth as they have a divers situation, as well one in respect of the other, as the Heavens. 166 3 Of the direction of the artificial Globe. ibid. 4 Of the ground and fabric of the Artificial plain Chart. 168 5 Of the ground and fabric of the Geographical Planispheares with their several distinctions. 175 6 Of the magnetical Terrella. 182 CHAP. VIII. Of the measure of the Earth. 1 The common measures by which the quantity of the Earth is known, are miles, and furlongs. 187 2 Of the invention of the circumference of the Earth. 188 3 By the elevation of the Pole, or observation of an Eclipse or some known star the circuit of the Earth may be known. 189 4 By observation of the noone-shadowes the measure of the earth may be found out. 190 5 The opinions of Cosmographers concerning the measure of the Earth are divers, which is chiefly to be imputed to their error in observing the distances of places experimentally, according to Miles, Furlongs, and such like measures. 192 6 How by the known height of some mountain the diameter of the Earth may be found out. 197 7 How to find out the plain and convey superficies of the Earth. 198 8 Of the number of square miles contained in the Earth. 200 CHAP. IX. Of the Zones, Climates, and Parallels. 1 Of the temperate and untemperate Zones. 204 2 The t●rride Zone is the greatest of all: next are the two temperate: the cold Zones are the least of all. 207 3 The Zone wherein any place is seated, may be known either by the Globe, or Geographical table, or else by the tables of Latitude. 208 4 The Zones and Climates agree in form, but differ in greatness, Number, and Office. 211 5 The I●●ention compared one with the other, are not all of the same greatness. 212 6 The inclination of the Climates. ibid. 7 The distinction of the Climates. 213 8 Of the diversity betwixt the Ancient and modern Geographers, concerning the placing and number of the Climates. 214 9 How to find out the Parallel for each place. 217 CHAP. X. Of the distinction of the Inhabitants of the Terrestrial sphere. 1 Of the inhabitants of a right, oblique, and Parallel sphere, with their properties and distinctions. 220 2 Of the Amphi●cij, Hetero●cij, & Periscij, with their properperties. 226 3 Of the Perioecjs, Antoe●j, and Antipodes, with their Accidents: 228 4 How the Perioecjs, Antecjs and Antipodes, are distinguished in respect of the celestial Apparences. 231 CHAP. XI. Of the Longitudes and Latitudes. 1 Places enjoying the same longitude, are not always equally distant from the first Meridian; and chose. 235 2 The difference of Longitudes begets the difference of times. 235 3 Of the losing or getting of a day in the whole year in a voyage about the earthly Globe. 236 4 Of the Invention of the Longitude by an Eclipse of the Moon. 240 5 Of the Invention of the Longitude by a Clock, watch, or Hourglass. 242 6 By the distance betwixt the Moon and some known star, to find out the Longitude. 243 7 By the difference of the Suns and Moon's motion, to find out the Longitude of places. 246 8 The expression of the longitude by the Globe or Map. 247 9 The Invention of the Latitude. 249 10 By the Meridian height of the Sun to find out the Latitude. 249 11 By the Meridian height of a known star to know the Latitude. 250 12 The expression of the Latitude on the Globe or Map. 252 13 Of the Magnetical expression of the Latitude. 252 CHAP. XII. Of distances of places compared one with the other. 1 Of the Invention of the distances in longitude of two places under the Equatour in the same Hemisphere. 254 2 Of the Invention of the distance of two places in the same Hemisphere without the Equatour. 255 3 Of the distance of places differing only in longitude, in divers Hemispheres. 260 4 Of the invention of places differing only in Latitude, either in the same or divers kinds of Latitude. 261 5 To find out the distance of places differing in Longitude and Latitude by the square root. 262 6 How to perform the same by the tables of Signs, Tangents, and Secants. 264 7 To find out the distances of places by resolution of the spherical Triangle. 266 8 Of the Invention of the distance by the Semicircle. 271 9 Of the expression of the distance on the Globe or Map. 273 To my Book. PArue, nec invideo, sine me (Liber) ibis in Aulam, Hei mihi quòd Domino non licetire tuo. Go forth thou hapless Embryo of my Brain, Unfashioned as thou art; express the strain And language of thy discontented Sire, Who hardly ransomed his poor Babe from fire, To offer to the world and careless men The timeless fruits of his officious pen. Thou art no lovely Darling, stamped to please The looks of Greatness; no delight to ease Their melancholy temper, who reject As idle toys but what themselves affect. No lucky Planet darted forth his Rays To promise love unto thy infant-dayes: Thou mayst perhaps be merchandise for slaves. Who sell their Author's wits and buy their graves: Thou mayst be censured guilty of that blame, Which is the Midwife's fault, the Parent's shame: Thou mayst be talk for Tables, used for sport At Taverne-meetings, pastime for the Court: Thou mayst be torn by their malicious fangs, Who ne'er were taught to know a Parent's pangs. How easily ca●●roud Ignorance outstare The comeliest weeds thy poverty can wear; When all the Sisters on our Isis' side Are of● sworn servants to aspiring pride, And our renowned Mother Athens groans To see her garden set with Cadmus' sons: Whose birth is mutual strife: whose destiny Is only to be borne, to fight, and die. Prometheus is chained fast, and cannot move To steal a little fire from mighty jove To people new the world; that we may see Our Mother teem with a new progeny; And therefore with thy hapless Father prove To place thy duty where thou findest love. When thou arriu'st at Court thou long may'st stay Some Friend's assistance to prepare thee way; As in a cloudy morning I have done When envious Vapours shut me from the Sun. When all else enter, see thou humbly stand To beg a kiss from thy Moecenae hand; If he vouchsafe a look to gild thy state, Proclaim him Noble, thy self fortunate. GEOGRAPHIE: THE FIRST BOOK. CHAP. I. Of the Terrestrial Globe, the matter and form. 1 GEOGRAPHIE is a science which teacheth the description of the whole Earth. The Nature of Geographie is well expressed in the name: For Geographie resolved according to the Greek Etymology, signifieth as much as a description of the Earth; so that it differs from cosmography, ●s a part from the whole. Forasmuch as cosmography according to the name, is a description of the whol● world, comprehending under it as well Geographie, as Astronomy. Howbeit, I confess, that amongst the ancient Writers, cosmography hath been taken for one & the selfsame science with Geography; as may appear by sundry treatises merely Geographical, Ptolom. geogr. l. 1. sec. 1. yet entitled by the name of cosmography. This Science (according to our approved Ptolemy) is distinguished from chorography four ways. First, because Geographie describeth the whole Sphere of the Earth, according to its just quantity, proportion, figure, and dispositions, which the principal parts of it have; as well in respect of one another, as of the whole Terrestrial Globe: so that it only undertakes the chief and most noted parts, such as are sins, creeks, nations, cities, promontories, rivers, and famous mountains. But the Chorographer separately handleth the lesser parts, and matters of smaller moment, such as are hillocks, brooks, lakes, towns, villages, and Parishes, without any respect at all to the places adjoining, as conferring them with the Spherical fabric of the whole Earth: Which by the same Author is well illustrated by an example, drawn from the Painter's Art: For we see that a Painter, desirous to draw out and represent the head of any living creature, will first draw out the lineaments of the first and greatest parts; as the eyes, ears, nose, mouth, forehead, and such like; only caring that they may challenge a due and just proportion and symmetry one with the other, not regarding the lesser particles and ornaments in each of these, wanting perhaps space competent to accomplish it. But if the same Painter would strive to express only an eye, or an ear, he might take space enough to design out every smaller lineament, colour, shadow, or mark, as if it were natural: for in this he cares not to make it correspondent to the whole head, & other parts of the body: So happens it to the Geographer, who willing to delineate out any part of the Earth, (as for example, our Realm of England) he would describe it as an Island, encompassed round with the sea, & figured in a triangular form, only expressing the principal and greater parts of it. But the Chorographer undertaking the description of some special and smaller part of England; as for example, the City of Oxford, descends much more particularly to matters of small quantity and note: such as are the Churches, Colleges, Halls, Streets, Springs; giving to each of them their due accidents, colours, lineaments, and proportion, as far forth as Art can imitate Nature. Neither in this kind of description needs there any consideration of the places adjoining, or the general draught of the whole Island. The second difference between Geography and chorography assigned by Ptolemy, consists in this; that chorography is commonly conversant in the accidental qualities of each place, particularly noting unto us, which places are barren, fruitful, sandy, stony, moist, dry, hot, cold, plain, or mountainous, and such like proprieties. But Geography less regarding their qualities, inquires rather of the Quantities, measures, distances, which places have aswell in regard one of the other, as of the whole Globe of the Earth: assigning to each region its true longitude, latitude, clime, parallel, and Meridian. 3ly, Geographie and chorography are said to differ, because Geographie stands in little need of the Art of Painting, for as much as it is conversant the most part about the Geometrical lineaments of the Terrestrial Globe, claiming great affinity with the Art called of the greeks, ichnography; whose office is to express the figure and proportion of bodies, set forth in a plain superficies. But chose Corographie requires, as a help necessary, the Art of Painting; forasmuch as no man can fully and perfectly express to the eye the true portrait of cities, towns, castles, promontories, and such other things, in their true colours, livelihood, and proportion; except they be skilled in the Art of Painting. So that this part is by some likened to that Art which the greeks call Sciographie, or Stenography. Fourthly, and lastly, Geographie is distinguished from chorography, in that the former considering chiefly the quantity, measure, figure, site, & proportion of places, as well in respect one of the other, as of the Heavens, requires necessary helps of the Sciences Mathematical, chiefly of Arithmetic, Geometry, and Astronomy, without which a Geographer would show himself everywhere lame & impotent, being not able to wade through the least part of his profession: whereas a man altogether unpractised in those faculties, might obtain a competent knowledge in Chorography. As we find by experience, some altogether ignorant in the Mathematics; who can, to some content of their hearers, Topographically, and Historically discourse of Countries, as they have read of in books, or observed in their travail. Notwithstanding all these differences assigned by Ptolemy, I see no great reason why Chorography should not be referred to Geography; as a part to the whole; forasmuch as the objects on which he hath grounded his distinction, differ only as a general and a special; which being not opposite, but subordinate (as the Logicians use to speak) cânnot make two distinct Sciences, but are reduced to one and the selfsame: at least the differences thus assigned, will not be Essential but Accidental. Wherefore my scope in this Treatise shall be to join them both together in the same, so far forth as my Art and leisure shall be able, to descend to particulars; which being in chorography almost infinite, will not all seem alike necessary in the description of the universal Globe of the Earth. The name of Geography thus distinguished, we define it to be a Science which teacheth the Measure and Description of the whole Earth. It is properly termed a Science, because it proposeth to itself no other end but knowledge; whereas those faculties are commonly termed Arts, which are not contented with a bare knowledge or speculation, but are directed to some farther work or action. But here a doubt seems to arise, whether this Science be to be esteemed Physical, or Mathematical? We answer, that in a Science two things are to be considered: first▪ the matter or object whereabout it is conversant; secondly, the manner of handling and explication: For the former, no doubt can be made, but that the object in Geographie is for the most part Physical, consisting of the parts whereof the Sphere is composed: but for the manner of Explication, it is not pure, but mixed; as in the former part Mathematical, in the second rather Historical; whence the whole Science may be alike termed Mathematical & Historical▪ not in respect of the Subject which we have said to be Physical, but in the manner of Explication. For the object of Geographie (as we have intimated) is the whole Globe of the Earth: where we are to observe, that the Earth may be considered 3 manner of ways: First, as it is an Element, out of which mixed Bodies are in part compounded: In which sense it appertains to Natural Philosophy, whose office is to treat of all natural bodies, their principles and proprieties. Secondly, as it is supposed to be the centre of heavenly motions, and so it is undertaken by Astronomers. Thirdly according to its Spherical superficies, as it is proposed to be measured or described, in which manner it is the subject of Geography, so far forth as the parts of it have a divers situation, as well in regard one of another, as in respect of the Heavens. Which restriction, although agreeing well to some part of it, will hardly square with all the rest: because many things herein are handled besides the Earth's natural site or position, as hereafter shall be taught. For which cause we have rather defined the subject of Geography to be the Earth, so far as it is to be measured and described, as wanting one word to express the whole manner of consideration. 2 Geographie consists of 2 parts, the Spherical, and Topical: The Spherical part is that which teacheth the natural constitution of the Terrestrial Sphere. The common and received division of this Science amongst Geographers, is into the General or universal part; and the special. Which division, I dare not utterly reject; being strengthened with the authority of ancient and approved Authors. Yet seems it more aptly to be applied to the Historical part, then to the whole Science, as we shall after make apparent. In the mean time the division of it into Spherical & Topical parts, seems to be preferred in reason: Forasmuch as the Terrestrial Globe, which we suppose to be the subject of the Science, is proposed to us under a twofold consideration; first in regard of the Mathematical lineaments and circles, whereof the Sphere is imagined to consist; out of which we collect the figure, quantity, site, and due proportion of the Earth, and its parts: Secondly, of the places Historically noted and designed out unto us, by certain names, marks, and characters. The former receiveth greatest light from Astronomy, whence some have called it the Astronomical part: The later from Philosophy and Historical observation, being (as we have said) a mixed Science, taking part of diverse faculties. 3 The Terrestrial Sphere is a globous or round Body, comprehended within the superficies of the Earth and Wate●. Some have nicely distinguished betwixt a Sphere & an Orb, that a Sphere is a round massy body, contained in one surface, which is convexe or outward as a Bowl. The other concave, or hollow, in manner of an Eggshell emptied. But this distinction seems too curious, as savouring to much of Scholastical subtlety, because the name of Orb and Sphere are many times promiscuously used, without difference, amongst good Writers. This Sphere which we make the subject of our Science, we call Terrestrial, not because it consists merely of Earth; (the contrary of which we shall hereafter show:) but because the Earth is the chiefest in the composition; whence by a tropical kind of speech, the whole Globe may be called Terrestrial. 4 The handling of the Terrestrial Sphere is is either Primary, or Secundary. The Primary consists in such affections as primarily agree to the Earth. The Geographical Affection may be considered two ways; either simply and absolutely in themselves; or eomparatively as they are conferred and compared the one with the other. As for example, the circles of the Sphere, such as are the Parallels and Meridian's, may be considered either absolutely in themselves; or comparatively as they concur to the longitude, latitude, distance, or such like accidents, which arise out of the comparison of one Circle with another. 5 The Terrestrial Sphere primarily considered, is either Natural, or Artificial. The Natural is the true Globe in itself, without image or representation. 6 Herein again are to be considered two things; First, the Principles and constitution of the Sphere; Secondly, the Accidents and proprieties: The principles whereof the Sphere is composed are two; viz: Matter and Form. 7 The Matter is the substance whereof the Sphere is made, viz: Earth, and Water. My meaning is not in this Treatise to handle the nature and propieties of these two Elements, Water, & Earth, farther than may seem necessary for the Geographical constitution of the Terrestrial Sphere, leaving the rest to the Natural Philosopher; because it is supposed that few men undertake the study of this Science, without some insight in the other. And to speak truth, this begins where the Natural Philosopher ends. Yet because some light in each learning is necessarily required▪ ●nd all men are not willing to seek farther into the grounds of Natural Philosophy; it will not seem altogether impertinent, to lay the foundation farther off, that the building thereon erected may stand surer and stronger. Wherefore taking some beginning from the matter of the Earthly Globe, we have distinguished it into Earth, and Water, as those parts whereof the whole Globe is not essentially compounded, as one entire body in itself; but rather co●ceruated and compacted together, each part retaining its own nature and proprieties, without any proper mixture. To express more fully the constitution of this Sphere, we are here to distinguish betwixt the first and second matter. The first matter was that universal chaos, or mass, out of which, all bodies both Celestial and Elementary were made and form, as we read in the first of Genesis. Which whether it be the same with Aristotle's Materia prima, as some have imagined, I leave to others to dispute. The second matter of the Globe is either Proper or Accidental. The proper we call that whereof the Globe of the Earth most properly consists, such as are the two Elements of Earth and Water. The Accidental matter is understood of all other bodies, contained in the superficies of the said Sphere, as Stones, Metals, Minerals, and such like materials, made of a Terrestrial substance, and engendered in the womb of the Earth. Concerning the Earth and Water, which we make the most proper and essential parts of the Sphere, we will set down these two Theorems. 1 In the Terrestrial Sphere is more Earth than Water. The Theorem may be proved by sundry reasons drawn from Nature and Experience. Whereof the first may be taken from the depth of the waters, compared with the whole thickness of the Earth. For the ordinary depth of the Sea is seldom found to be above 2 or 3 miles, and in few places 10 furlongs, which make a mile and a quarter. And albeit some late Writers have imagined the observation to be understood only of strait and narrow Seas, and not of the main Ocean: yet granting it to amount 〈◊〉 10, 20, or 30 miles, it cannot reach to so great a quantity, as to come near the greatness of the Earth. For the whole circle of the Terrestrial Sphere being 21600 English miles, (allowing 60 English miles to a degree of a greater circle) we shall find the Diameter to be about 7200 miles: Whose semi-diameter, measuring the distance between the centre and the superficies of the Earth, will be 3600 miles. And if any man suppose some of the quantity to be abated, because of the Spherical swelling of the Water above the Earth, whose Circle must be greater than that of the Earth: We answer; first that this may challenge some abatement, but not come near any equality of the Water with the Earth. Secondly it is to be imagined that the surface of the Sea, howsoever as it is painted in Globes and Charts, it seem for a great part empty and unfurnished of Lands; yet this for the greatest part, seem rather to be ascribed to man's ignorance, and want of true discovery, because many quillets and parcels of land lie yet unknown to our Christian World, and therefore omitted, and not figured in ou● ordinary Maps. So we find a great quantity of Earth which lay hid and unknown without discovery, in the daye● of Ptolemy, which caused him to contract & curtail the Earth in his Geographical descriptions. Which defect hath been since that time supplied by the industrious travails and Navigations of later time: such as were of Portugals, English, and Hollanders, especially of Columbus the Italian, who (as one wittily alluding to his name) like Noah's Dove plucking an olive branch from this Land, gave testimony of a portion of Land as yet unknown, and left naked unto discovery. And no question can be made, but a great quantity of land, not yet detected by our European Navigators, awaits the industry of this age. To which alludes the Poet in these Verses: Seneca in Medeâ. Act. 2. Venient annis secula seris, Quibus Oceanus vincula rerum Laxet, & ingens pateat tellus, Typhi●que novos detegat orbs, Nec sit terris ultima Thule. In after-yeeres shall Ages come, When th'ocean shall unloose the bands Of things, and show vast ample lands; New Worlds by Seamen shall be found, Nor Thule be the utmost bound. Another reason to prove the Earth to be greater in quantity, may be drawn from the mixture of Earth and Water: for if these two Elements should meet in the same quantity, & challenge an equality; questionless the whole Earth would prove over-moist, slimy, and unapt for habitation. Which any man may easily observe by his own experience. For let a portion of Earth, & another of Water be mixed together in the same quantity, the whole mass will seem no other than a heap of mire or slime, without any solid or consisting substance. Moreover the Water being no other than a thin and fluid body, De gen. & cor. hardly containing itself within its own bounds or limits (as Aristotle teacheth us) must needs require a hard and solid body, whereon to support itself, which body must of necessity be greater in quantity. 2 The Earth and Water together make one Sphere. It may be probably collected from sundry places of holy Scripture, that in the first Creation, the surface of the Earth; being round and uniform, was overwhelmed and compassed round with Waters, as yet unfurnished of living Creatures. Secondly, it appears that Almighty GOD afterwards made a separation betwixt the Waters and Dry-Land. This separation (a● far as reason may be admitted as judge) seems to be effected one of these two ways: Either by giving supernatural bounds and limits unto the Waters, not suffering them to invade the Dry-land: or else by altering the superficies of the Earth, casting it into inequal parts, so that somewhere, some parts of it being taken away, empty channels or concavities might be left to receive the Waters; otherwhere by heaping up the parts so taken away, whence were caused Mountains and eminent places on the earth. The former of these ways seems altogether improbable; forasmuch as it is very unlikely to imagine, that God in the first institution of Nature, should impose a perpetual violence upon Nature, as hereafter in place more convenient shall be demonstrated. Wherefore taking the later as more consonant to reason; we shall find that the Water & the Earth separated and divided, make not two separate and distinct 〈◊〉 Globes, but one and the same Sphere; forasmuch as the concavities and hollowgaping of the Earth, are everywhere choked and filled up with Water, whose superficies is Spherical; and therefore helps, together with the Earth, to accomplish & perfect this Terrestrial Sphere. To confirm which opinion▪ these reasons out of common experience may be alleged: The first is drawn-from the parts of Earth and Water; For we may everywhere observe, that a portion of Earth, and another of Water being let fall, will descend in the same right line toward the same centre: whence we may evidently conclude, that the Earth & Water have one and the selfsame centre of their motion, and by a consequence conspire to the composition of one and the selfsame Sphere. Secondly, to a like Arch or space in the Heavens, is found answerable alike Arch in the Terrestrial Globe, whether it be measured by the Earth or Water: which could not happen, were they not accounted parts of the same Sphere. The third reason may be drawn from the Eclipse of the Moon, wherein the part of the Moon shadowed & obscured, is observed to be one Spherical or round-figure. This shadow, by the consent of all Astronomer's is caused by the Terrestrial Sphere, interposed betwixt the Sun and the Moon, intercepting the Sunbeams, which should illuminate the Moon; and the shadows imitate the opacous bodies, whence they arise: But in the Eclipse we find only the shadow of one body or Sphere, and therefore according to the ground of the Optics, we may conclude the body whereof such a shadow proceedeth, to be but one and the selfsame Sphere. 8 The Form of the Terrestrial Sphere, is the natural Harmony or order, arising from the parts working together. We ought here to remember what we said before; that the Earth and the Water concur together to make one Terrestrial Sphere: wherefore the whole being accounted one coacernated and collected Body, made of two other; we are not to expect an Internal, Essential, and Specifical Form, such as Aristotle recounts amongst the principles of a Natural Body: but only such a one as in itself is external and Accidental; yet concurring (as it were) Essentially to the constitution of the Terrestrial Sphere, whose Fabric and first composition, cannot well be understood without it. Some have imagined the whole Globe of the Earth to be informed with one Internal and Essential Form; which opinion seems to have much affinity with that of Plato's, concerning the Soul of the World: Not that Plato and his followers were so absurd to defend, that the World with all his parts was animated with a true vital Soul, in the nature of a living Creature: but that all the members of it were united together, quickened, and disposed by a certain energetical power or virtue, which had great resemblance and representation of the Soul of man. Which assertion seems to be restored and embraced by our late Magnetical Philosophers, whose opinion we shall discuss and examine hereafter in place convenient. In the mean time, grounding our discourse on known principles; we can admit no other Form in the Sphere of the Earth, than the mutual Harmony, order and consent of the parts, concurring together, and working the perfection & perpetuation of the whole. A fit resemblance whereof we may observe in an artificial Clock, Mill, or such like great Engine, wherein every part duly performing its own office, there will arise and result a natural Harmony, which not unaptly may be termed the Form of the whole Engine. Why the World should not consist of an Internal and Essential Form, sundry reasons have been alleged by our common Philosophers: First, because Nature never attempteth any thing in vain, or without a determinate end; But the particular Forms of special Bodies (say these Philosophers) are sufficient for the unity and conformation of this Terrestrial Globe: so that to grant an universal Form of the whole, were to multiply causes without any necessity, & make Nature the Mother of superfluity, which to all Philosophers seems most absurd. Secondly, if this were admitted; the whole Sphere of the Earth would be as one continuate Body, whose parts should (as it were) suffer a fellow-feeling one of the other. Thirdly, it were a difficult matter to assign, to what kind such a Form might be reduced, whether Animate, or Inanimate. If Inanimate, whether it were simple, or compound. If Animate, whether Vegetative, Sensitive, or Rational; under the which are couched many great difficulties, as yet undisclosed. Whether these reasons be of any great force to overthrow the adverse opinion, I leave it to further inquiry: intending here a Geographical, not a Physical Discourse. CHAP. II. Of the conformity of parts in the constitution of the Terrestrial Sphere. 1 IN the former we have treated of the Natural constitution of the Terrestrial Sphere, aswell in Matter as Form: It is needful in the next place to treat of such Affections and proprieties as necessarily arise out of such a Constitution. 2. Those Affections or Proprieties are of two sorts, Real or Imaginary; Real I call such as agree to the Terrestrial Globe by Nature▪ Imaginary, such as agree to it by virtue of our understanding. 3 Again the Affections Really or Naturally agreeing to the Terrene Sphere, are assigned either in respect of the Earth itself, or in respect of the Heavens. 4 These Affections are said to agree to the Earth in respect of itself, which may be expressed and understood without any comparing of it with the celestial Bodies. 5 These again are twofold; either Elementary, or Magnetical. Elementary I term such as have commonly been known or observed by ordinary Philosophers. Here is chiefly to be considered the conformity of the Terrestrial parts, in the making and constitution of the whole Sphere. In the former Chapter we have showed, that the Form of the Terrestrial Sphere, is nothing else but the concinnity and apt conspiration of the parts whereof the whole is compounded. This conformity being diverse and manifold, as well in regard of the parts conforming themselves, as the manner; of the conformity, we shall particularly and distinctly treat of, so far as appertains to a Cosmographer. Here by the way I cannot but tax some defect in most of our common Cosmographers, who taking the Spherical roundness of the Earth for a granted supposition, are nothing curious to search into the first grounds and causes of this rotundity, whereby it first became a globous Body; and afterwards retains in itself a Natural vigour or power (if any violence should be offered) to restore herself to her former right and perfection. All which are very pleasant & profitable, to give an industrious Learner some satisfaction. To explain this before we descend to particulars, we will lay this ground and Theorem; 1 The parts of the Terrestrial Sphere, do naturally conform and dispose themselves, aswell to the production and generation, as to the continuance and preservation of it. The form of the Terrestrial Sphere, albeit (as we have showed) it be external in respect of the whole Globe: yet may we call it natural; forasmuch as it issueth and ariseth from the natural disposition and inclination of all the parts. To understand which clause the better, we are to consider that a thing may be called Natural two manner of ways: first in regard of the primary intent of Nature; as the nearest and immediate end or scope to which she is directed. Secondly, in respect of her secundary intent or purpose, as that which must of necessity follow the former. True it is that every Terrene Body, according to Nature's first intention, seeks and works it's own perfection and conservation. Nevertheless according to her secundary Intent, it concurres to the perfection and good of the whole universe; which we shall plainly see in a stone or clodd of earth; which separated and removed from its mother, the Sphere of the Earth, by his descent and falling downwards, seeks first his own conservation, by reuniting itself to the Earth whence it was taken: Secondly, of the whole Globe of the Earth, which by this union and addition, no doubt, is made more complete and perfect. This conformity of the Terrestrial parts, out of which ariseth the Earth's Sphaericity; I call the natural inclination they have to move and settle themselves in such a site or position, as may bring forth a Spherical consistency: so that if it were possible (as what cannot be to God's Almighty power?) that the whole Globe of the earth were dissolved and rend into little pieces; yet were that vigour and motive inclination remaining in the parts, whereby they might settle and conform themselves to the same Spherical nature, and composition which it formerly enjoyed. For all the parts thus supposed to be distracted, would (no question) meet together & conform themselves to the same point or Centre; and so equally poising themselves, would restore the same Sphere so dissolved. So that we here note a double inclination and motion of earthly bodies; first by a Right line, of the parts tending towards the Centre; the other Spherical of the whole Sphere, whereof the first in nature precedes the composition of the Sphere, the other follows. But this latter motion I leave doubtful, till place convenient. 6 The conformity of the Terrene parts is twofold; Primarie, or Secondary. The former is that whereby all earthly bodies are by a right line carried and directed to the Centre of the Terrestrial Globe. As in an Artificial Sphere or circle, drawn by a Geometrician, their principal parts are expressed, to wit, the Centre, Ray, and circumference: so in the Natural Globe of the Earth, these three, as it were Naturally & Really discover themselves unto us. For first there is set a fixed point, to which all heavy bodies move and conform themselves. Secondly, there is set the line or Radius, in which such bodies are carried and conveyed. Thirdly, the confluence of all these parts, begets the roundness and Spherical form. To begin first with that which is first in nature, we will take these grounds. 1 All Earthly Bodies incline and approach to the Centre as near as they can. This proposition so far forth as it concerns the two Elements of Earth and Water, is confirmed by common experience, and therefore needs no long demonstration. For we see plainly, that not only these two do incline (as much as may be, all obstacles being removed) to the Centre of the Earth; but also all mixed bodies compounded of them, being overswayed with the most predominant element, do challenge to themselues the same motion. I say not that all these Terrestrial bodies drive & mee● in the Centre (for that were impossible, that all this massy Sphere should be contracted to one point) but that all the parts have a mutual inclination to approach as near the Centre, as the necessity of the place, and the concurrence of them amongst themselves will suffer. By these Terrestrial Bodies which enjoy this motion and inclination, we understand first the two Elements of Earth and Water, with all other bodies arising out of their mixture. To these I may add the Air, which by reason of his affinity with the Earth and Water, and natural comformity to the same Centre, we may well term an earthly body. It is commonly reported that the Air is l●ght, and therefore carried upwards, not inclining at all to the Centre of the Terrestrial Globe; as the parts of these two Elements are. But this assertion, although bolstered up, both with antiquity and authority; I take either to be false, or misunderstood, and that I speak no more herein than I can prove; I will produce some reasons (strong enough, as I think) to persuade that the Air is a heavy body, having a due inclination and conformity to the Centre of the Earth: First therefore will I produce this experiment. When a Well or deep Trench is digged up in the earth, I would willingly demand whether the Air descends to fill up this Trench or concavity; or else a void space is left unfurnished of any natural body to fill it? If they admit the latter, they will consequently bring in again that vacuum, or void space which Arist. and all sound Philosophers have long since proscribed the confines of nature. If they affirm the former, that the Air descends to fill up this empty space, I will ask again, whether this descent of the Air be violent or natural: If they say Natural, they admit our assertion, that the Air naturally descends towards the Centre, and so by consequence that it is heavy and not light by nature. Neither according to our Peripateticall-Philosophy can we ascribe more than one motion to the Air, because it is a ground generally received among Aristoteleans: that One simple body can claim but one simple motion: much less one simple form, as that of the Air, can produce two opposite and contrary motions, such as are Ascent and Descent of the same body. If they chance to light on the other member of our distinction, and say that the motion of the Air in this sort is violent, it must needs follow, that it must have some external cause or principle whence it should proceed; because all such motions proceed from external causes. But here no such cause can be assigned: For the cause would be either the Earth which is so made hollow, or the emptiness, or vacuum, or at least the other parts of the Air. That it is not the Earth, may be proved; first because no Philosopher hath ever showed any such Attractive power to reside in the Earth, but rather the contrary; because the Earth and Air by most have been thought opposite in nature, and repugnant one to the other. Secondly, because Philosophy teacheth, that no agent can work upon a separate and distinct patient, except there be a meeting of the Agent and Patient in some means▪ But hear in this supposition, the Earth is imagined to draw and attract the Air, which as yet it toucheth not. That this external cause is not the Vacuum or Emptiness, is plain; because it was never granted to have any being or existence, much less any causality in nature. Some perhaps will say, that not the vacuum itself, but the evitation and avoiding it, is the cause of the motion. I deny not but this may in some sort be interpreted a cause, but the doubt is not answered: For we seek not a Final but an Efficient cause; and a curious searcher into Nature, will hardly rest in a mere final cause. For the final cause, so far forth as it is a cause preceding the effect, can no otherwise be conceived than in the intention of the Agent: then must enquiry be made again what the Agent should be, and so will the problem rest uncleered. 1. Because one parcel of the Air could not move another, except the same were first moved itself, and so a new Agent must of necessity be found out. 2 The Agent and the thing moved or Patient, aught to be two separate and distinct bodies: But the parts of the air meeting together, become one continuate body. No shift is there left for these Philosophers but one distinction, wherein they distinguish betwixt the Universal and Special form, The Air, as they affirm, according to his Special form, ascends upward from the Centre of the Earth: yet by the Universal, for the conservation of the whole universe, it may sometimes suffer a contrary motion, as to move downward toward the Centre. In which distinction they suppose they have cut the throat of all contrary reasons. But who so understands himself, shall find it but as a weak reed, to hurt his hand which rests on it: for a second enquiry will be made, what this universal form should be. For by it they understand of necessity either an Internal form or Nature; or an external resultancy and harmony of the parts, such as we have described in the first Chapter of this book. If they understand this latter, it cannot any way be a cause of this motion; because it follows and ariseth out of this motion concurring with the rest, and no way precedes it: whereas on the contrary part every cause is to go before his effect: Secondly, this universal form or nature compared with the special, there would arise a Subordination, and not a Coordination, or opposition; forasmuch as the special is subordinate to the general or universal. But subordinate causes can produce no other than subordinate eff●●ts. But here we see the effects or motions to be quite opposite the one to the other; in as much as the motion of Descent in the Air (which they ascribe to the universal form) is clean opposite to the motion of Ascent, ascribed to the special nature. Thirdly, these Philosophers urging the necessity of Nature to preserve the Universe, are much deceived in the manner and means thereof. True it is that all Earthly and heavy bodies are directed and disposed to the conservation of the earthly Globe. But every such body (as we have showed before) seeks first the safeguard and preservation of itself, and secondarily by the safeguard of itself the preservation of the whole. For how can any part, when it neglects its own safety, endeavour the preservation of the whole: sith the whole is but one compounded of many parts. And therefore can it not be avoided, but that the disorders and disharmony of one part▪ should prejudice and destroy the whole frame. If they turn to the other part, and grant this universal form to be Internal, many reasons stand opposite. For first I would demand, whether this universal form be simple or compounded. It cannot be simple, because it would always produce one simple and uniform effect: but experience hath t●ught the contrary; because we shall not always find the air to descend, but sometimes to move obliquely to the left or right hand, backward and forward; as when it enters into the house by a door or window. On the other side, it cannot well be called a compound form; because all forms the more universal they are, the more simple they are to be accounted: because the special includes more composition than the general. Moreover, all compounded substance arise out of simples, which are to be esteemed first in nature. Secondly, I would ask whether this universal form be una numero, the self same individual in all the parts and bodies; or divers, according to the diversity of the said Bodies. It cannot be one and the self same in all bodies, because, according to the opinion of Aristotle, the whole universe is not one continuate body composed of essential parts; but rather a heap or mass collected and digested out of many bodies. Secondly, the form being thus one individual, would be singular or special, not universal. If they affirm that this form is divers according to the diversity of the bodies, it cannot be the cause of this motion or descent in the Air. For this motion (as they suppose) is destined and appointed to no other end, than to comfort Nature in her distress, when she stands in fear of rupture or dissolution. But how can this form being bounded within the limits of the Aerial superficies perceive or feel this exigence of Nature in other Bodies? Whatsoever they can say in this, is altogether uncertain, and not warranted by any sound demonstration. A second reason for the natural descent of the Air, may be drawn from a possible supposition; from which we may enforce a true conclusion. Let us suppose a portion of Air by some violence to be carried above his proper orb; as for example, to the space which by our common Philosophers is ascribed to the Element of Fire, near the concave superficies of the Moon, I would here demand whether this portion of Air thus transposed would ascend higher, or descend lower, or rest still in the same place? It could not ascend higher; first because in this wise it should be moved farther out of his own place, whereas according to the principles of Philosophy, all bodies transposed from their proper places, have an aptness or inclination to return again to their proper seats, and not to rove farther off. Secondly, this granted, the Air should invade the place of the fire and so the Elements should suffer a confusion; which Aristotle holds absurd. Thirdly, there cannot be imagined in that higher orb any point or centre, to which it should direct his motion; and therefore there is no such motion found; or it must be very irregular. If on the other side it were granted, that such a portion of Air so separated, should descend; I ask again, whether they hold this motion natural or violent: It cannot be a violent motion, because it is directed to his own natural and proper place; and this motion in the Elements, is always accounted natural. Last of all, it cannot rest still in the same place, because all bodies forced out of their places (all obstacles being removed) must needs return unto their proper place. Wherefore no other starting hole is here left to our opposites, but that they grant a natural motion, and so consequently yield to our assertion. A third reason may here be drawn from the condensation of the Air. It is a received opinion amongst most Philosophers, that the thin and subtle parts of the Air will naturally mount upward; but the thicker and condensated parts, pitch and settle themselves downward: Which observation, if it be true, will yield us this conclusion. That the Air is by nature heavy, and therefore moveth downward, toward the centre of the Spherical Globe of the Earth. Which I will demonstrate out of these Principles, 1 That that body, which by addition of parts or condensation, is made more heavy or ponderous, must needs have some weight in itself. This may easily appear, because the mixture of lightness with heaviness will not intend and increase the ponderosity, but slack and diminish it. For the chiefest thing which remits or diminisheth any quality, is the mixture of his contrary, as we see the quality of cold to be abated and weakened if it entertain any mixture of heat: 2 The thickening or condensation of any body is made by addition and coaction of more parts into the same space or compass. As if the Air or any such like body were thickened, it would confine itself to a more narrow room then before, and so consequenly the narrow room would contain more parts than before. Out of which we conclude, that forasmuch as many parts pressed together in the same space, make the whole mass more ponderous; these parts so pressed together, must needs have some weight in themselves. Which may further be illustrated; because the intention of the quality commonly follows the condensation of the subject: Which may easily appear in red-hot-iron, which burns and scorcheth more than flame or coals; because every part hath more degrees or heat. Now where more parts are closely pressed together, the heat must needs be more fervent. I have dwelled longer on this subject, because I would not seem to broach a new opinion without sufficient reason. To conclude all, and come as near the received opinion as I can; I will say, that the Air may be considered two ways; first absolutely in itself; secondly in comparison of heavier bodies, to wit, the Earth and Water. In the first sense I grant no absolute lightness in the Air; because out of his natural inclination, it tends as near as it can to the centre, as all other lower bodies. But if we consider it comparatively in respect of other heavier bodies, we may call it light, that is, less heavy or ponderous. So that by lightness we understand no absolute lightness, but a privation. The sum of all we have hitherto proved, is this; That all terrene bodies, as Earth, Water, Aire, and other mixed bodies which concur to the composition of the Earthly Sphere, as near as they can, settle and conform themselves to the centre of the Earth; which site or position of them to the centre, is their true and natural place, wherein they seek their preservation. 2 Of two heavy Bodies striving for the same place, that always prevaileth which is heaviest. 3 Hence it comes to pass that the Earth enjoys the lowest place, the next the Water, and the last the Air. The increment or increase of any effect, must necessarily arise from the greater vigour or efficacy of the efficient cause, as both Reason and Philosophy well teach. Now (as we have showed) all heavy bodies naturally do descend downward, out of a natural inclination they have to attain the centre: but where there is a greater weight or constipation of ponderous parts in the same mass, there must needs proceed a greater inclination: Supposing then the Earth, Water, and Air, being three weighty bodies to incline and dispose themselves to their uttermost force to enclose and engirt the centre of the Terrestrial Sphere; it must needs be that the Earth being the most compact and ponderous, must obtain the pre-eminence; next to which succeeds the Water, than the Air, being of all other the least ponderous. Yet we deny not but the Water and Aire being settled in this wise, are in their natural places; which to understand, we must repeat what we said before, that Nature hath a twofold intention; the one primary, the other secondary. Indeed if we consider Nature's primary or special inclination in the bodies themselves, we shall find them (as we said) immediately directed to the centre as near as might be: but the secondary intent of Nature was, that the bodies should so settle and conform themselves, as that each of them should obtain a place according to his degree of massiness and weight. Out of this may be answered a certain objection which some have produced, to prove the Air to be absolutely light in his own nature. Experience teacheth us (say these men) that a bladder blown up with wind, or an empty barrel being by force kept under water▪ the force and obstacle omitted, will suddenly ascend to the top; and that a man ready to sink in the Water, will not so easily sink down while he can hold his breath: all which effects they ascribe to no other cause, than to inclination of the Air to move upwards from the centre. But indeed this motion, howbeit agreeable to the universal nature and consistency of the Sphere, is notwithstanding in respect of the Air itself, unnatural and violent; because this ascent of it is not caused by the form of the Air, but the interposition of a heavier body striving for the same place, and so reverberating it back from the place, whereunto it tended. For here is to be imagined, that the bladder or empty barrel drowned in the water, claims and enjoys for the time that place or distance, which otherwise so much water should occupy; to wit, so many inches of feet from one side to the other. No marvel then that obstacles removed, the Water being most ponderous and weighty, receives his own right; and (as it were) shoulders out the Air, and violently drives it off to his own habitation. Whence many have imagined that this motion is proper and natural to the Air, when of itself it is merely violent, and enforced by the interjection of another body more weighty and ponderous than itself. 7 this conformity of the Terrestrial parts, two things are to be observed: 1 The centre itself: 2 The parts which conform themselves unto it. The Centre is an imaginary point in the midst of the Terrestrial Globe, to which all the parts are conformed. The Fathers of the Mathematical Sciences, have laboured to derive all their doctrine from a point, as the first and most simple principle whereon all the rest depend. Not that they imagine a point to be any positive entity in itself; but because it is the first bound of magnitude, whence all terminated quantities take their original. The first principle we may call it, not of natural constitution, because a thousand points collected, could not be so compounded, as out of it should arise the least magnitude; for (as the Philosopher hath taught us) continuate and divisible things cannot be made out of such things as are merely discontinuate and indivisible, but because it is the first Mathematical principle or beginning of termination and figuration. This point, although it have everywhere an use in Geometry, yet nowhere more remarkable than when it becomes the centre of a circle: which centre we ought not to imagine a mere Geometrical conceit, but such as finds ground in the Natural constitution of the Terrestrial Sphere. For seeing all terrene bodies are carried in a right line as by a Radius to one point, from every part of the circumference; we may observe a centre as it were designed and pointed out by Nature itself in the Globe: Some have here distinguished betwixt a point Physical, and a point Mathematical, as allotting the former Latitude, and sensible existence; but making the other merely Indivisible. But if the matter be rightly understood, they are not two points, but all one, distinguished only by a diverse name of conceit or consideration. For we consider first a point as it is existent in a sensible particular body, and so we call it Physical. Secondly we abstract it from this or that body sensible; but always conceit it withal to be in some body, and in this sort we term it Mathematical: for the Mathematician abstracts not a Quantity or Quantitative sign from all subjects; for so being an accident, he should conceive it abstracted from its own nature; but from this or that sensible body, as wood or stone. Such a point ought we to imagine the centre of the Earth to be, not participating of any latitude or magnitude, albeit existent in some magnitude. I am not ignorant that some Writers have taken a Physical point for a small and insensible magnitude, in which sense the Globe of the Earth is called the centre of all heavenly motions. But this sense is very improper; and beside in this example is to be understood a point optical, as such as carries no sensible or proportionable quantity in regard of the sight. Taking then the centre of the Earth to be a point fixed in the midst of the Earthly Sphere, as we have described, we will further describe the nature of it in two Theorems. 1 The centre of the Earth is not an Attractive, but a mere Respective point. An Attractive point I term that, which hath in it a virtue or power to draw and attract the Terrestrial parts or bodies, in such sort as the Loadstone hath a power to draw iron or steel. But a Respective point is that, which the Bodies in their motions do respect and conform themselves unto, as the bound or centre to which their course is directed. Which may be illustrated by the directive operations of the Loadstone (which we shall hereafter handle) by which the Magnetical Indix or needle pointeth directly Northward: not that in the North is fixed any Attractive virtue or operation, whic● might cause that effect; but because the Magnetical Instrument is directed towards such a point or centre. That the Centre of the earth hath no Attractive force, may be proved, 1 Because it cannot in any probability be thought that an Imaginary point having only a privative Being and subsistence, should challenge to itself any such operation. For all positive effects, proceed out of positive causes, neither can it be imagined that this Attraction should grow out of a mere privation. Secondly, should this be granted, that the motion of Earthly parts should be from the Attractive virtue of the Centre; it would follow necessarily, that this motion should not be Natural, but violent: as proceeding from an external cause, which all ancient and modern Philosophers deny. 2 The same point is the centre of Magnitude and weight in the Terrestrial Sphere. That the same point in the Terrene Globe, should make the centre both of Magnitude and Weight, may seem very plain: 1 Because we are not to multiply things and Entities in our conceit, without any necessary consequence drawn from Nature or Reason; enforcing us thereunto. But what reason could ever persuade any man, that the Earth had two Centres, the one of Weight, the other of Magnitude, but only a bare Imagination, without proof or demonstration. Secondly, if this were granted, that the Centre of magnitude were removed some distance from the other; then consequently would one part of the Earth overpoize the other in ponderosity, and so the whole Sphere would either be shaken out of its place, or dissolve itself into its first principles. Both of which being by experience contradicted, our assertion will stand sure and undoubted. In the mean space, we deny not but that some little difference may be admitted in regard of the unequal parts of the Earth; but this must needs be so small and insensible as cannot be cacullated, or cause any alteration. 8 The Terrene parts conforming themselves to this centre, may be considered two ways: either Absolutely, or Comparatively. Absolutely, as every part is considered in itself. 9 A terrestrial part considered in itself, undergoes the respect either of a Point of Magnitude; as a point, when any sign or point in itself is considered in regard of his conformity to the centre. A Point, albeit existing still in some magnitude (as we have showed) may notwithstanding be abstracted from this or that body, as serving for the centre of any body, whose natural inclination and conformity to the universal centre of the Earth, we may in the first place handle, as the Rule by which the motion and inclination of the whole magnitude ought to be squared. 1 Every point or centre of weighty body, is moved toward the centre of the Terrestrial Sphere by a right line. A Right line is the measure and rule almost of all Natural actions: which albeit it be familiar in almost every operation; yet most of all in the motion of the Earthly bodies tending to the centre of the Earth. Why Nature in this kind should chiefly affect a Right line, sundry reasons may be alleged: 1 From the End which Nature doth propose itself, which is to produce the work which she intends, the readiest and shortest way; as Aristotle testifies of her in the 5 of his Metaphysics. Now it is manifest that a Right line drawn betwixt the same points, is always shortest, as Euclid shows in his Elements; where he demonstrates that two sides of any triangle being counted together, are longer than the third. The better to understand the working of Nature, we shall observe in the motion of a heavy part to the centre, a double scope or end; first, that the said part of a terrestrial body, should be moved or separated from the place to which it is by violence transposed. Secondly, that this body should be restored home, and united to the Spherical substance of the Earth, in which it must chiefly seek its preservation. That these two ends are best and soon compassed by a right line is most manifest: For first a sepaparation from the place to which it is moved, is more quick & expedient by a right line; forasmuch as crooked and circular lines, turn back as it were into themselves again. Also the union and conjunction of a part with the Sphere of the Earth, is most indebted to a right motion, because (as we have declared) the way is shorter. Secondly, it may be alleged, that Nature is an uniform and necessary Agent, restrained to one only bound or end, and therefore can neither strengthen, weaken, remit or suspend the action, but works always by the same means, the same effects; whence it is that she chooseth a right line, being but one betwixt two points; whereas crooked lines may be drawn infinite, and the motion directed by crooked lines would prove various and opposite to the prescript of Nature▪ Moreover should we imagine that nature at any time wrought by a crooked or circular line, it might be demanded, from what Agent this obliquity should arise? not from Nature itself: because (as we said) she worketh always to the utmost of her strength, having no power to remit or suspend her actio●s. But a crooked motion ariseth from the remission or slacking of the Agents force, and turning it away from the intended end, which only finds place in Free and voluntary Agents. Neither comes this Deflexion from the medium, or Air; because it can have no such power to resist. Thirdly, if the motion were not performed in a right line, it could have no opposite or contrary; because (as Aristotle teacheth) To a circular or crooked motion, 〈◊〉 de caelo cap. 4. no other motion can be opposite or contrary in respect of the whole circle; but only in regard of the Diameter, which is always a right line. By this it is plain, that a weighty point considered in itself abstractly, cannot but be carried to the centre in a right line: which right line, really and Physically points out unto us a Radius or Beam drawn from the centre to the circumference, to show that the God of Nature in composing the earthly globe, both observed and taught us the use of Geometry. 2 A point moving toward the Centre, will move swifter in the end, then in the beginning. This hath been plainly observed by experience, that a stone let fall from a tower or high place, will in motion grow swifter and swifter, till it approach the ground or place whereon it falls. The reason may be given from the Air, which resist so much the less, by how much the body descendeth lower toward the Earth or centre; because when it is higher, the distance being greater, the parts of the Air will make more Resistance. The reason rendered by Aristotle of this Resistance, is, because in the beginning of the motion, the stone or heavy body finds the Air quiet and fixed: but being once set on motion, the higher parts of the Air, successively move those which are under, being driven by the violence of the stone so falling, and prepare, as it were, the way for his coming. This reason may in some sort content an ingenious wit, till a better be found out. 10 So much for the motion of a heavy point or centre: it remains that we treat next of the motions and conformity of Magnitudes to the centre of the Earth: wherein we consider not only the Centre or middle point, but the whole mass of the magnitude, whose motion and conformity shall be expressed in this Theorem; 1 The motion of a magnitude toward the centre, is not merely natural, but mixed with a violent motion: This may easily be demonstrated; because no point of any magnitude is moved to the Centre naturally, but the middle point or centre of the magnitude: For although the Centre be moved in a perpendicular line, which makes right angles with the Horizon; yet the extreme parts are moved in lines parallel, which cannot possibly make right angles with the Horizon, or meet in the Centre; which may be shown in this Figure. Let there be a Circle as ABL. This done, we will imagine a certain magnitude hanging in the Air, and tending to the Centre C, which is signified by the line PEN. It is certain that the Centre of the magnitude E, will move and conform itself downward toward the centre of the Earth by the line EC, which motion will be natural, as that which is derived to a centre from a circumference by the direct Radius, which is the Rule of all natural motions: But the other parts without the centre of this magnitude, cannot move but in so many lines, which shall be parallel the one to the other: as for example, the point N must needs move in the line NG, and the point P in the line PF, which being of equal distance, will never concur in the Centre, and therefore cannot be esteemed natural rays of the circle; whence we may collect, that the motion of these parts is not natural, but violent: for if any should imagine the motion of these parts to be natural, then should the point N move to the centre of the Earth by the line NC, and the point P. by the line PC; and so by how much the more any weighty body should approach the Centre of the Earth, by so much it should be diminished and curtailed in his quantity: so that in the Centre itself, all the parts should concur in an Indivisible point, which is absurd & contradicts all reason. 11 Hitherto have we spoken of the conformity of all Earthly and weighty bodies to the Terrene centre, as they are taken Absolutely. It now remains that we speak of these bodies as they are taken comparatively, being compared one with the other. This discourse properly belongs to an art which is called Staticke and Mathematical; whose office is to demonstrate the affections of Heaviness and Lightness of all Bodies out of their causes. The chief sensible Instrument whereon these properties are demonstrated and shown, is the Bilanz or Ballance. But these specialties we leave to such as have purposely written of this subject: amongst which the most ancient and chief is Archimedes, whose heavenly wit overtook all such as went before him, and outwent all such as followed. Enough it will seem in this Treatise to insert a proposition or two statical, to show the Conformity of two magnitudes, and their proper Centre, moving downward toward the Globe of the Earth, and its Centre. 1 The lines wherein the centres of two heavy bodies are moved downward, being continued, will meet in the Centre of the Earth. A heavy point or Centre (as we have demonstrated heretofore in this Chapter) is moved toward the Centre of the world in a right line, which is imagined to be a Ray of the whole Sphere derived from the circumference to the Centre, & therefore it is impossible they should be parallel or Equidistant, but concurrent lines. But because the whole distance betwixt us and the Centre is very great; it must needs happen that in a small space the concourse of perpendicular lines is altogether insensible. For if two perpendicular or heavy points moved in a line, should be distant one from the other the space of 10, a 100 or more feet; because this distance is very little in respect of the semidiameter of the Earth: the angle of concourse must needs be very little, and by consequence those two rays or lines, measuring the descent of two heavy Bodies, will seem altogether Equidistant. Yet that there is such a concurrence, Nature and Reason will easily consent. Hence we may detect a popular error believed of the vulgar, that the walls of houses standing upright are parallel and of equal distance; when chose it is plain that such walls are erected by a perpendicular, and measured by perpendicular lines, which being drawn out in length will meet in the Centre of the Earth. The like may we pronounce of a deep Well, whose sides or wall are erected perpendicularly; and therefore should it reach as far as the Centre, it must needs follow that the sides growing nearer and nearer as they approach the Centre, would in the end close or shut up into a Pyramid, whose Base should be the mouth of the Well. Likewise if a Tower should be erected to the Heavens, it would be strange to imagine, how great and broad the upper part of it would be in respect of the bottom. Hence again it may be inferred, that any pavement leveled by a perpendicular is not an absolute plain, but rather the portion or Arch of a spherical superficies, whose Centre is the same with the Centre of the whole Earth. But this roundness in a small distance is no way sensible: but in a great pavement of four or five hundred paces leveled perpendicularly; it will make some show of roundness: whence it must needs follow, that an extraordinary great pavement measured over by a right line, cannot be called level or equally poized, forasmuch as it is not every where equally distant from the Centre of the Earthly Globe. 2 Two heavy bodies of the same figure and matter whether Equal or Unequal, will in equal time move an equal space. This proposition being invented by one johannes Baptist de Benedictis, is cited and confirmed by john Dee, in his Mathematical Preface to Billing slie's Geometry; Which corrects a common error of those men, which suppose the lighter bodies generally not to move so fast downward to the Centre as the heavy. The demonstration of this Theorem, being drawn from many statical principles, which we cannot here conveniently insert, we are enforced to omit: as intending not the search of these matters any farther than they direct unto the knowledge of Geographie. Yet were it no hard matter to give ● more popular expression of this reason out of the proportion betwixt this weight of the heavy Body, and the Resistance of the Medium. Because the Greater Body, as it is carried downward by a greater force and violence; so on the other side it meets a greater impediment, being not able so soon to divide the Air, as the Lesser: Likewise the Lesser body falling with less force, yet is more apt to divide it then the other. Whence both set the one against the other, there will be no disparity in the time and motion. 12 Of the primary conformity of the Terrestrial bodies in the constitution of the Terrestrial Sphere, we have treated: It now seems needful that we descend to the secondary, which is the inclination of all the parts, to make a round Sphere or Globe. 1 The Terrestrial Globe is round and Spherical. This Proposition is of great use, and one of the chief●●● grounds in Geographie. The ground of the Spherical figure of the Earth, is the right motion of heavy bodies to the centre. For this right motion (as we have showed) doth express one Beam of the circle, by whose circumvolution is produced the circumference of i●, which we call Secundary conformity of the parts of the Earth; in so much as it grows Mathematically (as it were) out of the first. For this Spherical figure of the Earth, sundry sound reasons are urged by Geographers: First, that the Earth is round according to its Latitude, that is, from North to South▪ Secondly, according to its Longitude, that is, from East to West, and therefore must it needs be absolutely Spherical▪ The first part is showed, that it is round from N●rth to South; for if a man travel from North to South, or chose from South to North, he shall perceive n●w stars in the Heavens to appear and show themselves, which before h●e could not see: which can be referred to no other cause then the Spherical convexity, or swelling of the Earth. As for example▪ The star which is called Canopus, which is a notable star in the ship; appears not at Rhodes, or at least from high places. But if you travel forth Southward from Italy into Egypt, to Alexandria, the same star (Proclus observes) will manifest itself to your sight the fourth part of a sign above the Horizon. L. de Sphaer. From whence we may draw a sound proof, that there is a Spherical and gibbous convexity, which interposeth itself betwixt Rhodes and Egypt. In which place, the people who inhabit that part of Egypt, which borders upon Arabia, which are called Troglo●ites, of their dwelling in caves, cannot see any Star of the Great Bear. Whence we may conclu●e, that the Earth from the North to the South, is round and Spherical. For if otherwise the Earth were plain, all the Northern stars would appear to the inhabitants of the Southern Regions; and on the other side, all the other Southern constellations would be seen of the Northern inhabitants, which sense and reason altogether contradict. Secondly, that the Earth is round according to its Longitude betwixt East and West, may be proved by two reasons. The first is taken from the rising and setting of the Sun, Moon, and other Stars, for as much as all they do not arise or set with all Nations at the same hours. For with the inhabitants of the East, the Sunrising is sooner; with the Western inhabitants later; and that in such proportion, that every 15 degrees measured out by the Sun's diurnal motion, adds or subtracts one whole hour in the length of the day. This is found by experience and testimony of Cosmographers, that the Sun riseth with the Persian, inhabiting toward the East, four hours sooner than to the Spaniard in the West. Sundry other the like examples may be alleged; all which we must needs impute to the Spherical roundness of the Earth, proportionally increasing betwixt East and West. The other reason to confirm this last point, is drawn from the Eclipses of the Sun and Moon, which would not appear in diverse places, at diverse hours, if the Earth were plain or square. We see plainly that Eclipses of the Moon appear sooner to the Western people, but later to the Eastern. As (according to Ptolemy) in Arbela a town of Assyria (where Alexander overcame Darius the last King of the Persians) was there observed an Eclipse at the fifth hour of the night, Lib. 1 geog. cap. 4. which selfsame Eclipse was seen in Carthage at the second: which to any man appears plainly in this figure here inserted. In like manner an Eclipse of the Sun at Campania which was observed betwixt 8 and 9 was (as Pliny reports) seen in Armenia betwixt 10 and 11 of the clock. Lib. 2. c. 72. Whence may be gathered that this difference of appearance arose from the roundness of the Earth, interposing itself betwixt these two places. Another reason to prove the Spericall figure of the Earth, is drawn from the Eclipse of the Moon, wherein the obscured point is described by a Spherical figure, which must needs argue, that the body which causeth the shadow, is also round. For as the Optickes teach us, the shadow is wont to follow and imitate the opacous body whence it proceeds, and all men confess that the Eclipse of the Moon is made by the interposition of the Sphere of the Earth betwixt the Sun & Moon, intercepting the beams of the Sun, which should illustrate & lighten the Moon. The third reason may be taken from the absurdities which would follow, should we admit any other figure beside. For granting it to be plain (as some of the Platonists have imagined) it would necessarily follow in reason; 1 That the Elevation of the Pole would be the same in all the parts of the Earth. 2 That there Would be the same face and appearance of the Heavens in all places. 3 That the Sun and Moon, with other stars, would in all places arise alike at the same hours. 4 That all Eclipses would appear to all places at the same hours. 5 That the same quantity of days & nights would be at all places. 6 That the shadows would be every where alike; and one Region would not be hotter or colder than another; all which would plainly stand opposite to reason and experience. As many or more would prove the absurdities of those, that ascribe to the Earth any other figure then Spherical. Which I willingly pass over, as not willing to fight with shadows, and feign an opposition, where I scarce find an adversary. These reasons are sufficient to prove, that the whole mass of the Earth is Spherical. divers other popular arguments may be drawn from the final cause to countenance this Assertion. For no other figure can be assigned to the Earth, which can more uphold the order of Nature, or speak the wisdom of the Omnipotent Creator. 1 Because such a Figure would best beseem the Earth, the seat and dwelling-place of all living Creatures, which is most capable: because otherwise the God of Nature would seem to do something in vain, and without cause: Forasmuch as the same capacity might be confined within stricter bounds. Now it is apparent to all Mathematicians, that amongst all those figures which they call Isoper●●etrall, a Circle is the most capable, and amongst the rest, those which approach nearest unto a circle. And as we esteem of a circle described in a plain surface, so must we judge in solides of a Sphere. Which profitable Geometry of Nature we shall find instilled into most living Creatures, who by a certain Natural Instinct, without the use of Reason, make their Nests and resting-places of a Spherical Figure, as most convenient, and of greatest capacity; as experience shows us, in the Nests of Birds, and Bee-hives, wherein the cells are fashioned round & Spherical. 2 We shall find the holy Scriptures consonant to this opinion in diverse places; but that it might seem impiety to use those sacred helps in a matter out of controversy, and needing no such Demonstration. 2 The rugged and unequal parts of the Earth, hinder not the Spherical roundness of it. It is thought by ignorant people, that the Earth is not round, because of the rugged and uneven parts of the superficies of it: For somewhere it swells with great and high mountains, rocks, and hills; Otherwhere it seems indented, and (as it were) trenched into valleys, & concavities; all which seem to detract from a true Spherical superficies; because in such a one, every line drawn from the Centre to it, should be equal one to the other. Indeed that the Globe of the Earth is not Absolutely and Geometrically round, as an Artificial Sphere, is confessed by Eratosthenes, cited by Strabo in his 1 book of Geographie▪ whence Pliny in his ● book, cap. 21. saith, Lib. 1. that the Earth & Water make one Globe, not so absolutely round as the Heavens, but much different, 〈◊〉 also Strabo confirms. This proposition depending on these 3 reasons which follow, will show that this Inequality, how great soever it seem to the sight, is altogether insensible, and bearing no proportion with the huge vastness of the whole Earth. The first is taken from the perpendicular height of the greatest and highest mountain, which is seldom or never found to exceed 10 miles, (although few Mathematicians will grant so much) whereas the whole Diameter of the Earth contains no less th●n 7200 English miles; so that these hills compared to the thickness of the Earth are but ●s 10 to 7200: which indeed hath no sensible proportion. The second is taken from the Eclipse of the Moon, which being caused by the shadow of the interposed Earth, is described by a Spherical figure, without any unequal or rugged parts, which no doubt, would appear, if these parts challenge any due proportion▪ or sensible quantity, in respect of the whole Earth. Thirdly, some have illustrated this by a round bowl, or ball, whose external surface, although unequal, and indented here & there with scotches, otherwhere swelling with knobs, will notwithstanding being interposed betwixt the Sunbeam and a wall, or such place, give a round or Spherical shadow in the same wall or plain, in regard of the little quantity of these small parts in respect of the whole Body. In like sort must we imagine the mountains and unequal parts in the face of the Earth, to be no otherwise then as so many warts or pimples in the face of man, which cannot alter his du● proportion or symmetry of the parts. 3 The Water concurring with the Earth in the Globe is also Spherical. It is a proposition agreed on by Archimedes, and almost all the ancient Mathematicians of any note, that the superficies of the Water, or any other liquor, standing and subsisting quietly of it self, is Spherical; whose centre will be the same with the centre of the whole Earth, which we are here to handle, because it appertains to the making up of the Terrestrial Globe; although we shall have occasion hereafter to speak specially concerning the Water in hydrography, in the second part of this Treatise. The reasons to confirm this assertion, beside those that in general prove the Sphericity of the Terrene globe are diverse: 1 It is observe that Passengers in a Ship, launching out into the deep from some Haven, will first perceive the Towers, Buildings, Castles, Promontories, and Trees standing on the land, in their perfect figure and greatness: sailing farther off, they will observe them on the lower part, little & little diminished, until such time as the tops only of the houses and trees will be visible. In like sort they which tarry on the Land, will first espy the top and mas● of a Ship approaching, which sight will be perfected more and more, as the Ship draws toward the land, and at last all parts of it will show themselves; which accident can be cast upon no other cause, than the Spherical roundness, and swelling of the water; which, if the distance be great, interposeth itself between the station on the Land and the Ship wherein Passengers are conveyed, which experiment is expressed in this Diagramme here annexed. Certain Platonics, of which the chiefest is Patricius a late Writer, would ascribe this experiment to the impediment of the sight, caused partly by the distance which cannot perfectly represent the object, partly by the interposed vapours arising in the Sea; partly by the quivering light which is spread by the refraction of the Sunbeams in the water. I deny not but these causes may somewhat hinder, and cause that the true and perfect species of a body cannot always visit the sight. Yet will it be evident that this is not all, but that the Spherical roundness of the water will prove a greater impediment where the distance is any thing greater. But for one of Patricius his shifts concerning vapour arising out of the Sea, (to which Clavius seems also to consent in his Commentary upon johannes de Sacrobosco) it makes more for our assertion than his. For that which is seen in a thick medium, according to the doctrine of the Optics, seems greater in quantity, and by consequence nearer, and so higher than would otherwise appear: as we see by experience, that the Sun sometimes is seen of us before it ascend above the Horizon, because of a refraction of its beams in a thick matter. Wherefore it were rather to be imagined, that a tower seen at Sea, or a ship from the land, through these thick and gross vapours, should appear higher, and seem nearer then if it met not with such vapours. Secondly, what is urged concerning the trembling light, caused by a refraction of the Sunbeams in the water, is of no force: For although such a light might cause an impediment or hindrance to the sight; yet would not this decrement or hindrance be by degrees and in such proportion as we find it to be correspondent, to wit, to the distance interposed. And much wonder it is that Patricius (as my learned Friend Mr R. Hues observes) being, as it seems very well read in the stories of Spanish navigations, should not be convinced out of the Navigation of Magellane, who taking his journey toward the South-west parts, passed by the Magellane straits, now called by his name, and so returned by the Cape of Good Hope into Spain, to which we way add the voyages of Drake, Candish, and many others. The second reason is urged by Aristotle in his 2d book de coelo, and hath its ground in Archimedes lib. 1. de Aqua-vectis, which is form in this sort. The nature of the water is to affect and flow to the lower place, whence it must necessarily be inferred that it must be round, for otherwise it should not always obtain the lower place. The reason of the consequence shall be expressed in this figure; for if we ascribe to the water a plain superficies, let it for example be ADB, and from the centre of the earth C let there be described a circle, to wit, EGF, then let there be drawn CD, a perpendicular line to AB, and let AC and BC be joined together. Now because the right line CD is less then CA, or CB, as will appear evidently by sense; it will be plain that the point D will be in a lower place than the point A or B, because D is nearer to the Centre; for as much as DC is but a part of a beam of the circle whereas AC and CB evidently exceed that quantity or proportion. Another reason there is, commonly drawn from the roundness of drops cast on the sand, as also from water in pots, whose superficies seems to swell above the brims; but this reason, as we shall prove in place convenient, is rather against this assertion then for it; because indeed, we affirm the water to be round▪ but so as it claims the same Centre with the Centre of the Terrene Globe; and therefore cannot be sensible in so little a portion, as a drop, or pot of water. This proposition being sufficiently proved by these two reasons; it is needful in the second place that we answer certain objections cast in by the said Patricius against our assertion. Every surface of the water (quoth Patricius) is either only plain, or only round, or both plain and round, or neither plain nor round: First that it is not both plain and round, seems very evident, for so it should admit of contrariety: Neither can one part be plain and another round, because the water is an uniform and homogeneal body, not consisting of such unequal parts: that it should neither be plain nor round seems more impossible, because f●w or none have dreamt of any other figure. Lastly, that it is not round only, he labours to confirm by sundry reasons and experiments. First, he testifies of himself, that sailing in the Sea, he plainly ●aw in the morning before Sunrising, the Mountains of Corsica; which afterward, as soon as the Sun was risen, vanished out of his sight. Whence he concludes, that this proceeds not from the roundness of the Earth, but from some other cause. But this argument to judicious men will seem very weak, 1 Because it depends altogether on the authority and credit of Patricius, whose assertion I take to be no better than another man's denial. 2ly were this argument every where sound, yet would it prove no other thing, but that this effect were not to be imputed to the Spherical swelling of the Earth. Whence cannot be drawn any general conclusion, that the Earth or Water is not Spherical. We deny not in the mean time▪ that other causes sometimes concur, which may hinder or take away the sight of objects from those who sail on the Sea. The second experiment, Patricius describes in this manner. At a certain Town called Coma●lum (saith he) there is a very great pool; through which pool or lake some 3 years ago, it was my chance to be carried in a boat. The bottom of the water almost all the way in all the journey appeared to be less than 2 foot in depth from the top. The way increasing, at first the lower parts and foundations of houses, than the tops and princely pinnacles began to vanish from our sight: at last having scarce passed 6000 paces, a Tower 72 foot high began to appear, as it were cut off by the middle, and from the middle part upward appeared visible; but after 10000 paces it was taken out of sight: I would here ask the Geographers (quoth Patricius) whether in so short a distance, wherein the bottom for the whole space surpassed not two foot in depth, the water could ascend to 72 foot? Had it been my chance to have gone with Patricius over the lake, I might perhaps by observation of this experiment, have given a more probable conjecture of the cause. Nevertheless being unacquainted aswell with the place, as the truth of his observation, I may perhaps guess somewhat at his error. First then, whereas he avers, that passing along for the space of a 1000 paces, a Tower of 72 foot high, seemed cut off by the midst, which at 10000 vanished out of sight. I confess that in so short a space the swelling of the water inter-posed, could not be so great as to hinder the sight, and be the cause of this effect: wherefore some other Accidental cause must be sought out. For the finding out of which to come as near as I can, I would make inquiry, whether this passage of the Boat was directly forward from the Tower on the Water, no land inter-posed: or Indirectly side-wise, in such sort, as the shore might be placed betwixt their sight and the Tower mentioned: The former no ways can be imagined; foras much as it not only contradicts the grounds of our received Philosophy; but also of Patricius himself: for giving the Earth a plain surface, or Angular, or any other form, it were impossible that in so short a distance, such an effect should happen out of the figurature of the water. If the passage were oblique or indirect, in such wise as the shore might any way interpose itself betwixt the Boat and the Tower, it were easy to imagine how such an experiment should happen: for the land by which the Boat might be carried, might have an ascent by such Degrees, as the Tower at 1000 paces might be for the half of it obscured, and at last be altogether taken out of sight. This reason then of Patricius, seems rather to be ascribed to the Land then the Water. The third reason of Patricius is drawn from the Homogeneity of the Water. If the water (saith he) have a round superficies, the parts of it would challenge the like figure, because in homogeneal bodies, the same reason is to be given of the whole, and of the parts: But the parts of the water are not Spherical, as may be proved by diverse instances: 1 Because water in the mouth of a pot, seems not to have any such Spherical roundness: for although at the brink it seem to be restrained above the pot, yet no such swelling appears in the middle. 2ly That rivers are kept in by their banks, which otherwise would flow abroad. 3ly That rivers, when by the melting of snow, they swell so great, as they can hardly be contained within their banks, do not seem higher in the middle, then in other places. 4ly If any man from one side of the river to the other, levels at any mark, he may surely hit it: which he should not do, if there were any Spherical swelling in the midst, which might hinder the sight. 5ly and lastly it seems so unlikely, that the water should rise in the midst, that it is more probable it should be more hollow; in that we plainly observe that all filth and rubbish carried from the banks into the river, is wont to settle and swim in the midst. Notwithstanding all these arguments of Patricius, our ground is yet unshaken; 1 Concerning small drops, and water in the mouth of pots; it is found to be round and Spherical, though not exactly: the reason whereof we shall declare hereafter. This roundness, I confess, serves not any way to the confirmation of this assertion, because the Sphericity and roundness which we aver to be in Water, hath for its centre, the centre of the whole Earth: and therefore in so small an arch or section, as the breadth of a pot, or a drop of water, cannot possibly have any sensible appearance or existence. And we must needs confess, that this experiment was very fond urged to this purpose by some of our Geographers, and such as stands not with any demonstration. Which granted, sufficiently answers all the reasons last urged by Patricius, except the last. For as much as he requires in the Water, a sensible appearance of this roundness in every river or little parcel of water, which cannot be admitted. Touching the last thing which he urgeth, that all the rubbish and filthy matter, is from the banks carried into the middle, whence he would infer▪ the middle to be hollow and lowest; we can answer diverse ways: 1 That this experiment is not always certain, because every man may oftentimes see the contrary; to wit, that such filthy rubbish rather useth to cleave to the banks of the river, then to float into the midst. 2ly That if any such thing happen, it is because of the torrents which run violently from the banks into the midst, carrying with it such things as are light, the steepness of the place being greater, the current wider or swifter. But nothing here can be concluded to prove the water according to his natural force, to be either plain or hollow in the midst, which this Adversary undertook to demonstrate. CHAP. III. Of the Partial magnetical affections in the Sphere of the Earth. 1 HItherto have we discoursed of such affections of the Terrestrial Sphere as are Elementary, and known heretofore to ancient Philosophers: It follows in the next place that we treat of Magnetical affections, to wit, such as follow the magnetical nature of the Earth. Of the virtue and propriety of the Loadstone▪ many have written, but few sought out the true nature. The invention of it is attributed to a certain herdsman, who having his shoes shod with iron▪ and an iron-pike in his hand, resting himself on a quarry of Loadstone, could hardly remove himself from thence. But this seems rather a pleasant Poetical invention, than a true History, having no good Author to avouch it. But to let pass the first Invention, being a matter rather indebted to chance then industry; no small difficulties have discovered themselves in the invention and finding out of the causes of Magnetical properties. Somewhat, I confess, hath been written of such magnetical affections as have been most known; such as is the virtue Attractive, by which it draws to itself iron, or steel; as also the virtue Directive, by which a needle touched with the Magnet, directs and conforms itself North and South. The rest of Magnetical proprieties I find in ancient Writers, as little known as their causes; & if any matter herein were broached, it was merely conjectural, and depending on no certain demonstration: neither had we any certain or satisfactory knowledge of this thing, until such time as it pleased God to raise up one of our Countrymen D. Gilbert, who to his everlasting praise hath trodden out a new path to Philosophy, and on the Loadstone erected a large Trophy to commend him to posterity. This famous Doctor being as pregnant in witty apprehension, as diligent in curious search of natural causes: after many experiments, and long inquiry, found the causes of most magnetical motions and proprieties hid in the magnetical temper and constitution of the Earth, and that the Earth itself was a mere Magnetical body challenging all those proprieties, and more than have expressed themselves in the Loadstone. Which opinion of his was no sooner broached, than it was embraced and well-commed by many prime wits, aswell English as Foreign. In so much that i● hath of late taken large root, and gotten much ground of our vulgar Philosophy: Not that in the main scope and drift of it▪ it contradicts or crosses all Peripatetical principles, or the most part of such grounds as have hitherto borne the stamp aswell of Antiquity, as of Authority: But that it hath brought to light matters of no small moment, which never found any ground or footsteps in our ordinary Philosophy. This new Philosophy I dare not commend as everywhere perfect and absolute, being but of late years invented, and not yet brought to mature perfection: yet would it savour of little ingenuity or judgement in any man, perversely to deny all such Magnetical affections in the Earth as are grounded on plain experiments and observation, sith no Philosophy was every way so exact, but required experience daily to correct it. I intent not here an absolute discourse of Magnetical Bobies and Motions, but leave it to their search whose experimental industry is more suitable to such a subject. Only I will show some general grounds appertaining to the constitution of the Terrestrial Globe, which I hold necessary for a Geographer. Wherefore ere I curiously distinguish these Magnetical proprieties of the Earth into other several kinds, I will set down this Theorem, as a ground or foundation of that which follows. 1 The Terrestrial Sphere is of a Magnetical nature and disposition. A Magnetical Body by some is defined to be that which seated in the Air, doth place itself in one place natural, not alterable. This situation is supposed to agree to all the Stars▪ especially to the great Globes of Saturn, jupiter, Mars, and the Sun; as also to such as give their attendance on them, lately detected by the Trunk-spectacle; to wit, those two Stars which move about Saturn, the four which move about jupiter, the two which circle about the Sun, as Venus and Mercury; and lastly the Moon, which encompasseth the Sphere of the Earth. But to let pass those other Globes, as farther off, and therefore less subject to our search: our discourse shall only touch the Earth whereon we live, which we shall prove to partake of a certain Magnetical virtue or inclination: which to show more openly, we must understand, that all Magnetical Globes have some parts of their bodies which be also Magnetical, which being divorced from their proper Sphere, & meeting no obstacle, will settle themselves to the natural situation of their peculiar Orbs. Which we may plainly perceive in the Sphere of the Earth, wherein we shall find two Magnetical minerals; whereof the one is the Loadstone, attracting iron or steel; the other the Iron or steel itself: either ofthese two▪ artificially hanged in the Air, or placed in a little boat on the water, all encumbrances being removed, will conform & settle their parts and Poles correspondent to the poles and parts of the Terrestrial Sphere, as North and South. This hath been found in all parts of the Earth by such as have traveled round about her, as Drake and Candish, whose Compasses were always directed Magnetically in all places which they passed: which we cannot ascribe to any other cause then the disponent faculty of the Earth's Magnetical Sphere, as shall appear hereafter by demonstration. Moreover it hath been observed by such as sail Northerly and Southerly, that the Magnetical Inclinatory needle, in every elevation of the Pole is conformed and disposed to the Axle of the Earth, according to certain angles answerable to the latitude of the Region, as we shall show hereafter. This diversity of conformity must necessarily arise, either from the Magnetical instrument in itself absolutely considered, or else from the Harmony and correspondency it hath with the Terrene Globe. It cannot be the first; because it should be the same in all places and Regions of the Earth, which is contrary to experience, and our supposition. Then must we needs derive it from the Magnetical disponent virtue of the whole Globe of the Earth, from which virtue the whole Earth may be called Magnetical. Nay if we truly consider, these Magnetical affections primarily agree to the Earth, as the mother of all Magnetical bodies; but afterward secondarily are derived into the parts; because (as Gilbert relates it) the cause of magnetical motions and affections is the magnetical form of a Spherical Globe; which form first agrees to the whole Globe of the Earth, and so is derived to all his homogeneal parts. These parts are called Homogeneal, not in regard of their Matter and quantity, but in respect of their Magnetical nature, and communion, which in every part is conspicuous. If any man should wonder why the Earth should be called Magnetical in regard of this mineral, which seems one of the least and scarcest substances whereof it consisteth; we may many ways answer, First, that although the surface of the Earth seems for the most part composed of other materials, more convenient for the use of living Creatures which dwell therein: yet may infinite rocky mines of Magnets be couched lower toward the centre, which strengthen and consolidate the Earthly Globe▪ Secondly, we must not imagine the Magnetical substance of the Earth, to be all one kind of stone, but various: for somewhere it is hard & solid as the true magnet itself and the iron which is nothing else but a mettle decocted out of the Loadstone; (for iron O●●e differs little or nothing at all from the Loadstone itself) somewhere again, this substance is more thin and fuid, being less concocted as some kind of clay, and certain vapours arising out of the Earth, which be magnetical: which being brought to a harder and more massy substance, will have the same affections and motions with the Loadstone itself. This assertion of the Earth's magnetical nature, we shall confirm more evidently hereafter, where we shall prove both the Poles, the Meridian, Parallels, and other circles, to be not bare Imaginary lines, as some have thought (but to be Really grounded in the magnetical nature of the Earth, and are to be showed in any round Loadstone, wrought and placed conveniently with instruments thereunto applied. 2 The Magnetical affection of the Earth is twofold, either Radical or Derived The Radical disposition we call that which is the first root and ground of all other magnetical motions. 3 The Radical virtue or inclination is again twofold, either Motive or Disponent. The Motive is that by which all magnetical bodies are inclined and stirred up to the motion. In the Reasonable soul of a man, we have two faculties which show themselves; a motive, and a directive or disponent power: whereof the one stirs up the motion, the other regulates, conforms, and directs it: The former is the Will, the later the Discourse and judgement. This distinction of faculties, howsoever more evident in the soul, finds place in all Natural agents: in which a Philosopher ought to distinguish betwixt that which gives them a power to move, and that which limits, determines, and (as the Schoolmen are wont to speak) modificates the action. Amongst others the magnet-stone seems most to partake of these two powers, as that which amongst all natural agents (in Gilberts opinion) seems most to have resemblance with the soul of a man: so that by an apt Trope it hath been called of many, the Magnetical soul of the Earth; for hence we may well perceive one virtue or inclination, which ●●useth the magnetical needle to move out of its place; another by which it is apt to conform itself North and South, as also to observe certain angles correspondent to the latitude of the place, as shall be demonstrated in due place. Of the motive power we will produce these Theorems. 1 The Magnetical motion is excited in a small & unperceivable difference of time. This proposition may be showed out of evident experiment, wherein every man's sight may be a witness. For if an Iron-needle touched with the Loadstone, be placed within the Sphere of the magnetical virtue of the stone, it will presently move itself, notwithstanding the interposition of solid bodies, which made Gilbert to imagine this motion to be effected by a mere spiritual and immaterial effluxe, which may well be compared to the light, which nevertheless it surpasseth in subtlety: for the light is moved from East to West so quickly, that many have thought this motion to have been in a moment or instant of time. But this quickness of motion may much more be imagined in the Magnetical virtue, being of a more subtle and piercing nature, as may be gathered from this reason, to wit; That the light is always hindered by the interposition of a thick and opacous body; but the virtue Magnetical finds a passage through all solid bodies whatsoever; and meets with no impediment. 2 This Motive quality is Spherically spread through every part of the Magnetical body. Here again may we find a great resemblance betwixt the magnetical virtue and the light; for as all light Bodies, as the Sun, Moon, and Stars, cast their beams every way into an orbicular form: so this Magnetical vigour casts itself abroad not only from the centre toward the superficies, but from the superficies outward into the Air or Water, where this magnetical body is placed, and so makes up a Sphere; but yet with this difference, that if the body be mere and perfectly Spherical, the Orb of the magnetical virtue will end in a perfect Sphere, as we see the magnet G to confine his virtue within the Circle BF. But if it be a square, or any other figure not Spherical, it imitates a Sphere as near as the body will suffer, in that it spreads itself everywhere from the centre by right lines; yet will it be confined in a square figure correspondent to the body, whence it proceeds, as we see the virtue of the square magnet A, to cast his beams into the square figure LD. 3 The motive quality of the Magnetical body is strongest of all in the Poles, in other parts by so much the stronger by how much these parts are situated near the Poles. We suppose out of the principles of Magnetical Philosophy, that a Magnet hath two Poles, whose use we shall show hereafter. These Poles are found by experiment to have more force and vigour in them then other parts, and all other parts to enjoy more or less force, by how much nearer or farther off they are situated to their Poles. The reason is ascribed by these Writers to the disposition of the Magnetical vigour in the body of the Load stone, as shall appear by this figure following in Gilbert, expressing the great Magnetical Body of the earth. Let the Spherical superficies of it be HQE, the Pole E, the Centre M: HQ the plain of the Equinoctial; from every point of this Equinoctial plain, the vigour Magnetical is conveyed and extended to CFNE; and to every point from C to E the Pole: but not towards the point B, so neither from G towards C. The vigour is not strengthened in the part FHG, from that which is GMFE; but FGH doth increase the virtue in H: so that there can arise no vigour so far from the parallels to the Axel— tree above the said parallels, but internally from the parallels to the Pole. So we see that from every point of the Equinoctial plain, the force is derived to the Pole E. But the point F hath only the vigour from GH, and the point N from OH: but the Pole E is corroborated and strengthened from the whole plain of the Equinoctial HQ. Wherefore the vigour magnetical in this Pole is most eminent and remarkable, but in the middle spaces; as for example in F, the magnetical quality is so far strengthened, as the portion of the Equinoctial plain H, can give. But Dr Ridley in his late Magnetical Treatise, in the 6. Chapt. seems to oppose this Demonstration. For although he acknowledgeth that the vigour is strongest of all in the Poles; yet (saith he) if trial be made what the Pole will take perpendicularly; and also what the parts above 34 degrees will lift up, it will appear to be half as much perpendicularly; so that the Pole doth not take up as much, as this and the other part doth on the other side. But the decision of these differences I leave to such as are more experimental than myself, being destitute of those helps and instruments which they enjoy. 4 It behoves us in the second place to speak of the Disponent vigour of Magnetical bodies▪ The Disponent force we call, that faculty by which magnetical Bodies are disposed or directed to a certain site or position. 1 Magnetical bodies move not uncertainly, but have their motions directed and conformed to certain bounds. This Proposition is confirmed by manifold experiments. For magnetical bodies are never found to move uncertainly, and at all adventures, but conform themselves to certain Poles; and make certain angles proportional to the latitude, as we shall show hereafter in particular. The reason of which experiment we can draw from no other cause, than the first institution of Nature in all Natural agents, which we would have directed to certain ends, that nothing in her Commonwealth might seem idle or unnecessary; wherefore she gives all agents not only a power to work their ends; but also shows them the way, squares and regulates the means which direct unto the end. Nowhere is this directive power more remarkable, then in magnetical bodies, especially in their Direction and Variation, motions treated of hereafter in place convenient; to which for a further confirmation of the Theorem, we refer the Reader. 9 The Radical faculty of the magnetical body being somewhat spoken of, aswell in their motive, as disponent virtues. We are in the next place to speak of the derived motions, which arise out of these faculties. 6 These motions magnetical are either partial, or total. The partial we call that by which the parts of the Earth are magnetically moved and conformed as well one to the other, as to the whole terrestrial globe. 7 The magnetical partial motions are Coition, Direction, Variation, and Declination. Magnetical Coition is that motion by which magnetical bodies are joined and apply themselves one to the other. For the knowledge of this magnetical motion, we need go no farther than the Iron and Steel, which we shall observe to move unto the Loadstone, and cleave unto it, if so be it be placed within the Sphere of his virtue. This motion is commonly called Attraction, but improperly, as is observed by D. Gilbert. 1 Because Attraction seems to suppose an external force or violence, by which one thing is carried and moved unto another: but the Coition is merely natural, as proceeding from the internal form of both the bodies. 2 Attraction supposeth the force of moving to be only in the one party, and the other to be merely passive, and not actively concurring to this motion; whereas in the magnetical coition, both parts are mutually inclined by nature to meet and join themselves one to the other. Not that the force of motion in both parts is always equal: because one magnetical body is greater and stronger than the other, and then the one part seems to stand still and draw the other unto it, although there be in this part so resting an inclination to the other; which mutual inclination of conjunction in magnets, we may easily see in two magnets of equal quantity and virtue, which being set at a convenient distance, will so move, that they will meet in the midway. Some have gone about to parallel this Attractive force of the Loadstone with the Attractive force of jet or Amber, which we see by a natural virtue to draw unto itself little straws, and other such like matter. But he that truly understands the nature of a magnetical body, shall find a great disparity: First, because the jet or Amber which are comprised under the name of electrical bodies, draws unto it by reason of his Matter: whereas otherwise the cause of the Magnetical Coition is to be sought in the form, as being too subtle a thing to spring from a material substance. Secondly, electrical bodies draw and attract not without rubbing and stirring up of the matter first; and presently fail, if any vapour or thick body should be interposed. But in a magnetical motion we find no such matter, because it requires no such preparation or rubbing of the stone, nor is hindered by interposition of solid bodies, as we prove in this place. Thirdly, the Loadstone moves and provokes to motion nothing else but other magnetical bodies; but the electrical will draw any little thing as straw, hair, dust, and such like. Fourthly, the Magnet will lift a great weight according to his virtue and quantity; but jet the smallest and lightest things. Lastly, the electrical bodies, as Gilbert well confirms by experiments, draw other bodies unto them by reason of a moist effluence of vapours, which hath a quality of joining bodies together: as we see by the example of two sticks in water at a certain distance, which will commonly move till they meet together. But the magnetical coition cannot be other than an act of the magnetical form. Of the cause of it many Philosophers have freely spent their uncertain conjectures, rather out of a fear to be esteemed ignorant, then of confidence to be accounted learned. Most run upon the form of the mixed body, which grows from the composition of the four Elements; but this opinion is very feeble, and cannot go without crouches: for sith all mixed forms grow out of the temperament and disposition; they add nothing to the thing compounded, but diversely modificate what was before in the simple Elements; it cannot be imagined how such an affection as this should be only found in the magnet, and no other mixed body. Indeed we ascribe this affection to the form as the immediate cause; but by this form we understand not the form of the mixture, resulting out of the mixture and temperature of the four qualities; but the magnetical form of all globous bodies, such as are the Sun▪ Moon, Stars, and this Terrestrial Sphere whereon we live, whose natures received the stamp in the first creation for the preservation of this integrity. He that shall seek for the original of all forms of this kind in the mixture and constitution of the four Elements, shall labour much, and find little, and neither at last be able to content himself, or instruct others; except we suppose a man sufficiently taught when he hears ordinary matters expressed in exotic and artificial terms. For my own part, I content myself with a rule of Biel the Schooleman; That when an immediate effect proceeds from an immediate cause, we ought not to search farther why such a cause should produce such an effect. Every man being demanded why the fire is hot, is ready to fly to the form of fire, and allege this as the cause: but should he inquire further, why the form of fire should be the cause of heat, he might perhaps puzzle a whole Academy of Philosophers, and never prove himself the wiser. For the further illustration of this motion, these Theorems will seem necessary. 1 The Magnet communicates his virtue to iron or steel if it be touched with it. Experience teacheth that any iron-instrument, touched with the Loadstone, receives instantly the same virtue Attractive. But the manner how this virtue should be communicated on so slight a touch, hath been controverted. The common Philosophers have imagined, that certain little parts of the Loadstone are separated from it in the touch, which cleaving to the iron or steel, cause this Attraction But that this virtue cannot be communicated by any corporal process, or any such little parts cleaving to the iron, is not so easy to imagine: for first it seems impossible, that with a bare touch, these parts should be separated from the magnet, or at least should be so fast linked to the iron. Secondly, these parts being so little and insensible, cannot have so much vigour as we see an Iron will have at the touch of the Loadstone. Thirdly, the Loadstone can work upon the iron notwithstanding any body interposed, which is an evident sign that the iron itself is of a magnetical temper. Wherefore to show a reason of this effect, we say; That Iron is a mettle excocted out of the Loadstone; which albeit it retain in itself the virtue of the Loadstone, yet by reason of the liquefaction, is altogether languishing, and as it were buried; but upon touch of a Loadstone, is stirred up to his former vigour: for the magnet insinuats his Incorporeal influence into the iron, and so rectifies and animates that force which was almost dead. 2 The magnetical Coiton is strongest of all in the Poles. This may easily be demonstrated by an experiment: for if the iron needle which is proposed to be Attracted, and the Poles and Centre be placed in the same right line; then this Coition will be to a perpendicular, as in A and B, to wit, the Poles in the Diagramme: but in the middle space they will obliquely respect and point: and by how much farther off from the Pole it is, by so much is this virtue weaker: but in the Equator itself it becomes merely parallel without any inclination at all. To know in what proportion this force is increased or weakened, we must put another ground; That the force of this coition is increased proportionally as the chords of a circle: for by how much the least chord in a circle differs from the Diameter, so much the forces Attractive differ from themselves. For sith the Attraction is a Coition of one body with another, and magnetical bodies are carried by a convertible nature: it comes to pass that a line drawn from one Pole to another in the diameter, directly meets with the body, but in other places less, so that the less it is converted to the body, the less and weaker will be the coition. 3 So much be spoken of the magnetical Coition: It follows that we speak of Magnetical Direction, which is a natural conversion and conformity of the magnetical bodies to the Poles of the Earth. It is manifest that a magnetical body so seated, that it can move without any impediment, will turn itself in such wise, that the one Pole of it will respect the North Pole of the Earth, the other the South, which motion we call Direction. This we may plainly see in a Mariners compass, whose Lily always respects the North point. If a compass be wanting, the same may be showed in a little corken-boate, which being put in the water with a loadstone in it, will so turn and convert itself, that the Poles of the Loadstone will at length point out the Poles of the Terrestrial Globe. The manner how, shall be disclosed in these Theorems. 1 The South part of the Loadstone turns to the North, and the North part to the South. To confirm this assertion, some have produced this experiment. Let there be cut out of a rock of Loadstone, a Magnet of reasonable quantity. Let the two poles both North and South be marked out in the Loadstone, the manner of which, we shall perhaps teach hereafter: then let it be put in a corken little boat on the water, so that it may freely float hither & thither: It will be evident that that part which in the rock or Mine pointed Northward, will respect the South, and contrariwise the South part will respect the North; as we may see in this figure: Let the Magnet as it is continuated with the Mine or Globe of the Earth be AB, so that A shall be in the North pole, B the Southpole. Let this Loadstone be cut out of this rock or Mine▪ & placed on the water in a little timber boat, which shall be CD: we shall find that this little dish or boat will turn itself so long, until the Northpart A, be turned to the Southpart B: and on the other part, the Southpart B, be converted to the Northpart A: and this comformity would the whole rock of Loadstone claim, if it were divided and separated from the Globe of the Earth. The reason why the magnet in the boat on the water, turneth, windeth, and seateth itself to a contrary motion to that it primarily received, whiles it was joined to the bowels of the Earth, and united to the body of the great Magnet, is; because every part of a Loadstone being separated from the whole, whereof it is a part, becomes of itself a perfect, complete, magnetical body, (as we may say) a little Earth, having all the properties of the great Globe, as Poles, Meridian's, Aequators, etc. And therefore according to the nature of magnetical union, spoken of in our next Theorem, will in no wise endure to settle itself as it did before; but deems it a thing more natural, and of more perfection, to turn his aspect a contrary way, to that which he enjoyed at his first constitution. Here may we note a great error of Gemma Frisius, who in his corollary upon the 15 Chap. of his Cosmographical Comment▪ on P. Appian, affirms; that the Needle magnetically effected, would on this side the Aequator, respect the North-pole; but being past the Line, would straightway turn about, and point to the Southpole: An error (as Mr Hues saith) unworthy so great a Mathematician. But Gemma Frisius in some ●ort, may be excused; for as much as the grounds of magnetical Philosophy, were in his time either not discovered, or most unperfectly known, and the uncertain relations of Navigators were reputed the best Arguments: and how easy a matter it is for a Traveller in this sort to deceive a Scholar, who out of his reading and experience can show nothing to the contrary, let every man judge. 2 This contrary motion here spoken of, is the just confluxe and conformity of such bodies to magnetical union. This is demonstrated by Gilbert in this manner. Let the whole magnetical body be CD, then C will turn to the North of the Earth B, and D unto the South part A. Let this magnet be cut in twain by the middle line or Aequator, and the point E will tend to A, and the part F, will direct itself to B: for as in the whole, so in the parts divided, nature desires the union of these bodies. The end E willingly accords with F; but E will not willingly join itself with D, nor F with C, for than it would have C, against its nature, to move toward A the South, or D in B▪ which is the South. Separate the stone in the place of division, and turn C to D, and they will conveniently agree and accord; For D will turn itself to the South as before, and C to the North; and E and F joint parts in the mineral or rock, will now be most sundered. For these magnetical parts concur and meet together not by any affinity of matter, but receive all their motion and inclination from the form; so that the limits, whether joint or divided, are directed magnetically to the Poles of the Earth, in the same manner, as in the divided body. 3 If any part Southward of the magnetical body be torn away or diminished, so much shall be also diminished of the Northpart; and chose if any part be taken away in the Northpart, so much shall the virtue of the Southpart be diminished. The reason is, because the Magnet having eminently in it the circles which are in the Earth, is separated or divided by a middle line or Aequator, from which middle space the virtues are conveyed toward either Pole, as we have before showed. Now any part being taken away from the North or South part, this Aequator or middle line is removed from his former place into the midst of the portion which is left, and so consequently both parts are less than before: For although these two ends seem opposite, yet is one comforted and increased by the other. 9 Of the motions of Coition and Direction we have handled. It follows that we speak of the motions of the second order, to wit, Variation, and Declination. 10 Variation is the deviation or turning aside of the directory Magnetical needle from the true point of North, or the true Meridian towards East or West. In the discourse immediately going before, having treated of the magnetical body, we have imagined it to be true, and pointing out the true North and South points of the Terrestrial Globe; which certainly would be so, if the substance of the Earthly Globe were in all parts and places alike, equally partaking the Magnetical virtue, as some round Loadstone; neither should we find any variation or deviation at all from the true Meridian of the Earth: But because the Terrestrial Globe is found by Navigatours to be unequally mixed with many materials, which differ from the magnetical substance, as furnished with rocky hills, or large valleys, continents, & Lands, some places adorned with store of iron Mimes, rocks of Loadstone, some altogether naked and destitute of these implements; it must needs fall out, that the magnetical needle and compass directed and conformed by the Magnetical nature of the Earth, cannot always set themselves upon the true Meridian, that passeth right along to the Poles of the Terrestrial Globe; but is forced and diverted toward some eminent and vigorous magnetical part; whereby the Meridian pointed out by the magnet, must needs vary and decline from the true Meridian of the Earth, certain parts or degrees in the horizontal circle; which diversion we call the Variation of the compass: so tha● variation, so far as it is observed by the compass, is defined to be an Arch of the Horizon, intercepted betwixt the common intersection with the true Meridian, and his deviation. This effect proceeding from the Inequality of magnetical virtue scattered in the Earth, some have ascribed to certain Rocks or mountains of Loadstone, distant some degrees from the true Pole of the World; which rocks they have termed the Pole of the Loadstone, as that whereunto the magnet should dispose and conform itself: which conceit long ago invented, was afterward enlarged and trimmed over by Fracastorius. But this opinion is a mere conjecture, without ground: for what Navigatours could he ever produce that were eye-witnesses of this mystery? or how can he induce any judicious man to believe that, which himself, nor any to his knowledge ever saw? The relation that the Friar of Noruegia makes of the Friar of Oxford's discovery, recorded by james Cnoien in the book of his Travels, where he speaks of these matters, is commonly rejected as fabulous and ridiculous; for had there been any such matter, it is likely he would have left some monuments of it in the records of his own University, rather than to have communicated it to a friend as far off as Noruegia. Moreover the disproportion in the degrees of variation in places of equal distance, will easily correct this error, as we shall show in due place. More vain and frivolous are all the opinions of others concerning this magnetical variation: as that of Cortesius, of a certain motive virtue or power without the Heaven; that of Marsilius Fici●us of a star in the Bear; that of Petrus Peregrinus, of the Pole of the world; that of Cardan, of the rising of a star in the tail of the Bear; that of Bestardus Gallus, of the Pole of the Zodiac; that of Livius Sanutus, of a certain magnetical Meridian; of Francis Maurolycus, of a magnetical Island; of Scaliger, of the heaven and mountains; of Robert Norman, of a respective point or place: All which Writers seeking the cause of this variation, have found it no further off then their own fancies. More probable by far, and consonant to experience, shall we find their opinion, which would have the cause of this variation be in the Inequality of the magnetical Eminencies scattered in the Earth. This Inequality may be perceived to be twofold. 1 in that some parts of the Earth have the magnetical minerals more than other parts; for as much as the Superficies of some parts is solid Earth, as in great Continents: 2, Because although the whole Globe of the Earth is supposed to be magnetical, especially in the Internal and profound parts: yet the magnetical virtue belonging to those parts, is not always so vigorous and eminent as in some other parts: as we see one Loadstone to be stronger or weaker than another in virtue and power: but of those two, the former is more remarkable, which may be showed by experience of such as have sailed along many seacoa-stes: for if a sea-iourney be made from the shore of Guinea by Cape Verde by the Canary Lands, the bounds of the Kingdom of Morocco, from thence by the confines of Spain, France, England, Belgia, Germany, Denmark, Noruegia: we shall find toward the East, great and ample Continents; but contrariwise in the West a huge & vast Ocean: which is a reason that the magnetical needle will vary from the true point of the North, and inclines rather to the East; because it is more probable that these Continents and Lands should partake more of this magnetical mineral, than the parts covered with the Sea, in which these magnetical bodies may be scarcer, or at the least deeper buried, and not so forceable. On the contrary part, if we sail by the American coasts, we shall rather find the variation to be Westward: as for example, if a voyage be made from the confines of Terra Florida, by Virginia, Norumbega, and so Northward, because the land butteth on the West: but in the middle spaces, near the Canary Lands, the directory needle respects the true Poles of the Terrestrial Globe, or at least shows very little variation. Not for the agreement of the Magnetical Meridian of that place with the true by reason of the Rock of Loadstone, as some have imagined: because in the same Meridian passing by Brasile, it falls out far otherwise: but rather because of the Terrestrial Continents on both sides, which almost divide the Magnetical vigour, so that the Magnetical needle is not forced one way more than another; the manner whereof we shall find in D. Gilbert expressed in an apt figure, to whom for further satisfaction I refer the Reader. 1 The Magnetical variation hath no certain Poles in the Terrestrial Globe. It is but a common received error (as we have mentioned) that there is a certain Rock or Pole of Loadstone, some degrees distant from the true Pole of the world, which the Magnetical needle in its variation should respect. This Pole they have imagined to be in the same Meridian with that which passeth by the Azores, whence they have laboured to show the reason why the Compass should not vary in that place: which they explain by this Figure. Let there be a circle describing the Sphere, E OF, the Horizon OF, the Arctic Pole A, the Antarctic ●. The Pole or Rock of Loadstone placed out of the Pole of the Earth B. Let there be placed a magnetical directory needle in H; it will (according to their assertion) tend to the point B, by the magnetical Meridian H B; which because it concurres with the true Meridian B A, or H A, there will be no variation at all, but a true direction to the North Pole of the Earth. But let this magnetical needle be placed in the point D, it is certain, according to this opinion, that it will tend to the Pole of the Loadstone B, by the magnetical Meridian D B. Wherefore it will not point out the Pole of the Earth A, but rather the point C; because these two Meridian's come not into one and the selfsame. Hence they have laboured with more hope than success, ●o find out the longitude of any part of the Earth, without any observation of the Heavens: which I confess might easily be effected, if this conjecture might stand with true observation. But how far this conceit swerves from the experience of Navigatours, one or two instances will serve to demonstrate. For if the variation had any such certain poles as they imagine, than would the Arch of variation be increased or diminished proportionally according to the distance of the places. As for example; If in the compass of an hundred miles, the Compass were varied one degree, then in the next hundred miles it would vary another degree, which would make two degrees. But this hath often been proved otherwise by divers experiments of Navigations, mentioned by Gilbert, and F. Wright. I will only produce one or two. If a ship sail from the Sorlinges to Newfoundland, they have observed, that when they come so far as to find the Compass to point directly North, without any variation at all; then passing onward, there will be a variation toward the North-East, but obscure and little: then afterward will the Arch of this variation increase with like space in a greater proportion, until they approach near the continent, where they shall find a very great variation. Yet before they come a shore, this variation will decrease again. From which one instance, if there were no other, we might conclude; That the Arch of variation is not always proportionable to the distance: which granted, quite overthrows that conceit of the Poles of variation. Beside this, if there were two such magnetical Poles, there can be but one common Meridian, passing by them and the Poles of the Earthly Globe. But by many observations collected and observed by Ed. Wright and others, there should be many magnetical Meridian's passing by the Poles of the world: as in the Meridian about Trinidado, and Bermuda; the Meridian about the Westermost of the Azores: lastly, the Meridian running amongst the East Indian Lands, a little beyond java Maior, the magnetical and true Meridian must needs agree in one. Now for as much as all these magnetical Meridian's pass by the Poles of the earth, there can no cause be assigned why the magnetical Poles should be said to be in one rather than another; and if in any, then in all. Whence it must needs follow, that as many magnetical Meridian's as you have to pass by the true Poles of the world▪ so many pair of magnetical Poles must you have, which will be opposite to all reason and experience. 1 The point of Variation, as of Direction, is only Respective, not Attractive. It was supposed by the Ancients, that the Direction and Variation of the Loadstone was caused by an Attractive point, which drew and enforced the lily of the Compass that way: which error took place from another common-received opinion, that all the other motions of the magnet were reduced to the Attractive operation: but the error was corrected by one Robert Norman, an Englishman, who found this point to be Respective, and no way Attractive. Whose reason or demonstration is not disapproved by Dr Gilbert, although in other matters he sharply taxeth him. His experiment is thus. Let there be a round vessel, as we have described, full of water; in the middle of this water-place an iron-wier, in a convenient round cork, or boat, that it may swim upon the water, even poized: let this iron-wire be first touched with the loadstone, that it may more strongly show the point of variation; let this point of variation be D, let this iron-wire rest upon the water in the cork for a certain time; It is certainly true that this iron-wire in the cork, will not move itself to the margin or brink of the vessel D, which certainly it would do, if the point D were an attractive point. 3 The variation of every place is constant and not variable. This hath been ratified by the experience of Navigatours, which in the selfsame Regions have never miss the true variation which they have assigned them before. If any difference be assigned in variation to the same Region, we may impute it to their error which observed it, arising either from want of skill, or convenient instruments. Neither can this ever be changed, except some great deluge or dissolution happen of a great part of land, as Plato records of his Atlantic Lands. 4 The variation is greater in places near the poles of the Earth. This proportion is not to be taken universally, but commonly for the most part; yet would it have truth in all places, if all other things were correspondent. It is observed that the variation is greater on the coasts of Norway, and the Low-countries▪ then at Morocco, or Guinea. For at Guinea the magnetical needle inclines to the East, a third part of one Rumbe of the Compass: In the Lands of Cape-Verde, half; in the coasts of Morocco, two third parts: In England at the mouth of Thames, according to the observation of D. Gilbert, and Ed. Wright, though some deny it, one whole Rumbe; in London the chief city of it, eleven degrees and more, which we also find, or thereabout, in Oxford. The reason is, because the magnetical motive virtue is stronger in the greater latitude increasing towards the pole: and the large Regions of land lying toward the Pole, prevail more than those which are situate farther off. 12 Thus much for the Variation. The Declination is a magnetical motion, whereby the magnetical needle converts itself under the horizontal plain, toward the Axis of the Earth. What we have hitherto spoken of Direction and Variation magnetical, was such as might be expressed and showed in the plain of the Horizon, by the Directory needle equally poized, when it is set in any point of the Horizon. But this Declination whereof we are now to speak, is the motion of an iron-wire or needle, first equilibrated, and then stirred up by the loadstone, upon his own Axis, from that point of the Horizon, the other end of it tending toward the centre of the Earth: where we may, for the better expressing of the motion, note two things: 1 That the magnetical wire, set in a convenient instrument, if it be carried from the Aequator to the Pole, or from one Pole to another: will by little and little turn itself round, and make a circumvolution about his own Axle. 2 That by this conversion and circumvolution about his axle, it will according to diverse places and latitudes, make diverse Angles in diverse places; both which are included in this motion of Declination, and are warranted by experience made by an Inclinatory needle applied to a Terrella, or round Loadstone; as also by the experience of Navigations on the great Sphere of the Earth. To explain which motion, there are curious instruments form and invented by Dr Gilbert, and Dr Ridley, which the curious in this kind, to their greater satisfaction may peruse. In the mean time we will here content ourselves with one figure following, borrowed from their more copious invention; wherein we shall find enough to express the manner of this motion. In this Figure let ABCD be the Terrella or round magnet representing the Sphere of the Earth: A the North-pole, B the South, A●B the Axle, CED the Aequator: AKB, and ALB the Meridian circle's meeting in the Pole. AC, and BD the Meridian or right Horizon, having in it the two Poles: FG and HIGH two parallels. The Loadstone being thus designed in his outward Poles, as it is according to his natural eminency stored inwardly▪ Let the Needles be placed (being before touched) on the Limb over-against the Poles, AB, and we shall observe them to respect them directly, concurring in one strait line with the Axle of the Earth: Then set the same Needles in the Limb over— against the Aequator CD, and they will dispose & settle themselves in a parallel site to the Axle of the Earth, and incline neither to one Pole or other: Hence may be collected by plain consequence, that there is a semicircle betwixt each of these four needles. Now to find the quadrants of these, apply Needles in the Limbeat 33 degrees distant from the Aequator on each side of him, and they will make right angles with the axle of the same, where these eight needles have 8 quadrants between them, that is, four semi-circles which will make two whole circles, one on each side of the Aequator. But if you place the needles in the midst between the Aequator and the Poles, they will respect the axle but obliquely as in all other parts, except in the eight places beforementioned. From hence may we learn what we proposed: first that the Declination is a conversion of the magnetical wire or needle upon its own axle: secondly, that this wire by this motion so excited, if it be moved on any Meridian North or South, will apply and conform itself according to certain angles, to the Axle of the Earth. Thirdly, there will arise this corollary, that the magnetical needle about the round Magnet, maketh two circles. Concerning this declination we will insert two especial Theorems. 1 The Declination is answerable to the latitude not in Equality of degrees, but in proportion. It is manifest out of that which we have spoken, that this motion of Declination supposeth two motions; The one of Conversion, whereby the needle is turned round on his own Axis: The other a Progressive motion, whereby the centre itself of the Inclinatory Needle is carried forward upon a Meridian from North to South, or contrariwise. These two motions supposed to proceed and begin together, cannot possibly meet in such Equality, as that the degrees of Declination directly answer in Equality to the degrees of latitude, which is demonstrated by this Figure here inserted. Let the magnetical body be A, this body while it shall be moved above the Earth from GD the Equinoctial toward the Pole B, will be turned upon his own Centre, and in the middle of the progress of the centre from the Equator to the Pole B, it will be directed to the Equator D in the middle between the two Poles. Therefore the middle must needs turn faster on his own centre, than the centre itself turned forward; that by this conversion it should directly respect the point D: wherefore this motion will be swifter in the first degrees, to wit, from A to L, but in the latter it will be slower from L to B, in respect of the Aequator from D to C. Now if the Declination were equal to the latitude, than the magnetical wire should observe and follow the faculty and peculiar virtue of the centre of an operative and attractive point. But reason & experience teacheth, that it observeth the whole body and mass, with all the external limits of the Earth and Loadstone; the whole virtues and forces of both concurring, aswell of the convertible wire, as of the whole Earth: Nevertheless from this experiment the skilful in Magnetical Philosophy, have found out a proportion whereby the latitude of places may instrumentally be found out by the degrees of Declination. 2 The Magnetical Declination is caused not of the Attractive, but of the Disponent and Conuersive virtue of the Earth. There is nothing more admirable in Nature, than the order and situation of all bodies in their places, most convenient for each ones conservation. For the obtaining of which harmony, (as we have taught in our second Chapter) it is endowed with a proper motion convenient, to place and seat itself, both for the preservation of itself, and the whole Universe. This natural Inclination is nowhere more eminent and cospicuous, then in the harmony of magnetical bodies, which are (as it were) the sinews of the Terrestrial Globe. These motions some have imputed to the Attractive force, but very erroneously, as we have proved already of Direction and Variation, and shall here demonstrate concerning the Magnetical Declination: for first, if it were caused by any Attractive force approaching it would follow of necessity, that a Terrella or round Sphere; made of a solid or perfect loadstone, would more turn and wrest the magnetical needle, then if it were made of a weaker and more imperfect substance: also that a needle touched with a stronger stone, should show a greater Declination than that touched with a weaker. But experience hath found the contrary, because the Declination will be all one, be the stone stronger or weaker. Moreover a Loadstone armed with an Iron-Nose (as they term it) put upon the Meridian in any latitude, will not lift up a piece of iron more perpendicularly, then if it were naked and uncovered, although it will lift up much greater and heavier weights; which experiments are sufficient to confirm our assertion, that this Declination is caused only by the disponent and conversive virtue of this Terrestrial Globe. 3 The magnetical Declination hath a variation. That in the magnetical Direction there is found an Irregularity or variation, hath been sufficiently warranted by Artificers Instruments. The like Irregularity is in the motion of Declination, which makes magnetical Instruments and experiments more subject to error and imperfection. The variation of Declination is defined to be an Arch of the Magnetical meridian betwixt the true and apparent Declination. The cause hereof is only to be sought in the unequal temper of magnetical parts in the Earth. For as in the Direction, magnetical bodies are drawn and wrested from the true meridian, by the eminent and more vigorous force of the Earth, one side overruling the other: so the magnetical needle (the conversion somewhat increased) declines sometimes beyond his natural site and conformity. This may cause an error, but not of any great moment: sometimes when there is no variation or Direction at all in the Horizon, there may be a Variation or Declination; to wit, either when the more eminent and stronger parts of the Earth are placed just under the Meridian; or when these parts are more impotent than the general nature requireth; or else when the Magnetical vigour is too much increased on one side, and diminished on the other as we may behold in the vast Ocean. CHAP. FOUR Of the Totall motions Magnetical. 1 Having passed the Partial motions magnetical, we are next to speak of the Totall motions, which more nearly agree to the whole Earth, such as are the Verticitie and Revolution. 2 The Verticity is that whereby the Poles of the earthly Sphere, conform and settle themselves unto the Poles of the Heaven. 1 The Sphere of the Earth by her Magnetical vigour, is most firmly seated on her Axle; whose Ends or Poles respect always the same points in the Heavens, without Alteration. That which in a little Magnet or Loadstone is called Direction, in the vast Globe of the Earth is called Verticity. To understand which, we must conceit, that the Earth hath naturally two Poles, unto which the meridional parts do direct not only magnetical bodies near the Earth, but her own massy situation and firmness; and settles herself so strongly by her magnetical virtue passing through the Meridional parts to the Poles, as if she were tied by many strong cables to two Herculean pillars, not subject to alteration: And if it should happen by any supernatural power, that the situation could be changed: she would (no doubt) by her magnetical vigour and verticity, return and restore herself to her former position, as all magnetical needles will do to their proper site and conformity Of this Verticity needs no more to be spoken, then hath been already said in the point of Direction; because the former is a representation of the latter, and depends on the same demonstration. Out of which ground we may evidently conclude, that the Axle of the Terrestrial Globe remains always invariable: By which we may refute the opinion of Dominicus Maria, who was Master to Copernicu●; who out of certain unperfect observations, was induced to believe that the Poles of the World were changed from their true and natural situation: I have observed (saith he) looking on Ptolemy's Geography, that the elevation of the Pole Arctic almost in all Regions, as it is put down in Ptolemy, differs and fails in one degree and ten minutes from that which we find in our time: which cannot be ascribed to the error of the table, because it is not probable that the whole series should be depraved according to this equality of number. Wherefore it must follow of necessity, that the North pole should be moved toward the vertical circle: which mystery not known of the Ancients for want of former observations, hath showed itself to our times, being enriched not only with their, but our own experiments. According to this opinion of Dominicus Maria, the North pole should be elevated higher than it was, and the Latitudes of Regions should be greater than they were. But to this opinion we will oppose the opinion of Stadius, which holdeth that the latitudes of Regions have been decreased and diminished from that they have had in Ptolemy, without any such regular Increment or Decrement; which he labours to confirm by many observations: as for example, the latitude of Rome as it is set down by Ptolemy is 41 degrees ⅔ parts: but by newer observation it is found to be 41 degrees, ½ parts: out of which we may well conjecture, that Ptolemy's observations were not always exactly true, being for a great part such as he had received from Hipparchus, and not examined himself: as may be seen in the latitude of many Cities in Europe, where he miss sometimes 2, sometimes 3 degrees. Wherefore no judicious Geographer would upon such imperfect observations and uncertain conjectures bring in a new motion of the earth to overthrow that magnetical. Harmony and consistency corroborated with so many and sure demon●trations. This may serve to answer a certain Ten●nt of Vasquez the jesuit, and some others; who imagine the Centre, and by consequence▪ the Pole of the Earth, to be moved up and down by a certain motion of Liberation. The argument on which they would ground their assertion, is taken from the Centre of Gravity, in this manner. The whole mass of the earth (say they) is so settled about the Centre, that it is equally poized: that is as much as to say, that the parts are endowed with an equal weight. Now such Bodies as are so equally poized by the addition or diminution of any part on either ●ide▪ will be straightway t●rned from that ●i●e▪ which they had before in Aequîlibrio: as is daily confirmed by experience of a Balance, and other such mechanic instruments. Wherefore in the Terrestrial sphere, the Centre and Poles should in this wise be changed and altered, and the whole suffer a kind of starting or Libration. For it is manifest by daily observation, that some things in the superficies of the earth are fallen off, and carried into another place: as Men, Beasts, and Birds, which move from one place unto another. Nothing is here of more moment than the motion of the Sea, by which the parts of the water by continual ebbing and flowing, suffer such a sensible change of Addition and Diminution, that no man can imagine how the parts of the Earth about the Centre should always be equally counterpoised, but the weight on one side should be predominant unto the other, and so drive the Centre from his former place. This Argument Blancanus, De Mundi fabr. part. 3. cap. 2. another late jesuit, leaves altogether unanswered; either imagining it too strong, or out of a combined faction of their own society, unwilling to contradict his fellow. And indeed should we consider the sphere of the earth, no otherwise then according to his Elementary constitution: this reason would hardly admit of a solid answer: For howsoever in the vast frame of the Earth, the addition or subtraction of some parts would make but an insensible difference: yet can it not be denied, but the least weight whatsoever added or subtracted, would turn it from its Equall-poyze: Nevertheless, this I hold too absurd for a Christian to believe, for as much as it contradicts the sense of holy Scriptures, Psal. 104. which aver the earth to be so settled on her foundation, that she should not at any time be removed, or shaken: which motion (as shall be proved in the second Theorem) I take to be understood of such a Trepidation of the Centre and the Poles, which by a metaphor are termed the foundation of the earth, and not of the circular motion, as some have laboured to wrest it. Wherefore nothing is here left us to satisfy this doubt: but to have recourse to his magnetical verticity, whereby the poles of the Earth endowed with a magnetical vigour, and overswaying the elementary ponderosity of the earthly parts, are (as it were) so fast bound to respect the same points or poles in the Heavens, that the Centre can no ways be shaken, or moved out of his place. 3 The Magnetical Revolution is a motion by which the whole globe of the Earth is moved round. Aristotle in his 1 book de coelo makes 3 kinds of simple motions, out of which he labours to deduce the number of simple bodies. The first is the motion from the centre, such as is of Fire and Air, and all light bodies: the second to the centre, such as is of Earth and Water; the third is round about the centre or middle, which he ascribes to the Heavens: so that if this ground were true, the Earth could challenge to itself no other than the right motion; whereby the parts of it being separated from the whole, return to it again. But this opinion although popular and plausible, hath been contradicted, as well by ancient Philosophers as modern: for by long experience and diligent observation, they have found the earth to be endowed with a starlike vigour, whereby she may, having all her parts united together by reason of her gravity unto the Centre, and her place made sure by her magnetical poles, move naturally upon her own poles, at least if so be she claim no other motion. This opinion first blosomed (as far as I can gather) in the School of Pythagoras, was cherished by Heraclides Ponticus, and Ecphantus, two famous Pythagoreans: to which afterward joined themselves Nicetus Syracusanus, and Aristarchus Samius; all which have undertaken to defend that the Earth moves circularly, and that this circumgyration of the Earth causeth the rising and setting of the Sun, as well as of other stars, although in the manner they have not expressed themselves alike, having enjoyed as yet scarce the first dawn of knowledge. But all this while Philosophy contented herself with the acquaintance of a few choice friends, not daring to prostitute her treasures to popularity. But when it happened in after times that she was taught the language of the vulgar, and spoke to the understanding of each mechanic, she soon contracted some stains, and squared herself rather to please the most than the best. Thus the multitude as a vast torrent prevailed against the learned, and cast into exile the inventions of the Ancients, which their ignorance was readier to censure then understand. Yet were not the seeds of this Philosophy quite extinct, but as forgotten for a time; until there arose Copernicus, a man of incomparable wit, who quickened and revived it, to his everlasting praise and our profit: I would not here be mistaken, as though I strongly apprehend these grounds, and reject all the principles of our Peripatetic Philosophy: I only inveigh against their prejudicate ignorance, which ready to lick up the dust under Aristotle's feet with a supercilious look contemn all other learning, as though no flowers of science could grow in another garden. I confess this opinion of the Earth's circular motion to be subject to many and great exceptions, and opposed by strong and weighty arguments drawn probably from the book of God, the touchstone of sincere verity; yet I hold it too strongly fortified to be invaded by popular arguments drawn from seeming sense, and bolstered up with names and authorities. For mine own part, I confess not absolute subscription to this opinion; yet could I not conveniently leave it out, because having undertaken to insert this Magnetical Tract; I would not willingly mangle it in any part, but show it whole and entire to the view of the judicious; who herein may use their Philosophical liberty, to embrace or reject what they please. If these grounds seem true, they will find acceptance; if otherwise, it cannot indamage Truth to know her adversary. Wherefore I think no man will take it amiss that I insert this following Theorem. 1 It is probable that the terrestrial Globe hath a circular motion. Copernicus ascribes three motions to the sphere of the Earth, whereof the first is in the space of 24 hours about her own axle; making the day and night, and is therefore called the Diurnal: The second is yearly, wherein the Centre itself of the Earth is moved from West to East, describing the circle of the Signs. The third is a motion of Declination performed in an annual revolution; reflecting against the motion of the Centre; for the Axis of the Earth is supposed to have a convertible nature, whereas if it should remain fixed, there would appear no inequality of day and night, Spring, Autumn, Summer, or Winter: I will not here curiously distinguish the differences; limits, and periods of these three motions, but leave it to the skilful Astronomer, to whom properly it appertains: it is enough for me to show it probable that the Earth should challenge to itself a circular motion, in prosecution of which I shall labour chiefly to establish that first motion which is of the Terrestrial globe about her own axis, which is the easiest both to believe and understand. That I may the better express the grounds of this opinion, I will labour to prove these two points. 1 That this opinion is consonant to reason. 2 That it no way contradicts the sense of the Holy Scripture. The former assertion we will again divide into 3 articles. 1 That the motion which we seek to establish in the Earth cannot without much absurdity be granted to the heavens. Secondly that it no way contradicts to nature of the Earth itself. Thirdly, that the arguments produced against this opinion, are not so strong, but may be answered with probability. First therefore finding the daily rising and setting of the Sun, Moon, and other Stars to arise from some motion, we are to seek out the true subject of this motion. It is agreed upon by all that this subject must be the Heavens, which are carried in 24 hours from East to West, or the Earth which must move in the same time from West to East. For the first we must take a● granted of those which defend the opposite opinion these two grounds 1 That the subject of this motion (if it be a heavenly body) is the first movable and supreme sphere of all the celestial machine; because all the rest have assigned them their several motions. 2 That of two bodies circularly moving upon the same Centre, in the same space of time, that which is greater in quantity must needs have the swifter motion; as we see the spokes of a wheel to move faster near the circumference, but slower in those parts which are joined to the Centre. This granted, we shall find the greatest of the first and supremest orbs to be so incomparably vast in proportion to the Earth, and the motion of it according to this magnitude to be increased to such a swiftness, as must needs transcend all fiction and imagination. For besides the two Elements placed by the Peripatetics betwixt the Earth and the Celestial bodies, to wit, Air and Fire, which challenge no mean distance betwixt their concave and convexe superficies: who knows not how many distinct and strange concamerations of Orbs and circles are placed and signed ou● betwixt the Moon and the first Movable? Aristotle hath reduced all the Orbs to eight. whereof seven were allotted to the seven Planets, but the eight to the fixed Stars, which he supposed to be fastened as so many nails in the same wheel. But Ptolemy perceiving this number to be insufficient to satisfy his observations, was enforced to add a ninth to increase the number. Yet this contented not Alphonsus, but he must make up ten. And although this opinion prevailed a long time in the Schools of Philosophers, as most exact and absolute; yet came it far short to satisfy the search of two latter Astronomers, Clavius, and Maginus; who to add something to Antiquity, have found out another orb, and so the whole tale is become eleven: and much it is to be feared that the big-swollen belly of this learned Ignorance, will beget more children to help the Mother, because all the former have proved lame and impotent: God send her a safe delivery. To return to my purpose; all these orbs thus ranged and concamerated in order, cannot but have each of them a great and extraordinary thickness and profundity: being to carry in them such huge and vast bodies, as the Sun and Stars, which are of themselves mighty Globes, for the most part greater than the Earth, as Philosophers have found out by diverse Mathematical instruments, and expressed in Tables. Also because amongst the Planetary Orbs we shall find them cloven into many partial and lesser Orbs, as Epicycles and Excentrickes, the first of which must in reason surpass the thickness of the Diameter of the Planet. The profundity of all these Orbs is measured by their Diameters, which we shall find to surmount each other in extraordinary proportion. For the Diameter of the Earth is 1718 Germane miles. The greatest distance or elongation of the Moon being new, 65 semidiameters of the Earth; the least is 55 semidiameters. The greater elongation of the Moon in the middle space is 68; the least 52 semidiameters of the Earth. Notwithstanding it is very probable, that the Orb of the Moon is yet of more thickness and profundity. To pass over Venus and Mercury, and come to the Sun, we shall find his distances from the Earth in his greatest Excentricity to be 1142 semidiameters of the Earth. Mars, jupiter, and Saturn, are yet farther off from the Earth, and their Orbs endowed with a greater treasure of thickness. The distance of the Firmament wherein are placed the fixed Stars, is by the best Mathematicians thought incomprehensible, and not measurable by man's industry: in so much that Aristotle holds the Earth no other than as a point, if it be compared with the eighth Sphere, which he supposed to be the highest and first Movable. To let pass the ninth Sphere; the tenth, which was vulgarly thought the first Movable, if it be valued according to the proportion of the rest, would have his convexe superficies moved so fast in one hour, that it would overcome so much space as 3000 greater circles of the Terrestrial Globe; for as much as in the convexe superficies of the starry Firmament, it would contain more than 1800. And who can be so sharp sighted to see the profundity and thickness of this orb▪ containing in it stars innumerable; whereof some are apparent to each man's eyes, others lying hid by reason of the distance, whereof many have lately been discovered, by reason of the Trunk-spectacle lately found out: so that it may be a probable conjecture, that all these stars are not placed in the same Orb, or at least that this Orb is far greater and deeper than the ordinary current of Astronomers have imagined it to be. To these eight Orbs here deciphered, should we add the Caelum Chrystallinum, the Primum Mobile, the Idol of our common Astrologers; and another, which Clavius and Maginus have invented; what bound should we set to the greatness of the Heavens, or the swiftness of their motions? how far beyond all roving imagination or Poetical fictions should it transcend, as thatwhich neither Nature could ever suffer, or the wit of man understand? a motion a thousand-fold swifter than the flight of a bullet from a piece of ordinance, I had almost said, then thought itself: For if a man cast his imagination on some mark or degree in the Sun's parallel on theTerrestriall Globe, and so instantly transfer it to another, and so to a third, passing over at each time the distance of 100 miles; he would find the Sun to be far swifter in his motion, and to have over-passed him incomparably in his course: were the Sun placed in the superficies of the Earth, and his course no greater than one of the greater circles of the Terrene Globe, he should by their own computation, finish his course in 24 hours; and so run 21600 miles in that time, which maketh 900 miles in one hour. And if this motion seem so swift, that it could hardly have credit among ordinary capacities; what should we think of this motion, which is imagined infinitely swifter? If Ptolemy feared lest the Globe of the Earth should be dissolved and shattered in pieces by a far slower motion; of what should we imagine the heavens to be made, which can suffer so portentous and incogitable a whirling? Here the common Philosopher stands astonished, and rather than he will be thought to know nothing, he will say any thing: why (saith he) should we not believe it? sith the Heavens in their motion find no Resistance, whereas all other bodies are slacked by the medium or Air by which they are to move. If in the Heavens were any such let or hindrance, it would be either in the Agent or Mover; or in the Patient or body moved: Not in the mover, because (as Aristotle hath taught) the Heavens are moved or turned round by an Angel, or Intelligence, fixed to his Orb, of a spiritual and immaterial substance, which in a body meets no opposition. Not in the body moved: because of its own Nature it is prone and inclinable to this motion. But this reason is like a reed that hurts his hand that leans on it: for first, what indigence or necessity in Nature is observed so great, to be the father of such Intelligences? What serious judgement can ever imagine the Angels to be like galleyslaves chained fast to their galleys, or turne-spit-dogs labouring in their wheels? To what use shall they serve? not to stir up and begin the motion; for why should we debar the Heavens from the privilege ofall other Bodies far less excellent, whose motions challenge no other cause or beginning then their own form and nature: Not to Regulate and confine this motion; for Nature which begins any action or motion, is able of herself to set limits and bounds unto it, without the help of any external agent. Finally not to continue this motion; for as we are taught in our Philosophy, Every Natural Agent, if it be not hindered, still acts to the uttermost of his power, and therefore needs no external coadjutor to continue his action: for otherwise we might suppose the Heavens to grow weary and faint in their intended course. Secondly, whereas they say there can be no Resistance in the body moved, they contradict their own grounds: for it is agreed by all, that the higher Orbs do turn and wrest about the lower: I would willingly ask, by what kind of action, either by a virtual influence or emanation, or else by a corporal touch and application: The former is improbable, and (as far as I can gather) not awouched by any; and were it so, it would seem ridiculous; for why should we rather ascribe this effect to an unknown influence of an external body, then to the vigour of his own form and nature. For if one orb in this sort can move another, why could it not move itself, being more present to itself then any other; If they say by a corporal application of bodies and their parts. I see not how they can avoid this renitency and reaction, which always doth suppose some resistance: for how can one solid and hard body be imagined to heave and push another forward without some reluctancy in the patient? because the inferior Orb having of itself a proper motion, this must needs be violent, as supposing a forcing & wresting of Nature from her proper course, whereof it is not hard to show a sensible demonstration; because the Orb naturally directed one way, is turned and directed another way at the same time: which both motions concurring in the same body, must needs offer violence one to the other. Moreover the immunity from corruptible qualities granted to the Heavens, which is the ground of this opinion; hath been mun talked of amongst the Aristoteleans▪ but never warranted by any certain demonstration: we see (say these Philosophers) the Heavens to have remained since the beginning of the World, without any sensible alteration and change: and therefore must all the Elementary and corruptible qualities be excluded. To disprove this, I need go no farther than the last Comet, which Mathematicians by the parallax found to be in the heavens. And whereas otherwise they seek a sensible alteration in other parts, they deceive themselves: for as in the earth whereon we dwell, however the parts interchangeably corrupt and engender daily, yet the whole Globe will apparently remain the same, keeping its integrity: so may it happen to many of the superior Globes, whose parts daily corrupted and renewed again (although, for the great distance, to us insensible) the whole Globe remaineth still perfect in his perfect Sphericity. I cease any further to invade another's Province, and therefore descend to a second argument, to prove this extraordinary, violent, and swift motion in the heavens to be improbable. It is ordinarily observed in other Orbs of the heavens, that the higher the Orb is placed, the motion is slower; as for example, the Sphere of the Moon, which is next the Earth, is carried about in 27 days. Mercury and Venus are slow enough in their course, as the former in 80 days, the latter in 9 months: the Sun in a year; Mars in 2 years; jupiter in 12; Saturn in 30. Also those Astronomers which give the fixed stars a motion, would have them to finish their course, according to Ptolemy, in 36000: but if we will believe Copernicus, in 25816 years: so that the higher and greater the circles be, so much slower will be the motion: what injury were it then to the concord and harmony of Nature, to impose upon the highest Orb of all, such an unmeasurable strange motion, which might strike the most Seraphic Angel into admiration? To these may be added other Arguments in Copernicus, which albeit they be not demonstrative, will make the matter more probable. First, that Nature in all things is a compendious and short worker, and useth not many helps for such things as may be performed by fewer: and therefore need we not to use the help of so many Orbs and concamerations to square our observations, which will find more steady footing in this one ground once granted, of the Earth's circular motion: Secondly it will seem more consonant and agreeable to Nature, that the highest and uttermost Sphere of all, which bounds and engirts in all the World beside, should rest quiet and unmoveable, then to suffer such an intolerable motion, as might endanger the whole Fabric. Lastly, I may add this one, that this diurnal motion, granted to the first Movable, can in my judgement hardly stand with the regularity of heavenly Bodies, if we express it no otherwise then the ordinary sort of Astronomers. For a regular motion is defined, to be that whereby in equal times a body is moved through equal places. But this Diurnal motion received from the first Movable, concurring with the Sun's annual motion, will exclude this equality. For first it is granted, that the Sun in his motion from the Aequator, to the Tropic, according to sense, runs ●uery day in a distinct parallel: for although every minute he declines somewhat from the Aequator toward the Tropic, yet the difference is not sensible: so that we may well every day assign a parallelll-in● to the Sun's motion. Secondly, they must grant that these parallels are diminished, and grow less and less toward the Tropic, from the Aequator. Thirdly, that (as we have foreshowed) of two bodies moving in the same time on the same centre, that should move faster, which is greater: so one body moving in divers unequal circles, in equal time, it must of necessity follow that it must needs move faster, in that which is greater: here we may conclude, he moves faster in the Aequator, then in the Tropic, because in the one he is carried in a greater parallel, in the other a less, and yet in the same period of time, as we may see in this Figure following. Let the Sun be in the point of the Ecliptic A, it is manifest that he will sensibly move for that day in the parallel AP. Then let him be moved by his periodicke motion, into the point of the Ecliptic B, it will for that moment move in the parallel IBO. Last of all, let it be in the point of the Aequator C. his parallel will be HCL. It is manifest out of our former grounds, that he will be moved slowest in AP. Faster in IO. Fastest of all in HCL. Which swiftness and slowness in the Sun's motion makes it irregular. Some have thought to salve this by saying that this motion is Regular because in equal time, the Sun goes proportional, not equal spaces, which Aguillonius holds in his Optics. But this shift is frivolous; because it takes not away the objection, why the Sun should move faster and slower▪ For the Heaven's being a natural, not a voluntary agent; and according to these grounds finding no hindrance or impediment; must always work to his utmost power, and so cannot slack or increase his action, or motion, that it should move faster or slower. Hitherto have we showed that this Diurnal motion cannot without some absurdity be granted to the heavens: in the next place we are to show, that it no way can cross the Natural disposition of the Earth itself, which we shall demonstrate in this manner. If this circular motion should cross the disposition of the Earthly Globe, it would happen either immediately in respect of the mere Nature, which the Logicians call à priore; or else in regard of certain properties, which follow necessarily the Nature of it, which they term à posteriori. If they say it happens à priori in regard of the mere Nature▪ they must necessarily have recourse to the proprieties and accidents for a demonstration: For the Internal forms of all things being in themselves insensible, cannot be discovered unto us but by their external proprieties▪ But if probable conjecture may here find any place, I see no reason why the earth being found to be of a magnetical temper, should not challenge the same which other magnetical Globes far greater than the Earth, possess; to wit, a circular revolution about her own Poles; which Kepler and Galileus have observed aswell in the Sun, as jupiter▪ and in like matters to judge alike, seems more warrantable, then to feign a disparity, which Nature never grounded, or observation found. But this, as a matter of small note, I easily pass over, following the footsteps of our Adversaries, which seek to demonstrate the Earth's stability out of the external effects and proprieties. If then this Revolution contradict any propriety▪ it must be of necessity either in regard of the Quantity and Magnitude; or else in respect of the figure and quality, or of some Motion, or of the si●e and position; for I find no other propriety of any moment which can enter into this consideration: First, that the Quantity can no way thwart this circular Revolution, is manifest, because it would happen either in that it were too Great, or too Little. It cannot be by reason of the greatness; because the great globes of the Sun and jupiter, manifold greater than the Globe of the Earth; are by late experiments of the Trunk-spectacle, found to move about their own▪ Axle in a small portion of time: the like have others delivered of the Mo●n● and Venus▪ It is not then the Mass or quantity which can hinder it in the Earth; neither on the other side can it be the smallness: for bodies smaller are found as apt, or rather apt to receive a circular motion, which they will not deny me; and therefore cannot this be prejudicial to the motion of the Earth. In the next place the figure of the Earthly Globe cannot hinder this motion, because by all sound Philosophers, being acknowledged to be Spherical, it cannot but be deemed most apt to receive Revolution; in so much as some have hence laboured to draw an argument for the Earth's circular motion, as deeming this Figure to be given to the Earth for no other end or use. Thirdly, no Quality in the Earth can resist this circular motion; for this quality (by the consent of all) would be the natural heaviness or weight of the Earth: But this heaviness takes not away the natural Revolution: 1 Because Gravity or heaviness is nothing else but the inclination of the parts of the Earth, returning to their natural place, having been sequestered from it: but these parts having once regained their proper places, move no farther, nor are in those places esteemed heavy, or weighty: whence it is commonly said amongst the Peripatetics, Nihil gravitat in suo loco, nothing is heavy in his own place, which may easily be demonstrated out of Staticke principles, whereby we find heaviness and lightness to be given to the bodies according to the medium, and their massiness and solidity in respect of one to the other. 2 If this heaviness be opposed to the circular motion then either immediately by itself, or secondarily by some concomitant accident. It cannot be the first, because gravity is a quality; but motion; an action; which for aught my Philosophy hath taught me, are not opposite▪ If by reason of some accident; then (no question) because it is contrary to lightness or levity, which seems requisite to such a motion: We willingly yield this natural gravity of the parts of the Earth to stand opposite to the motion of Ascent or moving upward from the Centre; but nevertheless it is not any way contrary to the circular motion: 1 Because contraries are always supposed to be in eodem genere, in the same kind: but the motion of heavy bodies to the Centre, and of the Earth about the Centre, are not in the same kind, the one being a right motion, the other circular; neither can the weight of the Terrestrial mass add or diminish any thing in regard of the circular motion, because a Spherical and a right motion cannot either directly concur, or directly oppose one the other. 2 We may urge out of the 4 Chap. of Aristotle's 1 book De Calo, That no circular motion can admit of contrariety: which he confirms by a demonstration, which we forbear here to insert, being loath to rove too far from our present matter. At length we will prove that this orbicular motion given unto the Earth, cannot overthrow or thwart any other motion of the Earth: for if this were so, it would happen for one of these two respects; Either because the Earth hath some motion or other contrary to this; or else because diverse motions cannot be in the Earth. The first cannot be true, for that we have spoken before; because the right motion they find in the Earth, cannot be judged contrary to the Spherical; neither can the later be admitted as an undoubted truth; for howsoever Aristotle sets it down for an Axiom, that one simple body hath but one simple motion, yet being absolutely understood without any limitation, will be found by experience false: for it is manifest out of the experiment of the new Perspicils, that the Bodies of the Sun and jupiter, simple in nature, (if we believe Aristoteleans) have at least a double motion, the one upon their own Poles less than Diurnal, the other of their Centres, which are moved from the West unto the East, upon other Poles familiarly known unto Astronomers. The Peripatetics here seek an evasion, by distinguishing the motions of the Planets into a proper or natural, and Accidental or mutuaticious: but this answer comes not home to this present question. First, because these two motions of the Sun and jupiter will easily be proved to be natural and without violence, or restraint: Secondly, because in this answer they suppose the Heavens to be cut and divided into divers Orbs, Sections, and Con●amerations, which later Astronomers upon better experience have derided, or at least omitted as Hypotheses or suppositions, to settle Imagination, rather than real, or true grounds. If they would understand this Principle of Aristotle, to wit▪ That one simple body should challenge one simple motion: of a motion of the same kind it might perhaps obtain some credit. But the right motion of the parts joining to the whole, and the Circular motion: also the Circular motion of a Planet about his own Axle, and the Circular motion itself about the Earth, are found to be divers kinds, and therefore no way incompatible in the same subject. Moreover what infallible argument can persuade us, that the Globe of the Earth is a mere simple Body, such as Aristotle describes unto us in his Philosophy? Either this imaginary simplicity must be sought in the Real Existence of the Earth, or else in our mental Abstraction. The former they cannot aver, because not only the Elements themselves, by their own confession, are impure and corrupted: But the whole Globe of the Earth seems to consist of divers mixtures, and Heterogeneal bodies, which apparently exclude such simplicity If they would have it rather to consist in the Abstraction or separation of the mind, which may divide and distinguish between the true nature of the Earth, and his Accidental Natures; I shall not contradict: although it seem ●ather grounded on imaginary conjecture, than experience: That the Earth of itself distinguished from the waters, should have any such simple Nature. If we follow reason and experience as our Guides, we shall observe in the Terrestrial Globe a twofold constitution; The one Elementary from the parts whereof it consists, out of which it cannot challenge any motion, but the right, which is of the parts separated from the whole, agreeing to the Earth▪ Water, and all other heavy bodies thereof consisting. The other magnetical, wherein all other bodies are united in one Magnetical form of the Earth. In which sort the whole Globe of the Earth may be termed a Homogeneal substance; for howsoever the matter and the Elements whereof it consists▪ seem Heterogeneal and divers one from the other; yet since in this Magnetical Nature, there is a Harmony and Communion, well we may call it a Homogenity of the Form and Nature; not of the Matter and Quantity, as common Philosophers commonly use the word: So that every part or Element whereof this Terrestrial Sphere is compounded, may claim his own motion, and properly; yet all conspiring in one universal form of a Spherical Body, may notwithstanding be turned round with a Spherical motion. In the last place we are to prove that this Circular motion granted unto the Earth, can no way oppose or endanger the natural site or position of the Earth: If the situation or position were feared to be changed, it must needs happen one of these ways; either that the Centre of the Earth should be moved out of his place: or that the parts should be separated & distracted one from the other; or that the Poles should be changed and altered: The first cannot touch our assertion; because in this place we affirm not, that the centre of the Globe is moved out of his place; but that the whole Earth in the same place is turned round upon her own Centre. For the opinion of Copernicus, which holds the Centre of the Earth to move round about the earth, we shall censure in our next Chapter▪ In the second place, the parts of the Earth by this motion cannot be separated or disunited one from the other: first, because all the parts are united to the whole by their natural gravity; that if by chance they should be separated, they would naturally return back unto their own place. Secondly, this motion is supposed Natural & not violent, which in so great and massy a Body, can make no sensible Alteration. Lastly, the Poles of the Earth by this means, cannot be moved out of their places; because by a certain Magnetical verticity (as we have formerly showed) the same Poles of the Earth always naturally respect the same points of the Heavens, as if they were bound unto two firm Pillars indissoluble. Hitherto having proved the Circular motion of the Earth; neither to be given to the Heavens without some absurdity, and yet no way to contradict or oppose the Nature of the Terrestrial Globe; we are in the third place to examine the reasons usually urged against this Assertion. The first reason is drawn from sense. If there were any such Spherical motion (say they) how comes it to pass, that it cannot of us be perceived? an Argument worthy such Philosophers, as measure all rather by seeming sense, then Demonstrative reason; who cannot observe on the sea in a calm, that the ship wherein he is carried will seem to rest, or at least to move slowly▪ and the cliffs and shores to move unto the opposite part? What then should we think of the motion of the whole Terrestrial Globe? which hath less cause to be perceived, then that of a ship? The Bulk of a ship in respect of the Earth is small and of no quantity; the other being huge and massy: The motion of the ship merely violent, enforced by the winds; of the Earth natural and uniform, stirred up of his proper and natural inclination, so that if any such motion be in the earth, it were impossible to be perceived by sense: Secondly, they urge against us, that in Homogeneal Bodies, there is the same motion of the whole, and all the parts: But every part of the Earth (as experience teacheth) is moved downward toward the Centre, and therefore the whole can have no other motion: To this objection we have partly answered before; yet to give further satisfaction, we will add something more: It is one thing to speak of the whole Terrestrial Globe and Sphere; another of the several parts and Elements whereof it consists: If the whole Sphere be understood, we ascribe unto it no other motion but the circular, which we here labour to establish. The parts, whereof this Terrestrial Sphere consists, may be considered two ways; either as they are united in the whole by a Magnetical form, or disjoined and taken by themselves: In the former the parts of the Earth are supposed to move in the same motion, by which the whole Sphere of the Earth is moved; because the whole and all the parts taken together, are the same, and subject to the same circular revolution. Notwithstanding this, any part several and disjoined from the whole, hath a right motion downward toward the Centre, by which it returns to its true natural union. This inclination of the parts agrees not with the whole Earth, neither unto any part united and conglobated to the whole; but only to a part separated from his place; so that the whole, may notwithstanding in his place enjoy a circular motion. Now to come more nearly home unto their Arguments drawn from the Homogeneity of the Earth, we answer as before, that there is a twofold Homogeneity: The one of the matter and quantity; the other of the Magnetical form and Nature of the former: we may conclude out of the right motion of all the parts, the disposition of the whole, so we understand it in a good sense: first that every part is here to be understood, not in, but out of his proper place: Secondly, that by the whole, we ought not to understand the whole Globe with all his parts, conformed in one Spherical frame; but all the parts indefinitely taken; for if we should understand of the whole Globe, their Argument will in no way hold true: If according to the later, we might well grant them their Conclusion, yet can it not oppugn our Assertion: Because it will follow out of the Natural inclination of every part, that all the parts severally taken, have such a disposition of returning to the Earth, being separated there from: Yet will not this by any necessary inference be proved to agree to the whole Globe of the Earth; but rather will it follow contrariwise, that the whole Sphere of the Earth is moved circularly, and therefore every part with, and in it, is moved with the whole in the same motion. A third argument which is thought greater than all the other, is drawn from two experiments: The first is, that a stone or Bullet let fall from a higher place to the ground, will perpendicularly descend to the point of the Earth right under: Secondly, that two Bullets imagined to be of equal weight and matter, being discharged from equal pieces of ordinance, with the like quantity of powder, the one towards the East, the other towards the West, will reach an equal distance in the Earth; both which would seem impossible if we grant this supposition of the Earth's circular revolution. For in the former case, the Earth sliding away swiftly during the fall of the stone, would change the point marked out for another: And in the second, for the like cause, the Bullet shot towards the East, being prevented by the swiftness of the Earth's motion, carrying along with it the Ordinance out of which it proceeded, should return back over the shooters-head; and contrariwise that Bullet shot towards the West, besides his own motion, by the motion of the Earth the other way, should be carried so much farther, as the Earth is removed from the place where it was first discharged: Both which experiments seem to cross this circumgyration of the Terrestrial Globe, which our magnetical Cosmographers labour to confirm: But with them to give an answer to these and the like experiments, we must distinguish the parts of the Earth into three sorts; some are hard and solid parts, adjoined to the Globe, as stones, minerals, & what else in the bowels of the Earth is united to it, or at least necessarily adherent to the outward face of it. Some other parts there are of a thin and fluid substance, as the Air and other vapours in it, derived from the Earth; A third sort there are of such parts as being in themselves solid, are notwithstanding by some violence separated from the solid globe, as stones cast into the Air; Arrows, Bullets, and such like, discharged from the hand or Engine: For the two former we may easily imagine them carried with the same circular motion, which we assign unto the whole, being no other than the parts of it depending from the whole mass: For the third sort (whereof consists the difficulty) we cannot imagine them so moved round, as if they were wholly separated from the Communion of the Earthly Sphere; for howsoever there seems a separation according to matter and quantity, yet retain they the same magnetical inclination to the whole mass, as if they were united to it; and therefore such solid parts are moved with the same uniform and natural motion wherewith the Earth itself is turned; so that in solid bodies so separated from the superficies of the Earth, of an Arrow or Bullets shot, we must imagine a twofold motion: The one Natural & uniform, whereby they are moved as homogeneal parts according to the revolution of the whole Sphere: The other violent by force impressed from the Agent: The right motion proceeding from the strength of the shooter, cannot cross or hinder the Natural, because the one being right, and the other circular, admit no such proportion, as that one should hinder or further the other: Neither can these motions well be termed contrary or opposite, which are in diverse kinds: To explain this matter farther, we will add this Diagramme; L●t the whole orb of the earth be imagined to be LQM; whose centre is A, the thickness of the Air ascending from the Earth O Q. Now as the orb of this fluid substance of the air ascending uniformly is moved round with the Globe of the earth, so must we imagine the part of it marked out by the right line OQ to be carried round with an unalterable Revolution. Wherefore if any heavy body should be placed in the Line OQ; as for example P, it will fall down toward the centre by the shortest way in the same line OQ: which motion downwards towards the centre, can neither be hindered by the circular motion of the Earth, nor yet Mixed or compounded with it: It cannot be hindered: because (as we have showed) a Right motion and a circular being not in the same kind, cannot properly be reputed contrary: Neither for the same cause can they be mixed or compounded: Wherefore this motion will be no other than one simple and Right motion, never varying from the Line OQ: which being once understood, it is no hard thing to imagine a Bullet or stone forced by equal strength from Q towards L, and from Q. towards the point M, to observe always a like distance notwithstanding the Earth's circular Revolution. Having hitherto showed this Spherical motion of the Earth to be possible, and no way to contradict Nature, we are in the next place to show it to be no way opposite to the sense of holy Scripture. This opinion of the Earth's circular motion, hath suffered much wrong by a certain persuasion of some men, that it contradicts the Text of Holy Scripture. Some precise men▪ mor● ready to urge, then understand what they allege, will condemn without examination, and stick to the plain l●tter, notwithstanding all absurdities, denying the conclusion in despite of the premises. To these have associated themselves another sort, more to be regarded, as more learned; the Critics (I mean) of our Age, who like Popes or Dictatours, have taken upon them an Universal authority to censure all which they never understood. Had these men contained themselues in their own bounds, they might questionless have done good service to the Commonwealth of Learning▪ But when the servant presumes to control the Mistress, the house seems much out of order. To seek for a determination of a Cosmographical doubt in the Grammatical resolution of two or three Hebrew words, (which some have gone about) were to neglect the kernel, and make a banquet on the shells. But howsoever, we hope to make it appear, that the Scripture understood as it ought to be, is so far from favouring their opinion, that the words themselves can hardly admit of such a sense, as they would fasten on them. But ere we descend to the examination of particular places of holy Scriptures alleged in their behalf, we will show this opinion to be much different from that of Copernicus, as somewhat more moderate, and able to suffer an easier reconcilement with the holy Text. For the places alleged of sacred Scripture, which seem to oppose our Assertion, either seem to prove the circular motion of the Heavens, or the rest, and stability of the Earth. But this opinion holding a Mediocrity betwixt both, neither takes away the motion from the Heavens, neither oppugnes such a Rest or quietness in the Earth, as the Scriptures understand. For first, albeit we take away from the Heavens the diurnal motion, and give it to the Earth: yet we grant to the heavenly Orbs their several motions, allowing no part of it to be absolutely void of motion, Secondly, we must understand this in a fourfold sense; as opposed to four kinds of Motions. First to the progressive Motion of the Centre of the Terrestrial globe from place to place. Secondly, to the separation or dissolution of the parts one from the other, by which the Globe may lose his integrity. Thirdly to the Translocation of the Poles, whereby the Poles inclining to one side or another, may be imagined to change their position. Fourthly, to the Diurnal Motion. In the first sense we give a Rest and stability to the Earth, because the Earth, howsoever movable, we place in the Centre of the world, as we shall prove in the next Chapter. In the second sense we also grant it; because all the parts of the Earth being of a heavy nature, fall naturally downwards▪ and unite themselves unto the whole, to decline such a dissolution: In the third acception we likewise allow such a stability: because the Poles of the Earth (as we have showed) by their magnetical inclination, always respect the same points in the heavens, and can from thence by no means remove themselves. Only in the fourth and last sense we exclude a Rest, allowing only a diurnal Revolution from West to East in twenty four hours. The first argument alleged against us is taken out of the 1 Chapter of Ecclesiastes: una generatio (saith Solomon) abit, & altera advenit, quamuis. Terna in saeculum permaneat. Wherein by the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which some interpret (Stat▪) they would infer a perpetual stability of the Earth. A childish consequence, which a grave Divine might well be ashamed to urge: every man of common understanding may plainly perceive that Salomon's scope in this Chapter was, to show the vanity & uncertainty of all things under the Sun: which as a special argument amongst others he amplifies from the success●ie mutation and changes of men living on the Earth: in that one generation goeth away, and another cometh, but the Earth keeps her integrity, and remains in the same state. This Constancy then, or remaining of the earth, we can in no wise oppose to any circular motion, but to the changes and uncertainty of men in their generations; in which sense our most learned Linguists understand it. Would not this seem to any man a ridiculous argumentation, if any man should thus dispute: One Miller comes, and another goes, but the Mill remains still: Ergo the Mill hath in it no motion? Or in a River, one generation of Fishes is produced, and another is decayed; but the River remains the same, Ergo the River remains still unmoved? Let any man go no farther than the plain words whereon these Grammarians stand, he will easily find out another interpretation. For the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 derived from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies as much as to persist, subsist, or to endure, being opposite to 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which signifies as much as to stagger or start aside from his place, or position: so that nothing from hence can be inferred to contradict the Spherical Revolution of the Earth in her proper place, upon her own Poles, which we only maintain. A second reason they draw from the Psalm 104, Fundavit Terram super bases suas, ne dimoveatur in saeculum. vers. 5. out of these words, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 wherein, (as one would persuade) no less than three arguments are couched in three bare terms: But these arguments will (I fear) prove as little as the former. For first the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifying as much naturally as to found or seat in a place or frame, is not altogether, without a Metaphor given to the Earth, because Almighty God hath so placed it upon her own centre Poles and Axle, that she cannot be moved out of it: Likewise 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 implies no other than a seat or place, being derived from the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which signifies no more than to perfect, establish, or make ready: The third is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 from the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which can signify no other than to incline, to nod, slide, fall, or turn aside out of his place: All which can suffer no other paraphrase or Interpretation then this, That Almighty God hath set the Globe of the Earth so strongly fixed in her proper frame, that no power can be so strong to dissolve this Fabric, or turn her out of her appointed place: which exposition of this place of Scripture, Copernicus himself would easily grant, as no way opposite to the triple motion he labours to establish▪ Here are these three arguments drawn from three words, suddenly shrunk into nothing. Another reason which I take to be stronger than the former, some have taken out of the 19 Psalm; where speaking of the Sun, he uses these words. In them hath he set a Tabernacle for the Sun. 5 Which is as a bridegroom coming out of his chamber▪ and rejoiceth as a giant to run his course: 6 His going forth is from the end of the Heavens; and his circuit unto the ends of it: and there is nothing hid from the heat thereof. Out of which words the Heavens should seem to challenge the motion, which we have given unto the Earth. To this we answer two ways: First, that although this may oppugn Copernicus his opinion, that the Sun standeth still in the midst as the centre of the World; yet may it well stand with our Assertion, who allow the Sun his several motion in the Ecliptic: whether those words of the Psalm be to be understood of the Sun's Diurnal or Periodicke Motion, is not so soon decided: the Scripture not specifying expressly either. 2 we may answer with the Copernicâns; That the Holy Ghost in these or the like places speaks 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉: being willing to descend to the weakest of men's capacity, and not to trouble men's conceits with such matters as to vulgar judgements might seem unlikely or improbable. The like Analogy of speech may we find in the first of Genesis, where the Moon is called one of the greater lights in regard of her appearance, being notwithstanding one of the least. These may suffice to show the opinion of the earth's circular motion to be probable: I promised no more, & I hope I have performed no less. I never held it an article of my faith, to defend the one, or oppugn the other; and therefore leave every man to his own free judgement, to embrace or reject what he please. CHAP. V. Of the Site, Stability, and Proportion of the Earth. 1 OF Terrestrial affections which agree in respect of the Earth itself, we have hitherto spoken: We are now to treat of such as agree to it in respect of the Heavens. These are chiefly three; 1 The Site, 2 The Stability. 3 The Proportion. 2 The Site is the local position of the Earth in respect of the Celestial Bodies. It might seem a hard and almost impossible task for any man to reconcile that which hath been spoken in the former Chapter concerning the Earth's circular Revolution, with the grounds of common Geographers, which hold the Terrestrial Globe to be settled and fixed in the Centre of the world. The reason is; because such as hold the circular motion of the Earth, (whereof the chief is Copernicus) would have the Sun to stand still, as the fixed Centre of the Universe, and the Earth to move round about him betwixt Mars and Venus, which seems clean opposite to the former opinion. I must confess that Copernicus his opinion entirely taken and understood, standeth altogether opposite to these our grounds: yet may that motion of the Earth which we have established in the former Chapter (for aught I yet know) be well reconciled with their opinion, which hold the Earth to be the Centre of the world. For the circular Revolution we gave to the Terrestrial Globe, was not a motion of the Centre of it, from one place to another, as that of the Stars which move round about the Earth; but rather a turning of itself in its own place, upon her own Poles and Axletree, in such sort as the wheel of a mill, or such a like engine fixed in one place is turned upon his own Axle: So that the motion we there understood was only the Diurnal motion of 24 hours, making the Day and Night. The other two motions mentioned by Copernicus, may be found out in the Heavens, and left to Astronomers. The reasons why I entirely embrace not Copernicus his opinion, are chiefly two. First, because it seems too harsh and dissonant in nature, to make one and the selfsame body subject to so many motions, especially such as by common Philosophers is denied all motion. Secondly, because the other motions granted to the Earth must needs suppose it to be placed out of the Centre of the world; the contrary of which we shall in this Chapter, God willing, sufficiently demonstrate. The motion therefore most called in question, and most likely to be found in the Earth rather than in the Heaven, is the Diurnal Revolution performed in 24 hours from the West to East: which (as we have proved) being given to the Heavens would be far swifter than nature can well suffer: wherefore with more probability may this motion be taken from the heavens, and given unto the Earth: The other without any absurdity at all may be granted in the Heavens: Sith no repugnancy is found in nature, but that every heavenly body may be furnished with some motion: and therefore Copernicus might have granted the Sun and fixed Stars their several motions as well as the rest, which would have seemed far more probable then to have endowed the Earth with a Triplicity of motion. These things being thus opened, I will set down their Theorems. 1 The Terrestrial Globe is the Centre of the whole world. To understand aright this proposition, we must consider that a Centre may be taken two manner of ways: either Geometrically, or Optically: In Geometry it is taken for an imaginary point, conceived in a magnitude devoid of all quantity, yet bounding and termining all Magnitudes: Optically it is usually taken for a small and insensible Magnitude; because to the fight it may seem no other than a Point; In which last sense we may call the Earth the Centre: For although the Earthly Sphere is endowed with a great and massy substance, yet (as we shall hereafter demonstrate) in respect of the Firmament this greatness would vanish into nothing. For if a man standing in the Firmament should behold it, it would seem no other than as a small point. This being declared, we will produce these reasons to prove the Earth to be the Centre of the Universe. The Centre, I say, not of all heavenly motions (for some Stars are moved upon their own Centre) but of the whole heavenly machine being collectively taken as one Body The first argument is of Aristotle, taken from the gravity or natural inclination of all heavy bodies to the Centre. The Earth (saith he) being a heavy & massy body, must needs seek the lowest place, which is farthest off from the Heavens. But this can be no other than the Centre or midst point of the whole world. Which argument by others is more subtly urged in this manner. Suppose the whole mass of the Earth were cut and divided into many parts, equal the one to the other, of the same weight and figure: which parts so divided were placed in diverse places under the concave Superficies of the Moon, that they might be freely left to themselves to move according to their natural inclinations: It is most certain that all their parts being of the same nature, weight, quantity, and figure, would descend with the same motion, & in the same equal time, to the same place; which could in no wise happen, except they should concur in the Centre of the world. But this reason, for aught I understand, is only probable, and not backed with any necessary demonstration. For it proves not thing else but the Earth to be the Centre of all earthy and heavy bodies, and not to be absolutely placed in the exact middle of the world. Another reason not much unlike the former, is drawn by some from a final cause, and the natural harmony of the parts of the world, one with the other: The Earth (say they) is of all other bodies, the most vile, and sordid: Therefore it is agreeable to nature, that it should be placed in the middle, equally distant from each part of the Heavens, that one part might not seem to complain of this unpleasing vicinity more than another: But this reason takes as granted to matters, as yet not decided. First, that the Earth, amongst all other bodies, is most vile and sordid, depending on the ground of Peripatetics, that the heavenly bodies suffer no corruption, a thing sooner spoken then proved. Secondly that pure and impure bodies, the most excellent and most vile in nature, are always most distant, as in nature, so in place: which is a peremptory assertion without ground. A third reason more probable than the former, is drawn from the apparences of Stars above the Horizon: It is manifest that the Stars above the Horizon appear always to be of one, and the selfsame magnitude, and quantity, whether in the vertical point, or in the East, or the West, or any other place: whence we may collect that they differ equally in distance from the Earth, and by consequence the Earth is seated in the middle of the world: for if it were otherwise, that the Stars in some place should be nearer, in other farther of●, they would somewhere seem greater, otherwhere lesser, according to the grounds of the Optics. This reason, howsoever popular, seems to admit a twofold exception. First, because it implies that a man standing on the superficies of the Earth is equally distant from all places and parts of the Heavens, whereas the heavens in the Horizon are farther distant, by reason of a whole semidiameter of the earth interposed. Secondly, all Stars arising in the East, or setting in the West, ordinarily seem greater than in the Vertical point, by reason of vapours ascending and interposed. Whence we cannot well gather the Earth to be seated in the midst from the like appearance of the Stars when experience teacheth the contrary, that they seem not always of the like magnitude. Concerning the first, we answer that the Semidiameter of the earth interposed betwixt the Superficies and Centre, is in itself greater. But this (as we shall prove) in respect of the Heavens is so little, that the sense cannot gather any difference in observation of the Stars, but that they should always appear of the like magnitude. Concerning the second, we must needs acknowledge that vapours ascending about the Horizon by an optical Refraction, make the Stars seem greater than other wise they would do. But the reason may be understood in this sort: that whether a ●an be placed in the same Horizon where the Sun is when he riseth, or under that Horizon where the Sun is now, under his Meridian, or under that horizon where he is setting, he will appear to be of one and the selfsame greatness without any sensible difference. Whereas therefore they speak of the appearance of Stars, they would have them taken as abstracted from all impediments of sight or interposed vapours, and so the reason may obtain her force. The fourth reason why the earth should be seated in the midst, alleged by Ptolemy, and others, is this: wheresoever any man stands on the Surface of the Earth, six signs of the Zodiac will show themselves, and the other six signs will lie hid; and by consequence half the heavens will appear, the other half will be under; which is an evident reason that the Earth is in the midst, for otherwise it could not so happen. The former is confirmed by Ptolemy, Alphraganus, and the best Astronomers: the consequence may be inferred out of natural reason. This argument will sufficiently hold upon this supposition mentioned before, and to be proved hereafter: That the Earth having no sensible magnitude in respect of the Firmament, no sensible difference can show itself betwixt the Sensible, and the Rational Horizon. Besides these reasons, which make the matter more than probable: others are produced by Ptolemy demonstrative, ●ot admitting any evident or probable exception or evasion. The first is this; If the Earth be placed out of the Centre of the world, it must have of necessity one of these three Sites or positions: Either it must be in the plain of the Equinoctial: or at least it must be placed, not only without the plain of the Equinoctial, but without the Axletree: That is, to express it plainer; It must either be placed beside the Axletree, yet equally distant from both the Poles; or else it must be on the Axletree, and so consequently nearer to one Pole then the other: or thirdly, it must needs be beside the Axletree, yet nearer to one Pole then another. If the first position were admitted, these absurdities would of necessity follow. First, that in a right Sphere there would happen no Equinoctial, but only in that Horizon which passeth by the Centre of the world: for example sake; ●et there be imagined a Sphere, BDCE, whose Centre is A: let the Equator be DE: the Axletree of the world BC: and let the Earth be in F, the right Horizon HG not passing by the Centre of the world A: which shall be parallel to the Axis BC: since the Equator cuts the Horizon in right angles; It is most manifest that not only the equatour, but other parallels of the same will be unequally divided of the Horizon: for as much as it passeth not by the Centre or the Poles of the world: wherefore it must needs follow, that the days must continually be unequal to the nights: which contradicts all experience; because in a right Sphere the days are always found to be equal to the nights. Secondly, out of this position it would follow, that no man in a right Sphere should behold the half or hemisphere of the heavens, but either a greater or lesser part, as may be demonstrated out of the same Diagramme, whereas sense can testify that six signs of the Zodiac are always conspicuous above our Horizon, and the other six always hid: only excepting that Horizon which passeth by the Centre of the Earth, wherein the Mediety of Heaven is conspicuous. Thirdly, the same Stars in a clear air should not always seem of the same magnitude; for if the earth be placed in the Equinoctial plain, and beside the Axis of the world toward the Zenith or Meridian; the Stars which are in the Meridian will appear greater than in the East or West, because they are nearer. But if it be placed near the Nadir or midnight point, they will appear greater in the East or West, then in the Meridian: if it should be placed towards the East or West, the Stars would either seem greater in the East then in the West, or contrariwise, greater in the West than the East: all which plainly contradicts experience. Moreover it would hence follow out of this last, that the forenoon would not be equal to the afternoon, for as much as the Meridian circle passeth by our vertical point, which in this case cannot be in the middle of the hemisphere, but will decline more, either to the East or the West. Fourthly, it must needs follow that in an oblique Sphere, either there will be no Equinoctial at all, or at least, if there were any, it would not be in the midst betwixt the two Solstices of Summer and Winter; which is against all common experience. To explain which assertion, let there be a Sphere ABCD, whose Centre shall be E: wherein we will conceive the equatour to be BD: the two Tropics IL, and XH: the Axletree of the world AC: Now if the Earth should be placed in the plain of the equatour, out of the Axis of the world, as in F let there first be an oblique Horizon ZFY, cutting all the parallels into unequal parts, and the Axis in those parallels which are without: it is manifest that in the said Horizon there will be no Equinoctial; because the Horizon equally divides in two halves only that parallel which is described by P, which nevertheless the Sun never comes unto, as never going beyond the Tropic XH: Let there be another oblique Horizon OFM cutting the Axle AC within the said parallels in N: It is manifest by reason, that there will happen an equinoctial in the said Horizon when the Sun shall describe the parallel by N: because this parallel is by the Horizon divided into two equal parts. But this can in no wise happen in a middle space and time betwixt the two Solstices, for as much as the Equator only is equally distant and removed from either Solstice. It is also manifest▪ that the Sun residing in BD the equator, there can be no equinoctial, but either after or before: which is absurd and opposite to observation. Fiftly, it will be inferred out of these grounds, that no Horizon shall divide the Heavens into two equal parts besides that which concurres with the equinoctial circle, as BD, and such as are drawn by BD. Wherefore all people should not behold the one half of the heavens. Sixtly, out of this opinion would necessarily be concluded, that the excess of the greatest and longest day above the equinoctial day, should not be equalised by the defect of the shortest day, by how much it is exceeded by the equinoctial day: which is against all common experience; the consequence shall appear by demonstration. Suppose A to be the Arctic Pole: then will PG be the excess of the longest day XP above XG the Equinoctial day. But KQ is the defect wherein the shortest day IQ, is exceeded of the Equinoctial day IK. All these absurdities are avoided, if we put the Earth in the Centre E. for so in every oblique Horizon, as in SIR, will be an Equinoctial, the Sun risiding in the Aequator. 2 The Heavens will be divided into two equal halves, and PG the excess of the longest day, will be equal to KV, the defect of the shortest day: whence we may conclude the first part of this argument, that the Earth is not besides the Axis in the plain of the Equinoctial. Concerning the second position: if we should place the earth in the Axis of the world out of the plain of the Equinoctial, as many, or more absurdities would of necessity follow: for example sake, let it be imagined in P: First than no Horizon beside a right would cut the Heaven into two equal parts or halves, and consequently the Zodiac. But this is proved false by experience (as we have showed) because six signs of the Zodiac are always above and conspicuous, and the other six under. Secondly only under a right Horizon would there be an Equinoctial, because only such an Horizon equally divides the Equatour into two halves, as may be seen in the former figure, in which the Equatour is conceived to be BD: the right Horizon AC. the oblique YZ, cutting the Equator in F into two unequal parts: Now if it should happen that in any oblique Horizon, there should be an equinoxe, it could no wise be in the middle time betwixt the two Solstices, but would be much nearer to the one then to the other; as if the Earth w●re placed in N, betwixt the Tropic XH, and the Equatour BD, there would be an equinoxe when the Sun passeth in the parallel by N. which parallel is far nearer to the Summer Solstice, than the Winter Solstice. But if the Earth were in G, there would happen an equinoxe just in the day of the Summer Solstice; all which are most absurd, and most repugnant to common sense. Thirdly, this granted, the whole order and proportion of increase and decrease of days and nights, would be confused and troubled. It is agreed on by consent of all Cosmographers, that every where without the right Horizon, there is such an order and proportion of the increase & decrease of the days and nights, that twice in a year the days are equal to the nights▪ to wit, in the mean, or middle betwixt the longest and the shortest day, that the longest day is equal to the longest night, and the shortest day to the shortest night. That the excess of the longest day above the Equinoctial day, is so much as is the defect of the shortest day in regard of the said Equinoctial day. All which and many more such Apparences would be interrupted, were the Earth placed any where else then in the Centre E; as will appear by the Scheme. For the Earth being placed in E, every oblique Horizon, as SIR, will divide the Equatour BD, into two equal hemicircles, so that so much shall appear above as lies couched under, and so that day will be equal to the night. In like sort the Tropics HX and IL will be divided into two unequal parts, yet so as the Alternate segments shall be equal, to wit, PX and VL, also TH. and VI, as it is demonstrated by Theodosius, lib. 2. prop. 16. Whence it comes to pass that the longest day XP is equal to the longest night LV, and the shortest day IV is equal to the shortest night HP. Finally, PG, the excess of the longest day XP above the Equinoctial day XG, is equal to KV the defect of the shortest day under the Equinoctial day IK, which is showed out of the similitude and equality of the Triangles TEG, and VEK. Now of the contrary parts, if the Earth should be placed in the Axis without the Centre E, as in P, beyond all the parallels, no equinoxe can be in an oblique Sphere (as we have showed) but always the days will be longer or shorter than the nights. But if the earth be placed in the point G, by which passeth the last of the parallels, there will be one only equinoxe, & that in the Solstice in an oblique sphere in all other parts of the year the days would either be longer, or else shorter than the nights. But if the Globe of the Earth be seated within the parallels in the point N, there would be two Equinoxes in a year, wherein the spaces of days and nights should increase and decrease. Nevertheless these increments & decrements should neither in number nor in greatness be equal to the increments and decrements of the nights, as may be gathered very easily by sense, comparing the two Triangles, DNG, and QNK, because that more and greater segments of parallels are comprehended in the Triangle LNK, then in the Triangle PNG. Fourthly, if the Earth should unequally respect the Poles, and were not placed in the Centre, the shadows of Gnomon erected which make right angles with the Horizon, should not be cast directly forward in one right line in the time of the Equinoxes: the Sun exactly placed in the East or West: as for example: let the earth be A, seated in the plain of the Equinoctial circle BC and let there be a Gnomon erected on the plain of the Horizon, which is represented by the circle BC: It is manifest to sense that the sun setting in C, the shadows will be cast in the opposite part towards B. Likewise the Sun rising in B will cast his shadow towards C. But AC and AB, concur in one right line, which plainly demonstrats unto us, that the earth is seated in the plain of the Equinoctial. But if it were placed out of it towards either side, as in E, if a Gnomon be set up on the Horizon as OF, we shall see that the Sun rising in B in the time of the Equinoctial, the shadow will be directed by the line EGLANTINE, likewise the Sun setting in C, the shadow will make the right line EH: But these two right lines being produced, will cut one the other in the point E, and therefore cannot concur in the same right line, whereof ordinary experience witnesseth the contrary. Fifthly, if the Earth were thus placed, it would follow by necessary consequence, that two signs of the Zodiac diametrally opposite, should not be seen by a Dioptricke instrument: which is against experience which witnesseth that the rising and setting of the Sun, may be seen by one right line: also the rising in the Summer Solstice and the setting in the Winter Solstice, to answer to each other in one right line in every Horizon: which could not be performed unless the Earth were in the Equinoctial plain and the Centre. Let there be a● Horizon BDCE, the Equator BC, the Axletree of the world DE, the Tropic of Cancer FG, of Capricorn HIGH. Let the Earth first be placed in the Centre A: here may plainly be perceived that the Equinoctial East B, and the Equinoctial West C, answer and concur in the right line BC: also that the East point of the Summer Solstice F, and the West of the Winter Solstice I, to concur in the same right line FI▪ also the Winter East point H, and the Summer Western point G, to answer mutually one to the other by the same line GH. Which Appearance is confirmed of all Astronomers. Now let the Earth be set in the Axis out of the Equatour in K: It is manifest to sense that the contrary will always happen: For the Winter point of the Sun setting I, by a right line drawn from the Earth will not directly answer to the Summer point of rising F, but to the point L. Likewise the Winter point of Sunne-setting G, will answer to the point M, and not to the Winter rising H. Whence we have sufficiently demonstrated this second position of the Earth beside the Centre of the World to be inconvenient, and no ways to be defended. For the third position that the earth should be so removed out of the Centre, as that it should neither be in the Equinoctial plain, nor yet in the Axletree. We need produce no other confutation, than what we have said before of the other two positions. Because out of this, the same or greater absurdities would follow, then of the other, as any man may easily understand out of these demonstrations we have before recited. The second demonstrative reason, wherewith Ptolemy would confirm the Earth to be in the Centre is drawn from the Eclipse of the Moon in this manner. If the Earth were not in the Centre of the World, there would not always happen Eclipses of the Moon, when the two greater lights are diametrally opposed, but sometime they would happen when these great lights are not residing in opposite places of the Zodiac; which is false, and against experience; for all Astronomers have witnessed, that eclipses of the Moon then only are seen, when the Sun & the Moon stand directly opposite the one to the other: because then is the earth directly interposed. Now let the Centre of the world be A, in which if the Earth be placed, it is manifest that it then happens when the Sun and the Moon are exactly opposed, and the earth interposed directly, which in this case cannot otherwise happen: But if the Earth be placed beside the Centre of the world, as in B. These things may fall out, that the two Luminaries may reside in two opposite points of the Zodiac, and yet cause no eclipse; because the Earth is not in the same Diameter by the which they ●●e opposed. Also the Moon will sometimes suffer an Eclipse, when she is less distant from the Sun than a semicircle. In a word, this eclipse is in places opposite. A semicircle will then only be seen when the Diameter of opposition shall pass by the Centre of the Earth, and the world; all which are manifestly repugnant to experience and observation. Out of this demonstration of Ptolemy, Clavius, a later Astronomer in this sort draws the like conclusion. Let there be observed two diverse eclipses of the Moon in divers places of the Zodiac: Now because each Eclipse happened when the Sun and the Moon were opposed the one to the other, in one Diameter (as Experience & Astronomical supputations warrant) it must necessarily be concluded that the earth should be in each of those Diameters, and so by consequence in the common section of them both: Sith then all the Diameters of the world concur, and cut one the other in the Centre: it must needs follow that the Earth should be in the Centre and midst of the World. Divers reasons there may be drawn to prove this assertion. But these demonstrations of Ptolemy, as I have set them down enlarged, and explained by our later writers, may seem sufficient, especially in a matter of few called in question. 2 The Position of the Earth in the Centre of the World may be reconciled as well with the Diurnal motion of the Earth forementioned, as the Apparences of the Heavens. That this proposition may the better be understood, we are first to set down in a Scheme, or Diagram, both the number and order of all the heavenly Orbs, conceived according to our grounds. Secondly, we must show in particular, how this ranging of the heavenly bodies is capable of all the motions, and apt to satisfy the apparences. In which parts I will not too nicely descend to Astronomical curiosities, being too many and subtle for a Geographer to discuss. Only I will give a taste, to satisfy such as suppose no middle way can be trodden out betwixt Ptolemy's stability of the Earth, and Copernicus his three Motions. I might seem perhaps presumptuous beyond my knowledge, to reject and pass by the draughts and delineations of Ptolemy, Alphonsus, and their followers, which are commonly defended and in use: or that other of Copernicus, supported with the authority and credit of so great an Astronomer: or that of Tichobrahe more corrected then either, and to prefer my own, being an Embryo, or half fashioned. To this I answer. First, that I only expose this Scheme following to the view of the judicious, justifying it no farther than will stand with Astronomical observation. Secondly, I herein arrogate little or nothing to myself; for as much as I have digested, and compounded it out of the observations and experiments of late Astronomers, and only collected together what they scattered; The Scheme itself is expressed in this manner; wherein to begin from the lowest: The Centre is the Globe of the Earth, to which we have given a Diurnal motion from the West to the East upon her own Poles, whose Revolution is made in 24 hours: About the Earth as the Centre of the whole world, the Moon is carried in her circle, which amongst all the Planets, is found more nearly to respect the Earth, as well in place as nature. Next succeeds the Sun, as the leader of all the Planets, which carried round about the earth in an Annual circuit, describes the Ecliptic circle: about the Sun as the proper Centre, are all the Planets moved except the Moon. The two immediate companions of the Sun are Venus, & Mercury, which so compass him about, that the Earth never comes betwixt them and the Sun. The other three Planets, as Mars, jupiter, and Saturn, howsoever they environ the Sun as their proper Centre, yet so as within their circles, they comprehend the body of the Earth: The Planet Mars, because he is found by Astronomers, to move sometimes above, sometimes under the Sun, is understood to move in such a circle, which on the opposite side shall cut the circle of the Sun: yet so as Mars and the Sun can never meet in one point: Forasmuch as Mars, as well as the other Planets, is supposed to be carried in an Epicycle about the Sun, and to keep an equal distance from him howsoever moved: Neither is he ever found under the Sun, but about the time of the opposition, as Astronomers observe: whence a cause hath been given, why Mars should appear greatest at the time of Opposition. These five Planets, to wit, Saturn, jupiter, Mars, Venus, and Mercury, may be considered according to a double motion: The one is proper and natural, wherein they are moved about the Sun, as their proper Centre: The other Accidental, and as it were by a consequence of Nature, whereby in their circuit moving about the Sun as their Centre, they must of necessity, by a consequent site of the place, be carried about the Earth. For the Sun placed in his Ecliptic line, so compasseth round the Earth, that with him he is supposed to carry the Epicy●les, wherein these Planets are moved round about him. Whence we find the motion of these Planets about the Sun, as their own Centre, to be regular, but about the Earth irregular: which proceeds from their Excentricity in respect of the Earth. Above all the Planets we place the Firmament, or Starry Heaven, having a very slow motion, not to be finished in many thousand years, and this motion is on other Poles than the Poles of the world, to be sought out in or near the Poles of the Ecliptic. This Heaven would Aristotle have to be the first movable, and therefore gave it a very swift motion, which is the same which we call Diurnal, and have given to the Earth. But it seems more consonant to nature, that the slower motions should agree to the higher bodies: and the swifter to the lower, that there might be a proportion, betwixt the time and the space of motion: It remains that we probably show that out of their suppositions, the Celestial Apparences may be as well or better salved then by the ordinary grounds. The Apparences which are most called in question, concern either the Motion, or the Places, and Positions. All the rest are either of less moment, or at least are thereunto reduced. Every motion which is found or thought to be found in the Heavens, is either the Diurnal, or Periodicke. The Diurnal Motion (as we have already showed) belongs to the Earth, which according to our grounds is supposed to move from the West unto the East in 24 hours, Which may answer to the Motion of the first movable Sphere; which according to Aristotle, is the Starry Firmament, and thought to move from the East to the West. The Periodicke Motion, is either a slower Motion, to be finished not under many thousand years, or else a swifter Revolution of the Planets. This slow motion the common Astronomers would have towfold: The one from the West to the East on the Poles of the Ecliptic: the other a Motion (as they call it) of Trepidation, from the South point to the North and backward again: but one slow Motion of the sixth Stars upon the Poles of the Ecliptic, granted to the Firmament, will (for aught I see) satisfy both. The reason why they put two distinct Motions, is, 1▪ Because they have observed the Stars of Aries, Taurus, and the rest of the Zodiac, not to be seated in the same place wherein they were anciently found; but to be moved certain degrees from the West towards the East. Whence they would conclude a Motion to be from the West unto the East. 2. It will stand with no less experience, that the foresaid Stars of the Firmament have moved themselves from the South towards the North. To pass over the r●st, the Polestar, which in Hipparchus time was distant from the Pole about 12 Degrees, is now observed to approach almost three degrees. These two Motions, should they be esteemed in the account of Astronomers might seem deficient. Notwithstanding we may probably conjecture this to be no other than one, and the selfsame Motion upon the Poles of the Ecliptic: Whence it may come to pass, that the fixed Stars are not only carried from West to East, but also by reason of the obliquity of the Ecliptic line, incline more and more daily to the Pole of the World whence they may again return. For this motion from the West to the East, is of the primary intent of nature, wherein the Stars move in circles parallel to the Ecliptic: But from the North to the South, as by the necessary consequence of the position and obliquity of the Zodiac: because it cannot be avoided, but that it should either incline to, or decline from the Pole. If they should object (as many do) that this progress is not proportional in respect of the time according to the calculation of the Astronomers. We answer. 1. That this difference is so small, that it should rather seem to be imputed to the negligence or ignorance of such as took these observations, then to any diversity of motion. For who knows not in these days of ours, wherein this art is arrived at a far greater perfection, divers Astronomers in observing the same Star at the same time, to differ much the one from the other: Whose knowledge notwithstanding, is fortified with the experience of the Ancients, and invention of new Instruments. What then shall we think of those, which distant so many ages in time, and using divers & unlike Instruments in their observations, have differed in matters of so small moment: chiefly in seeking out the period of this long and slow motion, which by reason of his slowness, since the time it was known to man, hath not ran the fifteenth part of his circle. For my part, I shall rather ascribe it to the error of their observations, then multiply Orbs without a greater cause. First, because (as we have said) the difference is so small, and almost insensible 2. Because we have been taught by our Astronomical histories, what kind of Instruments were then in use, which to later Astronomers have been thought too rude and unfit to make such subtle observations. Lastly, concerning the Site and Position, no less reason may be given out of our Hypothesis, than the common way. For by placing the five Planets to run in their Epicycles about the Sun, may we give a reason of the inequality of their distance from the Earth, wherein an ingenious mind in our common grounds can hardly give himself sufficient satisfaction. 3 The stability is an affection whereby the Terrestrial Sphere is firmly settled in his proper place. The Stability, or firmness of the Earth which we here understand, 1. No way denies or contradicts the motion of the parts of the Earth, whereby being separated, they return to their proper place. 2. Neither the circular Revolution of it on her own Poles and Axle, whereof we have formerly spoken. But either such a motion whereby the parts of it may be severed one from the other, and so the whole Mass dissolved; or whereby the Centre of the Earth may be moved out of his proper place; or at least such as might move the Poles of the earth from their true verticity, whereby they should not respect always in the Heavens the same points or poles. Which kind of stability from motion we will establish in this Theorem. 1 The Earth is firmly seated and settled in her proper place. This Theorem may be proved as well by reason, as authority of holy Scripture: From reason it is demonstrated in this manner. If the Earth should not be settled in her proper place, this would of necessity happen; either by dissolution and separation of the parts one from the other: or by removing the poles out of their fixed places: or else by motion of the Centre from one place to the other. The first cannot be admitted; because (as we have before taught in the second Chapter of this book) All Terrestrial Bodies are endowed with an inclination or ponderosity to approach as near as they can to the centre of the Earth; so that by this coherency and conformity, the whole earth is ransomed from any such mutability. Neither can the whole Sphere be dissolved without an especial miracle: And if so it should happen, the parts would return again, and conform themselves to compose the same Sphere. Likewise the second way; The earth cannot lose her stability, because (as we have shown in our former Chapter) the earth hath her two Poles magnetical made fast unto the Poles of the world, as if they were bound firmly to two great pillars, never to be shaken. Finally, The Centre of the Earth cannot be moved out of his place any wise, because, as we have demonstrated in the Chapter before, without the disturbance and inversion of the whole frame of Nature the Earth can have no other place then the Centre or midst of the whole world. Some have alleged as an argument that principle of Aristotle: That one simple Body can have but one simple Motion: and therefore the earth challenging to itself a right motion to the Centre, cannot also have a circular or round motion, and so of necessity must rest unmoved in her proper place. But this reason, as I have showed, is weak to prove this assertion. First, because this principle of Aristotle is not grounded on certainty, but contradicts experience, as I have elsewhere showed. 2. This right motion to the Centre is not to be ascribed to the whole, as the immediate subject, but to the parts of it separated from the whole; so that nothing will hinder, but that the whole Globe may have a motion proper to itself on his own Poles. But to let this reason pass as weak; all those arguments alleged by the common Astronomers, and Philosophers against the circular motion of the Earth prove indeed no other matter then this stability which we establish: but if racked any farther come short to satisfy. For authority of Scripture, many places are urged to prove this stability; whereof we have a pregnant place in 104 Psalm, wherein David magnifying the Creator, saith That he laid the foundation of the Earth so sure, that it should not be moved at any time: To which may be added many other Texts, but that I hold this one sufficient in a matter which few men call in question. We are in the third place to treat of the proportion of the Earth, with the heavenly bodies. 4 The Proportion is that wherein the quantity of the Terrestrial Globe is compared with the quantity of the Heavens. We must here remember a distinction before touched, that the Globe of the Earth may be considered two ways; either Absolutely in itself, or Comparatively in respect of the heavenly Bodies. If we consider it absolutely in itself, we shall find that the Earth hath a vast and huge magnitude, and not any ways to be compared to a point; because it is a body, and therefore subject to division, whereas a point is conceived as an indivisible signeadmitting no parts at all. S●condly, because the magnitude of the Earth many times taken, will measure the greatness of the Heavens, as we may observe by Astronomers who measure the magnitude of the greatest Stars by Diameters and Semidiameters of the Earth: whereas a point of it being a thousand times multiplied, will never beget a magnitude or measure of the quantity of any Body. Thirdly, the Stars are not as mere points in respect of their Orbs, because they sensibly are seen, as parts of these Orbs. But the Earth is greater than some of the lower Stars, as the Moon: Whence we may with good grounds aver, that if a man were placed in the Moon, he might behold the Earth far greater than the Moon being observed by us in the Earth. Wherefore no man can deny but the Earth in itself hath a great vastness. But if we consider this greatness in respect of the Heavens, we shall find this vast greatness to shrink almost into nothing, and become as a mere point without sensible magnitude. But this is not altogether general without limitation; because the heavenly bodies are distinguished into the higher and greater, such as are the Firmament with the four higher Planets, such as are Saturn, jupiter, Mars, and the Sun: or the lower and lesser, such as are Venus, Mercurius, and the Moon, which difference in place and greatness admits a great diversity in this proportion, as we shall show in these two Theorems. 1. The Earthly Globe compared in quantity with the Firmament and superior Orbs of the planets, hath no sensible magnitude. This Proposition is supported not only by the authority of many and grave Authors, as Aristotle, Ptolemy, Pliny, Alphragan, and others: but by diverse strong reasons drawn from experience and observation of Astronomers. The first argument shall be this which is most popular. The Sun and many other Stars in the Firmament, are found out by Astronomical Instruments to be manifold greater than the Globe of the Earth: yet appear they in respect of the heavens but as a little point or portion. Then must the Earth, being in comparison far lesser, be devoid of all sensible magnitude or proportion. Secondly, if the Earth had any notable quantity in respect of the Heaven, then must the Diameter of the earth have as great a quantity in respect of the Diameter of the Sky; for there is the same proportion of the Diameters which the circumferences have one to the other, as is demonstrated in Geometry. Now if the Diameter of the Earth hath any notable magnitude in comparison of the Diameter of the Sky, than the Stars which be over our heads, be nearer unto us by a notable quantity, then when they be either in the East or West. For it must needs follow that the Stars placed in the vertical point, are nearer by the Semidiameter of the Earth, then when they are either in the Eastern or Western point, as we see in ●his figure here set down ACDB, wherein I make E to be the Centre of the Earth, AEB the true Horizon, and OF the Semidiameter of the earth. Now if the Semidiameter FE have any sensible proportion, then must G the vertical point be nearer to F. then either A or B. supposed to be the East & west points; because EA, or EBB, are the whole Semidiameter of the Celestial circle, whereof FG is only a part. But contrariwise there is no such diversity perceived in the magnitude of the Stars, but that they appear still to be of one and the same greatness, except by accidental interposition of vapours and gross bodies: wherefore it must of necessity follow, that their distance is all one in all parts of the Sky, and by consequence the Semidiameter of the earth hath no sensible diversity in distance. Thirdly, hence would arise another reason no less forcible than this; that if the Semidiameter of the Earth had any comparison or proportion to the Semidiameter of the Sky, the Horizon that we have on the upper part of the earth, should not divide the Sky into two equal parts; for as much as the part which is couched under the Horizon, would always be greater, and the other lesser, as in our former Diagramme: if OF have a notable quantity in comparison of EA: then will the line CFD, being the Horizon on the top of the earth, differ notably from the line AEB, being the Diameter of the World, and the Horizon to the Centre of the Earth: and so shall not the Horizon CFD, divide the world into two equal parts, but the upper part shall always be lesser than the lower, which crosses ordinary experience: for we may see in long winter nights, that those Stars which are in the East Horizon, in the beginning of the night, will be in the West at the end of twelve hours: and contrariwise, those Stars which did set in the West, when those others did rise in the East, shall rise again when the other shall set. Fourthly if the earth had any sensible greatness in respect of the Heavens, than were it impossible for any Sun Dial to be regular and observe due proportion. For we see the shadows to move as duly and orderly about the Centre of Dial's and such instruments, as if their Centre were the very Centre of the world: which could never happen if these two Centres should differ notably in respect of the Sphere of the Sun: to express it the better we will set this Figure, which represents the three notable circles in a Dial, which are described by the course of the Sun in three notable places of the Zodiac, to wit, the two Tropics, and the Equinoctial. Herein the uttermost arch BLC represents the Tropic of Capricorn, and is described no greater than the quarter of a circle, because the Sun placed in the Sign, shines unto us but six hours. The Equinoctial is set as half a circle, because the Sun being in it, appears unto us 12 hours, & is here noted out by EIF. The Tropic of Cancer contains 3 quarters of a Circle, because when the Sun is in it, there are eighteen hours from Sunrising to Sunset: and that circle is GHK. The Centre of the Dial is A, and the Style which gives the shadow DA, whose top being D, doth describe those portions of circles with such exactness, as if the Dial were set in the very Centre of the Earth, and the distinction of the hours shows itself no otherwise then if the Centre of the Dial were the same with the Centre of the world. To these arguments I may add, that if there should be a sensible greatness of the earth in respect of these superior Orbs, either all or most of these absurdities would arise which follow their opinions, who place the Earth out of the Centre of the World, which we have before treated of. 2 The Terrestrial Globe compared with the inferior Orbs hath a sensible magnitude. Although the whole Earth compared with the Firmament and superior Orbs of the Planets, seem no otherwise then a point: yet from this we must except the Orbs of the lower Planets Venus, Mercury, but especially the Moon: Who are found by observations of divers skilful Astronomers to have a sensible and notable greatness in respect of the earth, whereof a manifest argument may be drawn from the Parallax or variation of the sight: wherein our observations of the same Star at divers places are not the same, though at the same time: neither will such a Star to both places seem in the same point of the Heavens; which could not possibly be, except we admit a sensible difference betwixt the Rational and Sensible Horizon; and so grant the Earth, in respect of such Orbs, some quantity and greatness. This diversity of Aspect, which they call the Parallax may be seen in this Figure: let A be the Centre of the Earth, L the Moon, or other Star to be observed, EGGED, the Firmament or Orb of the fixed Stars: suppose then the eye to be in the fixed point M of the sensible Horizon XMY the said Planet will appear in the point of the Firmament S, according to optical principles, whereby all things are said to be seen in the place directly opposite. Supposing again the Eye to be in the point P of another sensible Horizon RPQ, the Star L will no doubt appear in the opposite point T. Neither of which meets with the Star in the right place. For imagining the Eye to be placed in the Centre A, the place of the Star would be V, which is his true place. These differences of sight could find no place if the Earth were as a mere point and challenged no sensible Magnitude, in respect of these inferior Planets: and yet experience of Astronomers hath sufficiently confirmed it. But this being a point very curious, and appertaining to Astronomy, I leave it to their farther industry, whose profession it undergoes. CHAP. VI Of the Circles of the Terrestrial Sphere. 1 ALL the properties which agree by Nature to the Terrestrial Globe, we have handled. Here we are in the next place to treat of such, as agree by virtue of our understanding: Of this sort are all the Circles conceived to be in the Terrestrial Globe. 2 A Terrestrial Circle is a round line conceived in the face of the Terrestrial Globe, dividing it into two parts. A Circle is considered two manner of ways: either abstracted from this or that sensible matter, in which sort it is supposed to be taught in Geometry; to which properly appertains the knowledge of the Fabric and Measure of all Magnitudes, especially of this, being amongst all, the most perfect and exact: Or else a circle is considered so far forth as it hath some ground in the Nature of the Earth, at least by application of the Celestial Globe, and so it comes into the consideration of Geography. For conclusions demonstrated and proved in Geometry, are here to be admitted as principles supposed not demonstrated a new: which Logic, if Clavius, Blancanus, and other such writers had well learned, they would not have stuffed out their work with such Heterogeneal mixtures, but have reduced every thing to his proper seat and science. A circle as well by the Geographer as Astronomer is divided into four quadrants, each quadrant into 90 degrees, all which make up 360. So that a degree is the 360 part of a Circle, which I only mention as being of chiefest use with us, yet supposed to be handled and taught in a higher science. 1 A circle though imaginary in itself, hath his ground in the Nature of the Earthly Sphere. As in Logic men have invented certain Intentional Notions, serving as so many instruments to direct and regulate our understanding in the apprehension of things: So in cosmography can there not be wanting such imaginary signs and circles to confirm and aid our fantasy. And as in Logic such Notions in themselves are merely imaginary and intentional, yet may be termed real, so far forth as they are grounded in the things themselves; so may we speak of these circles conceived in the face of the Terrene Globe: which we are not to conceive to be fictious and imaginary, as if they had no ground at all in nature. For although there be no such circles painted on the face of the Earth, as we find in an artificial Sphere: yet must we of necessity conceive such real respects to be in the Earth itself: as when a Ship sails over the Ocean, it cannot be said to leave behind any visible mark or Character in the surface of the water; yet in regard it made a real passage, it will leave a line conceivable, signing out unto us the true passage. It is a matter which hath not a little troubled Cosmographers, to find out the immediate and true subject or ground of these circles; whether they should be immediately taken from the earth, or else in the Heavens. The ancient Cosmographers have acknowledged no other ground of these Circles; then the congruity and application of the celestial Globe, and his parts with the parts of the Earth: but our Magnetical Philosophers more nearly searching into the nature of the Earthly Sphere have found these Circles all (except the Horizon) to wit, the Meridian's, and Parallels, to be immediately grounded in the Earth itself: whose opinion we cannot reject, as being supported by experimental demonstration, as we shall show in particular. 2 The distinction of a circle into any certain Number of parts, hath no certain ground in the Nature of the earthly Sphere, but only inconueniency; leaving our judgements free, to take such a Number as may best serve our purpose. Some Astronomers more curious than wise, have gone about to seek a ground of this distinction of a circle into 360 parts out of the Sun's course in the Zodiac, a Circle (say they) by the opening of the Compass, being described in a plain, is divided into six equal parts. Now because the Sun being the rule and measure of all perfect motions, passeth through one sixth part in 60 days, the whole Circle was divided into 360, for 60 multiplied by 6, will produce that number. But this reason seems to infer nothing concerning any natural ground, that this distinction shall find in the Earth, though it may serve as an argument of Conveniency, the number 360 being fittest for that calculation. Another reason very like the former, is drawn from the conjunction of the Sun with the Moon, which happens 12 times in a year: and because from each conjunction to that which followeth are spent 30 days; Hence it is that the Zodiac is first divided into 12 parts, which multiplied by 30 will produce 360. This reason likewise proves only thus much, that it is the fittest number to calculate the Motion of the Sun in his Ecliptic: Not that this division hath any ground in Nature more than other▪ because being a continuate quantity, according to Philosophy, it may suffer infinite divisions: for it was in the beginning left free to Cosmographers, to choose what number they pleased to express the parts or sections of a Circle: which they took (as it seemeth) not merely from the motion of the Sun, but from their conveniency, and commodity, finding this number most commodious for the distinction of every Circle. The reason was, because no number could be found, which suffered more parts and divisions than this. For as much as in 60, whereof 360 by multiplication is produced, hath exactly these parts 1.2.3.4.5.6.10.12.15.20.30. Likewise 360 hath exactly 1.2.3.4.5.6.8.9.10.12.15.18.20.24.30.36.40.46.60.72.90.120.180. Of all which parts there is so great use in Astronomy and many times in Geography, that without it there would be small exactness. For as we see a yard measure would little steed the Mercer or Clothier, except it were again divided into smaller parts: so falls it out in the account of the Cosmographer. 3▪ Of the Terrestrial Circles, some are Absolute, some Relative: the Absolute are such as are assigned without any respect to our sight; of which sort are the Meridian's and Parallels. 4. The Meridian is a circle drawn by the Poles of the world and the vertical point of the place. The Meridian Circle is so called of Astronomers; because when the Sun (according to their suppositions) by the motion of the first movable comes into this Circle, it makes midday: and then hath been running his course from his rising to arrive there just so long as he shall be moving from thence to the place of his setting. In this Meridian are placed the two Poles of the Equator, which are the same with the Poles of the world; in this also are the vertical point and the point opposite unto it, termed the Poles of the Horizon, whereof we shall speak hereafter. So that so many Meridian's are imagined to be in the Earth, as there are vertical points: for howsoever we see not many Meridian's painted on the face of the artificial Globe, yet must there be so many imagined in the real Earth as Zenithes and Orisons: so that it is impossible for a man to move never so little from East to West, without changing his Meridian: yet for more order sake have the Cosmographers reduced the number of Meridian's to half the number of the degrees in a Circle, to wit, to 180, that every Meridian cutting the Equator, and other Parallels in two opposite places, should answer to two degrees in the same Circle. By which it appears, that every Meridian divides the Terrene Globe in two halves, whereof the one is respectively termed of the East, the other of the West. But to avoid all ambiguity of speech, we ought to consider that a Meridian is twofold; either the true Meridian, or Magnetical Meridian. The true Meridian, ordinarily so called, is that which directly passeth by the Poles of the World; of which we here treat, which indeed (as we shall show) is the only true magnetical Meridian. But that which some have falsely called the Magnetical Meridian, is that which runneth by the Poles of the Magnetical Variation, and much differs from the true; because (as we have taught) the variation is divers according to the diversity of place, & therefore cannot answer in any certain proportion to the Poles of the Terrene Globe. The true Meridian Circle, as it hath manifold use in Astronomy, namely to distinguish midday, and midnight, to measure the rising and setting of the Stars, etc. matters not to be neglected of Geographers; so hath it a more special use in Geography: to design the longitudes and latitudes of the places, with their distances, with many other matters treated of hereafter. 5▪ Concerning the Meridian circled we are to know two things. The Invention of it, and the Distinction: The invention is whereby we are taught to find out the true Meridian in any place assigned. 6▪ The Invention of the Meridian is again twofold: the one more Accurate, which is either Astronomical or Magnetical, the other Popular; the Astronomical way is performed by observing the celestial motion. The Meridian may be found out the Astronomical way in divers manners by Instruments devised for this purpose by ingenious Artificers, whereof some are described by Gemma Frisius in his cosmography. But to avoid the cost of curious Instruments, I will set down our way, depending on this Theorem. 1 If two several Sunne-shadowes be observed, the one in the forenoon, the other in the afternoon of the same day exactly to touch with their ends, the Circumference of the same circle described in a Plain, Parallel to the plain of the Horizon: The line from the Centre equally dividing the Arch of that Circle betwixt the two shadows, will be the true Meridian circle for that place. This Theorem, howsoever consisting of many parts, is notwithstanding easy enough to be understood, being explained by an ocular demonstration. Let there be gotten a platform of wood or metal, and placed evenly that it may lie parallel with the plain of the Horizon: In this plain let there be described divers circles from the same Centre E. In this Centre let there be raised a Gnomon OF to right angles, so that the top of this Gnomon F, shall every where be equally distant from the circumference of each circle described in the plain, which may easily be known, because if it be equally distant from any three points of any circle's Circumference, it will also be equally distant from all the rest alike, as Clavius hath taught in the 4 of his gnomonics. This platform being thus ordered let the shadow of the Gnomon be observed sometimes before Noon, until such time as it exactly shall touch the circumference of one of those circles, as in EGLANTINE. Again in the Afternoon, let the shadow be observed, till with his end it meet the circumference of the same circle, as in EH, which will happen so many hour's afternoon, as the other before Noon. These two points G and H, being diligently observed, let the Arch of the Circle GH be divided into two halves with a line drawn from the Centre E, which shall be ED. This line ED will be the true Meridian for that place, on which when the shadow of the gnomon shall happen to fall, we may assure ourselves that it is full Noon. 7 The Magnetical Invention is performed by the Magnetical Directory Needle. This way is subject to much error, and not so certain as the former, because (as we have showed before) there are found very few places which admit not some of Variation: yet because it may be profitable to such, who have not the Command always of the Sun, or sight of the Stars, I will insert this Theorem. 1 The Line wherein the Directory needle is directed from North to South, is the Meridian for the place. This may be showed in any Mariners Compass, or 〈◊〉 Sunne-Dyall, whose needle is magnetically touched. For b●●ing set evenly parallel to the plain of the Horizon, it will show by the needle, the Miridian for that place in every vertical point on the earth. For example in the Sea-Compasse in the next page, experience will witness in every Region of the Earth, that the one point signed out by the Lily, will always turn to the North; the other opposite part, will turn itself to the South; which two parts being joined together by a right Line will show the Meridian fo●●●at place: The Meridian (I say) not always the true; for this Invention taken from the Magnet is not so exact as the Astronomical: for as much as few or no places are found, wherein the Magnetical Needle admits not a Variation from the true points of North and South: Nevertheless, this way is very necessary to be known: for as much as the Sun and Stars are not always to be seen; at least in such place and manner as may favour exactness of observation: Hence may be demonstrated in particulars, what we observed before in general in our Magnetical Treatise that the Circles of the Globe are not mere Imaginary Fictions, or bare Respects, growing out of the Application of Celestial bodies (as some have thought them) but grounded on the Magnetical Disposition of the Terrestrial Globe. 8 Beside the Astronomical and Magnetical Invention of the Meridian, there is another way more popular, but less exact, which is without any observation of the Heavens, or the Magnets operation. Of the Invention of the Meridian circle, the true and exact knowledge (as we have showed) is indebted to heavenly observation, or Magnetical experiment. Nevertheless Nature is not so barren, but she hath pointed out to an industrious observation, some marks and footsteps in other inferior bodies, for the finding out of this profitable circle. Which ways, howsoever of less Account than the other, and therefore of less use, are notwithstanding pleasant to understand: because nothing delights more an ingenious mind, than the contemplation of Gods working, in and by his creatures, which men usually term Nature. To make a particular search into all Planets, Stones, Metals, and other such Bodies, were to go too far out of my way, without a Guide. I will give one only Instance of Trees, whereof I will insert this Problem. 1 By the Incision of a Tree, to find out the Meridian. To perform this Problem, let there be chosen out some Tree in an open free field, far from walls or other obstacles; in such a place as it hath been on either side freely enlightened and heated by the Sunbeams: let the Trunk of this Tree be very right and sound: let this Trunk be cut off by the midst, in such sort that the section be Parallel to the Horizon, and the underpart of the Trunk be left to stand in his former Natural situation: Now the Section on the top of it being well plained, will as in a plain discover diverse circles, which are Excentricke and not drawn from the same Centre, but on the one side nearer together; on the other further off: That part than which shows the circles thicker and nearer together, points out the North: The other wherein the circles are wider and further off, the one from the other, designs out the South-point: betwixt both which if a right line be drawn, it will be the Meridian for that place. Which experiment Blan●anus (as he writes) tried in a Plum-tree, but gives no reason for it. The cause I take to be no other than the extension and diffusion of the sap or moisture, by the heat of the Sun: which is more on the Southside than the North-side: for as much as the Sun in our clime respects us on the South, never on the North. Hence is it, that the circles which are nothing else but the excrescences of the moisture, being more rarified on the Southside, and therefore requiring a greater place, are found to be greater. 9 Having showed the Invention, we are in the next place to treat of the Distinction of these Meridian circles: A Meridian therefore is termed either First or Common. The distinction of Meridian's into First and Common, hath no footsteps in Nature, but is a mere arbitrary Imposition of ancient Cosmographers. For no reason besides Conveniency can be shown, why one Meridian should be called First rather than another: yet cannot this Distinction be wanting to a Geographer, for as much as some settled bound must be set, from which to begin our account of Longitudes. 10 The first Meridian is that from which we begin to number the Longitude of the Earth, from West to the East. In respect of which all the rest may be called common or less notable. The ancient Cosmographers, amongst whom Ptolemy was the chief, have set the first Meridian in the Fortunate Lands, from whence they began their account, passing Eastward through Europe and Africa, and so through Asia, to the uttermost parts of India, until they returned again to the first Meridian, passing through the Fortunate Lands; Some have doubted whether these Lands called by Ptolemy the Fortunate Lands, be the same with the Canaries; because (as our Countryman Mr Hues hath observed) the Latitude given by Ptolemy to the Fortunate Lands, agrees not exactly to the Canaries; but rather to the Lands of Cape-Verde. Notwithstanding this observation, I rather stick to the common opinion, thinking it no unlike matter, that Ptolemy dwelling far Eastward, and trusting to other men's observations, should err in this, as well as other matters. The reason why the first Meridian should be placed here, rather than elsewhere, is thought by some to be; because the Ancients supposed two Magnetical Poles in the Earth, which should be the cause of the Variation of the Compass. Now because in the Canary Lands, was found no Variation at all, they thought it to be the place where the Magnetical and the true Meridian should concur, as wherein were both the Poles, of the World, and of the Loadstone: which made them to make it the first Meridian: But this reason I take to be unlikely; because as I find it observed by latter Writers, in the Canary Lands themselves there is found a Variation of the Compass, although very little: the reason whereof we have showed to be because it is the midst betwixt two great Continents, to wit, the one of Europe and Africa, the other of America. Whose magnetical temper being almost equal, will not suffer the magnetical Needle to move more one way then another: Moreover, I am certainly persuaded (as far as I can gather) that this placing of the First Meridian was appointed here before any certainty was known of the Variation of the Compass. The more probable conjecture therefore is that Ptolemy here placed the First Meridian, because it was the uttermost verge of land toward the West, then discovered, never dreaming of a Western world afterward detected and brought to light by Christopher Calumbus and Americus Vesputius. Some of the latter Geographers striving to be more exact, have placed the First Meridian in their Maps out of the Canaries in the Lands of the Azores called S. Michael's Island. So that the first Meridian of Ptolemy differs from the place of these latter Cosmographers about 9 degrees: which is diligently to be noted of such as begin the Science; because this variety not perceived, will breed great error and confusion: yet is not the first of Ptolemy out of use, but retained of many good Geographers. Every other Meridian in respect of this, may be called Common, or less notable, because this is most remarkable: yet may the rest compared amongst themselves be ranged in a certain order, as the Second, Third, Fourth, Fifth, and so along till we come again to the First, being in all reduced to the number of 180, answering to 360 Degrees as we have taught. So much for the Meridian's. 11 The Parallels are equidistant Circles passing from the East to the West directly. I have defined the Parallel Circles in a larger sense then former Geographers usually have taken it in: as willing under this general name, not only to include the Parallels commonly so called, but also the Equatour: because I see no reason why the Equatour being every where equidistant from each other Circle, should not suffer this acception. The common sort of Cosmographers, under this name, would only comprise the minor Circles, which are conceived to be equally distant and correspondent to the Equinoctial Circle, so that all should be so called in respect of the Equatour, to whom they are said to answer, not in site and position; for as much as they decline from the middle of the Earth to the North and South: but in Comparison and Proportion; for as the Equatour is drawn from East to West, and divides the whole Sphere of the Earth into the North and South Hemispheres: So the other also divide the Globe of the Earth, though not into two equal parts as the Equatour, but unequal. These Parallels many ways are distinguished from the Meridian's: first, because the Meridian's are drawn directly from North to South: but the Parallels from East to West. Secondly, the Meridian's, how many soever they are imagined to be, concur and meet all in the Poles of the Earth: whereas the Parallels howsoever drawn out at length, will never concur or meet in any point. Whence it must needs follow that all Parallels and Meridian's in the Globe must cut one the other, and make right angles. These Parallels although infinite in number, may be in the Sphere reduced to the number of the Meridian's, because they are drawn through the opposite points and degrees of the Meridian Semicircle, which would make up the number of 180: but yet for Conveniency they have not painted so many in the face of the Artificial Sphere; for as much as so many lines and circles might beget Confusion. Wherefore Ptolemy and the Ancients have distinguished the Parallels on both sides the Equator, North and South, with such a Distance, that where the day should increase one quarter of an hour, a new Parallel should be placed. So that the longest day of one Parallel should surpass the longest day of another, for one quarter of an hour. By which appears that the Parallels are not of one greatness, but by how much nearer the Pole they are placed; so much less are they; and so much greater by how much farther off from the Poles, and nearest the Equatour. These Circles are of great use in Geography, as to distinguish the Zone: Climates, and Latitudes of Regions, to show the Elevation of the Pole, and to design out the length and shortness of the day in any part of the Earth. 12 A Parallel Circle is of two sorts; either greater or lesser: The greater is the Equatour or equinoctial Circle. 13 The Equatour is the greatest of the Parallels, passing through the midst of the Earth, and exactly dividing them from the Poles into two equal halves or Hemispheres whereof the one is North, the other South. This Circle is called the Equatour or Equinoctial of Astronomers; because, that when the Sun passeth under it, as upon the 11 of March, and the 13 of September, it makes the Day and Night equal. This Circle of Astronomers is esteemed the most notable, being the measure of the Diurnal and most regular Motions▪ The La●ines have taken the name and appellation of this Circle from the Day, as the Greeks from the Night: Wherein the Sense is no way varied; because the equality of the Day argues the like equality of the Night. The two Poles of the Circle, are the same with the Poles of the Universal Earth: to wit, the Arctic or North-Pole, and the Antarctic and Southern Pole: whereof the former is always conspicuous in our Horizon, the other lies couched and hid from our Sight. It is called the Articke-pole from the Constellation of the little Bear in the Heavens, near to the which it is situated: in opposition to the which the other is called Antarctic. It hath manifold use in Astronomy, copiously by Astronomers: And no less in Geography: for without this Equinoctial Circle, no Description of the Earth can be absolute & perfect, neither any City or Place. in the Terrestrial Globe or Map set in his due and proper place. This Equinoctial Circle in regard of the Earth, passeth through the middlemost part almost of Africa, by Ethiopia, America, and Taprobana: So that it exactly divideth the Globe of the Earth into two halves, the Northern and Southern Hemispheres; so that these people which dwell under the Equatour are said to inhabit the middle of the world, because they incline neither to the North, nor to the South: having so much distance from the Arctic Antarticke-Pole of the Earth. Moreover, by this Circle (as we will declare hereafter) are noted out unto us the East and West part of the Sphere, no way to be neglected of Geographers. 1 Concerning the Equatour, two things are to be observed: either the Invention, or the Site and Position: The Invention is either Astronomical or Magnetical. The Astronomical according to these Rules. 1 The Meridian being found out, to find the Equator. This is easily performed by the help of the former Figure: for therein the Meridian line being found out (as we have showed) let there be drawn by the Centre E of that Circle, the line AC, making right Angles with the said Meridian: which line AC will be the true Equatour, and will point out unto us the true East and West: as A the East and C the West. Whence it appears that the two lines, to wit, of the Equatour and the Meridian do divide and cut the whole Horizon into two equal Quadrants. 2 Without the help of the Meridian to find out the Equatour. In the time of either Equinoctial in some horizontal plain, in the Sunshine, let there be erected a Gnomon: then in the day time, let there be noted all the points by which the end or top of the shadow hath passed: for all those points in the time of Equinoctial, are in a right line; because then the end of the shadow is carried in a line in the time of the Equinox in a Herizontall plain: This line will be the true Equinoctiall-line: the cause is given by Clavius in Gnomonicis. lib. 1. prop. 1. Corollar. 2. which depending on many Geometrical and Astronomical principles, as too far from my purpose, I omit. 15 The Magnetical invention of the Equatour, is wrought by the Magnetical Inclinatory Needle, according to this Proposition. 1 Wheresoever at any place of the Terrestrial Sphere, the Inclinatory Needle shall conform itself in a Parallell-wise, to the Axle of the Earth, through that place passeth the Equinoctial Line. As to find out the Meridian of any place, we are to use the help of the Directory Needle: so to the finding out of the Equatour, and Parallels, the Inclinatory Needle is most necessary: because the former respects the Magnetical Motion of Direction, the latter of Declination: Now wheresoever we shall see the Needle to conform itself in such sort as it may lie Parallel with the Axle of the Earth, we may assure ourselves that such a place is under the Equinoctial Circle: The reason whereof, we have given in our 3 Chapter out of the Convertible nature of the Magnet, and here needs no repetition: only we will insert this one figure wherein the line CD drawn through the Centres of two Inclinatory Needles, lying Parallel to the Axle of the Earth, A. B. will express this Equinoctial line which we here seek. For the Magnetical Inclinatory Needle being set in a Frame or Ring made for such a purpose, will under the Equator respect one Pole no more than another: but lie level with the Plain of the Horizon: as under the Poles it will make right Angles with the Plain of the Horizon. In the middle spaces betwitxt the Equatour and the Poles, it will conform itself in such sort, as it makes certain Angles with the Axle of the Earth, though not equal, yet proportional to the Latitude; out of which an ingenious Artificer may deduce the Parallels of any place, without any observations of the Heavens: as is taught by Instruments invented by Gilbert, Ridley, and diverse others which have undertaken this subject. 16 Of the Invention of the Equatour we have spoken: In the site we ought to consider the placing of the Equator in respect of the world. 1 The Equatour is an unmoveable Circle, whose Poles never vary from the ●ixt Poles of the world. Whether the Poles of the Equator have been any times varied from the Poles of the world, is a controversy which hath exercised the greatest wits: joseph Scaliger trusting (as it seems) more to ancient History then Modern experiment, seems in two Epistles not only to make a doubt, whether the Poles of the Equatour have continued the same with the Poles of the world; but superciliously (as the manner of most critics is) rather out of conjecture then Reason, to tax the common opinion of manifest error and absurdity. The ground and original of this doubt grows out of the observation of the fixed Stars, which have since the Times of the Ancients, been found to be moved out of their places, or at least not to retain the same points in the Period of the Sun's Motion. The chiefest Instances are taken from the stars in the Horns of Aries, which in Hyparchus time, which lived above 60 years before Ptolemy, were observed to be not much distant from the Equinoxe, and before him in the very point itself; but in our time removed about 28 Degrees off: Also it is observed in the Cynosure or Polestar, that in Hyparchus time it was distant from the Pole about 12 Degrees, which we find in our time to be scarce 3 Degrees distant. To salve this Appearance, Ptolemy invented a slow motion of the Starry Heaven or Firmament, whereby the Fixed stars might be removed farther off from the Equinoctial points in the Ecliptic, whence of a consequence the Polestar should not keep the same position in respect of the Pole itself, but vary his site according to the Motion: which opinion hath a long time passed without contradiction; till Copernicus out of new grounds sought for this Motion in the Earth, to which he assigned no less than three Motions. Since Copernicus, arose joseph Scaliger, who contradicting the common received grounds, and yet for aught I see, not trusting to the suppositions of Copernicus, would bring in another opinion: to wit, that the Stars of the Firmament are not moved from the point of the Equinoxe, but rather that the point is carried away from the stars. The decision of this point I dare not undertake, better becoming the learned and industrious endeavours of our worthy Professors, M. Doctor Bainbrigge, and M. Henry Brigges, as best suiting with their Learning and Profession: Ipse semipaganus, ad sacra vatum carmen offero nostrum. Nevertheless as a Learner, for mine own satisfaction, I would willingly enter a little into conference with this great and admired Oracle joseph Scaliger, to sound the certainty of his grounds. That the Polestar (saith he) was so far distant from the Pole as 12 Degrees, was no true observation, but the error of Hyparchus, who afterwards by his authority deceived Ptolemy; and He, Posterity. The Reasons he alleged are, 1 Because Eudoxus which was more ancient than Hyparchus, observed the same star to be in no other place, then where now it is. 2 Because that greater light of Astronomy, Copernicus perceiving the Equinoxes and Solstitial points to be moved, was enforced to invent other grounds; but because his demonstrations depended only on the Apparences, he sought out this effect in the motion of the Earth. If it were manners to oppose so great a Scholar as joseph Scaliger, I would ask a few questions, why we should not credit the observations of Hyparchus, Ptolemy, and all posterity, as well as of Eudoxus: sith Antiquity without consent & approbation, is no great argument of truth. Nevertheless if the matter be well examined, we shall perhaps find Antiquity to be more firm on our side. The same reason (as I take it) may be given for the stars in the Horns of Aries, as of the Polestar, because all the fixt-starres, by the consent of all, are imagined to keep the same uniform site among themselves in such sort, as the varying of some would disorder all the rest: at least argue the like variety or change of all. Now to prove the stars of Aries to have been varied, many of the Ancients (as Master Hues hath observed) living in diverse times, have confirmed. The first star of Aries, which in the time of Meto Atticus, was observed in the Vernal Intersection, in the time of Thales Milesius was before it 2 Degrees; in Tymocharis age it was after it 2 Degrees 24 Minutes: In Hipparchus time 4 Degrees, 40 Minutes; in Abbumazars' 17 Degrees, 50 Minutes; in Albarens 18 Degrees, 10 Minutes; in Arzachels' 19 Deg. 37 Min. in Alphonsus his time 23 Deg. 48 Min In the time of Copernicus, and Rheticus, 27 Degrees, 21. Min. In our time about 28. Against all these Testimonies, if we should oppose the Testimony of Eudoxus and Sca●iger, we should be thought very partial to prefer them before the consent of Antiquity: Eudoxus though very Ancient, being but one, and the other one of the last. If any should object, that Eudoxus spoke only of the Polestar, and not of the stars, in the horns of Aries; I answer, as before, that the same reason is to be given of them both; For as much, as if the Polestar in Eudozus time moved in a Parallel, Equidistant from the Pole of the Equatour (which he seems to contend) then must also the stars of Aries, which were found once to be in the point of the vernal Equinoxe, move always in the Equinoctial circle, and never vary from it; which is contrary to all the Testimonies before alleged. Secondly, where he saith, that Copernicus perceiving this error, left a base discovery, without any Demonstration, except only 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, I would know how joseph Scaliger by any other means came to know it? I always supposed it a principle amongst Mathematicians, that the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 had been the surest ground of Mathematical Demonstration: for every reason which can be alleged, must of necessity be grounded on mere conjecture, as forged in a man's brain without any observation of Nature; or else suggested unto us from the things themselves. How little dependency is on the Former, let every man judge: where it is as easy for every man to deny, as affirm; and such fancies are better reserved in the brain, wherein they were first hatched, then be suffered to proceed further. If we derive our Argument (as we ought to do) from the footsteps of Nature; we must draw it either from the Form itself, or from some effect or propriety arising from it: The former is impossible I may well say in any thing; because the first form and nature, no ways discovers itself to our understanding, but by the apparent Accidents: much less can this be hoped for in the Heavens, being as far distant from us in space, as Nature. If then we are left only to the later, what other ground can we have of our Argumentation, than the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or Apparences: which kind of way, Scaliger in Copernicus strives to sleight or reject as weak or deficient: taking then this to be the only way to search as near as we can into the truth of their matters, we will in the third place show how far it may oppose Scaliger, and favour our Assertion. That the first Star of Aries is more distant from the Equinoctial point, is a matter which seems to be agreed on by all sides. This Appearance must necessarily arise out of some Motion. This Motion must be sought either in the Earth (as Copernicus would have:) or in the Heavens. That it cannot with any great probability be in the Earth, we have showed in the third Chapter, where we have proved it to have a Magnetical verticity, whereby it continually respects the same Poles. The Arguments (I confess) are only probable: but this is an opinion which Scaliger defendeth not. If we seek this effect in the Heavens, it must of necessity (which Scaliger confesseth) happen one of these 2 ways: For either the stars standing unmoveable, the Equinoctial & Solstitial points must be moved, or else the stars themselves should move, as Ptolemy defends. Here I cannot but remember a merry answer of that great Atlas of Arts, Sir Henry Savile in the like question. Being once invited unto his Table, and having entered into some familiar discourses concerning Astronomical suppositions: I asked him what he thought of the Hypothesis of Copernicus, who held the Sun to stand fixed, and the Earth to be subject to a Triple Motion: His answer was; he cared not which were true, so the Apparences were solued, and the account exact: sith each way either the old of Ptolemy, or the new of Copernicus, would indifferently serve an Astronomer: Is it not all one (saith he) sitting at Dinner, whether my Table be brought to me, or I go to my Table, so I eat my meat? Such an answer would aswell befit this question: whether the first star of Aries should be moved from the Equinoctial point, or the point from it, 'tis a matter should little trouble a Cosmographer; so either way might indifferently serve to salve the apparent observations: But how Scaliger upon this granted supposition, would make all whole, without disturbing the order and form of Nature in the celestial Machine? what Regular motion he would give the Sun, whose period describes the Equinoctial points, which he makes movable? what other Poles he would assign to the world besides that of the Equator? is a matter of a more curious search, and besides the limits of my subject: The full discussion of which points, as most of the rest: Illis relinquo quorum imagines lambunt— Hederae sequaces. 17 The lesser Parallels are equidistant lines answering to the Equator, which divide the Globe of the Earth into two unequal parts. 18 These lesser Parallels are again of two sorts: either Named or Nameless; Named are such as are called by special names, and have more special use in Geography; such as are the two Tropics, and the two Polar circles. 19 The Tropics are Parallels bounding the Sun's greatest declination, which is either to the North, and is called the Tropic of Cancer: or towards the South, and is called the Tropic of Capricorn. The Tropickes have taken their names from the conversion or turning back of the Sun; because the Sun declining from the Equinoctial circle either North or South, proceedeth in his course no further than this circle, and so turneth back: so that in the heavens they are as limits and bounds, comprehending within them that space, without the which the Sun never moves: Consonant to these Celestial Tropics, are there imagined in the earth the like, immediately placed under them: which are apparent, not only by Application of the Celestial Globe, and his parts to the Terrestrial; but also out of the Magnetical disposition of the earth, as we have already showed: The Tropic bounding the Sun's greatest declination towards the North, is called the Tropic of Cancer; because the Sun arriving at that Tropic, is lodged in the sign of Cancer: The other is termed the Tropic of Capricorn; because the Sun touching that Tropic, is in that sign: The distance of these Tropickes, from the Equatour, is ordinarily put 23 Degrees, and 30 Minutes; which is also the distance of the Poles of the Ecliptic, from the Poles of the world. The Tropic of Cancer, as it is conceived in the Earth; passeth by the greater Asia, by the Red-Sea, or Sinus Arabicus, and China, and India: But the Tropic of Capricorn, situate on the Southern side, runneth along by the most Southern coast of Africa, and that part of America which is called Brasilia; Besides many Lands in the Indian Sea. 2 The Polar circles are Parallels answering to the Polar circles of the Heavens, drawn by the Poles of the Ecliptic: These are of two sorts: either the Arctic compassing round the North-Pole; or the Antarctic compassing round the Antarctic or South Pole. The Polar Circles, as they are conceived in the heavens by Astronomers, are described by the Poles of the Ecliptic, carried by the diurnal motion about the Poles of the world. Correspondent to these circles in the heavens are imagined two circles on the earth, which we also call Polar; and if we believe Gilbert, with other Magnetical Philosophers, they are primarily in the Earth, as that which is the true subject of diurnal motion. These circles thus described by the Pole of the Ecliptic, must needs challenge the same distance from the Pole, which the Pole of the Ecliptic hath, to wit, 23. Degrees, and 30 Minutes. The Greeks have taken the Polar circles, in another sense then the Latins: for by these Polar circles (as it appears by Proclus, and Cleomedes) they understand not such circles as are described by the Pole of the Zodiac: but two other circles; whereof the one is greatest of all the Parallels, which always appears above our Horizon; the other is the greatest of all those Parallels which lie hid in our Horizon perpetually: The reason why the Grecians took it in this sense, was; because by these circles they could know and distinguish those stars; which always are seen and never set, as those which are comprehended of the Arctic circle; from those which always lie hid and never rise; as such as the Antarctic contains: Whence it manifestly appears, that the two Polar circles, as they are taken of the Grecians in all Regions, are not of the same quantity & greatness, but are greater in oblique Sphere then in a right: but our Polar circles are at all places alike in their quantity. Of these, the one termed Arctic in the Earth passeth by Islandia, the top of Norway and Finland, with many adjoining Lands, and the Southern part of Green-land, as may appear by our ordinary Geographical Maps. The other Polar circle called Antarctic, passeth through the South part of the world (as yet) undiscovered, except for some few parcels, as Terra del Feugo, and Psiitacorum Regio, with somewhat more, lately discovered by the Spaniards. The chiefest use as well of these, as other parallels, is to distinguish the Zones and Climates in the Globe, whereof we shall have occasion to treat hereafter. 21 The Nameless Parallels are such as are not known by special Names, nor of so great use in Geographie. These nameless parallels may be well understood by that which we have above spoken: for howsoever they be not called by particular and special names, yet are they all of the same nature: All these parallels beside the Equatour, though infinite in number, may notwithstanding in the sphere be reduced to the number of the Meridian's; because they are drawn through the opposite points of the Meridian semicircle; so that we might account 180: but yet there are not so many painted on the face of the Artificial Globe; wherefore Ptolemy with the ancients, have distinguished the parallels on both sides, North and South, beginning from the Equatour at such a distance, that where the day should increase one quarter of an hour, a new parallel should be placed: so that the longest day of one parallel, should exceed the longest day of another parallel by one quarter of an hour. Every one of these parallels, is supposed to be divided into 360 Degrees, as all the rest of the other circles; yet are we to note that the degrees and parts of a greater circle are greater; of the lesser, less, according to the proportion of the said circle; the same have the proportion that a great circle hath to a less, so that the same degrees and parts of a quarter circle, to the degrees and parts of the lesser; as may be gathered from the first proposition of the second book of Theodosius: now to know rightly this proportion, we must first find out the summary declination for every region, which being once found, we may proceed in this manner, by the doctrine of Triangles. 1 Let the sign of the Compliment of the Declination of the lesser Circle be multiplied by the whole Circle, and the product be divided by the total sign, there will arise the number of Degrees of the lesser Circle, such as whereof the greater consists. The reason hereof is showed in Geometry, and therefore need we not to insert a demonstration; for there we learn, that as the total ●inge is to the sign of the Compliment of the Declination of any Parallel, so is the Periphery of the greater circle, to the Periphery of the Parallel▪ As for example, if we would know what proportion the Equatour hath to the Parallel, which passeth by the Vertical point of Rome; whose Declination is about 42 Degrees; I multiply the sign of the Compliment of this Declination, that is, the sign of 48 Degrees, to wit, 74314, by 360; the product whereof is, 26753040; which I divide again by 100000, and find 267 degrees, and ½▪ whence I gather that the Equatour to the Parallel of Rome, or a degree of the Equatour, to a degree of the Parallel of Rome, hath the same proportion that that 360 hath to 276 ½, which is the same that 4 hath to 3. 22 Hitherto have we spoken of the Absolute Circles, such as are the Meridian's and Parallels: we are to treat in the last place of a Relative Circle, which is conceived in respect to our sight: this Circle is called the Horizon. 23 The Horizon is a Circle which divides the upper and visible parts of the Terrestrial Globe, from the lower and invisible. The name of the Horizon is taken from the bounding or termination of the sight; because it is a Circle comprehending all that space which is visible of us, distinguishing it from the rest which lurks invisible: as if a man should be placed in a high and eminent place of the Earth, and should look round about him every way to the East, West, North, and South; He will seem to see the heavens on every side to concur with the earth: so that beyond it, can be seen nor heaven nor earth: which concurrence of the heavens with the earth, will describe unto us the horizontal Circle for that place assigned. But here we are to note, that the Horizon is two fold; either the Rational or Sensible Horizon. The Rational precisely divides the Globe into two equal parts: But the sensible or apparent Horizon, is no other than that Circle in the earth, which is designed out by the sight, from which the name seems to be derived. This sensible Horizon differs from the rational diverse ways; first, because the rational divides the whole sphere into two equal parts; but the sensible into two unequal parts. Secondly, because the rational is always certain and the same, in the same place, and of alike greatness; whereas the other is greater or lesser, for the condition of the place or sight; for the semidiameter of the rational, is the same with the semidiameter of the earth; but the semidiameter of the other, seldom or never exceeds 60 miles on the Earth. Thirdly, because the rational Horizon passeth by the Centre of the Earth; whereas the sensible toucheth only the surface of it, in that point where the Inhabitant standeth: all which differences may be seen in this Figure; wherein the Line CD represents unto us the sensible Horizon: the Line AB the rational: The former is called Natural or Physical; because it comes under the measure and apprehension of the sense: the other Astronomical, because it is of great use in Astronomy: in the resolution of the Horizon into his parts, we ought to consider two things: first, the Poles of the Horizon; Secondly, his Periphery, or circumference: The Poles are commonly called Zenith or Nadir: The Zenith is the Vertical point, directly placed over our Head: whereunto is opposite on the other side, the Nadir directly under our foot, and therefore may be called the Pedal point. The parts or intersections in the circumferences, are designed out unto us, by certain lines, discovering the coasts in the Terrestrial Globe: These lines are called either winds or Rhumbes: The winds with the Grecians were only 8. But the latter Navigators have increased them to the number of 32, whereof four were called Cardinal; to wit, such as are directed to the four coasts of East, West, North, and South: The other are Collateral, being placed on each side of the Cardinal winds. The Rhumbes are Lines passing by the Vertical point of any place, as you may see in the Compass going before: Now because one Rhumbe answers to two coasts or winds; the number of the Rhumbes is but half the number of the winds; to wit, 16. Here it is to be noted, that a Rhumbe differs from a Wind; whereas a Rhumber is one line, pointing out unto us, two winds or coasts: These Rhumbes as they are conceived in the Globe, were thought by Nonnus to be the portions of greater Circles: But learned Mr Hues in his book, out of undoubted principles, strongly confutes him. The grounds which he takes are these: First, that all Meridian's of all places pass the Pole, and cut the Equatour and all his parallels at right Angles. Secondly, If our course should be directly any way else, then towards one of the poles, a new Meridian must succeed, and a new Horizon. Thirdly, that the Iron Needle being touched with the Loadstone, shows the common section of the Meridian and the Horizon, and on one side perpetually respects the North, on the other the South. Fourthly, the same Rhumbe cuts all the Meridian's atall places at equal Angles, and every where respects the like coasts in the world. Fiftly, that a greater circle drawn by the Vertical points (if removed from the Equatour) cannot cut diverse Meridian's at equal Angles. Sixtly, a greater circle drawn by the Vertical point of any place, makes greater Angles with all other Meridian's then with that, from which it was first drawn: whence it is necessary, that the line which shall be supposed to make Angles with diverse Meridian's (as the Rhumbes) should be bowed toward the Meridian. I know not what would be more said against the opinion of P. Nonnus, who would have all the Rhumbes to be portions of greater circles. To illustrate further the nature and use of the Horizon we will insert these Theorems. 2 The Sensible and Rational Horizon in the Earth, are much different; in respect of the Firmament, all one. Ptol. dict. 1. cap. 5. Alph. 6. diff. 6. It may be gathered out of the suppositions of Ptolemy and Alphraganus, and almost all other Astronomers, that no man being placed on the surface of the earth can precisely see the half of it. For that Horizon which terminates our sight, as we have showed, is a plain superficies every way circularly extended in the Earth, in such sort as men placed, either in the Sea in a ship, or in a great field or Country, would think the visible part of the earth to be plain, whose ends would seem to touch the Heavens. Whence must needs come to pass that such an Horizon cannot divide the Sphere of the ●arth into two equal parts. For so much will be found wanting, as is measured betwixt that superficies which toucheth the earth, and that which passeth by the Centre of it, equidistant from the other: for this later only can divide the earth into 2 equal parts, Prop. 11. lib. 1. according to Theodosius, and may well be seen in the * Pag. 149. former figure, wherein are expressed both Orisons, as well the visible as invisible, touching the Sphere in a point on the superficies: as the Rational passing by the Centre. Nevertheless we must consider, that the quantity intercepted betwixt these two Orisons in the Terrestrial Sphere, is of little or no moment, compared with the whole frame of the Heavens: For sith the Heavens are so far distant from us, it will come to pass that if two equidistant lines should be drawn, the one from the Eye, the other from the Centre of the Earth to the Firmament, they would according to sense, appear one and the selfsame; by reason of the wonderful distance: as we see in a long Gallery, whose walls have an equal distance the one from the other; the walls will notwithstanding (according to optical principles) seem widest where they are nearest, and to close and shut up at the ends, or at least to concur nearer: much more must we imagine this to happen in the sight, if we compare the greatness of the Firmament with the Sphere of the Earth, in whose magnitudes we shall find a incomparable disparity. This will appear by the Apparences: for we shall see the six signs of the Zodiac, conspicuous above our Horizon, and the other six under it, hid from our sight: Also the Sun and Moon, when they are diametrally opposed, almost at the same moment will appear, the one in the East, the other in the West: at least the one will rise soon upon the setting of the other: And (if we believe Pliny) the Moon was observed to be eclipsed in the East point; the Sun at the same time being in a sort above the Horizon in the West. Such an Eclipse could not happen without a diametral opposition of the two lights, and therefore can the Sensible and the Rational Horizon have no sensible difference in respect of the Firmament. 2 The sensible Horizon may be greater or lesser according to the nature and disposition of the place. In this consideration we take no notice of the difference of sights, whether they be weaker or sharper; but suppose an eye sufficient to ken so far in the Earth, as the place will permit: The difference then betwixt divers Orisons must be sought out in the condition of the place. A Sight placed on the top of a high mountain, may see much farther than one in a low valley, compassed about with hills; for as much as the Semidiameter of the sensible Horizon, which is equal to the Rays or Lines drawn from the extreme parts of the visible Earth, are much greater. The most indifferent judgement of this Horizon, may be taken from the superficies of the Sea beyond sight of land: for a man thereon sailing in a ship, may perceive the surface of the Sea as a plain, on every side to bond the sight in a round circle, seeming together to terminate the end of the Earth, and protension of the sight. What the Semidiameter of this Horizon should be, hath not been yet agreed upon by all: Erastothenes would have it to be 44 miles. Macrobius 23. Proclus 250. Albertus Magnus 125. These differences seem too great to admit of reconcilement: yet taking into our consideration the disparity in account of miles betwixt the Modern and Ancient Cosmographers; as also betwixt the greeks and Latins: 2 the divers placing of the sight● the various disposition of the places wherein they took their observations, with other circumstances, we should diminish much of admiration. But divers others whose opinion is more approved by modern Cosmographers, have defined it to be about 63 miles. The cause why this Horizon should be so little in respect of the Rational which passeth by the Centre, is the roundness of the earth interposed betwixt the sight and the farther parts, which we have formerly proved. 3 The eye may be so placed on the Earth, as it may behold the whole Hemisphere of the heavens, and yet no part of the Terrestrial Sphere. This may seem a paradox with vulgar judgement; but it wants not a demonstration drawn from Astronomical and Optic principles. To explain which, we must suppose out of the grounds already granted, 1 That the Sensible and Rational Horizon in respect of the Heavens, aught to be esteemed one and the self same, by reason of the great distance and disproportion betwixt the Earth and the Firmament. 2 That the eye of the beholder is in this sort supposed to be in the Centre; because in this consideration the distance betwixt the superficies of the Earth, and her Centre, is insensible. 3 That the visual Ray wherein the sight is carried, is always a right line. Now suppose (according to our former figure) the Centre of the eye wherein consists the sight, to be in the point of the Terrestrial surface F, the distance (as we said) betwixt F and E the Centre being insensible, the eye is imagined in the centre: likewise the Orisons CFD, and AEB for the same cause in respect of the Heavens are to be esteemed one and the same; because CA and DB have no sensible difference. It is then manifest, that the eye so placed will behold in the heavenly Sphere, all which is included betwixt A and B, to wit, the Hemisphere AGB, bounded by the Rational Horizon AEB. Nevertheless in the Terrene Globe it can see nothing at all: For either it should see only the point F, wherein it is seated, or else some other point or part distant from it: the former cannot be admitted, because the eye being there supposed to be placed, should according to this supposition behold itself, which is against philosophy: For granting the sense only a direct and not a reflex operation, it cannot be imagined how it should perceive itself. Finally, it cannot see any point in the Earth beside; for then this point would either be placed above the point F: but this cannot be; because F being supposed in the superficies, admits of no point higher in the Sphere, or else under it: but this cannot be, because CFD being a tangent line, and touching the Sphere in F only: there cannot according to Geometrical principles be drawn any right line from the point F, which can touch any point in the said Sphere, but all will cut it, and so the section cause impediment to the sight, the Earth being an opacous and round body. 4 From the horizontal circle is reckoned the elevation of the Pole in any place assigned. The finding out of the elevation of the Pole is a matter most necessary for a Cosmographer; as shall appear after, where we shall speak of the Latitudes and Climates. It is defined to be an arch of the Meridian betwixt the Horizon and the Pole. For the finding out of which many ways have been devised by Artificers: The first is taken from the Sun, the second from the Polestar: From the Sun it may be performed two ways. 1 At the time of the Equinoxe. 2 At any other time of the year. At the time of the Equinoxe it may be found out by the observation of the Sun's shadow at Noontide, in this manner: Let the Meridian height of the Sun be subtracted from the whole quadrant, which is 90 degrees: there will remain the distance of the Zenith to the Equator, which is equal to the elevation of the Pole. In the second place at any time of the year to know the elevation of the Pole out of the Meridian height of the Sun, it is necessary out of an Ephemerideses, or any other way, accurately to find out the place of the Sun in his Ecliptic for the day proposed, together with his declination: for the declination of the Sun, the Sun being in the six Northern signs, subtracted from the Meridian altitude; or added, the Sun being in the six Southern signs, will precisely give the height of the Equator: or (which is the same) the Meridian height of the Sun in the Equinoctial: which being once found, we may work as in the former. By the Polestar we may likewise find it out, if we observe it three distinct times in the same night: for three points being given, every Geometrician will find out the Centre, which in this case must be the Pole. Many other ways have been invented by skilful Astronomers, which appertaining rather to Astronomy then Cosmography. I purposely omit. 24 Concerning the Horizon, two things are chiefly to be noted, the Invention and the Distinction. The Invention is considered either as it concerns the Zenith or Pole: or the Plain of the Horizon. For both which we will set down these Rules. 1 The height of the Pole subtracted from the quadrant of 90 Degrees: the residue will show the Zenith or distance of the Zenith from the Pole. The reason is evident; because the height of the Pole, together with the distance of the Pole and the Zenith make an arch, which is a whole quadrant: so that the height of the Pole subducted, the distance will remain; as for example, if we put the elevation of the Pole here in Oxford, to be 51 ½ degrees or thereabout (as hath been formerly taught: Let these 51 ½ degrees be subtracted from 90, then will remain 38 ½, which is the true Zenith for that place. 2 A line which makes right angles with a plummet perpendicularly falling on it, will design the horizontal plain. The practice of the proposition is usually showed by Artificers by a certain instrument called a Level, which is made in a triangle form: from the vertex, or head of which, a line with a plummet falls on the Basis. Now when it shall be found to be so placed, that the line and plummet falling on the Basis, shall make right Angles with it, and cut the whole Triangle into two equal halves: we may account the Base-line to be the plain of the Horizon: For of this plain, such is the position, that it inclines no more on the one side then on the other, but lies even: as we see in the surface of the water, when it rests quiet without motion: for howsoever the water so resting (as we have formerly demonstrated) is always spherical, yet in a small distance in the sensible Horizon, it may to sense be represented by a plain. 25 So much for the Invention: The Distinction of the Horizon is into three sorts: for either it is a right Horizon, or oblique, or parallel. 26 A right Horizon is that which with the Equator makes Right Angles. This distinction grows naturally out of the Respect of the Horizon to the Equatour. For sith the Equatour is one and the selfsame immoveable circle; and the Horizon is mutable and changed according to his divers vertical points, they cannot always keep the same situation in regard one of the other. This they have reduced into three heads: for either it is Right or Oblique, or Parallel. The Right is so called from the right Angles which the Horizon makes with the Equator: wherein the two poles are always couched in the Horizon, and the Equator passing directly over their heads, as is plain to be seen in this figure here affixed: such an Horizon have these Inhabitants which dwell directly under the Equinoctial line, in the very midst of the Torrid Zone: such an Horizon agrees to a great part of Africa: to a part of Peru in America: Also to most of the Molucco Lands, the Lands of Taprobana, and S. Thomas: but no part of Europe is subject to such a Right Horizon. The cause of this variation of Orisons is the natural roundness of the Earth: For the earth being supposed to be spherical, as we have before demonstrated, it must of necessity follow, that the site of the poles should be changed according to the diversity of the places. Also, because wheresoever we are placed on the Earth (as we have showed) all impediments of the sight, as mountains and valleys put apart, we can behold the Hemisphere of the Heavens, which middle part being set down is divided from the part unseen, by the Horizon it must needs be, that either both the poles must be in the Horizon: and so make a Right Sphere: or at least one must be above and seen, and the other hid from the sight, and so much as one is elevated above the Horizon, must the other be couched under it▪ For otherwise we should see more or less than a precise moiety, or half of the Heavens: sith the poles differ one from the other the half of the whole Heavens: to wit, by the Diameter of the world. 27 An oblique Horizon is that which with the Equator makes oblique Angles. Those Inhabitants are said to have an oblique Horizon, whose site and position declines somewhat from the Equator, either to the North or South towards either pole: yet so that the pole be not elevated so high as 90 Degrees: for than it becomes a Parallel Horizon, as we shall show in the next. The representation of such an oblique Sphere may be seen in this Diagram: wherein the Horizon cuts the Equatour at oblique Angles, whence it is called oblique. Clavius seems to add another reason of this appellation: to wit, because in such an Horizon one pole is always elevated above, and the other hid▪ but this reason seems too general, as that which agrees not only to an Oblique, but also to a Parallel Sphere. From this Horizon, by johannes de Sucrobosco, the Sphere is called Artificial▪ because, as Clavius conjectures, it is variable, and doth naturally divide the Globe. For whereas the Horizon of the Right Sphere passeth by either Pole, it seems by itself (as it were) Naturally and Directly to divide the Sphere: and this division is no way variable, as that it should be more or less Right: but chose in the oblique Sphere, sith one Pole is placed above, and the other beneath, it seems to be placed out of his natural site and position. Moreover this Oblique Horizon is variable according to the diversity of habitations, so that it may be to some more, to others less Oblique: for so much the more Oblique must it be, by how much the nearer it is placed to the Poles. The Inhabitants of an Oblique Sphere are such as seated betwixt the Equator, and either of the Tropics of Cancer and Capricorn, or such as dwell betwixt either Tropic and the Polar-circle▪ 28 A Parallel Horizon is that which lies Parallel to the Equator, making no angles at all with it. Such a kind of Horizon those Inhabitants are said to have which are included betwixt the Poles of the world, and the Polar circles; whose Horizon cuts not the Equatour at any Angles at all, either Right or Oblique: but lies Parallel unto it, as we see in this Figure here set down. Some have reduced this kind of Sphere to an Oblique Horizon: in regard that in this site our Pole is elevated above the Horizon, and the other depressed under: in which opinion Clavius seems to second johannes de Sacrobosco, on whom he comments. But this is ridiculous; because the Sphere is called Right or Oblique (as we have taught) from the Angles which the Horizon makes with the Equator: wherefore that Horizon which makes no Angles at all, cannot be called either Right or Oblique, but is necessarily distinguished from either. On this distinction of Orisons is grounded the division of the Inhabitants of the Earth according to three kinds of Spheres: of whose accidents and proprieties we shall more fully treat hereafter in the dictinction of the parts and Inhabitants of the Terrestrial Sphere, because such proprieties cannot so well be taught without the knowledge of the Artificial Sphere, whose Nature and Fabric we shall labour (God willing) in our next Chapter to unfold. CHAP. VII. Of the Artificial Representation of the Terrestrial Sphere. 1 Having hitherto treated of the Terrestrial Sphere, as it is Natural or real: we are in the next place to speak of the Artificial Globe: The Artificial Globe is an expression or imitation of the Sphere of the Earth. 2 The Artificial imitation of the Earth is either Common or Magnetical. The common is again twofold; either in the Globe, or in the Geographical Map, or Table. 3 The Geographical Globe is a round solid Body, adorned with Lineaments & pictures, serving for the use of Geographers. Who was the first Inuentour of this Artificial Globe, it is not evident: some think with Pliny, that it was found out by Atlas, and carried into Greece by Hercules. Others have ascribed it to Anaximander Milesius; some to Musaeus, as Diogenes Laërtius: others to other Authors, amongst whom Architas Tarentinus is not forgotten, as one that was esteemed the rarest Mathematician of his time. But all these were outstripped by Archimedes the Syracusan Mathematician, who is said to have composed a Sphere of transparent glass, representing unto the life the whole frame of the Heavens, wherein the Sun, Moon, and Stars with their true motions, periods, and limits were showed to the sight, in such sort, as if it were natural whereof Claudian the Poet elegantly wrote in these Verses. Claudian. in Epigrammat. jupiter in paruo cum cerneret aethera vitro, Risit, & ad Superos talia dicta dedit: Huccine mortalis progressa potentia curae? jam meus infragili ●uditur orbe labour. jura poli, rerumque fidem▪ legésque Deorum, Ecce Syracusius transtulit arte Senex. Inclusus varijs famulatur spiritus astris, Et viwm certis motibus urget opus. Percurrit proprium mentitus signifer annum, Et simulata novo Cynthia mense redit. jamque suum voluens audax industria mundum, Gaudet & humana sidera ment regi. Quid falso insontem tonitru Salmonea miror? Aemula naturae parua reperta manus. In a small glass when jove beheld the Skies, He smiled, and thus unto the gods replies: Could man so far extend his studious care, To mock my labours in a brittle Sphere? Heaven's laws, man's ways, and Nature's sovereign right, This Stage of Syracuse translates to sight. A soul within on various stars attends, And moves the quicke-worke unto certain ends, A feigning Zodiac runs his proper year, And a false Cynthia makes new months appear: And now bold Art takes on her to command, And rule the Heavenly Stars with humane hand. Who can admire Salmonean harmless Thunder, When a flight hand stirs Nature up to wonder? But this Sphere of Archimedes I take to be more than an ordinary Globe commonly used amongst us, as may appear by the Poet's description; so that it may rather be likened to the Sphere, lately composed by Cornelius Trebelius, and presented unto King james. The like whereof Peter Ramus says he saw two at Paris; yet not of glass, but of Iron; the one of which Ruellius the Physician brought from the spoils of Sicily: the other of which Orontius the Mathematician recovered likewise from the German wars. But of such kind of Globes having never yet had the happiness to see any, I intent no description: In the mean time our common Geographical Globes may well serve our turns. 4 In the Terrestrial Globe two things are to be considered: 1 The Fabric or Structure. 2 The Use. 3 The Direction. In the former is taught the composition of the Globe by resolving of it into its parts. 1 The parts whereof the Globe is Geographically compounded are circles and pictures. To explain the true composition of the Artificial Globe, not Physically as it consists of timber and mettle, but Geographically as it represents the Earth, we are to consider, that the parts of it are either external or Internal: external I call those parts which are without the Sphere itself, yet necessarily concur to the constitution of it. These parts are such as concur to the making of the Stock or Frame whereunto our Sphere is set: where to let pass the footing or lower board, (wherein in the old Globes was engrafted a Mariners Compass, with a Needle magnetically touched, very profitable for the direction of the Sphere) I will only speak of the great Timber Circle, encompassing round the whole Globe: because it more immediately concerns our purpose. This Circle represents the Horizon of the Natural Sphere: In the Globe it is made but one, not that there is but one Horizon in the whole Earth; because (as we have taught) the Horizon is varied according to the places: but because it is impossible to point and mark out the Orisons; for all places being infinite as the Vertical points: yet may this one serve for all places, because the Globe being movable, may apply all his parts to this circle. This Circle representing the Horizon, is divided into three borders or Limbs: whereof the first which is towards the Sphere, contains all the signs with the Planets thereunto belonging; every of which is divided into 30 Degrees, which in the Timber Circle are described by set numbers and marks. The second which is the middlemost and largest, contains the Calendar, with the Golden number, and several names of all the Feasts throughout the year. The third and last is of the 22 Winds, serving chiefly for the use of Mariners, and may serve many ways for a Geographer to distinguish the Coasts and points of the Earth. But of these three borders distinguished in the Horizon, only the last hath use in Geography; the other two are in themselves Astronomical, and placed in the Geographical Globe rather for ornament, than use. The Internal parts of the Globe are either annexed or inscribed in the face of the Sphere. The Annexed part is that which represents the Meridian, which is a Brazen circle: For as the external Frame of the Globe contained the Horizon as one circle; so this Meridian is set but one, although it be in itself various, according to the places to which it serve. Neither without good reason is this Circle made of brass, because it should serve for divers uses, which require that it should be often changed and turned to and fro, which being of Timber would miscarry. This Brazen Meridian meets with the Horizon at two opposite places, cutting it at right angles, that the Sphere included might be raised and set lower, as occasion requireth. The Meridian circle is again divided into 4 Quadrants, each of which is again divided into 90 Degrees; so that on the one side the 90th Degree must touch the Pole; on the other side the first degree; so that in all there will arise 360 degrees, described in the Brazen Meridian. Through this Brazen Meridian by the two Poles doth pass a line or wire, which is called the Axletree of the Globe, about the which the Sphere is turned, the ends of which are commonly called the Poles; whereof the one representing the North point is called the Pole Arctic; the other showing the South, is termed Antarctic. To this Meridian Circle in the Globe is commonly fastened a little Brazen Circle, named Cyclus horarius or the houre-circle; but this rather appertains to Astronomy then Geography, and therefore we will forbear to describe it: somewhat more use have we of another Instrument fastened to the Meridian, called the Quadrant of Latitude; foras much as it may serve to measure the Distance betwixt any two places signed in the Globe: but in so gross an Instrument little exactness can be expected. Now for such matters as are inscribed in the Sphere itself, (to let pass ridiculous & idle pictures used of Painters for ornament) they are either Lines & Circles drawn on the face of the Globe: or else the pictures & delineations of Countries and places, marked out in visible proportions; whereof the former properly appertains to the Spherical part of Geography; the latter to the Topical. The Circular Lineaments are again twofold: either Circles necessarily appertaining to the constitution of the Globe; or else Lines thereon drawn to be considered of Mariners, which we have before called the Rhumbes. But these Lines also (as we have taught) appertain to the Geographer, being as many sections of the horizontal Circle; because they are always imagined to proceed from a Vertical point wherein they meet. The Circles painted on the Globe are either the Parallels or Meridian's, whose description we have set down in the chapter before: Amongst the Parallels the most remarkable is the Equatour, which is made greater than all the rest, in form of a bracelet, distinguished into degrees, and marked at every 10. degrees: Next to this are the Tropics and Polar Circles, represented only by black Lines, yet framed in such sort, that they may easily be discerned from other Parallels. Amongst the Meridian's the most notable is the first Meridian passing by the Canaries, and painted much like the Equatour, cut into diverse sections and degrees, in such sort as we have described: For the Zodiac which is usually pictured in the Terrestrial Globe, I hold it altogether needless in Geography, and made rather for ornament, than use; for as much as the periodicke course of the Sun, deciphered by the Ecliptic, appertains rather to the Theory, of the planets, which is the hardest part of Astronomy. The proportion of these Circles, Site, and Distance is taught before, and needs no repetition, sith it is the very same in representation on the face of the Globe, which is really in the Earth itself. For the pictures and Topical description of the Earth, we refer it to the second and third part of this Treatise; where we shall have occasion to speak of Countries and Regions, with their several qualities, accidents, and dispositions. 2 The use of the Artificial Globe is to express the parts of the Earth so far forth as they have a divers situation as well one n respect of another, as of the Heavens. The use of the Artificial Globe is twofold, either general or special: the General is expressed in this Theorem: the Special shall be shown in divers special propositions hereafter as occasion shall serve. 5 This Direction is taught in the Rule. 1▪ The Meridian for the place being found by the Sun or Compass. 1 Let the Globe be so set, that the North Pole respect the North, the oppoposite the South. 2 Let the Pole in the Meridian of the Globe be set according to the elevation of the Pole at the place assigned. 6 A Geographical Map is a plain Table, wherein the Lineaments of the Terrestrial Sphere are expressed and described in due site and proportion. Some would have the name of a Map to be drawn from the linen furniture wherewith it is endorsed; which is not unlikely, in regard of the affinity of the words in Latin. But more significantly by others it is termed a Geographical Table or Chartley: A Map differs from a Globe, in that the Globe is a round solid body, more nearly representing the true figure of the Earth, whereas contrariwise the Charts of themselves are plain, though representing a Sphere, invented to supply the wants of a Globe. For whereas a Globe is more costly to be procured of poor Students, and more troublesome to be carried to and fro; a Map is more cheap to be bought, and far more portable: And howsoever it be not so apt an expression as the Globe, yet are there few matters represented in the other, which may not in some sort find place in this. And certainly such is the use and necessity of these Tables, that I hardly deem him worth the name of a Scholar, which desires not his Chamber furnished with such ornaments. It is written of that learned man Erasmus Roterodamus, that having seen 50 years, he was delighted so much with these Geographical Maps, that undertaking to write Comments on the Acts of the Apostles, he had always in his eye those Tables, where he made no small use for the finding out of the site of such places whereof he had occasion to treat. And it were to be wished in these days, that young Students instead of many apish and ridiculous pictures, tending many times rather to ribaldry, than any learning, would store their studies with such furniture. These Geographical Maps are of two sorts, either Universal or Particular: The Universal are such as represent the picture of the whole Earth. The particular are such as show only some particular Place or Region. These particular Tables are again of two sorts; some are such as describe a place in respect of the Heavens, whereon are drawn the Geographical lineaments by us described, at least the chiefest: some again are such as have no respect at all to the Heavens; such as are the topographical Maps of Cities and Shires, wherein none of the Circles are described. For the Universal and first sort of particular Maps, there is no question but they properly appertain to Geography: But the later deserve much less consideration, as being too special for this general Treatise. 7 The Geographical Map is twofold: eithre the Plain Chart, or the Planispheare: The Plain Chart we call that which consists of one face and Right lines. Such a Chart we find commonly set forth under the name of the Mariners Sea-Chart: for howsoever it seems to have chiefest use in Navigation, yet is the Nature and use of it more general: as that which not only expresseth the Sea, but the whole Terrestrial Globe: For as much as the Parallels, Meridian's, and Rhumbes, whereof primarily it consists, are circles common to the whole, and not appropriated to either part. 8 In the Plaine-Chart we are to consider two things First the Ground. Secondly the Inscription. The Ground is the space or Platform wherein the Lines are to be inscribed: the Inscription teacheth the manner how to project the Lines. In the Chart two things are remarkable; to wit, the plain whereunto the Lines are inscribed: Secondly the Lines or Inscription itself: so we are here to handle two points: First how this Plaine-Chart should be conceived to be produced out of the Globe; whereof it is a representation. Secondly what rule or method we ought to use for the inscription of the Meridian's, parallels, Rhumbes, and other Lineaments thereunto annexed. Both which depend on these propositions. 1 The Geographical Chart is a Parallellogramme conceived to be made out of a Sphere, inscribed in a Cylinder, every part thereof swelling in Longitude and Latitude, till it apply itself to the hollow superficies of the said Cylinder. This Theorem seeming at the first obscure, consists of many parts, which being once opened, will soon take light. First then to know the Groundwork of this Parallellogramme thus defined, we must suppose a Spherical superficies, Geographical or Hydrographical, with Meridian's and parallels to be inscribed into a concave Cylinder, their Axes agreeing in one. Secondly we must imagine the superficies thus inscribed, to swell like a bladder, blowing equally in every part, as well in Longitude, as Latitude, till it apply itself round about, and all along towards either pole, unto the concave superficies of the Cylinder; so that each parallel on this superficies, successively grows greater from the Equinoctial towards either Pole, until it challenge equal Diameter with the Cylinder: and likewise all the Meridian's growing wider and farther off, till they be as far distant everywhere as is the Equinoctial one from the other. Hence may easily be understood the true Mathematical production or generation of this part: for first of a Spherical superficies it is made a Cylinder: and secondly of a Cylinder it is made a Parallellogramme, or plain superficies: For the concave superficies of a Cylinder is nothing else but a plain Parallellogramme, imagined to be wound about two equal equidistant circles, having one common Axletree perpendicular upon the Centres of them both; and the Peripheries of them both, equal to the length of the Parallellogramme, as the distance betwixt those Centres is equal to the breadth thereof: In this Chart so conceived to be made, all places must needs be situate in the same Longitudes and Latitudes, Meridian's, Parallels, and Rhumbes, which they had in the Globe itself: because we have imagined every point betwixt the Equatour and the Poles, to swell equally in Longitude and Latitude, till it apply itself to the concavity of the Cylinder: so that no point can be displaced from his proper seat, but only dilated in certain proportion. And this I take to be the best conceit for the groundwork or platform of this Geographical Chart. 2 Except the distances betwixt the Parallels in a Plaine-Chart be varied: it cannot be excused from sensible error. It hath been thought by many Geographers, that the Earth cannot aptly according to due symmetry and proportion be expressed in a plain superficies, as it is in the Globe: for as much as that which is joined and united in the Globe, being of a Spherical figure, is in the Map extended and dilated to a divers longitude and latitude from that Spherical delineation: and although it hath been generally conceited by many writers, that no due proportion could be observed in a Spherical superficies, without sensible error: yet most exception hath been made against this Chart here mentioned, consisting of one face and strait lines, which in substance (if we consider the Circles) differs not from the Nautical Chart: of whose errors Martin Cortese, Peter Nonnus, and many others have complained: which escapes are excellently opened and reform by our Countryman Edward Wright in his Correction of Nautical Errors. The reason or ground which drew these men to think that the Earth could not be proportionably described in a plain superficies, proceeded from the common proportion of the Lines and Circles on the Chart. For supposing the Parallels cutting the Meridian's at equal Angles, to observe an equal distance everywhere one from the other; these errors and absurdities must of necessity ensue. First, what places soever are delineate in the ordinary Chart, the length of them from East to West hath a greater proportion to the breadth from North to South then it ought to have, except only under the Equinoctial: and this error is so much the more augmented, by how much those places are distant from the Equinoctial: for the nearer you approach the Pole, the proportion of the Meridian to the Parallel still increaseth; so that at the Parallel of 60 degrees of latitude, the proportion of the length to the breadth is twice greater than it ought to be; for as much as the Meridian is double to that Parallel, and so in all the rest: whence as Edward Wright observes, the proportion of the length of Friesland to the breadth thereof, is twofold greater than in the Globe which expresseth the true proportion; because the Meridian is double to the Parallel of that Island. In like sort it is plain, that in the Lands of Grock-land and Groenland, the length to the breadth hath a fourfold greater proportion in the Common Chart, then in the Globe; because the Meridian is fourfold greater than the Parallel of those places. Wherefore it cannot be conceited, that the manner of finding out the difference of Longitude by the common Chart, can be anywhere true without sensible error, except only under the Equinoctial, or near about it; because in no other place the Parallel is equal to the Meridian. In other places the error will be sensible, according to the difference of the Meridian, and Parallel of that place: whereas if the contrary were granted, it would follow, that two ships sailing from North to South, under two several Meridian's, would keep the same distance the one from the other of longitude near the Pole, which they had near the Equatour; which is impossible: because Meridian's cannot be Parallel the one to the other, but by how much they approach the Pole, by so much they are nearer, that in the end they all concur and meet in the Pole itself. Secondly this common Chart admitted, there would arise great errors not only in the situation of diverse places, which appear to be under the same Meridian, but also in the bearing of places one to the other. The reason is manifest, for that the Meridian is a certain Rule of the site and position of places: therefore whensoever any error shall be committed in the Site and Position of the Meridian, there must needs follow errors in the designation of the Rhumbes, and other points of the Compass. And therefore every respective position of place to place, set down in the common Chart, cannot be warranted. A pregnant example we have in the way from India; for the Promontory of Africa, called the Promontory of three Points; having of Northern latitude 4 Degrees and a half, and the Island of Tristan, Acugna, having 36 degrees of Southern latitude, are in the common Chart set under the same Meridian: But the Chart showeth the distance between these Lands, and the Cape of good Hope to come near to 400 leagues; both which cannot stand together; for if all the coast from the Promontory of Three Points, unto the Cape of Good-hope be rightly measured, and the Promontory of Three Points lie also under the same Meridian with those Lands, yet must the distance be much less: But if it be not less, it cannot stand with reason that it should have the same Meridian with the Promontory of Three Points, but must needs lie more Westward. Thirdly, there must needs arise a greater error in the translating Seacoasts and other such places out of the common Chart, into the Globe; because they have only a respect to the Numbers of Degrees of Longitudes and Latitudes found therein; so that not only errors appear in the Sea-Chart, but also otherwhere thence derived. These and many more errors have been detected in the common Sea-chart, which (as we have said) respecting the circles, aught to be imagined one and the selfsame with the projection of the lines in a Geographical table; which oversight Ger. Mercator in his universal Map seems to correct: yet leaves no demonstration behind him to teach others the certain way to draw the Lines, as Meridian's, Parallels, & Rhumbes on the Chart, in such sort, as these errors might be prevented, and the due proportion and symmetry of places well observed. But our industrious Countryman hath waded through all these difficulties, and found out the true demonstration of a projection of these Lines to be inscribed in the Chart in such sort, as no sensible error can show itself, from whose copious industry we will extract so much as may serve our purpose, only contracting his invention into a shorter method, having many matters to pass through in this Treatise. 2 The Distances of the Parallels in the Chart must increase proportionably as the Secantes of the latitude. It hath been a conceived error (as we have showed) that all the parallels in the Chart here mentioned, should everywhere keep the same Distances one from the other, from the Equator to the poles; yet because no man (for aught I know) hath out of Geometrical grounds discovered the true proportion, beside my forenamed Author; I must herein also follow his direrection as near as I can in his own footsteps; because I would not any way prejudice his Invention. First therefore we must consider in that Chart, because the parallels are equal one to the other, (for every one is set equal to the Equinoctial) the Meridian's also must be parallel and strait Lines, and by consequence the Rhumbes, making equal angles with every Meridian, must be also strait lines. Secondly, because the spherical superficies whereof the Chart is imagined to be produced, is conceived to swell and enlarge itself everywhere equally, that is, as well in Longitude as Latitude, till it accommodate itself to the hollowness of the Cylinder, round about: therefore at every point of Latitude in this Cylinder so dilated, a part of the Meridian obtains the same proportion to the like part of the Parallel, that the like parts of the Meridian and Parallel have to each other in the Globe without sensible error. Now for as much as like parts of the wholes, have the same proportion that these wholes have; therefore the like parts of any Parallel or Meridian of the Sphere have the same proportion that the same Parallels and Meridian's have: For example sake, as the Meridian is double to the Parallel of 60 Degrees, so a Degree, Minute, or other part, is also double to a Degree, Minute, or other part of the Parallel; and what proportion the Parallel hath to the Meridian, the same must their Diameters and Semidiameters have one to the other: as is taught by Geometricians. Now the Sign of the Compliment of the Parallels latiude or distance from the Equinoctial, is the semi-diameter of the said Parallel; as in this Diagramme here inserted may easily appear: for A the sign of AH the compliment of OF, the latitude of the Parallel ABCD from the Equinoctial is the semi-diameter of the Parallel ABCD; and as the semi-diameter of the Meridian or whole sign is to the semi-diameter of the Parallel; so is the secant or Hypotenuse of the Parallels latitude to the semi-diameter of the Meridian, or to the whole sign, as FK (that is) AK, to A (as is) GK, so is IK to FK: therefore in this Geographical Chart, the semi-diameter of each Parallel being equal to the semidiameter of the Equinoctial or whole sign, the parts of the Meridian at every point of latitude, must of necessity increase with the same proportion wherewith the Secants of the Arch contained between these points of latitude and the Equinoctial increase: out of which Geometrical grounds thus explained, will arise a certain and easy method for the making of a table by the help of Trigonometry, whereby the Meridian in any Geographical or Hydrographical table may truly and in due proportion divide itself into parts, from the Equinoctial towards either Pole: for taking for granted, each distance of each point of latitude, or of each Parallel one from the other, to comprehend so many points as the secants of the latitude of each point or Parallel contains, we may draw out a table by continual addition of the secants answerable unto the latitude of each Parallel, unto the sum compounded of all the former Secants; beginning with the secants of the first Parallels latitude, and thereunto adding the second Parallels latitude, and to the sum of both these, adding the third Parallels latitude, and so forth in all the rest: and this Table will show the sections and points of latitude in the Meridian of the Geographical Map; through which sections the Parallels ought to be drawn: which Table we have lately set out by Edward Wright in his Correction of Nautical Errors, to whom for further satisfaction in this kind, I refer the diligent Reader. Out of the same grounds we may also deduce the Rumbes: for sith that the Chart (as we have showed) is nothing else but a plain Parallellogramme, conceived to be made of the extension of a Spherical superficies, inscribed in a concave Cylinder, it must needs be that the Rumbes make equal Angles with all the Meridian's. Therefore if in the Chart a circle be drawn, divided into 32 equal parts, beginning with the Meridian, passing by the Centre of that Circle, the lines drawn from the centre of these sections, will be the Rumbes for that place. 9 Of the Geographical Plaine-Chart we have spoken; It behoves us next to treat of the Geographical Planispheare. The Planispheare is a table or map of two faces, whereon the lines are projected circularly. Betwixt the Planispheare and the Plaine-Chart, a double difference may be observed: 1 That the former consists altogether of right lines, aswell in regard of the Parallels as Meridian's: whereas the later is composed of circular or crooked lines, as well as right. 2 The former may well be expressed in one form or front, as we may see not only in the Nautical and common Chart, which we have shown to be all one with the other in respect of these Lines; but in many other common Maps, as namely those of Hondius, whereas the Planispheare cannot be expressed without two faces or Hemispheres; whereof the one represents the Eastern, the other the Western part of the Terrene Globe: For herein we must imagine a Globe to be cut into two equal Hemispheres, which are at once represented to our sight: of this Description of the Earth by crooked Lines, Ptolemy in his 24 Chapt. of his Geography hath taught us two ways: whereof the first depends from the aspect of a Sphere, turned and moved round, in which all the Meridian's are described as right Lines; but the Parallels as circumferences or crooked Lines. The other Delineation takes his ground from a Sphere represented to the sight, not moved, but resting still in his place, in which both Meridian's and Parallels are drawn circular. These two ways of Ptolemy (howsoever judiciously invented in those times, wherein a small part of the Earth was discovered, and Geography very unperfect) have been by later Geographers much reform and corrected. Yet amongst the later have not all expressed themselves alike: some have portrayed out of the Earth in fashion of a Heart; some according to other figures: but in this (perhaps) as Painters, they have been more iudulgent to fancy, then common use: others have gone about to express the Globe of the Earth in Elipticke Lines, which the Machanicians call oval. But we as well in this as other matters, preferring choice before abundance, will content ourselves with one or two, which use hath stamped more current, and experience hath found most useful: to which as a ground we will premise this Theorem. 1 The Planispheare is grounded on a certain aspect of the Terrestrial Sphere, wherein the Eye of the beholder is so conceived to be fixed in some point of the Globe, that it may see the one half or Hemisphere. Concerning the position of the Eye, two things are here remarkable: 1 Where the Eye is supposed to be placed either above the convexe superficies, or in the concave: some seem to place it above the convexe superficies; of which opinion Gemma Frisius seems to be, who would have the Eye to be set at an infinite distance: others although not admitting of such an infinite distance, deny not the Eye to be above the convexe superficies: but neither way can be warranted: Not the former, because of the impossibility of the supposition. For to imagine the Eye to be set at an infinite distance, were to deny a sight or aspect which they would have to be the ground of this projection: For no object can be perceived, but such as is bounded and determined in a certain and proportionate space. Neither can the later way pass clear without exception; because to such a projection, such a sight is required which can see the whole Hemisphere: for otherwise would it be unperfect, and want of the perfection of the Globe: which contains two absolute and entire Hemispheres. But now no place can be imagined without the Globe, wherein the Eye can be so placed, as to see the one half or Hemisphere: for as much as it is impossible from the opposite points of any Diameter, to draw two tangent lines which may meet together, or cut one the other in the same point, but will be Parallel the one to the other: wherefore we may conclude, that the Eye in this projection cannot be imagined without the convexe surface of the Sphere, but rather in the concave: How the Eye should be imagined to be in the concave superficies, may be in this sort explained: we must suppose a great Sphere of the Glass, or other such Diaphanous matter, inscribed with all his Parallels and Meridian's, in such sort as they are represented unto us in the Globe, the Eye (according to optical Principles) may be so placed near the Centre of it, as it shall be able to see precisely the one Hemisphere described with all his circles, as we find it in the sphere. I say near not in the Centre: because the Angle of vision (as we find it taught in the Perspectives) doth not extend to a right Angle, but is somewhat less: 2 we must inquire in what point in the superficies the eye is placed. To which we answer, that the place of the eye is of itself indifferent; because it may be imagined any where in what point soever. Nevertheless we will only fasten on two especial ways which are of most use, wherein the propositions following shall inform us. 9 This Planispheare is twofold: the first we term equinoctial, which supposeth the eye to be fixed on some point of the equinoctial circle; the other Polar, wherein the sight is conceived to be fixed on the Pole of the Terrestrial Globe: The ground and fabric of the former is taught in these Propositions. 1 The eye conceived to be fixed on any point of the equatour, will design out unto us a Planispheare wherein all the circles are projected circularly, except the Equator and that Meridian which passeth by the said point. This may easily be shown out of the Optic principles, we will suppose for example sake the eye to be placed in some point of the Equatour: which shall be 90 degrees of longitude from the Equinoctial point: which kind of projection we have in many of our common Geographical Maps of the earth. In this manner of sight, if the terrestrial Hemisphere, which may only be comprehended by it, be distinguished by this Parallels and Meridian's ordered and ranged by distances of equal Arches in such number as we please: It is most certain that the Eye, seeing distinctly and separately every one of these Meridian's and Parallels, will form to itself so many visual Pyramids, called by Geomatrician Cones, which cones by this means will be Scalenes, and will have for their Bases those Meridian's and Parallels, the tops whereof will meet together in the same point and eye of the beholder, which according to this supposition is the Pole of the Meridian, which passeth by the Canaries, called the first Meridian, and representing unto us the Equinoctial colour. Now because these lines are ●ut by the plain of the Meridian passing by the Canaries, it follows out of the same grounds, that their common sections, and that of the Meridian are the proportions of circumferences, which represent unto us in this Plain the Meridian's and Parallels seen in this manner of sight. Notwithstanding that which is under the 90 degree of longitude, as likewise the Equatour, cannot (according to Optic demonstration) be seen, but as right lines cutting one the other at Right Angles in the Centre of the same Meridian of the Canaries: The Theory being expressed we will in the next proposition show the manner of projection. 2 How to describe the Meridian's and Parallels in the Equinoctial Planispheare. To show the practice of this Theorem, let there be drawn a circle ACBD, as you see in this figure divided by two Diameters cutting on the other at right Angles in the Centre into four Quadrants, or equal parts: whereof each one is again to be divided into 90 degrees. In this the line AB is imagined to express the half of the Equatour, as the line CD of the Meridian; in which the two points C and D design out the two Poles. Let a rule be drawn from the Pole C by every tenth or fifth degrees of the half circle ADB, and let every section of the Equatour and the rule be precisely noted. In like sort from the point B let the Rule be moved by every fifth and tenth Degree of the semicircle GOD, and let every several Interfection of the rule and the Meridian CD be precisely noted. Then placing one foot of the compass in the line CD (which must be drawn out longer, because in it the Centres of the Parallels must be found out) let the other be moved in order to every intersection of the Meridian noted out: and let so many circles be drawn as intersections, which circles will be so many Parallels. The finding out of the Centres where the steadfast foot of the compass ought to be fixed in drawing of each circle, is a matter appertaining to Geometricians: who have taught a way to bring any three points given into a circle, and to find the Centre from which it is described. Having thus described the Parallels, we must proceed on to draw the Meridian's in this manuer: let the one foot of the compass be placed in the line AB, from which as the Centre by every Intersection of the rule, and the Equatour forenoted, let there be drawn so many circles as intersections; which circle's so drawn will be the Meridian's. If any man desire more curiously to be informed in the Geometrical Demonstrations, whereon this Fabric of the Planispheare is grounded, let him read Gemma Frisius de Astrolabio, Stifelius: but especially Guido Vbaldus, who hath copiously and accuratly handled this subject. Enough it may seem for a Cosmographer to show the use of it, as we shall hereafter in Geographical conclusions, supposing the Fabric sufficiently demonstrated by Geometricians, to whom it of right belongs. 10 The ground and Fabric of the Polar Planispheare, is taught in these Propositions. 1 The Eye conceived to be fixed on the Pole will express in the plain of the Equinoctial a Planispheare, wherein all the Parallels are described by circles and Meridian's by right lines. This may likewise be optically demonstrated: For the Eye being supposed to be fixed on the Pole, the sight will form to itself so many visual Cones as there are Parallels described in the Sphere. These cones being supposed equally to be cut by the plain of the Equatour, will have for their Bases the said Parallel circle's represented in the plain of the Equatour, as so many absolute circles; whereof the Equatour will be the greatest, and comprehending within it all the rest. Likewise the Meridian's in this kind of sight are supposed to terminate the sides of these Cones, and therefore according to the Optics ought to be right lines. 2 How to describe the Parallels and Meridian's in the Polar Planispheare. This projection is easiest of all, as shall appear by this Diagram. Let there be described a circle from the Centre E which shall be ACBD: Let the circle be by two Diameters AB and BC divided into four quadrants: each of which may again be divided into 90 parts: every fifth or tenth of these 90 parts being first marked out, so many Diameters may be drawn from either side to the opposite part by the Centre E: which Diameters so drawn will serve for the Meridian's. Then let any one of these lines be divided into 9 parts, and diligently marked out, as the Semidiameter ED by FGHIKLMN: by all which marks from the Centre E, let there be drawn so many circles. These circles so described will be the true Parallels: This kind of projection, though more unusual, yet wants not his special use in describing the parts of the earth near the Pole, which in our ordinary kind of Tables projected after the other manner, cannot suffer so large and proportional a Description. 11 Having hitherto treated of the Common representation of the Terrestrial Globe, we are in the next place to speak something of the Magnetical. The Magnetical is a round Magnet called a Terrella. This kind of sphere hath been by Gilbert aptly termed a Terrella, or little Earth, being the model and representation of the great and massy Sphere of the earth whereon we dwell. Betwixt this kind of representation & the former, great difference may be observed. First because the former is grounded merely on Artificial Imitation, implying nothing else but a Respect or application: whereas this magnetical Terrella not only represents externally the Earth, but Internally out of its own Magnetical nature and vigour, eminently contains and expresses all those motions and magnetical virtues, which we have formerly showed to be in the Earth. 2 It skills not in the former of what Material substance the Sphere consists, so the parts of it answer in due symmetry and proportion to the parts of the Earth; but this represents the whole as a Homogeneal part communicating the same nature & substance with the whole sphere of the earth: In the Fabric of this instrument we must consider, 1 the Matter: 2 the Form: The matter (as we have already intimated) is a Magnetical substance which ought to be chosen out of a most eminent Mine, having all his parts pure and unmixed, as possible we can find in any Magnet. For though all Lodestones have the same inclination, yet in many the vigour is so weak, or at least so hindered by the mixture of some Heterogeneal matter, that they will not so well and sensibly perform their office. The form of it is the roundness & politure, wherein Art should show as much exactness as she can: such a Sphere may well be expressed in this Figure, whereof we had formerly occasion to make use: wherein the footsteps of this Magnetical vigour are sensibly expressed, no otherwise then in the great Body of the Earth. 12 In this Magnetical Terrella two things are chiefly to be noted, 1 the invention of the Poles, 2 of the Parallels & Meridian's: both which shall be taught in these Propositions. 1 To find out the Poles in the Magnetical Terrella. To perform this conclusion many artificial ways have been invented, 1 By the Inclinatory Needle: for being evenly hung in such sort upon the Terrella, as may be seen in the former figure it will according to diverse points diversely respect the Terrella in his site: wheresoever then we shall find it to fall perpendicularly as right angles, we may assure ourselves that that very point is the Pole: which being once known, it will be easy to find the opposite Pole, either the same way, or by measuring. 2 By the Vein or Mine of the Loadstone: for (as we have showed in our fourth Chapter of this Treatise) that part which was situated towards the North, will afterwards direct itself Southward, and chose, the South point will respect the North, whence the Poles may be discovered. 3 By a little boat, wherein the Loadstone being placed on the water, will move round till such time as with one Pole he may point out the North, with the other the South. Many other ways may be invented by Mechanicians, perhaps more curious, to whose industry I refer my ingenious Reader. 2 The circles in the Terrella are found out by the Magnetical Needle. This needs no other ocular demonstration than we have taught in the fourth Chapter, and may be conceived in the former Diagramme; First we see the magnetical needle according to divers points diversely to conform itself, which hath given way to ingenious artificers to find out the Parallels and Meridian's. The Parallels are found out by observing the Angles of declination of the Needle hung over the Terrella which are found in proportion to answer to the degrees of Latitude; which Dr Ridley in his Magnetical Treatise hath industriously calculated, as I have here inserted, to save others a new labour of calculation. The Meridian's are more easily found by hanging any directory wire or needle over the Terrella; one end of which pointing towards the North, and the other towards the South, will discover the Meridian line. CHAP. VIII. Of the measure of the Terrestrial Globe. 1 HItherto have we handled the Terrestrial Globe primarily: in such proprieties as absolutely agree unto its nature. In the second place we are to handle such as secondarily arise out of the former. Here we are to handle two chief points. 1 The Measure. 2 The Distinction. 2 The measure is that by which we find out the quantity of the whole Earth. Good reason have we to call this the Secondary part of Geography; for as much as these accidents and proprieties we here consider, arise altogether out of the former. In the former Treatise we have divided the Natural Sphere of the Earth, from the Artificial: But in this part, for avoiding of tedious repetitions of the same things, we have joined them together: For howsoever the measuring and dictinctions of the Earth be truly grounded on the nature of the earth itself; yet can it not be well expressed and taught without the material Instrument: we have therefore thought good to consider the measure of the earth, before we come unto the Distinction, because it is more simple and uncompound, depending on the lineaments and measure of one circle: whereas the Distinction necessarily requires the conjunction and combination of divers circles, as Meridian's and Parallels compared one with the other, as shall be taught hereafter. Whether the great mass of the earth can be measured, or no, seems a matter not agreed on by all; Some have held an opinion that it cannot be measured, in regard of the infinite magnitude wherewith they thought it endowed: which opinion seems derived from some of the Platonics, who ascribing to the Earth another figure besides the Spherical, have cast themselves upon uncertainties, and being notable to reduce the Quantity of the Earth according to their own grounds to any certain measure, have denied it to be measurable: But the ground of this opinion we have taken away before, in proving the earth to be of a true Spherical nature and therefore circumscribed in certain bounds apt to be measured. Another conceit more absurd than the former, is not only the common people, whose condition might excuse their ignorance, but of such as would be esteemed learned▪ who contend, that the greatness of the earth cannot be measured: the only reasons they can allege for themselves are, 1 That a great part of the earth is unaccessible by reason of steep rocks, high mountains, spacious and thick woods, moorish fogs, and such like impediments. 2 That the parts of it are for the most part uneven, and subject to no regular figure, without the which no measure can be exact. The first cavil is of no moment; because whereas we affirm that the Earth by man may be measured, we hold it not necessary that it should be traversed over by journeys or voyages. For as much as to the finding out of the Quantity of the whole Terrestrial Sphere, it may seem sufficient to know the measure and proportion of any little part in respect of the Heavens. As for example, what number of Miles, Leagues, or Furlongs answer to any degree or degrees in the Heavens: wherefore we suppose the Earth to be measured over not with our feet, but with our wits, which may by Mathematical rules be taught to march forward where our legs fail us: The second objection only proves thus much, that the Earth partaking of so many unequal parts and irregular forms, cannot in the measuring admit of so much exactness, as if it were endowed with one uniform face: yet it is exact enough to contenta Cosmographer, who measureth not by feet and inches, but by leagues and miles, in which we little regard such a needless curiosity. 1▪ The common measure by which the quantity of the Earth is known, are Miles and Furlongs. Here is to be noted that such instruments as serve for measuring are of two sorts, either greater or lesser; the smaller are of divers sorts, as a Grain, Inch, Foot, Perch, Pole, and such like Some of these howsoever sometime useful in topography, can have little or no use at all in the vast greatness of the whole Earth. Wherefore the Geographer seldom descends so low, but takes notice of greater measures, such as are Miles & Furlongs: where we may observe by the way, that the usual measuring amongst the Grecians was by Stadia or furlongs, amongst many of the Latins by miles: under which we also comprehend Leagues: these miles are diversely varied, according to the diversity of Countries, so that in some places they are esteemed longer, in other shorter: which differences may be learned out of this ensuing Table. The instruments of measuring the Earth are 1 Furlong containing 125 Geometicall paces or 625 feet. 2 Mile which is either 1 Proper containing 8 Furlongs or 1000 paces. 2 Improper, which is either 1 League, which is either 2 Germane mile which is either the 1 Old, containing 12 Furlongs. 2 Newer containing 16 Furlongs. 3 Common of 24 Furlongs. 1 Common, which is 32 Furlongs or four Italian miles. 2 Greatest, containing 5000 paces which is called the Suenian, or Helvetian mile. Howsoever this Distinction of miles may be many ways profitable especially in the topographical part, yet shall we seldom make use of any other than the common German mile, or the common Italian mile: To which as the most known, the rest may easily be reduced. 3 The object here proposed to be measured is the Sphere of the Earth. The Dimensions according to which it is measured, are either Simple or Compound. 4 The simple is twofold, either the Perimeter, or the Diameter. The Perimeter otherwise called the circumference, is a great circle measuring the Earth round about. 5 The Invention of the Perimeter of the Earth depends on these following Propositions. 1 If two or more circles be drawn about the same Centre, and from the Centre to the Circumference be drawn two right lines; The Arches of all the Circles comprehended within the said right lines will be like and proportional one to the other. This Proposition being merely Geometrical, is taken here as a ground without farther demonstration: whereof if any man doubt, he may have recourse to Clavius Commentaries upon johannes de Sacrobosco. This principle granted will beget these two Consectaries. 1 As one degree is to the number of correspondent miles, or furlongs, so all degrees of the circles to the number of miles or Furlongs measuring the quantity of the Perimeter of the Earth. 2 Wherefore one degree or portion of the Circle being known by his number of miles or furlongs, the whole Circumference may be found out. The reason of this consequence every Arithmetician can easily show out of the Golden Rule: The chief point then of the invention consists in finding out the proportion of any proportion, as a degree, half degree, or the like, to the number of miles or Furlongs answerable thereunto; for which purpose many skilful Mathematicians have invented many excellent ways of great use and delight. 1 By the elevation of the Pole, or observation of an Eclipse, or some known Star, the circuit of the Earth may be found out. By the Elevation of the Pole it is performed after this manner▪ let there be observed two Cities, or other notable Landmarks placed just North and South under the same Meridian. In these two Cities, or marks, let the Elevation of the Pole be exactly noted. Then subtract the Elevation of the Southern City which is lesser, out of the Northern▪ which is greater: the residue contains the distance of these places in degrees; which being experimentally known by Miles, Halfe-miles, Furlongs or such like measures, will show the true proportion betwixt a degree, and his number of miles: which being again multiplied by 360, will show the whole circumference of the Earth. For example sake, we will take two famous Cities of England, Oxford and York; which are situated, if not exactly, yet very near the same Meridian. The elevation of the Pole here with us at Oxford is 51 degrees and 30 minutes; at York it is 54 degrees 30 minutes, or near there about: subtract the lesser from the greater, the distance betwixt Oxford and York will be three degrees; which distance experimentally known in miles, will show the proportion: which we shall find to be, (abating somewhat in regard of the crookedness of the way) about 180, answering to three degrees of the Meridian: wherefore to one degree will answer 60 Miles, which being multiplied by 360, the whole circle will produce 21600, the measure of the whole Earth. The like may be performed by an Eclipse in two Cities lying under the Equinoctial circle: two landmarks being once noted out, lying under the Equinoctial, let there be observed in both the same Eclipse of the Moon, especially in the beginning: Now it being certainly found out how many hours the Eclipse began in the one place before the other, we must resolve their hours into degrees, which is easily done: for as much as to every hour answers 15 degrees in the Sun Diurnal motion, according to Astronomers. Now the distance between these two Cities or marks (being supposed first experimentally to be known, will easily show the correspondency betwixt the Degrees and miles, which is here sought. Another way is taught by Possidonius, as easy as the former, which is performed by some noted fixed Star, as Oculus Tauri, Arcturus, Spica Virgins, or any other; let there be observed under the same Meridian in the Earth two places, whose distance is experimentally known: in both these places let the Meridian altitude of the Star be fully and perfectly observed: The difference of these two Altitudes will be the number of degrees betwixt these two places: whence we may observe how many miles, or other partsanswer to the number of these degrees betwixt these two places. This way by Clavius is preferred before the former; for as much as it requires not in any place the knowledge of the Elevation of the Pole, which in any place cannot be certainly known, without long and diligent search, and observation: As for Geographical Tables, they are not always at all times to be had, at least worthy credit. 2 By the observation of the Noone-shadowes the measure of the Earth may be found out. This way was invented by Eratosthenes a famous Mathematician: who by observation of the Noone-shadowes, observed at the same time at two divers places, situate under the same Meridian, found out the circumference of the Earth. The places which he chose for this purpose were Siene, and Alexandria, situated under the same Meridian: the one inclining to the South, the other to the North. The Distance betwixt these two places is supposed to be known, whence he proceeded in this manner: First he erected a Gnomon at right Angles on the plain of the Horizon: when the Sun was in the beginning of Cancer called the Solstice, from which he imagined two Rays or Beams to be cast at Noon: the one passing by Siene the most Southern part, the other by Alexandria the most Northern: so that at Siene, the Sun being then in the Solstice passed into the Centre of the world; the place being supposed to have been situate under the Tropic: The other passed by the Vertex of the said Gnomon: whence by proportion of the shadow to the Gnomon by a Geometrical kind of working he found out the place between Alexandria, and Siene: which demonstration, formoreevidence we will here set down: Let there be in the Earth described a circle passing by Alexandria and Siene; in which let A be the place where Alexandria stands: B the place of Siene: the Gnomon or Style erected at Alexandria, AD, The Sunbeam carried to the Centre of the world at Sienna FBC, The Sunbeam passing by the Vertex, or top of the Gnomon seated at Alexandria EDG, casting his shadow AGNOSTUS toward the North: let the Gnomon be conceived to be prolonged unto the Centre C: Now for as much as in the Triangle ADG, the Arch AGNOSTUS, without any sensible difference may be taken for a Right line, having an insensible magnitude in regard of the whole Earth: and the Angle A is a right angle, and the two sides AD, and AGNOSTUS known: the former by supposition, being a Gnomon taken at our pleasure; the latter by any measure, or at least by the known proportion of the shadow to the Gnomon, according to the Doctrine of Triangles: the Angle ADG will be known; For whereas the sides AD, and AGNOSTUS are supposed to be known, their Quadrants also will be known, which being equal to the square made of DG, by the 47 proposition of the 1 of Euclid, the right side DG will easily be known: out of these grounds by the doctrine of the Sins and Tangents is easily found out the Angle ADG, and by consequence the alternate Angle ACB, which by the 27 of the first of Euclid is equal unto it: for as much as the two Radii FBC and FDG may be supposed to be Parallels in so small a distance as Alexandria & Siene compared with the Sun: the Angle being known the Arch AB subtended to the Angle C, will also be known, which is the space intercepted betwixt Siene and Alexandria; and for example sake: if Eratosthenes (as some write) found out the Arch AB, to contain in degrees 85, and experience had taught the length of the journey betwixt these Cities to have contained 6183 ½ Furlongs: It would appear by the Golden Rule that 360 degrees containing the whole circuit of the Earth must proportionally answer to 252000 Furlongs. 1 The opinions of Cosmographers concerning the measure of the Earth, are divers: which is chiefly to be imputed to their error in observing the distances of places experimentally according to Miles, Furlongs, or such like measures. How many Authors of great name and estimation have differed amongst themselves, every man may inform himself out of this Table here inserted. These differences we find diversely related: but of all others, which Authors have set forth, Authors Furlongs Miles. Strabo and Hipparchus 252000 31500 Eratosthenes. 250000 31250 The circuit of the whole earth contains according to Possidonius & the ancient Arabians. 240000 30000 Ptolemy. 180000 22500 The later Arabians 204000 25500 Italians and Germans. 172800 21600 I prefer the judgements of Mr Robert Hues; For as much as it is not grounded on common tradition, but industriously by himself derived out of the Ancients by diligent search and examination, as by one, whose judgement being armed as well with skill in the language, as the knowledge of antiquity, scorns to be injured by translation. What should be the cause of these differences, is a matter which hath staggered curious searchers into Antiquities more than the former. Every opinion being supported with the names and authorities of such renowned Authors, might challenge a pitch above the measure of my Decision: only I may not be thought over presumptuous to conjecture where I cannot define, especially having so good a guide as my forenamed Author, to tread out the way before me. Wherefore supposing as a ground, these Authors so much differing about the measure of the earth, to have been in some sort led by reason. The differences must needs arise out of one of these causes: either the error or negligence of the observers, in trusting too much to others relations without any farther search, or else the defect in the Mathematical grounds out of which they derived their demonstration; or the diversity of measures used in this work: or finally, from the misapplication of these measures to the distances; whence may arise some error out of the experimental measuring of places in the earth. In the first place it may perhaps be doubted whether Aristotle defining the measure of the Earth to be 400000 furlongs, were not deceived by relations: for as much as he avoucheth it, from the Mathematicians of his times, whose authority and credit for aught we know, deserves as well to be forgotten as their names. But this answer might seem too sharp in the other: for as much as we find them registered for Masters in their science, and such as could not easily be cozened by others impostures. Neither can we imagine the second to be any cause of their error for the same reason: because the ways these Mathematicians used in finding out the circuit of the earth, are by writers of good credit commended to posterity, as warrantably grounded on certain demonstrations, being no other than what we have showed before, which admit of no Parallogisme: In the third place we ought to examine whether the diversity of opinion concerning this matter proceeded from diversity of the measures which were used in this work. Nonnius and P●●ceru● would needs persuade, that the Furlongs whereby they measured the earth were not the same: Maurolycus and Xilander talk of divers kinds of paces: Maurolycus labours to reconcile both, but without effect. First whereas they would have divers k●nde of paces, it cannot be denied: but in the mean time we cannot learn that the Grecians ever measured their Furlongs by Paces, but either by Feet, or Faddomes. A Fathom which the Greeks call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is the measure of the extension of the hands together with the breast betwixt, containing six feet: which is a kind of measuring well known unto our Mariners, in sounding the depth of the Sea. This measure notwithstanding is by many translated a Pace: by what reason, let any man judge. Xilander in translating Strabo renders it an Ell: Secondly for a Furlong it contains according to Herodoiu● an ancient Grecian writer 600 Feet: which is also testified by Suidas, being much later. A Furlong contains 100 Faddomes; every Fathom four Cubits. A Cubit, according to Heron, a Foot and half, or 24 Digits. Now for the variety of Furlongs, it is true that Censorinus makes three kinds. For either it is called the Italian consisting of 625 Feet, which is of most regard in measuring the Earth; or the Olympian of 600 Feet: or the Pythian containing 1000 Feet. But to let pass this latter, we shall find by serious consideration, that the Italian and Olympian Furlongs differ only in name, and are indeed the same. For the Italian containing 625 Roman Feet (according to Pliny in his second book) is squall to the Olympian, having 600 Grecian Feet. For a Foot with the Grecians exceeds the Roman Foot by a twenty fourth part: as much as is the difference betwixt 600 and 625. Hence we see how little certainty can be expected of such as go about to reconcile these opinions out of the various use and acception of the measures. The most probable assertion than is, that the error was grounded on this, that the distances of places, mentioned by the foresaid Authors, were not by themselves exactly measured, but taken up upon trust on the relation of travellers, wherein they might easily be mistaken. For instance we will take Eratosthenes and Possidonius, as of greatest credit, who are notwithstanding taxed for many errors in their experimental observations: whereas it is clear that Ptolemy grounded his opinion on the distances of the places, exactly measured, as is witnessed by his designation of the Latitude of the earth so far as it was discovered and known. Eratosthenes, for mistaking in the measure of distances, is much taxed by Hyparchus, as we find in Strabo: For betwixt Alexandria and Carthage, he reckons above 13 thousand furlongs, whereas by a more diligent enquiry there are found to be but 9 thousand. Likewise Possidoniu● is known to be mistaken, in that he made the Distance betwixt Rhodes and Alexandria to be 5000 Furlongs, whereas out of the relation of Mariners, some have made it 4000, some 5000, as it is witnessed by Eratosthenes in Strabo; who notwithstanding, says that he found by Instruments that it was not above 3750; and Strabo wou●d have it somewhat less, as 2640. Maurolycus, going about to defend Possidonius against Ptolemy, brings nothing but frivolous reasons unworthy so good an author. Out of all which hath been spoken our former Corollary will be manifest, that the diversity of opinions concerning the circumference of the Earth, arose from the experimental mistake in the distances of places, where they trusted to other men's relations, rather than their own knowledge. 6 The Diameter is a right line passing by the Centre of the Earth from one side to the other▪ and measuring the thickness of it: the invention of which depends on these Rules. 1 As 22 is to 7 so is the circumference of a circle to the Diameter: wherefore the circumference of the Earth multiplied by 7, and divided by 22 will produce the Diameter. The exact proportion betwixt the Circumferences of a circle, & the Diameter being the ground of the Quadrature of a circle, is a matter which hath set a work the greatest wits of the world: having notwithstanding as yet by no man been brought to discovery, in so much as Pitiscus, and other good Mathematicians, might well doubt whether ever it would come to light. Nevertheless, where exactness cannot be found, we must come as near as we can. The nearest proportion in numbers which any could yet light on, is as 22 to 7, which in so great and massy a body, as the Earth may pass without any sensible or explicable error. Supposing then out of our precedent Suppositions the whole circuit of the earth to be 21600 Italian-miles (which is the common opinion now received) I multiply according to the golden Rule 21600 by 7, whence will arise 151200, which being divided by 22 the Quotient will render 6872 11/8 which is the Diameter or thickness of the Earth: some less curious are content to take only the third part of the circumference for the Diameter, which will be 7200, which account is less exact, yet sufficient for an ordinary Cosmographer: for as much as 328 miles, which is the difference, is of no great moment in the measure of the whole Earth. 2 By the known height of some mountain without the knowledge of the circumference of the Earth, the Diameter may be found out. This is a way invented by Maurolycus, which proceeds in a contrary manner to the former: because the former by the circumference first supposed to be known, shows us a way to find out a Diameter: but this, first seeks out the Diameter, by which we may find out the circumference: the practice is in this manner. Let the circuit of the Earth be conceived to be BCD (as we see in this Figure) in which let there be chosen an high Mountain whose Altitude AB may be known by the rules of measuring altitudes: then from the Mountain's top A, by the rules of measuring longitudes must the whole space of Sea or Land be measured so far as it can be seen: so that the visual Beam AC, may touch the Superficies of the Earth in C: let the space then which is seen in the Earth be BC, which although in itself it be crooked and not plain, yet can it not sensibly differ from a Plain, for as much as the Arch BC, is extraordinarily little, if compared with the whole Earth. These grounds thus laid, we must proceed by a Geometrical manner of argumentation in this sort, Here are to be observed four right lines: whereof the first is AB, the height of the mountain observed: the second is the visual Ray AC: the third AD consisting of the height of the mountain, and the Diameter of the Earth. The fourth BC, the distance which is seen: for (as we have showed) it may without sensible error be taken for a right line. Now for as much as AB, BC are known, their Quadrates by the 47 proposition of the first of Euclid, will also be known, which being equal to the square of AC, the square of the right line AC will likewise be known. But the square of the right line AC, sith it toucheth the circle, will be equal to a Right Angle Figure contained under DA, AB, wherefore the right angle so conceived will be known. But AB is the known height of the mountain, wherefore the right line AD will easily be known; if we divide the known right Angle contained under AB, AD: by the right line AB: for the Quotient will give the right line AD; from which if we subduct AB, the known height of the mountain: then will remain the Diameter of the Earth BD, which was here to be performed: from this invention will arise this Corollary. 1 The Diameter of the Earth first supposed to be known, the circumference may be found out in this manner: as 7 is in proportion to 22, so is the Diameter to the Circumference. 2 Wherefore let the known number of the Diameter be multiplied by 22, and the Product be divided by 7, the quotient will give the Circumference. As for example according to our former instance: Let us suppose the Diameter of the Earth to be 6872 8/11 this number being multiplied by 22, will produce 15120, which product divided by 7, we shall find in the Quotient 21600, which is the circumference of the Earth. 7 The compound dimensions, according to which the Sphere of the Earth is proposed to be measured, are either the Superficies or the Solidity. 8 The Superficies is again twofold, either Plain or Conuexe: the Plain is the space included in the Perimeter. 9 The plain Superficies may be found out two ways: either by the Circumference, or the Diameter: both which ways taught in these Rules. 1 If the whole circumference be multiplied in itself, and the product be divided by 12 4/7 the quotient will show the Superficies included in the circle. As in the former example we will take the Circumference of the Earth to be 21600 Italian-miles: let this number be multiplied in itself, and the product thereof divided by 12 4/7, the Quotient will amount unto 9278180, which is the plain superficies of the Earth. 2 If the Semi-Diameter of a circle be multiplied by the half part of the Circumference: there will arise the measure of the Plain Superficies contained in the Circumference. The reason hereof is showed by Clavius in his Tract de Isoperimetris Proposit. 4. where is demonstrated, that a Right Angle figure comprehended of the Semi-Diameter of any circle, and the half of the Circumference will be equal to the Circle itself, of whose parts it is comprehended. 10 So much concerning the Plain Superficies: the knowledge and invention of the Conuexe, may be performed two ways: either by the Diameter and Circumference; or else by the Space contained within the Circumference, according to these Propositions. 1 If the Circumference and Diameter be multiplied the one into the other, the product will show the number of square miles in the face of the Terrestrial Globe. As for example, let the Diameter of the Earth containing according to the common account 80111 9/12 furlongs, be multiplied by the whole circumference, which is 252000, there will arise the Conuexe Superficies of the whole earthly Sphere which is 20205818181 9/11. 2 If the space contained in the greatest circle in the Sphere be multiplied by 4, there will be produced the whole convexe Superficies of the Sphere. How to find out the space or plain Superficies, is a matter taught before: which being once found is easily multiplied by 4, and so will give us the number sought. 11 The last and greatest compound Dimension, according to which the Earth is measured, is the Solidity, consisting of Length, Breadth, and Height, or Thickness: This may be found out two ways either by the Diameter, and Conuexe Superficies, first supposed to be known: or by the knowledge of a great circle without supposing the Supperficies to be first known: both ways shall be expressed in these Propositions. 1 If the Semidiameter of the Sphere be multiplied into the third part of the Conuex Superficies of the said Sphere, there will arise the whole Solidity of the Earth. This is demonstrated by Geometricians: For a solid Rectangle comprehended of the Semidiameter of the Sphere, and the third of the Convex Superficies of it, will be equal to the Sphere itself. As for example, if the Semidiameter of the earth containing 40090 10/11 Furlongs be multiplied by the third part of the Conuex Superficies containing, to wit, 67352727 3/11 there will arise the solidity of the earth, which will contain 27002-3: 06611570 3/11 Cubic Furlongs. That is the solidity of the earth will comprehend so many Cubes, cantaining every side so many Furlongs, as there are unities in the said number: For the Areae or spaces comprehended of solid figures are measured by the Cubes of those lines, by whose squares the Conuexe Superficies of those lines are measured. 2 If the greatest circle be multiplied by ⅔ of the whole Diameter: the product will show the solidity of the Sphere. This way is also demonstrated by Clavius in the same tract of measuring Magnitudes. It may Arithmetically be deduced in this sort. If any Sphere whatsoever hath a Diameter of 14 Palms, and should be multiplied by 3 1/7, the circumference of the greatest circle containing it will be found to be 44; whose half being 22, if it be multiplied into the Semidiameter 7, there will arise the Superficies of the greatest circle 154, which number if we multiply by two third parts of the Diameter: that is by 9⅓ there will be produced the solidity of the said Sphere, to wit, consisting of 1437 ⅔ Cubic palms. In the like sort may we work by miles or furlongs in measuring the whole terrestrial Globe, which is a more convenient measure for the massy Globe of the Earth. CHAP. IX. Of the Zones, Climates, and Parallels. 1 OF the Measure of the Earth we have treated in our former Chapter. In the next place we must speak of the Distinction of the Terrestrial Sphere, which is either in regard of Spaces or Distances. 2 Spaces are portions in the Sphere bounded by the Parallel circles: such as are the Zones, Climates, and Parallels. 3 These are again considered two ways; either in themselves, or else in their Adjuncts or Inhabitants belonging to them. 4 A Zone is a space included betwixt two lesser and named circles; or else betwixt a lesser circle and the Pole of the world. The spaces into which the Terrestrial Sphere is divided, are either Greater or Lesser. The Greater is a Hemisphere which ariseth out of one only circle by itself, without the Combination of more. Such are chiefly of three sorts. The first is made by the Equatour: which divides the whole Globe into the north and the South Hemisphere. The second is of the Meridian, whose office it is to part the Earth into the Eastern and Western Hemispheres: The third of the Horizon, which divides the Sphere into the upper and lower halves: But these parts arising (as I said) out of one only circle, are handled before with the circles themselves. In this place we are to speak of such parts, as arise out of the Combination and respect of circles one with another. Such as are the Zones, Climates, and Parallels. A Zone signifies as much as a girdle or band: because by it the spaces in the Earth are (as it were) with larger bands compassed about. The Grecians have sometimes given this name Zone to the Orbs of the Planets, as Theon, Alexandrinus in his Comment on Aratus, in these words, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. There are (saith he) in the Heaven's seven Zones not contorminate with the Zodiac, whereof the first is possessed by Saturn, the second by jupiter, etc. But this acception of the name is far off from our purpose. The name, Zone, as it is with us in use, is by the Latin Poets rendered sometimes Facia, sometimes Plaga: both signifying one and the selfsame thing: which is as much as a space comprehended within two Named and lesser Parallels: or at least betwixt such a Parallel and the Pole itself: because, as we shall show hereafter Zones are of two sorts: These Zones are in number five; which division hath been familiar with our Latin Poets, as may appear by these verses of Virgil. Quinque tenent coelum Zonae, quarum una corusco▪ Semper Sole rubens▪ & torrida semper ab Igne: Quam circum extremae dextrâ laeuáque trahuntur. Caerule â glacie concretae, atque imbribus atris. Has inter, Mediamque, duae Mortalibus aegris Munere concessae Diuûm, etc. Five Zones engird the Skies; whereof one fries With fiery Sunbeams, and all scorched lies. 'Bout which the farthest off on either hand, The blew-eyed Ice and brackish showers command. 'Twixt these two and the midst the Gods do give A wholesome place for wretched man to live. Which description of Virgil little differs from that we find in Ovid, in these Verses. — Duae dextrâ coelum totidemque sinistrâ Parte secant Zonae: quinta est ardentior illis: Sic onus inclusum numero distinxit eodem Cura Dei, totidemque Plagae tellure premuntur. Quarum quae Media est non est habitabilis aestu: Nix ●egit, alta duas: totidem inter utramque locavit. Temperiemque dedit mista cum Frigore Flamma. Two Girdles on the right hand, on the left As many cut the Skies: more hot's the fifth. So God dividing with an equal hand, Into so many parcels cuts the land. The midst through heat affords no dwellers Ease: The deep snow wraps up two: but betwixt these And the other Regions, are two places set, Where frosts are mixed with fires, and cold with heat. But because this enumeration and description of the Zones set down by the Poets, seems too popular and general, we will more specially divide them according to the method of our times in this manner. 5 The Zones are either Untemperate, or Temperate: the Untemperate are again twofold either cold or hot. 6 The Intemperate hot Zone is the space contained betwixt the two Tropic circles of Cancer and Capricorn. How unaptly these names of Temperate & Untemperate agree to the Zones, considered in their own nature, we shall speak in our second part: yet because I thought it unfit to use other terms than the Ancients, I will not coin new names. This Zone, or space included betwixt the two Tropics, circumscribes within it two great circles, whereof the one is the Equatour running just in the midst, neither inclining to the North or South: The other is the Ecliptic obliquely crossing it and meeting the two Tropics twice in a year, in the Spring and Autumn. The extent or breadth of this Zone then is equal to the distance betwixt these two Tropics, to wit, 47 degrees, which make 2820 miles: because from the Equatour to either Tropic we account 23 degrees, which added and resolved into miles, will make the said sum: within the compass of this Zone is situate the greatest part of Africa, especially that of the Abyssines (which common opinion with little probability, would have to be the Empire of Prester john) also many Lands as java, Summatra, Taprobana, besides a great part of the South of America called Peruana: It was imagined by the Ancients, as Aristotle, Pliny, Ptolemy, and many other Philosophers, Poets, and Divines, that this Zone through extreme heat was altogether unhabitable: for which cause they called it Intemperate: The reason of this conjecture was drawn from the situation of this part in regard of that of the heavens. For lying in the middle part of the world, the Sun must of necessity cast his rays perpendicular, that is to say at Right Angles. Now according to the grounds of Peripatetic Philosophy the Idol of this age, the heat derived from the Sun, ariseth from the reflection of the Sunbeams against the surface of the Earth. Wherefore the heat was there conjectured to be greatest, where the reflection was found to be greatest. But the greatest reflection, according to all Mathematicians, must be in this Torrid Zone, where the Sun darts forth his Rays at right Angles, which reflect back upon themselves. Which false conjecture was a long time continued by the exuberant descriptions of Poets, and defect of Navigation: having as yet scarce passed her infancy. But how far these surmises come short of truth, we shall declare in our second part, to which we have reserved those Physical and Historical discourses concerning the qualities and properties of the Earth. 7 The Intemperate cold Zones are those which are included betwixt the Polar circles and the Poles: whereof the one is Northern, contained in the Arctic circle, the other Southern in the Antarcticke. These two Zones are not made out of the combination of two circles, as the former: but by one circle with relation to the Pole. The greatness and extent of this Zone is about 23 degrees and a half: which resolved into Italian-miles will produce 1380. The Northern cold Zone contains in it Groenland, Fineland, and divers other Northern Regions, whereof some are partly discovered, and set out in our ordinary Maps, other some not yet detected. For the other Zone under the Antarctic Pole, it consists of the same greatness, as we know by the constitution of the Globe, having other such accidents correspondent as the Northern, so far forth as they respect the Heavens. For other matters, they lie hid in the vast Gulf of obscurity, this port having never yet (for aught I know) exposed herself to the discovery of the Christian world. Whether these two Zones be without habitation, by reason of intemperate cold, as the other hath been thought by reason of too much heat, we shall in due place examine. 8 The Temperate Zone is the space contained betwixt the Tropic & the Polar circle: whereof the one is Northern contained betwixt the Tropic of Cancer and the Arctic circle: the other Southern comprehended betwixt the Tropic of Capricorn and the Antarcticke circle. Why these Zones are termed Temperate, divers reasons are alleged. 1 Because the Sunbeams here are cast obliquely on the surface of the earth, and by consequence cannot produce so much heat, as in those places where they are darted perpendicularly, if we only consider the constitution and site of the heavens: For as we shall hereafter prove, this may sometimes be altered by the disposition of some particular place. 2 It may be called the Temperate Zone, because it seems mixed of both extremes partaking in some measure the both qualities of heat and cold: the one from the Torrid, the other from the Frigid Zones. 3 Because in these Zones the distances betwixt Summer and Winter are very remarkable, having a middle difference of time betwixt them, as compounded of both extremes. These temperate Zones included betwixt the Tropics and the Polar circles are twofold as the circles: The northern temperate Zone comprehended of the Tropic of Cancer and the Arctic circle, contains in it the upper and higher part of Africa, stretching even to the mountain Atlas: Moreover in it is placed all Europe, even to the Northern Lands in the Arctic Zone, and a great part also of Asia: the other temperate Zone lying towards the South, is not so well known being far distant from our habitation: and awaiting as yet the farther industry of our English and Dutch Navigators. The breadth of this Zone, as the other contains about 43 degrees which is the distance betwixt the Tropic and the Polar circle, which multiplied by 60, will be resolved into 2580 Italian-miles. 1 The Torrid Zone is the greatest of all: next are the two Temperate Zones: the cold Zones the least of all. The Torrid Zone is found to be greatest as well in regard of longitude as latitude, and is divided by the Equatour into two halves: the next are the Temperate; but the two cold Zones howsoever equal in Diameter to the Torrid, are notwithstanding least of all: where is to be noted that every Zone is of the same latitude from North to South, begin where we will, because it is contained betwixt two equidistant circles: but all enjoy not the same longitude from East to West, For the parts of every Zone by how much nearer they are to the Equatour so much greater longitude will they have: by how much nearer the Poles they are, so much the less longitude: for as much as the Parallels towards the Poles grow always lesser and lesser. The invention of the quantity of the Zones before mentioned, may briefly thus be performed. The latitude of the torrid Zone is so much as the distance betwixt the Tropickes, which is Astronomically grounded on the greatest declination of the Sun being doubled: This declination being by Clavius and others found to be 23 degrees 30 scrup. which being doubled will produce 47: which again multiplied by 60, and resolved into miles, will amount to 2820: though the odd scruples of many Authors are neglected. The latitude of the cold Zones is also drawn from the greatest declination of the Sun: For the distance of the Pole circles from the Pole itself is just so much as the declination of the Ecliptic from the Equatour, to wit, of 23 degrees 30 scrup. to which answer according to the former Rule 1420 Italian-miles. The invention of the latitude of the temperate Zones depends from the subtraction of the distance of the Poles of the Ecliptic, from the Equatour: that is from the greatest declination of the Sun being doubled from the whole quadrant: in which subduction the residue will be 43, to which will answer 2580 Italian-miles. 1 The Zone wherein any place is seated may be known either by the Globe or Geographical Table, or else by the Tables of Latitude. By the Globe or universal Map we may know it by the diligent observation of the four equidistant circles. For if we find it betwixt the two Tropics, we may without doubt, think it to be in the Torrid Zone: If betwixt the Tropic circle and the Polar, it will be in the Temperate. If betwixt the Polar circle and the Pole itself, it must be in the cold Zone. By the Tables of Latitude it may be found this way: Seek the latitude of the places given in the Table, which if it be less than 23 degrees 30 scruples, the place is in the Torrid Zone. If precisely it be so much in the Northern Hemisphere, the place assigned is under the Tropic of Cancer, which is the bound betwixt the Torrid and the beginning of the Northern Temperate Zone: But if it be in the Southern Hemisphere, it will be under the Tropic of Capricorn: which ends the Torrid Zone, and begins the South Temperate Zone: Every place having more Latitude than 23 degrees 30 scruples, yet less than 66 degrees 30 Minutes, is seated in the Temperate Zone, either Northern or Southern, as the places are in the Hemisphere. If the place be precisely of 66 Degrees 30 minutes, it will be justly found to be under the Polar circle, either Arctic or Antarcticke. Finally every place whose Latitude exceeds the number of 66 degrees 30 minutes, is seated in the cold Zone either Southern or Northern. If it reach just to 90 degrees, it will be just under the Pole itself. 9 Of the distinction of the Terrestrial Sphere by Zones we have spoken: we must in the next place deliver the Distinction of the earth according to Climates. 10 A Climate is a space of the Earth contained betwixt two Parallels distant from the Equatour towards either Pole. Climates are so called because of their Declaration from Equatour; for as much as they are to be accounted as so many scales of ascents to or from the Equatour. Some have defined it from the use which is chiefly to distinguish the longest time of the Artificial day: because at the point of every climate truly taken, the longest day is varied half an hour: although this account agree not altogether with Ptolemy, and the ancient Geographers before him, as we shall show hereafter. This distinction of the Terrestrial Sphere into Climates is somewhat a more subtle distinction than the former by Zones; for as much as that is made by the combination of such Parallels as are principally named and of chief note, as the Tropics and Polar circles. But this indifferently respects all without difference. This first beginning and measure, as well of this as all other measures of the earth is the Equatour, for that which is most perfect and absolute in every kind aught to be the measure of all other. But yet we must understand, that although we begin our account of the Climates from the Equatour; yet the Equatour itself makes no Climate, but only the Parallels which are thereunto correspondent. For as it is before showed, under the Equatour itself, the artificial days are all equal in length, containing only twelve hours: wherefore beginning from the Equatour betwixt that and the third Parallel, we count the first climate: from the third to the sixth, the second Climate: and so all the rest, making the number of the Climates double to the number of the Parallels; so that one and the self same Parallel, which is the end, and bound of one Climate is the beginning of the next; whence we see that to the constitution of every Climate three Parallels concur, whereof two are extreme, comprehending the breadth of the said Climate, and one dividing it just in the midst. A Parallel therefore differs from a Climate, as a part from the whole, being one circle correspondent to the Equatour, whereas a Climate is a space contained in three Parallels. Secondly, as a Parallel is conceived to add to the artificial day one quarter or fourth part of an hour; so a Climate makes half an hour; so that by how much any Climate is distant from the Equatour, by so many half hours the longest day of that Climate goes beyond the longest day of the place under the Equatour. These Climates therefore cannot be all of one equal quantity; because the Equatour is a greater circle, and comprehends the greatest space in the Earth: so that it must needs follow that these Climates near the Equatour being made by the combination of greater circles are greater than those nearer the Poles. But because all Climates are made by the combination of Parallels; we are to understand that there are three sort of Parallels to be known in cosmography: The first are those which do distinguish the latitude of places, taking their beginning from the Equatour; and are in an ordinary Globe of Map distinguished, sometimes by 10, sometimes by 15 degrees. The second kind of Parallels are those that make the Zones, which are indeed some special named Parallels, as the Tropics and the Polar circles: The third sort are called Artificial Parallels; because they show the distances of artificial days and nights, which are commonly noted in the margin of a Geographical Map, which last sort of Parallels are here chiefly to be understood. 1 The Zones and Climates agree in form but differ in greatness, number and office. The Climates are so called (as we have said) because they decline from the Equatour, and are spaces of the Earth containing two Parallels, in which the longest day is varied by half an hour. These agree with the Zones in some sort: for both of them are spread by the latitude of the Earth, and by Parallel circles compass it about as so many girdles: Nevertheless they differ one from the other. 1. In Greatness, because the Zones are greater, the Climates lesser spaces in the Earth. 2. In Number, because there are only five Zones, but many more climates. 3. In Office, use and effect, because the Zones are to distinguish the mutation of the quality of the air and shadows according to divers Regions of the Earth: but the Climates are used to show the greatest differences of hours in the day: to show the variation of the rising and setting of the stars, for places under the same Climate have the same quantity of days and nights, the same rising and setting of the stars, whereas places seated under divers climates have a great variation in the days and nights, and a divers rising and setting of the stars: for as often as the longest or Solsticiall day of one place, differs from the longest day of another by the space of half an hour, a new Climate is placed: wherefore under the Equatour or middle part of the earth the days are always equal, to wit, of 12 hours: which beginning from the Equatour, if we approach towards either Pole, so far as the greatest artificial day amounts to 12 ½, we may assure ourselves that we are come to the first Climate: and so forward still the greatest day of our Climate will by so much exceed the greatest day of the other. As the Climates differ one from the other by half hours, so the Parallels by quarters, as we have showed: and shall more fully explain in this Chapter. 2 The Climates compared one with the other, are not all of the same greatness. Although the Climates are placed according to equal increase of days and nights, yet suffer they a great inequality: For no clime is equal to another in the same Hemisphere, but are still greater than other, by how much nearer they are to the Equinoctial circle; for the latitude of the first Climate is reckoned to be about 8 degrees, which make 480 Italian-miles: but of the last not so many minutes as quarters of miles. 11 In Terrestrial Climates, two things are to be understood; 1 The Invention: 2 The Distinction. The Invention teacheth the manner how to find out in what Climate any place lieth. The finding out of any climate depends upon the observation of the length of the day; for the length of the day being once known, the Climate will also be found out by this Rule. 1 Double the hours above 12, and the Product will show the Climate▪ The reason of this rule is intimated before; to wit, that the climates are distinguished the one from the other by the space of half an hour of the longest day: Now the days under the equatour are always equal, containing 12 hours in length: from which towards the Pole they are increased by degrees: wherefore the number of the Climates must needs be double to the number of hours above 12: as for example, if I should find out in what Climate England is situated: I find the length of the longest day to be about 18 hours, which is six hours more than 12; this I double, and it will be 12; whence I collect, that England is situated under the 12 Climate: A more compendious way of finding out the Climate of any place, is by a certain Table, wherein against every Elevation of the Pole is set the just Climate: which Table we shall insert hereafter. Here must be noted that this rule which we have taught is to be understood of the Climates as they are absolute in nature, and not of Ptolemy's Climates: If any man would find out the Climates of Ptolemy, he must first cast away three quarters of an hour, which is 45 minutes; because his Climates, as we shall show, begin not immediately from the Equatour, but from the latitude of 12 degrees. 12 Thus much for the Invention: the Distinction of Climates in Northern and Southern Climates: both these again are of two sorts, either proper or improper. 13 The proper Climates are those which are placed between the Equatour and the point near the Polar circle: The improper are those from the Polar circle to the Pole itself. We must understand that the climates are considered two manner of ways, 1 Absolutely in respect of the whole Terrestrial Sphere. 2 Comparatively, in respect of the known habitable part of the Earth: According to the latter consideration the ancient Geographers have otherwise distinguished the Climates than the new writers: whence ariseth a great difference and confusion amongst them, in defining the number of the climates. For sometime they will have a new climate put whensoever the day increaseth a quarter of an hour: sometimes at half an hour, sometimes at difference of an whole hour or day. But the doubt is easily answered, and reconciled by our former distinction; for whereas they put the difference of climates to be half an hour, it is to be understood of these which are proper climates betwixt the Equatour and the Polar circle, for it is certain that beyond this circle the artificial day increaseth, not only by hours, but by days, weeks, months; so that another account must be made of such climates then of the former. But it hath been generally taken for those climates of the Ancients: now the distinction of climates amongst the Ancients is of two sorts. The first was of the Geographers before Ptolemy who placed the uttermost bound Northward in the 25th degree of Latitude or Elevation, and so made only seven climates. These 7 climates were all understood to be in the habitable parts wherein they were marked and designed out unto us by names taken from Cities, Mountains, Regions, and such like remarkable places, where we are to conceive that climate as near as may be guessed to run through the middle of any such Region, whereof it taketh its name: But the better to understand the Distinction of the climates, as well with the Ancient as Modern Cosmographers, we will insert this following Theorem. 1 In the placing and Number of the Climates and Parallels, there is a great diversity betwixt the Ancient and Modern Geographers. This hath been before mentioned: but for better distinction we have reserved the handling of these differences to this proposition, which may serve as a Carollary to the rest. First we take it as granted that Ptolemy so appointed the Parallels (out of which the climates must arise) that he numbered 38 both ways from the Equatour: to wit, 38 towards the South, and so many towards the North. These Parallels he so distinguished, that 24 he numbered by quarters of hours, four by half hours, four by whole hours, and six by whole months. Hence is it that Geographers say, that a new Parallel is to be placed sometimes whereas the longest day increaseth by a quarter of an hour; sometimes where it increaseth by a half, sometimes by a whole hour, sometimes by a whole month. The first is to be understood of those 24 Parallels which were delivered by the Ancients before Ptolemy. The second, third, and fourth of such as were unknown unto those Ancients before Ptolemy. To reduce all into order we will set down this distinction. The distinction of the Climates is either ancient or new. The Ancient was again twofold: either former or latter. The former was that which was set down before Ptolemy's times, wherein there were assigned seven Climates according to the common opinion (though Mercator grants but 5) These Authors placed their Northern bound in the 25 degrees or elevation: The later distinction was almost the same, but somewhat corrected by Ptolemy, who placed 9 Climates towards the North. The first passed by Meroe a City of Ethiopia, where the longest or Solstitial day is 13 hours. The second by Siene in Egypt, where the longest day is 13 ½: The third by Alexandria in Egypt, where the longest day is 14 hours, the 4th by the Island of Rhodes, where the longest day is of 14 ½. The fifth by Rome, where they have the length of the longest day 15 hours. The sixth by Pontus, where the longest day is 15 ½ hours. The seaventh by the mouth of Boristhenes where the longest day is of 16 hours. Nevertheless some have drawn the 6 Climate by Boristhenes in Sarmatia, and the seaventh by the Riphaean mountains. Ptolemy to this number adds two more, and so reckons them that the 8 should pass by the Riphaean mountains, and the 9 by Denmark where the day at longest is 17 hours. To these Northern Climates they opposed so many towards the South, which they called Anticlimates. These as it should seem in Ptolomi●s time were Imaginary altogether, because few or no places were discovered at that time beyond the Line. But to leave P●olomy and his old Authors, and examine the industry of later Geographers, we shall find the Distinction of the Climates to be twofold; either unperfect wherein they numbered only 19 Climates; or perfect, wherein they accounted 46 or 48, of which 23 or 24 were Northern, and the other on the opposite part, to wit, in the South. The perfect distinction of the Climates is again (as later writers speak) either certain or uncertain. The certain they call that wherein the Climates are distinguished and ranged from the Equatour to the Polar circle: For sithence the Northern Regions are now discovered beyond 70 degrees of the Elevation of the Pole, and a Climate is defined to be a space comprehended betwixt three Parallels in the habitable Earth: wherein the length of the longest day is increased by half an hour; Therefore it must needs be, that from the Equatour to that habitable part of the Earth, wherein the longest day is 24 hours (which is not far from the Pole-circle) there should be placed 24 Climates. The uncertain distinction they call that which is betwixt the Polar circle, and the Pole itself, which may be termed Improper; because in these Climates the day is not increased by half hours, as in the former, but first by whole Days, then by Weeks, and last of all by whole Months: In so much that under the Pole itself they have 6 Months perpetual day, and so long again a continual night. The Parallels whereof the Climates are made, were set down by Ptolemy 38 (as we have said) but the later writers have placed them so far Northernly, that they reach to that tract wherein the Sun tarries above the Horizon a whole 24 hours, and so have numbered 23 or 24 towards the North, and so many towards the South. The cause of this diversity is because some draw the first by the mouth of the Redde-Sea: others by Meroe: for the farther consideration of these climates corrected by later Goegraphers, they begin their account from the Equatour itself, which in this case is the best rule of certainty: because we hold that whole tract of Earth to be habitable, as we shall prove in our second book. 14 A Parallel is a space wherein the longest day is increased by a quarter of an hour. Concerning the Parallels, little can be said more than were have opened in the doctrine of the Climates: for (as we showed) the one cannot be well understood without the other: only to avoid ambiguity of speech, we must consider that a Parallel may be taken either for a Line or Circle, in which senfe we took it in the fifth Chapter; where we divided them into Named or Nameless: or else for a space bounded by circles as we here understand it. The neglect of this distinction hath made some Geographers speak sometimes improperly. The Parallel is found out by this rule. 1 Let the number of the longest day above 12 be multiplied by 4, and the Product will show the Parallel. The reason is given before in the doctrine of the Climates, because the Parallel space, according to Latitude, is but half the Climate: so that as in finding out the climate for any place we ought to double the hours of the longest day above 12: so here we ought to quadruple them, which is to multiply them by 4: As for example at Rome we find the longest day to be about 15, which exceeds 12 by 3; which being again multiplied by 4, will produce 12, which is the Parallel for the place. 2 The Parallels no where divide the Climates into two equal parts. In the climates we are to consider two things, either their latitude or breadth from North to South: or their longitude or extent from East to West. In respect of the former we may hardly without sensible error call the Parallel half the Climate, in regard the three lines whereof the climate consists, to wit, the middle and the two extremes, are not always of like distance: but if we consider the extent of the Circumference as is stretcheth i self betwixt East and West, we must needs acknowledge much more: to wit, that of two Parallels, dividing the same climate betwixt them, that that is manifestly the greatest which is next the Equatour, and that is the least which is nearest to the Pole: because the Circles which comprehend their Parallel spaces, continually decrease towards the Pole: so that if we imagine two men to travel round about the earth, the one in a Parallel nearer the Equatour, the other nearer the Pole, in the same space of time; it must needs follow that he should go far faster which is nearer the Equatour than the other near the Pole: for howsoever Columella seems to make a Parallel to have in breadth 60 foot, and to intimate by consequence an equality of the Parallels amongst themselves, yet must this be understood of Parallels which are near one to the other nearer the Equatour, which comprehend a great space of land, and admit no sensible difference. Other matters which concern the Climates and Parallels, shall be (God willing) unfolded in our Tables in the next Chapter, when we have spoken of the Inhabitants, and such other adjuncts appertaining▪ without the which this treatise will be unperfect, depending for a great part on such circumstances as our method admits not in this place, but immediately follow. CHAP. X. Of the distinction of the Inhabitants of the Terrestrial Sphere. 1 Having hitherto treated of the distinction of spaces bounded by circles in the Terrestrial Globe, to wit, Zones, Climates, and Parallels; we are now to treat of the Inhabitants, as such adjuncts as properly belong to such spaces; so far as it concerns the constitution of the whole Sphere. 2 The distinction of the Inhabitants is twofold, either Absolute or Comparative: Absolute as they may be considered in themselves without any comparison of one with the other. 3 The former is again twofold: either from the Position of the Sphere, or the differences of their Sun-Shadowes: According to the position of the Sphere the Inhabitants may be said to have either a Right, Oblique, or Parallel Sphere according to their Orisons. What these three Spheres are, may appear by that which we have formerly spoken concerning the distinction of Orisons in the sixth Chapter of this Treatise, and therefore needs no farther repetition: we are in this place to treat of the several accidents, and conditions of the Inhabitants. Out of the distinction of the threefold Sphere will arise 13 manners of habitation: which for more order sake, we will reduce into certain heads in this manner. 4 The people of a right Sphere are such as enjoy aright Horizon, whose proprieties shall be declared in this Theorem. 1 The Inhabitants of a Right Sphere in respect of the heavens have the same accidents. These accidents are chiefly four, 1 They enjoy a perpetual Equinoctial, having their days and nights always equal the one to the other: because the Sun never swerving from his Ecliptic, hath his course equally divided by the Horizon. 2 With them all the stars equally set and rise; because all the Parallels wherein the stars make their Diurnal Revolution are equally cut of the Horizon. 3 To them the Sun is twice in the year vertical, that is directly over their heads, and twice againein the year Solstitial: The former in the first degrees of Aries and Libra, the latter in the first degrees of Cancer and Capricorn: which divers propositions of the Sun, some later Geographers have termed four Solstices: two higher and two lower. 4 Hence comes it to pass that they yearly enjoy two winters, and two Summers: likewise two springs and two Autumns. Their Summer when the Sun is to them vertical: their winter when it is seated in either of the Tropics. Their Spring and Autumns while the Sun is passing through the middle spaces betwixt both. 5 The people inhabiting an Oblique Sphere are such whose Horizon is oblique. The proprieties belonging unto them are either General or Special. 6 The General are such as agree to all those which inhabit an oblique Sphere. 1 All the Inhabitants of an oblique Sphere agree in two proprieties. These two proprieties wherein they agree are these. 1 To all the Inhabitants without the Equatour under what Parallel soever, the days are equal to the nights only twice in a year, to wit, either in the beginning of the Spring, or the beginning of the Autumn. At other times either the days increase above the nights as in the Summer, or grow lesser as in the winter. 2 To these inhabitants some stars are perpetually seen, as such which are near the Pole to which they incline: some are never seen, as such as are farthest off from the said Pole: some rise and set, which are those which are in the middle space betwixt both; which are sometimes visible, and sometime lie hid. 7 The special Accidents of an Oblique Horizon, are such as agree to special places in the same Sphere. 1 The Inhabitants of an Oblique Sphere of five sorts, enjoying so many correspondent properties. The first sort are of those, whose Zenith is betwixt the Equator and one of the Tropickes, even unto the 23. Degrees, 30. Scruples of elevation of the Pole: In such a sort, towards the North betwixt the Line and the Tropic of Cancer, are placed the inhabitants of Zeilan, the extreme part of the East Indies, Hispaniola, Guinea, Nubia, with some part of Arabia foelix, and all other places betwixt the Equatour and the Tropic of Cancer in the Torride Zone. Towards the South in the same Latitude, are placed the Brasilians, the Perwians, the javans, with many others. The Accidents which happen unto these Nations are these, 1. They may see all the stars except a few which are near the Pole. 2. Their days and nights are somewhat unequal, so that their longest day, or longest night, is not always of the same quantity. 3. Twice in the year they have the Sunne-verticall, but without the Equatour. 4. They have two Summers, and two Winters, but not equally tempered. 5. The length of their longest day reacheth to 13. ½ hours. The second sort are such as inhabit under the Tropic itself, whose elevation of the Pole is equal to the greatest declination of the Sun, which is 23. degrees, 30 Scruples. Under the Tropic of Cancer is placed a great part of Arabia foelix, East India, the Southern parts of China, the higher parts of Egypt, and Siene. Under the Tropic of Capricorn are placed the people of Monomotapa, and Madagascar, with other places: The accidents belonging unto them are these, 1. To them appear all the stars comprehended in one of the circles, but none of the other. As for example, to those inhabiting the Tropic of Cancer, the stars included within the Arctic Circle always appear, but never those which are in the Antarcticke: likewise to those which dwell under the Tropic of Capricorn, all the stars appear which are contained within the Antarctic Circle, but none of those included within the Arctic Circle. 2. By how much nearer the Sun approacheth to their Zenith or Vertical point, by so much are their days lengthened; and by how much farther it goes off, by so much are they shortened: so that they enjoy then their longest day, when the Sun directly passeth by their Zenith. 3. To them the Sun is vertical but once in the year: to wit, to those under the Tropic of Cancer, when the Sun enters into the sign; as to the other when it toucheth the first Degree of Capricorn. 4. They have but one Summer and one Winter throughout the year. The third sort, are such inhabitants as dwell in one of the temperate Zones betwixt the Tropic and the Polar Circles from 24. Degrees of elevation, to 66. Degrees, 30. Scruples. Such inhabitants towards the North, are (as we have showed) almost all the inhabitants of Europe, Asia maior, and part of Africa: as on the other side towards the South, the Chylienses, the farthermost Africans, and those that dwell near the straits of Magellane. Their properties are chiefly these, 1. Many stars are by them always seen, and many never appear. 2. Their days notably differ in inequality. 3. The sun never arrives at their Zenith, but is always on the South of those which inhabit betwixt the Tropic of Cancer, and the Arctic Circle, and always on the North side of such as dwell in the opposite temperate Zone. 4. They have in the year but one Summer and Winter, but by reason of the diversity of places much unequal: for where the elevation of the Pole is greater, the winter is much harder; but where it is lesser it is more temperate. The fourth kind of inhabitants, are those which reside under the Polar Circle, (which is their Zenith) where the temperate Zone ends, and the cold begins: where the elevation of the Pole is beyond 66. Degrees 30. Minutes, in which Tract lies Nova Zembla, with many other Lands not yet well discovered in the North: and perhaps as many more under the Antarctic Circle towards the South, less known than the other. The accidents belonging to them are these, 1. Those which inhabit under the Arctic Circle, see all the stars included within the Tropic of Cancer, but never those within the Tropic of Capricorn: Likewise, those which live under the Antarcticke Circle, see all the stars within the Tropic of Capricorn, but never those within the other Tropic of Cancer. 2. Their longest day at Midsummer is 24. hours, their night then being but a moment: likewise their longest night, as at Midwinter, is but 24. hours, their day passing not a moment. 3. The Centre of the Sun every year twice toucheth at their Orisons. 4. The Sun at Noonetide is always on the South of those which dwell under the Arctic Circle, except it be in the Summer Tropic, when it is the Midnight, or Northern point: likewise to those that are under the Antarcticke Circle, the Sun at noon is always on the North side, except under the Winter Tropic. 5. They have in the year one Winter and one Summer: but the Winter far colder, and the Summer slacker than in the forenamed places. The fifth and last habitation, is of those which are included betwixt the Polar Circle, and the Pole itself, from 66. Degrees and 30. minutes of elevation to 90. In which Tract, little is discovered Northward, and in the South climate nothing at all. The special Accidents appertaining to them are these, 1. With them a few stars are seen to set and rise. 2. They have an Equinox● the Sun touching the first Degree of Aries and Libra. 3. They of the North Zone have more days about the middle of Summer, and more nights in the Winter: likewise, they of the South frozen Zone, the contrary. 4. They have extreme cold Winters, and in stead of Summer, a small remission of cold. 5. The signs of the Zodiac to them preposterously rise. 8 The inhabitants of a Parallel Sphere are discovered in this proposition. 1 The inhabitants of a Parallel Sphere enjoy but one kind of habitation, in respect of the Heavens. A Parallel Sphere, I here accurately understand for that positure of the Globe, wherein the Pole of the world is precisely placed in the Zenith, or elevated to 90. degrees of Altitude: because only in such a site, the Equator and the Horizon agree in one, and lie parallel to all the rest of the Parallel Circles: which places, whether it be at all capable of habitation by reason of cold, we shall discuss hereafter in the second part: but out of supposition admitting a place of habitation, these accidents will happen, 1. The fixed stars which they see, are always seen so, that with them there is no point of East or West; for the stars never rise nor set. But the Planets rise and set, but not by their diurnal, but proper motion. 2. They have a continual day of six months, and a night also as long, the Sun rising continually in the first degree of Aries, and setting in the first of Libra. 3. The Sun in the Equinoctial points, for all the time that he is above the Horizon (as all the other stars) is turned round about in manner of a wheel. 4. The Equatour serves in place of the Horizon, and the Equatour is every where equidistant from the Pole 5. They have one Winter and one Summer, the former exceeding cold, the latter less warm than ours. 9 The second distinction of the inhabitants of the earth is taken from their Noone-shaddowes. The Sun in diverse parts of the earth diversely spreads his shadow, because the Gnomon or Opacous bodies by which the shadows are made in the earth, are in diverse places diversely opposed, or objected to the Sun: for whereas the Sun so runs in his Ecliptic Circle betwixt the two Poles, that though his passage be in an oblique Circle, yet he never comes so far as the Poles themselves: it necessarily must be, that sometimes he should shoot forth his beams perpendicularly, as when it is in the vertical point of a place; sometimes Obliquely, as when he declines either one way or other from the vertical point; sometimes in parallel wise, for as much as in some places of the earth, the Sun cleaving as it were to the Horizon, casts out his beams parallel and equidistant to the plain of the Horizon. The right or perpendicular▪ beams of the Sun, falling on the superficies of the earth at right Angles, are turned and reflected into themselves, and so make no shadows at all. But the oblique beams, in that they are not reflected into themselves, must of necessity produce shadows, yet in diverse manners; for those Sunbeams which obliquely project themselves on the plain of the earth, so as they come not from the Horizon itself, will make such kind of shadows as shall proportionally agree with their Gnomon, or Opacous bodies, and such whose magnitude may in a manner be designed out, and certainly measured by the sight. But on the contrary part, the beams which are esteemed parallel to the plain of the Horizon, finding no solid obstacle or let, shoot forth infinitely, making no Angles on the superficies of the earth, and can have no proportion at all with their Gnomon, that the shadow may be any way designed by our eyes. But here we are to consider, that the shadows chiefly to be considered, are the Meridian or Noone-shaddowes, which take their distinction from the diverse incidency of the beams, which the Sun casts forth at noon. According to this manner. 10. The inhabitants of a place in respect of the shadows are either Amphiscij, Heteroscij, or Periscij. The Amphiscij are those, whose Noone-shaddowes (but at diverse times of the year) are ●ast both ways; that is to say, North and South. Amphiscij signifies as much as people of a double shadow: such are they which inhabit betwixt the Equatour and the Tropickes, where the elevation of the Pole equals not 24. degrees: These men have the Sun twice every year in their Zenith or vertical point, and then they make no shadows at all; and therefore they are called Ascij, or without shadows. But when the Sun passeth from their vertical point towards the Northern signs, then at noon it will cast the shadow towards the Southern coast: But contrariwise, coming from the Zenith toward the Southern signs, the shadow will be darted toward the North, which is evident out of the Optic principles; because the shadow is always found to be opposite in place to the Sunbeams, the Gnomon, or dark body interposed. 11. The Heteroscij are those, whose Noone-shaddowes turn only one way, that is, either toward the North, or toward the South. These Nations inhabit in a, temperate Zone, betwixt the Tropic and the Polar Circles, whereas such as dwell in the temperate toward the North, betwixt the Tropic of Cancer and the Polar Circle Arctic, have their noone-shaddowes cast Northward. But those on the other side of the Equatour▪ dwelling betwixt the Tropic of Capricorn, and the Antarcticke Circle, cast their shadows Southward: Of the former sort are Grecians, Italians, French, Spaniards, Germans, Polonians, Suedians, Danes, English, and the rest inhabiting our temperate Zone: which gave occasion of that speech of Lucan the Poet, concerning the Arabians coming into Thessaly, in the war of Hannibal and Pompey; Ignotum vobis Ar●bes venistis in orbem, Vmbras mirati nemorum non ire sinistras. Y'are come Arabians to an unknown land, Wondering the shades ne'er take the Southward hand. Which verses are in this sense to be understood; Poets are said to look and turn their faces towards the West, so that the South must of necessity be counted the left side: Now the place whereunto the Arabians came, being a part of Thessaly, where such dwell who only cast their shadows one way, to wit, Northward; but Arabia their natural Country, being supposed to be included in the Torrid Zone, where the shadows were said to be cast both ways, they are said to wonder: The reason why our shadows at noon are cast always toward the North, and the others toward the South, is related before, to be because the shadow doth always occupy or possess the place opposite to the Sun, or light body. 12 The Periscij are such in habitants whose shadows are moved round about them in a circular form. In some places of the earth the Noone-shaddowes take not their beginning from our heads, but of one side, and are extended forward to the plain of the terrestrial Horizon, and so moved round about the Opacous body, as about a Gnomon: whence they are called Periscij; which is as much to say, as men having shadows moved round about; such is their habitation which are included in the Frigid Zone, circumscribed within the Polar circles, and the Poles: Here the Sun never directly passeth by the crown of their heads, but at one side: so that they have the Pole for their vertical point, but the Equatour, as it were, for their Horizon. These Periscij are of two sorts, for some are contained in the Arctic circle, the other in the Antarcticke, whereof both are as yet undiscovered; especially the Antarcticke, being farthest off from our climate. 1 The habitation of the Amphiscij comprehends 7. Parallels, of the Heteroscij 41. of the Periscij 6. Months. Of the nature and accidents of these three sorts of people there needs no more to be spoken, than we have delivered before in this Chapter; Nevertheless, for a recapitulation of our former doctrine in this & the precedent Chapter, it will not be amiss to insert this table of Climates, set out by our exactest Geographers; wherein is expressed (as it were) to our view the respect and several accidents, which belong to these several inhabitants. 13 Thus much for the Inhabitants absolutely considered: The inhabitants compared one with the other according to their position, are the Perioeci, Antoeci, and Antipodes. 14 The Perioeei are those inhabitants which dwell in the two opposite points of the Parallel circle. 15 The Antoeci are such as dwell under the same Meridian, but in diverse Parallels equally distant from the Equatour. 16 The Antipodes are such as inhabit under one Meridian, but under two Parallels equidistant from the Equatour, and two opposite points of those Parallels. A Table of the Climates belonging to the three sorts of Inhabitants: Pag: 229. Inhabitants belonging to several Climates. Climes Parallels The longest summer day. How. Scr. Latitude & elevation of Pole. Scr. Degr. The breadth of the Climates. Deg. Scr The places by which the Climates pass. 0 0 1 12 0 12 15 0 0 4 18 4 18 The beginning from the Aequatour. 1 2 3 122 30 1 45 8 34 12 43 8 25 Sinus Arabicus or the Red Sea. Amphiscij. 2 4 5 13 0 13 15 16 43 20 33 7 50 Meroe an Island of Nilus in Egypt. 3 6 7 13 40 13 45 23 10 27 36 7 3 Siene a Ci●ty in Africa. 4 8 9 14 0 14 15 30 47 33 45 6 9 Alexandria in Egypt. 5 10 11 14 30 14 45 36 30 39 2 5 17 Rhodes and Babylon. 6 12 13 15 0 15 15 41 22 4● 3● 4 30 Rome and Hellespont. 7 14 15 15 30 15 45 45 29 47 20 3 48 Venice and Milan. 8 16 17 16 0 16 15 49 21 50 33 3 13 Podalia and ●he lesser Tartary. 9 18 19 16 30 16 45 51 58 53 17 2 44 Batavia and Wit●enberge. 20 17 0 17 ●● 54 ●9 55 ●4 2 17 R●stoch. 11 22 23 17 30 17 45 ●●●7 57 34 2 0 Ireland and Moscovy. jeteroscij. 12 24 25 18 0 18 15 58 26 59 14 1 40 Bohus a Castle in Norwey. 13 26 27 18 30 18 45 59 59 60 40 1 26 Gothland. 14 28 29 19 0 19 15 61 18 61 53 1 13 Bergiss in Norwey. 15 30 31 19 30 19 45 62 25 62 54 1 0 Wiburge in Finland. 16 32 33 20 0 20 15 63 22 63 46 0 52 Arotia in Sweden. 17 34 35● 20 30 20 45 64 6 64 30 0 44 The mouth of Darecally a river of Sweden 18 36 37 21 0 21 15 64 49 65 6 0 36 Divers places of Norwey. 19 38 39 21 30 21 45 65 21 65 35 0 29 Suecia, Alba Russia. 20 40 41 22 0 22 15 65 47 65 57 0 22 With many Island 21 42 43 22 ●0 22 45 66 6 66 14 0 17 Thereunto adjoining, 22 44 45 23 0 23 15 66 20 66 25 0 11 Wanting special names, 23 46 47 23 30 23 45 66 28 66 ●0 0 5 And Landmarks. 24 48 24 0 66 31 0 0 Island under the Antic circle. Here the Climates are accounted by the months from 66 Degr. Menses 1 67 15 These Climates are supposed to pass by Divers Lands within the Arctic circle, as These names being originally Greek are taken from the divers manner of dwelling of one nation in respect of another. The Perioeci are called such as dwell (as it were) about the Hemisphere in the same Parallel in two opposite points: the one in regard of the other being Eastern, the other Western: so that they are supposed to differ the one from the other 180 degrees which is the semicircle: where we are to note, that these degrees are to be numbered, not in a greater but a lesser Parallel, which is less than the Equatour. For they which are under the Equator itself in 2 opposite points are to be accounted rather Antipodes, although (for aught I see) the name might agree. The Antoeci (as the name imports) are such as dwell one against another, having one selfe-same Meridian and equal distance from the Equatour, the one in the Northern, the other in the Southern Hemisphere. The Antipodes (otherwise called Antichthones) may popularly be described to be such as dwell feet to feet one against the other: so that a right line being drawn from one side to the other, will pass by the Centre of the world▪ whence they precisely are distant the one from the other 1800 in a greater circle: wherein they are distinguished from the Perioeci, which are divided by the degrees of a lesser circle: such compared one to the other are the Americans and the Eastern Indians about the river Ganges; the Inhabitants of Peru and Calecute: those of Peria & Summatra to England I find no other Antipodes but the Sea, or at least some parcel of land in the South continent near Psittacorum Regio: Here is to be noted that the former definition of Antipodes given by the ancients, was only to be understood of the known habitable part of the Earth; because such as dwell directly under the Equatour, or either of the Poles, although they may be Antipodes agree not to that definition: by reason the former are Antipodes only in opposite points of the Equatour: the other of the Meridian. Whether there were any Antipodes or no, was made a question amongst the Ancients, in so much that Saint Augustine in his book de civitate Dei, and Lactantius in his third book of Institutions, seems stiffly to defend the contrary: which opinion is supposed to grow out of their contempt or neglect of Mathematical studies, in those ages wherein the zeal to religion was most unnecessarily opposed to Philosophy, and the mistress forsaken of her best handmaidens: which ignorance of the Ancients was so far derived to posterity, that in the year of our Saviour 745 one Boniface Bishop of men's, was accused before the Pope Zachary Virgilius Bishop of Salisburg, for heresy, in that he, averred there were Antipodes: The matter being first preferred to the King of Bohemia, and an appeal made unto the Pope, it happened that the honest Bishop for this assertion, was flatly condemned for heretical doctrine, and enforced to recant his opinion: yet is it wonderful how such matters were thus decided: for granting these two easy grounds. First that the earth is Spherical, a proposition proved in their time; 2 That every place, or at least two opposite places in the Terrestrial Sphere may be habitable; it must of necessity follow, that such Antipodes must be granted: which makes me to imagine that Saint Augustine absolutely and grossly denied not the Antipodes; because in setting down the premises and grounds of our opinion, he seemed to understand them too well to deny a necessary induction, being a man of so great a wit and apprehension: but questionless he thought that the Torrid Zone, which by most of the Ancients in his time, was reputed unhabitable and unpassable, no man had yet set his foot in those remote parts beyond the line: so that it seemed in him not to arise out of ignorance of the constitution of the earthly Globe: but out of the received opinion of the Torrid Zone, and the vast Ocean: the one of which he held unhabitable, the other unpassable: from whence also sprang up an argument, or rather an idle fancy, that the Antipodes could not be admitted without granting another Saviour, and another kind of men besides Adam's posterity: for if this conjecture had not taken place, the Pope (I suppose) would never have proved himself so ridiculous a judge, as to have condemned Virgilius for heresy. As for Lactantius (howsoever otherwise a pious eloquent Father) the weakness and childishness of his arguments, will to any indifferent reader discover his ignorance in the very first rudiments of cosmography. Here we may learn how far religion itself is wronged by such who set her opposite to all her servants. But whatsoever the Ancients out of their glimmering reason have conjectured, our times have sufficiently decided this controversy; wherein such Antipodes are established both by reason and experience: which mat●er we shall reserve to our second book; wherein we shall declare how far, and in what sense the Earth may be termed habitable. 1 Those which are to us Perioeci, are the Antoeci to our Antipodes: our Antoeci the Periaeci to our Antipodes: likewise our Perioeci are the Antipodes to our Antaeci. This Proposition as a Corollary may by necessary consequence be deduced out of the precedent definition, and be well expressed out of the constitution of the artificial Globe, and needs no farther demonstration. 2 The Perioeci, Antoeci, and Antipodes are diversely distinguished in respect of the celestial apparences. The proprieties of the Perioeci are chiefly four. 1 They have the same elevation of the Pole, and therefore the same temper of the year, and the same length of days and nights. 2 They dwell East and West in regard one of the other. 3 They have contrary times of days and nights: for when the one hath his Noon, the other enjoys his midnight: likewise when the Sun with the one riseth, it setteth with the other. 4 They have the same Zone, Climate, and Parallel; but differ by a semicircle▪ to wit, 180 degrees. To the Antoeci they have likewise assigned 5 proprieties▪ viz. 1 They inhabit the like Zones, but in divers Hemispheres. 2 They have the same elevation of the pole, but not of the same pole: because the one sees the pole Arctic, the other the pole Antarcticke, equally raised above his Horizon. 3 They have Noon and Midnight just at the same times. 4 They enjoy the same temper of the Heavens▪ 5 They have the seasons of the year contrary. For when the Southern Antoeci have their Summer, the Northern have their Winter; and chose: when the Northern have their spring, these have their Autumn. To the Antipodes they have allotted 3 Proprieties. 1 That they have the same elevation of the pole, though not of the same pole. 2 They have the same temper of the year, and the same quantity of days and nights. 3 They have all the other accidents contrary: For when the one hath Night the other hath Day, when one Winter, the other Summer; when the one the Spring, the other Autumn; and chose. These accidents and proprieties here mentioned, must be understood in respect of the Heavens only. The qualities arising from divers other Accidental and particular causes in divers places of the Earth, we shall differre unto our second part▪ CHAP. XI. Of the Longitudes and Latitudes. 1 THe distinction of the Terrestrial Globe according to certain Spaces, being formerly explained, we are now to treat of the Distinction of the said Sphere according to certain Distances. 2 A Distance here we understand to be a direct line drawn betwixt two points in the Earth: such a Distance is twofold, either Simple or Comparative. 3 The Simple Distance is taken from the two great circles, to wit the Meridian, or the Equatour: which is either the Longitude or Latitude. The division of Distances into the Simple or Comparative, is most necessary: for it is one thing for a place absolutely taken in itself, to be distant from some fixed point or other in the Globe: Another for two places to be compared betwixt themselves in regard of such a fixed point: for as much as the former implies only the distance betwixt two points, the other the distance of two such points or places in respect of the third. These points, from which such points are said to be distant, are either found in the Meridian Circle, from which the Distance is called Longitude; or else in the Equatour, whence we call it Latitude. 4 The Longitude is the distance of any place Eastward from the first Meridian. To understand the better the Longitude, we must consider that it may be taken two ways: either Generally, or Specially: In the former sense it is taken for the Distance of the whole Earth, stretched from the West unto the East, and chose from East to West. The bounds or limits of this Longitude were by Ptolemy and the ancient Cosmographers set no farther distant than the half circle, containing 180 degrees; because the rest of the Earth lay at that time undiscovered. The end of this space towards the East, was the Kingdom of China, at the farthest part of all India, distant, as we said, from the Fortunate Lands where Ptolemy placed the first Meridian, 180 degrees: which being taken in the Meridian, and resolved into Miles, according to our former rules, will give 10800 Italian miles: but this space delineated out by the Ancients, was very scant and narrow in respect of the other parts since found out, being added to the former. For beyond the bound set by Ptolemy in the East, it is manifest that 60 degrees are found out and made known. An example whereof we have in Scythia without the mountain Emaus, which is known to extend itself 60 degrees Eastward towards the Kingdom of Cathay, discovered by the Portugals: so that the breadth of the Earth Eastward is fully known so far as 240 degrees, which being measured in the Equatour will amount unto 14000 miles. Moreover towards the West, beyond the Fortunate Lands, it is known to stretch to the farthest border of America; so that 340 degrees of the earth is fully detected, if not all the rest being only 20 degrees, which are only deficient to make up the whole circle. Which we may the sooner credit; because our times have brought forth (for aught any Authors have related) the most excellent Navigators of all ages, which have sailed the vast Globe of the Earth round about, and left behind them a foundation whereon others might easily build. But to let pass the General Longitude of the Earth betwixt the East and the West; We must understand that the Longitude here mentioned is to be taken in a more special sense, for the Distance of any place from the first Meridian, being placed either in the Canaries, as the Ancients would have it, or in one of the Azores according to the latter Geographers. This than must be the bound from whence we must begin our account; The subject wherein the number of degrees may be taken, may be the Equatour or Parallel. Whence by some the Longitude of a place is defined to be an Arch of the Equatour or Parallel intercepted betwixt the first Meridian and the vertical point of the place proposed: so that by necessary consequence, such places as are subject to the same Meridian, in the same Hemisphere, Eastern or Western, have the same Longitude, which is the distance from the point of the West: but places declining more towards the East have the greater Longitude; but nearer to the West, les●e. 1 Places enjoying the same Longitude are not always equally distant from the first Meridian, and contrariwise places equidistant from the first Meridian have not always the same Longitude. The reason is evident out of that which hath been often spoken before: because the degrees of a greater circle are greater, of a lesser less, according to the greatness of the circle. Now the Longitude of a place measured in the Equatour, will answer to 60 Italian miles: but in other Parallels less. 2 The difference of Longitudes begets the difference of Times: Those therefore which exactly are subject to the same Longitude, have their Noon at the same moment: but where the Longitudes are different, the Noonetides are also different. That the difference of time is varied according to the difference of Longitude in divers parts of the Earth, is a matter obvious to every man's understanding, out of two premised grounds. 1 That the Earth is Spherical. 2 That the Sun in his Diurnal course once in 24 hours compasseth it round: whence it comes to pass that places situate Eastward, see the Suns sooner than those which are placed in the West, and that with a proportional difference of time, that to every hour in the Sun motion is assigned a certain number of correspondent miles: which is in some sort expressed in a Geographical Globe or Map, wherein we shall find described 12 Meridian's, which divide the whole compass of the earthly Sphere into 24 equal parts; in such sort that betwixt each of the two nearest Meridian's, are reckoned 15 degrees, which make one hour: by which we may more easily understand how soon the Noone-time happens in one City before another: for if one City stands Eastward from another the space of three of those foresaid Meridian's, it is evident that it will enjoy noon three hours before the other. The reason of this difference of times, is the difference of Longitudes, wherein to every hour the Cosmographers have allotted 15 degrees in the Sun's Diurnal motion: so that 15 degrees multiplied by 24 hours, which is the whole natural day, there will be produced 360 which is the number of degrees in the whole circle, 3 If two men from the same place travel, the one Eastward, the other Westward round about the Earth, and meet in the same place again: they shall find that he which hath gone Eastward hath gotten, and the other going Westward hath lost a day in their account. This is without difficulty to be understood, out of the change of Longitudes, seconded by their travel, varying perpetually the quantity of the day: for it is manifest, that he who from any place assigned saileth Eastward moving continually against the motion of the Sun, will shorten somewhat of his day; taking away so much from it, as his journey in proportion of distance, hath opposed and anticipated in the time the Diurnal course of the Sun: so that daily gaining something from the length of the day, which must be elsewhere recompensed. It must needs be, that in the whole circuit of the earth, it will amount to 24. hours, correspondent to the whole circuit of the Sun, and the compass of the earth, which will make another day: Likewise, if we suppose another in compassing about the earth, to go Westward, it cannot be otherwise imagined, but that seconding the course of the Sun, by his own journey; he will daily add somewhat to the length of his day, answerable to his distance, from the place wherein he began to follow the Sun in his course from East to West. The daily addition to the length of the day, proportional to the longitudes which he changeth, (the Sun running a like course) must daily diminish somewhat of the Diurnal course of the Sun, and so at his journey's end, which was supposed to be the whole circuit of the earth, answerable to 24. hours in the Sun's course, it will lose a whole day. To demonstrate both these cases, we will imagine in supposition, that of these two travaillers going the one Eastward, the other Westward, the former should take away from the length of the day, or the latter add to it for every 15. miles one minute. Then by the golden Rule, if 15. miles either subtract or add one minute in the length of the day, must 21600. miles, which is the whole compass of the earth, according to the same proportion, either subtract or add 1440 minutes, which make 24. hours, the length of the natural day. To confirm the demonstration by popular experience, I remember I have read in the Hollanders discovery of Fretum de Mayre, that coming home into their own Country, they found by comparing their accounts with their countrymen at home, they had lost one day, having gone Westward, and so compassed the earth round. Hence will arise diverse consectaries not unpleasing to be scanned. One I will touch not much dissonant from our purpose; That three men residing in the same place at one time, shall notwithstanding all vary one from the other in the days of the week, keeping yet an exact account: which to explain the better, we will suppose a jew, a Sarazen, and a Christian, residing in the same town together: It may so happen according to our former grounds, that the Sarazen according to the Law of Mahomet, shall observe his Friday, the jew his Saturday, being his Sabbath: and the Christian the Lord's day, being the Sunday; yet so, as all shall happen on the same day: all of them excluding any error in their calculation. For supposition sake, we will place them all at one time all together in Palestine on a Saturday; at which time, let us imagine the Sarazen to take his journey Westward, the Christian Eastward, so as both of them in their coasts compass the world, to meet again in the same place: The jew all the while we suppose resident in the same place: it will follow by necessary consequence, that the Sarazen going about the earth Eastward, will lose one day; the Christian journeying Westward, will gain one day: the jew remaining in the same place, will neither gain nor lose. These three men then, meeting together again after a year, two, or three, at the same place, must needs make a diverse account; for one and the selfsame day, will be to the Sarazen Friday, to the jew Saturday, and to the Christian Sunday, if they exactly calculate the time from their first meeting, to their return unto the same place. Me thinks this, if there wanted other Arguments, were a reason sufficient to convince some straitlaced men, who rigidly contend our Lord's day (which they erroneously term the Sabbath) to be merely moral, as grounded on the Law of nature. If it were so, according to our premises before demonstrated, this absurdity would ensue necessarily: That the Moral Law, which they call also in a sort the Law of nature, is subject to manifold mutation, which by our best Divines is utterly denied. The consequence will easily follow, because it cannot be denied by any Christian, but that all nations of the world issued from Noah's Ark, the Seminary of mankind, and spread themselves from thence over the face of the whole earth, some farther, some at a shorter distance: whereby changing the longitude with their habitation, they must of necessity alter the differences of times, whereon they seek to ground their Sabbath. Neither at this day can any man exactly and precisely observe any one day, either as it was first appointed by Moses in the Leviticall Law, as it was instituted by Christ's Apostles afterwards; by reason of the manifold transportation of colonies, and transmigration of Nations from one Region into another, whereby the times must necessarily be supposed to vary. And if any more moderate should urge, that not the exact seventh day from the first institution, bound us to observation; so one day in seven be observed: it can hardly pass without exception, for as much as if any man, as Magellane, Drake, or Candish, should travail the world about, a day must needs be varied, as we have showed. Here I would willingly demand, whether such travellers returning home into their own countries, should celebrate the same Lord's day according to the institution of their own Church; or else as they find according to their own account: If they observe the latter, they must schismatically divide themselves from the Church, and keep a Sabbath of their own, which in every man's judgement would be thought absurd, as the mother of many inconveniences: If the former take place, then must the d●y be changeable in his nature, and so one day of seven of them should not be observed. I speak not this to cherish any neglect of the duty we owe that day, but rather to prove it not merely to be grounded on the Law of Nature, as some would persuade; but rather an Ecclesiastical constitution, derived (as it seems most probable) from the Apostles, though not in practice in Christ's time, wherein the jewish Sabbath was not yet abolished: But I have dwelled too long on this, & may perhaps incur sharp censure, for wading too far into the depth of Divinity: But my Apology shall be this, that albeit I have gone beyond my present subject, I ●●ue not yet transcended the limits of my profession: I serve no faction, and therefore dare adventure my language as free as my opinion. 5 Concerning the longitude, two things are to be known, 1. The Invention. 2. The Expression. The Invention proposeth us the way and manner of the first finding out of the longitude of places. There are few things in nature which have more perplexed the wits of ingenious Mathematicians, than the exactest way of finding out the longitude of places: Not that the matter was over difficult in itself, but that they sought out a way to perform this conclusion, not depending from the observation of the celestial bodies and motions; a matter as yet never found out, and I fear me impossible: Because they proposed to themselves one of these two ways to find it out; either by some magnetical instrument, or else by industry of navigation: neither of which can much profit. Not the former, because there have never been any fixed points found in the Equatour, betwixt East and West, as betwixt North and South have been observed: so that nothing can proceed out of the mere nature of the earthly Globe, whereon we may ground any difference of longitude: Neither is the second very beneficial, for that all voyages both by Sea and land, are very irregular and uncertain, either by reason of sundry impediments, as rocks, mountains; woods, contrary winds, and other dangers turning aside the direct course of passengers from any direct way, or observation; or else by the Ignorance of Mariners, which seldom pass so far on discovery: and if they do, know not perfectly to delineate out their journey, as a Cosmographer would expect, to any tolerable satisfaction. Nevertheless, by Astronomical observation, we have many ways left us for the performance of this conclusion, as shall be taught in these following propositions. 1 By an Eclipse of the Moon, the longitude may be found. This conclusion is in this sort to be performed: First, it behooveth you to know, as you may by an Ephemerideses, at what hour an Eclipse shall happen at some known place, whereof you are well informed of the longitude: Then must be observed by an Astrolable, or other Astronomical instrument, at what hour this Eclipse begins at that place, whereof you would willingly know the longitude: If the Eclipse do begin in both places the selfsame time, you may assure yourself that these two places differ not in longitude. But if there be a difference in the time, then must there be a difference in the longitude, which to find out, you may in this sort proceed: Take the lesser sum of hours out of the greater, and there will be remaining, either hours or minutes, or both: If there remain hours, then multiply the same by 15; if minutes, divide the same by 4; (for in this account as we have taught, 15. Degrees make an hour) and add the difference so found unto the longitude, if the Eclipse appear there sooner: but if later, subtract it from the longitude formerly known. If there remain any minutes after the division, you must multiply those minutes by 15; and so shall ye have the Minutes of Degrees. To explain this the better, we will take this familiar example from some of our later writers. The longitude of Paris was set down by Ptolemy, to be 23 degrees; now we may be informed by an Ephemerideses, that a certain Eclipse of the Moon begins there 3 hours after midnight; out of this I would willingly learn the longitude of Tubing a town in Suevia: In this town I observe by some Astronomical instrument, at what hour the Eclipse there begins, which I find to be at three of the clock and 24 minutes after midnight. Then by the subraction of the lesser number of time out of the greater, I find the remainder to be 24 minutes, which divided by 4. which makes one degree, the quotient will be 6. degrees: and that is the difference, which if you add to the known longitude of Paris (because the Eclipse begins there sooner than at Paris) it will amount to 29 degrees: whereby we may collect that the Longitude of Tubing is ●9. degrees. To this rule for the most part are squared all Cosmographical Tables of longitude, but yet in this happen diverse errors: 1. Because oftentimes in the Artificer there wants diligence in observing the right hour & moment of the Eclipse. 2. The diverse. Epacts & latitudes of the Moon are commonly neglected; wherefore some have thought it the best way (if it were to be hoped) that diverse exact Astronomers should at diverse places observe the same Eclipse, and so by conferring together according to the former Rule, find out the longitudes of those places. But exact Astronomers cannot be so easily found in every city, whereof we desire to know the longitudes; or if there were such, they keep not always such correspondency in friendship; neither is an Eclipse of the Moon always at command. Nevertheless, this way is not to be despised, because where better ways are wanting, we must content ourselves with what we find. 2 By a Clock, Watch, or Hour glass, to find out the longitude of a place. This conclusion is to be performed in this manner; You must get you a watch or clock, apt to run (if you can) 24 hours; this watch must you, by the help of an Astrolabe, rectify and set just at such time as you depart from the place where you are, as bound to any other place, whereof you desire to inquire the longitude: during which time, your diligent care must be to preserve your watch in motion without intermission: being at last arrived at the place whereof you inquire the longitude, you were best to stay till such time as the Index shall precisely point out some perfect hour: At the same instant it must be known by an Astrolabe, what hour it is at the place where you are arrived; for if your Astrolabe and Watch should both agree in one, you might assure yourself that there is no difference of longitude betwixt the place whence you came, and the place whereto you are arrived: For it is evident that in this sort your journey hath been either directly North or directly South under the same Meridian. But if this differ either in hours or minutes, they must be reduced unto degrees in such sor● as we have showed in the former way. Through which you may find out the Longitude which you desire to know: This invention is by our Countryman Blundevill ascribed to Gemma Frisius; although I should take it to be more ancient: but whose invention soever it was, certainly it cannot but commend the Author. Peter Martyr in his Decades, seems to prefer this way before all the rest; nevertheless in this I cannot assent to his opinion, being one I had rather trust as an Historian, then as a judicious Cosmographer: because the way cannot but admit of great uncertainty: in so much as a Watch or Clock will move inequally, being corrupted with rust, especially on the Sea, which always abounds with moist vapours: wherefore on the Sea, some have thought an Hourglass more convenient, which is true in comparison of the Watch; but neither will the sands of an hourglass keep always the like motion: If any certainty may be this way, it must be by the help of the Automaton or perpetual movable, of whose invention we may sooner despair then of finding out this conclusion. 3 By the distance betwixt the Moon and some known Star, which is situate near the Ecliptic, the Longitude may be found out. This way was taught by Appian, illustrated by Gemma Frisius and Blundevill, to whose manner of explication, we have for farther illustration added a figure of the Parallax whereon this invention is grounded. First then to show this conclusion, we must first lay this ground: that the Distances betwixt the Moon and other stars in the firmament are varied according to the difference of places: In so much as two men living far distant in diverse places of the earth, beholding at one time the Moon and some other known fixed star, will not find the like distance betwixt them: whereof if any man doubt, he may be informed by this figure. We will imagine O to be the place of the Moon, as seated in the lower Orb; G to be the place of the fixed star, whose distance from the Moon is inquired: E and F two stations and habitations of men dwelling on the earth, whereof we may imagine the one to be in Europe, the other in America: It will be manifest that the inhabitant situate in F will behold the Moon in the point B; and the said fixed star in G: (because as the Optickes teach us, all things are seen in the places opposite to the eye) so that the distance betwixt the Moon and the said star, will be the Arch of the greatest Circle BG of the other side: the inhabitants situate in E, will behold the Moon by the ray EC in C. as likewise the said fixed star G in the point G, by the ray EGLANTINE: so that the distance betwixt the Moon and the fixed star, will be in that station the Arch of the circle CG. Now by the first common Axiom of Euclid, every man must grant that the Arch of BG is greater than CG, the former being the whole, and this the part. Secondly, out of the same ground, we may as easily collect that this distance betwixt the Moon and some other known fixed star is varied proportionally, according to the distances of the places on the earth, because so many places as there are, so many diversity of aspects will arise, being increased or diminished, according to the distances of places on the Terrestrial Globe: This conclusion thus demonstrated, we must proceed to practice in this manner, as is taught by Gemma Frisius: First, it behooveth you to search out by the help of Astronomical Tables, the true motion of the Moon, according to the Longitude, at that time of your observation at some certain place, for whose Meridian the roots of those Tables are calculated. 2. You must know the Degree of Longitude of some fixed star, nigh unto the Ecliptic, either preceding or following the moving of the Moon. 3. You must seek out the Distance of moving of the Moon, and the said star. 4. The distance once had, apply the cross-staff to your sight, and so move the Cross to and fro, till you may behold the Centre of the Moon, at the one end, and the fixed star with the other. So shall you see expressed by the Degrees and Minutes marked on the staff the distance of the Moon and the said star correspondent to the place of your observation: which being noted, set down also the distance betwixt the Moon and the foresaid Star which was first calculated. Then subtract the lesser from the greater, the residue will show the least difference: which being divided by the moving which the Moon maketh in one hour, you shall know the time in which the Moon is or was joined with the first distance of the foresaid star. Then having converted that time into degrees and minutes, the rest will be performed either by addition or substraction of the Product thereof to or from that Meridian: for which the Tables where by you first calculated the motion of the Moon, were appointed and verified. If the distance betwixt the Moon and the fixed Star of your observation be lesser, then must you add the degrees and minutes to the known Latitude, so shall you find the place of your observation to be more Eastward. If it be greater, then subtract the degrees and minutes from the known Longitude, and the place of your observation in this regard will be more Westward. These rules are so far true that the Moon be supposed to be more Westward then the fixed Star: for if otherwise, your working must be clean contrary: to wit, if the distance betwixt the Moon and the fixed Star be lesser, you must subtract the degrees and minutes from the known Longitude: so shall the place of your observation be more Westward: but if it be greater, then must you add the degrees and minutes unto the known Longitude, and the place of your observation shall be sound Eastward. This way, though more difficult, may seem better than all the rest: for as much as an Eclipse of the Moon seldom happens, and a watch, clock, or hourglass cannot so well be preserved, or at least so well observed in so long a voyage: wherea● every night may seem to give occasion to this experiment: if so be the air be freed from clouds, and the Moon show her face above the Horizon. 4 By the observation of the difference in the Suns and Moon's motion, the Longitude of places may be found out. To explain this proposition, we will set down three things. 1 Certain Postulata, or granted Axioms. 2 The example. 3. The manner and practice: The grounds or propositions which we take as granted of all Mathematicians are these. 1 That the motion of the Moon is 48 minutes of an hour slower in 24 hours, or 360 degrees, then that of the Sun. 2 That by observation of the heavens, and other Mathematical helps, an Artificer may know in any place first the Meridian: Secondly the hour of the day: Thirdly the time of the Moons coming to the Meridian. 3 The time of the Moons coming to the Meridian may be known by an Ephemerideses: These things granted, we will suppose for example, that in London the Moon on some set day comes to the Meridian at four of the Clock after Noon: 2▪ That in some part of the West-Indies, the Moon be observed to come to the Meridian the same day at 10 minutes after four. These grounds thus set down, the distance of Longitude of that place Westward from London may be found out. The manner of practice is thus to be wrought by the golden Rule. If the difference of the Suns and Moon's motion be 48 minutes of an hour in 360 degrees, what will it be in 10 minutes? The fourth proportional number will be 75 degrees, the distance of Longitude of the place assigned from London, in West Longitude; from which number the Longitude from London being subtracted, and the remainder from 360, the residue will show the Longitude. If the Moon in the place assigned come sooner to the Meridian, we must count so much in East Latitude. This way I first found in Mr▪ Purchas his relation of Hall's discovery of Groenland, written by William Baffin since this Chapter came under the Press: the expression of which, being as I suppose shorter and easier than in the Author, I do owe for the most part to my worthy Chamber-fellow, Mr. Nathanael Norrington, to whose learned conference, I confess myself to owe some fruits of my labours in this kind, and all the offices of friendship. This manner of invention, for mine own part, I prefer before all the rest, both for certainty and facility and (as it should seem by Baffins' practice) it is more in use amongst Mariners than the former, howsoever less mentioned amongst writers. 14 Thus much for the Invention of the Longitude: the Expression is the imitation of the Longitude on the face of an Artificial Globe or Map; which is directed by these Rules. 1 The place whereof we desire to know the Longitude being brought to the Brazen Meridian, the degrees of the Equatour will show the Longitude. This Rule may easily be explained by these three precepts. First that you must turn round the Globe on his Axletree, till you bring the place whereof seek the Longitude under the brazen Meridian. 2 You must diligently and exactly mark what degree the Meridian cuts in the Equatour. 3. You must number how many degrees that point is distant from the first Meridian, and the number will give you the true Longitude sought after This also m●y be performed without turning of the Globe, if so be any other Meridian in the globe signed out shall pass by the said place. For this Meridian will cut the Equatour in some degree or other, which being numbered▪ as before from the first Meridian, will show the direct Longitude: the like of which we have in the second case. 2 The Meridian running through any place of the Geographical Table, will point and design out in the Equatour the degrees of Longitude. This may easily be taught by the former way performed on the Globe: as for example, if I should inquire the Longitude of Paris the Metropolis of France, in a Geographical Map, I find a Meridian marked out which runs, if not directly through yet very near the said City. This Meridian I trace along to the Southern part, till I find it to meet and cut the Equatour. Then observe I in what degree of the Equatour it makes his intersection, and I find it to be 23 degrees 20 minutes, which is the Longitude of the place. 15 Having spoken of the Longitude, the Latitude comes in the next place to be handled: the Latitude is the Distance of any place from the Equatour, either North or South. What we have spoken of the Longitude must also agree to the Latitude, that it is taken sometimes absolutely and generally, sometimes specially: in the former sense it signifies any distance or space between North and South, or chose from South to North. Amongst the Ancients was the breadth or Latitude held to be about 80 degrees, so that the utmost bound or limit to it Northward was called Thule, which commonly is supposed to be Island. But the latter Navigatours through their diligence have detected so much land that it is found to stretch beyond 81 degrees toward the North, and 45 toward the South, and much farther if we will believe the relation of Ferdinand de Quir, a Spaniard, who boasts a more ample discovery of the South I●dies, than ever before hath been known. But howsoever, the Latitude here define is taken in a more special and stricter sense for the distance of any place from the equinoctial line, be it either toward the North or the South. The bound therefore from which we begin our account of Latitude is the Equatour: but the subject wherein it is measured is the Meridian: so that it is clean opposite to the Longitude, for that was limited by the Meridian, and measured in the Equatour. The Latitude of a place is always equal to the Elevation of the Pole, as we shall show hereafter, and is divided into the Northern and the Southern Latitude, whereof the one is from the Equatour Northward, the other Southward. 16 Concerning the Latitude are to be considered the Invention, and the Expression: the Invention is again twofold, Astronomical or Magnetical. 17 The Astronomical Invention of the Latitude is by observation of the Stars, which is directed by these Propositions. 1 The Meridian Height of the Sun at the time of the Equinoctial subtracted from 90 degrees, will show the true Latitude of the place. The height of the Sun at Noon may be found by the Astrolabe, cross-staff; Quadrant, and many other Astronomical instruments, but in taking the Meridian Altitude, it is very fit and requisite that it be observed divers times one after another with some little space betwixt, to try whether it increaseth or decreaseth; for if it doth increase; then assure yourself it is not full Noon; if it decrease it is past Noon: having thus found out the Meridian Altitude, you must subduct it from 90 degrees, and the residue will be the true Latitude of the place, if so be it be observed at the time of the Equinoctial, when the Sun enters the first point of Aries, or Libra as for example here at Oxford I observe the Meridian height of the Sun about the eleventh of March, and I find it to be about 37 degrees, or thereabout, which I subtract out of 90, the whole Quadrant, and the residue will be 51½, which is the Latitude of the place. But if you would know the Latitude at any other day, or time of the year, then must you proceed in this manner: having taken the height of the Sun at Noon (as before) you must by the Table of Declination learn the true degree of the Sun's declination. 2 If such declination be Northernely, then must you subtract it from the foresaid Altitude or height. But if Southernly, you must add it to the Altitude: and by such addition and subtraction, shall you have the height of the equinoctial above the Horizon. 3 This height of the Equinoctial above your Horizon, being as before subtracted from 90, will be the true Latitude of the place assigned: as for example, the 15 of August I observe the Declination of the Sun to be about 10 Degrees, the Sun being in 2 Degrees of Virgo: I find the Meridian height of the Sun to be 48 degrees or thereabouts▪ Now because the Sun being in Virgo, hath a Northern Declination, I subtract 10, which is the number of the declination, out of 48 the height of the Sun, and there will remain 38, which again taken ●ut of 90, the residue will be about 52, the common received Latitude of the place. 2 The Meridian height of any Star, the Declination subtracted, if it be Northern, or added if it be Southern, being subtracted out of 90, will show at any time of the year the Degrees of Latitude. The former rule serves only for the day; because it is performed by the observation of the Sun, but this latter may be more necessary for Mariners, who now and then are enforced to inquire the Latitude of a place in the night when the Sun shines not: wherefore they must fly unto some known Star, by observation of which they may easily perform the same; according to the rule: which differres nothing at all from that which we speak of the Sun out of the Equinoctial, and therefore need no other exposition than a bare example: let the fixed star you best know, be Arcturus, whose Meridian Altitude you find by your Mathematical instrument to be 59 Degrees, and 30 minutes: then shall you learn by some Table that this Declination Northward is 21 degrees, 30 minutes: now because his declination is Northward, you must subtract it out of his Meridian Altitude, and you shall find the remainder to be 52 Degrees, which is the Latitude for the place: as it is commonly taken, although I confess it might be more exact: being observed here at Oxford, be found rather 51 Degrees and 30 minutes. 18 The Magnetical Invention is performed by the Magnetical Inclinatory Needle. The ground of this Magnetical invention is from the proportion betwixt the magnetical inclinatory Needle, and the Latitude of the Earth: for as we have proved in the 13 Proposition of the 3 Chapter; the Magnetical inclinatory Needle will at every point of Latitude conform itself to certain Angles with the Axle of the Earth proportionally to the Degrees of that Latitude: upon which grounds Dr Ridley hath invented a curious instrument to find out the Latitude for any place assigned, and for this use hath calculated Tables, which we hope will be enlarged by our famous Professor Mr Brigges: for my part, having never seen this instrument, such time as I shall have occasion to acquaint myself with it. 19 The Expression is the imitation of it on the artificial Sphere: which is again either Astronomical or Magnetical. The former is performed by the ordinary Globe according to this rule. 1 The point of any place or City first found in the Globe being brought to the brazen Meridian, will show in the Degrees of the same Meridian the true Latitude of the same place. This may easily be showed in this manner by an example; If I would willingly find out the Latitude of Oxford in the Globe. I first find out the place in the Globe, which having found, I turn the Globe till I have brought the place just under the brazen Meridian: then I note what degree it designs, and that shows me the true Latitude of the place, which I find to be 52, or thereabouts: but if you would find it in a Map or Chart, in which there is no such brazen Meridian, you must take the Parallel of the place, or at least the next unto it, pointed in the same Map: Then note what degree the said Parallel cuts in the first Meridian; for that will show the true Latitude of it by the right Parallel of the place, if not the next; so that by addition, or subtraction, you may easily guess at it. 20 The Magnetical Expression depends from the Application of the Inclinatory Needle to the Terrella. The Magnetical inclinatory needle is said to conform itself in the same manner to the Terrella or Loadstone, being artificially thereunto applied, as it doth to the great Globe of the Earth: so that no doubt is, but an imitation of the Latitude ¶ A Table expressing the proportion of the Magnetical Inclination to the degrees of Latitude, and Elevation of the Pole. Elevat. Poli. Inclination to the Horizon. 1.11. Elevat. Poli. Inclination to the Horizon. 1.11. Elevat. Poli. Inclination to the Horizon. 0.1.11. 1 2 11 15 31 52 26 38 61 79 28 51 2 4 10 13 32 53 46 55 62 80 31 36 3 6 26 55 33 54 53 51 63 80 37 54 4 8 31 23 34 56 3 56 64 81 10 47 5 10 33 41 35 57 13 25 65 81 42 36 6 12 23 50 36 58 21 19 66 82 13 23 7 14 37 53 37 59 27 50 67 82 43 9 8 16 27 52 38 60 32 59 68 83 11 56 9 18 21 50 39 61 36 46 69 83 39 45 10 20 13 47 40 62 39 0 70 84 6 37 11 22 3 45 41 63 39 56 71 84 32 30 12 23 51 46 42 64 39 29 72 84 57 24 13 25 37 52 43 65 37 41 73 85 21 22 14 27 22 4 44 66 34 31 74 85 44 24 15 29 4 23 45 67 30 0 75 86 6 31 16 40 44 53 46 68 24 10 76 86 27 44 17 32 23 34 47 69 17 2 77 86 48 5 18 34 0 27 48 70 8 38 78 87 7 36 19 35 35 35 49 70 58 59 79 87 26 18 20 37 9 0 50 71 48 7 80 87 44 9 21 38 40 42 51 72 36 0 81 88 1 10 22 40 10 41 52 73 22 38 82 88 17 23 23 41 38 58 53 74 8 2 83 88 32 49 24 43 5 37 54 74 52 11 84 88 47 29 25 44 30 26 55 75 35 6 85 89 1 22 26 45 53 43 56 76 16 51 86 89 14 30 27 47 15 25 57 76 57 28 87 89 36 54 ●● ●● ●● ●● ●8 77 ●6 ●● 88 88 ●8 ●● may be expressed on the little earth, or loadstone: for which use, diverse curious instruments have been devised by magnetical Philosophers, to whom I refer my Readers: because I (as I said) have little acquainted myself with the use of such instruments. CHAP. XII. Of the distances of places compared one with another. 1 OF the simple and absolute distinction of distances, we have treated in the former Chapter: we must in the last place handle it comparatively; that is to say, one place compared with another: whereof we are to consider the Invention and Expression. 2 The distance is the measured space betwixt two places: which is, either uniform, or various: uniform is in places different, either in Longitude only, or in Latitude only. 3 Those places differ in Longitude only, which are situate under the same or like Parallels, but diverse Meridian's; or at least under opposite points of the same Meridian. Of place● differing only in Longitude, there may be three cases: For 1. they may be under the same Parallel, as the Island of ●●int Thomas, and Summatra, which lie directly under the Equatour; or Noremberg and Hamberg, which having very near the same Latitude, differ in Longitude, and lie in the same Parallel without the Equatour. 2. They may be under the like Parallels, that is, in points equidistant from the Equatour. As Siene in Egypt, under the Tropic of Cancer; and Beach in the South continent, under the Tropic of Capricorn. 3. They may be under the same Parallel and Meridian, but in opposite points of the said Parallel: such as are the Perioeci, spoken of in the 10. Chapter. 4 Places differing only in Longitude, whose distance is here proposed to be sought out, are seated in the same, or diverse Hemispheres. 5 In the same Hemisphere, when both places have either Eastern or Western Longitude. This again may have two cases; for either the places are under the Equatour, or without it: in both which, the finding out of the distance shall be opened in these Rules. 1 If two places under the Equatour in the same Hemisphere, differ in longitude: let the lesser longitude be subtracted from the greater, and the difference converted into Miles, and the distance will be known. As for example, we will suppose of two places, whose distance is to be sought out, the former to be the Island of Saint Thomas in Africa, the other the Island Summatra in the East Indies, both situate directly under the Equatour; and therefore differing only in Longitude. To express which, in this figure, let the first Meridian from which the Longitude is to be measured, be ABCD: the place where Saint Thomas Island is seated, K: and the place of Summatra, F. Then subtracting AK, the Longitude of Saint Thomas Island, being lesser, out of the Longitude of Summatra A, the residue KE will show the distance in degre●s: which being multiplied by 60, and so converted into Italian-miles, will show how many miles the said places are distant the one from the other. As in this present example, we find the Longitude of Saint Thomas Island to be 32 degrees 20 minutes of Summatra, to be 131 degrees: The lesser sum subducted from the greater; to wit, 32 degrees 20 minutes, out of 131; there will remain 98 degrees 40 minutes: which being again multiplied by 60, will produce 5920 Italian-miles, the true distance betwixt the said places. 2 Of two places in the same Hemisphere, situate without the Equatour; the distance may be known two ways: either by the resolution of the Spherical Triangle, or else by tables of the miles answerable to the degrees of Latitude. The former way is performed in this manner: Let the Triangle of two equal sides FBG in the figure before, be resolved; in which the two equal sides FB, and GB are the compliments of equal Latitudes; to wit, OF, and EGLANTINE. The Angle FBG is the difference of Longitude, which Angle, whether it be a Right Angle, or Oblique Angle, will easily be known, if by letting a perpendicular line BY from B to ay it be parted into two Triangles FBI and IBG: for because those two Triangles according to the grounds of Geometry are equal; the Arch IG in the Triangle IBG being found out, the Arch also IF in the Triangle FBI will also be known: which beingthus demonstrated, we must proceed in this manner, according to the Golden Rule. As the Right angle BIG is to the compliment of the Latitude BG, so is IBG the middle difference of Longitude to IG the middle distance: Pitiscus in his Trigonometry to this adds another manner of demonstration, expressible by the precedent figure: let the perpendicular IB be continued unto K, that BK may make a whole Quadrant. Now will the Triangle IHK have Right Angles at I and K, at I by supposition, at K by his 57 proposition demonstrated in his first book: because, If a greater circle of the Sphere pass by the Poles of a greater cîrcle, it will cut it at right Angles, and chose: wherefore the sides IH and KH must be quadrants: because, as he shows in his 68 proposition of his first book; In a spherical Triangle having more than one Right Angle, the sides subtending those Right Angles are Quadrants: Finally, because the Arches GH and EH, are the compliments of the Arches IG and KE: by the 9 definition of the first book▪ For as much as of any Arch less than a Quadrant, the compliment is that which wants to make it up 90 parts. We may by the help of the 57 proportion of his first book, seek out the compliment of the third side GH; which will be the Arch GI': which will show us the problem which we sought, by reduducing it unto the Table of signs, and Tangents, exactly se● out by our forenamed Author and others. For an example of this, we may take two famous cities of Germany, Noremberg and Hamberg, which without any sensible difference have the same Latitude, but differ in Longitude: For the Longitude of Noremberg is 31 degrees 45 minutes: of Hamberg 32 degrees 30 minutes: the difference of Longitude than is 0 degrees 45 minutes. These things supposed to be known, we will imagine Noremberg to be in F, Hamberg in G▪ and therefore OF, or EGLANTINE will have 49 degrees 23 minutes: FB or GB will have 40 degrees 37 minutes: FBG or A will have 0 degrees 45 minutes: KE 0 degrees 22 ½ minutes: EH 89 degrees 37 ½ minutes: if we work by the Table of Signs, Tangent●, and Secants, the knowledge whereof is required to this Problem. But because the former way may seem difficult to such as are not much acquainted with Trigonometry, some have set down ●n easier way, depending on the use of a Table, wherein i● calculated the number of miles answering to every degree of every Parallel of the Sphere: in which working▪ we ought to be directed by this Rule: If two places without the Equatour differ in longitude only, subtract the lesser number out of the greater, and multiply it by the n●mber of miles answerable to a degree of that Parallel, ●nd the product will give the distance. As for example, if you would know the distance betwixt London and Antwerp, which have in a manner the same Latitude, but differ in Longitude: I find them to differ in Longitude by 6 degrees, which number being multiplied by 37 miles answerable to 51 degrees of Latitude, these will arise to 247 miles, and 54 seconds of a mile. A Table of Miles answerable to one Degree of every several Latitude. 1 2 3 4 5 6 D M S D M S D M S D M S D M S D M S 1 59 59 16 57 41 3 51 26 46 41 41 61 29 5 76 14 31 2 59 58 17 57 23 32 50 53 47 40 55 62 28 10 77 13 30 3 59 55 18 57 4 33 50 19 48 40 9 63 27 14 78 12 28 4 59 51 19 56 4 34 49 45 49 9 22 64 26 18 79 11 27 5 59 4 20 56 23 35 49 9 50 38 34 65 25 21 80 10 25 6 59 40 21 56 1 36 48 32 51 37 46 66 24 24 81 9 23 7 59 33 22 55 38 37 47 55 52 36 56 67 23 27 82 8 21 8 59 25 23 55 14 38 47 17 53 36 7 68 22 29 83 7 19 9 59 16 24 54 49 39 46 38 54 35 6 69 21 30 84 6 16 10 59 5 25 54 23 40 45 58 55 34 25 70 20 31 85 5 14 11 58 54 26 53 6 41 45 17 56 33 33 71 19 32 86 4 11 12 58 41 27 53 28 42 44 35 57 32 41 72 18 32 87 3 8 13 58 2 28 52 59 43 43 53 58 31 48 73 17 33 88 2 5 14 58 13 29 52 29 44 43 10 59 30 54 74 16 32 89 1 3 15 57 57 30 51 58 45 42 26 60 30 0 75 15 32 90 0 0 6 The distance of places differing only in Longitude in divers Hemispheres is found out by this rule. 1 Let the greater longitude be subtracted from the whole circle, and unto the residue added the lesser longitude, there will arise the distance betwixt those places. As for example, Lisbon in Spain hath in East longitude 13 degrees: and Cap de Los Slanos in America, hath in West longitude 334 degrees: to know the distance betwixt those places, you must first subduct 334, which is the greater Longitude out of 360 the whole circle, and there will remain 26 Degrees, to which if we add the East longitude of Lisbon, which is 13 degrees, it will make 39 degrees, which is the true difference of those longitudes: which being multiplied by the Number of miles in the Table going before, answerable to the latitude of the said places (if they differ only in longitude) there will arise the number of miles contained in the Distance. 7 Distant places which differ only in latitude, are such as lie under the same Meridian, but divers Parallels: These are supposed to be either in One, or in Divers latitudes or Hemispheres. 8 In One, when both the places have either North latitude, or both South Latitude: The finding out of which distances depends on these Propositions. 1 If the latitude of each place be towards the same P●le, subtract the lesser from the greater latitude, and the residue convert into miles. The reason may be explained in this Figure: we will imagine OF to be the lesser, EGLANTINE the greater latitude. There will remain an Arch of the Meridian FG: which being multiplied by 60 (being part of a great circle, will make the number of miles answerable, to that distance. For an example we will take two Cities of England, Oxford and York. The latitude Oxford, we take to be 31 degrees 30 minutes: of York 54 degrees 30 minutes. The lesser latitude subtracted from the greater, there will remain three degrees, which being multiplied by 60, will render 180 Italian-miles, the Distance of these two places. 2 If two places in latitude only distant, be situate in divers kinds of latitude, add the latitude of the one to the other, and the whole sum shall be the distance. As for example, in the former Diagram, imagining as in the former case BD to be the Meridian of those distant places, and AC the Equatour, we will suppose the one place to be situate towards the North Pole, as G, the other towards the South, as in H: then as appears by sense, will the distance be the Arch of the Meridian GH, whereof GE, and EH, are parts, whereof it is compounded: wherefore it must needs follow that those parts added together make the whole distance: for example we will take Bellograde in Europe, and the Cape of good hope in Africa, which have near the same longitude, to wit, 48 degrees 30 minutes: but they differ in latitude in such sort, as the former hath of the Northern latitude 44 degrees 30 Minutes; the other of Southern latitude about 35 degrees 30 minutes. These two numbers added together, will make 80 degrees, which being multiplied by 60 will produce 4800 miles the distance of those places. 9 Hitherto of the distances of places which are Uniform, that is to say, of such as differ either only in longitude, or only in latitude: we are next to consider of such distances as are various, wherein the places differ both in longitude and latitude. 10 The Invention of such a distance, may be performed two ways, either Abstractively by the resolution of Triangles, or else Mechanically by instruments. The former again may be two ways, either by the Right-line Triangle, or by the Spherical: The invention of the distance by the Rigt-line Triangle depends on these following Propositions declaring two ways of invention. 11 The first is by a Rectangle Triangle barely considered by itself, according to this Theorem. 1 The square Root of the number made of the differences of longitude and latitude of two places distant, will show the distance of those places. The ground of this Proposition is taken from the 27 Proposition of the first book of Euclid: where it is demonstrated that the square of the Hypotenusa, or greatest side of a Rectangle Triangle is equal to the two squares made of the two other sides: which being well understood, will lend an easy light to this proposition. To perform which we must first take the difference of longitude, which is imagined to make one side of this Triangle. Then we must observe also the difference of latitude, which is supposed to make another side. Then are we sure by the former Proposition of Euclid that the squares of these two sides, are equal to the square of the Hypotenus●, or third side; which is to be sought out, and expresses the distance betwixt those places: wherefore we must first multiply these two sides in themselves, whence they will become squares. 2. We must add them together. 3 We must out of the total extract the quadrat root, which will show the distance: as suppose according to this Figure, two Cities distant and differing both in longitude and latitude: whereof the one shall have in longitude 21 degrees, in latitude 58: the other is supposed to have in longitude 26 degrees, in latitude 52. Here first I subtract the less longitude out of the greater, to wit, 21 out of 26, and the residue will be 5, which I suppose to be one side of the Rectangle Triangle. Then likewise I subtract the less latitude as 52 out of 58, the residue will be 6, which I make the other side of my Triangle, which done, I multiply 6 in itself, and it makes 36, which is the square of one side: Then I multiply 5 in itself, and the product will be 25, the square on the other side. These two squares added together by the foresaid Proposition must be equal to the square of the Hypoteneus▪ orthird side 61, whereof the square root being extracted, will show the side itself, which will be 7 7/25 which is the distance: If any man desire to know this distance according to miles, he must reduce the degrees of longitude and latitude into miles according to our former rules, before he begin to work: because (as we have showed) the degrees of longitude being measured in the Parallels are not always equal, the Parallels being somewhere greater, somewhere lesser. This way must needs be more exact, in that a Mile is a smaller part than a Degree, and (as Pitiscus notes) the Fractions which fall out in extraction of roots can hardly be reduced to any proportion. Nevertheless this way of finding out the distance by a Right-line Triangle, howsoever common and received, is very unperfect and subject to great error, especially in places far distant: for as much as it supposeth the Meridian's with the Parallels on the Globe to make true squares, whereas indeed all the Meridian's meet in the pole, and so by consequence cannot make true squares: But yet this error is far less in a lesser distance; because in a small space of earth, the roundness and convexity of the Earth is insensible, or at least of very small importance: so that this way cannot be altogether unuseful. 12 Another is found out more exact than the former by the tables of Signs, Tangents, and Secants. This is performed by finding out the numbers: whereof the former is called Inuentum primum, or the first found number. The second Inuentum secundum, or the second found number. The working of which Problem depends on these rules. 1 Multiply the Right Sign of the difference of the longitude into the sum of the compliment of the lesser latitude, and divide the product of that multiplication by the total sum, & then by the rules of Signs and Tangents the Arch of that Quotient found out will give the first found number. 2 Multiply the right sign of the lesser latitude by the total sign, and having divided the product thereof by the sign of the compliment of the first number, subtract the Arch of that quotient out of the greater latitude which gives the second found number. 3 Then multiply the sign of the compliment of the first found number into the sign of the compliment of the second found number, and having divided the product by the Totall Sign, Let the Arch of the quotient be sought out by the Tables, which Arch subtracted out of the whole quadrant, will give the degrees of a distance in a great circle. To express the practice and manner of working according to our former Rules, we will suppose the two cities, whose distance is here sought out to be jerusalem and Norimberge in Germany. jerusalem hath in longitude 66. degrees. 0 min. and in latitude 31 degrees, 40. minutes. Again Norimberge hath in longitude 28. degrees. 20. minutes, and in latitude 49 deg. 40. min. The difference of their longitude is 37. deg. 40. minutes. The right sign whereof is 36664: (for here we make 60000 to be the total sign, rejecting the two last figures on the right hand in the tables of Regiomontanus.) Now you must multiply 36664: into the sign of the Compliment of the lesser latitude, which is 51067: the product of which two signs being multiplied the one by the other, there will arise 1872320488: which if you divide by the total sign 60000, the quotient will give you 31205, whose Arch is 31 deg. 20 min. and this must be your first found Number. For the finding of the second Number, you must proceed in this manners: Multiply the right sign of the lesser latitude, which is 31498 by the total sign 60000, and the product will be 1889880000: which sum, if we divide by the sign of the Compliment of the first-found Number, which is 51249, we shall find in the quotient 36876; the Arch whereof is 37 degrees, 55 min: which Arch subtracted out of the greater latitude, there will remain 11 degrees, 29 min: and this is our second-found Number. These things thus supposed to be found out, we must multiply the foresaid sign of the Compliment of the first-found Number, which is 58798, and the product will arise to 3013338702, the Arch whereof is 56 deg. 50 min: which being subtracted out of the whole quadrant, viz: 90 degrees, there will remain 33 degrees, 10 min: of the greater circle. These 33 degrees if we multiply by 60, there will arise 1980 miles, whereunto if we find the 10 miles answerable to the 10 min. we shall find the distance betwixt these places to be 1990 Italian-miles. This example is used by Appian, and wrought according to his own Tables, and farther explained by our countryman Blundevill in his Exercises. The same way of working hath been delivered by Clavius, junctinus, and others, although not according to the same Tables. This was of measuring the distance by the Signs and Tangents according to these Authors, may be warranted more exact than the other, because it admits of smaller parts in the calculation; yet will it come far short of truth. 10 Another way of finding out the Distances of places, differing both in longitude & latitude, is by the Resolution of a Spherical triangle. This way of all the rest must needs be most certain: for as much as this kind of triangle best expresseth the sections of the Globe. The method of which working I find nowhere better taught then in Pitiscus his Trigonometry: of whose ingenious industry notwithstanding little use can be made, except the Learner first acquaint himself with his principles, because in his Geographical Problems, he briefly refers his Reader to his former grounds and Axioms, accurately demonstrated in his former books: For mine own part it might perhaps seem as absurd in this Treatise, to intermix all his preparatory demonstrations, being merely Geometrical, and without the limits of my subject, as by leaving out so necessary a way to mangle my discourse. Wherefore intending a middle way, I will (Godwilling) in such sort set down these propositions, that I may give some light to this excellent invention, and refer my Reader to Pitiscus his Axioms for farther Demonstration. 14 The Distances proposed to be measured by Spherical triangles, admit of two cases: 1 When two places are so situate, that the one is under the Equatour, the other without. Secondly, when both are without the Equatour. 15 The former again is threefold: For either the difference of longitude betwixt those places is Equal to a quadrant, or Less, or Greater. The several ways of invention on shall be directed by these Rules. 1 If the Difference of longitude be Equal to a quadrant, the distance will also be a quadrant. As for example in this present figure we will imagine the circle ABCD to be the first Meridian: the places whose distance is sought out A and G: whose Distance AGNOSTUS will be a quadrant. For A will be a pole of a Greater Circle BGD, by the 56 prop. of the 1 of Pitiscus: wherefore all the Arches drawn from thence to BGD will be quadrants by the same proposition. For a more familiar instance we will take the Island Sumatra, which hath in longitude 131 degrees, but no latitude, being sited under the Equatour: and the city Buda the Metropolis of Hungary, which hath in longitude 41 degrees, in latitude 47 degrees; The difference of longitude is 90 degrees; for 41 being subducted out of 131, there will remain 90, wherefore the distance betwixt those places will be 90, which being multiplied by 60, will produce 5400 Italian-miles. 2 If the difference of longitude be less than a quadrant as OF: the Triangle AEF here is to be resolved into his parts, according to the 4th Axiom of Pitiscus. As for example the places, whose longitude is here sought out, shall be A and F; The Triangle here to be known is AEF; whose Resolution depends on our Authors 4th Axiom. For the Difference of longitude is ABF; because the measure of a Spherical Triangle being taken in a great circle, is an Arch of a greater circle, described from the Angular point, and comprehended betwixt the two legs of the Triangle so far as a quadrant, as is taught in the 58 proposition of his first Book. For a more special instance we will take two places; whereof the one shall be the Island of S. Thomas before mentioned, which hath in longitude 32 degrees and 20 minutes. The other Amsterdam in Holland, which hath in longitude 26 degrees, 30 minutes. The former we imagine in A; the later in F. The Difference of longitude ABF will be 5 degrees, 50 min: Then the distance sought out must be OF: so working according to the fourth Axiom of Pitiscus, we shall find the Arch OF, which is the distance, to be 54 degrees, 19 minutes. 3 If the Difference of longitude be greater than a quadrant, as of the two places of F and C, the Triangle to be resolved will be FCE, being a Rectangle at E. Here because the Triangle FCE hath his two sides FC, and EC, greater than quadrants, instead of it you may work on the Triangle AEF, adjoined to the Triangle FEC: and the whole work will be dispatched: for by the resolution of the Triangle AEF, you shall find out the Arch FG, which being added to the quadrant CG, there will be produced the Arch FC, which is to be ●ought out. As for example, we will imagine Heidelberge as it were placed at F, to have in longitude 30 degrees, 45 minutes, in latitude 49 degrees 35 min: Then we will suppose Summatra, as placed at C, to have in longitude 131 degrees, but no latitude: The difference of longitude will be EC, of 100 degrees, 15 minutes: and the compliment A 79 degrees, 45 minutes. Then working according to the Rules of Trigonometry, we shall find the sign of the Arch FC, to be 6 degrees, 37 ½ minutes; which being added to FC, being 90 degrees, will produce 96 degrees, 37 ½ minutes, to which Arch there will answer 1449 German-miles. 16 The second Case is, when both places are situate without the Equatour: This is again twofold: For either the two places are understood to be situate towards the same Pole, or else one place toward the Northern, the other towards the Southern Pole. Both which Cases shall be taught in these Rules. 1 If both places whose distance is sought, be situate towards the same Pole, there will arise a Triangle, whose sides and Angles will be known by the fourth Axiom of Pitiscus in Trigonometry the fourth Book. As for example, in this present figure, let the two places given be FG, the Triangle to be known, will be FBG, whose acute Angle will be at B. Let the places given be as FH; the Triangle to be resolved & known will be FBH, having a right Angle at H. Finally, if the places suppos●ed to be given, are as FI, the Triangle to be known will be FBI, with an obtuse Angle at I. 2 If the one place be situated towards the North-pole, and the other towards the South-pole, there will arise a Triangle, whereof the one side about the Angle which is given, will be greater than a quadrant. As in the former figure, let the places given be as G and K, also H and K, also I and K: There will still fall out a Triangle▪ whose one side containing the Angle given, will be greater than a quadrant, as BK: wherefore for the side BK, you must take his compliment to the Semicircle BF, that is, for the Triangle GBK, you must work by the Triangle GBF: and instead of the Triangle HBK, you must take the Triangle HBF: and for the Triangle IBK, you must work by the Triangle IBF, according to the fourth Axiom of the fourth book of Pitiscus, to which I had rather refer my Reader, then intermix our Geographical discourse with handling the Principles of Geometry, which here are to be supposed so many precedent propositions; which, expressed as they ought, would transcend the bounds of my intended journey. 17 Of the Astractive way of finding out the Distance of places, we have spoken: The Mechanical depends on the use of Instruments and Mechanical operation, whereof we will show one way in this Theorem. 1 By the working with a Semicircle, the Distance of two places may be found out. This invention by Mr Blundevill, seems to be ascribed to Edward Wright, yet hath it been taken up of foreign Writers as their own, and used in their Charts and Maps. The manner of operation is thus: First, let there be drawn a semicircle upon a right Diameter signed out, will be the letters ABCD, whereof D shall be the centre, as you find it deciphered in this present figure. The greater this Semicircle be made, so much the more easy will be the operation; because the degrees will be larger. Then this Semicircle being drawn, and accordingly divided, imagine that by the help of it, you desire to find out the distance betwixt London and jerusalem, which cities are known to differ both in longitude and latitude. Now, that the true distance betwixt these two places may be found out, you must first subtract the lesser longitude out of the greater, so shall you find the Difference of their longitudes, which is 47 degrees. Then reckon that Difference upon the Semicircle, beginning at A, and so proceed to B; and at the end of that Difference, make a mark with the letter E, into which point by your Ruler, let a right line be drawn from D the centre of the Semicircle. This being in this sort performed, let the lesser latitude be sought out, which is 32 degrees in the foresaid Semicircle, beginning your account from the point E, and so proceeding towards B, and at the end of the lesser latitude, let another point be marked out with the letter G: from which point let there be drawn a perpendicular, which may fall with right Angles upon the former line, drawn from D to E; and where it chanceth to fall, there mark out a point with the letter H: This being performed, let the greater latitude, which is 51 degrees, 32 minutes, be sought out in the Semicircle, beginning to reckon from A towards B, and at the end of that latitude, set down another point, signed out by the letter I: from whence let there be drawn another perpendicular line, that may fall with right Angles upon the Diameter AC, and here mark out a point with the letter K: This done, take with your Compass the distance betwixt K and H; which distance you must set down upon the Diameter AC, placing the one foot of your compass upon K, and the other towards the centre D, and there mark out a point with the letter L: Then with your compass take the shorter perpendicular line GH, and apply that wideness upon the longer perpendicular line IK, placing the one foot of your compass at ay, which is the bounds of the great latitude, and extend the other towards K, and there make a point at M. Then with your compass take the distance betwixt L and M, and apply the same to the semicircle, placing the one foot of your compass in A, and the other towards B, and there mark out a point with the letter N. Now the number of degrees comprehended betwixt A and N, will express the true distance of the two places, which will be found to be 39▪ degrees: which being multiplied by 60, and so converted into miles according to our former Rules, will produce 2340, which is the distance of the said places. 17 The expression of the Distance of two places may be performed either by the Globe or Map according to these Rules. 1 The distance betwixt two places in the Globe, being observed by the quadrant of Altitude, and applied to the degrees of the Equatour, or any great circle, will show how many miles such places are distant. The practice hereof is very easy, as shall be taught in this example: we will for instance take Toledo in the midst of Spain, and the Cape of Good Hope in the South Promontory of all Africa: The space taken by a quadrant of Altitude, or any thread applied to the Equatour, will be found to be about 82 degrees, which being multiplied by 60, and so converted into miles, will render 4920, the true distance betwixt these two places. 2 The distance betwixt any two places in the Chart, observed by a compass, and applied to the degrees of a greater Circle, will show how many miles such places are distant one from the other. For an example, we will take the city Seville on the Southmost part of Spain, and Bilbao on the North-side: the space betwixt those places being taken with a thread or a compass, and applied to one of the greater Circles, will contain about 6 degrees; which being multiplied by 60, and so converted into Italian-miles, will produce 360: and so many miles those Cities are to be esteemed distant the one from the other. The end of the first Book. GEOGRAPHIE THE SECOND BOOK. CONTAINING the general Topical part thereof, By NATHANAEL CARPENTER, Fellow of Exeter College in Oxford. GENES. 1. vers. 10. And God called the Dry-land, Earth; and the gathering together of the waters called the Seas: and God saw that it was good. OXFORD, Printed by john Lichfield, for Henry Cripps, and are to be sold by Henry curtain. Anno Domini, M. DC. XXXV. TO THE RIGHT HONOURABLE PHILIP, EARL OF MOUNTGOMERIE etc. Knight of the most Noble order of the Garter, and Steward of the famous University of Oxford. Right Honourable, THis Geographical Treatise consisting of two parts, was in the very birth in such sort consecrated to your inestimable Brother, as notwithstanding it so far reserved itself to await your Honour's favour, that Both may seem, as to share a part, so to challenge the whole in my poor Industry. The Soul of man which some Philosophers imagine, to be all in all, & all in every part, seems to me no where better resembled then in your Generous Fraternity; wherein the Soul of Heroical Magnificence, though Individed in itself, so entirely communicates herself to either, that both may seem at once to enjoy her presence while neither want. If this my bold attempt in presenting to your Honour's hands these unworthy labours, without any former reference, might be interpreted intrusion, it were enough for Ingenuity to pretend, that your generous love unto our poor College and the respective duty wherein the College always stands obliged unto your Honour, commands my pen beyond manners or ability. Your affection to our house, could no way express itself ampler than by trusting our custody, with the charge of your choicest jewel: R. Ld. D. A Gentleman of that towardly wit and sweet disposition, that Learning and Morality commonly reputed the daughters of time, seem in him scarce beholding to years, and to challenge a precedency before experience; in so much that our ancient Mother marked out with all the Characters of age and declining weakness, cherishing in her bosom this young darling, seems to resume her youthful habit, and triumph over Time and Ruins. This happiness amongst divers others vouchsafed by your Honour to the place, for whose good opinion the best part of mine endeavours stand engaged, hath encouraged my hopes to promise me your indulgent Acceptance of this slender piece, long since intended and devoted, as myself, unto your service: In which confidence, fearing any longer to trespass on your serious and high employments indebted to your King and Country, I humbly rest Your Honours in all duty and service to be commanded NATHANAEL CARPENTER. A TABLE OF THE SEVERAL Contents of the second Book of Geography, according to the special Theorem. CHAP. I. Of Topography and the Nature of a place. 1 THe Terrestrial Sphere is everywhere habitable. pag. 4 2 All places of the Earth have suffered manifold mutation and changes, as well in name as nature. pag. 6 3 Places having long continued without habitation, are seldom so healthy and fit for dwelling, as those which have been in habited. 11 CHAP. II. Of the general Adjuncts of places. 1 The manner how to measure the magnitude of a Region by the Diameter, both according to breadth and length. 15 2 Of the measuring of a Country by the circuit of it. 17 3 The Measuring of a Country by the circuit is deceitful, and subject to great error. 17 4 Those Regions are more exactly measured which partake of a plain surface. 19 5 How Countries are bounded. 20 6 Natural bounds are more certain than Artificial. ibid. 7 Equal bounds contain not always equal Regions. 21 8 Of the quality of a Region. ibid. 9 Special places are endowed with special Tempers and dispositions. 21 10 Of the magnetical affections of a place, as Variation and Declination. 26 11 The magnetical variation is of no use for the first finding out of the longitude: yet may it serve to good purpose for the recognition of a place before discovered. 27 12 The declination of a place being known, the latitude may be found, yet not without some error. 29 13 Of the external Adjuncts of the Air belonging to a place. ibid. 14 The disposition of the Air Adjacent to a place depends chiefly on the Temperament of the soil. 30 CHAP. III. Of the Adjuncts of a place in respect of the heavens. 1 Places according to their divers situation in regard of the Heavens are diversely affected in quality and constitution. 34 2 Of the division of the Earth into the North and South Hemispheres. 38 3 Northern and Southern places alike situate generally enjoy a like disposition. 39 4 The Northern Hemisphere is the masculine, the southern the feminine part of the Earth. 40 5 Of the divers sections of the Hemispheres and the several qualities belonging to them. 43 6 Of the East and West Hemispheres. 51 7 The Eastern Hemisphere is happier than the other. 52 8 The difference of the East and West cannot work any difference in two places, by any diversity of the heavens. 53 9 Of the subdivision of the Eastern and Western Hemispheres. 54 10 Places situate towards the East in the same latitude are better than those places towards the West. ibid. CHAP. IU. Of the manner of Expression and Description of Regions. 1 Of the finding out of the Angle of position by some dioptricke Instrument at two or more stations. 57 2 At one station by optical observation to find out the situation of one place in respect of the other. 59 3 Of the manner of translation of Regions into the Chart. 61 4 To set down the Meridian's and Parallels in a particular Chart. 62 5 How to set down Cities, Castles, Mountains, Rivers, etc. in the Chart. 64 6 Of the fabric of the scale of miles in the Chart. 65 7 The use of the scale of miles set down in the Chart. ibid. CHAP. V. Of Hydrography, and the absolute adjuncts of the Sea; of the figure and quality. 1 Although the whole body of the water be spherical, yet it is probable, that the parts of it incline to a conical figure. 70 2 The water of the sea is salt, not by Nature but by Accident. 75 3 Seas absolutely salt, are never frozen. 79 4 The Water of the sea is thicker than the other Water. 80 CHAP. VI Of the motions of the sea. 1 Of the ebbing and flowing of the sea and the causes thereof. 82 2 All s●a● do not ebb and flow alike, nor the same at all times. 92 3 It is probable that the sea is carried somewhere from East to West, and somewhere from North to South, & chose. 98 4 Of the violent motion of the sea caused by winds. 101 5 To some certain places at certain times belong certain winds. 102 6 The violence of the winds makes the sea sometimes in some places transcend his ordinary bounds. 103 CHAP. VII. Of the Depth, Situation, and Termination of the sea▪ 1 The ordinary depth of the sea is commonly answerable to the ordinary height of the main land above the water: and the Whirlpools & extraordinary depths, answer to the height of the mountains above the ordinary height of the Earth. 104 2 The superficies of the sea is somewhere higher than the superficies of the Earth: somewhere lower. 109 3 The sea in respect of the Earth is higher in one place then another. 111 4 The Water is so divided from the dry-land, that the quantity of water is greater in the Southern Hemisphere, of land in the Northern. 115 5 The whole Globe of the Earth is environed round with sea betwixt East and West. 116 6 It is probable that the Earth is enuirnoed round with water from North to South: Of the Northwest passage, 117 CHAP. VIII. OfSea Traffic and Merchandise. 1 Navigation first taught by Almighty God, was afterwards seconded by the industry of famous men in all ages. 132 2 Navigation is very necessary as well for the increase of knowledge as riches. 135 CHAP. IX. Of Pedography, Rivers, Lakes, and Fountains in the Earth. 1 All Rivers have their original from the sea the mother of rivers. 142 2 All Rivers and Fountains were not from the beginning. 155 3 Many rivers are for a great space of land swallowed up of the Earth: whereof some after a certain distance, rise again. 156 4 Rivers for the most part rise out of great mountains, and at last by divers or one Inlet are disburdened into the sea. 157 5 Divers Fountains are endowed with divers admirable virtues and operations. 159 6 Places near great Rivers and Lakes, are most commodious for Habitation. 162 7 Of Lakes and their causes. 162 8 It is probable that some Lakes have some secret intercourse with the sea under ground. 163 CHAP. X. Of Mountains, Valleys, plaine-Regions, woody and champion Countries. 1 Mountains, Valleys, and Plains, were created in the beginning, and few made by the violence of the Deluge. 165 2 The perpendicular height of the highest mountains seldom exceeds 10 furlongs. 169 3 The ordinary height of the land above the sea in divers places is more than the height of the highest mountains above the ordinary face of the Earth. 171 4 Mountains Countries are commonly colder than plain. 172 5 Mountains since the beginning of the world have still decreased in their quantity, and so will unto the end, 174 6 Of Woods and their nature. 178 7 Woods are not so frequent or great as in ancient times. 179 8 Places moderately situate towards the North or South-pole, abound more in woods then near the Equatour. 180 CHAP. XI. Of Lands and Continents. 1 It is probable that Lands were not from the first beginning, but were afterwards made by violence of the water. 184 2 Peninsula's by violence of the sea fretting through the Isthmus, have oftentimes turned into Lands, and chose: Peninsalas by diminution of the sea made of Lands. 189 CHAP. XII. Of Inundations and Earthquakes. 1 No universal Inundation of the Earth can be natural: the other may depend from natural causes. 193 2 Particular alterations have happened to the bonds of Countries by particular Inundations. 195 3 Certain Regions by reason of great Rivers are subject to certain anniversary Inundations. 197 4 Regions extreme cold or extreme hot, are not so subject to Earthquakes as places of a middle temper. 201 5 Hollow and spongy places are more subject to Earthquakes then solid and compacted Soils. 202 6 Lands are more often troubled with earthquakes then the continent. 203 CHAP. XIII. Of the Original of Inhabitants. 1 All Nations had their first original from one stock, whence afterwards they became divided. 206 2 The first inhabitants of the Earth were planted in Paradise and thence translated to the places adjoining. 208 3 The first plantation of Inhabitants immediately after the Deluge began in the East. 213 CHAP. XIV. Of the disposition of Inhabitants in respect of the site. 1 The people of the Northern Hemisphere, as well in Riches, and Magnificence, as valour, science, and civil government, far surpass the people of the south Hemisphere. 221 2 The extreme Inhabitants toward the pole, are in complexion hot and moist: Those towards the Equatour, cold and dry, those of the middle partaking of a middle temper. 226 3 The extreme Inhabitants towards the poles are naturally inclined to Mechanical works and martial endeavours; the extreme towards the Equatour, to works of Religion and Contemplation: The middle to laws and civility. 232 4 The people of the extreme Regions towards the poles in Martial prowess have commonly proved stronger than those nearer the Equatour: but the middle people more provident then either in the establishment and preservation of commonwealths. 236 5 The extreme Regions, in Manners, Actions, and Customs, are clean opposite the one to the other: The middle partake a mixture of both. 239 6 The people of the Eastern Hemisphere in science, Religion, Civility, and Magnificence, and almost in every thing else, are far superior to the Inhabitants of the Western. 250 7 The Western people have been observed to be more happy, and able in Martial discipline; the Eastern in witty contemplation and contemplative sciences. 252 8 The Eastern part of the Western Hemisphere was peopled before the Western. 255 CHAP. XV. Of the Diversity of dispositions in regard of the Soil. 1 Mountaine-people are for the most part more stout, warlike, and generous, than those of plain Countries, yet less tractable to government. 256 2 Windy Regions produce men of wild and instable dispositions: But quiet Regions, more constant and courteous. 273 CHAP. XVI. Of the dispositions of Inhabitants, according to their original and education. 1 Colonies translated from one Region into another far remote retain a long time their first disposition, though by little & little, they decline and suffer alteration. 278 2 The mixture of Colonies begets the same Nation a greater disparity and variety of the Nations amongst themselves. 278 3 Education hath a great force in the alteration of Natural dispositions: yet so as by accident remitted, they soon return to their proper Temper. 4 By Discipline, Nations become more Wise and Politic in the preservation of states, yet less stout and courageous. 283 The Analysis of the second Book. General, which of a place generally taken, without any special division handles the Adjuncts and proprieties: these agree to a place in respect of the Earth itself: which are Internal or external: Common or Magnetical, whereof Chapter 2. Heaven's: which are General or Special. Chapt. 3. Expression and Manner of Description of Regions, aswell in the finding out the Angle of position, as Translation of places formerly found out into the Globe or Chart. Chap. 4. Special, which contains the distinction of a place into Sea: whose description is called Hydrography, in which we are to consider the Adjuncts of the Sea, which are either Internal, which are inbred in the Nature of the Sea; which again are either Absolute, such as agree to the Sea without any comparison of it with the Land: Here we observe in the water of the Sea 1 The Figure, and Quality. Chap. 5. 2 The Motion, Natural and Violent. Chap. 6. Comparative, which concern the Depth, Situation, and Termination of the Sea. Chap. 7. external, which concern Sea-Trafficke and Merchandise. Chap. 8. Land, which we term Pedography, whose Accidents are either Natural, which are again divided into Perpetual, such as ordinarily agree to the earth: these again are either Absolute, wherein we have no respect unto the Sea: Here we consider the Nature 1 Of rivers, fountains, and lake●. Chap. 9 2 Of mountains, vallie●, and plaine-Regions, woody, and champion Countries. Chap. 10. Comparative wherein we consider the Termination of the Sea with the Land. Chap. 11. Casual, which seldom fall out, such as are Inundations and Earthquakes. Chap. 12. Civil, which concerns the Inhabitants of any place, in whom we consider the Original or offspring. Chap. 13. Disposition which is varied, either accor●●●● 〈…〉 1 Site in respect of the Heavens. Chap. 14. 2 Soil. Chap. 15. GEOGRAPHIE: THE SECOND BOOK. CHAP. I. Of topography and the nature of a place. IN the former Treatise, by God's assistance, we have treated of the Spherical part of Geography: It will in the second place seem convenient to speak of the Topical part of it. 2 The Topical part teacheth the description of the Terrestrial Globe, so far forth as it is divided into places. The nature of topography, whereof we are to treat in this second part, is discovered unto us, not only in the name, which promiseth a description of places, but also in the differences set down by Ptolemy himself, betwixt the Spherical and Topical part: the former of which he calls Geography, and latter topography; whereof we have spoken at large in the first Chapter of our former book. Here only we will note this one distinction, that T●●ograhie may be t●ken either more generally, or specially: Generally we may take it so far forth, as it discovers unto us either the whole world and all his parts, or at least some great and principal parts; such as is an Empire, Region, Kingdom, or such like. More specially and particularly, it hath usually been taken for the description of a very small place, whose situation in respect of the heavens is not noted, but of the parts one to the other: such as are Cities, Burrowes, Townes, Castles, Lakes, and Rivers. The former (whereat we chiefly aim) cannot well be performed without the use of the Spherical part: That latter we will more sparingly touch, being an infinite task in the whole earth to descend to all particulars which come in our way: yet shall we not altogether omit or neglect such circumstances in their due places, so far forth as we can; leaving the rest to such Topographers, who spend their stock in the description of some particular place or Region: whereof this our Age hath produced many deserving high commendations. This Science was anciently adorned by Homer, An●●imander, Milesius, Haecataeus, Democritus, Eudoxius, Dicaearchus, Euphorus, as we find in Straboes' first book: to which afterward succeed, Eratosthenes, Polybius, Possidonius, and diverse others. Which part requires little or small knowledge in the Sciences Mathematical, but challengeth more affinity with the Physical and Political part of Philosophy; and therefore is more subject to popular understanding then the former, and may without it, afford some profit to the Reader. 3 The Topical part is either general, or special: The general is that which handles the general Adjuncts of a place. 4 A place is a superficial space of the Terrestrial Globe, fitted for habitation. To the constitution of a place (as it is here Topographically taken) there ought to be a concurrence of two things, which we may call Matter and Form. The Matter is the space contained; or superficial platform of the earth whereon we dwell. The form is the capability or aptness of it for habitation; both which concurring together are conceived to make a place, such as we here Topographically understand: for here we understand not a place Physically, for the receptacle of a natural body; in which sense the Heavens and all the elements are said to have their natural places: Neither yet Geometrically for a plain whereon a line or figure may be drawn: but Topographically for the upper face of the earth whereon people or other living creatures may inhabit. This place as appears by reason and holy Scriptures was more ancient than habitation. For whereas in the first Mass the earth was inveloped with waters on every side, affording no place for dwelling; Almighty God is said afterwards to have separated and parted the waters from the dry land, making the one a Receptacle for Fishes, and such creatures of the deep, the other for a dwelling place for mankind, and such creatures as breath upon the land: yet hath he so provided in his divine wisdom, that neither the Inhabitants of the land can well want the Sea, nor the living creatures in the Sea want the land. The one appears in that we are enforced to make use of the sea, not only for ●ood and nourishment, whereof a great part consisteth of fish: but also for our Traffic and commerce with foreign Nations, which is better effected by Sea then Land-voyages. The latter is as easily showed, in that the fishes of the Sea derive not only their composition, but also their proper nourishment from the land: whereof we shall have more occasion to speak hereafter. Now we are moreover to consider, that a place may be taken in a double sense: first more largely for any place wherein a creature may live for longer or shorter time. Secondly, more strictly for such a space of earth, whereon mankind may conveniently reside or dwell. The former comprehends not only the land, but also the water; for experience shows, that men in ships may for a time reside and dwell on the back of the main Ocean. But the latter betokening a continuance of habitation, is only agreeable to the land: Which sense howbeit it be more consonant to the common use of speech, yet for method sake, we are enforced to use the former: understanding by habitation, not only a place of convenient residence, but any other whereon a creature for a time may breathe and live. 1 The Terrestrial Sphere is everywhere habitable. It was an ancient opinion (as we have formerly touched) that the earth was not everywhere habitable: namely, in the Intemperate Zones, whereof the one was placed in the middle of the earth, the other at the ends: the former was thought not habitable by reason of the extremity of heat; because the Sunbeams there fall perpendicularly, and so make a greater reflection; The other for extremity of cold, by reason of the obliquity of the Sunbeams, causing little or no reflection: whence a second cause seems to be drawn from the extreme drought of those places, which seems most opposite to man's temper, requiring a reasonable degree of moisture. But notwithstanding these reasons of the ancients, it must needs be confessed as an undoubted truth, confirmed by experience of many N●uigatours, that those Regions by them imagined unfit for habitation, are not only habitable, but in many places very populous. Neither want there many reasons found out by latter writers, to mitigate the rigour of this opinion: some whereof we have already touched in our former treatise. First, whereas they urge the places under the Equinoctial to be unhabitable by reason of intemperate heat; we may easily answer, that the days and nights are then always equal, containing not above 12 hours, so that the space of either being shorter, the cold of the night may well assuage the extreme heat of the day. Another reason is ordinarily taken from the extraordinarily high mountains, commonly placed under the Equinoctial, which approaching nearer the middle Region of the air, must of necessity partake some what more of cold: which daily experience can witness, in that their top ● are covered with snow even in the depth of Summer. Thirdly, the nearness of the main Ocean to a great part of this Region, is a great cause of this cold temper, because water is found to be by nature cold. Fourthly, the set and certain winds by nature ordained to blow in the hottest times of the year, may add much to temperature. Fiftly, the extraordinary Rains and showers which those places suffer, which are under the Line, especially when the Sun is vertical, are a great cause of the asswaging of the heat of the Sun. Lastly, the custom of the Inhabitants being from their cradles enured to no other quality or disposition of the air, will take away much from our admiration. On the other side no small reasons may be showed, why, the Regions lying near or under the Pole should not be so extremely cold, but that they may admit of habitation. First, because the Sun being for six months together above their Horizon, must needs impress into the Air more heat than otherwise it would do. Besides, the thickness incorporated (as it were) with heat, must needs receive into it more degrees of it then a thinner and more refined air, because the intention of the quality most commonly supposeth the condensation or thickening of the subject wherein it is. But no greater reason can be showed in this point then the custom of the Northern inhabitants, exposed from their infancy to no other temperament. If we should ask a reason why we unmask our faces against the encounter of the greatest cold, being a soft and tender part, not daring to uncover our other parts, what reason can a man invent but custom? If any should ask why barbarous people living in far colder climates than this of ours, go altogether naked, whereas the cold is mother of many diseases amongst us who go always clothed; only use and custom can yield an answer. These reasons make it probable enough, that no place of the whole world is by nature made not habitable. Now that it is not only inhabitable by nature, but also for the most part truly inhabited, will appear as easily, if we trust the testimony of Navigatours which have discovered few or no Regions wanting some inhabitants. But that this proposition may be more distinctly understood, we must know that the whole world is divided into Sea and Land: for the Sea we may call it habitable in that large sense before mentioned; to wit, that on it every where men in ships may breathe and live; which is plain out of experience of Navigatours, who have sailed round about the Earth from East to West, and have entered far towards the North and South: where at least some times of the year, or other they might find the way passable: For the land which is here principally understood, we must note that it may be considered two ways; either for every little quillet or parcel of land contaned in the superficies of the Earth; or else for a certain Region of some indifferent greatness. In the former sense, it were too much to affirm every part of the Earth to be habitable; for as much as many places, as the tops of the Alps, or the sands of Africa, properly admit of no habitation; yet in an improper and large sense they may be called habitable, because on them a man may live and breath for a certain space of time. But if by the parts of the land we understand some reasonable greatness, no great doubt can be made, but that it is either already inhabited by mankind, or can at least admit of habitation, as that which not only for a time affords a man life and breath, but also some convenient means of sustenance; for no country hath ever been found so indigent and barren of all vital aids, which is neither capable of living creatures in the land, fit for man's nourishment; or that cannot draw Fishes from the Sea; or if this should fail, cannot afford Fruits or Herbage from the ground: or in case all the rest were deficient cannot have passage by Water to other Countries, whence to relieve their necessities. And no question but nature hath stored every Country with some commodity or other, which by traffic may draw riches from other Regions, as by instances may more particularly appear hereafter when we shall speak of particular Regions, and their several accidents. 2 All places of the Earth have suffered manifold alteration and change as well in Name as Nature. I need not spend time to demonstrate this Assertion, for that every place of the Earth hath been subject to much mutation in the process of time, as well in Nature of the Soil as of the Inhabitants, a few obvious instances in each Country will easily certify: yet will it not seem amiss, I hope, to show the progress, manner, and causes of this alteration, which would give no small satisfaction. To discourse of all changes according to all times were a matter infinite: We may refer all to two heads, to wit, the change of Names, and the change of Nature. Concerning the former that most Countries have changed their first and original names, is most evident to such as consult the Maps and writings of our common Geographers: for few or none will discover unto us any Region by that name, by which it was known in former times: in so much, as great controversy and dispute hath grown about divers countries mentioned by ancient writers, whereof the name should take its first original; but of this change we shall speak hereafter. But if we consider the natural changes of Countries, sithence the first creation we shall find them to have suffered as well in the natural accidents, and disposition of the soil, as the temper of the Inhabitants; concerning the former we may note a twofold alteration: whereof the one is a progress from Imperfection to Perfection; the other chose, from Perfection to Imperfection. The first groweth out of the general Industry of mankind, which is wont to work every thing as near as it can to his best ends and use, for his own good and propagation of his kind: which we may best find in the first original of the world, the first groundwork of civil society; for man being once expelled out of Paradise for his own transgression, had left him notwithstanding for his lot the whole world beside, which no question he found as in the cradle of Nature a poor infant, as yet altogether unfashioned and unshaped for humane habitation. For who can imagine the earth at that time to be any otherwise then as a vast Wilderness all overgrown with briers and bushes growing of their own accord out of the Earth: Moreover what Fens, Bogs, Marshes, and other such encumbrances could there be wanting to those places which never yet felt the chastising hand of husbandry? All these incommodities, as mankind began to multiply and propagate itself on the face of the Earth, were by little and little removed, and the Earth reduced into a better form for humane dwelling: because every man choosing out his own possession, began presently to till and manure the soil with all heedful industry. For if our first Parents being placed in Paradise itself, the most pleasant and fertile portion of the whole world, were nevertheless enjoined to dress and manure the Garden for their better use and profit; what shall we imagine of the other parts of the Earth, which (no doubt) a thousand degrees come short of this perfection: especially knowing this curse to be laid on man by our Creator: That he should eat his bread in the sweat of his brows; as though the earth were bound to open her treasures only to man's pains and labour. And howsoever the diligence of mankind hath gone very far in adorning and fashioning the upper face of the earth, yet hath it not waded so far, but that many places in our times are left altogether rude and uncultered, groaning under vast Wildernesses and unprofitable deserts. For times passed we might have for instance, gone no farther than Brittany and Germany; both which Countries we shall find in these days to differ as much from the days of Caesar, as Caesar judged them to differ from the Roman Territory; which no doubt he preferred before all parts of Europe. Notwithstanding this general inclination of mankind to perfect their dwelling places for their better ease and comfort, we shall find many ways whereby the parts of the Earth have degenerated, and proved more unfit for humane habitation then in former times. The first which is the greatest, and cause of all the rest, is that Curse which our Almighty Creator cast on the whole earth for Adam's sake, which afterward seems renewed and increased in the general deluge, wherein all mankind suffered for their sins a plague of waters. For as the estate of mankind immediately before the Flood was far better than that afterwards, so was the estate of Paradise far better than that: So as we may note from the beginning of the world a general defect and weakness of the Creatures, still more and more declining from their original perfection granted in the first creation. So that many great Philosophers have conjectured, not without ground, that the world from the first creation hath suffered the change of ages sensibly, and this wherein we live to be the last and decrepit age, wherein Nature lieth languishing, as ready to breathe out her last. But this opinion seems to be controlled by reason; for as much as we find not a proportional decrement and defect of natural vigour in things, as well in man as other creatures. For if we compare the estate of a man before the Flood, with the age of David long after, we shall find a great disparity in the proportional decrement of the Years and Ages of men: for as much as many before the Flood attained to 800, and some as Methusalem, to 900 years: But in David time, the days of man's life (as he himself testifieth) are threescore and ten: and admit we understand this speech of David to be meant only of his chiefest strength and livelihood, we shall yet find a great diversity, because man is understood to be in his greatest strength and vigour in his middle age; so that the whole age of man by this account surmounts not 140 years. To which proportion of defect or decrement our times can no way agree, because many men in our days come near the same age, as we see by experience, which may be confirmed by divers instances, whereof we will produce only two: the one of a certain Indian presented to Soliman the Turk, being of the age of 200 years: the other of the Countresse of Desmond in Ireland (which Sr Walter Rauleigh mentions to this purpose) who was married in Edward the fourth's time, yet was alive very lately. But to this doubt I might answer, that this extraordinary difference betwixt the ages of men, between the patriarchs and David's time compared with men, ages betwixt David's and our days, came from two especial causes: First by the universal Deluge, which caused a general defect and decay of nature in the whole earth, the like whereof hath not since been found: Secondly, it was (as it seems) much impaired by the Intemperance and luxurious diet of those times, which added much to this general weakness of nature: for as much as the children can have little or no natural perfection in themselves more than is derived unto them by their parents. For nothing can give that to others which it never had itself; whence it must needs come to pass, that the posterity derived from luxurious and distempered bodies, should prove as weak and impotent generally (if not more) than their Parents. Now why the people soon upon the Flood should find their distemperature more noxious and prejudicial to long life then the men of our age, a good reason may be given; because the Earth long after the Flood had not fully received that natural heat and spirit which it lost in the Deluge. So that all things arising out of it, as Plants, Herbs, Fruits, and living creatures feeding thereon, proved for a while more unwholesome and unnatural, then in some years after, when it had somewhat revived itself by the heat of the Sun and the Star, and by little and little returned to his own nature. The other cause of deficiency is more special, as not happening to all, but to divers parts of the Earth, and that more at one time then another: as the neglect of due manuring many places, caused commonly two ways; either by contagion naturally incident to divers places, or by hostile Invasion and devastation: of this latter arise two main effects; The first is the want and scarcity of Inhabitants, which should dress and manure the ground to make it more fruitful and accommodate to man's use. The second is their poverty and captivity; whereof the one makes them unable, the second unwilling to effect any great matter for the benefit of the Land. A good instance whereof we may find in the land of Palestine: which in times passed by God himself was called, A land flowing with milk and honey, for the admirable pleasantness and fertility of the Soil: yet at this day, if we will credit travellers report, a most barren Region, devoid almost of all good commodity fit for the use of man, in the ruins of which, sometimes famous kingdom, every bleere-eyed judgement may easily read Gods curse long since denounced; Which strange alteration next unto God's anger we can ascribe to no other cause then the hostile invasion of foreign enemies, which hath almost l●ft the land waste without the native Inhabitants; whence it could not choose in a short time but degenerate from the ancient fruitfulness. The like may we find in all those miserable Regions which groan at this day under the tyranny of the usurping Turk: whence a proverb runs currant amongst them: That where the Turks horse hath once grazed, no grass will ever aft●r grow: which signifies no other than the barbarous manner of the Turks, having once conquered a land, to lay it open ever after to devastation: for being for the most part warlike men trained up in martial discipline, they little or nothing at all regard the use of husbandry: whence in short time a Country must needs turn wild and unfruitful. To these causes we may add the influence of heavenly constellations, which being varied according to the times, produce no small effects in the changes and alterations of the earth. The divers alteration in the disposition of the Inhabitants which was our second point, we have refer●●ed to another place near the end of this tract, to which is properly appertains. 3 Places having long continued without habitation are seldom so healthy and fit for dwelling as those which have been inhabited. This Proposition I have known to be warranted by the Testimony of many experienced Navigators: in so much as I presume few men can doubt of the truth of it, who hath either been a Travaller himself into far Countries, or at least hath read other men's discoveries. The only matter therefore we here intent, is to produce certain causes of this effect, to give satisfaction to such as make a distinction betwixt the knowledge of the effect, and inquiry of the cause. The first cause which I can allege is the industry of mankind inhabiting any Country (mentioned in the former Theorem) out of which ariseth a twofold effect. 1 The improving of the Soil, by removing all such impediments as otherwise would prove noisome to mankind, for whereas all things growing of their own accord, are suffered to rot into the ground; in like manner what other can we expect but Fens, Fogs, and noisome vapours, altogether hurtful to the welfare and life of man. 2 The profit of man's industry is no less apparent in manuring the ground, and opening the upper face of the Earth: which being composed of divers substances, sendeth forth many times certain hot fumes and vapours, which in many cold Countries mollify the usual rigour of the Air, which most offends the Inhabitants. This reason is given by my Countryman Captain Whitborne for the extreme cold, which some men profess themselves to have tried in Newfoundland, which nevertheless, according to many men's description, is known to lie far more South than England: for the natives of the Country being for the most part driven into the North part by the Europeans, who usually trade there for fish, and they themselves living altogether on Fish from the Sea, or some wild beasts on the land, as Bears, Dear, and such like; without any manuring of the ground for herbage; The Soil by them is in a manner left altogether unmanured: so that neither the soil can be well cleansed from noisome vapours arising from the putrefaction of herbage rotting (as I said) into the ground, or left free to send out such wholesome fumes and vapours from its interior parts, which may warm the Air, and preserve mankind. 3 A third reason drawn from men's Industries, that those Countries which have enjoyed Inhabitants by the continual use of Fires, have their Air more purged and refined from drossy and noisome vapours, which usually arise out of a contagious soil, daily infected by putrefaction: for scarce any nation hath been known so barbarous and ignorant which hath not the invention and use of Fire: neither is any infection of the air so pestilent, and opposite to humane constitution, which the breath of fire will not in some sort dispel. If any man object the distance of houses and villages wherein fire is used, which seem to claim a small interest in the change of the air hanging over a whole Country: let him well consider the quickness of motion and fluidity of the Air, passing (as it were) in a moment from one place to the other, and he may soon answer his own objection. All those reasons hitherto mentioned an inhabited Region owes to man's industry, which we generally touched in the precedent Theorem. The second cause which is as a consequent of habitation, is the necessity of breathing of people living in any Region of the earth, whereby may follow two effects. 1 A certain measure of heat impressed into the air, as we see in any room in a great throng of people, by reason of their breathing together in one place. 2 The assimilation of the Air to humane bodies, by a continual respiration. These alterations of the air, might perhaps to common apprehensions, seem small and insensible. But he that considers how great a quantity of air is requisite for a man's respiration, and the space and extent of motion together with the multitude of Inhabitants in a populous Country, would hold it no strange matter, that the breathing of men should breed such an alteration of the air: we find by experience, that strong built houses being left tenantlesse, will soon fall into decay, not so much for want of reparation, as the foggy vapours and moisture, caused by want of Respiration. The like whereof in some proportion may we imagine to be in a region wanting Inhabitants, and deprived of this benefit of nature. CHAP. II. Of the General Adjuncts of Places. 1 IN a place Topographically taken two things are to be considered. 1. The Adjuncts. 2 The Description: The Adjuncts are such proprieties as agree to special places. 2 Such Adjuncts agree to a place, either in respect of the Earth itself, or in respect of the Heavens: Those which agree to a place in respect of the Earth, are either Internal or external. 3 The Internal I call such as are inbred in the Earth itself: which are of two sorts; either Common, or Magnetical. 4 The Common are in number three. 1 The Magnitude, or extent of a Country. 2 The Bounds. 3 The Quality. The Magnitude comprehends the Length and Breadth of any Region. Some man might imagine that I make a needless repetition of these proprieties: for as much as many of them seem to have been spoken of before in our Spherical part. But I answer that I there handled no other matters, but such as concerned the whole globous body of the Earth; but my intent here is to treat of such proprieties, as particularly design out a special place. For it is not one thing to speak of the Magnitude of the whole Earth, according to all its dimensions; and to treat of the manner of measuring some particular Region, marked out in the Sphere. We have defined the Magnitude of a Region to be either of Length or Breadth: because (as we have taught in our former chapter) it is a space contained in the surface of the Earth. Then can it not according to Geometrical grounds, exceed two Dimensions: These two Dimensions (as we have said) are length and breadth, whereof every plain figure, or superficies consists. 5 The Magnitude of a Region may be measured two ways: either by the Diameter, or the Circumference. The Diameter is considered either in Latitude or Longitude: of the Latitude, whence ariseth the Breadth of a Country from North or South, note these Rules. 1 If the place whose breadth is sought, be distant from the Equatour, and be wholly situate in the same Hemisphere, the lesser Latitude subtracted from the greater will give the Diameter. To put this Rule in practice, it behoves the Topographer, who would find out the greatness of any Region, to observe two Latitudes: to wit, to measure the Latitude in the most Northern point, where it is greatest: as also in the Southern point, where it is least of all. This latter subducted from the former, will give the Diameter or breadth from North to South: which may easily, according to the Rules in the former book, be reduced into Miles, or other such measures. For an example we need go no farther than our Island of Great Britain: The Southmost part of which lying about Star-point in Devon, hath in Latitude about 50 degrees: The Northermost point situate near the mouth of the river Ardurnus in the farthermost part of Scotland, hath in Latitude about 60 degrees (to omit minutes) The lesser of these Latitudes subtracted from the greater▪ the residue will be 10 degrees, which being imagined in the Meridian which is a greater circle, are to be multiplied by 60, and so converted into miles, which will be 600, the length of Britain from South to North. 2 If the place whose Magnitude we inquire, be under the Equatour, the Southern Latitude added to the Northern will show the breadth from the North to the South. To illustrate this by an example, we will take the whole continent of Africa, whose Southern Latitude about the Cape of Good hope, we ●●all find to be near thirty Degrees, the most Northern Latitude about the straits of Gibraltar, very near the same rate: These two sums added together will amount to 60 Degrees, which multiplied by 60, the number of miles answerable to a degree in a great circle (because we suppose it here to be an Arch of the Meridian) we shall have 3600 miles, the breadth of Africa from South to North. 4 The measure of the length of a Region betwixt East and West, admits of two cases: for either the Country is supposed to be without the first Meridian, or under it: both which shall be taught in these Rules. 1 If the Region be situate without the first Meridian, the lesser Longitude subtracted from the greater, will show the Diameter betwixt East and West. For an example of which we will take Cape de Barca, lying over against S. Thomas Island in Africa, under the Equatour, whose Longitude is about 30 Degrees, and Melnide situate near the Equatour over against Sinus Barbaricus, on the other side of Africa, which hath in Longitude 63 Degrees. The least Longitude, to wit 30, being subducted from 63, there will remain 33 Degrees; which being taken in a greater circle, which is the Equatour, or a Parallel very near (which admits no sensible difference) we multiply by 60, and there will arise 1980 Italian-miles, but if the Degrees be taken in one of the lesser Parallels, we must proceed according to the Table of miles answerable to Degrees of Latitude in the former book. 7 Another Case is when the place is situate under the first Meridian: The length and measure of such a Region is found out by this Rule. 1 Let the Western Longitude be subtracted out of the whole circle, and to the Residue added the Eastern Longitude, the sum will give the greatness and distance betwixt East and West. For an instance we will take Groenland, supposed in most of our Globes and Maps, to be an Island which is set down directly under the first Meridian, passing by the Azores in Kaerius his Globe: It hath assigned it for Western Longitude about 340 Degrees: for Eastern Longitude about 30 degrees. Then according to our Rule 340 be subtracted from 360, the whole circle there will remain 20, which being added to 30 the Eastern Longitude there will arise 50: which being multiplied by 25, the number of miles answerable to the Latitude of the place, being about 65, there will be produced 1250 Italian-miles, the distance or length betwixt the East and the West part of Groenland: 8 Hitherto of the measuring of Countries by the Diameter, the other way is performed by the circuit: which manner of measuring we will briefly censure in these two Propositions. 1 The measuring of any Country by the Circuit of it, is very deceitful and full of errors. It hath been a common custom amongst Navigatours to judge of the greatness of any Country, by sailing round about it: which kind of measuring is not always to be rejected: for as much as in new discoveries sometimes no other way can be had. Nevertheless this manner of measuring must needs prove very uncertain for diverse reasons. First in regard of the motion of the ship, which by reason of divers and contrary winds, which must needs happen very frequently, cannot always move with the same swiftness. Secondly because the Sea itself (as we shall hereafter show) hath in divers places divers special motions and currents, as from the East to West; whence it must needs enforce an inequality of motion in the ship. The third reason, which is greater than all the rest, is drawn from the various Figuration of Countries, whose greatness cannot be known by the circumference. Because (as Geometricians teach us) two figures may have one and the selfsame circuit about them, and yet the one shall extraordinarily exceed the other in greatness: as for example, let there be imagined two Parallelogrammes; the one an exact square of six foot; the other a long square of 10 foot in Length, and two in Breadth. The one comprehends 36 square feet, the other 20, as will appear by multiplication of their sides, the one into the other▪ in which numbers there is a great inequality. Yet notwithstanding if we measure the circuit or circumference of each Figure, we shall find them equal, to wit, of 24 foot, as will appear by their figures here prefixed. For amongst those Figures called Isoperimetrall, or of equal Perimeter, that is always to be esteemed the greatest, which is the more Ordinate figure: which is that, which cometh nearest to an equality of Sides and Angles. But in Inordinate Figures (of which nature for the most part are all Regions) infinite error may be committed, if we measure them by circumnavigation: wherefore to measure a Country more exactly it behooveth us not only to know the Circumference, but also the Diameter. 2 Those Countries are more exactly measured which partake of a plain surface. The reason of this Proposition is easily showed, because a plain Superficies consists of right lines. But a right line (as Euclid witnesseth) is the shortest betwixt his own bounds: whereas between two points infinite crooked lines may be drawn: whence it must needs follow, that more certainty and exactness is to be expected in the measure of a Plain Country whose Diameter is a Right line, then from a Crooked and hilly trey, Region, where the Cord is crooked and gibbous. Whence some Mathematicians have demonstrated, that more men may stand on a Spherical Superficies, as a Hill or mountain, then on a Plain, although both are found to be of the same Diameter▪ It may be here objected, that the earth is every where crooked and orbicular, and therefore no part thereof can be measured by a Right line: I answer that the Earth is indeed Spherical (as we have formerly proved) yet may some little part or portion thereof be counted as a Plain; because such parts have little or no proportion to the whole mass of the Earth. This convexity therefore being so little, may pass for a plain without any sensible error. Hence we may gather that the Land cannot so exactly be measured as the Sea. For as much as the land for the most part is uneven, varied with hills, Dale●, and other inequalities. But the Sea every where plain and like itself, except the rising of the waves and surges, which in so great a distance will make no difference at all. Secondly, we may hence collect that of two Countries of the same bounds and figure, that must be the greatest whose soil and superficies is most varied and crooked: because (as we have said) crooked lines betwixt the same points are longer than right, and therefore measure the greater Magnitude. 9 Thus much of the Magnitude. The Bound of a Country is a line compassing it round. This definition is very evident, in that every Region is Topographically considered as a Plain or Superficies, whose bound is a line compassing it round: for as a Line is bounded by a Point, so a Superficies by a Line, as we are taught in Geometry. Now we must consider that the bounds of Countries may be taken two manner of ways: First Geometrically, for the mere line, which is imagined to go round about it: Seconly, Geographically, for the visible marks and Characters▪ whereby the line is traced out unto us, such as are Rivers, Cities, Hills, Castles, and such like. These marks whereby a Topographer noteth out unto us the bounds and limits of Countries, are of two sorts; either Natural or Artificial. The natural are such as are derived from nature without man's appointment, such as are Rivers, Creeks, Mountains, Woods, and such like other matters, which bound the extents of Countries. The Artificial bounds are such as depend upon some constitution or decree of a man, which so divide one Country from another: the partition being often made where no notable mark or bound is set by nature. 1 Natural bounds are more certain than Artificial. The reason is because natural signs or marks which are set for bounds of Countries are always the same, and (as it were) continued from the first creation: and cannot be changed without some great Earthquake, Inundation, or such like alteration in nature, which very seldom happeneth, and in very few places: whereas on the contrary part, such bounds and limits, as depend upon man's appointment, may be altered and changed according to the wills and dispositions of men: as we daily see amongst us, that ancient lands and inheritances are much questioned concerning their bounds and limits: as also great controversy is made amongst Geographers concerning the bounding of Countries and Territories, anciently known and defined by old writers: For names and particular contracts betwixt men in a few ages, may easily slip out of memory; especially when the possessors themselves (as it often happens) strive to extinguish and raze out the memory of former ages, leaving behind them no mark or sign to tell the world their wronged neighbours right, or the limited fortunes of their own possessions. 2 Equal bounds do not always contain equal Regions. This Proposition is plainly demonstrated before in this very Chapter: wherein we have proved of two figures supposed equal in the circumference, that to be the greatest, which more nearly approacheth an Ordinate figure: which we define to be that which cometh nearest to an equality of Sides and Angles. So that two Regions, the one round, the other square, may have an equal compass about, and yet the former will be a great deal greater, in respect of the space therein contained. 10 In the next place we are to consider the Quality. By the quality I understand the natural temper and disposition of a certain place. 1 Special places are endowed with special tempers and dispositions. That Almighty God, who created the whole world, hath not, granted the same gifts and endowments to all Countries, but hath divided divers commodities to divers Regions, seemeth a matter out of all controversy. For who finds not by experience one Country hot, another cold, a third temperate: one fruitful, another barren, a third indifferent: one healthy, another unwholesome. The like diversity is also found in the inhabitants themselves, according to that common proverb: Valentes Thebani, Acutiores Attici: whence this diversity should arise, it is a hard matter to unfold; for as much as many causes herein concur, sometimes to help, sometimes to cross one the other: yet will I strive as near as I can to reduce them to certain Heads, by which a general guess may be given to the particulars. The first reason may be drawn from the situation of the Earth, in respect of the heaven and Stars therein fixed. This may cause a diversity of disposition two ways; 1 By reason of the Sun, and his general light and influx: whence in the Earth are engendered the four first qualities of Heat, Cold, Drought, and Moisture, whereon depends a great part of the disposition, not only of the soil, but also of man's body: for as much as the one ordinarily borrows his fruitfulness or barrenness of these first qualities: and the other hath his vital Organs (which are the ministers of the Soul) much affected with them; in so much as some Philosophers have undertaken to define all the differences of men's wits and intellectual faculties out of the Temperament of the brain, according to these four accidents. And what Physician will not acknowledge, all these Qualities and their mixture to challenge an extraordinary pre-eminence in the disposition and constitution of man's body, whose mixture is the first ground of health or sickness. The second means whereby the Heavens may cause a diversity of temper in divers places, is from the special Influences of some particular Stars and constellations incident to particular places: for it were blockish to imagine that so many various Stars of divers colours and magnitudes should be set in the Firmament to no other use then to give light to the world, and distinguish the times: sith the ordinary Physician can easily discover the Moon's influence by the increase of humours in man's body: and the experience of Astrologers will warrant much more by their observation: as assigning to each particular aspect of the Heavens a particular and special influence and operation. Now it is evident that all aspects of the Heavens cannot point out and design all places alike; for as much as the beams wherein it is conveyed, are somewhere perpendicularly, other where obliquely darted, and that more or less according to the place: whence it cometh to pass that neither all places can enjoy the same Temperament, nor the same measure and proportion. Yet we say not that the heavenly bodies have any power to impose a Necessity upon the wills and dispositions of men; but only an inclination: For the Stars work not Immediately on the intellectual part or mind of man, but Mediately, so far forth as it depends on the Temperament and material organs of the body. But of this we shall especially speak hereafter. Where (God willing) shall be opened the manner of this celestial operation. By this we may understand how far the Heavens have power to cause a diversity in Places and Nations. The second reason may be the Imbred Quality, Figure, and Site of the Places themselves; For that there is another cause of diversity besides the situation of places in respect of the Heavens, may easily be proved out of experience; for we find that places situate under the same Latitude, partake, of a divers and opposite Temper and disposition, as the middle of Spain about Toledo, which is very hot and the Southermost bound of Virginia, which is found to be Temperate betwixt both: All which notwithstanding are under the selfsame Latitude, or very near, without any sensible degree of difference: also we sometimes find places more Southward toward the Equatour to partake more of cold, than such as are more Northern, as the Tops of the Alps being perpetually covered with Snow, are without question colder than England, although they lie nearer to the equinoctial. Likewise Aluares reporteth that he saw Ice upon the water in the Abyssines Country in the month of july, which notwithstanding is near or under the Line. And Martin Frobisher relates, that he found the air about Friezland more cold & stormy about 61 degrees then in other places near 70 degrees. Wherefore we must needs ascribe some effect and operation to the soil itself: first in respect of the Superficies which is diversely varied with Woods, Rivers, Marshes, Rocks, Mountains, Valleys, Plains: whence a double variety ariseth: first of the four first Qualities, which is caused by the Sunbeams being diversely projected according to the conformity of the place: Secondly, of Meteors and Exhalations drawn up from the Earth into the Air: both which concurring must needs cause a great variety in man's disposition: according to that proverb, Athenis ten●e coelum, Thebis crassum: or that bitter taunt of the Poet on Boeotians, Boeotum in crasso iurares aëre natum. For ordinary experience will often show that a thin and sharp air usually produceth the best wits; as chose gross and thick vapours drawn from muddy and marish grounds thicken and stupefy the spirits, and produce men commonly of blockish and hoggish dispositions and natures, unapt for learning, and unfit for civil conversation. Secondly, there must needs be granted to special Countries, certain Specifical qualities, which produce a certain Sympathy, or Antipathy in respect of some things or others: whence it cometh to pass that some plants and herbs, which of their own accord spring out of the Earth in some Countries, are found to pine & wither in others: some Beasts and Serpents are in some places seldom known to breed or live, wherewith notwithstanding other Regions swarm in abundance: as for example, Ireland, wherein no Serpent or venomous worm hath been known to live, whereby Africa and many other Countries find no small molestation. Neither is this variety only shown in the diversity of the kinds, but also in the variation of things in the same kind, whereof we might produce infinite examples. For who knows not, which is a Physician, that many simples apt for medicine growing in our land, come far short in virtue of those which are gathered in other countries. I need amongst many ordinary instances give no other than in our Rhubarb and Tobacco: whereof the former growing in our Country, except in case of extremity, is of no use with our Physicians: the other as much scorned of our ordinary Tobacconists: yet both generally derived from the true mother the Indies, in great use and request. But of this last Instances are most common, and yet for their ignorance of the true cause, most admirable. The causes of the former might in some sort be found out either in the Heavens, or in the Elementary nature of the Earth. But some special proprieties have discovered themselves, which cannot be imagined to owe their cause to either, but to some third original, which the Physicians in their Simples more properly term virtus specifica. If any man should demand why countries farther from the course of the Sun should be found hotter, than some which are nearer? Why the Rhenish wine Grape transported from Germany into Spain, should yield us the Sherry Sack? Every ordinary Philosopher, which hath traveled little beyond Aristotle's Materia Prima, will be ready to hammer out a cause, as ascribing the former to the Height or Depression of the soil: the latter to the excess of heat in Spain above that of Germany. But should we farther demand, 1 why Ireland with some other Regions endure no venomous thing. 2 Why Wheat in S. Thomas Island, should shut up all into the Blade, and never bear grain? 3 Why in the same Island no fruit which hath any stone in it, will ever prosper? 4 Why our Mastiffs (a serviceable kind of creature against the molestation of Wolves, and such hurtful beasts) transported into France, should after a litter or two degenerate into Curs, and prove altogether unserviceable? 5 Why with us in England, some places produce Sheep of great stature but course wool; other places small Sheep, but of very fine wool: which being naturally transplanted, will in a generation or two so degenerate the one into the others nature, that the greater sheep lose somewhat of their greatness, yet improve their fleeces; as the other increase their stature, but loose much in the fineness of their wool? 6 Why many places at the ridge of the mountains Andi in America cannot be passed over without extreme vomiting and gripping even unto death. 7 Why a River in the Indies should have such a nature to breed a great long worm in a man's leg, which oftentimes proves mortal unto the patient, with infinite the like examples found in Geographers, concerning the nature and accidents of Fountains, Herbs, Trees, Beasts, and Men themselves (as we shall show hereafter) so much varied according to the disposition of the soil, what wiser answer can an ingenious man expect then silence or admiration? for to make recourse to Sympathies, Antipathies, and such hidden qualities with the current of our Philosophers, is no other than in such sort to confess our own ignorance, as if notwithstanding, we desired to be accounted learned: for beside the difference of the terms wherein every Mountebank may talk down a judicious Scholar; I see no advantage betwixt a Clown which says he is ignorant of the cause of such an effect, or of a juggling Scholar which assigns the cause to be a sympathy, antipathy, or some occult quality. I speak not this to countenance supine blockishness, or to cast a block in the way of curious industry. The former disposition I have always hated, and the latter still wished in myself, and admitted in others. All which I can in this matter propose to a curious wit to be sought, must be reduced to one of these two heads: for either such admirable effects as we have mentioned, must arise from some Formal and Specifical virtue in the soil, or from some extraordinary Temperament made of a rare combination of the Elements, and their secondary mixtures, as of Herbs, Stones, Minerals, and vapours arising from such, and affecting the Air: of both which we shall have some occasion to treat in the particular Adjuncts of places; yet so, as I fear I shall neither give myself content, or my Reader any sufficient satisfaction. But In magnis voluisse sat est. 11 Hitherto of the common imbred Adjuncts of the Earth Topographically taken: Next we will speak somewhat of the Magnetical Affections of a place: These are in number two, viz: Variation and Declination. We have in our former Treatise of the Magnetical nature of the Earth handled divers other affections, growing from the Magnetical Temper and disposition of the terrestrial Globe: whence some man might here collect this repetition to be altogether needless, or at the least imperfect, omitting many other of the Magnetical Affections. To this I answer, that it is one thing to speak of these Affections as they agree to the whole Sphere of the Earth: Another thing to consider them, as they are particular proprieties, and marks of particular places and Regions. In the former sort have we) besides the Variation and Declination) handled many other affections of the Earth magnetically considered. We here only speak of these two, as they are special marks and proprieties of sqeciall places: which it behoves a Topographer to observe as a matter worthy of observation in the description of any place. The use shall be commended unto us in these two Theorems. 1. The Magnetical Variation is of no use for the first finding out of the Longitude; yet may it serve to good purpose for the Recognition of a place heretofore discovered. The reason of this we have shown in our former book; because the variation seldom or never answers proportionally to the Longitude, as some of the ancients on false grounds have surmised: whence no true consequence can be drawn from the variation of a place to the finding out of the Longitude; yet may it be of special use for the new finding out of such places as have formerly by others been first discovered, so the variation were first by them diligently and faithfully noted and observed: first because few places in the Earth can exactly and precisely agree in the selfsame variation; but in some Degree or minute will be found to vary. Secondly, if any two places should be found to accord in the same Degree of Variation; yet comparing the variation with the degree of Declination, we shall commonly find a difference: for as much as places agreeing in variation, may notwithstanding vary in the Declination. Thirdly, if two places should be equalised in both (as we cannot deny it to be possible) yet the comparing of these two Magnetical motions with other affections, as well in respect of the Earth itself as of the Heavens, will give at least a probable distinction: of which cases it is not hard out of the observations of our new writers and Navigatours to give particular instances. Concerning the first, we find the variation of the compass at Cape Verde, to be just 7 Degrees; about the Lands near to Cape Verde to amount only to 4 Degrees; whence a Seaman (if other helps failed) may hereafter, as he passeth, distinguish the one from the other, and if occasion serve, correct this error. In the like sort might a man (otherwise altogether ignorant of the place) out of former observations, in the same Island of Cuba distinguish betwixt Cape Corientes and Cape S. Anthony; In that the one hath only 3 degrees of variation, whereas the other hath 13: for an instance of the second case we will take the coasts of Brasill 100 leagues distant from the shore, & Cape Corientes beyond Cape bonae spei, which agree in the same variation: to wit, amounting to 7 Degrees 30 minutes: which notwithstanding are distinguished by their several declination: for howsoever the magnetical motion of variation being of late invented, hath not so particularly been traced out in all or most places, yet must the declination of each place needs be different; for as much as the former hath 23 degrees of South Latitude, the other none at all lying just under the Equinoctial: since the Latitude (as we have formerly taught) is in some measure proportional to the Declination. For the third, if any two places be found agreeing both in Variation and Declination, as may be probably guessed of Cape Rosse in S. john's Island, and the west end of S. john de Porto Rico: the Latitude being all one as of 17 degrees 44 minutes: and the variation admitting perhaps insensible difference, to wit, of a little more than one degree: yet might this help conjoined with former Travellers report, or some small observation of heavenly bodies, or sounding the bottom of the Sea, settle our opinion and make a plain distinction. 2 The Declination of any place being known the Latitude may also be found out, although not without some error. The ground of this Assertion we have formerly handled in the Treatise of the Magnetical Affections of the Earth; where we have showed that the Declination of the Magnetical needle is always answerable in some proportion to the Latitude of the place: whence it must needs follow, that the declination any where being found out together with the proportion, the Latititude must needs be known. In this point I refer my Reader to D. Ridleye's late Treatise of Magnetical bodies and Motions, wherein he by the help of M. Briges, hath calculated a certain brief table for this purpose. But that this manner of Invention of the Latitude of a place, must needs admit of some error, cannot well be denied; for as much as Gilbert, Ridley, and others, which have written of this subject; have acknowledged this motion of Declination to be in many places irregular, and not answerable in due proportion to the Degrees of Latitude, which divers friends of mine, well experienced in magnetical experiments, have to their great wonder confessed. 12 This much for the Internal Adjuncts The external, I call such as are not impressed into the Earth, but externally adjacent or adjoining unto it. Here ought we to consider the Air adjoining to any place with his Qualities and Proprieties. 13 The Airy properties of a place consist in such matters, wherewith the Air according to divers places is diversely affected and disposed. In the Air we ought to note a twofold temper and quality, the one Inbred and Essential: the other external and Accidental, ●he former, whether it be heat joined with moisture, as Aristotle affirms, or cold joined with moisture, as some others, I leave it to the Natural Philosopher to dispute. The latter being that to which our purpose is chiefly engaged, and that no farther then may appertain to the Topical description of a special Country. These accidents being so various and many, we are enforced to reduce them to a few general heads which we will couch in this our Theorem. 1 The disposition of the Air adjacent to a place depends chiefly on the Temperament of the Soil. Those things wherewith the Aerial Region is affected, are of two sorts; to wit, either the Temperament consisting in the mixture of the four first Qualities; or else the bodies themselves, as Meteors drawn up into the Air, whereof these accidental dispositions arise. That both these chiefly depend from the Temperament of the Earthly Soil of a certain place, many reasons will demonstrate: first that Meteors, whatsoever they are, take their original from the Earth, is plain. 1 Out of the name, which signifies things lifted up, to show that a Meteor is lifted and drawn out of the Earth. 2 Out of the material composition, which can no where else take this composition: For either we should derive it from the Heavens, or from the Air itself, or from the Fire: From the Heavens it cannot take original: because it is corruptible, and therefore of no heavenly substance according to Peripatetic Philosophy. Not from itself, because the air being supposed a simple and uncompounded body, cannot admit of such mixture. Not from the Fire; first because all Meteors partake not of fiery nature. Secondly, because fire cannot well subsist, but of some matter whereon it may work, and conserve itself, which can be no other than that which is of a glutinous substance: which we no where find but in the earthly Globe, consisting of Earth and Water; out of whose storehouses, the matter of all such pendulous substances in the air is derived. These Meteors may be derived from the Earth into the Air, two manner of ways. First, Directly and immediately, by an immediate ascent or rising of exhalations from some one particular place into the Airy space right over it. Secondly, Obliquely, to wit, when Vapours, or other such exhalations are by some violence or other carried from one place into another: as wind, which being engendered in one place, continually bloweth into another. Again, the former may happen two ways: for either this rising of Exhalations out of the Earth, is Ordinary, or Extraordinary: Ordinary I call that whereby the thin parts of the water or Earth are continually spread and diffused through the whole Region of the Air: for we cannot imagine otherwise then that at all times and places, the Terrestrial Globe composed of Earth and Water, continually sends and evaporates out some thin or rarified parts, wherewith the earth is affected. Whether this Rarefaction or evaporation of the water be the true substance of the Air itself (as some have probably conjectured) or else s●me other body different from it, I will not here dispute. This much will necessarily follow, that it proceeds originally from the Earth right under it. This vapour being engendered from the water or moister parts of the Earth; is much varied and tempered according to the place from which it ariseth: For the matter of the Earth being various and divers in disposition, as well in regard of various veins of mineral substances, whereof it consists, as of the first and second qualities thereof arising, must of necessity cause the Air about each Region to be of the same quality. Whence a probable reason may be shown; why of two places, although both like in respect of the Heavens, and other circumstances, one should be hot, the other cold; one healthy, another contagious; the one of a sharp and thin air, the other of a foggy & dull temper: For no question but the mineral matter whereof the soil of the Earth consists, being not every where Solid and hard, but every where intermeddled with a vaporous and fluid substance, must needs challenge a great interest in the temperament of the Air, a● that which is the first mother, if not of the Air itself, yet at least of the accidental dispositions thereof. The Extraordinary evaporations, I call such as arise out of the Earth by some extraordinary concourse of the Sun, with some other Stars. These are many times subject to sense, which happen not at all times and places: such as are clouds, winds, and such like, which arise not naturally by their own accord by a perpetual emanation, but are by some greater strength of the Sun or Stars ratifying the parts of the earth or water drawn up to the Air about it. Now for the Meteors Indirectly and obliquely belonging to any place, amongst many other instances, we may bring the wind which bloweth from one Region to another; which according to ordinary experience partaketh of a twofold quality; the one derived from the place whence it is engendered; the other from the Region through which it passeth. Which may appear by our four Cardinal winds, as they are with us in England, Belgia, and higher Germany. For first our Eastern wind is found to be driest of all others, whereof no other cause can be given, then that it comes over a great Continent of land lying towards the East, out of which many dry and earthly exhalations are drawn: so the Western wind is observed to be very moist, because it passeth over the huge Atlantic Ocean, which must needs cast forth many watery and moist vapours, which beget rain and showers: from the moisture of which Western wind some have sought out an answer to that Problem: why hunting hounds should not sent, nor hunt so well, the wind being in the West, as at other times? For, say they, it is caused by the moisture of it, either in making hindrance to their legs in running, or at least to their smell, being very thick and foggy. In this Western wind we may also perceive much cold, which is caused by the quality of those watery vapours, through which it passeth, which being drawn from the water, are naturally cold. In our South wind we shall find both heat and moisture: whereof the former ariseth from the Sun, which in those Southern Regions near the Equatour is most predominant; The latter from the natural disposition of the places because before it approacheth our coasts, it passes over the Mediterranean Sea, out of which the Sun begets abundance of watery vapours, which mixed themselves with the winds. Finally the Northwind is observed to be cold and dry. It must of necessity be cold: because it is carried over divers cold and snowy places, most remote from the heat of the Sun. It is dry; because it passeth over many Lands and dry places, sending out store of dry exhalations: as also because the Sun being very remote from those Regions, fewer exhalations are drawn up, which might infect it by impressions of their watery quality. These instances may serve to prove our assertion: That Meteors, wherewith the Air is usually charged, and by consequence, their qualities impressed into the Air, are depending from the Earth, out of which they are drawn, either Directly from the same Region which they affect; or Obliquely, from some other Region remote from it. Howsoever, we observe, that the disposition of the Air depends from the Soil, we cannot altogether exclude the Heavens, as shall be taught hereafter in place convenient. CHAP. III. Of the Adjuncts of a place in respect of Heavens. 1 WE have in the former Chapter spoken of the Adjuncts of a place in respect of it Self. We are now to proceed to such Accidents as agree to a place, in respect of the Heavens. 2 The Adjuncts of the Earth in respect of the Heavens are of two sorts; either General or Special. General, I call such as are abstracted from any special quality, or condition of the Earth, or any place in the Earth. These accidents concern either the Situation of the Inhabitants, or the Division of the places: both which we have handled in our Spherical part of Geography: The Special are such as concern the nature of the place in respect of the Heavens, not Absolutely, but Respecting some special qualities or properties depending on such situation; which more properly belongs to this part: For the unfolding of which, before we descend to particularities, we will premise this one general Theorem. 1 Places according to their divers situation in regard of the Heavens, are diversely affected in quality and constitution. This Proposition needs no proof, as being grounded on ordinary experience: for who finds not betwixt the North and the South, a manifest difference of heat and cold, moisture and drought, with other qualities thereon depending, as well in the temper of the soil itself, as the natural disposition of the inhabitants. Only three points will here require an exposition: First, by what Means and instruments the Heavens may be said to work on the Earth. Secondly, how far this operation of the Heaven, on the Earth may extend, and what limits it may suffer. Thirdly, how these operations are distinguished one from the other. Concerning the first, we are taught by our ordinary Philosophers, that the Heaven's work on inferior bodies by three instruments, to wit, Light, Motion. and Influence. By Light, as by an instrumental agent, it engendereth heat in the Air and Earth; not that the light being in a sort an Immaterial quality, can immediately of itself produce heat, being material and elementary; But by attrition and rarefaction, whereby the parts of the air being made thinner, approach nearer to the nature of fire, and so conceive heat. This is again performed two ways; either by a simple or compo unded beam. The simple Ray is weaker: The compounded inferring a doubling of the Ray by Reflection, is stronger and of more validity in the operation: and by consequence so much the more copious in the production of heat, by how much more the reflection is greater: if we merely consider it in regard of the Heavens, without any consideration of the quality of the Earth. By motion the heavens may exercise their operation on the Earth two ways. First, by attenuating and rarefying the upper part of the Air next adjoining, turning it into Fire, (as some Philosophers would have it) whence the inferior parts of the air communicating in this affection must needs partake some degrees of heat; But this I hold to be a conceit grounded only upon Aristotle's authority; who supposed the heavens to be a solid compact body: which will not so soon be granted of many more modern Mathematicians. Secondly, the heavenly bodies may be said to work on inferior things by motion; in that by motion they are diversely disposed and ordered to divers Aspects and configurations of the Stars and Planets, whereby they may produce divers effects: so that in this sense the heavens are imagined as a disponent cause, which doth not so much produce the effects themselves as vary the operation. Hereon is grounded all Astrology, as that which out of divers aspects and combinations of the Planets and Signs foreshoweth divers events. The third Instrument, by which the Heavens are said to work, is the heavenly influence; which is a hidden and secret quality not subject to sense, but only known and found out by the effects. This third agent being by some questioned, would hardly be believed; but that a necessity in nature constrains it. For many effects are found in inferior bodies, caused by the heavens, which can no way be ascribed to the Light or Motion. As for example, the production of Metals in the bowels of the earth, the Ebbing and Flowing of the Sea; whereof neither the one or the other can challenge any great interest in the Light: For as much as the former is far remote from the Sunbeams: the other ceaseth not to move in his channel, when the Sun and Moon are both under the Earth. Besides, who can give a reason of the excess of heat in the Canicular or Dog-days, if he exclude this influence? For if we consider the Light of the Sun, we shall find it greater at the time of the Solstice; the reflection being greater approaching nearer to right Angles. If we consider the Earth, we shall find no reason at all, why the heat should be more predominant at this time then another. Then must we of necessity ascribe it to a special Influence of the Dogstar being in conjunction with the Sun. Many other Instances might be here produced, but I hold it needless, being a matter consented to amongst most Philosophers. The second point concerns the Extent and limitation of this operation in inferior bodies: for unfolding of which point, we must know that this operation may have respect either to the Elements of Earth and Aire, or else to the Inhabitants residing on the Earth. For the operation of the Heavens upon the Elementary mass, experience itself will warrant; yet with this limitation, that this operation is measured and squared according to the matter whereinto it is received: as for example, we shall find the Moon more operative and predominant in moist Bodies, then in others, partaking less of this quality. Likewise the heat caused by the Sun more fervent where it meets with a subject which is more capable. Whence it comes to pass that one Country is found hotter than another, although subject to the same Latitude in respect of the Heavens: for howsoever the action of the Heavens be always the same and uniform in respect of the Heaven itself, yet must the same be measured and limited according to the subject into which it is impressed. For the Inhabitants, we are to distinguish in them a twofold nature: the one Material as partaking of the Elements, whereof every mixed body is compounded. The other spiritual, as that of the Soul. The former we cannot exempt from the operation of the Heavens: for as much as every Physician can tell how much the humours and parts of our body are stirred by celestial influence, especially by the Moon, according to whose changes our bodies daily undergo an alteration. For the humane soul, how far it is governed by the stars is a matter of great consequence; yet may we in some sort clear the doubt by this one distinction. The Heavens may be said to have an operation upon the soul two manner of ways. First, Immediately by itself. Secondly, Mediately by the humours and corporeal organs, whereof the Souls operation depends. The first we absolutely deny; for the soul being an immaterial substance, cannot be wrought upon by a material agent, as Philosophers affirm: for the second, it may be granted without any absurdity: For the operation of the soul depends merely on material and corporeal organs. The Elementary matter, whereof these organs consist, are subject to the operation of the Heavens, as any other Elementary matter. So that we may affirm the Heavens in some sort to govern men's minds and dispositions, so far forth as they depend upon the bodily instruments. But here we must note by the way, that it is one thing to infer a Necessity; another thing to give an Inclination. The former we cannot absolutely aver; for as much as man's will, which is the commandress of his actions, is absolutely free not subject to any natural necessity, or external coaction. Yet can we not deny a certain inclination; for as much as the soul of a man is too much indulgent unto the body, by whose motion it is rather persuaded then commanded. The third point we have in hand, is to show how many ways the Heavens by their operation can affect and dispose a place on the Earth. Here we must note that the operation of the Heavens in the Earth is twofold; either ordinary or extraordinary. The ordinary is again twofold; either variable or Inuariable. The variable I call that which is varied according to the season, as when the Sun by his increase or decrease of heat, produceth Summer or Winter, Spring, or Autumn: which operation depends from the motion of the Sun in his Ecliptic line, wherein he comes sometimes nearer unto us, sometimes goeth f●rther from our vertical point. The Inuariable, I call that, whereby the same places are supposed to enjoy the same temperament of heat or cold without any sensible difference in respect of the Heavens; putting aside other causes and circumstances: for how soever every Region is subject to these four changes, to wit, Summer, Winter, Spring, and Autumn: yet may the same place enjoy the same temperament of Summer and Winter one year as it doth another without any great alteration: and this depends from the situation of any place nearer or farther of in respect of the Equinoctial circle. The Extraordinary operation of the Heavens depends from some extraordinary combination or concourse of Planets particularly affecting some special place; whence the cause may be probably showed why some place should some ●eeres prove extraordinary fruitful, other times degenerate again to barrenness: or why it should sometimes be molested with too much drought, and other times with too much moisture. To let pass the other considerations as more appertaining to an ginger than a Geographer, we will here only fasten on the Inuariable operation of the Heavens on earthly places; and search how far forth the places of the Earth are varied in their Temper & Quality, according to their divers situations, and respect to the Equinoctial circle; taking only notice of the Diurnal and ordinary motion of the Sun in his course. Herein shall we find no small variety, not only in the temper of the Air, but also in the disposition and complexion of the Inhabitants: both which we shall more specially declare: the former in this Chapter▪ the other in due place: wherein we shall have occasion to treat of the material constitution and manners of divers Nations. 2 In respect of the Heavens, a place may be divided two ways: First, into the North and South. Secondly, into the East and West. 3 Any place is said to be Northern which lieth betwixt the Equatour and Arctic Pole. Southern, betwixt the Equatour and the Antarcticke-Pole. The whole Globe of the Earth (as we have formerly taught) is divided by the Equatour into two Hemispheres; whereof the one is called Northern, lying towards the Northern or Arctic Pole: the other towards the other Pole is called the Southern. But here to clear all doubt, we must understand that a place may be said to be Northern or Southern two manner of ways: either Absolutely or Respectively: Absolutely Northern and Southern places are termed, when they are situated in the Northern or Southern Hemispheres, as we have taught in this Definition; But such as are Respectively Northern, may be understood of such Regions, whereof the one is situate nearer the Pole, the other nearer the Equatour. In the first place here we are to consider a place as it is absolutely taken to be either North or South: Concerning which we will particularly note these two Theorems. 1 Northern and Southern places alike situate, generally enjoy a like disposition. We have formerly granted to every Region or Country a special quality or temper: although lying or situate under the same Latitude. But here excluding all concurrent causes which may vary the temper of the Soil, we consider the disposition of a place so far forth as it depends on the Heavenly Influence o● operation. In which sense we cannot deny to a place of like 〈◊〉, a like nature, for as Philosophers use to speak, Simile qua simile semper aptum natum est simile producere: Like causes always produce like effects: so the Heavens in like distance, being disposed alike as well in regard of Light as Influence▪ cannot but affect ●hose parts of the Earth in the selfsame manner. For the Instruments by which the heaven's work on inferior bodies (as we have showed) are Light and Influence●▪ For both the Light and Influence, it is certain that in places of equal Latitude and respect to the Equatour; it is cast equally: both the one and ●he other being imagined to be carried in direct l●●es of 〈◊〉 which with the Horizon makes like Angles. Now that the validity or weakness of the operative Rays is to be judged according to the Right or Oblique incidency, making right or oblique Angles, no Mathematician will gain say. But here we must note by the way, that we only consider the Heaven a●●ording to his general Inf●●ence or operation depending chiefly on the Sun: not of the special operation of special Stars, for it may be some particular constellations in the Northern Hemisphere may be endowed with some special influence, which is not found in the Southern; or the South in this kind go beyond the North. But this kind of Influence is rare and hard to fond, by reason of the various mixture of divers constellations in their operation in the same subject: and howsoever it were well known, yet it is not so notable to take place before this common Rule, which we shall find to take place, if not exactly, yet commonly throughout the whole Terrestrial Sphere. Thus Bodin shows a great likeness betwixt the higher Germany, and the kingdom of the Pantagones', in the South part of America, out of the great Stature of the Inhabitants, which must needs proceed out of the nature of the places, which are found to be situate very near under the same Parallel. The like correspondency have we noted betwixt Guinea in Africa and that part (as it is thought) of the South Continent, which they have for this cause termed Nova Guinea▪ many more Parallels in this kind might be found out; but these may suffice in so evident a matter. 2 The Northern Hemisphere is the Masculine, the Southern the Feminine part of the Earth. It hath been a usual kind of speech amongst men to term such things as are stronger, worthier, or greater, Masculine: on the contrary side such things Feminine as are found deficient and wanting in these perfections: by which kind of Metaphor taken from the Sexes in living creatures they have ascribed to the Northern Hemisphere a Masculine Temper in respect of the Southern, which comes fa●re short of it: for howsoever no cause can be showed in regard of the Heavens (as is taught in our former propositions) except by some special constellations of the South, which is full of uncertainty, and as soon denied as affirmed; yet comes it to pass by some hidden property of the places themselves, or at least some casual Accident or other, tha● these two Hemispheres suffer a great and notable disparity. For against the large and fertile Territories of the Northern Hemisphere containing in it wholly Europe and Asia, with the greatest part of America and Africa, we shall find (besides some few scattered Lands) only three continents to oppose, to wit, a small part of Africa, the greatest part of America Per●ana, containing in it Peru, Brasile▪ and the Region of the P●ntag●n●s, a●d the South continent called T●rra Australi● Inc●gnita, and by some others, the South Indies. For the former lying near the Cape of good hope, if we will credit the relations of our own Merchants, we shall find the air by reason of 〈◊〉, very di●●●mp●rated▪ situate betwixt the Equatour and the Tropic of Capric●r●●: The land very barren, the Inhabitants of a br●tish disposition, wanting (a● it were) all sense of science or religion: bearing heavy as yet the curse of Noah, the first Father of that African Nation. For America Peruana we shall find it perhaps more happy in respect of the Soil, although little better in respect of the Inhabitants. Yet for the plenty of Gold-mines, whereof they can chiefly vaunt, we shall find it far surmounted by the East Indies, or at least paralleled by America, Mexicana, lying on this side the Equi●o●tiall ●●rcl●. For other commodities, as Cattle, Fruit●, Herbage, Spi●e●, Gumm●●, and other medicinable roots, and minerals, less question can be made, as being far inferior to Europe, Asia, Mexicana and other Regions included within ou● Northern partition. Of the third and greatest, which is the South continent, no conjecture can be well grounded, being in ● manner all undiscovered, except some small quillets on the borders of it▪ by which, if we may judge of all the rest, we shall almost give the same judgement, as of the other. The want of discovery in this age of ours, wherein Navigation ●●th been perfected and cherished, is no small argument 〈…〉 inferior in commodities to other places: Neither had ●he ●lacknesse of the Spaniard giue● that occasion of complaint to Ferdinand de Qui●, the late discoverer of some of these parts, had not the Spanish King thought such an expedition either altogether fruitless, or to little purpose. For who knows not the Sp●niard to be ● N●tion ●s covetous of richesse as ambitious to pursue 〈◊〉 sovereignty: as such who will more willingly expo●● the lives of their own subjects, then loose the least title over other Countries. This may be a probable argument, that th●s Continent hath not as yet so well smiled on the ambition of this proud Nation, as some other conq●●sts. For Political and Martial affairs, how far short i● con●●s of our Northern Hemisphere▪ I shall speak in due place, where I shall handle the 〈◊〉 disposition of divers inhabitants according to their situation. To find out the true causes of this diversity, is very difficult: To seek● a reason in some particular conste●●ation, and 〈◊〉 in the Heavens, or some special disposition of the soy●●▪ is too general to give satisfaction, and too uncertain to enforce credulity. Yet putting these aside, I can only guess at two reasons, which are accidental, yet strengthened with good probability. The first and greatest is that bitter curse cas● on Cha● and his posterity by his father Noah, which no doubt was seconded by God's dipleasure taking place in his habitation. Th●● all these Nations sprung from Cham, ● dare not confidently avouch: Yet for the most part, it is probable they were of this Race. For the Africans it is out of question●, as warranted by the holy Scripture▪ and it is not unlikely ●hat many of those 〈◊〉 people fetched their first original from them▪ The second cause may be drawn from the Industry and labour of the inhabitants in tillage and manuring of the ground, wherein the Southern inhabitant hath been more deficient. Fo● it is certain out of the holy Scripture that Noah's Ark, wherein was th● Seminary of mankind, and almost all other liu●●g 〈◊〉, rested in ●he Northern part of the world: whence both man and beasts began to be propagated toward the South●punc; no farther than necessity enforced: the Regions inhabited g●●wing daily more and more populous, and (as i● were) groaning to be delivered o● some of her children. Hence may be inferred too consec●aries. First, that the Northern Hemisphere was 〈◊〉 sooner, and is now therefore ●ore populous than the Southern. Secondly, that the chiefest and principal men, which were best seated rath●r chose to keep their ancient habitation, sending such abroad, who could either be best spared, or had the smallest possessions at home. Yet notwithstanding it cannot be imagined but they retained with them a sufficient company and more than went away. Out of which it must needs be granted, that the Northern half of the Earth being best inhabited, should be best manured and cultured; from whence the ground must in time prove more fruitful and commodious for habitation: for as a fruitful Country for want of the due manuring and tillage doth degenerate and wax barren, so divers barren and sterile Countries have by the industry of the Inhabitants been brought to fertility, and made capable of many good commodities necessary for man's life. If I were curious to draw arguments from the nature of the Heavens; I could allege the Greatness and Multitude of Stars of the greater magnitude in our Northern Hemisphere, wherein the Southern is deficient, as also the longer sojourning of the Sun in our Northern Hemisphere: but these as uncertain causes I pass over Other reasons may perchance be found out by those who are inquisitive into the secrets of nature, to whom I leave the more exact search of these matters. 4 Either Hemisphere consisting of 90 Degrees may be divided into three parts, each of them containing 30 Degrees. 5 Of these parts 30 we allot for Heat, 30 for Cold, and 30 for Temperature: whereof the former lieth towards the Equatour, the second towards the Pole; the third betwixt both. The ancient Cosmographers (as we have showed in our former Treatise) divided the whole Globe of the Earth into five Zones, which they supposed had also proportionally divided the Temper and disposition of the Earth. In such sort that according to the Degrees of Latitude the Heat and Cold should in rease or diminish. Which rule of theirs had been very certain, were there no other causes concurrent in the disposition of the Earth and Air, but only the Heavens. But sithence that many other concurrent causes, as we have showed, mix themselves with these celestial operations, and the experiment of Navigatours have found out a disproportion in the quality, in respect of the Distance, some later writers have sought out a new pertition more consonant to natural experience. The whole Latitude of the Hemisphere consisting of 90 Degrees from the Equatour to the Pole, they have divided into three parts, allowing 30 Degrees toward the Equatour to Heat; 30 Degrees towards the Pole to Cold; and the other 30 Degrees lying betwixt both to Temperature. These 30 Degrees for Imagination sake they have subdivided again, each of them into two parts containing 15 Degrees a piece: more particularly to design out the special disposition of each Region, lying either Northward or Southward from the Equatour, which is the bound betwixt both Hemispheres. In the first section of 30 Degrees lying Northward from the Equatour, we comprehend in Africa, Numidia, Nigritarum Regio, Lybia, Guinia, Nubia, Egypt, Ethiopia superior. In Asia; Arabia, India, Insulae Philippinae. In America, Nova Hispania, Hispaniola, Cuba, with other parts of America Mexicana. In the other extreme section from 60 Degrees of Latitude to the Pole, we comprehend in Europe, Groenland, Island, Friesland, Norwey, Suethland for the most part, Nova Zembla. In Asia, a great part of Scythia Orientalis. In America, Anian, Quivira with divers other parts of the North of America Mexicana. In the middle betwixt both, betwixt 30 and 60 Degrees of Latitude we comprehend in Africa, Barbary; in Europe, all the kingdoms except those North Provinces before named, and almost all Asia, except some places toward the South, as Arabia, India, and the Philippinae Insulae, formerly placed in the first Section; In like manner may we divide the Southern Hemisphere into three Sections: In the first, from the Equatour 30 Degrees we place in Africa, Congo, Monomotapa, Madagascar: In the Southern Tract, Beach, and Nova Guinia, with many Lands thereunto adjoining, as many of the Philippinae Insulae, with Insulae Solomonis. In America, Peru, Tisnada, Brasilia, with the most part of that Region which they call America Peruana. In the other extreme Section from 60 Degrees to the Antarctike Pole, is couched the most part of that great land scarce yet discovered, called Terra Australis Incognita. In the middle Region betwixt both, from 30 to 60 Degrees, shall we find placed in America, the Region of the Pantagones', in the Southern Continent, Maletur, javaminor, with many others. In discovering the qualities of these several Sections or partitions of the earth, our chiefest discourse must be addressed to the Northern Hemisphere, as that is more discovered and known amongst old and new writers; by which according to the former Proposition one may parallel the other; concerning which we will infer these Propositions. 1 In the first Section of the Hemisphere the first 15 Degrees from the Equatour are found somewhat Temperate; the other 15 about the Tropics exceeding Hot. That the Region lying under the Equatour is Temperately hot, contrary to the opinion almost of all the Ancients, hath been in part proved heretofore, as well by reason, as experiment: for that all places by how much the nearer they approach the Equatour, by so much more should be hotter (as some imagine) divers instances will contradict. It is reported by Aluarez that the Abyssine Ambassador arriving at Lisbon in Portugal, was there almost choked with extreme heat. Also P●rguer the German, relates that he hath felt the weather more hot about Dantzicke, and the Baltic Sea, then at Tholouse in a withdraw Summer. The causes which we have before touched, are chiefly two. The first is, that the Sun is higher in this orb in respect of those under the Equatour, and moveth more swiftly from them, spending on them only twelve hours, whence so great an impression of heat cannot be made as in other places: for heat being a material quality, must necessarily require some Latitude of time to be impressed into the air, or any other subject. From the Diminution of heat in the Region must the air needs receive into itself the contrary quality of cold. An argument of cold may be drawn from the testimony of Alvarez; who affirms the waters there in the month of june, to be frozen over with Ice, the South wind blowing. The second cause is by judicious writers, ascribed to the subtlety and rarity of the Air under the Equinoctial line, which cannot receive into itself so many degrees of heat as the thick and gross air of diverse places distant. For the North Region, wherein Europe, and a great part of Asia is placed, is for the most part full of waters, which bursting out of secret and unknown concavities, do produce infinite Fens, Gogs, Lakes, and Marshes, which in the Summer season cause infinite vapours to abound, which being intermixed with heat, scorch and heat more fervently than the purer air of Africa, being for the most part free from the mixture and concourse of such slimy vapours. That the air being thickened should yield a greater fervour, every man out of ordinary experience can frame to himself an argument: For we see Fire and Heat being incorporated (as it were) in the Steel or Iron, to burn and heat more than in Air or Wood The like reason some would draw from the keepers of Sto●es or Hot houses, which do besprinkle the ground with water, that the vapour being contracted and the air thickened, they may the longer and better maintain heat, and spare Fuel. Another cause (which we have formerly touched) may be drawn from the Set and Anniverwindes which blow most part of the year one way. josephus Acosta observes that betwixt the Tropics, the wind is for the most part Easterly, beyond Westerly: and a Dutch-discoverer hath related that in Guinea they have a certain wind which comes from the land till noon: and then very violent from the Sea, in so much as the Inhabitants are wont to traffic in the morning being not able to endure it: which if it be true we cannot imagine this Region to be so hot as men suppose. For here the heat in the night is assuaged, by the absence or remoteness of the Sun: Likewise the excess of heat incident to noonetide, is much qualified (or as it should seem by this relation) altogether vanquished by the cold wind derived from the Sea. Another reason no less probable may be derived from the excessive height of the land and great mountains, observed to be near or under the line, whose tops are always covered with Snow, which give a sufficient testimony of cold: For instance, we need go no farther than the ridge of the mountains And● in America, where they observed the Air to be so chin and cold, that it enforced them to scour and vomit, which came near it. The like whereof is related of another called Punas, where the extremity of cold cutteth off their hands: From which experience we may find some places near the Line to be more infested with cold 〈◊〉 heat. The la●t and greatest ●eason may be taken from the continual moisture wherewith the regions situate betwixt the Tropics frequently abound. This moisture is derived from two causes; 1 From the melting of the Snow on the tops of the mountains by the Sun, which running from thence continually into the valleys; keep them almost always waterish, especially in the midst of Summer when the Sun is nearest. 2 From the extreme heat of the Sun, which being very near, and many times vertical, raiseth up continually moist vapours in great quantity. These vapour● in so short a time as 12 hours, being not consumed but meeting with the cold from the middle Region of the air, are therewith converted into drops, which fall down again in great showers: in so much as some travellers of good credit have told me, that all the while they sailed betwixt the Tropics, they seldom saw the Sun, by reason of rain and cloudy vapours. Whence we note with josephus Acosta, by way of consectary, that the presence of the Sun betwixt the Tropics produceth moisture, but chose without the Tropics, it is the cause of drought: whence the inhabitants enjoy as it were a Winter, when the Sun is to them vertical, because of the distemperature by Winds, Raines, and Storms, and great Inundations, whereunto commonly all great rivers betwixt the Tropics are most subject. Also they seem to have a Summer, when the Sun is in or near the Tropics because being somewhat removed, he cannot be so powerful in drawing such store of vapours and exhalations which he can dispel and consume. Thus we see the moiety of this first Section lying 15 degrees from the Equatour, how soever subject to a greater reflection of the Sunbeams, yet through the concurrence of other causes to be found indifferently Temperate, and the other 15 degrees about the Tropics, howsoever subject to a lesser Reflection to be excessive hot: which later cause, besides all which hath been said before, shall be further confirmed hereafter by the complexion of the native Inhabitants, which we shall find to be Choller-adust, the true symptom of an external heat. But if any man shall answer that this accident is incident as well to the Regions situate under the Equatour, as to that under the Tropics, I will produce another reason drawn from the colour of their countenances; which under the Equatour is not seen so black and swarthy as elsewhere. For toward the Tropic, is placed the Land of Blackmores or Nigritarum Regio, where the people are all coal-black: which might perhaps happen also to those that dwell under the other Tropic; but that other causes interpose themselves, which hinder the excess of heat, which is taken to be the chief cause of this blackness; Here some would oppose the opinion of Herodotus, which referred the cause of this blackness in the Negroes, to the Seed which he would have to be black: others would have this blackness as a curse inflicted upon Cham's posterity: but these opinions carry very little show of probability. For first, if this former opinion were admitted, it would of necessity follow (saith Boden) that Ethiopians in Scythia should always be borne black, and Scythians in Ethiopia should be always white. For as much as all nations from the beginning of the world have been confused and mixed by the distinction of Colonies: but experience teacheth us, that men trasplanted into another Soil, will in manner of trees and Plants by little and little degenerate and change their first disposition. As if a Blackmore marry and beget children here with us in England, experience will plainly declare the children to be more inclining to whiteness then the fathers and the grand children more than them. Secondly, if the second opinion of Cham's curse deserved any credit; I see no reason why all his posterity (such as by most writers consent, are generally the people of Africa) should not be subject to the same execration, as well as one little parcel of it. Moreover it is reported by Pline, and confirmed by Appian, that in those places are many black Lions, which we can ascribe to no other cause then the excess of heat, and not to any quality of the Seed, or any curse inflicted on the place: Moreover it is reported by Ferdinando de Quir in his late discovery of the South Continent▪ that he there also found some black people; yet can we not imagine this Land, though stretching very far in quantity toward the Equinoctial, to come so far or much farther than the Tropic of Capricorn. These arguments make it the more probable that the Regions situate under the Tropics, generally exceed more in heat, than those placed in the middle of the Earth under the Line. 2 In the other extreme Section from 60 Degrees towards the Pole, the first 15 Degrees towards the Equatour are more moderately cold; the other towards the Pole most immoderately cold, and unapt for convenient Habitation. That this Section of 30 Degrees comprehended betwixt the 60 Degree and the Pole, is in a sort habitable, is confirmed by the testimony of many Navigatours, especially the English and Hollanders; who have adventured very far Northward, and have there found the Earth, though not so fruitful, yet furnished with some commodities, and peopled with Inhabitants. The first 15 Degrees towards the Equatour admit of no great exception, containing in their extent Finmarke, Bodia, in Scandia, Nova Zembla, Auian, Groenland, with many other places indifferently discovered: where they have indeed found the air very cold in regard of this of ours: Yet not so Immoderate, but that it can at all times agree with the natural temper of the native Inhabitants, and at least at some times of the year admit a passage for foreign Nations. But the other Region stretching Northward from 75 Degrees to the Pole itself, howsoever it may be probably thought habitable, yet affords it no convenient means and sustenance for man's life, in respect of other places; neither can the people of this climate enjoy any good complexion or Temperament of the four qualities; for as much as the cold with them is so predominant, that it choketh, and almost extinguisheth the natural h●at: whence Hypocrates saith that they are dried up, which is a cause of their swarthy colour, and dwarfish stature; which assertion of his can obtain no credit, but of such Northern people as live near the Pole; Nevertheless we shall not find these poor Northern Nations, so destitute altogether of vital aids, but that their wants are in some sort recompensed by the benefit of nature. The chiefest comforts in this kind, which we enjoy, and they seem to want, are Heat and Light. The defect of heat is somewhat mollified; 1 By the Sun staying so long above their Horizon as 6 months, and by consequence impressing into the Air a greater degree of heat. 2▪ By the natural custom of the Inhabitants, never acquainted with any other temperature: both which reasons we have formerly alleged. 3 By the industry of the Inhabitants, being taught by necessity to preserve themselves during the Wintertime in Caves, Stoves, and such like places heated with continual fires: the defect of which providence, was thought to be the ruin of Sr Hugh Willoughby, intending a search of the North-east passage on the North of Lapland and Russia. To recompense the defect of Light, Nature hath provided two ways: 1 In that the Sun in his Parallel coming nearer and nearer to the Horizon, gives them a long time of glimmering light both before his rising and after his setting: which may serve them instead of day. 2 For that the Sun and Stars by reason of a refraction, in a vaporous and foggy Horizon, appe●re●●o the● sometime before he is truly risen: which caused the Hollanders Nova Zombla, to wonder why they should see the Sun divers days before according to their account he was to rise above their Horizon according to Astronomical grounds: which problem had staggered all the Mathematicians of the world, had not the Perspective science stepped in to give an answer. 3 In the middle Section betwixt 30 and 60 Degrees of Latitude, the first 15 are Temperately Hot, the other 15 more inclined to Cold. The middle Region partakes a mixture of both extremes, towit, of the cold Region towards the Pole, and the hot towards the Equatour: whence it must needs follow, that the more any parts of this Tract approach the hot Region under the Tropic and Equatour, the more it must partake of Heat: yet this heat being mitigated by some cold by reason of the fire of the Sun, it must of necessity be Temperate and very apt for humane habitation. Also this mixture of the cold quality being more extended and increased on the other moiety towards the Pole through the vicinity of the cold Region, must lose much of the former heat, which shall hereafter be more confirmed out of the natural constitution and complexion of the Inhabitants; bearing the true marks of external cold and internal Heat, whereof the one is strengthened by the other: For the external cold, if it be not over predominant, and too much for the internal Heat, will by an Antiperistasis keep in and condensate this heat, making it more fervent and vigorous. 6 The East and West Hemispheres are bounded and divided by the Meridian passing by the Canaries and the Molucco Lands. 7 The East Hemisphere reacheth from the Canaries the Moluccoes on this side; as the other on the opposite part of the Sphere. We may here note a great difference betwixt this division and the former. Fo● the North and South Hemispheres being divided by the Equatour, are parted (as it were) by Nature itself, and the Sun's motion; But the division of the Globe into East and West, we can ascribe to no other cause, than man's Institution: yet are the Eastern and the Western found to differ many ways, the discovery of which may give great light to observation. 1 The Eastern Hemisphere wherein we live is every way happier and worthier than the other Westward. How far short the Western Hemisphere comes of this of ours, many circumstances may declare. For first, if we compare the Quantity of Land, we shall find a great disparity. For the Western Hemisphere contains in it besides the Southern Continent (wherein our● also claims a moiety) only America, with the Lands thereunto adjoining: whereas the other within this large circuit contains all the other parts of the Earth known unto the Ancients, as Europe, Asia, and Africa, with many Lands to them annexed. Moreover it is probably conjectured by some, that America is usually on our Maps and Globes, especially the more ancient, painted and delineated out greater than indeed it is: which hath been ascribed to the fraudulent deceit of the portugals heretofore; who to the end they might reduce the Molucco Lands to the East Indies, than their own possession; sought as well in their Maps as relations to curtail Asia, and enlarge America in such sort, as the Moluc●o Lands might seem to fall within the 180 Degrees Eastward, wherein they fed themselves with unknown substance, and the Castilians with painted shadows. But to let pass the quantity as a matter of less moment and less questioned; a great disparity will be found in the Quality and Disposition: For what one commodity almost was ever found in this Continent, which is not only parallelled, but surmounted by this our Hemisphere? If we compare the Mines of Gold and Silver wherein consists the wealth and riches of both places; our East Indies will easily challenge the superiority. If Trees, Plants, Herbage and Grains, let our Physicians and Apothecaries judge, who owe most of the medicinable drugs to India: Let our Merchant's answer, which owe their Spices to Arabia, their Wine, to Spain, Italy, the Mediterranean, Grecian, and Indian Lands; their Silks, Linen, Clothing, and their furniture almost wholly to Europe. If we compare the multitude and various kinds of Beasts bred and nourished in either place, no question but Europe, Asia, and Africa can show far greater Heads of Sheep, Cattle, and such like, with far greater variety of kinds, than ever were found in this new found Continent. If all these failed, yet the well tempered disposition of the Europaeans and Asians in respect of this barbarous and unnurtured place, disdains all comparison: where we shall observe on the one side a people long since reduced to civility, instructed as well in liberal sciences, as handicrafts, armed with martial discipline, ordered by Laws and civil government, bound with a conscience and sense of Religion; on the other side a multitude of miserable and wretched nations, as far distant from us incivility, as place; wanting not only Government, Arts, Religion, and such helps, but also the desire, being senseless of their own misery. 2 The difference of East and West cannot work a diversity in two places by any diversity of the Heavens. East and West places compared together, are either of equal or unequal Latitude. For places of unequal Latitude no question can be made, but they receive a greater variety of Temper from the Heavens; as we have formerly proved: but this disparity grows not out of the diversity of East and West, but the distance of North and South. But that places alike situate in Latitude, cannot vary by any diversity of the heavens is plain; for as much as all things to them rise and set alike, without any diversity: wherefore, if any such diversity be at any place found, we ought not to seek the cause thereof in the heavens, but rather in the condition of the Earth itself, which no question suffers in divers places of the same Latitude a great variety. 8 Either Hemisphere may again Respectively be subdivided into the West or East. The West in this our Hemisphere I call that which is nearer the Canary Lands; the East that which lieth towards the Molucco Lands; to which points there are others correspondent in the other Hemisphere. 1 Places situate towards the East in the same Latitude, are hotter than those which are placed towards the West. For the explanation of this Theorem, we are to examine two matters; First, what probability may induce us to believe the East to be hotter temper than the West. Secondly, what should be the cause of this diversity in both places, being supposed equally affected, in respect of the Heavens: for confirmation of the former, many reasons have been alleged of old and late writers. It is agreed on (saith Bodin) with a joint consent of the Hebrews, Greeks, and Latins, that the East is better tempered then the West: which he labours to confirm; First, out of many speeches of ezekiel, Esay, and the other Prophet●, where the East seems to challenge a dignity and prerogative above the West; which betokeneth (as he imagines) a blessing of the one above the other. But I dare not venture on this Interpretation without a farther warrant. Secondly we may here produce the testimony of Pliny in his seventh book, where he affirms that by ordinary observation, it is found that the pestilence commonly is carried from the East into the West, which Bodin testifies himself to have found by experience in Galia Narbonensis, and many other history seems to justify. Amianus a Greek Author, observes that Seleucia being taken, and a certain porch of the Temple being opened, wherein were shut certain secret mysteries of the Chaldeans; that a sudden contagion arose of incurable diseases, which in the time of Marcus and Verus from the farthermost ends of Persia, spread itself as far as the Rh●●● and France, and filled all the way with heaps of carcases. If at any time the contagion be observed to be carried another way, an universal pestilence is feared: as according to the histories there happened not long after from Ethiopia towards the North, which infested the greatest part of the world. A third proof may be drawn from the testimony of Aristotle, Hypocrates, Galen, Ct●sias, and other grave Author's, who affirm that all things are bred better and fairer in Asia then in Europe, which must needs argue a better temperature: To back which Testimonies, we need go no farther than modern observation. Every Geographer will tell you how far in fertility Anatolia in Asia surmounts Spain; and China, under the same Latitude exceeds both: who knows not how far Fez and Morocco on the Western Verge of Africa, stand inferior to Egypt, a most fruitful and happy Region? And how far short both these come of India, situate in the same Climate. An argument of greater heat in the Eastern places may be the multitude of Gold and Siluer-mines, Spices, and other such like commodities, wherein Asia excels Europe: whereas such metals and commodities as require not so great a measure of heat in their concoction, are rather found in Europe then in Asia: whence there seems to arise a certain correspondency of the East with the South, and the West with the North. The greatest reason of all is taken from the Temper and natural disposition of the Inhabitants, for as much as the European resembling the Northern men, shows all the Symptoms of inward heat strengthened with external cold. The Asiaticke follows the disposition of the Southern man, whose inward heat is exhausted by external scorching of the Sunbeams, and therefore partakes more of Choll●r-adust or melancholy. But this point we shall more fully prosecute in due place. To show a cause of this variety is very difficult. Those which in wit and learning have far exceeded my poor scantling, have herein rather confessed their own ignorance, than adventured their judgement. It were enough to satisfy an ingenuous mind, to believe that Almighty God was pleased in the first creation of the world to endow the Eastern part of the Earth with a better temper of the Soil, from whence all the rest derive their original: which seems not improbable, in that he made Asia the first resting place of man after the Creation, the second Seminary of mankind after the Deluge, the only place of our Saviour's Incarnation. In this matter I believe no less, and can speak no more, except I should urge the beating of the great Atlantic Ocean upon our Western shores; which may in some sort qualify the excess of heat incident to the Eastern tract, which may produce some degrees of Temperature. But here also we shall perhaps meet with cross instances, which will stir up more doubt th●n satisfaction. CHAP. IU. Of the manner of Expression and Description of Regions. 1 Having treated of the general Adjuncts of places, we are next to handle the manner of describing a Region, which proposeth unto us two points, ● the finding out the Position of two places, one in regard of the other. 2 The Translation of such places so found out into the Globe or Charte. 2 The former depends on the invention of the Angle of Position by some Dioptricke Instrument. This manner of description of a particular Region, seems very necessary for a Geographer, which every Mechanician may soon learn and practice▪ Many instruments have been devised by curious Artificers for this purpose: whose use hath been set out largely by later writers, as by Gemma Frisius, Diggs, Hopton, and others: to whom my reader may have recourse, because I hold it not my task in this subject to describe the Instruments themselves; but briefly to show the ground and use of them; which these propositions shall express. 1 Divers places observed at two or more Stations, by some Dioptricke Instrument, the situation of two places, one in regard of the other, may be found out and expressed in a Plain. This may sensibly be showed in the Figure following: to express which the more plainly▪ we will set down these Rules: 1 Let there be drawn in some Chart or plain platform, a right line, which we must account to be our Meridian; because it shall afterward serve for that purpose. This right line shall be AB, whose two ends A and B shall be taken for the North and South. 2 You must choose out of some high place, as a Tower or Mountain, from whence you may behold such cities, towns, castles, and other such notable places whereof you desire to know the situation and bearing of the one to the other▪ This High place is called the First Station; where you must place the plain before prepared in such sort, as it may Astronomically and truly agree with the true Meridian of the place (whose invention we have taught in the first Book) and so respect the four Cardinal coasts, to wit, East, West, North, and South: Upon this place seated in such a manner of situation fasten your Dioptricke instrument, that it may be turned about the point A on every side at pleasure, in such sort, as the sight may be directed to every one of the adjacent places. First then removing it from A, direct your sight to F, and draw the line OF of indefinite length: likewise your Instrument being directed to G, draw the line AGNOSTUS infinitely, which by this means will also hit the place E: Let B also be imagined a certain place, as a City, or Castle, situate in the very Meridian itself, which we find already drawn to our hands. In like sort ought we to proceed with the other places C and D, and as many as we please. This performed, you must remove yourself with your Instrument and Plain to some one of these places thus fore-marked out; as for example unto D, which is called the second station, and there as in the former, ascending up some high place, the Plain being first fitted and placed Astronomically, take the distance AD of any length whatsoever▪ for to the greatness of this Distance, shall all the rest be proportional. Hence so place your Dioptricke Instrument at the place D, that it may be turned round, and directed to all those places formerly observed. In this sort levelling your sight to the place or castle F, draw the line DF: so directing your sight to the rest, you may draw the lines DCG, DEDB; etc. Now by the points of Intersections of these lines, as in F, G, E, C, B, etc. are to be described and delineated out the said notable landmarks, as Towns, Castles, Promontories, and such like. Betwixt these places if any man desire to know the distance in miles, he may know it by finding out any one of these Distances; for one being known, the rest will also be exactly known▪ as for example, we will imagine the Distance AD to contain 10 miles: wherefore let the line AD be divided into 10 equal parts: then with your compass examine how many such parts are contained in the Distance OF, for so many miles will be likewise in it contained: as for example according to this supposition we shall find it 5 parts: wherefore the castle or city F will be 5 miles distant from the city A. He that desires more particularly to acquaint himself with the use and divers manners of descriptions of Regions, derived from this one ground; Let him have recourse to divers Authors who have particularly laboured in this subject; amongst which our two Englishmen, Digges, and Hopton, deserve not the least praise: whereof the later, out of these principles hath framed a curious instrument, which he calls his Topographicall-Glasse, whose use he hath perspicuously and exactly taught in divers pleasant conclusions, too large for the scope of my method to insert. 2 At one Station by optical observation, the situation of one place in respect of the other may be found out. This may be showed out of an optical experiment, both pleasant and admirable: The ground is expressed in this proposition: The light traiected by a narrow hole into a dark place, will represent in any Table or white paper within, whatsoever is without directly opposed unto it: For demonstration of which proposition, we must take as granted of the perspective Authors, That the visual Image or species will pass by a right line through any little hole, and will be terminated in any point of the Medium: Now that it should more perspicuously be seen in a dark place, then in the light. The cause is assigned to be, because the light of the Sun is taken away, or much diminished, which otherwise would hide and shadow the species of the thing which is presented to the sight; as we see by experience the greater light of the Sun to obscure the Stars: which nevertheless from the dark bottom of a deep Well or Mine, will show themselves at midday. Nevertheless we must observe by the way, that this representation of any thing to the sight by this Image impressed in this sort in a wall or paper, will show itself so, as the parts will be seen inversed, or (as we may say) turned on the contrary side: as the higher, lower, the lower, higher; the rightside, to the left; and the left, to the right: which we may declare by an ocular demonstration in this figure here inserted: Let us imagine a Triangular platform of land, whereof we desire to know the situation, to be ABC: from the extreme Angles of this Triangle, we will suppose certain Rays to be drawn through the hole D into a dark place, wherein shall be opposed to the hole D, a white Table or paper, which shall be NM: Here will a Ray from the point designing out the Angle at A, be carried through the hole, that it will point out in the Table K (because all such beams according to the Optics are right lines.) Likewise the Angle B will in the Table design out the Point I: also C will fall into the point H: Let KH, IK, HIGH, be joined together by right lines, there will appear the Triangle IKH: wherein the top of the Triangle A will be seen in the lowest place K: Likewise the Angles of the Basis B and C, will appear in the points of the highest place HIGH: and the right side A C, will show itself in the left HK: as the left side will be the right in IH: wherefore the side of the whole Triangle ABC will show itself in the Table NM, although inversely placed according to the sides and Angles: and of a various greatness in respect of the distance of the Table from the hole. The invention hath great use in Astronomy, in observing Eclipses, the beginning, and continuance, without any hurt at all to the sight. No less use may it challenge in Topography in describing of Territories, Cities, Borrows, Castles, and such like, in their due symmetry and proportion: To practise which the better, Reusner would have a little house built of light Timber, with a Muliangle Basis: in every one of whose sides, a hole should be made, looking inwardly, at the vertex, or top, but outwardly at the Basis: through which the species or Image of all such things a● are visible may have free passage. 2 The manner of translation of a Region into the chart, depends from the knowledge of the Longitude and Latitude. 3 The parts to be described, whereof the chart consists, are either Essential, or Accidental: The Essential, are either the Lines, as are the Meridian's and Parallels: or the Places to be delineated out by Pictures; The declination of both which, shall be taught in these rules. 1 To set down the Meridian's and Parallels in a particular chart. To show the practice hereof, we will take for instance the Region of France, an example familiar with our later Topographers, and therefore can better warrant the description: France is supposed to have in latitude 10. degrees, in longitude 16: This known, you must proceed in this manner: First through the middle of your table from head to foot, let there be drawn a perpendicular line expressing the Meridian of the world, which shall be marked with the letters OF: let this line be divided into 10. equal parts: then draw two Parallel lines, whereof the one must cross the said line about the point E with right Angles: and the other Parallel must cross it again beneath in the point F with like Angles: let the uppermost Parallel be expressed by AB: The neathermost with CD: Then with your compass take one of the 10 parts of the line OF, which is one degree, and set that down apart by itself, dividing the same into 60 Minutes, as the short line GH, in the table here inserted will show on the right hand. Now you may learn by some Table or Map, that the farthest part of France toward the North, through which is drawn the Parallel AB is 52. degrees distant from the Equatour: And that the South Parallel CD, is distant 42 degrees: Also certain Tables in our former book will inform you, that to every degree of the Parallel 42. delineated by AB, do answer 37 miles: and that to every degree of the Parallel CD, answer 45 miles: wherefore with your compass take from the short line GH, 37 parts or Minutes, and with your compass kept at the same largeness, let the Parallel AB be divided into 16 equal spaces correspondent to that wideness (that is to say) on each side of the Meridian 8 parts: at which Meridian OF, you must begin your measure towards either hand both right and left, marking the end of every such space with a certain point▪ Moreover for the South Parallel CD. let 45 parts likewise be taken from the short line GH, and let that Parallel be divided into 16 spaces, correspondent to that wideness of the compass, eight spaces being set down on each side of the Meridian OF: So that we must begin from the Meridian OF, and mark the end of every such space with a point. Then from those points wherewith each of those two Parallels AB, and CD is marked; Let there be drawn a right line from point to point, and those shall serve for Meridian's▪ expressing as well the longitude of the whole Region, as of every particular place therein seated. In like sort as you have divided the Meridian OF, into 10 equal parts, so again into the like number of equal parts must be divided each of the two uttermost Meridian's, on the left hand and the right, marking with a point the end of every such space, and so from point to point let there be drawn right lines, cutting all the Meridian's, and those shall serve for Parallels, and in the uttermost spaces, let there be written the numbers of Longîtude and Latitude. The Longitude, is supposed to begin at the uttermost Meridian at the left hand, which in both Parallels is the farthest Meridian Westward. Now for as much as the most Westerly Meridian is fourteen degrees distant from the Meridian passing by the Canary Lands, from which as the first Meridian, the ancients began their accounts: you must set down in the first place on the left hand, as well over, as under in the first space 15, in the second 16, in the third, 17, and so orderly proceed through all the spaces, till you come to 30: For the difference betwixt 14 and 30, is 16: So you have the whole Longitude of France expressed in your Table, which is 16 degrees: In the like sort to express the Latitude (having the degrees of Latitude marked out) you must begin at each end of the South Parallel CD, and so proceed upward in the two uttermost Meridian's, writing down in the first space at the foot of the Table 43 degrees, on the right hand and the left, in the second space 44, in the third 45, and so upwards along to 52, so have you expressed the whole Latitude of France from North to South: for betwixt 42 and 52 are comprehended just 10 degrees: These degrees may again be divided at pleasure into lesser parts, as minutes, according to the largeness of your chart. 2 To set down Cities, Castles, Mountains, Rivers, and such like special places in the chart. The platform of your chart being once drawn out, as we have formerly taught in the precedent rule, you may very easily set down special places by observation of the Longitudes or Latitudes of such places, either by instruments or Tables, and reducing them accordingly to your chart: which we suppose before, marked out according to several degrees: As for example, if we would set down in our chart the Metropolis of France, which is Paris: having recourse to my Table, I find it to have in Longitude 23 degrees, in Latitude 48 degrees. Here to find out the said longitude you must extend a thread from the 23 degrees of the Parallel AB to the like degree in the Parallel CD: then holding it fast, you must cross that thread with another extended from the Meridian AC, to the Meridian AD in the points of 28 degrees: The point wherein these two threads shall cut and cross one the other, you may take for the true place of Paris, and mark it out in your chart: In like sort you may proceed with all other places. But if you were to describe a river in your chart, it will not be sufficient to take the Longitude and Latitude of the beginning or fountain, but of the end, middle, turnings, and angles, Towns, or Cities, by which it passeth, Bridges and other occurrent circumstances: In like sort may you set down Woods, Forests, Mountains, Lakes, and other places whatsoever. 4 Thus much for the Essential part of the particular Chart: The Accidental part we call the Scales of Miles, which teacheth how many miles are contained betwixt any two places in the Chart, wherein we are to know two things, 1 The Fabric; 2 The Use. 1 The Fabric of the Scale depends from the certain knowledge of the Distance of any two places in the Chart. The practice is very easy, and taught in these three Rules: 1 You must search out the distance betwixt any two places whatsoever, which are contained in the Region, described in your Chart: which you may do either experimentally by your own knowledge, or some certain relation of Travellers. 2 Then must you draw three Parallel lines, containing two spaces, one larger, the other lesser, in some void space of your Chart. 3 You must divide the said Scale into so many Miles, as the said void space will give you leave, according to the known distance first found out: As for example, the distance betwixt Paris and Roan is known to be 30 French leagues, which contains 60 of our Miles, allowing for every such league, 2 Miles. Wherefore your Parallel lines being first drawn (as you see in the former Chart) divide your Scale into 30 parts accordingly, and in the larger space, place your Numbers, as 10.20.30. and so forth, so far as your space will conveniently extend. 2 The Distance of any two places set down in the Chart, being taken and applied to the scale, will show how many miles it contains As for example, I would willingly know how many English Miles are contained betwixt Paris and Orleans in my Chart of France: Here I take with my compass the distance betwixt the said Cities in the Chart, and applying that to the Scale, I find it to contain 50 miles: which is the true measure. CHAP. V. Of Hydrography. 1 HItherto have we treated of the General Adjuncts and Proprieties of places in the Terrestrial Sphere: we are in the next place to handle the Distinction. 2 A place is generally distinguished into Water and Land: The Description of the former is termed hydrography; The other for distinction we call Pedography. 3 hydrography is a Description of the Water, with the Accidents thereunto belonging. The Water we consider not here merely Physically, as it is an Element, whereof mixed bodies are compounded; but Topographically, as it bears a part in the Terrestrial Globe: yet are we not so curious to exclude such Physical problems and considerations as are most subject to sense; which a Topographer cannot well neglect: being the marks and characters, designing out special places: To find out the original of the Water, we must first take as granted, that Almighty God (as we read in the first of Genesis) in the beginning made a separation betwixt the waters above the Firmament, and the waters under the Firmament; whereof the former is termed in the Scriptures 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which is as much to say as expansum, a thing stretched out, or extended. By these waters above the Firmament, whether we ought to understand the cloudy vapours in the middle Region of the Air: or the pure fluid and liquid body, whereof the Firmament consists; I leave it to learned divines and critic expositors to dispute: although the propriety of the phrase (if it be well rendered) will seem to favour this opinion rather than the other: for as much as the Air can no way be said to be above the Firmament, except the Hebrew term miscarry in the Translation. For the solidity of the Celestial Orbs, which Aristotle labours to confirm, is found long since to thwart the observations of Astronomers: although it may thus be retained as useful suppositions to settle Imagination. But to let this pass, and come to the waters under the Firmament, understood by the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which signifies as much as a collection of waters: we shall find them to have taken their original from the separation of the waters substance from the Dry-land, caused by God in the first Creation, testified by Moses in 1 Gen: which once granted (as no Christian can deny) easily rebates the edge of the opinion of some ancient Philosophers, who contended, out of the nature of Drought and Moisture, to derive the beginning of this separation. The dryness of the Earth (say they) working by little and little, diminisheth, or at least resisteth the waters, so that they should not altogether overwhelm the Land: But this reason is altogether deficient in Nature: Because Drought and Moisture are no such qualities to have such an operation: and if any such there were betwixt Drought and Moisture, the Drought (as we see by experience) would rather draw moisture unto it, than any way expel it, or drive it away: whence it is most evident, that it was effected by no other means then the immediate work and providence of God, for the preservation of living creatures: for, before God said; Let the waters be gathered into one place: the Water was said to cover the whole face of the Earth; but afterwards at God's appointment, the water went back, and showed the dry-land. But by what means God separated the one from the other, it is much controversed amongst Divines and Philosophers. Many were of opinion, that the Earth was suffered to stand entire without alteration, and that the waters were elevated above it; so that if they were suffered to flow abroad, they might again cover the face of the Earth, as in the beginning. But why the Waters should be thus restrained, is not agreed among them: for some thought, that this was done by the miraculous power of God, which restrains the flowing abroad of the Water, beyond ordinary bounds; of which opinion is St Jerome, who grounded his opinion (as it seems) on the authority of the Scripture, especially in the 8 of the Proverbs, and the 103 Psalm; where God is said to have set a bound upon the seas, which they should not pass: But this reason seems not warrantable; That the great Creator of all things, should in the first institution of Nature impose a perpetual violence upon Nature. Moreover all miracles are temporary, and not perpetual; for than were it ordinary, and so scarce a miracle: others upon less ground, have imagined that there are certain Northern stars in Vrsa maior and Draco, of so great virtue, that they can draw the Ocean from this habitable part of the earth toward the North, and so constrain the waters, that they cannot overwhelm the earth: but this opinion is ridiculous, and deserves no solid refutation: being a mere conjecture, without ground or probability: others upon the like reason, have dreamt that there is more Water than Earth in the Globe; and that the water by his extraordinary mass occupying the centre of the world, turns the earth on one side, making it to swim as a ship upon the sea: But this assertion we have refuted in our first Chapter of the first book: All these Authors suppose that the earth is uncovered toward the North-Pole; but overflown with waters towards the South: which the experience of Navigatours at this day hath sufficiently disannulled: Others again affirming out of a Peripatetical dream that the water is ten times greater than the earth, suppose the earth to be like a sponge to drink up the water: to prove which assertion they produce an experiment, that the earth being digged any thing deep in most places, there will appear water: whence they collect that the water is mixed with the whole earth, and received into it's concavities: But howsoever we may grant, that there are many and vast concavities in the Earth, capable of Waters; yet it is impossible, that the Water should be ten times as great as the Earth: for by this reason, although all the Terrestrial Globe were Water, it could not be, but that a greater portion of Water, then that in the Earth, should arise above the Earth: because, according to their own Supposition, 9 parts should be above the Earth: Neither can Aristotle's words be well wrested to this interpretation: For as much as he understood this tenfold proportion of the Water to the Earth; not of the spaces, which they replenished, measured by their Circles and Diameters: but of the proportion they bear one to the other in their transmutation: as that one measure of Earth turned into Water, should be as much as 10. All these opinions seeming so absurd, it seemeth more probable to imagine, that either the Waters are condensated, and thickened, which were in the beginning created thin: whence will follow, that they should occupy a less place, and by consequence, leave the dry-land in many places habitable: or, which is more probable; that God in the first Creation made certain hollow concavities and channels in the Earth, which was before plain and uniform; into which the waters were received and bounded, in so much, that they could not flow abroad. This seems enough to satisfy the search of such as are not too curious to search into his secrets, whose power and omnipotence transcends the capacity of the wisest: In this division of a place into Water, and Land, we will first treat of the Sea, and the accidents belonging thereunto: Not that the water is worthier or greater than the Earth▪ The contrary whereof we have proved heretofore: but because the consideration of it, is more simple, as that wherein fewer matters are to be handled then in the land. For Rivers and Lakes, although consisting of this watery element, we thought fit to handle apart: as adjuncts belonging to the land. 4 In the Sea are considered two things: 1 The Adjuncts, 2 The Division. The Accidents of the sea whereof we are to treat, are either Internal, or E●ternall. 5 The Internal, are such as are inbred in the Sea: These again are either Absolute or Relative. 6 The Absolute, are such as agree to the Sea, without any comparison with the land: such are either, Figure, Quality, or Motion. 7 The figure is the conformity of the external superficies of the Sea; whereof observe this Theorems. 1 Although the whole body of the water be Spherical, yet it is probable that the parts of it, incline to a conical figure. That the whole Water according to its outward superficies, i● Spherical and round, is sufficiently demonstrated before, in the first book. But notwithstanding this roundness of the whole, the parts of it may (for aught I see) admit of a conical figure; for as much as this hath little or no proportion to the vast Spheracity of the Water, no more then little hills, to the greatness of the Earth. For the prosecution of which point, I will first show the reason of this my conjecture, grounded on experience; and afterwards out of the ground and demonstration of the principles of Mathematical Philosophy, endeavour to make it more manifest. First therefore by a conical line, we understand a crooked line which differs from a Periphery or circle, in as much as it keeps not always an equal distance, from the centre: but is higher in the midst, then on either side: Now if the parts of the water standing still, were in their higher superficies exactly spherical; they should by the same grounds be concentrical, or have the same centre with the whole Earth: But that it hath not the same centre, will appear by little drops of Water falling on the ground, which incline (as we see) to a round figure; yet were it more than ridiculous to say, that this round convexity of a drop could be concentrical with the whole Earth: sith in so great a mass, it is hardly sensible. But here our ordinary Philosophers are ready to answer, that this conformity of the water drops in a round figure, is rather Violent, then Natural: because the Water being by nature moist, is ready to fly, and avoid the touch or drought, or any dry thing. And because the Water thus avoiding the drought, cannot of necessity but some way touch it, it is imagined to conform itself to that figure, whereit it may least of all touch: This is the round or Spherical figure; wherein any body contained, cannot touch a plain, otherwise then in one only point. But against this conjecture of moisture flying drought, strong enough is the experiment of Scaliger, in his 105 exercitation: that quicksilver a moist substance, being cast either into Water or Iron-Oare, will gather itself to a round body, notwithstanding it is manifest, that quicksilver naturally neither avoids the touch of Water or Iron, for as much as the one is very m●●st, the other of great affinity, (as our Chimicks teach) with quicksilver▪ the parent of all Metals. Moreover it is manifest, that this conformity to roundness, is in drops of rain falling to the Earth, through the Air: yet will not our Peripatetics admit of any drought in the Air, which this moist element should seek to avoid. Moreover if Water should conform itself to roundness, by reason of the drought of the body, whereon it fall, then must it follow; that either the moisture of the Water should expel the drought of the Earth; or else that the drought of the Earth should work on the moisture of the Water▪ But neither can be granted with probability. First because moisture and drought are not qualities of such activity to drive and remove, one the other from one place to another, as it is here imagined: Secondly; if the moist should work on the dry, it should either touch it or not: If it touches not, it cannot work on it: because no Physical action can be performed with●●t touching: beside, it were very impossible, to imagine that without thi● t●uch, one of these qualities should perceive or ●ent the other to avoid it. If it touch, it avoids not the touch, but joins itself with the drought: And indeed reason and experience shows, that dro●th rather covets and draws unto itself moisture, then expels it: wherefore Scaliger goes about to ●o●ge a new cause of this experience. Every thing (saith he) in this nature is one, and the selfsame: But this unity in Homogeneal bodies, is best preserved in a Globe or round figure: wherein is no inequality, no parts higher or lower, abounding or deficient. But her● might a man ask why the greater parts of the Water are not likewise conformed unto roundness, as well as the lesser drop; He would perhaps answer, that nature in them was not in such distress, to make use of this special privilege; I grant it: yet find I in this no satisfaction; for as much as he gives a final cause, where I sought an efficient▪ for I would farther ask by what action or motion this water should gather itself into a circular figure, and from what form it should arise: for first we have showed, that this motion cannot proceed from the external drought, we must seek the cause in the water itself: here we shall find it, either the particular form of the water, or a certain universal form, as some suppose it cannot be imagined, that it should proceed from the general form of the universe: First, because as we have elsewhere proved, there is no such Internal form of the world: Secondly, those motions are commonly ascribed to an universal Nature or form, wherein any particular body (as it were) neglects his own Nature, for the preservation of the whole Universe. But here water containing itself in an orb, and not ●lowing abroad towards the Centre, rather seems to forsake the Centre and Universe to preserve itself. Whence we must necessarily conclude, that this roundness in drops of water cast on the sand, proceeds not from external drought, nor any vni●ers●ll form, but from the special and essential form of the water; and consequently, because it makes a circle excentrical with the Earth, it must be found rising higher in the midst: To which we will add another experiment: Let there be cast on a large Table or plank, a little portion or drop of water: I here ask, whither this water on the midst of the Table equilibrated, will continually flow abroad, or at length suffer a stay or stop? It cannot be continually spread abroad: first, because experience teacheth the contrary; for we see little drops cast on such a plain, to confine themselves within certain bounds: and lest any should imagine (as before) that this happens by reason of the drought of the Table, let him first moisten the Table, and he shall find no great alteration: Secondly, if the water should always fall downward, and so still run abroad, and spread itself to the margins of the Table, it would follow, that if the Table were of an infinite capacity, the water thus shed, would infinitely flow abroad, without intermission; and so should Nature set no bound to the thickness and motion of the water: whereof experience hath sufficiently taught the contrary. Now, that water thus standing still on a plain equilibrated Table, should have a Canonical figure, it may be plainly proved almost by sense, whereby we perceive the middle to be higher than the extremes: for no man can deny but the water thus standing, is endowed with thickness, for as much as it is a natural body. Wherefore of necessity it must swell above the Table. It cannot be Spherically concentrical with the whole Earth, because in so small a segment of an Arch, as this little quantity of water admits, it would be insensible. It cannot be plain, because the sides or extremities of it touch the Table, whereas the middle superficies, by reason of the thickness, is elevated above the Table. Neither can we imagine another figure beside, which can aptly be admitted. It is meet in the next place, that out of the grounds of Philosophy, we explain how it comes to participate this figure: where we are first to understand, that the figure of the water is (as it were) compounded of two spheres; whereof the first is imagined to be concentrical with the whole Earth; the other lesser only answering to the portion or quantity of water, were it made round; for if we consider the simple and particular nature of the water, we shall find it inclining to roundness of itself, as we have showed by experiment▪ yet such a sensible roundness, as cannot have one Centre with the Earth. But if we consider the water as it concurres to the constitution of the whole Universe, we shall find this Figure to partake of a circular segment concentricke with the whole Earth. Now because neither of these two Figures can precisely and exactly arise by itself, sith the one must needs some what alter the other, we must of necessity admit of a figure mixed and compounded of both these; which can be no other than a Cone. To express this more plainly (because this path is yet untrodden) we find in the water a double motion directed to this double figuration. The first whereof is that, whereby all the parts of a quantity of water, are inclined to an Absolute roundness, or Spherical Figure, without respect of the Universe: the Centre of which roundness, is to be sought in the water itself. The later is that, whereby the parts of the Water conforming themselves to the Centre of the Earth, as near as they can, make a Spherical figure (as much as Nature can suffer) concentricke with the whole Terrestrial Globe. In the former of these motions, the Water seeks its own preservation; in the later, the safety of the whole Universe: for the safety and consistency of the whole, is derived from the part, which concur to preserve the whole. To express a little better the manner of these two concurrent operations; we will take for an undoubted ground, That God hath given to Nature a power and inclination to preserve herself. This granted, we must distinguish of a twofold preservation: the one Special, wherein every Body seeks its own safety: the other General, wherein all Bodies concur to the preservation of the whole: The former proceeds from the special Form and Nature of every Body; which is performed by the union of all his parts to itself; this union is greatest of all in a Spherical figure; wherein all the extreme parts are equally distant from the Centre, admitting no Equality of dimension. The General depends from the Resultancy and Harmony of all the parts, whereby is caused an union of all the parts with the whole; to whose preservation they are secondarily directed: whence ariseth a double figurature of the water; the one of a Sphere, excentrical with the Earth: the other also of a Sphere, but concentricke with the Earth; whereof this conical figure is compounded. Why this figure should be more sensible in a small drop or quantity, then in the Ocean, may be declared from the same ground well understood; because the convexity of the lesser Sphere excentricke with the Earth, is more; and the greater, is less: for by how much the lesser is the Sphere, the greater will be the convexity: and by how much greater the Sphere, the lesser will the be convexity, or crookedness. Wherefore this crookedness being in a small measure of water very sensible, in a main Ocean will by sense be hardly distinguished from a right line. 8 Of the Figure of the Water we have spoken: We must now speak of the Quality, which is twofold: Saltness, and Thickness. 1 The Water of the Sea is salt, not by Nature, but by Accident. That the Sea is of a saltish Quality, no man hath ever doubted, at least in most parts: But whether this saltish Quality, essentially agrees to the centre of the Sea, as therein created, or else Accidentally brought in, I find no small difference among Philosophers. Those which defend the saltishness to be Accidental, are divided into diverse sorts: for some of the old Philosophers imagined, that the Earth chased and Heat with the Sun, continually sweats out water: whence is made the Sea, and therefore should have a saltish taste, because all sweat is of this Quality: But this opinion I take to be no other than a pleasant Allegory of the old Greek writers, who wrote their Philosophy in verse, and therefore used such allusions, as we shall perhaps find in many other matters, poëtically devised of them; yet refuted of Aristotle in good earnest: others have more probably conjectured, that this saltishness was first derived from the Earth, through whose parts the Water being strained, is apt to receive this Quality, being primarily in the Earth itself: as we see water being wrung through ashes, to grow salt: but this opinion seemeth of no great soundness; because the first Rivers and Lakes being drawn out of the Earth altogether, and in regard of their small quantity, more apt to yield and receive this tincture, are notwithstanding devoid of all such Quality. Besides this, we rather find the contrary by experiment: That Sea-Water strained through clay, will turn fresh: as likewise powdered flesh being laid to soak ●n salt water, will soon turn sweet: The former is verified by Baptista Porta: of the other, every kitchenmaid on the Seaside will inform us. The third opinion is of Aristotle, who refers the saltish quality of the Sea-water to the Sun, as the chief cause, drawing and lifting up out of the Sea store of exhalations, which afterwards mixed with vapours, fall down again by drops: for the Sun draws up the thinner and fresher parts of the water, leaving the thicker and lower water to suffer adustion of the Sunbeams, and so consequently to become salt: so that the matter of this saltishness in the Sea, is by an exhalation: the Sun drawing up to the middle Region of the Air, the fresher parts; where thickened, they descend in rain, leaving the residue of the Sea salt. The form is the straining and concoction, which is made by the Sun; for the saltishnes is said to arise out of the commixtion of Terrestrial dryness, concurring with moisture, joined with adustion of Heat: so that two things are chiefly concurring to the Generation of saltishness; to wit, Drought and Adustion. This seems to be proved by instance of Fresh-waters in the kitchen, which turn salt, being much boiled, because the thinner and sweeter vapours of it are drawn up, and dissipated, leaving that behind which is thicker and saltish. The same would some have in the Sea, seethed (as it were) and burnt with the Heat, which we experimentally find in hot water on the fire. But this is excepted against by some, because we find by experience, that many salt wells and fountains arise in diverse places of the Earth, which are engendered in the bowels of the Earth far remote and separate from this extreme heat and adustion of the Sunbeams: But to this we may easily answer, that such salt springs are either by some violence enforced from the sea by certain secret caverns, and hollow places of the Earth: or else that they receive their tincture of saltness from some salt minerals of the Earth, through which they pass. Wherefore this opinion of Aristotle I see not yet sufficiently refuted. The other opinion concerning this quality of such, which would have it essential to the sea water, and inbred in the first creation, is grounded on two small causes: First they say that the sea is salt, for the preservation of the Fishes, who would otherwise rot, because experience shows, that Fish will soon putrify without salt; but this is thwarted by three reasons: First, because if fish were in this sort salted in the sea Water, the cook might save himself a labour in salting them again in his kitchen: Also Fish's caught in the sea, are oftentimes preserved longer and sweeter, less needing salt then those which are found in fresh Ponds and Rivers: Secondly, if this reason should hold currant, why should not the Fishes also rot and putrify in fresh Water? Thirdly, why should fishes covet the fresh Water (as we see by experience in many fishes) if in it they should suffer putrefaction, which is a great enemy to nature; Above all what need we fear this putrefaction of fishes, while they are endowed with a living soul, which is a greater preservative than all the salt in the world; or why should we not doubt the same calamity in all living creatures in the land, which are as subject to rottenness in the Air, as the other on the land? The second cause (say they) Why the sea should be created salt, is; Because the sea itself should not putrify, for as much as we find by experience, that salt is the only thing to resist Putrefaction; But here we may demand; why these Authors should fear Putrefaction in the vast body of the sea, rather than in other Waters and Rivers, which are neither salt, nor come near the greatness of the Ocean; whereas Aristotle affirms in the fifth chapter of the 4 book of his Meteors, that if the Sea were d●uided into many parts, it would more easily dissolve and putrify. The grounds of this opinion being overthrown, there want not reasons to contradict: First (says one) if the Sea were not created salt, then was there some time wherein it was fresh: To this I answer two ways: First, that it might be created fresh, yet being apt from the heat of the Sun to receive saltness, it might, almost at the first receive it. Secondly, if I should grant that it was a long time before it embraced this quality, I know neither History to confute me, or reason to convince me. Secondly, it is urged from the Nature of living creatures in the Sea, that they cannot well live in fresh waters, and therefore it seems originally salt, and not by Accident: But this is of no great force: First, because experience shows, that many kind of fishes live in both, and many rather covet and desire the fresh Water, than the Sea: Secondly, it is not improbable, that as the Sea by little and little and by degrees turned from freshness to saltness, the temper and disposition of the fishes, was in like manner changed and altered: Whence it may come to pass, that fishes since bred and nourished in fresh Waters, cannot so well endure the salt. Moreover who knows whether all these several kinds of fishes now found in the Sea, were from the beginning, since we see by experience, that sundry kinds of living creatures daily arise out of putrefaction on the land, which may with like probability, or more, be admitted in the Sea. There are yet behind other reasons of one Patricius a Platonist, who would oppose Aristotle in good earnest. Aristotle (saith he) speaking of the saltness of the Sea Water, showed not the cause. For I would ask, why that parcel of water, from whence the thinner parts are extracted, should remain salt: was it so from the beginning, or afterwards impressed; was it Inbred, or Accidental? If he would have it an inbred quality from the beginning, he vainly goes about to seek out the cause; If the saltness be adventitious, the cause is to be given; but the cause given by him, is not true, for as much as it rather takes away the saltness: But to these objections of Patricius, spun out in many words, we may answer two ways: either that the saltness is merely adventitious bred by an exhalation, drawn up by the Sun, and so distilling down again; or else, because this answer seems not wholly to satisfy. For as much as rainy Water is seldom salt, and if it were, could hardly flow in so great quantity to feed the saltness of the Sea: I will answer secondly, that the saltness is radically or originally in the matter of the Water; yet so, as it cannot be drawn out and sensibly be perceived in the mixture of many sweet humours, joined with it, without a separation first made by the heat of the Sun of the thinner parts from the thicker: So that the Sun is a disponent, though not a productive cause of this saltness in the Sea. 2 Seas absolutely salt, are never frozen. This may seem a Paradox to some men, in regard that amongst our Geographers, we have so often mention made of Mare Congelatum, taking its name from the Ice wherewith it is shut up from passage: as also for that in the voyages of Frobisher, Davis', Hudson, and other later Navigatours, which have been employed in the search of the Northwest passage, we find such strange relations, not only of Seas closed up with Ice, and hindering their passage towards the North; but also of Rocks and Lands of Ice, of an incredible greatness. The truth of these Relations I no way disapprove, but rather out of these testimonies, approve our former assertion; that Seas which are wholly Salt, are never found to freeze: For first whereas it is called Mare Congelatum, it may bear the n●me well enough from the multitude of Ice floating on the water, or collected into a Rock or Island. This Ice (as it will easily appear) is not produced out of the substance of the Salt water of the main Ocean, but rather carried into the Sea by great rivers of fresh water running into the Ocean: For the rivers are not always frozen; but sometimes by a remission of the cold are thawed, and the pieces broken a sunder▪ and floating into the Sea, in it oft times meet in great heaps, which may be proved: 1 In that these great r●cks of Ice melting with the heat of the Sun, have dissolved into fountains of fresh water, gushing down in great abundance, wherewith sometimes in case of necessity, they have fraughted their ships, as we have testified by the forenamed Navigatours. 2 Because some part of the main Sea, situate perhaps more Northern, and in a colder Climate, suffers not this accident: whereas places near the shore, farther South▪ are almost always frozen: The reason whereof, is; because the Sea near the shore is commonly mixed with fresh waters, conveyed in, either by great Rivers, or infinite secret passages under ground, which we see not: The reason why that salt waters exclude this propriety incident or the fresh, I take to be the Hot-spirits, hid in the salt humour, which are more fervent and operative, than those of the fresh water. 9 So much for the saltness: The next, is the Thickness: whereof we will set down this short Theorem. 1 The Water of the Sea is thicker than other Water. This Proposition hath its light from the former: because thickness of Water is a companion of the saltness, as depending from the same cause, to wit, the exhalation, and extraction of the thinner parts of the Water. There are many small causes given by Patricius of this thickness of the Sea-Water. F●●st, because the parts of it should more strongly hold together, and not cover and overflow the firm land: But this seems to be grounded on an error, that the Water should be above the Land; and that it should contain itself within its own bounds and limits, which opinion we have elsewhere rejected. The second cause of the thickness of the Sea, is; that it might be more apt to bear and carry ships, and other great weights for the use of man. Thirdly, the Water being thick, may more easily be converted into salt, out of which, many saltish minerals in the Earth are engendered. Other causes are given by this Author, but less forceable, which we will omit, as referring them to the Philosopher, whose proper task it is to seek them out. CHAP. VI Of the Motions of the Sea. 1 THe Motion of the Sea, whereof we are in this Chapter to treat, is either Natural, or Violent. The Natural I call that, which is partly incident to the Natural Disposition of the Sea. 2 This again is twofold, either General, or Special: General is that which agrees generally to all, or at least to most parts of the Sea: such as is the Ebbing and Flowing of the Sea. We must here observe, that the Water hath a twofold Motion; The first is common to all heavy Bodies, as well as the Earth, in which is an inclination to come as near as they can to the Centre of the Earth, whereof we have spoken in our former book: The second is that which more properly agrees to the Sea, which is again twofold: either the Natural, or the Violent. The Natural, howsoever requi●ing perhaps the concurrence of some external cause, is notwithstanding so called; for as much as it chiefly seems to proceed from the Disposition of the Sea-water; The Violent is caused merely by the violence of the winds moving the Ocean. The Natural motion we have again divided into general, or special; because the Afflux, and Reflux of the Sea, whereof we are to treat, is general throughout the whole Ocean, (some petty creeks perchance excepted) whereas the Currents, (which is the second kind of motion) are more special, as agreeing not to all, or most parts (as it seems) but to some one or other special place, as we shall show. 1 The Sea twice every day ebbs and flows. The flowing and ebbing of the Sea, howsoever it cannot be precisely observed in all Seas; yet because few places of the main Ocean are exempted from it, deserves the first & chiefest consideration. That such a motion there is, experience shows; but the searching out of the cause, is, for aught I can observe, one of the greatest difficulties in all Natural Philosophy▪ in so much as Aristotle one of the acutest Philosophers, is reported to have stood amazed at the flowing and ebbing of Euripus, and despairing of finding out the cause, at length enforced to cast himself into the River which had before confounded him. Wherefore it may seem sufficient for me to trace their steps, who have waded far into the search of this cause, having very little hope to go further. The first opinion was of the Stoics, who supposed the whole World to be a great living creature, composed of divers Elements, which enjoys both breath and life: This living creature they imagine to have his nostrils placed in the main Ocean, where by drawing in, and sending forth breath, the ebbing and flowing of the Sea is caused: but this seemeth rather to be a Poetical fiction, or Allegory then any conceit of a Philosopher. Apollonius Tianaeus was of an opinion, that certain Spirits eitherunder, or above the Water, breathed into it this motion. Timaeus taught the cause of this moisture to be the river, breaking into the Ocean by the great mountains; Plato thought that it was made by the swallowing up of the Sea into a gulf or hole which being again cast out, was the cause of that motion in the Sea. Selevous the Mathematician, which affirmed that the Earth was carried round with a perpetual motion, thought that the Moon was turned round with a motion contrary to the motion of the Earth, and from this to proceed that motion of ebbing and flowing of the Sea, whereof we now treat. What Aristotle's opinion was concerning this matter, is an uncertain conjecture; forasmuch as little or nothing can be gathered touching this point in controversy out of any book, which is certainly known to be Aristotle's: for the tract of the propriety of Elements, where the cause of this motion is ascribed to the Moon, is judged to be none of Aristotle's, but of some later Author. Yet Plutarch imposeth on Aristotle this opinion; that this motion of the Sea should come from the Sun, because by it are raised up many windy exhalations, which should cause the Sea to swell, blowing into the great Atlantic Ocean. But thisopinion is charged by Pa●ricius of a threefold error: 1. That it should proceed from the Sun; 2▪ From the wind; 3 That it is only in the Atlantic Sea. He saw (saith Patricius) that in the Atlantic, which he could not in the Aegean Sea at home and near Athens. For 1 No wind blows so regularly, that for one six hours it should blow forward, the other six hours backward: for the wind oftentimes blows many days the same way without ceasing; yet is their not one only flowing or one ebbing in the Sea. 2. The Sun stirs up sometimes winds, and sometimes stirs them not up. But of a perpetual effect which is daily, why would this Philosopher give a cause merely violent, and not quotidian, which notwithstanding would have nothing violent to be perpetual? If the Sea be somewhere moved naturally by other motions, as the Euripus, (which is said to be his death) wherefore will he deny this motion to be Natural, seeking out an external cause of this effect? But all this while our Platonic Philosopher seems to fight with shadows: for what judicious man can imagine so judicious and wise a Philosopher as Aristotle, should so grossly overshoot himself to father this opinion? I should much rather believe that no such opinion is to be found in Aristotle, at least that it is indirectly related: which I the rather believe, because one Caesalpinus a late Writer, aswell opposite to Aristotle, as the other hath related Aristotle's opinion otherwise; to wit, that the ebbing and flowing of the Sea is derived from a double cause: whereof the one is the multitude of Rivers bringing in a great force of waters into it: whence it comes to pass that it flows only towards one pa●t, which is the lower, as it happens to the Mediterranean; For the Egaean and Pontic Sea, with Maeotis, flow into the Tyrrhene, and not on the opposite side: The other cause he makes to be the libration of the whole Sea: for it is often turned from one side to the other, which in so great a vastness seems but little; but in straits & narrow places much more. So that Aristotle (saith Caesalpinus) would have that to agree to the Sea, which usually happens to a pair of balance: which having received the beginning once of their motion, are inclined sometimes this way, & sometimes that way, by reason of the equality of the weight: for if the weight of one should overcome, thewhole would incline thatway, and would not ri●e upon the other side. But against this opinion imposed on Aristotle, Caesalpinus not without good reason, excepts, that the Superficies of the Water being Equidistant from the Centre (as is supposed by Geographers) no reason may be given why it should incline more to one side then another, having once obtained his true place: sith according to Aristotle's own grounds, no violence c●n be perpetual. To which I may add another answer, that no satisfactory reason can be alleged, why it should always observe so true and just periods of time in its motion: sith all Rivers are sometimes increased, and other times diminished according to the season of the year, and variety of the weather: wherefore the said Author, which impugns this opinion, hath framed another conceit, grounded on the circular motion of the Earth, which he explaineth in this sort. It agrees ●o reason (saith he) that the Water should not altogether follow the motion of the Earth, but should in part be driven back, and in part flow beside: for since it is of a moist nature▪ while the Earth is carried from the Air about it, the Water i● somewhat left behind; as we may see in a small vessel, which is mo●e la●ge then deep: for if it be moved forward, the Water will leap back to the opposite part, & will oftentimes poise itself hither & thither, seeking an aequilibration: when therefore the Earth is a little carried forward, & the water (as it were) left behind, being out of his Aequilibrium, or aquall poise, it will run to the other part, but beyond the true poise▪ forth violence of the motion oppressed into it in the beginning, from thence, for the same cause, it will tend again to the opposite part, doing this oftentimes, seeking an equal weight, wherein it may rest: so that if the Earth should at any times rest from her natural motion, the Water would also leave off the Libration to and fro. But because the circumvolution of the Earth is imagined to be perpetual, the libration of the sea is also per petual: so far forth then that this motion is of the continent or Earth, it is only accidental in the Water, neither besides his proper nature, neither according to nature: But so far forth as the Water is in some sort moved in the Earth, it may be said to be according to nature: for it always seeks the lower place, because it cannot equally follow the motion of the Earth. Hence they give the reason, why this motion is not perceived in Lakes and Rivers, as well as in the main Ocean: for sith the motion of the Earth is not very sensible, it cannot be perceived but in a great mass of waters. The reasons to confirm this opinion, besides the refutation of other opinions, are chiefly these two. If the Water by itself should be moved without the motion of the Earth, it must needs be moved either according to, or against his nature. But neither of them can be granted; First, if according to Nature, there would not be one only motion of one body according to nature, but many, which is denied by Ar●stotle; If beside, or against Nature, some violent motion would be perpetual, which also seems absurd: wherefore it must needs follow, that the sea should move accidentally: For sith the Water is contained outwardly of the Air, internally of the Earth: And that part of the Air which toucheth the Water is of Aristotle called Stagnans or standing still, not flowing, as that which is above the Earth, but is only troubled variously with winds. This libration or motion of the Water cannot be caused by the wind or Air, wherefore it must proceed from the motion of the Earth. The second reason may be drawn from the quantity of tides in diverse places of the Earth, for it is ●ound by experience, that the Water swells higher & greater in the main Ocean, then in other lesser Seas. For it is observed, that about great Britain, it mounts sometimes above 80 cubits: also it oftener ebbs and flows in lesser currents, because the spaces of this libration are shorter and stra●ghter: or because besides the motion of ebbing and flowing, which the Mediterranean seas partake from the Ocean, at Hercules' Pillars, they have a proper libration in their own channels: whence it comes to pass that▪ in some narrow seas, as in the Euripus, besides Euboia, the sea seven times a day ebbs and flows: whereof there can no sufficient reason be given from the motion of the Moon or other cause whereto other Philosophers ascribe this effect: This opinion of Caesalpinus seems to carry great likelihood of reason and congruity with experience: yet because it is grounded on the circular motion of the Earth, which seems a paradox to most men, I dare not warrant it otherwise then probable▪ neither can it well stand with the grounds of our Magnetical Philosophers, because they affirm the whole sphere of the Earth and Water together with the Air to move round with one Uniform revolution, in such sort as one should not move to the opposite part, or stay behind the other; as they would have it here to do. There is yet another opinion more commonly defended in the schools of natural Philosopher's; that this motion of the sea is to be ascribed to the Moon, as the principal cause: others again, as they admit the Moon to have her operation in this effect, join other causes to it: and indeed this seems more probable: for there want not arguments in Patricius and other later writers, to show that the Moon cannot be the sole cause of this motion: First, because this motion is not observed in all seas, Lakes, and Rivers, whereupon nevertheless the Moon hath the like dominion: But experience shows the contrary: for besides fresh Rivers it is manifest by observation of travellers, that this ebbing and flowing is not to be found in the Hirc●●, Mantian and Dead sea, also in Maotis Palus in the Pontic: Proponti●ke, Ligurian and Narbon straights, neither in the Tyrrhene sea: Moreover it is not observed in a great part of the Red sea: Neither can the Narrowness of the channel excuse it, because these seas are great, and also for the most part within the Tropic of Cancer, and therefore exposed sometimes to the perpendicular beams of the Moon. Secondly: If the Moon should by her own ●orce excite and move these water●, then would it move those seas, which it doth move, Altogether and not only in parts. The contrary whereof we may find: First in the Red Sea, which in the beginning and end, Ebbs and flows, but in the middle not at all▪ moreover the Mediterranean sea ebbs & flows as one sea, on all the coasts of Africa, wherein it is in a sort divided▪ and yet those seas, with which it is joined, as the Tyrrhene, Ligurian, and Gallican Seas, feel not any such motion. Thirdly; it is objected, that if the Moon were the only cause of this Fl●x and Reflux of the sea, than those seas, which are said in whole to move, should equally flow in height: but this is contradicted by experience: because some flow higher, and some lower, As for example: The Adriatic sea in the inmost creek near Venice swells near four foot in height; but the rest of it, not above two ●oote: which increase is likewise observed in the Aegean, Cretian, Ionian, and Cyprian Seas, also the Syrian and Egyptian, even to Portus Ferinae: But from mons pulcher to the Herculean straights, it increaseth above two foot in length: But without these straits, the same Ocean by the coasts of Portugal and Biscay, and France, the Sea riseth usually to 15 foot in height; and near the coasts of Belgia and Britain 18 foot: At the confines of Bristol to 60, and thence to the borders of S. Michael to 60: But at the coasts of Aethiopia, near the Atlantic shores, it riseth not higher than in the Adriatic Sea: But near the Lands of Madera, the Canaries, and S. Thomas, it surpasseth not the height of Venice: But in America, on the hithermost coast from Florida Sinus Mexicanus, the coasts of Brasile and Pari●, more than three thousand leagues, even to the Magellane straits it increaseth almost to two Palms breadth: but farther South to Panama, and all those Southern shores, the ebbing and flowing is of an excessive height, as may appear by the coasts of Cambaia, India, and Taprobana: Thirdly, if the Moon by a natural virtue should move the Waters of the Sea, then would it move the Ocean and the Mediterranean Seas in the course of winds, with the same Flux and Reflux in the same winds. But this thwarts experience, which is thus proved: The Mediterranean Sea, when as it flows in the Adriaticke, Ionian, and Sicilian Seas, the Water flows towards the Land, when the Moon is (as the Mariners speak) in Sirocco and in Maestro; but ebbs or flows back from the Land, when it is in Graeco atque Garbinio: And chose the Ocean swells when the Moon is in Graece and Garbinio; but assuageth itself again when it is carried in Sirocco and Maestro. Fourthly, if the ebbing and flowing of the Sea should follow the Moon, than all places in the same distance should ebb & flow alike at like hours. But the contrary is proved by an experiment of Patricius, who reports, that at the same hour places distant 20 degrees, have been seen to ebb or flow alike, and the places betwixt also to vary and observe no just proportion. Fourthly, if these Surges should be stirred up by the Moon, than the same superficies of the Water the same hour should be carried by the Moon: but this i● contrary to the observations of Mariners, who have observed, that on the Norman coasts, and that of Picardy to Calais, the Tide happeneth the ninth hour from Midnight: but ten miles from the shore not a full hour, but at the twenty and sixth mile from the middle of the channel, and under the same Meridian at 22 hours. Fiftly, if the ebbing and flowing should proceed from the Moon, then should the Water at the same hours increase and decrease: but this is opposite to observation: for at Venice the Sea is known to flow sometimes for seven, sometimes for eight; but ebbs in fewer hours, But about the mouth of the River Senega in the Atlantic, it is coming in foore hours, but goes not back under eight: so about Go●umniae Ostia, the Tide is coming in seven hours, but goes back in five. Sixtly, if the Waters flow by the Moon, then should they be drawn and carried by the light of the Moon: because all action is by a touching, and the Moon toucheth the Water by her light: but it is found by experience, that at midnight, when the Moon is most distant in her light, our seas do no less ebb and flow then when it is present: & so the Seas near the Antipodes do ebb & flow, when the Moon is present with us. 7ly, if the Moon were the only ancient cause of this motion, than the same light being present the same agē● moving, the same effect should necessarily follow. But we find that it produceth two, contrary one to the other: because in her ascent to the Meridian it is supposed to lift up the water, but a little declining from the Meridian, it is thought to depress & assuage the waters, 8ly if this effect were ascribed to the light of the Moon, then when the Moon shines not, there should be no such motion▪ because contrary causes produce contrary effects. But we observe the same ebbing & flowing in the conjunction or New Moon, when she hath no light, as in the full Moon, when with full face she beholds the Sea: for in both these times we have highest ●ides These & many more arguments are urged by Patricius, to show that the Moon cannot be the cause of this motion in the Sea: of the other opinion, that this effect is ascribed to the Sun▪ amongst. others I find the chief patron to be T●●esius, who taught that the Sea was moved in this wise, because it would avoid the operation of the Sun, fearing lest it should be too much dissolved into vapours, and so perish. But this opinion seemeth far more weak than the former. For first I would ask concerning this motion, wherein it is thought to avoid the Sun's heat, whether it be voluntary, or necessary? It cannot be Voluntary, o● a free action, because the Sea is no living creature, to which only such a motion is incident: If it be necessary, than it is Natural or Violent: It cannot be Natural, because according to Aristotle, one Body can have but one natural motion, but the Water being a simple Body, hath another motion to fall downwards towards the Centre: wherefore it cannot also admit of this. It cannot be violent▪ first, because no violent thing can be perpetual. Secondly▪ no cause can be thought upon external▪ which should cause this violent motion: and if any such cause there be found, then is not this of Telesius the first and principal cause, sith it is referred to a farther cause: Thirdly, no cause can here be shown according to this opininion, why all other waters, as fresh Rivers, should not likewise strive to ●ide themselves from the face of the Sun. Fourthly, he should give a reason why in the Belgic and Armoricke shores▪ which are far more distant from the Sun, the same motion is no less eminent than in Taprobana, which is subject to the Torride Zone; and why in the Island of S. Thomas, which is immediately under the Equatour, there is not a greater working of the Water then at Venice. Fifthly, that which Telesius brings to confirm his opinion, is no less warrantable than the main point in controversy. In the Summer (saith he) the floods are lesser▪ because the Sun raiseth up thinner vapour●, which are easily dissolved: But in the Winter they are less, because the Sun is of least force, and so raiseth up fewer vapours to work upon the Sea: But both these matters are proved ●alse by experience: first because in the Summer we have as great a working of the water as at other times: In the Winter also as great, or greater. Secondly (saith the said Author) in the full Moon the motion is greater, because the much light arising from the Moon, draws up many vapours. 〈◊〉 the New Moon; because the Air being refrigerated, the internal Heat of the sea collecting itself, is made stronger with more vapours: In the quarters of the Moon, because there is not much light ca●t from the Moon, and the Heat of the sea is not so much collected by the external cold of the Air: To all these matters we may easily answer: First, how can the Moon bestow any light on our seas, when she is with the Antipodes? Secondly, where he saith, that the internal Heat is gathered together, and made stronger by external cold; 1 First I ask how the sea can send forth these vapours; if the vapours kept under do raise the sea up; or if the Sea swell with these vapours in her womb, how can she let them out? 2 How will he prove the Sea naturally to be hot, sith it is one of the cold Elements? Thirdly, where he saith, that the light of the Moon is but in half imparted to the Sea; why should not the Sea proportionally in half be stirred up? wherefore Patricius and Casman finding neither the Sun nor the Moon of itself to be a sole or sufficient cause of this motion▪ having joined them both together in this causality, and added besides other particular causes: first (say they) there are two kind of causes concurring to that effect: either Universal and external; or Particular, internal and next causes. The Universal causes are two; to wit, the Sun and the Moon. The Sun (saith he) with the heat of his beams and light doth conserve, vivificate, and stir up to action; the Internal and original heat in all things here below. This Heat being stirred up and vivificated, all things are made fit for motion▪ and being so accommodated, are stirred up to motion, as if from an Internal life they should be promoted to an external: for as in the primary life of things, the motion and action is shown: in the Essence, in the secondary, the action and motion outwardly in respect of other things: so the first and original heat of the Sea▪ cherished, & stirred up by the external heat of the Sun, drives the Ocean, and moves it to action▪ The Moon also cherisheth, preserveth, vivificates, nourisheth, and stirs up to motion, all these earthly humours and moistures: and as she daily by hours beholds the Sun as her darling and by him is (as it were) big-bellied with lively seeds, so she beholds her love, the Ocean, days and nights, and fills the Ocean with these seeds which she receives from the Sun. But this cannot be performed without her motion, without the diffusion of her light, without the effusion of her influence & seeds; wherefore it cannot otherwise be, but all our humours and moistures should be made fruitful, conceive life, bring forth, bear fruit, and be stirred up to life and motion, by the motion of the Moon, through the Aspect of the Moon with the Sun, with the Earth, with the Ocean: wherefore all lower moistures are subject to the power of the Moon: Notwithstanding all are not equally under her dominion; sith all are not of the same substance, of the same Rarity, or density, or of the same Heat. reasons all ●aged from the Caspian Sea, may be ascribed to the thickness of the water, not suffering any thing to sink into it: So that for the crassitude of it, it must needs be heavier than other Water, and so, more unapt for motion. Thirdly, it is recorded by some that in the inmost creek of the Red sea there is a motion▪ and so in the mouth of it, by reason of the Ocean; but in the middle no such matter is to be observed: which strange effect some ascribe to the Thinness of the Water (one of the cause● above named) begetting fewer and weaker Vapours and Spirits: which either straightway breath out, or are too weak to raise up the Water. This thinness is confirmed to be in that middle part of the Red sea, not only out of the authority of john Barro, out of the experiments of john de Castro, which found this Water to be clear and liker to Crystal, then that of other parts; but also by the clear perspicuity of it: For in almost all the sea may the bottom plainly be seen. Fourthly, we read the like of the Baltic sea: that it never ebbs or flows, which Bartholomew Kackerman, that countryman, ascribed, 1. To the Narrowness of the channel: 2. To the depth of it,. 3. To the northern situation: which cause I think he might well have spared, considering that more Northern seas then that, both ebb and flow. Fiftly: it is reported of Maotis, Pontus, and Proppotis, that they flow from the one to the other, but never ebb: For Maotis flows into the Pontic sea as from the Higher place into the lower: and the Pontic into the Propontick, & Aegean for the same cause, but return not back again. But besides this cause of this declinity of the ground, it stands with reason, that the Water should be fresher than that in other places of the sea: For first, all of them receive into them many and great Rivers of fresh Water: for Maotis Palus, besides other partakes of Tanais. Into Pontus' fall according to Arcanus report about 52 fresh Rivers: whereof the chief are Ister, Hispanis, Boristhenes, Tanais, Phasis, all great currents. Secondly the forenamed fishes, which delight in fresh springs are here also found in abundance, Besides this freshness (if we believe ancient writers, as Pliny and others) it is a sea of extraordinary depth, so that for this cause some part of it was called Negrepont, or the blacke-sea: Which blackness was by some, thought to arise from the depth of it: wherein in many places, they could sound no bottom. Sixtly, it is testified of the Tyrrhene, Ligurian, and Narbon seas, that they suffer not this motion: The cause of which is only ascribed to the extreme depth; for few or no Rivers are disburdened into it, except Rhodanus: We are in the next place to show, why this working of the sea is more in one place then in another: The reasons whereof (although many be thought on) are chiefly reduced either to the excess of saltness in the water, or the narrowness of the channel, into which from an open place the sea is to be disburdened, or the shallowness of the shore: All which either concurring together, or taken by themselves apart, may cause the sea to swell more in one place than another; which may, as the former, be proved by divers Instances. Four Seas are more particularly noted to flow and swell higher than other. The first is that compasseth about Europe▪ from Hercules pillars, which according to divers shores, takes divers names; as the Portugal, Cantabrian, Gallican, Belgic, and British Seas. And in the New World, or America, the Southern Sea shall be the second: The third is that of Cambaia and India: The fourth is that, which compasseth about Taprobana: for the three last, the causes fore-specified, seem manifestly to concur: for Taprobana is reported by Pliny to have a shore not above six paces deep, and the Sea to be green and overgrown with weeds, in so much that the tops of the weeds fret their ships; and later Writers report, that the Land is known to augment the confines by reason of the shallowness of the Water: so as we have showed that some Seas neither ebb nor flow by reason of the depth of the channel; so on the other side must it follow, that other Seas ebb and flow more by reason of the shortness and shallowness of the shores: for of contrary c●uses proceed ordinarily contrary effects. Moreover it stands with experience, that in any Water or Sea, where the flood is stopped and hindered by quicksands, it returns with greater force, as it were enraged, and swel● so much the higher, which is the cause why in the coasts of Cambaia it is li●ted up so high, because the shores are so shallow, and so short, and exposed to impediments, that in the ebbs, the Sea ●●ns back many miles, & leaves the sand● uncovered: Whence it must needs return with greater violence. This also is found in the Indian Sea, and near Panama in the Southern Sea, where the Sea running back for two leagues, certain Lands and Lands are left naked; so that in these three Seas here named, the Sea seems to enlarge its limits in breadth more than in other places; to which we may ascribe this effect. For the Seas about Europe, we may pronounce also that for the most part they have short & shallow shores, as may easily appear in the confines of Belgia: But it may be objected of the English shores, that they swell very high, albeit the depth of the Water in the middle is found to be 144 foot: Here must we have recourse to the other cause, the flowing of a large & wide sea into a narrow channel: for the large torrents of water running swiftly into a narrow channel, being hindered on both sides by the shores, from spreading itself in breadth, is enforced to swell in height: so that the effect is rather to be ascribed to the violence of a gre●t current, enbosoming itself into a streite channel: which may more evidently show itself in 3 instances: For in the streite channels of Zealand and Holland it is lifted up about three foot: At Bristol in England, by reason of a greater force of Waters running from the Sea into a more narrow channel, and seconded by the main Ocean at the back, it swells to the height of 60 foot: In the Armorean seas, where larger seas are emptied into more narrow streites then the former, it increaseth to 90 foot: Out of which experiments may we plainly collect, that to the increase of the motion of the sea besides the saltness of the Water, two other causes are concurring; to wit, the shallowness of the shore, and the streitnesse of the channel, wherein a great and large sea is to be exonerated. This may lastly be farther illustrated from the disparity of these seas with others, for in the Adriaticke, Egaan, jonian, and almost all the African sea●, the sea seldom swells to so great a measure: whereof the cause is as well the depth of the seas, as the equality of th● shores: for as the depth is a cause that sometimes it flows not at all, and the inequality and shortness of the shore that it flows high: so a mean height of the Waters from the bottom, and a more equal figuration of the coasts may be a cause of an indifferent working of the Water. Hitherto we have showed the variety of motion in the sea, in regard of the diversity of places: we are next to speak something concerning the variation of it in regard of the times, which, though it properly appertain not to Geography, yet am I loath to leave it out, because the discourse is pleasant. Concerning which point, the Mariners make six degrees of change in the tides according to the times. First diurnal, whereof we speak in this discourse: The second Hebdomedary, or weekly which Possidonius called monthly or weekly; because it is distinguished by several weeks of a month: but tarries not till the end of the month: For it is found by experience of Navigatours that a day before the conjunction of the Moon with the Sun, and the day of conjunction, and a day afterwards, the seas in the main Ocean have their greatest flows and ebbs, being lifted higher and laid lower down, and then the tides are most swift: The fourth day from the conjunction, the tide is less and less swift: The fifth yet less then then the former; and the sixth day less than the fifth: But in the seventh day, which is a day before the quarter, and in the eight following, wherein it is halfe-faced; and in the ninth, which is a day after the quarter, the sea is, as it were, dead, not much stirring, neither much ebbing or much flowing; which was (as it seems) only observed by Pliny in the Euboian Euripus; but whether it so happen elsewhere, I leave to men experienced in these matters; This motion as it doth increase according to the age of the Moon: So it is said proportionally to decrease again. The third motion is monthly, which seems in the time of the conjunction, wherein the sea-tides are highest and swiftest. The fourth is called motus semestris or six-monthly, happening at the times of the Equinoctial; differing one from the other like months; The fifth is called Trimestris, because it happeneth only in three months distance. The last is Annual which Patricius witnesseth that himself saw in Liburnia, in the month of january. These motions I carelessly pass over, because the distinction seems to me full of uncertainty and s●arce warranted; and such experiments as are brought for the proof of it concern rather particular places, than the general nature of the sea. 3 Hitherto of the general motion of the sea: The Special is that, which is observed in some special places. 1 It is probable that the sea is carried somewhere from East to West, and somewhere from North to South, and chose. It hath been a received opinion amongst Philosophers of this later age, that the sea by the rapture of the heavens should be moved round, as it were, in a diurnal course: which they have laboured to prove by diverse experiments. First, because it is observed by Mariners that a ship can well sail from Spain into America with an indifferent wind in 30 days, when she can hardly return under three months, which they ascribe to the circular motion of the sea: For a ship going from East to West sails with the Water, but from West to East against the stream, so that the one must needs be swifter and the other slower. Their second experiment to confirm this point, is of a ship sailing from Spain to Holland, which may as they say swifter return back then go thither. To this motion of the Water from East to West, julius Scaliger hath added another, which he would have to be from North to South, from Terra Laboratoris Southward. But Patricius not denying these motions, would have many more in divers seas, not admitting any universal circular motion enforced by the heavens, but various motions diversely disposed in diverse seas, for which he gives many instances, some whereof we will here relate. First going about to disprove Scaligers opinion and experience, he brings the experiment of the Portugal Navigatours, who testify that they came from Mosambicke of the side on Madagascar into Malebar in 28, sometimes in 30, other times in 35 days: which is far from the account of Scaliger, who would not have a ship to pass it under three months, out of which he laboured to prove this motion of the sea, because the ship was longer a going then returning. The second experiment he takes from the observation of one john Eupolius, who willing to pass from the port of S. Blasi●●, which is beyond the Cape of good hope in Africa to Melinde towards the Indies, could not go forward by reason that the currents, (as they call them (drove them back from Melinde to Pate, a town by this side of the Indieses: whence he would conclude that the Water should in this place rather run from West to East towards the Indies. The third experiment is drawn from the testimony of Thomas Lope, who when he was to pass from the Cape of good hope towards the Indies, testifies that the current of the Water was so violent, that it oftentimes leapt into the forepart of the ship. The fourth is from the testimony of johannes Guietanus, who putting forth from Tidor, came into Spain before the sixteenth month: This journey from Tidor to the Cape of good hope, contains 55 leagues, which makes 1650 miles: from this to the Island of S. Helena by the relation of another pilot are 1400 miles: from whence to the Equinoctial circle are 1600 miles: from hence to Spain by the computation of degrees, are not above 1520 miles: of all which the sum is, 7114. Now if we take out of sixteen months 49 days, wherein the ship against Cape of good hope, was carried hither and thither (which the mariners call Voltegiair●) and 70 other days wherein it stood still in the coasts of Guinea in Melacia, there will remain a whole year spent in this journey: which days if we divide by those 7114 miles, there will be allotted to every day no more than 19 miles, which evidently shows that this journey was most short in respect of the swiftness of the Navigations. For if the Ocean should drive his currents to St H●l●na even to the west, they had ended their journey in a far lesser time, because those currents (as they say) carry the ship. But this journey was accomplished very slowly: wherefore the currents were not carried from East to West, a● S●aliger relates. Likewise from sundry other experiments, he goes about to prove that it constantly cannot be observed to flow from North to South, as the said Scaliger affirms, but that it is various according to diverse places. Nevertheless, that the Sea should have a perpetual current from the Poles towards the Equatou●, seems to stand as well with Reason, as Experience: For all men must needs confess, that the motion of the Heavens under the Equatour, must be much swifter than nearer the Poles, because the circles of it are greater near the Equatour. Now▪ by how much swifter the motion of the Heaven is, by so much more is the Rarefaction of the Air, or other Elementary bodies right under it: whether it be Air (as it is most probable) or Fire as Peripatetick● imagine: But howsoever we determine that controversy, it must needs be that the Air must suffer Rarefaction, answerable to the swiftness of the motion: if not immediately by the swift motion of the Heavens, yet by a consequent by the greater fervour of the Fire, which under the Equatour must needs be greater and of more force than about the Poles▪ whence the parts of the Air under it, must partake more degrees of Heat, and by necessary consequence suffer a greater Attenuation. 2 The Sunbeams being darted perpendicularly, cannot choose but attenuate and rarify the Air more under the Line, then in places more declining to the Poles. This ground thus laid, these two consectaries will follow: 1 That the Air thus attenuated, must needs take up a large● place than it before possessed, which cannot be but by enlarging itself towards either Pole, either North or South; whence the parts of the Air in those places must be more thickened and condensated. 2 That these parts of the Air carried towards the Poles, and meeting with the cold Regions of the North and South, must by condensation turn into water, and so fall down in Rain or Snowes; whence the Water increasing near the Poles perpetually, must have a perpetual current towards the Equatour, where they are again exhausted in vapours by the Heat of the Sun; in such sort, that as well the parts of the Sea betwixt themselves, as the waters in regard of the Air, may proportionally maintain themselves by the mutual transmutation. To this reason some have added another, that the Sun sojourning in the Southern Signs, is nearer to the Earth, then when he is in the North, by the whole Latitude of his excentrice, and therefore of greater force to draw the water toward the South: But whether this Reason be of any great force, I will not spent time to dispute: let every man use his own judgement. It seems to me a conjecture not improbable, that these currents may be also varied according to diverse reasons of the year; as also according to diverse channels, by diverse cross and doublings of the Tides, as we find in diverse places: but I will not be too bold in this opinion, because I love not to walk without a guide in these uncertainties. 4 Of the Natural motion of the Sea we have spoken: It remains we speak somewhat of the Violent: The Violent motion is that which is stirred up by winds. The consideration of winds is either absolute or respective: Absolute I call that wherein the Natural effects and properties of the winds are handled; which properties belong to the natural Philosopher, they being (according to Aristotle) a Natural body unperfectly mixed: The Respective consideration is that wherein the winds are considered in respect to the terrestrial Globe. This Respect again twofold, either in regard of the whole Sphere of the Earth, whereof they design out the points of the Horizon by certain lines called Rhumbas; or else in respect of the Sea, to which they give a motion. The former respect we have handled in our first book of Geography: The later is more proper to this place; & howsoever the wind is an exhalation, common as well to the Earth as to the Sea, affecting both with some alteration; yet because it more nearly affecteth the Sea as his proper Province and Dominion, and hath for the most part been most observed of Sea, men and Mariners; We thought fit to treat of it in this place. Of winds some are uncertain and various, which in all places interchangeably supply their turns, keeping no certainty or regularity in times or places: others are called, set or standing winds, because they are observed to blow at certain time, and places▪ of both which, as much as concerns our purpose, we shall speak in these two Theorems. 1 To some certain places, at certain times belong certain winds. These winds are by some, called Anniversary because they blow at a certain season every year; of these there are many kinds mentioned by Navigatours. The first and chiefest is that which they call the Etesian wind, which is observed to blow every year from the North-east about the rising of Dogstar, and oftentimes continues about 40 days. This wind drives the Seas from Pontus into the Egean Sea, even so far as Egypt. In the second place may we range such winds as are called Chelidonian, because they arise at the first coming of the Swallows. It blows sometimes from the Direct-west, so that of some it is taken to be the same. Sometimes from the Northwest, so that with others it is accounted among the North winds: These Chelidonian winds driving from the North or Northwest still fill all the Mediterranean even to the coasts of Syria and Palestine, and continue in the summer time for many days together. In the third place may we account that wind, which Columbus perceived on the coast of Portugal coming over the Atlantic Ocean, which at some times of the year was carried higher, at other times cleaving (as it were) to the bosom of the Sea, whence he probably conjectured that it was derived from some moist land, whereon he adventured on the first search of America and laid the first work of that discovery. Fourthly to these winds may be reduced those yearly flow of the Persian and Indian Seas, which the Portugal mariners call Motions. The Persian Sea suffers such a kind of motion every year while the Sun runs through the Southern degrees, and when he arrives at the end of Sagittarius it is shaken with an extraordinary great tempest: On the contrary side the Indian Sea, while the Persian is moved, is observed to rest without any great motion; and when the Persian is still, it suffers great motion, especially when the Sun first enters into Cancer. This last motion seems to be not only derived from the Provincial winds, but some other concurrent causes: whether these winds are the cause of the currents before spoken of, is a very disputable point, which I leave to others to search out. Of every set wind blowing a part of the year on the coast of America, Acosta treats at large, to which he ascribes the currents forespoken of in this chapter. 2 The violence of winds makes the Sea sometimes in some places, transcend his ordinary bounds. How far the Sea by violence of winds hath trespassed on the land, many have learned to their great loss and calamity. It is observed sometimes in the Venetian shores, that the Sea driven with winds swells so high, that overflowing all the banks and channels, the Inhabitants are enforced to row in boats from house to house: Their cisterns are infected with Salt-water, and their precious waters in vaults and cellars spoilt. The like hath heretofore been found (if we will credit Histories) in the Belgic Sea, on which the Northwest winds blow with such vehemency and so long that it broke down the ordinary banks; and in Zealand and Holland swallowed up many towns with infinite multitudes of people. Which seems to be warranted by a report, I have heard of many travailers, that in a calm tide the tops of towers and steeples have been seen above the water. Besides these instances, we may add the testimony of Strabo and Aristotle in his book de munda: with diverse other relations of strange inundations whereof we shall have more occasion to speak hereafter. CHAP. VII. Of the Depth, Situatio, and Termination of the Sea. 1 THe Absolute proprieties of the Sea being hitherto passed over: we will consider next the comparative: which agree to the Sea no otherwise then in respect or comparison with the Earth; which are chiefly thre●; 1 Depth, 2 Situation, 3 Termination. 2 The Depth or Profundity is the distance betwixt the Bottom and the Superficies of the Water. To find out the Absolute depth of the Sea, is a matter of the greatest difficulty, and by many thought impossible, in respect as well of the immensity of it in many places where no line could, as of the various places, too many to be searched out by man's industry: yet where absolute science fails, there probable conjecture takes place, and is best accepted, which we will venture to propose in this o●r Theorem. 1 The ordinary depth of the Sea is commonly answerable to the ordinary height of the main land above the water: and the whirlpools and extraordinary depths answer to the height of the mountains above the ordinary height of the Earth. It hath been a common received opinion among ancient Cosmographers, that the depth of the Sea being measured by a line and plummet, seldom exceeds two or three miles, except in some few places near Suevian shores, and some places about Pontus observed by Pliny. But as Breedwood a worthy late writer observes, this position is not to be understood generally, but only of the depth of the Streits or Narrow Seas, which were perhaps only searched by then ancients who dwelled far from the main Ocean: But another account is necessarily to be given of the main Ocean. This being a matter of great uncertainty, we will follow the conceit of the forenamed Author. It hath been showed in the former Chapter, that the most probable opinion concerning the manner of the first separation of the dry land from the wa●ers would have the Earth by the Creation to be cut into diverse sluices & channels, apt to receive Water. Now these material p●rts of the Earth, being taken out to give way to hollowness, were not utterly annihilated, but by an almighty hand in some other places, making by their addition the superficies of the Earth in such places higher than before: whence by reason it seems to be collected, that the ordinary Eminency of the height of the Earth at o●e the Waters, should be answerable to the ordinary depth of the Sea. And if Hills and Mountains be compared, we may s●t them against the Deeps and extraordinary While-pooles and Gulls: And so betwixt the Sea and Land▪ and the parts of the one and the other we may settle a kind of agreement and proportion: In a matter of so great uncertainty, no man will expect an evident domonstra●ion. 3 The Site is the position of the Sea in respect o● the Earth. Concerning the site of the Sea in respect of the Earth; we must consider the Water and Earth two ways▪ First Absolutely as they are Elements and solid Bodies: Secondly, in respect of the superficies of either▪ if we consider the whole solid Body of the Water as that of the Earth, we must confess without all doubt, that the Water hath the higher place, being lighter than the Earth; of which situation we have spoken in the first book: for although some parts of the Earth are thought (by most as we shall prove) to be above some parts of the Water, yet is this of no sensible proportion in respect of that vast Mass of Earth, couched under the Waters betwixt them and the Centre of the World. But the question is here of the superficies of the Water, compared to the superficies the Earth uncovered, which should be higher in place; of which shall be this Theorem. 1 The superficies of the Sea is somewhere higher than the superficies of the Earth, somewhere lower. There hath been a great dispute among Philosophers concerning the position of the Sea in respect of the Land, whether it be higher or lower: some have been of an opinion, that the Water is higher; which opinion was defended by Tully, in his Book De Natura Deorum, where he saith, that the Sea being placed above the Earth, yet covering the place of the Earth, is congregated and collected, neither redounding, nor flowing abroad▪ which afterwards seems to be seconded by diverse learned Divines, who reducing most things to the supernatural and first cause, diverse times neglected and over-slipt the second. Hence Saint Basil in his 4 Homily on the Hexameron, lest the water (saith he) should overflow and s●red itself out of the place it hath occupied, it is commanded to gather itself together: otherwise what should hinder the Red Sea to overflow all Egypt, being lower than it ●elfe, unless it were manacled with the Creators' power, as it were with setters: to which also afterwards seem to subscribe Aquin●●, Dionysius, and Catharinus, with diverse other Divines, who held that the first discovery of the Earth, and the gathering together of the Waters in the first Creation, was made not by any mutation in the Earth, but by a violent accumulation of the Waters, being (as it were) restrained and bridled supernaturally, that they could not transcend certain limits and bounds. To confirm this opinion, some reasons are alleged by modern Philosophers: first because it is the order of all the Elements amongst themselves, that the Earth, as the heaviest, should take the lower place▪ and the water should ascend above: Secondly, because Mariners coming from the main Ocean to the Land, seem to see the land far lower than the Water: Thirdly they allege tha● place of Ilb, whe●e God himself professeth, that he hath bounded the Water●, in these words. Hitherto shal● thou come, and no farther, & here shall thy proud waves be stayed. But this opinion seemeth very improbable▪ that God in the first institution of Nature should impose a perpetual violence upon Nature: sith wehee the Creator in other ma●ters to use Nature as his ordinary servant▪ and to administer the Regiment of things by ●econd causes. Neither were the authority of these Divines so great in th●se Cosmographical conceits, to oversway these of the same profession▪ who could more exactly judge of these matters. Neither are these reasons of so grea● validity as to enforce assent. For first whereas St Basill seems to wonder why the Red Sea should not ouer●lowe all Egypt, if it were not supernaturally bounded; he takes that as granted, which is the question in controversy, that the Water is higher: for which he can produce no other reason, th●n the Testimony of the sense: but this is very weak, forasmuch as in such matters the sense is oftentimes deceived, as stands well with the grounds of the perspectives: for (as wear there taught) two Parallels will in the end seem to concur so far as the sight can judge. Now the Sphere of the Heavens, and the Spherical segment of the Waters being parallel the one to the other, will necessarily seem to concur to the end: whence it must needs come to pass, that that part of the Sea must seem ●o lift itself higher, ●nd contrariwise the Heaven's will seem somewhat lower than indeed they are: and this I take to be the true cause why the Sea being seen a great way off, may appear raised above the land whereon we stand. Another reason may be given from the perpetual Refraction of the usual Lines coming from the Sea to our sight. For the Air near the Sea being always intermixed with thick waterish vapours rising up, the Se● must of necessity be presented in a thicker Medium by a refracted sight: whence consequently it must seem greater & higher than indeed it is: for as the Optics teach, all things seem greater & higher in a thicker Medium. To the other three Reasons brought to confirm this assertion it is no hard thing to answer. To the first which would out of the order of the Elements enforce, that the Water is higher ●hen the Earth; I answer (as before) that if we entirely consider these Elements amongst themselves, we must give the height to the Water; for as much as the greatest part of the Earth lies ●rowned; for that above bea●es no sensible proportion in respect of the parts of the Earth uncovered. But here we compare not the 2 Elements entirely betwixt themselves, but the superficies of the Water with the parts of the Earth uncovered, habitable: which superficies of the earth notwithstanding, this reason, may be higher than the Water: Secondly, where they produce the testimony of the sight; for my own part, I can warrant no such experience, having never lanced far into the deep: yet if any such experiment be avouched, it may easily be answered out of optical Principles▪ that coming out of the main Ocean towards the land, by reason of the spherical convexity of the water, interposed between our sight, and the lower part of the land, those land parcels must needs seem less, as having some parts shadowed from our fight: whence it must consequently appear lower, as couched almost under water. From the 3d reason grounded on Scripture, whereon our divines seem most to depend, nothing else is concluded, but that Almighty God hath set certain bounds & limits which the Waters should not pass: These bounds & limits I take not to be supernatural, as if the water restrained by such a power should contain itself, within its own circuit. But natural as cliffs & ●ils, within which, the waters seems intrenced. This opinion therefore being disliked, others have laboured to defend an opposite position, that the water is lower than the Earth altogether: which opinion bears more constancy with the doctrine of Arist. & most of our modern Philosophers. The reason whereon this assertion is grounded, be chiefly these: 1 If the sea were higher than the Earth, what should hinder the water of it from flowing abroad, & overwhelming the Earth: sith all men will confess, that the water is by nature disposed to move downwards to the lower place. If they have recourse to supernatural ●ounds, besides that we have spoken concerning the interpretatiō● of such places of Scripture, as seem to favour this opinion▪ we unswere as before, that it is very improbable, that God in the first creation should impose such a perpetual violence: secondly, we read that in the universals deluge wherein all the world was drowned, God broke open the springs of the deep & opened the Cataracts of heaven to pour down rain continually many days together upon the Earth: Of which there had been no necessity at all; had the sea been hea●ed up in such sort as they imagine: For the only withdrawing of that hand and letting go of that bridle which gave the water that restraint, would have been ●ufficient to have overwhelmed the whole Earth. The second reason is taken from Lands in the sea which are nothing else but parts of the land raised up above the water. Thirdly we find by experience, that a ship carried with the like wind is driven so swiftly from the port into the open sea, as from the sea into the port, which could not be done if the sea were higher than the land: for it must needs be, that a ship if it were to be carried to a higher place, should be moved slower than if it came from an higher to a lower▪ Fourthly all Rivers run into the sea from the inner parts of the land which is a most evident sign, that the land is higher than the sea; for it is agreeable to the nature of the water, to flow always to the lower place, whence we gather that the sea shore, to which the Water is brought from the land, must needs be lower; otherwise the water in running thither, should not descend but ascend. This opinion I hold far more probable as being backed by reason, and the Authority of our best Philosophers: yet not altogether exactly true (as we shall show hereafter.) But Bartholomew Keckerman in a late Germane writer holding these 2 former opposite opinions (as it were) in one equal Balance, labours a reconciliation. In a divers respect (saith he) it is true that the sea is higher, and that it is lower than the Earth. It is higher in respect of the shores and borders, to which it so comes that sensibly it swells to a Globe or a circumference, and so at length in the middle raiseth up itself and obtains a greater height then in those parts where in the middle of the sea it declines towards the shore: Of which parts the height suffer● such a decrease, that by how much nearer the shore they shall approach, by so much the lower they are in respect of the shore: in somuch that touching the shore itself, it is much lower than the Earth. For this opinion our Author pretends a demonstration: which he grounds on the 4 chapter of Aristotle de Caelo, in his second book, where he puts down these two positions; which he calls Hypotheses, or suppositions; First that the Water no less concurs to the making of a Globe or circle, than the Earth: for it so descends naturally, that it doth sensibly gather itself together, and makes a swelling, as we see in small drops cast on the ground: Secondly the Water makes a circle which hath the same centre with the centre of the Earth: Out of these grounds would our Keckerman conclude the water in some places to be higher, in other places to be lower than the Earth: And hence proceeds he to give an answer to their reasons who have affirmed the Earth to be higher than the sea: What to think of the proposition or conclusion we will show hereafter, but in the mean space I hold this conclusion not rightly inferred out of these premises: For first whereas he saith that the water by nature is apt to gaher itself round into an orb or sphere, I would demand whether such a rood body hath the same centre with the world, or a divers centre: he cannot say that it hath a divers centre, from the centre of the Earth: First, because (as we have demonstrated in our first part) the Earth and the Water have but one centre: and that the Water is concentrical with the Earth: Secondly from the second proposition or ground of his, out of Aristotle; if he means such a sphaericity as hath the same centre with the centre of the Earth: I answer, first that he contradicts himself, because he gives an instance in small drops cast on the ground, whose quantity being so small, and convexity sensible, can in no man's judgement be concentric to the Earth. Secondly, out of this ground that the Sphere of the water is concentric to the Earth, he confutes himself; for according to the principles of Geometry, in a Sphere or circle, all the lines drawn from the centre to the circumference must be equal. Then must all places in the circumference or superficies of a spherical body be of equal height from the centre, and by consequence the sea being such a Spherical body, cannot have that inequality which Keckerman imagines it to have: wherefore some other demonstation must be sought for this conclusion. I will go no further then that I have spoken in the former chapter concerning the figure of the Water: Where I have probably showed it to be conical; and out of this may be easily gathered, how it may be higher than the land in some places, as of the middle of greater seas, where the head of the Cone is lifted higher; in other, lower; as in the narrow streits where the increase of the eminency is also less. The grounds and principles of which we have laid before. 1 The sea in respect of the Earth is higher in one place then another. Besides the natural conformity of the Water to a conical figure, (as we have foreshowed) whence one part of the superficies must be granted to be higher than another: we must needs in the sea acknowledge other accidental causes which produce an inequality in the parts of the sea▪ The chiefest whereo● are the Equality of inclination in all parts of the water to motion: And the inequality of the channels and shores: whence it cometh to pass that the Water of the sea being every whereof itself equally inclined to motion, is notwithstanding unequally received into channels, so that in some place, having (as it were) a large dominion to invade, as in the main Ocean, it falls lower and evener: In some other places as streites or narrow seas, the water having a large entrance from the Ocean, but little or no passage through it, must needs swell higher, and so one place by accident becomes higher or lower than another: Which farther to confirm divers instances may be alleged out of modern and ancient observations, For divers histories give testimony that sundry Kings of Egypt by cutting the Isthmus or narrow neck of land lying betwixt the red sea & the Mediterranean, laboured to make afric an Island & open passage from one sea to the other: but afterwards they were persuaded to desist from their enterprise: Some say, because they saw the red sea to be higher than many parts of Egypt, and hereupon feared a general inundation of all Egypt, if the passage were broken open: Others have delivered that they feared, that if the passage from one unto another were broke open, and the red sea having a vent that way, the red sea would become so shallow that men might wade over it, and so instead of making afric an Island, it would have been more joined to the Continent then before. Both opinions consent in this, that the waters of the red sea were by the perpendicular found higher than in the Mediterranean: Moreover it is observed that the sea on the west part of America commonly called Mare Del Zur, is much higher than the Atlantic Sea which bordereth on the Eastern part of it: which gave way to the conjecture of some, that the Isthmus betwixt Panama and Nombre D● Dios had been long since cut through to have made a passage into the Pacifick Sea, without sailing so far about by the straits of Magellane; had not many inconveniences been feared out of the inequality in the height of the water. The like inequality is observed by Verstegan in the sea betwixt England and France: For according to his conjecture, France and England being one Continent heretofore, and joined by a narrow neck of land, betwixt Dover and Callais the water on one side was higher than on the other: which he probably collects out of the sundry flats and shallowes at this day appearing on the East side as well on the coasts of England as of Flanders, especially between Dover and Calais, called by some, our Lady's Sands, about three English miles in length▪ Out of which and sundry other probabilities, he labours to prove that all the Low-countries were heretofore enueloped with the sea; till such time as the narrow land being either by Nature or Art cut through, and the Water allowed a free passage, it became dry land: but this point we shall discuss hereafter in place convenient. 4 In the next place we are to consider the termination of the sea: The termination is the bounding of the sea within certain limits. 5 The Limit is the margin or border of land wherein any sea is circumscribed. The sea is bounded by the land, as the land by the sea: In respect of which termination some seas are called Main seas, others narrow. The main seas are four; to wi●, the Atlantic which taketh its name from the mountain Atlas, by which on the west side it passeth, and divides Europe and afric from America▪ 2 The Aethiopian sea running on the west side of Aethiopia▪ 3 The Indian Sea having the East Indies on the North▪ 4 Mare Del Zur or the South sea, situate on the South side of America: Which four in respect of other may be called Main Oceans▪ The lesser sea● are either called Creeks, or streits; A Creek is a place where the water (as it were) embosoms itself into the land, having an ●ntrance large from the Ocean, and most commonly streytned inwardly, but no passage through: A Creek again may be divided into the greater or lesser: Under the former in a large sense may we comprehend the whole Mediterranean sea▪ for as much as▪ the ●ea from the Main● Atlantic Ocean by an inlet is ingulfed into it, but finds no passage out any other way, howsoever it invades a large territory. The lesser Creeks are again distinguished into the Eastern and Western: The chief Creeks found out towards the East are six in number. 1. Sinus magnus which lies betwixt Mangus and India extra Gangem teaching as far as the region of Chal●i●. 2. Sinus Gang●ticus which is comprehended betwixt Aurea Chersonesus, and India intra Gangem. 3▪ Sinus Canthi, commonly called Canthi-colpus. 4. Sinus Persicus, bordering on Persia, and called by Plutarch the Babylonian Sea. 5. Sinus Arabicus, which is commonly called the Red S●a. 6. Sinus Barbaricus, which by Pliny is termed Sinus Tr●gloditicus & at this day Golpho de Melinde. The Creeks lying Westwardly are chiefly these; First Sinus Sarmaticus lying towards the North, between Denmark and Normay, which is divided into Sinus Sinnicus and Bodi●us, which is called commonly the Baltic Sea 2 Sinus Granuicus dividing the Muscovites from the C●relij Northward▪ it is commonly called the White Sea. 3 Sinus Mexicanus bordering on the city of Mexico in America, amongst these, some would number Mare Pacificum, or Mare D●l Zur: but this we thought fitter to call a main Sea, than a creek, being extraordinarily large in quantity. A Strait is a narrow Sea between two Lands; of such Straits these were anciently known, to wit, 1 Fretum Graditanum, or the Straits of Gibraltar of 7 Miles distance, dividing Spain from Barbary 2 Fretum Magellanni●ū, found out by Magellane, which divides A●erica P●ruana from the Southern land, 3 Fretum Anian, situate betwixt the western shores of America, & the Eastern borders of Tartary. Besides these there have been discovered 3 more, (to wit) 1 Pretum Davis', found out by captain Davis' in the year 1586, which lies toward Groenland. ● Fretum N●souicum▪ or Way gate, near Nova Zembla, discovered by the Hollanders in the year 1614 3 Fretum de Mayre found out by William Schoute● a Bavarian, taking his name from Isaa● le M●yre, by whose advice and persuasion he undertaken hi● voyage. But some of these latt●● streits here mentioned, for aught I know, may better be reckoned amongst Creeks, forasmuch as they have not as yet found any passage through, though with great loss and danger they have often attempted the Discovery. Concerning the bounding of the Sea with the land, we will insert th●se Theorems. 1 The Water is so divided from the dry land, that the quantity of Water is greater in the South Hemisphere, of Land in the Northern. That most part of the dry land is situate towards the North, will easily appear by instance. For toward the North are placed the great Continents of Europe, Asia, almost all Africa, and the greatest part of America: But in the South Hemisphere, we find only a little part of Africa & America, besides the South Continent, which we cannot imagine to be so great in quantity, as it is painted in our ordinary Maps: forasmuch as all place● at the first discovery are commonly described greater than they are. The reason I take to be this, that the first draught is always confused and unperfect, wherein a region discovers itself unto us under a more simple figure, neglecting curiosities; but after a longer and more exact search of any Region, will be found in many places ingulfed with diverse Bays, and variously indented; in such sort, as the bound Line compassing it round, making an inordinate figure, and less regular, cannot contain so much land as first it might seem to promise. Moreover we may further observe, that those places which in the first discovery have been taken for the main Continent, or at least for some greater part of Land, have afterward upon more curious examination, been found cloven into many lesser Lands: As in America, Cuba in the time of Columbus; and California of late, thought to be a part of the Continent, and so described almost in all our Maps; yet since by a Spanish Chart taken by the Hollanders, discovered to be an Island. The like instance we have in Terra del Fuog●, which since the time Magellan, was held a part of the South Continent, till Schouten by sailing round about it▪ found it divided from the main l●nd by Fr●●um de Mayre, carrying the name of the Master of the ship in his discovery. Neither is it much to be doubted, but that in that large tract delineated out in the Globe for the South-Indies, are contained many Lands, divided one from the other by streites and narrow Seas, which must subtract much from the quantity of the dry land; so that of necessity it must be granted, that the Northern Hemisphere takes up the greatest part of the dry land as the other of the Water. Wherefore that place of Esdras where he saith, That Almighty God allotted 〈◊〉 paris to the E●●th, and the 〈…〉 Water; must r●ther seem improbable, or suffer another interpretation then that of the ancients. For out of credible conjecture drawn from the view of the 〈◊〉 of the Terrestrial Globe, we shall hardly collect suc● a proportion: In this comparison of the Northern H●misphe●●● with the Southern▪ we shall find ● kind of Harmony betwixt the Heavens and the Earth: For, as Travellers report, th● Northern parts abound with more stars, and of greater magnitude than the other toward the South; so the Terrestrial Sphere discovers unto us more continent▪ greater Lands, and of more no●●, in the North then ●n the South. 2 The whole Globe of the Earth is environed round from the East and the west with sea, dividing ●he North from the South. To prove this Theorem we need go no farther than the famous voyages of Magellane, Drake, Candish, and Scho●ten; Whereof the first attempted, the first passage through Fretum Magel●anicum, and gave it the name, though he could not outlive his intended journey. The two next followed the same way, and the last found out a new passage through Fretum de Mayre, as we have formerly mentioned. Whence we may ea●●ly deduce this Corollary, that the Southern continent, not yet perfectly discovered, is either One, or (which is most probable) ●any Lands: forasmuch as by sailing round about ●t, they have found it every where compassed round with Sea. The like may be conjectured of the other parts of the world, on the Northern side, whereof we shall speak in this next Theorem. 3 It is probable that the Earth is compassed round with the water from North to South. I know nothing which hath exercised the wits and industry of the Navigatours of our age, more than the finding out of a passage Northward to Cathay, and so to the East-Indies, which controversy as yet remains altogether unanswered, and awaits the happiness of some new discovery. In which difficult passage, wherein many have spent both their lives and hopes, it may seem enough for me to go with their Relations; suffering my conjecture to fly no farther than their sails. The reasons which I meet with in my slender reading, I will examine as I can, without partiality, and so leave every man to be his own judge. First▪ then we must consider that the voyage to the Indies must be effected by either of these two ways; to wit, Northward, or Southward, To begin with the South, it must be performed two ways; either by some unknown passage through the South-Continent near the Antarctic Pole, or near the Magellane-straits. The former is most uncertain, for want of discoveries in those unknown and remote parts: and if any such passage were found out, it were little advantage to our Countrymen, who have already a shorter and nearer way: yet no instance can be given to the contrary, but that this part being cloven (as it seems most probable) into many lesser lands, may admit of such a passage: But in such uncertainties it is as easy to deny as to affirm. The second South-passage is found out by Navigatours, which is either by the straight of Magellane itself, or else through the straits of Mayre beforementioned, which this Age of ours hath put out of doubt. The third passage is Southeast by the ●ape of good hope, known unto our East-Indian Merchants, and therefore as a matter unquestioned, needs no further examination. The only matter which troubles men in this Ag●, is the finding out of a passage Northward to Cathay, either by the North-east, or Northwest; wherein we will consider two things: 1 Whether it be likely, that any such passage should be at all? 2 whether this passage should be performed by the North-East, or North-West. For the former many arguments are urged which seem to cross this opinion, of a way to the Indies toward the North-parts: For The manifold attempts of the English and Hollanders, both towards the North-East and North-West, either altogether spent in pain or failing of their ends, seems to give large testimony, if not of absolute impossibility, yet at least of the vnlikely-ho●d of any such discovery as is hoped. For what cost or dangers would not almost all the Mariners of our Northern world undergo, to find so near a cut to their golden Indies? and if by chance many of them mistook the right way, yet would it seem improbable, that latter Navigatours corrected by the former errors, should not after so many trials and attempts, at length hit the mark. This reason savours of some probability: yet comparing this with divers matters of the same kind, would seem to be of no great force. For the truth and right being only one and the same, is opposed by infinite errors: so that it may seem easier to commit a thousand errors, than once to hit the truth: Time and long trial beget many Inventions, which afterward seem most easy: insomuch that many men have afterward laughed at their own mistakes. Moreover, for aught I can find in the Relations of most men's discoveries, the passage which they sought was too far Northward towards the Pole; where being infested with cold, Ice, and other inconveniences, they were enforced to return thence again, having seldom had any opportunity to winter in those parts for want of victuals, or extremity of cold. A second reason against this North-passage may be drawn from the innumerable sorts of beasts wherewith America is stored: for admitting this passage, we must needs grant America to be an Island. Now it is ●ertaine that Noah's Ark was the store-house and Seminary, not only of mankind, but of all other perfect living Creatures. Again, it is evident out of the Holy Scriptures, that the first Region whereon the Ark was delivered of her burden, was Asia. These grounds laid, I would demand how such a multitude of beasts of all sorts, should be transported from Asia to America, being supposed to be an Island, and every where divided by the Sea from other parts of the Earth could these silly creatures of their own accord swim from one shore to another? but alas the Sea was too large, and these beasts too fearful to adventure on such a voyage. And admit some by Nature had been fitted to such an action, yet were it very strange to imagine the same effect of all, being of many kinds. What then? were they transported in ships? But Navigation in those days being an infant, unfurnished of the Chart and Compass, durst not adventure into the Ocean so far out of sight of land. But to give the opposite part all reasonable advantage, admit the straits dividing Asia and America were very narrow, and within ken; was it likely that from hence th●y could by ships transport so many kndes of creatures? Could we believe any man to be so mad, as to carry over with him Lions, Bears, Tigers, Foxes, and other innumerable sorts of ravenous and unprofitable beasts, as pernicious to mankind, as other creatures serving for his use? If any were found so foolish or malicious, yet were it very unlikely he should transport so many kinds. This argument seems no more to concern America, than most Lands of the World, wherein we find diverse creatures, not only serving for the use of man, but many unprofitable & hateful to the Inhabitants: The means of this transportation is very difficult to find. St Augustine with some other Divines have been driven to a supernatural cause, as if Almighty God should perform this matter by the ministry of Angels, which answer we dare not utterly reject, being supported by the authority of so great a Pillar of the church: yet I cannot so easily imagine, that God who used natural means for the preservation of all living creatures in the Ark, should have recourse to a supernatural power in the propagation of these creatures on the face of the Earth: wherefore to me the reason would seem better answered out of our ground which we shall prove hereafter: That Lands were not from the first Creation, but afterward broken from the main Continent by the violence of the Water: Hence it might come to pass, that such beasts as were in the parts of the Earth so broken off, have since there continued by continual propagation until this day; I mean of ravenous and hurtful beasts: because of the others less doubt can be made, but that they might be conveyed from one Country into another by shipping, to serve the necessity of mankind. Here we see that no argument as yet hath been urged so strong against the North-passage, but may with reasonable probability be answered. It remains in the second place that we descend somewhat to particulars, to inquire whether this be to be effected either towards the North-east or the Northwest: The North-east passage hath heretofore been attempted by many of our English Navigatours, but with unhappy success: yet were not these voyages altogether fruitless; forasmuch as by this means, a way was found out to Russia, whence began the first trade between ours and the Russian Merchants: But that little hope can hence arise, sundry reasons may be alleged, the chief whereof are these; 1 The dangerous rending of the Scythick Cape, set by Ortelius under 80 degrees Northward, together with the perilous sailing in those Northern Seas always pestered with Ice and Snow, seconded by divers Bays or shelves, mists, fogs, long and darksome nights, most adverse to any happy Navigation, 2 The observation of the Water, which is more shallow towards the East, which gives small hope of a through passage, because all Seas are fed with waters, and for the most part are observed to be more shallow towards the shore then in the middle: But where in sailing forward, any Sea is found to decrease in depth; it is a likely argument, that it is rather a Creek Bay or River, than a Straight; Notwithstanding these reasons, some have heretofore gone about to prove a passage by the North-east to Cathay; of which opinion was Antony jenkinson, whose reasons be well answered by Sr Humphrey Gilbert, which I briefly touch, adding some things of mine own, as I find occasion. The first reason was drawn from a Relation of Tartarian, who reported that in hunting the Morse he sailed very far towards the Southeast, wherein he found no end; which might give a likely conjecture, that it was a passage throughout. But to this we may easily answer, that the Tartarians are a barbarous Nation, altogether ignorant of Navigation, which neither know the use of the Charte, Compass, or Celestial Observations; & therefore in a wide Sea know not how to distinguish the North-east from the Southeast: Besides the curious search of this long passage must depend on better Discoveries than a poor Fisherman, who seldom dares adventure himself out of sight of land; beside, the Fisherman judging by sight, could not see about a ken at sea, which will prove nothing in regard of so long a distance, The second Reason urged by Mr jenkinson, was this that there was an Vnicorne's horn found upon the coasts of Tartary, which could not come (saith he) by any other means then with the tide in some straight in the North-east in the frozen Sea, there being no Unicorn in all Asia, saving in I●dia and Cataia. To this reason I may answer with Sr Humphrey Gilbert many ways; 1 We may well doubt whether Tartarians know a true Unicorn's horn, or no: 2 It is credible, that it could be driven so far by the Tide, being of such a Nature that it cannot swim. 3 The Tides running to and fro, would have driven it as far back with the Ebb, as it brought it forward with the Flood. 4 the Horn which was cast on this coast, might be the Horn of an Asinus Indicu●, which hath but one Horn like an Unicorn in his forehead, whereof there is great plenty in all the North parts, as in Lappia, Norvegia, Finmarke▪ as Zeigler testifies in his History of Scandia. 5 Lastly, there is a fish which hath a Horn in his sore-head, c●lled the Sea Unicorn, whereof Martin Frobisher found one on the coast of Newfoundland▪ and gave it to Queen Elizabeth, which was said to be put into her wardrobe: But whether it be the same which is at this day to be seen at Windsor Castle, I cannot tell. The third and strongest reason which was urged for the North-east passage was this: That there was a continual current through the Frozen Sea, of such swiftness, that if any thing were thrown into the water it would presently be carried out of sight. To this we may easily answer, that this strong current is not maintained by any Tide coming from another Sea, but by divers great Rivers falling into this straight: In like sort we find a strong current from Maeotis Palus; by Pontus Euxinus, Sinus Bosphorus, and along all the coast of Greci (as Contarenus and divers other affirm out of their own experience) and yet the Sea lieth not open to any other Sea, but is maintained by Tanais and divers other rivers: so in this North-east part may this current of water be maintained by the River's Du●●a, Ob, and many others which continually fall into it. Hitherto have we treated of other passages, either effected or attempted to Cathay and the East Indies. The last and most desired and sought in our time, is that by the North West. This way hath been often attempted, as by Cabot, Davis', Frobisher, Hudson, Sr Thomas Button and others, but as yet not found out. Neither hath it more troubled the industry of Mariners, than the wit of Scholars, which we shall find by discourses written of that subject. The absolute decision of this controversy we must leave to time: only such probabilities as I chance to meet with, I will faithfully set down, to give encouragement to their deserving labours, who shall farther attempt the search and full discovery of this Northwest passage. The Reasons I find urged, I may well reduce to three Heads: The first is drawn from the testimonies and opinions of ancient Writers▪ The second from the Relations and discoveries of later Navigators, from the time of Henry the seventh, till our age: The third and last from the last and newest adventures of men of our time; either lately dead or living. To begin with the first, we shall from the testimony of Plato in Timaeo, as also in his Dialogue call●● Critias, draw a probable argument: for there he mak●s relation of an incomparable great Island, named Atlantis, of larger extent than Europe and Asia, which was situate Westward from the straits of Gibraltar, and navigable round abou●. The Princes of this Island (according to Plato's report) heretofore extended their government over a great part of Europe and Africa. To second which opinion of Plato, we shall read in Marinus Siou●us his History of Spain, that in the American golden mines, discovered by Columbus, there have been found certain pieces of Coin, engraven with the Name and Image of Augustus Caes●r, which were afterward sent to the Pope by john Rufus, Archbishop of Consentium; whence a probable conjecture seems to be grounded, that America in those days was both peopled and discovered▪ Now it appears again no● only by Plato▪ but also by the opinion of Mansilius ●icinus, Crantor, Proclus, and Philo judaeus is witnessed in their learned Commentaries on Plato, that this Island called Atlantis, some 600 years before Plato's time, suffered an extraordinary inundation, & was swallowed up by water: other like examples whereof we sh●l produce many, hereafter in place convenient▪ admitting these testimonies of antiquity, whereof we ought to cherish a reverend esteem, these consectaries will seem to offer themselves by way of necessary consequence: 1 That this Island Atlantis was the same which afterward from Americus Vesputius got the name America: because we find no Island in the Atlantic Ocean which comes near that greatness and quantity assigned by Plato: 2 that this Atlantis or America, in those days at least was an Island, because they reported it to be Navigable round about. 3 It must stand with great reason & probability, that this land being an Island before Plato's time, should be so still, if at least it come not nearer to the nature of an Island at this day, than before: For either this Relation of the overflowing of this land is true or false▪ If at all deserves credit, more reason is, that it should be Navigable round about then before: insomuch that the Water in this manner swelling high; would sooner fret through and cause a passage, then make a stoppage. 4 This passage must of necessity be toward the Northwest where America is divided from Asia by the streites of A●ian, which opinion seems better warranted, forasmuch as we find it seconded by the descriptions of many Geographers of great name and authority, as Gemma Fris●us, Munster, Appian, Hun●erus, Guicciardine, Michael Tramasi●us, Franciscus Demongenitus, Bernardus Puteanus, Andrea's Vanasor, Tramontanus, Peter Martyr, and Ortelius in his general Map: Who all have described America as an exact Island, setting down all the coasts and countries on the Northwest sea of America from Hoche-laga as far as Gape Haremantia; all these learned men having with one voice described or reported America for an Island▪ He should show but a slender esteem of Antiquity▪ or favour of too much selfe-conceite, who should offer to contradict. This first Argument I confess spun out into so many circumstances, seems at first sight to carry a great show of truth; but upon sound examination will be found very defective, and uncertain, carrying more probability in the conclusion, than the premises da●e to justify: How many Paralogismes and uncertain grounds are involved in this reason, let my ingenious reader judge; 1 whether Plato's report of this Atlantis were a true Relation grounded on experience and observation, or a pleasant Fiction derived from the Poets of that time, wherewith the Grecia Learning was much infected; 2 How comes it to be thought probable that Plato in those days should be so exact in delineating out the bounds of this New-world, who was so ignorant in the old, as to think Europe and Asia to be inferior in greatness to America, which notwithstanding he thought to be an Island. 3 How should so famous a King as Atlas, stretching his Monarchy (as the Authors of this reason report) from America to a great part of Europe and afric, in that vast gulf of time▪ slip away with so slight a mention: That there was such a Prince as Atlas, I make no question; upon whose fame and greatness the Poets grounded that fiction of raising up the vault of heaven with his shoulders: But whether this Atlas ever saw America, my reader must give me leave to make a doubt, The Ignorance of Navigation in those times, wherein occasion had not brought to light the chart & compass, together with the huge vastness of the Atlantic Ocean, will speak my Apology. 4 The finding of coin graved with the Image and inscription of Augustus Caesar in the American mines, seems to me more ridiculous than all the rest: We find the acts and conquests of Caesar and Pompey in Europe and Asia, and some parts of afric particularly set down by the grave writers of that time: We find Augustus Caesar, for some petty conquests against barbarous people, emblasoned by the Poets of that time to the highest pitch of their invention▪ we may observe the age wherein Augustus lived to be the flourish and pride of all the Roman learning: and himself the Idol and subject of most of their Poetical flatteries; having the happiness to be invested in the empire, in such a time wherein the Roman Monarchy having been too much wounded with a civil dissension, was willing to admire her worst Physician: And can any man be so senseless to imagine that the discovery of the golden world should pass away clouded in such a flattering age, without any mention? could not so much as the name be registered to teach posterity the way to so rich an Empire? For my own part I can ascribe this, (if the History deserve credit) to nothing else but the pride and imposture of the Spaniards, whom we observe in all relations to be a most ingrateful Nation, who admiring nothing but their own greatness, have requited their best deserving benefactors with disgrace, and obloquy; striving to raze out their names and memory to whom they owe the greatest glory. Columbus was a Florentine and no S●aniard, and therefore must not deserve so much of Spain as his golden Indies: otherwise Augustus Caesar's image had been better lost then found; and the Bishop received small thanks for his Perasitick presentation, 5: That America should ever suffer such a deluge as to be lost for so large a time, will sooner be admitted as a pleasant discourse in table talk, then purchase credit as a likely History: it seemeth to be doubted by Mercator a great Geographer of latter times▪ inferior to none before named, whether over this tract of land were overwhelmed with Waters in the general deluge▪ which he was induced to believe out of the disparity of the Soil, Herbs, Beasts▪ and Inhabitants, with ours, in Europe and other parts of the world; This opinion I hold not sound in Divinity; yet seems it backed with more strength of humane reason, than Plato's fable of this imaginary Atlantic Island: Much more could I speak of the uncertainty of this first argument, were I not afraid to tyre my Reader too much: But this Northwest passage is a long voyage, and hath been for a long time sought, and therefore I hope ingenious men will pardon my long discourse. 2 The second reason is taken from a Relation reported by Gemma Frisius of three Brothers, who in ancient time passed through this strait into America: which accident gave it the name of Fretum Trium Fratrum, by which appellation it is known at this day. This argument I take to be more weak than the other, as depending on uncertain report, Indebted I know not to what approved History: But where History is uncertain, reasonable conjecture must challenge precedency: I will here by way of doubt ask these few questions; whether these three Brothers before mentioned passed through this straight or not? If not, no good Argument can hence be grounded of such a passage: or if they passed through, I demand whether they returned to their Country or not, to make a relation: If they returned not, how could such a report with probability be brought home unto us? 3 If they returned home: how could such a memorable Action be forgotten, and not committed to any certain History? especially in such a Monkish age, wherein out of ignorance and want of experience, the most petty Inventions were admired for great matters: The reason as yet makes me to suspend my judgement of Decision, till I find better. 3 The third reason drawn from antiquity, best urged and husbanded by Sr Humphrey Gilbert for this Northwest passage, depends on a certain Relation of Indians in ancient time cast by tempest on the coasts of Germany, Pliny relates out of a report of Cornelius Nepos, who wrote 57 years before CHRIST, that certain Indians were enforced by violence of tempest upon the German coasts, which were afterward presented by the King of Suevia, to Quintus Metellus Celer, than Proconsul of France, whereupon Pliny infers in his 2 Book 66 Chapter, that it is no great wonder, though there be a sea North, where there is so much moisture. To confirm this opinion of Pliny, and report of Cornelius Nepos, they produce the testimony of the excellent Geographer Dominicus Marius Niger, who showeth how many ways the Indian Sea extendeth itself, reciting the same report of certain Indian's that were carried by tempest through the North-seas from India, upon the Borders of Germany, as they were following their Trade of Merchandise: The argument grounded upon these Testimonies will stand thus: These forenamed Indians arriving on the coasts of Germany, must come of necessity either by the Southeast, South-west; North-east or Northwest. The three other coasts seem altogether improbable, and therefore this opinion of the Northwest seems more worthy credit; first, they came not by the Southeast; because the roughness of the Seas, occasioned by stormy winds, and strange currents in those places about Cape bona Speranza, seconded by the smallness of their Canoas', wherein the Indians usually travailed, seem to stand against su●h a long voyage: 2 They could not well come a long by the shore of afric and so pass into Europe, because the winds do there commonly blow Easterly off from the shore; so that the curren● driving that way would sooner have carried them Westerly upon some part of America, where they should by all likely conjecture, have perished in that great Atlantic Sea, either in that huge and great Atlantic Sea either by shipwreck, or want of provision in so small a vessel. 3 If they had overcome all these dangers which wise men would hardly take up upon trust: It seems hard they should not have first touched upon the coasts of the Azores, Portugal, Spain England or Ireland, before they should arrive at the coasts of Germany. 4 For the reason beforenamed they could not come from the South-west, because the current which cometh from the East, striketh with such violence on the straits of Magellane, running with such swiftness into the South-sea, or Mare deal Zur, that a ship without great burden cannot without much difficulty arrive at our Western Ocean, through that narrow rea: What then shall we imagine of an Indian Canoa managed by such unskilful mariners? 5. To prove these men to be true Indians, and neither Africans nor Americans, seems to be warranted; because the Inhabitants of Africa & America neither had, nor scarce know other kind of Boats than such as bear neither masts, nor sails; but such as are are only carried along by the shores: except of later times such as have been instructed by the Turks on the coasts of Barbary, or by the Spaniards in America: This argument I confess is wittily spun out by my renowned countryman Sr Humphrey Gilbert, whose ability seems to have made a harvest out of the stubble. Nevertheless in my conceit it promiseth in the conclusion more than the premises can well warrant: For first it seems not to me a matter so clear out of question whether these shipwrecked people cast in upon the coasts of Germany were true Indians, or not; because so far as my conjecture leadeth me, being grounded on History, the name of Indians out of the ignorance of those times hath been given by the Romans to many other foreign Nations far distant; especially to the Aeth●opians in afric which beside the testimony of divers ancient Historians, too tedious to relate, may seem probable out of that end of a verse of Horace▪ Vltra Garamantas & Indos: where for joining together two Nations so separat in place, the former being in afric, the other almost in the farthest verge of Asia, he seemed as ignorant of the distance, as the people: 2 How should these Western inhabitants know these men to be true Indians, whose condition, place and language they never understood? 3 Why might not these men come from some of the Lands in the Atlantic Ocean? 4 The reason against it, drawn from the current striking with such force on the streits of Magellane, is contradicted by the experience of latter Navigators▪ much more I could speak of this reason; but that I hold it better to cherish a hope of such a passage▪ then by excepting against these ancient arguments to discourage modern industry. Other probabilities may seem to be drawn from the discoveries of later Navigatours since the reign of Henry the seventh, under whose protection Sebastian Cabot undertaken the discovery of the North-West costs: In which he prevailed as much as the Alchemists, who in seeking out the Philosopher's stone have often missed of their aim: yet by this means invented many rare and excellent secrets, of use, and admiration. That Cabot the same year discovered as much of the Northern parts of America as Columbus of the Southern, out of my small reading seems to me no great question, whence I cannot imagine that King Philip of Spain can in this New-found-world challenge a greater interest than King Charles of great Britain: a Prince of those incomparable virtues, which may be thought worthier to own, than the others to pretend to so great a Sovereignty: For the latter voyages & discoveries of Davis' & Frobisher (for aught I see) they promise scarce so much as Hope, which oftentimes flatters and deceives men with her best countenance. But if we take up wares upon trust, some will tell us of a Portugal, who made a voyage through this Streit● Northward, calling a Promontory within the same after his name Promontorium Corterialis; of Scolmus a Dane, who passed a great part thereof: but the most probable in my conjecture, is that which Sr Humphrey Gilbert reports of one Saluaterra a Gentleman of Victoria in Spain, who was said to have passed by chance out of the West Indies into Ireland, in the year of our Lord 1568, who constantly averred the Northwest passage from us to Cathay to be thought navigable; and farther related in the presence of Sr Henry Sidney, than Lord Deputy of Ireland (Sr Humphrey Gilbert being then present) that a Friar of Mexico called Andrew Vrdanetta, more than eight years before his arrival, told him that they came from Mare Del Zur, through this Northwest straight into Germany, and showed Saluaterra (being with him at that time in Mexico) a Sea-Chart, made out of his own observation in that voyage, wherein such a passage was expressed, agreeing with Ortelius his Map: moreover this Friar told the King of Portugal in his return by that country homeward, that having found such a Northwest passage, he meant shortly to make the same public, but the King earnestly entreated him not to discover this secret to any Nation: for that (said he) if England had knowledge and experience of it, it would greatly hinder the King of Spain and me. This relation I could willingly credit from the mouth of any other man then a Friar; of whose palpable lies, and fabulous inventions in their flattering letters to the Pope, from both the Indies, we have sufficient experience. Nevertheless that future ages might not despair of so worthy an attempt as the discovery of this passage, it hath pleased God to stir up the Spirits and industry of two later Navigatours, Hudson and Sr Thomas Button, who have revived the forlorn hopes of the former. For the particulars of whose discoveries I know not better where to refer my Reader, then to a curious Map not long since set out by our worthy and learned Professor Mr Brigges: the arguments I collect from thence are these, expressed in his own words; 1 In the bottom of Hudson Bay, where he wintered, the height of the Tide was but two foot, whereas by the nearness of the South sea in Port Nelson, it was constantly 15 foot or more. 2 Moreover in Port Nelson, where Sr Thomas Button did winter, in 57 degrees he found the Tide constantly, every twelve hours, to rise 15 foot or more: and that a West wind made the Nepe Tides equal with the Spring Tides; and the Summer following, about the latitude of 60 degrees he found a strong race a Tide running sometimes Eastward, sometimes Westward. 3 To show the land towards the South-sea, through which we seek to open this passage, not to be so far off as our ordinary Charts seen to pretend, may be probably averred, in that California heretofore supposed to be a part of the Western Continent, is since by a Spanish Chart taken by the Hollandors, found to be a great Island; the length of the West shore being about 500 leagues from Cape Mendocin to the South Cape thereof, called Cape S. Lucas; which may appear both by the Spanish Charts, and by the report of Francis Gaul, whereas in the ordinary Charts it is expressed to be 1700 leagues. These Arguments. I confess, have swayed my opinion, but not as yet absolutely freed me from doubt. Three Queries I must leave for the learned to consider, and for the time to decide; 1 whether this relation of Mariners concerning the Bay of Sr Thomas Button and Hudson be true or no? no man will (I suppose) censure me as unmannerly for ask such a question, considering how much many Navigatours, either by their mistakes or their industrious falsities have deceived men's credulities; the one is incident to mankind, which out of uncertain observations, or unnecessary deductions, from thence often draws an ill consequence; The other, the ordinary policy of discoverers, who lest their Travails might be thought fruitless, would at least promise hope in the reversion. How many relations have been corrected by experience of later Navigatours, every one may judge. 2 Whether this strong Tide in Hudsons' Bay coming from the West, were from the South-Sea, or from the North, betwixt the Continent and divers Lands by an Inlet, is not a matter as yet clearly out of doubt. Terra Del Fuogo was heretofore supposed to be a Continent, till Schouten in his discovery found it to be an Island, and a large Sea beyond it toward the South. Likewise Newfoundland in all our former Maps and Globes, expressed as a part of the Main of America, is by later experience found to be an Island: and why may not this happen in the other, that at the entrance into Hudsons' Bay, the land on the right hand should be cloven into many Lands; betwixt which the waters issuing, should be turned in such sort, as it might seem to proceed from the West: sith the Tides taking their beginning from the Main Sea, and continued through some Straight, commonly follow the crooked windings of the Channel. 3 That California is an Island, it may (for aught I know) be well warranted: But the evidence drawn from the Spanish Chart, seems rather to cherish hope, then persuade consent. In this which I have spoken of these worthy men's conjectures, I have rather expressed my doubts, than my opinion; esteeming notwithstanding that doubt almost & Heresy, which should discourage any generous and deserving spirit from a farther attempt of this North-west-Passage. CHAP. VIII. Of Sea-Trafficke and Merchandise. 1 OF the Internal Affections of the Sea we have spoken: It remains now that we treat of the external: By the external I understand that which belongs to Sea-Trafficke, or Navigation. 2 Sea-Trafficke is a passage by Sea from one Country to another. It is not my purpose in this place exactly to set down the Art of Navigation; being a matter requiring a special▪ Treatise of itself: yet because shipping and Navigation, as external or adjacent Accidents, belong to the Sea as the proper subject; I could not altogether slip them over without some mention: In handling of which matter I only propose to myself two things: first, the Author and efficient causes of Seavoyages or Navigation; Secondly, the End and Uses thereof: both which we will knit up in these two general Theorems. 1 Navigation first taught by Almighty God, was afterward seconded by the industry of famous Men in all ages. The first invention of this excellent art we can ascribe to no other author than God himself, who first taught the Hebrews his chosen people, and not the Egyptians and Phoenicians, as some have falsely imagined: For we read in Genesis that Noah according to God's precept, made an Ark for the preservation of himself and other living creatures from the deluge: before which we cannot learn that there was extant any skill of Navigation: Of which we have many reasons and conjectures given by ancient writers. 1 Because in those times there was greater need of Cities than ships; because cities are not made for ships, but rather ships, for the use of cities. 2 Small or little commodity could in those times be reaped from other Countries, lying as yet rude and unpossessed without Inhabitants. 3 Some would have this to be a reason why God revealed not this art to the old worldlings: because being ready to perish in the flood, no man might have means to escape or save himself, which without doubt they would have attempted, had the Art of Navigation been known amongst them. Whence it is a probable conjecture, that this knowledge of Navigation was discovered first to Noah at the time of the Deluge whose Ark resting afterwards on the mountains of Ararat, gave a precedent to other Nations near bordering, in what manner ships were to be framed. Whence it came to pass that the first to whom this skill was derived next to the Hebrews were the Tyrians and Phaenicians, Nations as well for the commodity of the place as Inclination to such business more accommodated to Navigation: For Tyre was a chief Mart-towne of Phoenicia bordering upon the sea. Which knowledge being derived from them to other Natitions gave occasion to Stratus and Strabo to conjecture that they were the first Inventors' of it, being not able through the want of holy writ to ascend higher. From the Phaenicians was this knowledge derived to the Egyptians, as Pliny reports in his 7 Book and 56 Chapter, when as yet this Art was but rude and altogether unpolished, as may appear by the same Pliny; who testifies that they then began to sail in a certain vessel called Ratis: which word howsoever it now be taken generally for any ship, was originally interpreted to be made of Beams joined together: In which kind of ship they are reported to have passed the Mediterranean sea, but especially the Red-sea, being set out by King Erithra. Then came this art from the Egyptians to the Grecians (according to Pliny by Danaus) who perfected this science, and made a ship in a more exact form than he had learned amongst the Phenicians▪ whence Danaus was celebrated the first Author of this invention: it being a common error amongst all Nations to ascribe the first invention to him, who was the first discoverer of it to them, being able to derive it no f●rther: Yet the Grecians being very full of fabulous inventions have found out other Authors of this art; for Strabo in his 10 book, gives it to Min●s: others, as Diodorus Si●ulus in his 6 book, to Neptune; who is of opinion, that for this cause he was afterward translated into the number of the Gods. But this is certain that amongst all the Grecians the Cretensians were the first that excelled in this faculty. Whence grew that Proverb: Cretensis nescit Pelagus: as who should say nothing could be imagined more absurd and ridiculous then that a man should be borne in Crect and have no skill in Navigation: Others ascribe the first knowledge of making ships to Daedalus, a rare workman in mechanical occupations: From the Grecians afterwards was this trade communicated to the Italians, amongst whom the Genevensians and Venetians most excelled. Of the Venetians skill in this matter, we read no other argument than their great riches & magnificent power, especially by the sea, which hath continued unto this day: whereof no other cause can be thought on, next unto God's providence, than their industry in Seavoyages. After these arose the portugals who under the conduct and direction of Columbus an Italian, discovered America called the new-world, and gave example and excitement to many other Nations to adventure farther. Amongst which (by the testimony of outlandish people) no Nation hath waded farther than the English, who under Drake and Candish have compassed about the world and left an eternal Trophy of their immortal fame unto posterity. Yet can we not here defraud the Low-countrieses men of their due commendation, especially the Hollanders, Flemings, and Sealanders: who by their riches acquired by navigation and extraordinary power at Sea, have kept in despite of the usurping Spaniard these Provinces, far richer than at the beginning of their wars, and deserved that saying which was given to one of the Grecians cities, by the Oracle; Tha● it was guarded not with stones, but with wooden walls. Thus much may suffice for the Authors and first Inventors' of Navigation. We are now to speak something of the ends and uses of it, which may in general be referred either to profit or pleasure: Both which are again spread into many Branches; the most of which we shall comprise in this following Theorem. 2 Navigation is very necessary as well for the increase of Knowledge as Riches. Necessity is usually taken two ways; either for an absolute need, without the which a thing cannot be: or Comparatively for a conveniency, without the which a thing cannot well be: In both senses I may call Navigation necessary for a man's life: for to defer the later, whereof less doubt is made; it is certain that many places are so poor, barren, and indigent of all succour and relief, that they cannot maintain a populous Nation without foreign commerce and traffic; especially in these days, where the multitude of men is increased to so great abundance: for the later, many arguments may be produced to prove the conveniency of Navigation, which no man of any judicious insight can deny to be most strong and forcible. The first argument may be drawn from the Authors and Inventors' of it, whereof we have spoken in the former proposition: for first (as we have showed) it was prescribed by God himself, who never taught mankind any thing idle or unnecessary. It was embraced and cherished by many Nations even till this day, which no doubt had long since been lost, had not use and profit seconded the Invention. Neither is it probable that Almighty God should create that vast Mass of Water▪ that it should be an Element for fishes to live only, or that (as some guess) it should somewhat mitigate the extremity and drought of the Sun's heat●▪ But that men should by this means have an easy and ready way to communicate and traffic one with the other; which may appear as well by many Testimonies out of the sacred Scripture▪ namely Psal. 104 vers. 25. Es●● 26. ver. 1▪ 2. as also by the example of King Solomon, the wisest of all Kings, who by this means got great store of gold from Ophir to build the Temple, as will appear in 1 Kings and the 9 Chapter. The second reason therefore may be drawn from the exercise of Merchandise, and transportation of commodities, which cannot be administered without Seavoyages: first because greater store of Merchandise may be carried in a ship then in a Cart, Wagon, or any other Instrument ordinarily in use. Secondly, because in ships greater variety of wares may be brought from divers places, to which a Wagon cannot without great difficulty approach, or not at all. Thirdly, because wares and such commodities cannot so quickly be conveyed in the land from places far distant, as on the sea: nor with so little cost and charges. The commodities conveyed from one Country to another are chiefly three; stuffs and other matters necessary for apparel, victuals and food, Physical Drugs▪ all which no man will deny to be most profitable for the use of mankind. Moreover it is not to be imagined that nature produceth such commodities only for the private behoof of some one country wherein they grow: First, because such commodities in some countries are found in such abundance, that the same place seems not to need them: And nature were vain, if the use were not required. India mittit Ebur, molles sua thura Sabai. Secondly, because other Nations altogether want such things which abound in other countries: without the which not withstanding they cannot well live. A fourth reason may be drawn from the promotion of Religion & sciences, which cannot well be atcheived without Seavoyages or Navigation. For the former we need go no farther than the holy Scripture which gives large testimony of such voyages: In the old Testament as well as in the new, we have recommended to all posterity the industry of the Queen of Saba, who is said to have come from the uttermost parts of the Earth to hear the wisdom of Solomon: And how should the Gospel of Christ have been divulged to divers Nations, had not the Apostles dispersed themselves, and passed the Sea in ships, to convey their sacred message to divers Nations and Kingdoms? neither is it less evident in the propagation of Learning and humane Sciences: First, out of the example of many and famous worthy Philosophers, who travailed far to converse with learned men of other Nations, to enrich their minds with knowledge. Secondly, out of the first propagation of Learning into our parts; which we shall find (as it were) foot by foot to follow Navigation. Hence we see that from the Hebrews and Chaldees it was derived to the Tyrians; from them to the Egyptians▪ so to the Romans, and thence to most parts of Europe. A fourth reason may be taken from the necessity of transporting Colonies into foreign countries: for as after the universal Deluge of the world▪ the people daily increasing, were enforced in tract of time to disperse themselves into divers Countries: so every Country left to itself, and not much molested with famine, or devoured by wars, will at length grow too populous▪ unable to sustain its own weight, and relieve its own Inhabitants. Whence it hath been a policy practised by most Kings & States in such eases, to make foreign expeditions, and send forth Colonies into other Country's less peopled, to disburden their own of such encumbrances: as we see the Kings of Spain to have sent many into the West-Indies; and we at this day discharge many Idlers into Virginia and the Bermudas. Here al●o is the Art of Navigation useful, without which, the Seas could not be passed, nor foreign Countries known. Fiftly, Navigation seems to be of greater importance for the defence of a Country against foreign Nations; because Sea-fights are less dangerous and inconvenient to the Land, then Land-fights. All these arguments have their force and life to prove the profit of this excellent Science. Many arguments may be drawn to prove the use of it for pleasure and delectation; which being well used, hath his place amongst other of God's especial blessings. This delight will first show itself in the mutual commerce and society with other Nations: Sith a man (as Aristotle affirms) is by nature inclined to mutual society, and cannot reap greater pleasure than in such conjunctions: And as one Man with another finds solace; so one Nation with another: especially in the variety of sundry manners, customs, rites, and dispositions. Secondly, in the contemplation of wise Nature, who hath endowed divers countries with diverse Minerals, Plants, Beasts, and such commodities; than which variety nothing can be more delectable to an ingenious understanding. To all which we may add as a Corollary, the Honour which hath been given to Navigation by Princes and States, as well of former as later years. In ancient times we read that Ptolemy Philadelphus, that learned King of Egypt, who furnished himself with so rich a Library 277 years before Christ's Incarnation, gave great encouragement to Navigation, and maintained the passage through Sinus Arabicus, or the Red-Sea, by which the commodities of India and Arabia were brought to Alexandria, and from thence dispersed through divers places of Europe, Asia, and Africa. This was afterward seconded and cherished by the Romans, at which time Egypt was made subject to their dominion: But the Roman Empire being afterwards rend in pieces by the Goths, Vandals, Lumbards', and Saracens, all traffic betwixt nations began a while to cease; till such time as the inconvenience being known, a new Mart was set up at Capha in Taurica Chersonesus, belonging at that time to the Genois: Thence was it derived to Trebizond, and afterwards to Samerchand, where the Indian, Turkish, & Persian Merchants were wont to trade with the Venetians. This Art was afterwards set up and revived by the Sultan's of Egypt, through the passage of the Red-Sea, till such time as it was in a manner taken away by the Portugals, Spaniards, English, and Dutch; who have found out for themselves a better way by the Cape of good Hope, to the East Indies, and by this means much abated the Traffic of Alexandria, and the wealth of the Venetians. Neither in this Age of ours have there wanted great Potentates, who have not only endowed this Trade with great and ample privileges; but also themselves practised such commerce, as well for the benefit of their Commonwealth, as the increase of their particular estate. Two memorable examples we have in Henry the third, King of England, and Laurence de Medici's Duke of Florence, whereof the former gave many and large privileges to all the Hance Towns in his Kingdoms, which were in Number about 27: The other himself for his own private commodity exercised the Trade of Merchandise: yet was this man most ingenious, and a great lover of learned Men. CHAP. IX. Of Pedography, Rivers, Lakes, and Fountains in the Earth. 1 WE have formerly treated of hydrography, or the description of the Water; now are we (by God's assistance) to proceed on to Pedographie, which is a description of the Firm Earth, or Dry-Land. 2 The Land is a space contained in the superficies of Earth, distinguished from the Water. The Earth in this place is not taken as in the former part of Geography for the whole Terrestrial Sphere, composed of Earth and Water: Neither yet as it is usually taken in Natural Philosophy for an Absolute Elementary body, whose causes and affections are to be searched out; but Topographically for a place or habitable space on the dry-land; This dry-land distinguished from the Water by its Firmness and Constancy, being no● subject as the Water to motion and inconstancy, was therefore (if we believe the Poet) called Vest●, according to that verse, Stat viterra suâ, vi stando Vesta vocatur. Neither wants this fable of Vesta a sufficient moral. First, because Vesta was feigned to be a keeper and protector of their houses, which may very well agree to the Earth: which not only sustains and bears up all buildings and houses; but also affords all commodities and fruits wherewith households are maintained. Secondly, Vesta was feigned to be the Goddess to whom the first fruits were offered in sacrifice: which may well square with the nature of the Earth, from which all fruits are originally derived; and therefore (as it were of due) ought all first fruits to be consecrated to her altar. Two other Parallels betwixt the Goddess Vesta are added by Natalis Comes: First, because Plutarch showeth in his Symposiacks, that the Tables of the Ancients, dedicated to Vesta, were made round in form and fashion of the Earth: Secondly, because the seat of Vesta was imagined to be in the liquid Air immoveable, and not subject to motion: which well agrees with the common conceived opinion of the Earth. But these two rather express the nature of the whole Terrestrial Sphere, then of the land divided from the Waters: This description of the dry-land separated from the Waters, we have termed Pedographie● because the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, commonly derived from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, a foot, signifies as much as a firm place, whereon men may have sure footing, to which is consonant the Hebrew word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which seems most probably derived from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which signifies as much as Terere, to wear out or waste: because the Earth is daily trodden and worn with our feet. The proprieties of the Earth appertaining to a Cosmographer, are many and various; wherefore to avoid confusion; we have divided them into these heads. 3 The Adjuncts of a Place in the Land are either Natural or Civil▪ The Natural are such as are in bred in the Earth. 4 The Natural may be again divided into Perpetual, or Casual. Perpetual are such as always, or most ordinarily continue the same. 5 The Perpetual proprieties are again twofold▪ either Absolute, or Comparative. The Absolute I call such as agree to the Land without any respect to the Sea. 6 Of the former sort are such as belong to the Figurature of the Soil, wherein three things are most remarkable: 1 Rivers, Fountains, and Lakes. 2 Mountains, Valleys, and plains. 3 Woods, and Champion Countries. 7 A River is a perpetual course of water from a certain head or fountain running from an higher to a lower place on the earth. Rivers are by some Geographers more curiously distinguished into 2 sorts: whereof the first are settled or stayed Rivers, which slide away with a more equal and uniform course: The later are called Torrents or stickle waters, which are carried with a far greater violence. In a River three things are chiefly remarkable▪ First the Fountain or Spring secondly Whirlpools▪ Thirdly the Mouth of it. The spring is the place, where at first the water sensibly breaks out of the Earth: As Nilus in Africa is thought to have his first head at the mountains of the Moon. A Whirlpool is a place in a River, where the water falling into a Deep trench, is whirled & teurned round▪ The Mouth is the place where any River finds a passage our, either into the sea or into another greater River; which in latin is termed ostium or a gate: Whence they call Septem ostia Nili: which are seven mouths, by which it falls into the Mediterranean. This gave the name to many Cities and Towns in England as Plymouth, Dar●mouth, Portsmouth, Axmouth, with many others. Now for as much as all water is by nature heavy, and therefore covets the lowest place; The course of all Rivers must needs be from a higher to a lower place: whence we may guess the height of lands. For it is necessary that for every mile wherein the water glides forward on the earth, there be made an allowance of 2 foot at least in the declivity of the ground. For although water will slide away at any inequality, yet could not the water be wholesome, and retain any reasonable swiftness of motion without this allowance. Hence we may probably find out the huge height of the Alps about all the places in Europe: because out of them spring four great Rivers, which run four ways; whereof the two greatest are the Danow (which receives into it 60 Navigable rivers and so disburthens itself into the Euxine Sea far remote) and the Rhine. Of Lakes and Rivers many memorable matters may be spoken: all which we will reduce to these heads. 1 Their Generation and first original: 2 Their Appearance: 3 Their Place in the earth: 4 Their Virtues and effects; all which we will comprehend in these Theorems following. 1 All Rivers have their first original from the sea the mother of Rivers. The original of fountains and Rivers on the earth is a matter of great difficulty, and for aught I know, not yet found out of our greatest Philosophers; yet being willing to go as far as I can, I will glance at probabilities, and first set down other men's opinions. Some have been of opinion that in the bowels of the earth are hid certain vast concavities and caverns, which receiving into them a great quantity of rainwater, have given original to Lakes and Fountains. Hence they give the reason why these fountains are perpetual; Because the rainwater received into these caverns being extraordinary great, is sufficient to nourish such springs of water until the next winter; whence comes a new supply of more rain. These Rivers (say they) in the summer decrease, and sometime are dry, because of the defect of w●ter, when the place is not great enough to receive sufficient water for the whole year. This opinion seemeth grounded on these reasons: First, because we find by experience, that Rivers and fountains are greater and larger in Summer then in Winter. Secondly, because where there is less Rain, fewer or no Rivers are seen▪ As in the Deserts of Ethiopia and Africa few or no Rivers are found: But in Germany, France, Britain, and Italy many Rivers show themselves▪ because they abound in the moisture of the Air and much fall of Rain. Thirdly, amongst us (we see by experience) in a hot and dry Summer they are much decreased from their ordinary greatness, or altogether dried up; which is a great probability that their original is from rain. This opinion if it be only understood of some Rivers, may be probable; because some currents out of doubt take their original from great showers or snows, as at the foot of the Alps and other such places, where the snow daily melts and feeds them: but if it be generally understood of all Rivers, it is manifestly false as may appear by these reasons. First, because the Earth no where drinks up the rain farther than ten foot deep in the soil; for the higher superficies of the earth is either dry and so easily drinks up and consumes the Water within that space; or else being already moist, it receives it not at all, but expels it by Rivers and channels: Secondly, some mountains not covered with earth, but consisting of hard rock, notwithstanding send forth great store of springs and fountains, which water could not be received in, through a hard rocky substance. Thirdly, because in very dry places certain pits being digged down into the ground 2 hundred or three hundred foot deep, will discover many great streams of Water, which could not be from the receit of Rain. Fourthly, it cannot be imagined that so much rain could in a winter fall into one place, besides that which the drought of the earth consumes, to nourish so mighty and great Rivers in the Earth, as are Rivers running in a perpetual course. Fiftly, all Rivers almost take their original from some mountains or other; as Danubius from the Alps, and Nilus from the mountains of the Moon in Africa; Which places being extraordinary high, are more unapt to receive water, than lower places of the earth. To the reasons that they allege for their opinions, it is not hard to answer▪ That rivers should be greater in winter th● in the summer, the cause may be better given, Because more moisture of the Air falls into the brink from external R●ine or snow in winter then in summer; and the ground being moister, is able to drink less then at other times: which is also the reason why in hotter and dry Countries there is not such plenty of Rivers▪ for we deny not, but fountains may sometimes be increased and sometimes diminished by addition of rainwater but that any such vast concavity should be under ground, as the receptacle of so much rain, and should nourish so many and so great currents. The second opinion is of those who think that the original of all rivers and fountains is from the Sea: Which conceit hath been strongly fortified by many Fathers of the Church, and grave Divines of later time; which opinion is chiefly grounded upon these reasons: First because it seems a most incredible matter, that so much vaporous matter should be engendered under the earth, to feed such a perpetual course of water: Secondly, if all Rivers should not be derived from the sea, no reason could be given, why so many rivers daily emptying themselves into the sea, the sea should not increase, but continue in the same quantity. Thirdly, to this purpose they urge the place of Eccles. 1. All rivers run into the sea, and yet the sea is not full: To the place whence they came they return, that they may flow again. But this opinion seems to be shaken with a great difficulty. For it is a hard matter to conceive how the water of the sea being by nature heavy, & lower than the superficies of the earth (as we have demonstrated) should ascend into high mountains; out of which we find springs of water oftentimes to arise: for either it must ascend Naturally or by Violence: not naturally for the foresaid cause; because it is a heavy body: If violently, they must assign some external Agent, which enforceth it to this violence. This difficulty divers Authors have laboured divers ways to salve: Some amongst whom the chief was Theodoret▪ have fled to a supernatural cause in God's providence; as though the water in its own nature heavy, should be notwithstanding enforced to the tops of the mountains; But this opinion seems very improbable; because, although we cannot deny Gods miraculous and extraordinary working in some things; yet all men have supposed this to be confined within the bounds of nature: And very strange it were to imagine that almighty God in the first institution of nature should impose a perpetual violence upon nature. Others, as Basill, have thought that the sea-water was driven upwards towards the tops of mountains by reason of certain sp●rits enclosed in it: Mare (as he saith) fluitans & permeans per cuniculos fistularet & angustos, ●ox ubi obliquis aut certe recta in sublime surrectis excursibus se occupatum deprehenderit ab agitante compulsum spiritu, superficie terr● vi disrupta erumpit atque for as emicat; The same opinion almost in every respect is ascribed to Plato in Phedone, and Pliny 2 book .65 chap. Quo (inquit) spiritu, actu & terr● pondere expressa siphonum modo e●●cat, tant●que a periculo decidendi abest ut in summa quoque et ●●tissima exiliat: Qua ratione manifestum est, quare tot f●u●inum quotidi●n● accessu maria non crescant. But this exposition will hardly satisfy him who desires to search farther than obscurity of words: For first by admitting spirits as movers of the waters, they seem to fall into a Platonic opinion before examined of us concerning the heat of the sea-water. Secondly, I would demand whether such spirits in the water to which they ascribe this motion, be Natural Agents or Supernatural, or Violent; They cannot be natural Agents: For as much as they are supposed to drive and enforce the water against his own nature. For by nature (as all men know) it is apt to descend; whereas here it is supposed to ascend by reason of such spirits. They cannot be violent agents because they be perpetual; whereas no violent thing can be perpetual. Thomas Aquinas being desirous to show, how much fountains could ascend out of the sea-water varies in opinion from the former, and imagines that the fountains and River-water is drawn upwards through the force of Celestial bodies, for the common good; to wit that it might water aswell the metals in the bowels of the earth, as give moisture and nourishment to Plants, and living creatures, dwelling thereon. And this motion (saith he) although it be against the particular nature of the water, is not altogether violent: because elementary bodies are bound by a certain law to obey and subject themselves to the heavenly; so that motion's impressed by them, are not enforced on them by violence. For albeit in some sort it thwart the physical disposition: yet have all creatures an ob●dientiall aptness (as they term it) to submit themselves to the superior. But this opinion of Thomas Aquinas (in my conceit) seems less sound than the former: For first Thomas had no need at all of these shifts, holding some of his other grounds: For in another place, comparing the height of the s●a and land one with the other, he firmly maintains that▪ the sea is above the land, and that it is bounded and restrained from overflowing the dry land, by the immediate power of the Creator: If this be granted, what need there any ascent or drawing up of the water, by any external power of the heavenly bodies: sith the remitting of this restraint of water● in some places, were sufficient to cause such springs and rivers in the earth: Secondly, his opinion cannot stand without manifest contradiction of himself; for how can the water, being of his own nature heavy, be drawn upward without violence and thwarting of nature. And whereas he alleges for himself an obediential aptness in the elementary bodies to obey the superior, he shall find very little help to maintain his part. For this obediential inclination must be either according to the nature of the water, or opposite unto it, or at least the one must be sudordinate unto the other: That it is according to the nature of the water, he himself disclaims and experience refutes; because it naturally descends, not ascends: if it be opposite (as indeed it must needs be) he contradicts himself: If the Physical and obediential inclination be subordinate the one to the other; I urge, that subordinate causes can produce no other than subordinate effects; for as much as the causes and the effects are measured and proportioned the one by the other. But we plainly see that the motions of ascent or descent are diametrally opposed, and contrary the one to the other; so that they cannot otherwise proceed, then from opposite and contrary causes. Secondly this obediential aptness, is commonly understood of a creature, in respect of his Creator, in whose hand it is, as to create all things of nothing, so to reduce all things again into nothing. But this although it be above nature, yet no way contradicts nature: and easier it is to be imagined, that the Creator should annihilate any Creature, then letting it remain in his own Nature, give it a motion against nature: Moreover 〈◊〉 we duly consider nature in her course, we shall find that the lower & elemental Bodies only concur to the conservation of the whole, and of one another, by following their own private inclination: for the whole is nothing else then an orderly consent and harmony of all the parts; from whose mutual cooperation, it receives his perfection; so that where any part fails in his own office, the whole must needs sustain damage. Thirdly, it will hardly be resolved by any of this opinion, by what means or instruments the heavenly or superior Bodies can have such an operative power over the water, as to lift it upward from his own Centre: for neither can this thing be performed by motion, height, or any Influence, which are the three means of operation of celestial Bodies on elementary: I will not stand to prove every particular in this matter: But only would have my adversary to answer, and give an instance and speciality. Another opinion there is of Aristotle, followed by all Peripatetics, who in his first book of Meteors, and 13 Chapter, goes about to prove and maintain, that all Springs and Wells in the land are produced and generated in the bowels of the Earth by any vapours resolved into water: which opinion he labours ●o strengthen in this manner. It is certain (saith he) that the Earth hath within it much air; because Nature will nowhere admit a vacuity. But the Earth hath not only many open, but a great many secret holes and concavities which cannot otherwise be filled then with air. Moreover a great part of the Earth, and other vapours therein contained, and stirred up by the force of the Stars, are converted into Air; and that aswell the Air included in the bowels of the Earth, as vapours there also bred, are perpetually converted into water: This reason may seem to persuade, because it follows of necessity, that the coldness of the Earth expelling their heat, they should harden & condensate, & be disposed at last to the generation of water: whence also the cause 〈◊〉 given of the generation of water in the middle Region of the Air, although it be not always thence bred: aswell for other causes, as for that the Air by the heat of the Sun is sometimes too hot, and the vapours are too much attenuated and ratified: so that the matter of Rain cannot be always supplied. This would Aristotle have to be the original of all Springs and Fountains; So that the water should first distil as it were drop by drop, out of this vapourous matter: and this moist matter so collected and drawn together, should afterwards break forth out of the ground, and so cause such fountains. Some reasons are also produced to prove this assertion; for (say the Authors of this opinion) If the Springs and Riuer● should proceed from any other cause, than they should take their beginning from Rainwater, which is before refuted; or from the Sea by certain secret passages, which opinion seems too weak to endure examination: First, this seems an argument, that the Sea-water is commonly Salt but the water of Springs and Rivers is for the most sweet and fresh; and therefore such Springs are not derived from the Sea: Secondly, because we never find the Sea to be emptied, which must needs be, if it should give beginnings to all such currents of water in the Earth; Thirdly (we have already showed) that the superficies of the Earth is higher than the Water; so that it cannot be conceived how rivers should be derived from the Sea. To this opinion, howsoever seeming probable, and supported with the name and authority of so great a Philosopher, I dare not wholly assent; forasmuch as it thwarts the Testimony of holy Scripture, and cannot otherwise stand with reason: because it cannot well be imagined how so many vapours, and so continually, should be engendered in the bowels of the earth, to nourish so many and so great currents, as we see springing out of the Earth: for a very great quantity or portion of Aire being condensated and made Water, will become but as a little drop: The Air, according to Aristotle's grounds being by a Tenne-fold proportion thinner than the Water. Moreover the Air in these places seated in the superficies of the Earth, and higher than other places, and by consequent nearer the Sun, should rather be rarified and thickened; because heat is the greatest cause of rarefaction, as we shall show hereafter: for the reasons alleged for these opinions, they are drawn only from the weakness of their assertion▪ which hold that Fountains are derived either from Rain water, or from the Sea: both which we have examined briefly, and whereof we shall speak hereafter. The School of Conimbra, not utterly rejecting all the former opinions▪ have undertaken to forgo an opinion (as it were) partaking of all, pretending to say something more, when indeed they produce nothing besides the former. Their assertion they have set down, in eight propositions, which I will faithfully set down, and then censure. The first is that in subterranean places under the superficies of the earth, is hid a great quantity of water, distinguished into Rivers, Ponds, and Lakes. This they prove from the daily experiment of such as digs divers wells and deppe trenches in the Earth; Who many times under the Earth; find not only many rivers and ponds, but many times happen upon so great abundance of Water, that they can neither find the bottom or bounds thereof. To this they add an experiment of Philip and Macedon recorded by Asclepiador●● who caused many men expert in digging of metals, to be let down into an old and forsaken mine to search out the veins of metals, to see whether the covetousness of antiquity had left any thing to posterity. These men using great lights are said to have found nothing there, but great and vast rivers and great receptacles of waters. This they also labour to confirm by many and sudden eruptions and breaking out of waters out of the earth, whereof we shall have occasion to speak more hereafter. This first position, howsoever in itself true enough, seems little to the purpose; but we will proceed to the second, which is this: That when God in the third day of the Creation separated the waters into one place, and hid it in the caverns and secret receptacles of the earth; at the same time dispersed into divers parts of the earth, a great quantity of water by divers occult passages and channels, whence comes that great mass of waters under the earth; which is before mentioned. This they seem to persuade by reason: for (say they) as the wise Architect of all for man's sake, and the rest of living creatures for the use of man, hath discovered the dry land, by restraining all the waters into one place: so it was most necessary, that he should inwardly water the earth; by which stones, metals, minerals, & other such things in the bowels of the Earth, should in time grow and increase. Also that some water should from hence break up out of the Earth, for divers causes hereafter specified. Finally as Philo-Iudaeus affirms, for the continuation of the parts of the earth, which otherwise might by drought be separated and divided. The third proposition grounded on the two former is this; That many rivers and fountains in divers places by God's decree arise out of the earth, by quantities of waters hid in the caverns of the earth, which they prove by reasons drawn from the utility of such fountains and rivers, springing out of the earth. Fourthly they defend, that all fountains and currents were not so made and appointed in the first Creation; because Histories & experience teach us, that many have broken out of the ground afterwards; whereof we shall have occasion to speak hereafter. Fi●tly they affirm, that if the opinion of Aristotle be understood of all fountains and floods, it cannot be approved; for as much as it seems sufficiently declared in the third opinion, how such rivers might be generated without such vapours; as also because many arguments and places of holy Scriptures, seem to prove the contrary. As also the four Rivers of Paradise created in the beginning of the world, cannot be guessed to draw their original from such vapours, as Aristotle imagines; to which accord many ancient Fathers upon these places recited in that opinion, whereas all rivers are thought to fetch their original from the sea. Sixtly for the credit of their master Aristotle, they are constrained to aver that although his opinion cannot be verified of all rivers and fountains of the earth, yet if it be restrained to some such perpetual currents, it may have probability, For as much aswe are to believe that many such large caverns and holes are hid under the earth, in which no small quantity of vapours may be engendered. This probability is greater in those rivers which are lesser in quantity then the greater, for the reasons before showed. Seventhly they affirm that it is absolutely to be believed; that not only great rivers and currents are derived from subterranean waters, which have original from the sea; but also less fountains and springs for the most part, challenge the same beginning: whence they labour to prove by this reason, that in very few places of the earth there is found so perpetual and apt disposition of vapours under the ground as to nourish so many and so great currents of water. Eightly (say they) it cannot be denied, but that Waters aswell proceeding from rain, as that which is generated of vapours in the caverns of the earth, sometimes may flow into fountains and rivers: What concerns Torrents bred of rain, they have recourse to the reasons of the first opinion; for others they make it also probable; because we see by experience that Vapours and Air compassed about with earth, are by reason of the cold environing it, turned into water, This is indeed the opinion of those subtle jesuits of Conimbra, wherein although they give a flourish, as if they would defend their master Aristotle, on whom they comment; yet mean they nothing less; but indeed warily stick to the other of the Divines and ancient Fathers of the Church, touching the derivation of all 〈◊〉 from the sea, Which opinion, howsoever in itself most probable, they know not how to manage and defend against opposition. For whereas they suppose that in the first sep●●tion of the sea from the dry-land, a great quantity of water was dispersed into divers hollow places & caverns of the earth, from whence Rivers are derived and made; they have not in any probable manner expressed, how this water should perpetually flow, and feed so many & great currents▪ For first, I would ask of these learned fathers, whether the water enclosed in the bowels of the earth, whence these springs are fed, be higher or lower than the fountains arising out of them. If it be higher; whether the Rivers are continually nourished on the old store, or a new supply be daily made. That so great rivers should be maintained so many thousand years out of the old provision, is most improbable; because the mountains out of which such springs arise, cannot be capable of so great a concavity: neither can it otherwise be imagined, but that many great rivers since the beginning, had either been absolutely dried up, or at least diminished in their quantity, their Cisterns being daily more and more emptied out into their channels. If they grant that of this water, a fresh supply be made; it must be either from the sea or from vapours in the earth. It cannot be from the sea: because (as we have proved before) the sea is lower than the fountains, where springs break out of the Earth; forasmuch as we see them run to the sea from their fountains, as from a higher to a lower place. That this supply of water in the depth of the earth should be made by vapours▪ it is also improbable in their opinion; who cannot imagine so many engendered in one place, as to feed so great currents; as also because many rivers were apparent in the first creation▪ as the four great currents of Paradise. This objection hath so far driven the jesuits to their shifts, as that they have been enforced to have recourse to the opinion of Thomas Aquinas, who dreams that the waters are enforced upwards by the influence of the heavens▪ which they a little before ●ast by, and we have before sufficiently refuted. And whereas in the subsequent clause, they labour to salve this place of Ecclesiastes: That all Rivers come from the sea, and return thither again; They are constrained to leave their old grounds, and ●unne back to Aristotle, who holds that all rivers had their original from vapours, drawn up by the sun; whereof the sea is the chief mother. It will be expected at least that we should disclose our own opinion, having censured the former: which we will briefly do as near as probability can lead us, submitting also to those which are more judicious▪ First therefore▪ we will suppose as probable: that the earth is in a manner compassed round about with water; for howsoever the places more eminent, and separated for our habitation, be dry land▪ yet not far under the superficies of the earth, whereon we tread, is the earth sprinkled round with water, for which we may draw an argument; aswell from the Porous and spongy nature of the Earth, which is apt to drink in the water of the sea, in the same height; (because it is the nature of the water, to diffuse itself abroad) as also from experience of Minors and such as dig deep into the earth, who in most parts find water▪ 2ly, this water so environing the earth, were it left to its own natural situation, without an external Agent, would lift his superficies no higher, than the superficies of the sea; because being as one with the sea, it will challenge the same Spherical superficies. Now to know how the water thus naturally settled, is notwihtstanding lifted up higher to become the source of Springs, we must understand, that it comes to pass not only by the heat of the sun and stars, piercing farre under the superficies of the earth, according to the circle, we have allotted to the water. But also to subterranean fires hid in the bowels of the earth, in many places: which are caused by sulphurous matter set on fire by the sun, or some other accident: whether this sulphurous matter be pure Brimstone, or Bitumen, or a mine of sea-coal, as some have thought of our Ba●h●s in England, I will not curiously here dispute, being of itself too large a subject for me in this place to handle. This heat may be conceived to concur to the production of fountains 2 manner of ways: First, by drawing up divers moist vapours, which by reason of the thickness and solidity of the earth, being not presently evaporated out of the superficies of the earth, are enforced to disperse themselves through divers crooked passages, where condensated by cold distilling again into drops of water, they break out through some places of the earth, and so become a fountain. A second way which may also seem probable, is that the Heat piercing the Subterranean Water, though not able to dissolve much of it into vapours for the solidity of the earth, may notwithstanding through his heat, Rarify and attenuate these waters. These waters then rarified, must needs seek a greater place, wherein they may be contained: sith Rarefaction is nothing else but the extension of a body to a greater place than before it occupied. Hence is the Water enforced to enlarge his limits: This enlargement or the place cannot be downward towards the Centre; because all that place was supposed to be filled up as far as the Earth could drink it. Wherefore it must needs extend its limits sidewise, or upwards: By the former of which it may find a passage to break forth on the superficies of the ground: By the latter it may be lifted high enough, to run from the side of a higher mountain, towards the Seashore. If any man should ask why this Rarefaction & swelling of the Water is not so sensible in the open Ocean, I answer that the sea is also much rarified & lifted up by reason of the sun's heat: which whether it be the cause of ebbing and flowing of the sea, in part we have before disputed: Secondly that the sea-water should not rise so high as other water under the ground, these reasons may be given; First that the Ocean hath a larger channel to run abroad on either side, and so this swelling must of necessity become more insensible, whereas the Waters in caverns & concavities of the Earth, being oftentimes straightly bounded on either side, by the narrowness of the channel, must of necessity take up the more in height and eminency. 2 the Sun, heavenly bodies and subterranean fires work more strongly and effectually on the open nakedness of the sea, then on the waters hid under the ground, which are more shrouded from such an extreme heat. Whence it comes to pass, that many parts of the sea, are dissolved into vapours, and so consumed and dispelled by the same; Whereas this heat in the Subterranean waters being more moderately impressed; doth not dissolve into vapours, and consume so great a quantity of water; but being of a middle temper, rather rarefies it to the use forenamed. This seems the more probable, because spring water rising commonly in the sides of mountains, is for the most part thinner than the Sea-water, as experience daily warrants, Thirdly the subterranean vapours are sooner dissolved into drops of water by reason of the cold they must necessarily meet within their passage, through the Earth; whereas the other from the Sea meet with no such encounter till they arrive at the Middle-Region of the Air, whence they return again in showers of Rain. 2 All rivers and Fountains were not from the beginning. For the confirmation of this assertion, many histories may be produced: It is reported that in Caria near about the city Lorus, there arose out of the Earth suddenly a great flood of Water, bringing out with it a great quantity of creatures and fishes, of which being fatted under the Earth, whosoever chanced to eat, died presently. The like is reported, that at the time of the Mithridatick war, at a certain city of Phrygia named Apamea, there sprang up out of the ground many new Lakes, Fountains, Brooks; and that one river sprang up very salt, which brought up with it a great quantity of Oysters, and other Sea-fish; although the city Apamea be very far off from the Sea. This is reported by Nicolaus Damascene. Also Cardinal Contarenus testifies in the second book of Elements, that in a clear day being in Valentia in Spain, there happened a very great inundation of water breaking out of the Earth, which being carried towards the City, had well near turned it into the Sea, had not the gates been shut, and dams well ordered. Why this sudden change should sometimes happen, many reasons may be produced. The first reason may be, because of some sudden ruin or falling down of some parts of the Earth, whereby the courses of the rivers being one way stopped, must needs seek out a passage some other way. This sometimes happens in great Earthquakes, as we may read in Theophrastus, that in the mountain Coricus, after an Earthquake many new springs and fountains discovered themselves. Another reason not much unlike the former is given from the Hardness of the Earth, which oftentimes stopping and hindering the natural course of the water, enforceth it to seek a new passage. Hence the foresaid Theophrastus was induced to believe, that in a City of Crete the fountains were stopped up because the Inhabitants betook themselves to another place; so that the soil was not so much shaken and moved as before. A third reason may be the wasting or cutting down of great woods on the Earth; for it is the nature of the Trees and plants to suck to themselves the Moisture of the ground into one place. But these trees cut down or removed, the waters course must needs be altered. 3 Many Rivers are for a great space of land swallowed up of the Earth: whereof some after a certain distance rise again. This is confirmed by many Historical instances, as of the river Timanus in the province of Aquilia, of Erasenus in Argolica, Padus in the Alps, more remarkable is that of the river Guadiava in Spain: which runneth under the ground, for the space of 13 leagues: and near to a town called Villa Horta breaks up again▪ the like is recorded of Eurota● in Arcadia, which is said to break forth of the ground in the Province of Lacedamon: So Cadmus Asia is swallowed up in a hole of the ground, not far from Laodicea, So Pirates in Catonia. Licus in Libanon, Orontes in Syria. Other rivers are thought to have found a secret passage under the sea from one Region to another: As a river having his fountain in the mountain Meia●es, which being conveyed in a blind Channel under the middle of the sea, comes forth again at the port of P●normus: so others report of Alpheus, which being drowned underground near the Peloponnesian shore, takes a large journey under the Sea, till it arrive at Syracuse, where it ends in Arethuse; which brings forth (they say) such things as are cast into Alpheus: which is much like that which is spoken of the Well of Aesculapius in Athens, wherein if any thing were cast, they were rendered again in Phalericus: But this last I rather hold as a poetical fiction, than a true History. Some rivers there are which are not wholly drowned in the earth; but for some part; a● a part of the Rh●n●, which is hid about four thousand paces from the city Cauba, and shows itself again before it come to Bonna: in like manner a part of Danu●ius which hides itself about Greina a Town of Panonia superior: some rivers there are again, which are not drunk up immediately of the earth, but of certain great Lakes into which they fall as jordan of the Lake Asphaltites: some lakes again having swallowed up rivers (as it were) vomit them forth again, as Rubresius casts out Ara●e in the Province of Narbon, and so Lemanus the river Rhodanus in the same Province: also in Italy, Lorus cast out Abdua; Eupilus, Lambre; Fucinus, Marcia. 4 Rivers for the most part rise out of great Mountains, and at last by divers or one Inlet, are disburdened into the sea. The first part of this proposition is manifest enough out of divers instances of the greatest rivers in the world: for all Geographers will give you to understand, that the river Indus in I●dia is derived from the mountain Ca●casus. Tanais from the Riphaean mountains in Sarma●ia, Araxis from Panardes' in Armenia, Po from the Vesusian Hills in Liguria, Danubius from Arnobia in Germany, Exesus in Norico from the mountains Elachia Isara from the ridge of the Alps toward France and Durias toward Italy from thence. So from the Herminian mountains in Portugal are derived three great Rivers: So Nilus in afric from the mountains of the Moon: These rivers thus rising, are of divers kinds; for some have visible apparent springs and fountains: others are derived from Lakes, out of which they run. As Alba in Prusia, out of Elbinga, Medoarus & Oxus out of two lakes of the same names, near the Alps; Rindacus from Artinia a pool besides Melitopolis. The reason why rivers should be engendered in mountains, and such high places, may be given; because they are made (as we showed before) by the heat of the sun, stars and subterranean fires, rarifying and attenuating the Waters. And this operation of the sun in higher places, must needs be more effectual then in lower. Now for the second part, it is plain to prove, that all rivers run into the sea: either making a passage from their fountains, on the land toward the sea shore, as Nilus and Danubius, with other rivers, or by disburthening themselves into greater rivers, wherein they are conveyed into the sea: as the 60 great Navigable rivers, which empty themselves into Danubius, or at least are swallowed up of the Earth, and so reduced again to their first mother; which we may imagine of the rivers forespoken of, drunk up of the Earth: Although all rivers (as we showed (fall into the sea yet not all in one & the selfsame fashion; if we respect their passage on the land. For some are carried into the sea by one o●tium or mouth, whereof we have two notable examples; the first of a great river in Brasill called Rio de La Plate, which is carried into the sea, by a mouth of 40 leagues with such violence, that the Mariners may ●hence draw fresh water, before they come within sight of land. The other not much unlike, is that which runs by the kingdom of Congo & Angolo, which is six and thirty thousand paces broad▪ where it enters into the sea, and is carried with such a force, that it severs the waves, & keeps his own channel, and renders the shipp-men fresh water betwixt the sea waters, for the distance of eight hundred thousand paces. Other great rivers are disburdened into the sea, by diverse Ostia or Inletts; as Rhine into the German Ocean by three; Danubius into the Pontic sea▪ by 6; Indus into the judean sea by 7; Nilus into the Mediterranean by 7 great and famous passages▪ Volga into the Caspian lake by 72 gates. These are the most remarkable: others we shall supply in our historical part. 5 Divers fountains are endowed with divers admirable virtues and operations. There is nothing wherein Nature delighteth more in miraculous variety, then in fountains and springs of the earth. Of these admirable works of nature, being infinite in these springs, I will touch some. Which the better to effect, I will reduce all to these heads: 1 Their qualities and operations. 2 their motions: For the former we will produce some sew instances. It is reported, that near the Garamantes there is a fountain so cold in the days that no man can drink thereof; so hot in the nights, that no man can abide to touch it: There is another in India wherein a candle will burn. There is also another called heretofore the well of jupiter Hammon which in the morning is lukewarm: at noon col●▪ in the evening Hot, at midnight boiling hot; From whence again it begins to assuage till the morning; and so (as it were) by turn it grows hot and cold▪ a matter of great admiration. Some fountains in Liguria & Paphlagonia being drunk will make the head giddy as if he had drunk wine. Another fountain in Aranea a part of Arcadia being drunk; will so affect the taste, that who drink it shall never afterward endure the taste of wine: which was very like the fountain Clitorius whereof Ovid in his Metamorphosis the last book sings in this manner: Clitorio quiounque sitim de fonte leu●●is, Vina fugit, gaudetque meris abstemius undis. The ancients have also recorded, that in Boeotia near the river Orchomenon, are two fountains; whereof the one gets memory, the other causeth oblivion▪ There is in the Island Cea a fountain making the senses dull; another in Aethiopia▪ whereon the Water drunken will make a man mad: Some water absolutely kills him which drinks▪ as the river Styx in Arcadia, being a venomous fretting poison, and therefore by the poets feigned to be one of the rivers in Hell. divers other rivers are profitable to cure diverse diseases of the body, whereof I need not bring any instances; because such newfound wells are sometimes discovered ●●ongst us here at home. There are 2 rivers in B●eotia of admirable virtue▪ whereof the former, if a sheep drink of it, he will become yellow: but if a sheep of a done or yellow colour drink of the other, he will become white: Rivers which make sheep white coloured beside, are Neleus in Euboea, Aliac●●on in Macedonia: Crathris in Thurijs: so Cerius in Euboea, Auxius in Macedonia, Peneas in Thessaly, will make them black: 〈◊〉 will cause whiteness in oxen: So the river Astaces in Ponti●● waters the land, whereby mares have their milk black. Amongst the regions of the Troglodytes, there is a well which thrice a day will become sweet and bitter, and again return to his former sweetness: and so often again in the night. This may suffice to show the variety of operations in these wells, in respect of other creatures. No less admirable variety is discovered in observing of their divers motions. For some rivers overflow their banks at some certain times of the year, 〈◊〉 Nilus in Egypt, Euphrates in Mesopotania, Ind●● in Indi●▪ some fountains are carried with such violence, that they cast up stones, as M●rsia in Phrygia, and expel any weight as a certain one in Arabia, whereof the like was recorded to be in Portugal: some will swallow up any thing ●●●owne into them, as one in Portugal, if we believe Pliny: some others although they are cold, will seethe and seem to boil● a● the water o● the fire; yet never cast out their water beyond their b●nk●●, but straightway swallow it up again, as Acidula in Alb●g●●●, and ●nother fountain in Cappidoci● named Tia●●▪ some there are which sometimes rise and swell, and other times fall again of their own accord, as Crater of 〈◊〉, and a fountain in Italy called Ph●iana: some wells imitate the ebbing and flowing of the sea in all increases and dimi●utions, as one in Cale●, and the other near Bordeaux in France: some are chose affected to the ebbing & flowing of the sea flowing when the sea ●bbs, and ebbing when the sea flows as certain Pits in Spain: some increase and diminish without any consent or agreement with the motion of the sea; as a Well in Tenodus, an Island near Troy. In Cantabria are three fountains, distant 8 foot the one from the other, and falling into one Channel in a vast river, which every day are dry twelve times, and sometimes twenty times: others of their own accord purge & cleanse themselves, casting out wood, clay, dirt, and other matters wherewith they are defiled, as a Well in the Chersonesus of Rhodes. These and many more remarkable instances have our natural Historians gathered together, whereof though some perhaps may be thought to be forged of Poets for pleasure, or mistaken for want of good discovery and observation; yet must we not wrong Antiquity so much as to reject all, having in this subject enough to wonder at in ourowne Country. 6 Places near great Rivers and Lakes are most commodious for habitation. It hath been the custom of all times and nations almost in the world, to choose out for a choice place for building of cities, their habitation near some great Lake, River, or Arm of the Sea; which sprang from the common observation of Men, who found such places to be more convenient. This conveniency is showed many ways: first, because by means of such water they have quick passage and traffic with other Nations, being able with more ease both to receive, & to send forth wares and merchandise. Whence we see that such cities as are seated upon the water, are commonly of all other the richest: whereof we may give an instance almost in every country, as of Seville and Lisbon in Spain & Portugal: of all the Cities almost of the Low-countries; of Paris in France: whence (no doubt) grew that English Proverb▪ That the Sea is a good neighbour; which may aswell be understood of any navigable River. Secondly such a site is most convenient for the purging away of all filth and excrements, which could not with the like conveniency be so soon transported by land: whence many men have laboured to transport rivers far remote unto Cities. Thirdly, because such rivers and wa●ry lakes yield store of fish, whereby the Inhabitants may be nourished, and other creatures the better preserved: Fourthly, no small commodity would accrow to a City by water near adjoining If it should chance (as often it doth) to be set on fire; for having water near it, it may soon be quenched: whereas many little springs cannot afford so much water as would suffice for such a purpose. Lastly, amongst other reasons we cannot forget the pleasantness of fair rivers, which are no small ornaments to a City, and delights to the eye of the Inhabitants. 8 Thus much for rivers: A Lake is a collection of perpetual waters, nourished with fresh springs, and having of itself no passage forth. In this definition of a Lake, we have comprised these three things: First that it is a collection of constant and perpetual waters: Secondly, that it is continually fed & cherished with fresh springs, rising up from the bottom. Thirdly, that it finds no passage forth into the sea or otherwise. By the two first it is distinguished from a great Pond or standing pool called in Latin Stagnum: For as much as a standing pool, being commonly ●ed with rain water, and having no springs from the Earth whereby it may be long nourished, is often times by the heat of the sun exhausting it out by vapours, either extraordinarily diminished, or altogether dried up: Whereas in a Lake by reason of fresh springs, the Water is perpetual and remaineth sweet and wholesome, except by some other accidents, it change its disposition. For the latter clause that a lake finds no passage forth, it may be two ways understood: either of a visible or apparent passage outwardly through the superficies of the Earth to the sea, or of a secret and subterranean passage under ground: The former may again be understood of a passage forth immediately by itself, or mediately by some river: whereas we have said that it finds no entrance into the sea, we ought to understand it, that immediately it is not to be accounted a continuate part conjoined with the sea: nevertheless it may be disburdened into the sea by some rivers running out of it, as some would have the great river Tanais not to have his head or fountain in the Riphaean mountains, as the ancients have taught, but in a certain Lake not fa●re from the city Tulla▪ so Volga & Edill draw their original from a lake not far from Moscow: with many others of like nature. What to think of the subterranean intercourse betwixt Lakes and the sea, we will show in this Theorem. 1 It is probable, that most Lakes have some secret intercourse with the sea under ground. For the confirmation of this point, there want not reasons: The first reason may be drawn from the quantity of Water in most Lakes, which is found without any great sensible difference to remain the same, without any diminution or increase; whereas if the water bound in with these limits, should have no passage out any way, it should increase to such greatness, that it would easily overwhelm the banks To give a few instances, we find that divers very vast rivers exhaust themselves into the Caspian Lake as Volga and Edill, which receiving into them many notable rivers, are at last themselves swallowed up in the said lake: In like manner the Lake of Palestine called the dead sea, is known to receive into it beside divers lesser rivers, the great and famous river jordan. here would I demand, whether these great rivers perpetually casting themselves into a Lake, give an increase to the former quantity or not: if they should augment the water, they would by consequence alter the bounds: But this is contradicted by experience. If the quantity of the water suffers no increase, it must needs follow then, that the water should some other way be diminished, as it is here increased. This must either be by the sun drawing up some parts of it by vapours, or by some caverns of the Earth, drinking up some parts of it: Or lastly by a subterranean passage into the sea: Concerning the former it cannot be denied, but much Water is drawn up into vapours by the heat of the sun yet that these vapours countervail the water perpetually brought in, is in my conceit very improbable: for against this quantity of water extracted out this way of evaporation, I will oppose these three things which shall persuade a reasonable man, that the water received in, shall far surpass the vapours exhaled from it▪ First that the vapours are stirred up in the day time, when the sun is lifted above the Horizon; at such a height that his heat is somewhat strengthened, whereas all these watery currents never intermitting their usual course, never cease to run by day or night: wherein is seen a double advantage of the rivers, in respect of the watery exhalation▪ Secondly of these watery vapours, so drawn out, a great part must at divers times return back, or at least so much otherwise by rainy showers, dropped down into this Lake. Thirdly, these watery parts thus rarified and attenuated in vapour should (putting this supposition) in equality, diffuse themselves abroad in such extraordinary manner, that all the Regions round about should in all likelihood suffer a great inconueniency of foggy exhalations. On the other side it is very unlikely, that it should be received into empty caverns of the Earth, without passage into the sea, or some great river, disburthening itself thereunto. For I would demand whether these caverns were ever filled with water or not? if they have been filled, how could they receive more water, sith the filling of any place supposeth it to be first empty. That they were never yet filled with Water, is far more unreasonable: that any man should imagine, any caverne of the Earth to be so vast, with so great currents of Water perpetually running in almost six thousand years, should not replenish: especially considering the bowels of the Earth, not far from the upper face, to be every where spread with Water round, which might also help to this purpose: Wherefore it cannot well be imagined but that every such great lake, hath some vent or passage unto the sea, either by some secret & subterranean channel, or at least by some great river issuing out of it, and so running into the Ocean. Another reason may be taken from the currents of some seas, which are by good reason ascribed to this cause: For it is observed by skilful Navigatours, that the Water is carried by a very stiff course from Propontis and the black sea into the Aegaean, and from thence into the Mediterranean: The original of which current m●y with good conjecture be found out in the Caspian, which by some secret passage under ground, disburthening itself into the black sea, causeth it to enforce his own waters farther of, for the receipt of the other. Thirdly that these subterranean passages are not unlikely, may be confirmed by many rivers which are swallowed up, some wholly, some for ●ome place only of the Earth, whereof we have spoken before. Also it may seem likely by the Water, spread round about the Earth, which through the bowels of it find a passage from the sea, bearing as it seems the same level. This may (for aught we know) be the original of all Lakes, and this also may be a way or means, whereby they empty and disburden themselves being overcharged with too much Water. CHAP. X. Of Mountains, Valleys, Plain Regions, Woods, and Champion Countries. 1 THe second variation in the figurature of the Earth is expressed in Mountains, Valleys, and Plain Countries. A Mountain is a quantity of Earth heaped above the ordinary height of the land. A Valley is the depth of the Earth between two Mountains. A plain is a space of Earth where there is found no notable rising or falling of the ground. The distinction of the Earth according to its external figurature into Mountains, Valleys, and Plains is very natural; because every space or parcel of land in respect of the places near or about it, must either rise higher, or fall lower, or at least must bear an equality; where the former is admitted, there must needs be Mountains swelling higher than the ordinary level of the Earth; where the second is found, the ground is indented with Valleys and concavities: where the third is to be seen, there must be Plains. Here is to be noted that howsoever Plains absolutely considered, have a spherical surface for the most part, especially, if the Plains be large because they concur as circular segments to make up the Sphere of the Earth; yet they may be called Plains, because they so appear to our sense, which in so short a distance, cannot perceive the Spherical figurature of the Earth; Some Gramarians here curiously distinguish between mons or a Mountain, and Collis or a Hillock, which is a little hill: & also betwixt Vallis, which they would have to be a low parcel of ground betwixt two mountains, and Conuallis which is a lower space, only bounded on one part by a mountain, which Varro would have to be derived from Cavata vallis; but these Grammatical scruples are of small use to such as spend themselves on greater matters: because the ordinary & usual manner of speech (even amongst the vulgar) will shut out all mistakes in this kind; what deserves the study of ● Topographer concerning this, shall be expressed in these Theorems. 1 Mountains, Valleys, and Plains were created in the Earth from the beginning, and few made by the violence of the Deluge. It hath been the opinion of some, aswell Divines as Philosophers, that the violence of the Deluge hath extraordinarily altered & defaced the Earth, being the chief cause of Mountains & Valleys therein: but this opinion is contradicted by many reasons; first out of the Text itself of Genesis, where it is said, that the water of the flood over-flowed by 15 Cubits the highest Mountains: to which may be added the Testimony of Damascenus, who reports, that in the time of the Deluge many resorted to a high mountain of Armenia, called Baris, where they saved themselves which last clause although it expressly contradicts the holy Scriptures, which speak but of Eight Persons that were saved: yet it is a sufficient testimony to prove that such Mountains were before the Flood, and therefore not made by it: Secondly had there followed so great an alteration of the Earth, to cause mountains as some imagine, than should not the same places after the flood retain their names, bounds, and descriptions, which they did before the flood; the contrary whereof we find, in that Moses writing of Paradise, & other places, about 850 years after the flood, was most exact in setting down the Names, Limits, and whole description of them, as though they had remained to be seen in his days. Thirdly, had the violence of the waters been so great as to raise up mountains in the Earth, it would without doubt have been forceable enough to have turned Rivers, and have changed them from one place to another, cast down and demolished the greatest Cities and buildings, thrown down and overwhelmed all plants and vegetals on the Earth, and (as it were) have buried from all succeeding time, the memories of the former ages, so that little or nothing should appear: but this may be proved otherwise by sundry Instances: First that the Rivers have still remained the same, may appear out of the place alleged of Genesis, where Moses speaking of the site of Paradise, sets down all the rivers of it exactly, especially Tigris & Euphrates: out of the which we may easily gather in what longitude and latitude it stood: had any thing been altered in the course of the rivers, it is likely Moses would have specified it in this History, that after ages looking for these places, might not mistake or suspect the truth of his Relations: Secondly, that it hath not extinguished all Buildings▪ and ancient monuments of the fathers before the flood, may probably be conjectured by the testimony of josephus a writer of good credit, who affirmeth that he saw one of the pillars, erected by Seth, the second from Adam; which pillars were set up above 1426 years before the flood, accounting Seth to be a hundred years old at the erection of them, and josephus himself to have lived some 40 or 50 years after Christ; Now although we are not bound to credit all that he relates; yet may we trust him concerning such matters as happened in his time; and that this pillar was set up by Seth was never yet called in question, but warranted by antiquity: the like is recorded by Berosus of the City of Enoch, that it was not demolished by the flood, but remained many years after, the ruins whereof as Annius in his commentary reports, were to be seen in his time, who lived in the time of Ferdinand and Isabel of Castille. It is also reported by Pomponius Mela, that the City of joppa was built before the flood, of which Cepha was King, whose name with his brother Phineus together with the grounds and principles of their religion, were found graven upon Altars of stone: All which are sufficient to prove the violence of the Waters, not to have been so great to demolish all mountains and monuments; Moreover it may be plainly proved out of the text, that the Waters suffered the plants and trees of the Earth to grow, and remain as▪ they did before; because it is said, that when Noah the second time sent out the Dove, she returned with an olive branch in her mouth, which no doubt she had plucked from the trees, after the trees were uncovered; for otherwise she might the first time have found it floating on the Waters: a manifest proof that the trees were not torn up by the roots, or turned topsy turuy, but remained fixed in the Earth as they did before. Fourthly, had the water suffered this extreme violent motion, as whereby it might make many mountains. I ask whence this motion should come▪ it could not be from the natural motion of the water, which is to move downward: for what descent of waters can be in a Spherical round body, where no part is higher, or lower? That there was any wind to drive and enrage the Waters, is very unlikely; because it is said, that God caused a wind to pass upon the Earth, and the Waters ceased▪ so that there was no wind till the Waters sank: Lastly, we may argue from a final cause, that this inequality in the superficies of the Earth was before the flood; because it is certain that all things were in as good or better estate, than now with us, and that the Earth was adorned with all varieties of creatures as well for profit; as delectation. Now it is found by experience, that all commodities agree not to all places, but some are found in the mountains, at all sorts of metals & minerals, Plants, & Vegetals for the most part prosper best in the valleys and plains: Also that the mountains serve for a shelter to guard the valleys from the rigour of cold and wind, both for the better conveniency of man's life, and increase of fruits for the use of man: Whence we may conclude, that it is far more probable, that the great Mountains were so created in the beginning, and not made by the flood; yet can we not deny, but that some small Hillocks might be made by the flood, and afterward by the industry of man, which have raised great fortresses, and bulworks, which afterward decayed, were made great heaps of Earth (as we see many in this land) but this is of small note & not worthy consideration, in comparison of the great mountains of the Earth whereof we especially treat. 2 The perpendicular height of the highest mountains seldom exceeds 10 furlong. This proposition depends on the authority of Eratosthenes a famous Mathematician, who being employed by his King, found out by Dioptrick Instruments the height of the highest mountains, not to exceed the quantity above specified▪ Cleomedes extends this a little farther, and would have some mountains to attain the height of 15 furlongs, of which height he would have an high rock in Bactriana called by Strabo 11 libro Sisimitrae Petra; But yet if we credit Pliny on Dicaearch●● who measured the Mountain Pelion accounted the highest, he found it not to exceed 1250 paces which make 10 furlongs: and Solinus relates the mountains of Thessaly to be higher than elsewhere are to be found. But this opinion howsoever supported by the authority of the ancient and famous Mathematicians, hath been called in question as well by modern, as ancient writers. Many matters are miraculously, or rather fabulously spoken of the Mountain Athos in Macedonia, of Cassius in Syria, and another of the same name in Arabia, of the mountain Caucasus, and others: which Histories notwithstanding are related by no meaner Authors than Aristotle, Mela, Pliny, and Solinus, yet it is not hard to imagine, that these Authors might be deceived in those times, either trusting to other men's relations, or wanting Mathematical instruments, to search these matters: Of the Mountain Athos it is much wondered at, that it should cast a shadow from Macedonia into the marketplace of Myrhina a town of the Island Lemnos, distant from Athos 86 miles: But this as our learned Countryman Mr Hues well observes, can be no great argument of such a miraculous height; because the mountain Athos situate East from Lemnos (as may be gathered from Ptolemy's Table) may without any great wonder cast a very long shadow, the Sun either rising, or setting. Other matters are related of this mountain Athos more strange than the former, to wit, that it should in hight transcend the Region of the rain, and wind, which they would strive to confirm out of an old tradition; that the ashes heaped together on certain Altars built on the top thereof were never blown away, but remained in the same manner as they were left: to which may be added out of Strabo, that they who inhabit the top of this mountain, can see the Sun 3 hours before those who inhabit near the sea: The like is reported by Aristotle of the Mountain Caucasus, that for the extreme height; the top of it enjoys the Sunbeams a third part of the night; Little less is spoken by Pliny and Solinus of the mountain Cassius in Syria and by Pomponius Mela of the mountain Cassius in Arabia; But how fabulous and incredulous these things are, Petrus Nonius and other Mathematicians have sufficiently demonstrated out of the grounds of Geometry; more absurd by far seems that, which Eustathius reports of Hercules pillars celebrated by Dionysius Perieges, for their admirable height; whereas they are found not to exceed 100 else making one furlong; a height according to Strabo not exceeding the Egyptian Pyramids, and coming short of certain Indian trees near the River Hyarotes', whose Meridian shadows reach 5 furlongs; These errors in the ancient might seem venial had they not been seconded by latter writers: Of the Mountain Tenariffe in the Canaries, Scaliger is bold to report out of other men's relations, that it riseth in height above 15 leagues, which make 60 miles; but Petricius more bold than he, would have it 70 miles; Little less is spoken of Pico amongst the Azoris In●ul●, and the Mountain Andi in Peru; But to confute these relations we will use this argument; It is reported by the Spanish writers which have spoken of this place, that the tops of these Mountains scarce any one or two months in the year are free from snow: Now that snow should be engendered above 60 or 70 miles above the ordinary plain of the Winter or Earth, is against the judgement of our best Astronomers; because, as they have observed out of Eratosthenes measure, the highest vapours seldom reach so far as 48 miles in height every way from the Earth. This argument may as well serve to confute these ancient opinions before mentioned, had they not been so fabulous, as scarce to deserve any solid confutation. 3 The ordinary height of the Land above the Sea in divers places is more than the height of the highest Mountains above the ordinary face of the Earth. We have probably showed out of former grounds, that as the ordinary height of the Earth is answerable to the ordinary depth of the Sea, so the hills and mountains in proportion answer to the whirlpools and extraordinary Gulfs of the Sea: but it is to be imagined that the depth of the Sea in the main Ocean, is far more below the superficies of the Earth than those other whirlpools and Holes extend themselves below that depth. But to prove this by a more sensible argument we will compare the one with the other, so far forth as Mathematicians by experience have guessed▪ for it is found by Mathematic Instruments (as we have proved in the precedent Theorem) that the highest Mountains seldom or never mount upward above ten furlongs, which is an English mile, and a quarter: but the height of the Land in some places where appear no such hills, is observed to be much more: to prove which assertion, we can have no fitter argument than the fresh Springs of Rivers; for it is manifest that all Rivers are higher at the Spring or fountain, then at the place where they disburden themselves into the sea. Now although water is apt to slide away at any Inequality, yet it is most probable that in greater rivers, especially where the waters fall oftentimes with violence (as at the Cataracts of Nile) much inequality must be granted in the Declivity of the ground: supposing yet the water for every mile to gain two foot in the Declivity of the ground, we shall find the height very near to equalise the height of the highest mountains; although 2 foot in a mile is far less than can be imagined in so great a River. The River which I take for an example shall be Nilus, which we shall observe to run about 50 Degrees from South to North, which resolved into miles will make 3000 accounting for every mile 2 foot, we shall have 6000 foot, which will be near these 10 furlongs, being a mile and 5 parts; then allowing for these mighty Cataracts where the water falls with so great a violence, we must reckon a number of feet far greater than this measure; for every mile must the height of land above the sea be much more than of the mountains. 4 Mountainous Regions are commonly colder than other plain countries. This proposition is not absolutely to be understood without a limitation: for some plain Countries near the Arctic Pole, may be colder than some hilly Regions near the Aequatour, in regard of other concurrent causes: but here we speak (as the Logicians use) caeteris paribus; comparing two places either together like, or not much different, or at least in our understanding, abstracting them from the mixture of all other considerations: that this Theorem is worthy credit, divers reasons stand in readiness to justify: the first may be drawn from the cause of heat in Inferior Bodies, which is the reflection of the Sun beams. Now that this reflection is of more strength and validity in plain then in hilly and mountainous Countries, is evident: first, because (as the Optickes teach) the rays are more joined and combined in a plain, then in a convex superficies; for howsoever the whole Earth be of itself Spherical, yet the convexity being not sensible, by reason of the vastness of the Circle, whereby the convexity is made less it may optically be called a plain superficies: Secondly it is taught in the Optickes, that a reflection is of more validity in an equal, then in an uneven and ragged superficies, such as is found in Mountains and uneven places. A second reason why mountainous Regions should exceed others in cold, may be the vicinity of them to the middle Region of the Air; for of all the Regions (if we believe Aristotle) the middle is the coldest, as being more separate from the Sun the fountain of heat, and the higher Region, farther off from the reflection of the Sunbeams, than the lower: Now sith the parts of the Earth are affected with the quality of the Air, it must needs stand with reason, that the more it shall approach to the middle Region, the more it must partake of its quality. Thirdly, that this is consonant to observation, reasons are urged by experience of all Travellers, who report the tops of Mountains even in the midst of Summer to be covered over with snow although situate under or near the Equinoctial Circle: Of this nature are the Alps in Italy, the Mountains of the Moon in Africa, And● in Peru, and Tenariffe in the Canaries. That snow should be an effect of cold, I need nor labour to confirm. A fourth reason may be drawn from other effects of cold or heat; for it is daily proved by experience, that such diseases as chiefly follow heat, especially the Pestilence in Egypt, and such plain Countries, are wonderful prevalent, whereas hilly and rockic Countries by the benefit of Nature stand in little fear of such Inconveniences. Lastly, no greater argument can be drawn, then from the disposition of such men as inhabit such hilly Regions, who have all the Symptoms of external cold, and internal heat▪ Insomuch as ●odin seems to make a Harmony and ●o●cent betwixt the Northern man and the Mountanist 〈…〉 Southern man & such as inhabit plain countries ascribing to the former external cold, and internal heat: to the latter external heat, and internal cold. How far this comparison will hold, we shall have more occasion to discuss here after, when we come to the consideration of the Inhabitants. ● Mountain's since the beginning of the world have still decreased in their quantity, and so will continually decrease until the end. This observation Blaucanus, I know not how truly, ascribes to his own Invention: but to what Author soever we owe it, we must needs acknowledge a pleasant speculation, grounded on good reason. This Theorem to demonstrate the better, we will first lay these grounds oftentimes beforementioned. First (as appears by testimony of holy Scripture) the figure of the Earth was in the beginning more perfectly Spherical, overwhelmed everywhere with Waters. 2ly That a separation was made by translocation of the parts of the Earth, in such manner as some places admitting of concavities, became the receptacle of the waters, other places whereon these parts of the Earth were heaped together, were made mountainous. 3. Hence will follow, that the Earth thus swelling up in high mountains, is out of his natural site and position: & therefore according to the law of nature, will endeavour by little and little to return to her former state and condition. Now that the Earth hath sensibly suffered such a change since the beginning, it is easy to show out of experiments: the causes we shall find to be the water, aswell of the Rain as Rivers, which we shall demonstrate by these Reasons: 1 We see Rivers by little and little continually to fret and eat out the feet of mountains, whence the parts thus fretted through, by continual falling down wear out the mountains, and fill up the lower places in the valleys, making the one to increase, as the other to decrease, & the whole Earth to approach nearer to a Spherical figure then before; which seems to be warranted by a place in job 14, where he saith to God; The mountain falling, cometh to ●ought, & the rock is removed out of his place. The waters wear the stones, thou washest away the things which grow out of the dust of the earth. From these Rivers in the valleys continually eating through the parts of the Earth, as the feet of mountains are caused those slow but great Ruins called Labinae, a lambendo, by which sometimes whole Towns and Villages have been cast into the next great River. 2 To prove that Rain water challengeth a part in this diminution of mountains, we may show by the like experience: we see plainly that Rainwater daily washes down from the Tops of mountains some parts of the Earth; whence it comes to pass that the highest mountains are harder and more rocky than others as being more able to resist this violence of the water. Hence also it happens that old buildings being erected in the sides of mountains, have their foundations after a time uncovered, and are much subject to Ruins: an instance whereof may be given out of the Roman Capitol, whose foundation (according to the relation of George Agricola) appears now plainly above the ground, which without question was heretofore deep rooted in the Earth. In Plains and valleys we find all things to happen contrary wise, to wit, that all places in regard of their superficies are raised much higher than they were in times past, The reason whereof may easily be given out of the great quantity of the Earth, carried by the washing of the Rain from the Topps of mountains into the valleys▪ whence we may perceive old houses, heretofore fairly built, to be now almost buried under ground, and their windows heretofore set at a reasonable height, now grown even with the pavement: so some write of the Triumphal Arch of Septimius at the foot of the Capitol Mountain in Rome, now almost covered with Earth, insomuch as they are enforced to descend down into it by as many stairs as formerly they were used to ascend. In like sort we see in old Monasteries & Religious houses, their lower rooms, windows, & doors, very far couched under ground, of which great inconvenience we cannot suspect the Architects judgement, but rather our forementioned cause: from this burying of parts of some houses under ground, it may be gathered, that the farther they are under ground, so much ancienter they are: as we may observe here with us in Oxford, that our most ancient Colleges have the windows of their lower rooms, somewhere altogether choked up with Earth without, or at least half way, in somuch as the flore within, is found to be far inferior in height to the street without: This is also confirmed by Architects, who in digging up old foundations, before they came to firm ground whereon to erect a building, are enforced first to remove away the Rubbish or (as they term it) the Made-ground, wherein oftentimes they find Wood, Iron-Instruments, old coin, with diverse other Trash of this Nature. An instance we have in some of the lower places in Somersetshire, where some upon occasion digging the Earth somewhat deep, have found great Okes turned topsy turvy with their Roots upwards. To conjecture with some, that this was caused by Noah's Flood, seems to be very improbable: 1 because as we have formerly showed in this Chapter, the Water in the Deluge could not have so violent a motion to procure such an alteration in the parts of the Earth. 2 It cannot so well be imagined how such Trees should remain so long a time without putrefaction: wherefore we cannot well cast it on any other cause, than the addition of the earthly parts, brought by rain from the mountains into the valleys: and so by some Land-flood which partakes much of slimy and earthly matter dispersed abroad upon the land about. Now on the contrary part we find in few places of mountains such made-ground which hath before been moved. This will also appear out of the industry of our Low-countreyman, who by baying up the Rivers into certain Artificial Channels, the ground about hath been much raised: where on the contrary side the forcing of the water into higher places, oftentimes is found to fret through the Earth, and make it lower. What we have spoken of the effects of Rivers and Raine in diminishing the greatness of the mountains and exalting of the valleys, we may in some sort find in the sea. For the bottom of the Sea being lower than the Earth, and many great Rivers continually running from the Earth into it; it is manifest that there is carried in their current a great quantity of earth, in so much as by the heaping of sand and earthly rubbish, the mouths of great Rivers are in time choked up, and commodious havens spoilt and removed farther into the land: of which alternal transmutation of the Sea and Land w● shall speak hereafter: & for present instance need to go no farther than divers Towns in Devon, which (according to the Relation of ancient men) have heretofore been fair havens, able to receive great ships, to which notwithstanding at this time a small boat cannot arrive except in a full Tide. 1 Meteor. The like whereof is reported by Aristotle, 1 of a place in Egypt called Delta, made by the heaping up of sand and slime, brought by Nilus from the Ethiopian mountain. 2 of Ammania Regio, which in times past being Sea, through the slime conveyed in the Rivers, became afterwards as a standing pool, which in process of time waxed dry, and joined itself to the Continent. 3 Of Maeotis Palus, that the dry land environing it round, is so much increased, that ships of that burden cannot arrive, which could in times passed within 60 years before; which is also in some sort testified by Polybius. 4 The like is related of Bosphorus Thracius, and many other places recorded by Pliny▪ Lib. 4. of which we shall speak hereafter. From these observations Blancanus would infer these consectaries: 1 That the Earth was not from the beginning endowed with mountains: 2 That it should not so continue until the end of the world; ●nd unless the Fire (whereof the Scripture speaks) should prevent it, the whole Earth should in the end be overwhelmed with waters, as in the beginning, and so be made void of habitation: but on such conjectures I dare not too boldly venture, being speculations built on no sufficient grounds: All which can hence warrantably be collected is expressed in our former Theorem. 2 Of the Figurature of Countries in Mountains, Valleys, and Plains, we have spoken: It is requisite here we speak somewhat of Woods and Champion Countries. 3 A Wood is a Region or space of Land beset with trees. A Champion Region is a space of Land either altogether void, or scarce furnished with trees. Some Critics here curiously distinguish in Latin, betwixt Sylva, Lucus, and Nemus: by Sylva understanding a space beset with trees, ordained to be cut down; but Lucus was a place where trees were not ordained to be cut down, but reserved sacred: For in such groves they did anciently use to offer sacrifice, as may appear by divers places out of the Old Testament, where the Heathenish manner of worshipping was forbidden, and sometimes reproved in the Kings of juda and Israel: That which the Latins call Nemus, is a Grove or Wood ordained only for pleasure and recreation: but the discussing of these businesses rather belong to a Grammarian then a Geographer; who takes little notice but of those matters which most principally and remarkably belong to any Region; wherefore omitting other curiosities, we have distinguished only between a Woody and a Champion Country; whereof (as we have defined) one is beset with a multitude of trees; the other with few or none. What concerns a Geographer to observe in those matters, shall generally be comprised in this Theorem. 1 Woods in these days are not so frequent, nor so great as in ancient times. We cannot imagine otherwise then that the Earth soon upon the flood, bearing in her womb the seeds of all vegetals, being inwardly moistened, and outwardly comforted with Heat, should presently abound with plants of all sorts; in so much as in a short time each thing propagating itself by communication of his own seeds, the whole Earth was overgrown as one forest: but afterwards as man began to spread and multiply on the face of the Earth, these Woods and Thickets began to suffer chastisement under the hand of laborious husbandry: For first to open a passage from one place unto another, and that some parcels of ground should as pastures be divided from Woody acres, it was necessary that this great plenty of trees should suffer a decrease: yet little had this been noted in so vast a store, had not the invention of building of houses by little and little turned great forests into Cities; which for the most part owed not only their first original, but also their daily reparation to Trees and Timber: but above all the greatest devourer of Woods and Forests is Fire, an element fed and nourished almost of no other matter. For to let pass the ordinary use of fire in every house and family, which in so infinite a multitude of people, in so many years since the Flood, must require an extraordinary proportion of wood and fuel, how many Arts have been since invented, depending only upon this Element? we will go no farther than the Art of Liquefaction, fining of gold and other metals, found out in the bowels of the Earth, wherein the covetousness of men hath been as unsatiable as the fire. To this which we have said, may probably be opposed two things: first, the power and inclination of every Creature to multiply and propagate itself. Secondly, the industry of mankind in seconding that inclination: Whence it may be conjectured that great woods should by durance increase to a greater quantity: for the former, no man will deny, but that plants and trees left to themselves, will commonly propagate their kind: nevertheless it cannot prevail so much as the other, which procure the decrease: first because the Earth being drier now, then soon upon the Flood, cannot so much further the growth of vegetals as then it did: Secondly, because (as we have said) this growth in a populous Country, cannot be so great as the diminution, since few or no houses can want so necessary an Element as fire. To the second we answer that man's industry hath done somewhat in plantation of groves, and such like: but how little is this in comparison of the huge and vast forests in time by man wasted and consumed. We shall read of Germany, that in the time of Caesar it seemed a wild Country, having many great woods and forests, but few Cities: but now the case being altered, we shall find the Cities both in number and greatness increased, and the Woods diminished. Two instances may suffice, the one of the Forest of Ardenna in Lutzemburg, accounted in Caesar's time 500 miles over, now scarce 50. The other of Sylva Hyrcinia, which heretofore (if we believe Histories) reached so far as a man could travail in 60 days; but now is made the only limit or bound dividing Bohemia from the rest of Germany. The like may be observed almost of every other Country reduced to civility. 2 Places moderately situated towards the North or South Pole abound more in Woods then near the Equatour. This situation we understand to comprehend almost all the temperate Zone, reaching either way so far as 60 degrees or there about. The demonstration of this Theorem depends of these two foments of all plants, Heat and Moisture; both which concur, not only to the abundance and fertility, but also to the greatness of all plants; for it is most certain that wheresoever these two vital succours are wanting or deficient, there must be a great scarcity of trees, fruits, herbage, and such like: This is the cause why the Regions far North near about the Pole, beyond 60 degrees, have not only scarcity of trees, but have them such as are, of a far smaller quantity than other Regions, lying more temperate: For the internal and natural heat is almost extinguished, with the extremity of cold, and the moisture (as it were) dried up by the frosty disposition of the Region. To this cause may we ascribe, that which Geographers have delivered concerning Island, that for want of Timber they cover their houses with fish-bones, digging out houses in the sides of Rocks and mountains. Moreover that the mere defect of moisture may cause a scarcity of growth, may be proved by many places: 1 because temperate Regions, which are Mountainous and lying higher, produce trees of small length; Bodin testifies as a thing very remarkable, that he hath observed oaks in France not exceeding 3 or 4 feet. But this is no great wonder with us in England: sith in the dry and barren plains about Salisbury there are many examples not much different: All which, we can ascribe to no other cause then the want of moisture. On the other side as great or greater a defect of heat & moisture, is found near the Equatour, by reason of the external heat of the Sun; which in all plants and vegetals, not only evaporates the moisture, and by consequence causeth drought; but by the extraction of Internal heat, leaveth a greater cold behind, correspondent to that humour in a man, which we call Melancholy and choler-adust: But this extremity of heat causing this defect of internal heat & moisture, we place not directly under the Equinoctial; because we have showed it to be more temperate: but rather under the Tropics, which by experience are found scorched with great heat. How subject these places under the Tropickes are to this sterility, we need go no farther than Libya and Numidia to confirm; Places by the report of travellers, indigent not only of Woods and Trees, but almost of all vital succours. Whereas the Woods & Forests dispersed almost in every region of Europe, and the more temperate parts of Asia, are celebrated of all writers. Yet whereas we have defined the chiefest places for the growth of Woods to be towards the North, so far as 60 degrees or thereabouts; we cannot warrant this as an absolute general observation; because some places lying very low, and subject to much moisture, though situate more Southerly, may enjoy this proportion, as we have formerly showed of trees near the River Hiarotis recorded by Strabo, to have their noon shadows of 5 furlongs, as also of certain trees in America near Rivo Negro, wherein (as Peter Martyr writes) a King dwelled with all his family. But these places howsoever situate towards the South are (as Geographers deliver unto us) most times of the year overwhelmed with Water, consisting all of marish grounds: yet these few instances drawn from the particular disposition of the Earth itself, cannot much impeach our proposition, which takes notice only of the situation of the Earth, in respect of the cardinal points of North and South, compared with the Heavens. CHAP. XI. 1 HItherto have we treated of the Absolute adjuncts of the land; we are now to speak of the Relative, which imply a respect of the Land to the Sea. 2 From this Termination of the land with the sea, there ariseth a twofold distinction: The first is of the land into Continent and Lands. 3 A Continent is a great quantity of land consisting of many Kingdoms and Regions, not divided by Water, the one from the other: An Island is a parcel of land compassed round with the sea. An Island is called in Latin Insula, quasi in salo; because it stands in the Sea; some would have it in English termed an Island, as it were, Eye of the land: But this derivation seems affected and not natural: it might seem more naturally to be derived from the French L'Isle. But we will not dispute of the name: It is enough to understand, that an Island is a portion of the habitable Earth, every where environed with the sea, orat least with some great River: but this last sense seems more improper than the other; yet oftentimes used, as Meroe in Africa an Island of Nilus, and the Island of Eely in England. To this is opposed the Continent, as that land, which being not divided and separated by the sea, contains in it many Empires and Kingdoms, as Europe, Asia, Africa, America; all which, as far as we can yet gather, are united and joined together, in one continuate land; Strabo affirms out of this in his 1 book and first Chapter of Geography, that the whole Earth is one Island; sith all these known parts of the Earth, are compassed about with the sea on every side: But this opinion cannot stand with reason, or modern observation: First, because this acception is too large; for as much as an Island is properly taken for a smaller part, divided from the rest of the land, and opposed to the Continent; whereas if this sense were admitted, the distinction of land into Continent and Island would have no place, or at least the same in a divers respect, might be called a Continent and an Island. But it is plain that Lands were always opposed to the continent, to which, although separate by Water, they were supposed to belong, as to Europe, Asia, Africa, America, or Magellanica, or some other as Geographers have reduced them. Secondly, because it was a bold conjecture to think the whole world to consist only of those parts, found out in Strabos time: For besides the two parts of America since that time discovered by Columbus, another great portion is since that time found out in the South, by the conjecture of Ferdinando de Quir, coming near the quantity of Europe, Asia, and Africa. Which howsoever it be round environed with sea, and therefore might seem an Island, yet in respect of the greatness of it, and the many regions and kingdoms it contains, it may well be reputed a continent: To which many lesser Lands belong. 1 It is probable that Lands were not from the first creation, but were made afterwards either by the universal deluge, or some other violence of the Water. It hath been the opinion of divers learned men, that Land's wer● not only before the Flood, but from the first creation of the world: because they seem no less to make for the ornament of the Earth, then diverse Lakes and Rivers dispersed on the Land. But this argument seems very weak first because a greater ornament seems to consist in uniformity then confusion▪ besides, the ornament must not be measured by our fantasy, but God's Almighty pleasure and will expressed in his own workmanship: and that he created Lands in the beginning, is the thing in question. That Lands were not from the Creation, many probable reasons are alleged: First from the words in the 1 of Genesis: Dixit verò Deus, congregentur aequae quae sub coelo sunt, in locum unum, & appareat arida: & factum est ita; & vocavit Deus aridam, terram; congregationesque Aquarum appellavit maria. By which may be collected▪ that the waters were gathered together in their own place, by themselves, and therefore had no such intercourse betwixt Land and Land as now they have, admitting Lands: wherefore it is more probable▪ that such Lands as now appear were either caused by that Universal Deluge of Noah, or by some other Accidents: for it is most certain that the Sea on the Land somewhere gains, and otherwhere in recompense of it, it looseth again: as may appear by the 14 of Genesis; where it is said of the coming together of certain Kings: High omnes conuen●runt in vallem Syluestrem, quae nunc est mare salis; out of which it is evident that that parcel of ground which was a woody place in the time of Abraham, was before the time of Moses become the Salt Sea. Many examples of the like are given us by Pliny in his Natural History, which we shall have occasion to urge hereafter: And therefore it is no hard thing to believe, that since the first beginning of the world all Lands might be produced in this sort. Another argument by which they would establish this opinion, is that we see almost all Lands of the Earth not only inhabited of mankind, but also furnished with divers kinds of Beasts, some tame, some wild, some wholesome, some venomous, some useful, some altogether unprofitable. Now it seems very unlikely that men b●ing in elder times, and now also in most places of the Earth, altogether unskilful in the Art of Navigation, should venture so far on the main Ocean, to people Countries so far distant; sith at this day, wherein Navigation is arrived at a great perfection, having the helps both of the Chart and Compass, altogether unknown unto the ancients, we see most Nations very scrupulous in searching out far remote Countries. But admit this were overcome by man's Industry, which no doubt is much increased by Necessity; yet cannot it be very probable, that so many sundry kinds of beasts should in this sort be transported: for howsoever we conjecture concerning such beasts as necessarily serve for man's sustenance; yet seems it hard to think that man should be so improvident and envious to the place of his own Habitation as to transport ravenous, venomous, unwholesome, and unprofitable creatures: for by no other me●nes but by transportation can such beasts be imagined to be brought into Lands: For the first original of all creatures in the Creation was in or near Paradise, which we shall prove to have been ●n the Continent of Asia; the second Seminary was in the Ark, which by the testimony of the Scriptures was first disburdened in the same Continent. How from hence they should spread themselves into Lands, is the doubt. Impossible it seems they should swim so far; for what Creature will venture itself on the main Ocean being by a natural instinct fearful of death, and careful of his own preservation: Whence it is more likely to imagine, that these parcels of land being first furnished with such creatures, were afterwards by the violence of the flood, or some other like Accident, torn off from the main Continent, retaining still such Creatures as it had before. But here S. Augustine seem to avoid this Argument two ways: It is not (saith he) incredible, that wild and savage beasts might be transported from one Country to another by Sea: either by Men for the delight of Hunting; or else by the help of Angels by God's Commandment, or at least permission. This answer seems very probable as well for itself, supposing nothing impossible to Almighty God, as also for the authority of the Author. But with all reverence to the Author, whom all the Christian Churches are bound to honour, this assertion is not so strongly fortified to enforce assent. And first it is not very likely that pleasure with men should so far oversway the general weal and profit, as to transport so many ravenous and hurtful beasts, for mere hunting sports and recreation. Secondly, the chase of some, as Lions, Leopards, and such like, hath more danger in it then sport or delight; and if so be these were conveyed over Sea for such ends, yet it is very probable, they would keep them rather close and imprisoned to serve occasion, then to let them lose and free for farther propagation. Finally, whereas he ascribes the transportation of them to the ministry of Angels; no man can deny but this may be possible; because by their permission of Almighty God they might effect greater matters. Yet seems this not so likely as the other, because we find that in the general preservation of all creatures in the Ark, he used the ordinary help of Natural means, although directed and assisted by a Divine power: And of God effected greater matters in this sort, why may we not believe it of things of lesser moment and necessity? But of this we have spoken before. Another reason for our opinion that Lands were not before the flood, or at least from the Creation, is urged by Verstegan a late Writer in this manner: There is nothing broken) (saith he) that hath not been whole; which he sets down as an infallible principle: for howbeit Nature doth sometimes against her own intent commit some errors, in so much as the things form have either too much, or too little; yet bringeth she forth nothing broken or dissevered; but such as it is, it is always whole and not broken, except afterwards by some accident. And if Nature, the handmaid of God, never misseth this perfection, much more ought we to believe that God the Father of Nature in the first Creation left no part thereof broken and unperfect. But every man may see by ordinary observation, that the Cliffs and bounds of the Sea (as not being by God in the creation so form) seem not only severed and broken, but (as it were) cut straight and steep down from the top to the bottom, not stooping or declining by degrees; as we see in Inland Hills in their descent unto the valleys. The forceable breach of the land (as we pretend) by the Sea fretting through some narrow place, seems the more to be confirmed in that we find it not steep towards the Land, where the Land declines by a sloping descent as in other places; but rather towards the Sea in such sort, as both the sides of a narrow and streite Sea oftentimes in the nature of the soil, and conformity of figure, seem to answer one other; only showing the want of substance betwixt them which is lost. It may hence be objected that many other hills and rocky places of Island Countries▪ seem in like manner as broken and steep down at these cliffs bounding the Ocean: as also that the cliffs towards the Sea are broken higher up then any ways the Sea could be imagined to ascend. To this we answer, first that rocks on the dry land many times seem broken, when indeed they are not, being by Nature fashioned craggy and uneven: Secondly, whereas Hills in Inland countries seem broken, this might proceed heretofore by Earthquakes which have oftentimes been observed to produce such effects as it hath lately been known to do in a Town called Pleurs in the Grisons Country near the Alps: and for the appearance of such breaches in the tops of cliffs above the ascent of the waters, it might be caused by the violence of the Sea-waves, fretting and eating out the sides of them beneath the bottom; whence it happens that the higher part for want of underpropping must needs fall and break off from the other. This Argument of our said Author is by him backed with another, drawn from the name of a cliff, which in our ancient language is drawn from cleaving or breaking off: which appellation is never given to our Inland Hills, but only to such as terminate and compass in the Sea. These reasons make the matter seem probable; yet condemn I not the other as absurd, because it may probably be defended, and backed with the authority of many grave Authors. 4 A second Distinction ariseth out of the termination of the Land with the Sea: For either it is uniform or various. 5 An uniform termination I call that which without any notable difference inclines more to evenness and Regularity. It is manifest that the Sea-wawes working on the Land violently, and not naturally, seldom or never so bound and compass the Land, as to reduce it to a regular and perfect figure. But yet because in some places it comes somewhat near to such a figure, somewhere it is very far off; we thought it fit to insert this distinction. This inclination to a Regular figure is somewhere square, consisting of Right-lines, somewhere circular; an example of the former we have in Spain, which on the North-side, and the West is bounded more streitly, coming near a right-line: of the other in Africk●, whose North-West side from the Mediterranean streits to Guinea seems in some sort circular. 6 A various Termination is that wherein the bounds are crooked, and as it were indented with creaks and turnings. Here three things are remarkable. 1. Peninsula, Isthmus, and Promontorium. 7 A Peninsula is a part of land every where environed with the sea, excepting in one part, where it is knit unto the main land: An Isthmus is a narrow land betwixt two seas: A Promontory is a high mountain bending itself into the sea: the head whereof is called a Cape: These three are remarkable accidents growing out of the Termination of the land with the sea, and belonging as well to continents as Lands. The first we call Peninsula, quasi penè Insula, termed of the Grecians Chersonesus, although I find this name oftener given to the Isthmus than the Peninsula. Amongst the Peninsula's the most famous are Africa, Scandia, Taurica Chersonesus, Peloponnesus, and America Peruana. That little parcel of land which joins this Peninsula with the main land, we call an Isthmus, which is a narrow neck of land betwixt two seas, joining two Continents; such as are Isthmus Corinthiacus and Isthmus Cimbricus: more famous are those two narrow lands, whereof the one lieth betwixt Peruana, and Mexico in America, the other dividing Africa from Asia. A Promontory is a great mountain stretching itself far into the sea: whose extremity is called a Cape or Head, of which the most remarkable are the Cape of good hope in Africa, 2. The Cape of S. Vincent in Portugal, 3. The Cape of Comary in Asia. 4. The Cape de la Victoria in America. Our observation concerning this distinction shall be comprised in this Theorem. 1 Peninsula's by the violence of the sea fretting through the Isthmus, have oftentimes been turned into Lands▪ and chose sometimes Peninsula's by diminution of the sea made of Lands. This proposition is not hard to prove, if any credit ought to be gruen to ancient writers: for it is commonly related, that Sicily was heretofore joined to Italy, Cyprus to Syria, Euboea with Boeotia, Besbicum with Bythinia; all which at this day are Lands separated and divided from the continent. The like hath been conjectured of our Britain, which some imagined heretofore to have been joined with the continent of France, about Dover and Calais: as may seem probably to be gathered out of the correspondency of the Cliffs (whereof we have spoken in this chapter before) the agreement of the soil, the smallness of the distance, and many more arguments remembered by us elsewhere. Also it hath been observed on the other side, that the sea in some places leaving his ancient bounds, hath joined some Lands to the land, making Peninsulas of Lands. In this sort if we believe antiquity was Antissa joined to Lesbos, Zephirium to Halicarnassus, Ethusa to Mindus, Promiscon to Miletum, Narthucusa to the Promontory of Parthenius: In these antiquities it behoves every man to judge without partiality, according to reason, not ascribing too much to fabulous narrations, wherein those ages did abound▪ neither yet showing himself too incredulous: For as much as we cannot charge these Authors with any manifest absurdity. The special and particular arguments by which we should establish our assertion, we must according to the rules of method reserve to the special part, where we shall treat ofspeciall Countries. CHAP. XII. 1 OF the perpetual Accidents of the land, we have spoken somewhat: it remains in this place we treat of the Casual. 2 The casual I call such as happen not ordinarily at all times: such as are Inundations and Earthquakes. 3 An Inundation is an overwhelming of the land by Water. Howsoever it be certain out of holy Scriptures, that God hath set the sea his certain bounds and limits, which it cannot pass: yet the same God sometimes to show his special judgement on some place or age, hath extraordinarily permitted the sea sometimes to break his appointed limits, and invade the jurisdiction of the land. This we call a Deluge or Inundation. The inundations which ever have been observed on the Earth, are of two sorts, either Universal or particular: An universal is that whereby the whole face of the Earth is covered with water; whereof we have only two examples: The first was in the first creation of the world, when (as we read in the Scriptures) the whole face of the Earth was round inveloped with Water, which covered the tops of the highest mountains, till such time as God by a supernatural hand, made a separation of the Waters from the dry land: But this is improperly called an Inundation, because, the same properly taken implies as much as an overflowing of that which was dry land before: The second (as we read in Genesis) happened in the time of Noah, when God for the sin of man, drowned the whole world, breaking open the cataracts of Heaven, and losing the springs of the deep. Particular inundations are such, as are not over the whole Earth, but in some particular places or regions; Such a deluge (according to Genebrardus) happened in the time of Enos, wherein a third part of the Earth was drowned. The like i● spoken of Ogyge● King of Athens, that in his time happened a very great Inundation, which drowned all the confines and coasts of Attica and Achaia even to the Aegean sea: In which time it was thought that Buras and Helice Cities of Achaia, were swallowed up: whereof Ovid in his Metamorphosis, speaks thus. Si quaeras Helicen & Buran Achaidos urbes. Inuenies sub aquis: Buras and Helice on Achai●n ground Are sought in vain, but under seas are found. As famous was the Inundation of Thessaly in Deucalion's time mentioned not only by profane writers and Poets, but also by S. Augustin, jerom, and Eusebius, which would have it to happen in the time of Cranaus, who next after Cecrops governed Athens. This inundation was exceeding great, extending itself not only over all Thessaly and the regions adjoining westward, but overwhelmed the greatest part of Italy. The same or other happening near the same time, oppressed Egypt, if Eusebius may obtain credit. Hence some would have the people of Italy to have been called Vmbrij (as Pliny and Solinus report) quia ab imbribus dilwij superfuissent. But this Etymology seems too far fetched. There are also two other notable Inundations mentioned by ancient writers, which fell out in Egypt from the River of Nilus, whereof the first covered all the neither Egypt, which was subject to Prometheus, and hence (as Natalis Comes observes) was the fable drawn of the vulture lighting on Prometheus' liver, afterwards slain by Hercules. For (as Diodorus Siculus observes) the River Nilus for the swiftness of his course was in ancient time called an Eagle. This River afterwards did Hercules by his great skill and judgement streiten and bound▪ reducing it into narrow channels: whence some Greek Poets turning Hercules labours into fables, feigned that Hercules slew the Eagle which said on Prometheus' breast, meaning that he delivered Prometheus out of that sorrow and loss which he and his people sustained by that Inundation. The second of these Egyptian floods happened about Pharus in Egypt, where Alexander the great built Alexandria. To these may be added many more of lesser moment, as well in ancient times as in our days: As that of Belgia in some parts mentioned before, on another occasion; and not many years since in some parts of Somerset-shire with us in Britanny. 1 No universal Inundation of the Earth can be Natural: The other may depend on some Natural causes. Of the causes of Inundations many disputes have been amongst Natural Philosophers: some have trusted so far to Nature, that they have ascribed not only particular Inundations, but that universal Deluge in the time of Noah to second causes: of this opinion was Henricus Mecliensis a Scholar of Albertus Magnus, who in his Commentaries upon the great Conjunctions of Albumazar, observed that before Noah's flood, chanced a conjunction of jupiter and Saturn in the last degree of Cancer, against the constellation since termed Argo's ship: out of which he would needs collect, that the flood of Noah might have been foreshown; because Cancer is a watery sign, and the house of the Moon being mistress of the Sea, and all moist bodies according to Astrology: which opinion was afterwards confirmed by Petrus de Alliaco, who affirms in his Comment upon Genesis, that although Noah did well know this flood by divine Revelation; yet this conjunction being so notable, he could not be ignorant of the causes thereof; for those were not only signs, but also apparent causes by virtue received from the first cause, which is God himself. Further to confirm this assertion he would have Moses by the cataracts of Heaven, to have meant the the great & watery conjunction of the Planets. A reason whereof he seems to allege, because it is likely that God would show some sign in the Heavens, by which all men might be warned to forsake their wicked courses. But notwithstanding this curious opinion, I rather cleave to those which think this Deluge to be merely Supernatural, which I am induced to believe for diverse causes urged by worthy writers. First, because this is set down in Holy Scripture for a chief token or mark of Noah's extraordinary faith & dependence upon God's promises: which had been much diminished, and of small moment, had it any way been grounded on the foresight of second causes. For this was no more than might have been discovered to the rest of the wicked worldlings, who no doubt would in some sort have provided for their safety, had they received any firm persuasion of this dreadful Deluge. To which others add a second reason, that second causes of themselves, without any change or alteration, are not able to produce such an admirable effect as the drowning of the whole World: for it is not convenient (say they) that God the Author of Nature should so dispose and direct the second causes, that they might of themselves be able to invert the order of the Universe, and overwhelm the whole Earth, which he gave man for his habitation. But this reason is thought very weak, for as much as it seemeth to imply a new creation: The conceit of a new Creation is pronounced by a learned Countryman of ours, both unlearned and foolish: for whereas it is written (saith he) that the fountains of the deep were broken open, it cannot otherwise be understood, then that the waters forsook the very bowels of the Earth, and all whatsoever therein was dispersed made an eruption through the face of the Earth. Now if we compare the height of the waters in this deluge above the highest mountains, being only 15 cubits, with the depth of the semi-diameter of the Earth to the Centre, we shall not find it impossible, answering reason with reason, that all these waters dispersed under the Earth▪ should so far extend as to drown the whole Earth: for the semi-diameter of the Earth (as Astronomers teach) is not above 35 ● miles', wherein the waters contained and dispersed, may be sufficient for the height of the greatest mountains, which never attain 30 miles upright: whereas this distance of 30 miles is found in the depth of the Earth 116 times. Secondly, the extension of the Air being exceeding great, it might please God to condensate and thicken a great part thereof, which might concur to this Inundation. We willingly assent to the worthy Author, that this Inundation might be performed without any new creation: Notwithstanding we cannot hence collect that it was Natural. But to compose the difference the better, and to show how far Nature had a hand in this admirable effect, we will thus distinguish; that an effect may be called Natural two manner of ways: First, in regard of the causes themselves: Secondly in respect of the Direction and Application of the causes. If we consider the mere secondary and instrumental causes, we might call this effect Natural, because it was partly performed by their help and concurrence. But if we consider the mutual application and conjunction of these second causes together with the first cause, which extraordinarily set them a work, we must needs acknowledge it to be supernatural. For other particular Inundations in particular Regions we may more safely term them Natural, as directed and stirred up by second causes, working no otherwise, then according to their own natural disposition. Two causes concurring together, are here most notable, whereof the first is the great conjunction of watery Planets working on the water their proper subject: the other the weakness of the bounds and banks restraining the water, which by process of time wear out and suffer breaches: both these causes sometimes concurring together, cause an Inundation: which assertion we may lawfully accept, but with this caution, that Almighty God working by second causes, nevertheless directs them oftentimes to supernatural and extraordinary ends. 2 Particular alterations have happened to Bounds of Regions by Particular Inundations. Howsoever some inundation have not continued long, but after a small time le●t the Earth to her own possession; yet others have been of such violence, as they have been found to have fretted away, or added, and so altered the bounds and limits of places: which besides divers examples produced by us, in our former chapter. Aristotle seems to acknowledge in the 1 book ofhi Meteors, the 14 Chapter, where he saith, that by such Accidents sometimes the Continent and firm land is turned into the Sea, and otherwhere the Sea hath resigned places to the Land: for sith the agitation or moving of the water depends ordinarily upon the virtue of Heavenly bodies, if it should happen that those Stars should meet in conjunction, which are most forceable and effectual for stirring up of Tempests and Floods, the Sea is known to rage beyond measure, either leaving her ancient bounds, or else usurping new. By this means (as we have showed in the former Chapter) some Lands have been joined to the Land, and some Peninsula's separated from the Land, and made Lands: somewhere the Sea hath been observed for a great space to leave the Land naked, as Verstegan conjectures of the most part of Belgia, which he says, was in ancient time covered with water; which besides many other arguments he labours to prove out of the multitude of fish-shells, and fish-bones, found everywhere far under ground about Holland, and the coasts thereabouts, which being digged up in such abundance, and from such depths, could not (saith he) proceed from any other cause then the Sea, which covered the whole Country, and strewed it with fishes. Lastly, that the Sea might seem as well to get as lose, she hath showed her power in taking away and swallowing up some Regions and Cities, which before were extant: Such fortune had Pyrrha and Antis●a about Meotis, Helic● and Bura before mentioned in the Corinthian straits: some have been of opinion that the whole Mediterranean within Hercules pillars, was in time past habitable land, till it gave way to the violency of the Seas invasion: But in this I credit nothing without farther ground. The like uncertainties are also related of the Atlantic Lands, greater than all Africa, swallowed up of the Ocean: which Columbus was said in a sort to have discovered in the Sea, finding a great shallow fraught with weeds, where he supposed this great Island to have stood. But I rather believe that this Atlantic Island spoken of by Plato, was either a Poetical fiction, as Moor's Utopia with us, or at least the Continent of America perhaps in those days obscurely discovered, but the discovery lost again to after ages. 3 Certain Regions by reason of great Rivers are subject to certain Anniversary Inundations, which commonly happen betwixt the Tropics in the Summer, without the Tropics in the Winter. The former clause is proved by experience almost in all great Rivers in the world, which at some times of the year swell higher, overflowing their banks, and drowning a part of the land about them. But this happens not alike in all places; for in Rivers included within the Tropics, as Nilus & Niger in Africa, and Oregliana in America with others thereabout, this Anniversary Inundation, is in the Summer, elsewhere it is commonly in the Winter. For the former these causes may be assigned; 1 The melting of the snow on the tops of the great mountains in those parts, which is greatest of all, when the Sun is nearest or vertical unto them, which we are to account their Summer. 2 The daily reins & showers such Regions are subject unto; These showers are much more frequent & greater when the Sun is nearest their vertical point or in it: The reason whereof we have formerly showed to be this: That the Sun daily in those parts draws up more vapours, than he can dissipate & consume: Whence meeting with the cold of the middle Region of the Air they are condensated into drops, & so turned into rain. For the later case in rivers situate without the Tropics, commonly happens the contrary, to wit, that such Inundations happen rather in the winter then in the Summer, whereof these reasons may be rendered. 1 Because Rain▪ and showers whereof such overflowing are engendered in those parts, are more frequent in winter then in the Summer. 2 whereas near the Equatour, the snow is known to melt with the Sun from the tops of high Mountains, in other parts it seldom or never melts at all, (as may be thought (under the Pole or thereabouts; or else, if it melt, it happens, (as in the temperate Zones we see it doth) oftener by rain, than the heat of the Sun. 4 Next are we to speak of Earthquakes: An Earthquake is a sensible motion and shaking of the parts of the Earth. Amongst other remarkable affections of a place, which are not so ordinary, an Earthquake hath no small consideration, being oftentimes a means which God useth to show some great and extraordinary judgement. But not to spend more on this subject than may seem meet for Geography▪ we will show the causes and kinds of it, by which we may the sooner come to learn what Regions and places of the Earth are most subject to this affection, which is necessary of a Cosmographer to be known. Concerning the cau●es of it, much dispute hath been among Philosophers: some have ridiculously affirmed, that the Earth is a living creature, and suppose with no less, if not greater absurdity, that the Earth being in good temper, doth rest & settle quietly according to her natural disposition: From which temper if she be any way removed, as if she were sick, or pained in some part, she shakes and shivers. The relation of this opinion is a sufficient confutation. Thales Milesius would have the Earth as a ship to swim on the Waters, which being sometimes as a vessel by tempests turned on one side too much, it takes a great quantity of water, which is the cause of Earthquakes: But this opinion is a poetical fiction. Little more probable is the opinion of Democritus, that the Earth drinking in rain water more than her caverns can well contain, the water reverberated back is cause of such a motion: But who can imagine that drops of rain falling into the Earth can be reverberated back, with such violence to cause such an extraordinary motion of the Earth? Anaximenes' Milesius was of opinion that the Earth herself was cause of her own motion; for the parts of it being taken out (as it were) and broken, fall down sometimes into a great depth, causing the upper face of it to shake and tremble; to which opinion also Seneca seems to subscribe in the sixth book of his natural questions the 10 chapter; To which also accords the Philosophical Poet Lucretius in these words. Terra superna tremit magnis concussa ruinis, Subter ubi ingentes speluncas subruit aetas, Quip cadunt toti montes, magnoque repentè Concussu la●è dispergunt inde Tremores, Et meritò; quoniam plaustris concussu tremiscunt Tecta viam propter non magno pondere tota. The upper Earth seized with great ruins shakes, When surrowed age her vast ribs overtakes. For mountains great fall down, and with the blow The Tremble are dispersed to and fro. Not without reason; when a small-sized wain Makes houses near the way to shake amain, This last opinion seems to carry more show ofprobability then the former; neither can any man deny, that sometimes the Earth in some parts, may shake by the breaking down of some subterranean parts, whose sudden and violent motion may cause the rest being continuate to entertain the like convulsion. But yet more general seems the opinion of Aristotle who would have Earthquakes to proceed from a spirit or vapour included in the bowels of the Earth, as he testifies in the 2 of his Meteors the 7 chapter. For this vapour finding no way to pass out, is enforced to return back; and battered any passage out, seeks every corner: and while it labours to break open some place for going forth, it makes a tumultuous motion, which is the Earthquake. Now lest it should seem improbable that so great a mass of Earth should be moved, and shaken, by so thin and rarefied a body as is a fume or vapour; Aristotle in the same place shows the admirable force of Winds as well upon the Air, as on the bodies of living creatures: In the Air; because experience shows that being stirred up by a Windy vapour it sometimes is known to move rocks from one place to another, to pluck up trees and shrubbs by the roots; and sometimes to throw down the strongest and most stately buildings: In man's body, because by the stirring up and agitation of the spirits, which are the Instruments of vital and animal functions, sometimes one sick man can do that, which cannot be performed by many stronger and abler men; as it hath been tried sometimes, that a Frantic man hath broken very strong chains, wherewith he hath been bound; which many other men could not do. Neither on the other side, can it seem strange, that many and great exhalations, vapours, and spirits should be engendered under the Earth; For as much as the Earth is hea●ed many ways. Many ways may be specified whence such fumes should arise; as, first, from the Sun and Stars; Secondly, from the subterranean fires hid in the bowels of the Earth; Thirdly, in the wintertime by an Antiperistasis, the heat collecting itself downward to the inner parts of the Earth, which was before in the outward parts of it: The argument by which Aristotle would confirm this opinion, is drawn as well from the time, as from the places, wherein Earthquakes usually happen: from the time; because than most Earthquakes are observed to be, when most exhalations are enclosed in the bowels of the Earth; to wit, in the Springtime and the Autumn. From the places; because, for the most part spongy and hollow Regions, which may drink in a greater quantity of exhalations, are commonly most subject unto it: for although many exhalations are daily enclosed in the womb of the Earth, yet Earthquakes fall but seldom; because the matter is seldom so strong and violent as to shake the Earth: Wherefore some Philosophers have expressed three principal ways which make this Earthquake: first, when a great quantity of exhalations is suddenly engendered, which for the greatness of it cannot be contained in so little a space: for then being almost choked, it seeks a way to fly forth: Secondly, when the Earth is condensated by cold, and drives the exhalation from one place to another, which flying hither and thither, shakes and strikes the Earth: Thirdly, when the exhalation, the cold compass it round by an Antiperistasis, begets heat within it, and so is rarified: for so being unable any longer to confine itself to its former place, it breaks forth, and so shakes the Earth: We must here note by the way, that not only exhalations are cause of the distemperature in the Earth, but also subterranean fires and winds: all which by some are judged to be of equal force in this action: for the division of Earthquakes so far forth as it concerns the difference of places, we must understand, that it may be either Universal or particular: An Universal Earthquake is that which shakes all the whole Earth in every part, at least in the upper face: whereof (I suppose) no natural cause can be given, but the immediate and miraculous power of God: such an Earthquake happened at the time of our Saviour's Passion, whereof Dydimus a grave and ancient Writer left record. But that which is said to have happened in the time of Valentinian, mentioned by Orosius in his 7 book of Histories, & 32 Chapter, is thought by grave Authors to be no universal▪ Earthquake, howsoever for the large extent of it, it was thought to be general. A particular Earthquake is that which is bounded in some one or more particular places, which for the causes before-alleaged cannot be so far extended, because the caverns and convexities of the Earth, where such vapours and exhalations are contained, cannot be ordinarily so great as to extend to many Kingdoms and Regions. 1 Regions extreme cold or extreme hot are not so subject to Earthquakes as places of a Middle temper. The reason is, because in places extreme cold, exhalations are not so soon engendered, and in so great a quantity as in other parts: on the other side in places which are extreme hot, the exhalations which are bred, are soon consumed with excess of heat: both which may be confirmed by Instances. It is observed that in the cold Northern parts (as Olaus Magnus writes in his 10 book and 13 Chapter) Earthquakes are very seldom or never: so it is observed by Pliny in his 2 book and 18 Chapter: and Albertus Magnus in his 3 book of M●teours tract. 2▪ That places which are very hot, as Egypt, are seldom troubled with this shaking of the Earth: whereas places betwixt both, which are seated in a more temperate climate, find it not so strange. 1 Hollow and spongy places are more subject to Earthquakes then solid and compacted soils. We must here understand that hollow places are either such as lie open to the Air, or are hollow only under, and close upward. The former sort are not at all subject to the molestation of Earthquakes, because the exhalations fly out without impediment: but the latter being more apt to engender and retain such matter, must of necessity be more troubled. This is most plainly observed in Phrygia, Italia, Caria, Lydia, wherein such motions are more frequent. To confirm this a little farther, we observe that hilly and mountainous places, suffer this violence oftener than other parts; because there most commonly caverns and concavities are more frequent than in plain countries. But here by the way may be objected, that sandy and slimy countries are many times more free from Earthquakes then other places: an instance whereof was given before in Egypt, wherein never any Earthquake (as most Authors affirm) or at least but one (as Seneca) hath been observed. The reason may be given, that sandy places without any strife suffer the exhalations to disperse themselves: that slimy places want sufficient receptacles to entertain them. 3 Lands are more often troubled with Earthquakes then the Continent. This have they found to be true in many Lands of the Mediterranean Sea, and others also; chiefly in Cyprus, Sicylia, Euboea, Tyrus, Angria, Lippora, and the Molucco Lands betwixt the East and West-Indies. The cause some would have to be the Antiperistasis or circumstancy of the waters, which is apt to engender greater store of exhalations in the Earth. But nevertheless that Lands are more subject to Earthquakes than Continents I dare affirm no otherwise then probable; because some places in the Continent seem very much affected, especially in Europe, above other places, Constantinople and Basilaea, if we credit authors which have written of this matter; in Asia, China, and other Regions adjoining thereunto. CHAP. XIII. 1 THe Natural affections of the Land have hitherto been declared: We are in the next place to treat of the Civil: Those we term Civil which concern the Inhabitants. 2 An Inhabitant is a man dwelling in a certain place. The name of an Inhabitant (as we have before noted) may be taken either generally for any living creature, residing in a certain place, in which sense Brute beasts may be called Inhabitants▪ which signification is only metaphorical: or else for a Reasonable living creature, whose abode is settled in any place or Region, in which sense we here take it. The consideration of the Inhabitants we have reserved for this last Treatise; following as well the method of the first creation, as of Moses in the narration. For God proceeding in the first Creation according to the order of Generation, f●om the more unperfect to the perfect, created not man before such time as he had furnished the Earth with all things agreeable and necessary for his use; to which alludes the Poet in these Verses. Sanctius his animal mentisque capacius altae Deerat adhuc, & quod dominari in caetera possit, Natus homo est.— More sacred and of understanding mind, A creature wants to govern every kind; So man begun— Of the Nature, Proprieties, Dignities, and other accidents of this principal creature, there wants no discovery; sith large volumes are stuffed with this theme, and every man which knows himself can prevent me in this subject: I will here speak of him so far forth as he is an Inhabitant or dweller on the Earth. 3 In the Inhabitants we are to consider two things: either the Original, or the Disposition. 4 The Original is the offspring whence all Inhabitants took their beginning. Concerning the original of people of the Earth, we are to observe two things; First, the Distinction of original; Secondly, the manner of Invention: For the first, we must note that all Inhabitants of the Earth, have a threefold original or beginning. The first was from the first Creation, the second was immediately after the general deluge, wherein all the seminary of living creatures was preserved in the Ark: The third, is the first stock or original of each several Nation: For this last, it is a matter which we cannot here so well define, till we come to the particular description of each Region, to which it properly belongs. It shall be enough in this general part, to speak of the two first, as far as approved History and Observation shall direct us: For the Manner of finding out the original of Nations, these rules are given us by Bodin in his ninth chapter of the method of History. The first is by the testimony of approved Authors. The second is by the marks and footsteps of Languages. The third may be drawn from the Limits and known bounds and situation of Countries. This knowledge of the Original of Nations, hath been a matter of no small importance: For (as Bodin observes) there is nothing which hath more exercised the wits of Writers, or caused more civil discords and ruins of divers commonwealths, than the contention about the first original of nations: which jars and contentions (as I take it) spring from no other ground then the natural pride in the minds of men, and the affection of Nobility: whereby it often comes to pass, that s●ch men as have risen to grea●●es, by their Wealth, Villainies, or other such like means, have afterwards, to continue and bolster up their usurped dignities, sought out new pedigrees and Ancestors, to set a gloss upon their own base beginnings; a humour in our days more affected, then praiseworthy; not only of private persons, but of whole nations, which run far off to seek out their first original, which with more ease and certainty, they might find nearer home. To let pass other examples we need go no farther than the French and the Britanes, both which labour as much as may be, to derive their first original from the Troyans'. The first from the lineage of Hector, the other from Aeneas; as if more glory were to be derived from Trojan fugitives, then from the valiant nation of the ancient Gauls and Germans; from whom they might derive a ●ruer and a more certain descent. The consideration of this antiquity of nations so far forth as it concerns our Geographical discourse, reserving matters of more specialty to our Special part, we will comprise in these Theorems. 1 All Nations had their first original from one stock, whence afterwards they became divided. We must here understand (as we have before noted) that all Nations have a threefold original, the first before the universal deluge, the other soon after, the later long after. For the first, no doubt can be made by such as credit the truth of holy Scriptures, but it was from Adam the first father of mankind▪ For the last, it is doubtful and various, and therefore cannot well be handled in general, before we come to the description of particular countries; where we are determined to make a search as near as can be into their original: But that which we chiefly here note in the second offspring of mankind soon after the flood: For certain it is that all mankind was confined to the family of Noah in the Ark, so that their first original must be drawn from the Ark, and that place where the Ark rested, presently upon the falling of the waters: which we shall prove to be far Eastward. Hence is the manifold arrogancy of many nations well discovered; for amongst the Ancients some have so much affected the antiquity of their race▪ that forgetting their humane condition, they have derived their nobility from the Gods. Which humour hath not only invaded the minds and affections of foolish and ignorant men, but also of such as have stood in great opinion & estimation of wisdom and virtue: In so much as Caesar in a certain oration to the people of Rome, was not ashamed to boast, that he was descended by his Father's side from the Gods, by his mother from Kings: As also Aristotle derived his offspring from Apollo and Aesculapius: which strange affectation was little less in the people of lower and base condition, who either being utterly ignorant of their own offspring, or at least dissembling it, for the hate they bore to strangers have called themselves 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which is as much to say, as a people bred of the same region, not fetching their descent from any other nation: In which sense Aristides in Panathenai● gives the greatest nobility to the Athenians; to wit that being borne of the Earth the mother of the Gods, they derived not their descent from any other foreign country: and this error is observed not only amongst the Ancient, but also with the newer writers, to be so common, that Polydore Virgil otherwise a prudent writer, affirms the Britain's to be a people taking their original from the Island Countries, and not derived farther. The like is written by Athamerus that the Germane nation being first bred in Germany owed their original to no other; Which he labours to confirm out of Tacitus, Sabellicus, and Sepontinus. But (as Bodin speaks ingenuously) the ancient might well be excused in this error: But these men are subject to great reprehension: 1. Because they being Christians seem to reject the authority of holy Scriptures, which testify that all mankind was derived from the selfsame original, being (as we have said) all confined in the Ark of Noah. 2 Because by this means, giving to nation's no other original, then from their own country, they distract and divide each one from the mutual love and society of other Nations. For besides many other reasons which moved Moses to write of the Genealogies of people, this one seems not the least, that men should understand themselves to be all (as it were) kin, and descended from the same original; then which there is no greater means to conciliate and join men's affections for mutual amity and conversation. As it is reported of Diomedes and Glaucus and many others, who being armed to one another's ruin and overthrow, have been drawn to break off their hatred by the mere pretence and show of consanguinity. But these who so arrogantly boast themselves to be Sons of the Earth, not beholding to any other country for their offspring, strive to break in sunder the bonds of society betwixt nations, which▪ God's Word and the Law of Nations binds us to observe. Hence grow those mortal hatreds and heartburning betwixt divers countries, as of the Egyptians, against the Hebrews, of the greeks against the Latins, wherein they persecuted one the other extremely. Hence came it to pass that strangers amongst the Romans were called enemies, as the name of Welshmen with the Germans signifieth as much as a foreigner; wherein they seem much to degenerate from the ancient hospitality of their Ancestors, for which they have been much praised▪ Finally from this one root spring those infamous libels cast out of one Nation against another, written by such Firebrands as delight in nothing more than dissension; but how much better were it to reconcile all people out of this assured ground of consanguinity, sith Religion persuades more to Charity and agreement, then to Faction; and contentions. But this I leave to the Divine, whom it more properly concerns. 2 The first inhabitants of the Earth were planted in Paradise, and thence translated to the places near adjoining. For the confirmation of this point we need no farther proof than the authority of God himself, speaking in his Word, whereon all truth is grounded; But of the plac● of Paradise, where we place the first habitation, sundry disputes have been amongst Divines sufficiently examined, of late by a judicious and worthy Writer in his History of the World. Which tract being too tedious to insert, Sr Walter Raleigh. we will contract as far as concerns our purpose. First therefore it would seem meet that we examine their opinion, which hold this History of Paradise to be a mere Allegory: Of this opinion were Origen, Philo judaeus, Fran. Gregorius with many others: who by the four rivers of Paradise would have to be understood the four Cardinal Virtues: as by the Tree of knowledge, Sapience or Wisdom: To which opinion also S. Ambrose Teems to adhere: who would have that by Paradise should be meant the Soul or mind, by Adam the understanding, by Eve the sense, by the Serpent delectation, by the rest of the Trees the virtues of the mind: Against the Fathers themselves I will not inveigh, sith some men suppose their conceits to be rather allusions, than conclusions. But against the opinion itself, many reasons may be drawn to prove there was a true local Paradise Eastward: first out of the text itself, which saith; For out of the ground made the Lord God to grow every tree pleasant to the ●ight, and good for meats: by the process of which Story it seems that God first created man out of the garden, as it were in the world at large, and then put him in this garden: the end whereof is expressed to dress and manure it: Paradise being a garden filled with plants and trees, pleasant to behold, and good for meat: which proveth that Paradise was a terrestrial garden. Secondly, to express it more plainly, he averreth that it was watered with a river springing out of a Region called Eden, being a country near unto Canaan in Mesopotania as Ezechiel witnesseth. Thirdly Epiphanius and St Hierome urge to this effect; if Paradise were such an Allegory, than were there no Rivers, no place out of which they sprung, no Eve, no Adam, and so the whole History should be turned into a mere fable or poëticall fiction. Fourthly, it is proved by continuation of the same Story: 1 Because God gave Adam freewill to eat of every tree of the garden (the foresaid tree excepted:) besides he left all the beasts of the Earth to be named by him, which cannot be meant of imaginary trees and beasts: for this were to make the whole Creation enigmatical. 2ly This name is often used in holy Scriptures elsewhere as in Ezech▪ 10 Genesis 13.19. which would not have been so, if the whole story had been merely Allegorical, & Paradise an Utopia; sith the Scripture, specially the historical part of them, are written in a plain style, fitting the capacity of vulgar auditors. Lastly of this Paradise planted in the East, we may find some footsteps in profane Poets, as in Homer, Orpheus, Li●us, Pindarus, Hesiod, who often speak of Alcinous garden, and the Elysian fields: all which derived their first invention from this description of Paradise, recorded by Moses in Holy Scripture, whereof the Heathen themselves had some obscure traditions. The second opinion was, that Paradise was the whole Earth, and the Ocean the fountain of these four rivers; which was defended heretofore by the Manichees, Noviomagus, Vadianus, and Goropius Becanus. The reasons which they allege for their part to prove this assertion, were chiefly these. 1 Because those things which were in Scripture attributed to Paradise, are generally ascribed to the whole world, as that place of Genesis; Bring forth fruit and multiply, fill the earth, and subdue it, rule over every creature. But this argument may easily be answered: for although the world in general were created for man, and all men descended from the same original, to wit, the loins of Adam; yet this disproveth nothing the particular garden assigned to Adam to dress, wherein he lived before his transgression: for if there had been no other choice, but that Adam had been left to the universal (as they imagine,) why should Moses say, the garden was East from Eden: sith the world can not be East or West but in respect of particular places? Also why was the Angel set after Adam's expulsion to bar his re entrance, if it were not a particular place: for according to their opinion Adam should be driven out of the whole World. Their second reason is, because it seems impossible that Nilus, Ganges, and Euphrates, by so many portions of the world so far distant, should issue out of the same fountain. To this we answer, that by common Interpreters of Scripture, being ignorant of Geography, Pison was falsely taken for Ganges, & Gihen for Nilus: Although it can no way be true that Ganges should be taken for a river by Ha●ilah in India, and Nilus should run through Aethiopia, as we shall show hereafter. The third opinion is, that Paradise is higher than the Moon, or higher at least than the Middle Region of the Air: this opinion is cast upon Beda and ●abanus; to which also Rupertus seems to accord: who (as it seems) borrowed their opinion from Plato, and he from Socrates. But these two (as it seems) are misinterpreted, Because by Paradise they meant Heaven itself as many imagine. But to confirm that this terrestrial Paradise is such a place, some men produce these Arguments. First that it is reported by Solinus, that there is a place exceeding delightsome and healthsome on the top of Mount Athos called Acrothones, which being seated about clouds, or rain, or such inconveniences, the people by reason of their long lives are called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. Secondly they allege for the height of this Paradise, that Enoch was there preserved from the violence of the flood, as Isidore and Peter Lombaard maintain: But this opinion was of the Divines condemned in the Florentine counsel: and first where as they say, that such a pleasant place is in the top of the mountain Athos; this neither proves that this is Paradise, neither is it so high as they would have it: For every high and pleasant place is not Paradise. Secondly, whereas they would have Enoch and Elias preserved in the place, it is expressly against Holy Scripture, which affirms directly that the water's over-flowed all the mountains, making no such distinction. Secondly should we credit this▪ we might as well believe that certain Giants saved themselves in that high place, as some have believed. Besides the answer of their frivolous arguments, these reasons may be brought against their assertion: First, that such a place cannot be commodious to live in: for being so near the moon, it had also been too near the sun. Secondly, because in this sort it had been too near a neighbour to the Element of fire. Thirdly, because (as many hold) the Air in that Region by the motion of the heavens is carried about so violently, as nothing there can well consist. Fourthly, because according to Ptolemy, the place between the Earth and the Moon is seventeen times the Diameter of the Earth, which make by a gross account about 120000 miles. Hence it must needs follow that Paradise being lifted up to this great height, must have the compass of the whole Earth for a basis or foundation. But this cannot be imagined: first, because it would be subject to the eyes and knowledge of men. Secondly, it would hide the light of the Sun for the first part of the day being on the East side. Thirdly it would overpoize the Earth, and so make it to shrink out of his place; one side being far greater and heavier than the other. The fourth conceit is of Tertullian, Bonaventure, and Durandus, who would have Paradise to be seated under the Aequatour, because that contrary to the opinion of most of all the Ancients, they thought this place to be most pleasant and commodious for habitation. It is true that the places under the Aequinoctial are not so burnt with the Sun as some thought: but, as we have proved out of latter Navigators, very pleasant and fruitful for the most part: yet cannot this be the place of Paradise; for as much as the Rivers of Paradise mentioned in holy Scripture, are not found to meet there: which argument might also confute them which thought it was seated under the North-pole. The last opinion which I hold the truest, is of some latter Writers, that Paradise was seated in a Region Southeast from Mesopotania, which is most amply and copiously proved by Sr Walter Raleigh, to whom I refer my Reader: only two reasons I will allege. The first from the name of Eden, sith there is found an Island of this name Northwest from the place assigned, very fruitful & pleasant in all commodities of the Earth, and in later times known also by the name of Eden, which is likely to have been continued from the beginning. Secondly from the Rivers of Paradise, which cannot be imagined to meet in any part of the world: for Tigris and Euphrates it is certain that they are found in this very Region: for the other River Gihen that it is falsely understood of a River running through Aethiopia is also most certain; for such a River could never meet with Euphrates, which is out of question one of the Rivers of Paradise: for as much as it is so far distant & divided from it by the Mediterranean Sea: wherefore I am constrained rather to embrace their opinion which interpret Chut to be a part of Arabia, where Chush the father of Noah se●●led his first habitation; which for this cause he called after his own name: but afterward in process of time his posterity growing exceeding large and populous, they were enforced to pass over into Africa, and so settle themselves in Aethiopia, which place also they called after the same name: as we have seen of later years the Spaniards at the first discovery of the West Indies called one place Hispaniola, and another Hispania Nova in remembrance of their former habitation. But howsoever it be, certain it is, that Paradise was seated in the East, from whence mankind had its first offspring And probable it is that Adam being excluded out of Paradise, was cast into some place near adjoining thereunto, which may also from our habitable place of the West, be accounted Eastward. 3 The first plantation of Inhabitants immediately after the Deluge begun in the East. As Adam the father of all Nations before the flood began his offspring in the East, near Paradise, so the second father of Nations Noah in the East first began to repeople the world, after the deluge: Which besides the clearer testimony of holy Scripture, may sundry ways be demonstrated: First, because it is most certain, that the Earth began first to be peopled, near the place where the Ark rested, which is the mountain Ararat: Whether this be a mountain of Armenia as the common Interpreters imagine, or the mountain Caucasus betwixt Scythia & India, as some later Writers with greater probabilities have guessed, hath suffered a great dispute; all agree in this that it was Eastward. I will not be here over curious, but refer it to our historical part, where we shall particularly handle the memorable accidents, of particular places: Enough it is to prove that the first plantation after the flood was Eastward: 2ly no small probability is drawn from the civility, magnificence, and populosity of these Eastern nations before others: For it is certain that many excellent Arts have flourished amongst those Eastern people, before ever our western climate dreamt of such matters; Among many other matters, Artillery & Printing was in use amongst the Chinois & East-Indies of ancient time, long before this invention was known to us; as the portugals who have travailed thither have confirmed. To the use of guns and ordinance, many suppose Philostratus to have alluded, speaking in the life of Apollonius Tiraneus lib: 2. cap: 14. Where he saith that the people dwelling betwixt Hyphasis and Ganges use not to go far to war, but drive away their enemies with thunder and lightning sent down from jupiter. By which means it is said that Hercules and Bacchus joining their forces were there defeated, and that Hercules there cast away his golden shield. For the other Invention of letters howsoever it were by the Grecians ascribed to Cadmus, as the first Inuentour, because he was the man that first discovered it to the Grecians; it is most certain that it was as ancient as Seth: And that Printing first came to us, from this Eastern part, appears by john Guttemberg, who brought it first out of the Eastern world: Which art Conradus being instructed in, brought the practice thereof to Rome, which afterward one Gesnerus a Frenchman much bettered and perfected: For howsoever amongst the Europaeans this invention seemed but newly borne, yet the Chinois, had it before either the Egyptians or Phaenicians: When the Grecians had neither knowledge nor civility: which is witnessed above a hundred years gone by the Spaniards and portugals. Farther for the magnificence of those nations, an argument may be drawn from the History of Alexander the great, who found more stately buildings and Cities in the little kingdom of Porus which lay side by side against the East-Indies, then in all his former travails: for in Alexander's time learning & civility were not spread so far west as Rome: Neither did he esteem of Italy any otherwise, then of a barbarous and uncivil place: which made him to turn his army rather against Babylon and the east, which seemed a far worthier prize: Moreover, Paulus Venetus shows that letters and discipline was first borrowed from the eastern people, without any return of interest. A third reason may be from the extraordinary strength of those eastern people in most ancient times. For it is reported by Diodorus Siculus out of Clesias that Semiramis the wife of Ninus, not many descents from Noah, brought an army to invade India▪ of three millions, besides horses and waggoners: Neither had Staurobates her adversary smaller multitudes to encounter her: which extraordinary strength and multitude of men could not possibly issue out of any Colony, sent thither from the western parts: And therefore it must needs follow, that they had their first offspring and original in those eastern parts near India. Sundry other reasons might be alleged, but these I suppose will suffice to fortify this assertion. Then it is manifest that the first Plantation of nations begun in the eastern parts of the Earth: But where we shall place and define this Eastern part, seems a matter of greater difficulty than the other. Sr Walter Raleigh out of the premised arguments would seem to prove, that this first plantation was far ●ast as far as India, near which, he would have the Ark to rest, to wit, on the mountain Caucasus lying betwixt India & Scythia: Notwithstanding the authority of the learned Author, I find that the most ancient writers have drawn the original of all nations soon after the flood, from the Caldaeans or at least amongst all, made them the first: For confirmation of which opinion, they urge many strong arguments: In the first place, they urge the testimony of Moses in the 11 of Genesis, where speaking of the first assembly of people after the flood he relates, that they came from the East into the plains of Shinaar, in which place stood Babylon the chief seat of the Caldaeans. To this they add the testimony of Metasthenes, Herodotus, C●esias, & Xenophon: which have afterwards been seconded by Diogenes, Laertius, Philo, Porphyry in a certain epistle to Boethus, Clemens Alexandrinus in Stromatis; Eusebius de Euangelica demonstratione, Theodoretus lib: 1. de Graecarum affectionum ouratione, Rabbi Moses Maymonis filius lib: 3. cap. 30. Perplexorum: with almost all the Interpreters of the Hebrews: All which with uniform consent have affirmed that Civility, Arts and sciences, derived their first descent from the Caldaeans. Hence they feign that Prometheus being a Caldaean, for that he recalled men from a wild life to a more civil conversation, and taught the regular motion of the stars and planets before unknown, stole fire from heaven, and animated men form out of clay, with a celestial soul. But above all which may be collected in this kind, no small argument may be drawn from the marks and footsteps of the Hebrew and Chaldy tongues, which in no mixture of tongues, or process of time could ever be abolished: For this, being the first of all other languages, was preserved by Abraham and his posterity; And challengeth antiquity before ever the Latin or Grecian tongues had any memory: in so much as all the ancient nations of the world are found in most of their original names of Gods, peoples, Princes, and places to make use of the Hebrew or Chaldey tongues, differing only in dialect, which without manifest wresting and absurdity, cannot well be derived from other latter languages. The first father of the people of Europe was japhet the son of Noah, according to the joint consent of Hebrews, Grecians, and Latins▪ To which alludes the Poet, where he says, Audax japetigenus. This name 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or japhet in Hebrew signifieth as much as Dilatation or enlargement: Whereas the Greek Etymologists ridiculously draw it from many other originals: in the like sort Tacitus ignorant of the Hebrew, would have the people of Palestine to be called judaei quasi Idaei, from the mountain Ida in Crete, from which he dreams they were derived; whereas the word in the Chaldy signifies, as much as Praisers. In like manner jon or (according to Homer) jaon, supposed the first Author of the jones, would the Grecians derive from a flower, whereas the word in Hebrew signify, as much as a deceiver: Whence Daniel prophesied of Alexander the great, that the King of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is jaan or javan should reign in Assiria▪ Instances in this kind are infinite, as of Danaus, drawn from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Dan which signifies a judge, whence comes Dardanus which is the seat of judges: Of janus from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 jaijn▪ signifying wine, in which sense he is by Halicharnisseus called Oenotrius: Of Achaeis which signifies Greece, Egypt which is straight or narrow Nimrode Rebellious. Ninus a son, Ninive the house of Ninus, Solon quasi Solam a peacemaker. So Cadmus supposed to be the father of letters and learning, amongst the Grecians, signifies in the original, so much as an Eastern man or an ancient man. Should we run any further on this point, we should be thought to write a dictionary, for as much as all the ancient names amongst the Grecians spring from the same fountain▪ Whence that Egyptian Priest had good reason to object to Solon: That the Grecians seemed children, because they had nothing ancient amongst them: But to better purpose a Christian objected to the Grecians that Moses' the Lawgiver to the Christians was ancienter than all the Grecian Gods; Other reasons are taken from the Religion of the Hebrews, out of which seem to be derived all the famous religions of the Earth; For to let pass the Christian, jewish, & Mahometan Religions at this day flourishing, all of them challenging great antiquity, and taking a great mixture from the truest and ancientest Hebrew discipline: It is manifest that in the Heathenish superstitions themselves, many footsteps have been discovered: which will appear by diverse Instances. These arguments I confess seem very strong, but yet not of sufficient strength to enforce credulity without other warrant: To say peremptorily with Mr. Bodin, that by the consent of ancient writers, the Chaldeans are acknowledged the most ancient people, is more than I dare to venture: Neither is this opinion so strongly fortified with arguments, but Reason may step in to have a doubtful assault. Their first argument drawn from the testimony of holy Scriptures in th' ●● of Genesis, seems to stand on our side, altogether against them: For whereas it is said, that they came from the east into the plain of Shinaar, it is manifest that the east was first peopled; or else how should this people come from the east into these plains of Shinaar, to erect the tower of Babel? Secondly, whereas they urge Arts, Civility, Magnificence of the Chaldeans, we shall find it rather to agree to the people which dwell farther east, as is witnessed by the former instances. And if any object that at this day is found the contrary, for as much as we find the Indian to be a barbarous blind and ignorant Nation, in respect of the Asiatickes and Europaeans, we answer two ways. 1 First, that we find not by experience the East-Indians to be so altogether devoid of civility, but that we may observe not only amongst them the footsteps, but also the practice of many ingenuous Arts, sage government, policy, and magnificence, as amongst the Chinois and the large territory of the great Mogul 2. It is not hard to imagine, that in so large a tract of time, the best settled common wealths should be brought to nought, arts, civility, magnificence, be forgotten, and the rarest inventions be cast into oblivion, especially by those two enemies of civility▪ wars and luxury; both which having the reigns in their own hands, are quickly able to abolish all wholesome discipline, both in Laws and Religion. 3. Their argument drawn from the footsteps of Languages in my shallow conceit, proves nothing else but that all Laws, Arts, and Learning was derived to the Grecians from the Chaldaeans, or the Nations near adjoining, which formerly received it from them. But how far Learning might propagate itself the other way towards the East, is not a matter so clear and out of question. The preservation of the Language (for aught I ●ee) might grow from the continuance of the Religion, more firmly rooted, and for a long time continued in Abraham's posterity, whose abode was settled there about, whereas the other far divorced, aswell from their first spring, as the monumental seals of their religion, quickly turned Religion into Pagan Idolatry: Many reasons besides the disproving of this former opinion may be alleged to prove the Eastern part of the world to have been first peopled: amongst which I will only cull out this one, grounded on the text of holy Scripture. It is warranted out of the text: 1 That when the waters beg●n to decrease upon the face of the earth, and the Ark began to rest upon the mountain Ara●at, Noah sent out a dove to make trial, who returned with an olive-branch in her mouth. 2 That near the place he issued out of the Ark with all his family, he planted a vineyard, and was drunk with the juice of the Grape, not knowing the strength thereof: out of which by all probable conjecture must needs be collected, that the Regions near the place where the Ark first rested, by the benefit of Nature afforded both Vines and Olives: for we cannot imagine the silly Dove at the time of the flood empty gorged to have flown very far over the face of the waters to obtain this Olive branch, nor Noah after the flood to have gone very far to seek out a convenient place for his Vineyard: whence it is most likely that the Ark rested in such a place, whose near adjoining Regions are enriched with such commodities. But this cannot be verified of Armenia, wherein for aught my reading informs me, are found neither Vines nor Olives, whereas some places Eastward, whereon the Ark according to this other opinion was supposed to rest, afford both in great plenty. To umpite betwixt these two opinions, I leave to my friendly Readers; because it is not in our power to command, but obey Reason. CHAP. XIV. 1OF the original of Inhabitants of the Earth we have spoken: It remains we now treat of their natural Disposition. There is nothing more subject to admiration, than the diversity of natural Dispositions in Nations; a matter evident to the eye of observation, and needing no proof or demonstration: for who observes not in all Nations certain natural or national virtues or vices, which neither time nor Laws could ever change or correct. For not to 〈◊〉 farther off then our neighbouring Nations Confines; what Writer in this kind almost, were he not very partial, hath not taxed pride and ambition in the Spaniard; levity, or rather (as Bodin would have it) temerity in the French; dangerous dissimulation in the Italian; Drunkenness in the Dutch; Falsehood in the Irish; and gluttony in the English? And howsoever many means have been put in practice, either by the severity of laws to curb such enormities, or the subtlety of discourse to shroud these vices under the name of virtues: yet these marks are found to stick as close as the spots unto the Leopard, as neither altering their pristine hue, or yielding to time or statutes: And if it happened at any time that by extraordinary violence some little alteration were wrought, yet some few years would find it return again unto his own nature and disposition. This variety of dispositions being very many, and depending on sundry causes, to help memory, we will reduce into certain heads▪ out of which in the general we may give a judgement, leaving the rest to our special Tract. The name of natural disposition in this place we take in the largest sense, so far forth as it comprehends under it the Complexion, Manners, Actions, Languages, Laws, Religion, and Government. All which so far forth as they depend from the places we will show. Neither intent we to handle nicely all these specialties, forasmuch as the Manners, Customs, Laws, (and for a great part) the external rites of Religion depend on the natural constitution of the Inhabitants: so that little can be spoken of the natural constitution, but of such actions, effects and marks as show themselves in their ordinary customs & manners. Wherefore we shall be constrained to treat of them together, the one being a great furtherance to the explanation of the other. 2 The natural disposition of the Inhabitants of the Earth may suffer change and diversity, either in respect of the site, or in respect of the quality of the soil, or in regard of the Inhabitants themselves. 3 The site is the respect which one place in position beareth to another: Here a Nation is divided into, 1 The Northern or Southern, 2 The Eastern or Western. 4 The Northern is placed in the North Hemisphere, betwixt the Aequatour and the Arctic Pole; The Southern on the opposite side betwixt the Aequatour and the Antarctic Pole. Of the Northern and Southern Inhabitants we speak not here respectively, as in regard of the same Hemisphere, but absolutely in regard of the two Hemispheres and their Inhabitants, How these 2 Hemispheres of North and South are varied in respect of the quantity and disposition of the soil is deciphered before. What diversity shall be found in the people or inhabitants shall be showed in this Theorem. 1 The people of the Northern Hemisphere aswell in riches and magnificence, as valour, science, and civil government, far surpass the people of the South Hemisphere. The people of the Northern Hemisphere we understand to be the Europeans, the Asiatickes, the hithermost African● being the greater part the Inhabitants of America Mexicana, with the hithermost part of America Peruana together with the people inhabiting the unknown land▪ lying under the Arctic pole, with all the Lands belonging to each of these▪ The people of the Southern Hemisphere contain a moiety Southward of the Africans, the Inhabitants of America Peruana for the most part: the people of the T●rra Australis incognita or the soutth Indieses, with some Iland● belonging thereunto. Betwixt the●e two partitions, If we make a comparison we shall find a greater disparity than ever any invention of man could any ways reduce to any shadow of Equality, or any Travellers observation ●ould ever step in to diminish. To begin with the richeses▪ It is certain, that the 〈◊〉 ●ase of it in any ●●tion proceeds, either f●om the benefit of the soil or from the ●●ill and diligence of the inhabitants▪ The benefit of the soil either in respect of the quantity of the ground, or the quality of the soil in this southern part, we have at large proved to be fa●●e ●nferio●● to that of the Northern Hemisphere. The diligence of the people we can measure no otherwise then ●y their Traffic with foreign nations, or their good husbandry of their own commodities Their traffic with foreign nations, is suspected to be little or nothing at ●ll, in respect of the 〈◊〉 theme Inhabitants ha●ing small commerce or knowledge of foreign nation's, and ●hat rather enforced by violence and ●onques●s▪ them any way des●●●d of them▪ Whereas scarce can be found any nation of the Earth, which cannot by commerce or traffic with foreign Countries, at least neighbouring confines both strengthen themselues, and draw riches from other nations: Less can be hoped from their homebred industry, which is content with sufficiency, never aiming at farther riches then natural necessity seems to exact, as may appear by all records and Histories almost which have treated of this matter. If we consider the state & magnificene of either, we shall acknowledge a great difference, as disdaining all comparison. The first offpring of all nations owes itself (as we have proved) to our Northern hemisphere, which that Almighty Creator of all things blessed with knowledge and civil government, before ever this Southern coast was known or mentioned. All the acts of the old and new Testament performed on this side of the Aequatour, can speak the state and magnificence of these nations, leaving the other as yet neglected without memory or History. Neither hath the Christian religion, the true ground of all settled government ever been so propitious, as to smile on these miserable Nations, as yet groaning under the servile bonds of g●o●●e. ●gnorance and Pagan superstition. Where shall we find in any records or antiquities, any state amongst them to parallel the four greater Monarchies of the Ae●syrians, Medes, and Persians, Grecians, and Romans, or the later risen out of their ashes, whereof this one age can produce no few examples▪ What place is extant at this day in Europe, Asia, the Northern tract of afric or America (some few Deserts only excepted) which have not been either by knowledge received from foreign Nations, or some other means in some sort reduced to civility▪ At least to have embraced some settled form of government▪ Whereas the Regions daily discovered in the Southern moiety are found most barbarous, without laws, sciences, or civility▪ Or if any such perfection show itself amongst them, it is manifest that it is owed altogether, to the industry of the Europeans, who with great cost and travail, ●aue brought them such riches whereof the poor wretches never knew the want. Instead of ●o many Colonies sent out of Europe & Asia into these Southern Regions, no record I suppose can mention one ever sent from them unto us. Which is an argument of their ignorance and want of traffic. What shall I speak of the valour and prowess of the Northern inhabitants, having by the sword erected so many kingdoms, and (as it were) without resistance brought into captivity those Nations of the South? of Arts and Sciences what can be said, but that the Northern Inhabitant hath all, and the other in a manner none: For liberal and ingenious sciences and Schools and Universities dispersed in most part● of Europe and elsewhere can speak our glory: Which for aught I could ever learn the Southern Continent, never saw; and admit they know ●ome thing in some Mechanical arts, it is no more than necessity requires. Neither in the number and extent of invention, or curiousness of workmanship answerable to that we find at home. The arts of Printing & Artillery were I suppose never of their acquaintance, except perhaps the later, which I dare swear hath had better acquaintance then welcome; as that which never showed itself but to their ruin: No objection can here take place in this comparison, except some man suppose the monuments and Trophies of the●e nations, either being very ancient have miscarried by time, or else being of a newer birth are hid, wanting the light of discovery: But this is a mere conjecture wanting ground: For what Antiquity or record could ever show so much, as the footsteps or marks of any such monuments? as for the countries as yet undiscovered, no better conjectural judgement can be given, then by that which is already found: For where all other reason and obsernation is silent, I always hold equality the best measure: Another argument not inferior to the rest, is the antiquity of the Northern nations, which without all question is far greater than that of the Southern: Because we cannot imagine any ●an so adventurous to pass into these remote quarters, till such times as the places nearer adjoining, growing too populous, constrained them to seek out a new habitation; which no man could conceiu● to be but in many years after the universal Deluge. 5 Each Hemisphere with the Inhabitants therein contained, may again be divided according to the longitude or latitude: according to the Latitude, Inhabitants may be called either the extreme or Middle. 6 The extreme inhabitants are either the Northern or Southern. The former in the higher Hemisphere. The other are the inhabitants thereunto opposite in the other Hemisphere. 7 The middle Inhabitants are such as are situate in the middle betwixt the Aequator and the Pole in either Hemisphere. The mistaking of the true limits of North and South in this our Northern Hemisphere, hath caused great error amongst the Ancients: Insomuch as Hypocrates pronounced the people of the North to be of a lean & dry disposition, of a small and dwarfish statu●e; whereas either writers out of a good observation have found them to be of a tall stature, big-boned, & of a most able constitution in respect of those of the South. To compose which difference we must have recourse to that sub-partition of the Hemisphere before mentioned, wherein we allotted of the 90 degrees accounted from the Aequatour to the Pole, 30 for heat, 30 for cold, & 30 for temperament; Whereof the former lieth Southward to the Aequatour▪ The second is accounted from the pole: the other is conceived to lie betwixt both. But because we find this Mathematical division to be too precise, to answer the observation of Writers in this kind, we must a little alter these bounds, that these rules may rather stoop to Nature and observation. then Nature be squared to our own conceits; yet shall we show in a generality, and for the most part, that the natural disposition of the Inhabitants, aught to be judged and measured according to these limits: though not exactly answering in precise degrees. Wherefore towards the North we limit these (with Bodin & other good writers) which lie from the 50th degree Northward to the 70th; in which Tract we shall find our Britons, Ireland, Denmark, Gotland, the lower Germany from Moenus and Hipanus to Scythia and Tartary, which ●ake up a great part of Europe & Asia: on the South we place the mos● Southerly Spaniards, ●he Sicilians, Peloponnesians, Cretians, Syrians, Arabians, Persians, Sufians, Gedrosians, Indians, Egyptians, Cyranians, Carthaginians, Numidians, Lybians, Moors, and the Inhabitants of Florida in America. The middle Region is meant that which lies just in the middle place betwixt the Tropic and the Pole; not that which lies betwixt the Pole and the Line: the reason whereof we have showed before; because the places under the Tropics are found to be hottest, but under the Line more temperate; so that our temperate Clime here we place that which begins at the 40▪ and endeth at the 50 degree of latitude: In which Climate be the Northernmost Spain, France, Italy, the higher Germany (as far as the Maze) both H●ngaries, Illyria, both Mys●as, Da●ia, Moldavia, Macedon, Thrace, and the better part of Asia the lesser, Armenia, Parthia, Sogdiana, and a great part of the greater Asia: so that all the Nations as yet mentioned in histories▪ and perfectly discovered in our Northern Hemisphere are contained betwixt the 30 degrees of latitude and the 60. What to think of the Nations dwelling betwixt the two Tropics, and those which are 60 degrees to the Pole, for want of accurate observation and History we can set down no certainty▪ ye● so far as men may judge by conjecture, we may account in the Region betwixt the Tropics, the 15 degrees from the Tropic towards the Line, to be of like quality with the 15 degrees without the Tropic. The Tract in the middle under the Equatour, being more temperate, the● that of the Tropics, may be judged to come near the temp●r of the middle Region betwixt the Tropic and the Line, though perhaps somewhat hotter. For the Regions very near the Poles, less certainty can be collected: yet that little which we find concerning the nature of these Inhabitants we will ●ot omit. According to this partition of our Northern Hemisphere▪ we may ma●● judgement of ●he other; because where no other cause shows itself, we may well guess these places which are of equal site to be of equal disposition, so far forth as they respect the heavenly operation. All which concern the natural disposition of the Inhabitants▪ we will reduce to these ●hree heads▪ to wit either 1 the bodily qualities; 2 the mental Affections, 3 the outward Actions. 1 The Extreme Inhabitants towards either Pole, are in complexion Hot and Moist: Those toward the Equatour Cold and Dry: those of the middle indifferent as partaking of both. The confirmation of this proposition depends on 2 points▪ the first is the Declaration of the Cause of this diversity: the second is the ●ffects and divers tokens which this variety of ●empe● p●oduces, a● well in the Accidents of the Body▪ as the Mind. The cause we have partly before opened▪ which is t●e Heat of the Sun in climates nearer the Equatour, and the Cold i● places farthe● remote, and situate nearer the Pole: whereof the former, working on the Internal heat and moisture of men and all other li●●ng creatures living in those hot Climates, d●awes it o●t, and consumes it in such ●ort▪ that little remains but Cold and Dry Melancholy, as the Seas in the bottom, the other parts being (as it were) evaporated: For by how much more heat any man receives outwardly from the heat of the Sun▪ so much more wants he the ●ame inwardly; which every man may see confirmed out of ordinary experience▪ since that our natural heat is far more vigorous in Win●er then in Summer, and that our joints are more opera●●ue in frosty weather, and then when the Northwind is sti●●ing. On the other side in the Summer we commonly observe the contrary: we find our joints lazy and heavy, our Appetites dull, as may also be perceived in the English, Germans, and French▪ travailing from the Nor●h Southerly into I●aly and Spain, who if they confine not their diet to a sparing rate, they commonly are surprised by surfeits: an example we have of Philip Duke of Austria, living in Spain after his Germane fashion. But on the contrary if a Spaniard, who in his own Country is enured to great Niggardliness, arrive in our Northern Country, he commonly proves a better trencherman than our native Inhabitants. And this Bodin observes to fall out true, not only in Men, but also in beasts, which driven towards the North wax fat, and prove well; but towards the South they pine away and wax ●eane▪ which may well be confirmed out of Leo Afer, who avers, that almost throughout all Afrique you shall find f●w or no herds of cattle or horse; few sheep, and scarce any milk: whereas each man's Table almost in Germany and Brita●ny can give a plain demonstration of our Country's store in this kind▪ Hence may appear that as the heat of the Sun towards the Equatour, by drawing out the internal heat and moisture causeth men inwardly to be left cold and ●ry; so towards the Pole the internal moisture being pr●se●●ed from the Excess of external heat, and the internal heat being strengthened and thickened by external cold, have left unto them a complexion of heat and moisture. The middle Region betwixt both extremes being compounded of both, must needs by mixture and participation enjoy a middle quality. Besides this e●po●i●ion of the causes of this temper we shall observe many special marks and Instances which will discover this variety of disposition. First, it is plain that heat and moisture are the two qualities of fecundity. Whence it must consequently follow, those Regions which are most populous to be chiefly endowed with this quality and disposition. Now where shall we of this Hemisphere find any Country to whom Nature owes a greater increase of mankind, but in the North amongst the Goths, the Scythians, the Scandians▪ and Germane, by whose abundant fertility▪ vast deserts have been cultured and inhabited, stately Cities have been founded, Colonies have been transported and derived almost into all Europe? Hence have Methodius, & P. Diaco●●● compared the armies of the North to swarmed of Bee●; and the North is termed by Olaus Magnus, the store-house of mankind: to wit, from which so many strong Nations, a● the Goths, the Gepidae, the Huns, the Cymbrians▪ the Lumbards', ●he Alan●▪ the B●rgundians, the Normans, the Picts, the Her●●●, the S●e●ian●, the Slavi, the Swi●zers and the Russians are not ashamed to derive their Ancestry. But here may be objected that the Southern people are much more addicted to Venery then the Northern, which seems an argument of greater Heat: But to this I answer, that this insatiate appetite of Venery in the Southern people, proceeds not from heat, b●t from Choler Adust, and Melancholy: which humours carry in them a Salt and sharp quality (according to Physicians) which stirs up their appetite to Venery: which we may plainly obseru● by experience: for no men are more moved by this itching appetite of carnal Copulation, then Melancholy men. But howsoever this affection is most predominant in such men, yet it is hardly seconded by performance; which makes Geographers to ascribe more promptness of generation to the Northern men, although sensual concupiscence reign more in the Southern men; which indifferent proportion was without doubt granted to either, by the providence of Almighty God, that they who were endowed with a greater sufficiency, should less affect sensual delights then the rest, which want that proportion of hea● and moisture. And those of the other sort should have their Appetites more raised up to wantonness, without the which their offspring would soon fail. A second argument to prove our assertion is the Tall and large stature of the Northern man, which argues both heat and moisture; whereas the Southern man is small and dwarfish in stature, composed of weak▪ and feeble Nerves. That the people situate towards the Pole in a moderate distance, surpass in greatness, can be shown not only in this our Hemisphere in the Germa●s, Scythians, Belgians, ●nd others▪ but also in the other by the Pantagones', whose si●uation Southward answers somewhat nearly to the height of Germany. That moisture is a great cause of growth, appears as well by Trees and other vegetals, which growing in low and marish grounds increase to a most incredible greatness; as of those forementioned on the side of Rivo Negro in Peru▪ and near the Lake Hiarotis in India as by Beasts▪ For first we find the moistest to be of greatest stature, which is the reason why the great Whales and fishes in the sea grow to such a vast quantity. Secondly, such Beasts as have hot and moist bodies cannot so well prosper and live in those Southern countries; as the horse which by nature being hot and moist, liveth but faintly in Aethiopia, yet is of good strength in Scythia; Whereas the Ass being by nature hot and dry is of great account and service in Africa, in Europe little respected, in Scythia cannot live. Neither is moisture sufficient for the growth except it be stirred up by heat: wherefore we may conclude hence that the Northern man hath both: Out of the contrary effects, we may likewise collect, that the Southern man wants this quality▪ These reasons indifferently prove these qualities to wit, of heat and moisture, to be in the Northern man, and the contrary in the Southern. Divers other arguments are urged, some to prove the one quality, some the other apart. A great argument of heat in the Northern man may be his extraordinary drinking: A vic● which could never be reform or corrected by times or statutes. This drought of theirs stirring up this desire of drinking, can proceed from no other cause than their heat: Whereas the Southern man is seldom taxed of this vice: not because he is more religiously temperate than the Northern; but rather for the natural temper of his body, which can neither require or bear so much as the Northern. In so much as Bodin seems to make a doubt, whether the immoderate drinking of the Germans is to be esteemed a greater fault, than the niggardly sparing humour of the Italian: sith both arise rather out of nature than education: Another argument of heat in the Northern man, is the extraordinary strength in respect of the Southern man, which is an apparent demonstration of heat▪ We find that the blood of the Scythian is full of small strings such as are in the gore of Bulls and Boars, and betokeneth strength: Whereas the blood of the African is thin, such as is in a Hart or Hare. No less are those reasons which especially prove the Northern man to be endowed with much moisture. Thirdly we may much better argue from the physiognomical accident of the body: we shall find the inhabitants under the Tropickes to be exceeding black: under the Pole itself beyond 60 degrees somewhat brown, but from thence about 60 their colour is reddish: from thence to 45 degrees whitish: about the 30 they begin to wax yellow▪ and then some what inclining to green: all which proceeds out of the variety of heat and cold: For the Blackness of the Africans about the Tropickes, we can ascribe to no other c●rtaine ●ause, then external heat, and internal cold, his necessary concomitant: near to which approacheth the yellow and green colour of the people not far of; Whereof the former discovers Choler and Adustion: the other melancholy▪ And how soever the brownnesse of the people dwelling very near th● Pole may come by reason of external cold, which by excess, rather dries up their moisture, then strengthens the internal heat: Yet the Red colour of the Inhabitants about 60 degrees is a firm argument of heat: and the white ●ue of the middle people, an apparent mark of a middle tempe●. No less may be collected from the eyes and hairs of these three Nations. The eyes of the Scythians are generally tending to a grey colour; The remote have them of a blew-whitish shining colour; as the Cymbrians and Danes according to Plutarch▪ The britains, ●ermans, and Normans come near unto this colour, but have them not altogether so grey and shining but more obscure. But the Southern man hath ●he colour of his eyes much inclining to black. Now if we will belee●● aristotle in his Problems, the grey colour of the eyes is a very great argument of heat; But the blackish colour ●rgues the want of heat; Those which dwell in the middle Regions, have for the most part their eyes of a darke-blew▪ which colour is apparent in the eyes of Goats, which as Pliny writes are never purblind or dim of sight. Many special arguments besides those before mentioned, are produced to show ●he Northern man to surpass in moisture, as the other in drought: The first may be taken from their voice, which in the Scythian, or Northern man is tending to hoarseness; but in the Africans very sharp and shrill, as in the Ethiopians, & Carthaginians, and the most southerly Spaniards. That this difference doth arise from the moisture of the one, and the want of it in the other may as easily be persuaded; because we observe women which are moister than men, to have sharp & shriller voices: Also that too much moisture in wood or mettle makes the sound of it very hoarse and harsh; as we see in lead, whereas other metals give a shriller sound: Another reason is drawn from their extraordinary sweeting; for it is observed, that Northern men travailing towards the So●th, or warring in hotter Countries, are like to faint and perish through extraordinary sweeting, as Plutarch in the life of Marius, records of the moist bodies of the Cimbrians. Thirdly, it might seem wonderful which Tacitus relates of the Germane nation, that they love sloth and yet ●ate rest; because (as in Children) the natural heat provokes them to Action, but the moisture procures Softness: whence they must either fight or sleep▪ Hence the Italians and Spaniards make account, if they can suffer or withstand the f●rst or secon● assault of the French or Germans▪ easily to vanquish them; because as Mari●● and Caesar observed of the French, tha● in the first assault they showed themselves more than Men, in the second less than Women. A fourth reason not inferior to the rest may be drawn from the so●t bodies, of the Germ●ns and Scythians, not any way patient of labour, hunger, and thirst▪ although very s●rong and able to give a sudden encounter or venture on a warlike exploit: The contrary in all shall we find in the Southern man; out of which we may we●l collect, that he enjoys a contrary tempe●: Besides all which we have said concerning this assertion more shall appear hereafter by these subsequent Theorems. 2 The extreme Inhabitants towards the Poles are more naturally inclined to Mechanical works and Martial endeavours: the Extreme towards the Equatour to works of Religion and Contemplation: the middle to laws and civility. There are found three kinds of discipline, which usually invade and occupy the mind and faculties of man: The first are Mechanical and external operations, the which are projected in the Intellectual part, yet receive thei● perfection from the hands and external organs; Such as are Artillery, making of Ordinance; casting of metals, and Chemical inventions; Printing and the like Arts. The second is Contemplation, separate & removed from external operation. The third as the mean betwixt both, is Civil and Moral discipline, whose act and perfection consists, in the making of Laws, establishing and governing of States, prescribing and maintaining of Divine worship, with other matters of the like nature. These gifts it plea●ed God so to distribute to mankind, that the former should be most appropriate to the Northern man; the second to the Southern, the third to the inhabitants of the middle region: in such wise as the one should need, and not envy the others perfection. All which we sh●ll demonstrate first out of the causes and ground; Secondly▪ out of the effects. The causes we have showed in the former Theorem, wherein we have ascribed to the Northern man abundance of heat and moisture in respect of the other; which are the chiefest aids of the imagination, on which mechanical faculties depend; also their plenty of blood and humours distempering their minds: they are, by this means less given to contemplation. The Southern men having cold and dry brains▪ are of greatest understanding in Contemplative matters, being (as it were) by reason of melancholy abstract from external operation. The middle temper of the brain and humours must needs be the mother o● a middle discipline, which is found to be that which concerns Manners, Laws, and Religion. Here some have gone about to reduce these three kinds of people to three planets answerable to these 3 dispositions. Over ●he Southern people they set Saturn: the Northern they commit to the government of Mars; the middle inhabitants to jupiter. The power of Saturn according to the Chaldeans consists in Contemplation; of jupiter in practical action; of Mars in Artificial operation. Which 3 properties may be well gathered out of the Hebrew tongue, nature's best interpreter; for Saturn they call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which is as much to say as quiet; because nothing better befits the nature of contemplation then retired quietness: jupiter they call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which is as much to say as Just: Which the Grecians having received from these Hebrews, they feigned jupiter to be the God of justice.. Mars they called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which signifieth strong or puissant, for which cause the Chaldeans and the Greclans▪ would have Mars the God of war. To Saturn they ascribe cold, to Mars heat, to jupiter a temperature betwixt both. To the first, they impute the invention of sciences and such as concerns Contemplation; To the second practical prudence; To the third Arts and Workmanship. Whereof the first depends from the Understanding, the second from practical discourse, the last from the operation of the fantasy. But to come nearer the matter and descend to particulars: we will first begin with the Northern man whom we shall find to be the father of most mechanical Inventions as of Guns, Printing, the art of Liquefaction, Chimistrie with infinite other excellent Arts. Hence it comes to pass that the Italians and Spaniards, are used to send over for Britain's and Germans, as for those which are endowed with a heavenly gift in the Invention of vei●es of Metals under the Earth, as also for the opening and well ordering of su●h Mines: Let any man cast his eyes on England, the Neither-lands, Germany, he shall find the Inhabitants generally, either as the Scholars and darlings of Mars wielding their swords, or as pioneers levelling of mountains, or as Ingmers contriving the course of waters, or hunting in the woods, or ploughing in the field, or looking to their flocks on the mountains, or working in their shops, or at least set upon some external work or other: that their wits▪ (as Bodin merrily speaks) might seem to be in their hands. From whence come for the most part ou● several sorts of stuffs▪ our choice works in wood, mettle, ivory, our variety of instruments, from the Italian or Spaniard? No truly: they can rather admire then imitate; and better set us the materials then invent the workmanship, like those distressed Israelites which were enforced to run unto the Philistines to have their swords sharpened. As we ascribe to those nations of the North this perfection in operative and external faculties; So cannot we deny the Southern man his due prerogative▪ which is Religion & Contemplation. For these nations being above all other affected with melancholy, willingly withdr●w themselves from common society into Deserts, and remote receptacles, more accommodated to abstracted meditation: For contemplation (being of the Hebrews termed a precious death) hath a special force to sharpen the wits of men, and by separation, (as it were) from the dregges of the vulgar, not only opens unto him the secrets of nature, but giue● him wings to ●lie up to heaven in sacred meditation. Whence it cannot seem strange that from these parts at first proceeded the Prophets, Philosophers, Mathematicians of great estimation▪ Al●o that almost all Religions of any great moment, owe their first original to those parts: we need rove no farther than the Hebrews, Chaldaeans, Egyptians, Grecians, whom we shall find the first founders of Divine and Humane sciences. Which historical observation dissents not any whit from the judgement of the Naturalists: Because (as Huar●●s observes) the true ●oment of the best understanding, consists in the cold and dry brain incident to melancholy. And Aristo●le observes, that beast's themselues are so much the more adjudged to approach the prudency of man, by how much they partake the quality of cold. An instance of which may be given in the Elephant, whose blood (according to Plinys Testimony) is coldest of all other Creatures. To this I might add for an argument. of the religious disposition of the Southern man, 〈…〉 Af●r writes concerning the vast number of Temples in ●ome places of Africa, as about Fez & Morocco, their strict obs●ruation of holy rites, their rigid Ecclesiastical censure, wit● such like. What is spoken by Aluarez of the hill A●iar● in the midst of Africa, of their strange Library. Churches, Palaces, with other matters of this purpose, would serve well to my purpose, had ● the ingenuity to bele●ue the I●s●●te. But against this may be objected perchance that the Christian Religion which is the truest and only Religion hath no great footing as yet amongst tho●e Southern Nations. Secondly, that their Churches have no perfect platform of Ecclesiastical▪ government, as we find in other Churches towards the Northern tract. To the first I answer; that we here speak of the Inclination of men to Religious exercises, so far forth as it depends on their natural disposition; not respecting this or that Religion: for to be informed in the true Religion and reject all other, depends not any way on the natural Inclination of men, but on the immediate gift of the Almighty God, which is pleased oftentimes to make elec●●on of one Nation before the other, to make the one (according to the Apostle) a vessel of honour, the other of dishonour. To the second I likewise answer, that in Religion two things are to be considered: First the Religious and deuou● Inclination of man to embrace divine contemplation: Secondly, the well ordering and governing of Religious action's, according to Laws and Statutes pertaining to the external regiment of the Church The fo●mer only being granted to ●he Southern man, we may ascribe the perfection of the other to the people of the middle Region, whom we have pronounced to be most happy in the managing of ●iuill affairs and Politic government▪ Now to prove this people to be b●st endowed with this faculty, many reasons may be alleged; because according to the testimony of most approved writers, we have found Laws, Manners▪ Statutes, & the best manner of governing Commonwealths to have proceeded from these Nations. For Histories will show us, that the greatest and b●st empires of the world have flourished in Asia, Greece, Asy●ia, Italy, France, Germany, which lie betwixt the Equ●tour & the P●le, from the 40 to the 50 degrees: And that out of these have always proceeded the best commanders, the most prudent Statesmen and Lawgivers', the wisest Lawyers, the most eloquent Orators, the wariest Merchants. Whereas neither Africa in the South nor Scythia in the North▪ could ever boast of many Lawgivers' or Statesmen worthy note; whence Galen complains that Scythia never brought forth any Philosopher besides Anacharsis of any great credit. 3 The People of the Extreme Region towards the Poles in Martial prowess have commonly proved stronger than those near the Equatour: but the middle people more provident then either in the establishment and preservation of Commonwealths. The grounds of this Proposition we have laid before: for the former clause, that the people of the North should prove more puissant than these of the South, may well be concluded out of their natural strength of body, and their courage of the mind: whereof the latter makes them ●eady to attempt, the other to execute most chivalrous designs. Neither want there most true and pregnant examples in history to second this principle: for every man that is indifferently seen in history may observe with wonder how the strong Nations of the Scythians have invaded the South, winning from them many Trophies and victories: whereas we seldom find any expedition set on from the South to the North (except to the loss or ruin of the South▪) worth any memorable relation. To this many would have these threatening prophecies of jeremy, Ezechiel, and Esay to allude, which foretold, that from the North should issue wars, troops of horsemen, and the Ruins of Kingdoms: This we shall observe to be true not only in the general, but almost in all particular States, which we shall find propagated from the North to the South. The Assyrians at first overcame the Chald●●●s; the Medes the Assyrians; the Persians the Medes, the greeks the Persians, the Parthians the Greeks, the Romans the Carthaginians, the Goths the Romans, the Turks the Arabians, the Tartars the Turks: and howsoever the Romans by their prowess won somewhat towards the North, yet found they by experience that beyond Danubius no great matter was to be expected; for as much as these Nations could not be easily vanquished, and being overcome would not away with subjection: which (as some say) was the cause that Traian having built a great Bridge of stone over the Danow, was persuaded to break it down. Tacitus expressly confesseth, that the Germans were too hard for the Romans, and could not have been overcome by them, but by the advantage of the weapons and manner of fight; wherein the Romans having long continued a civil Nation, had practised themselves▪ which he secondeth by many instances, drawn from several conflicts betwixt the Germans and the Romans, which he might well speak; for as much as himself reports 210 years were spent in the conquest of Germany, and no Nation so much troubled them as this; which notwithstanding when all was past, was thought to be triumphed over rather then conquered. It were an infinite task to write all which Tacitus relates of the valour and warlike disposition of the Germans, being a Nation loving rest, and hating Idleness, punishing cowardice with Death, and reputing it an inexplable shame for a subject to see his Prince slain in Battle, and return alive without him. As much or more he reports from julius Agricola, than Proconsul of Brittany, of our ancient British Nation whose factions and dissensions amongst themselves gave occasion to the Roman victory, and not the Roman valour wherein he confessed them no way to stand inferior. To strengthen this assertion, History will afford an evidence almost in every corner of the world, wherein we shall find the North by sundry conquests to have prevailed against the South▪ In the East parts we find that Ci●gis Can a Northern Tartar conquered the Indians: That the Tartarians also conquered the Armenians; and yet the Armenians had such advantage against the Southern people, that the Mamalukes esteemed a strong Nation in Egypt, were first chosen out of Armenia. Also▪ we find that the people of Ca●ha● subdued the Chinois and the Indians. We read also that Mahomet a Saracen Sultan of Persia, hired certain Northern Scythians, with whose strength he overthrew the Caliph of Babylon, who dwelled afterwards in Turcomania. Neither wants America many examples in this kind, and no question but many others have been drowned in oblivion for want of History. We find that the people of the North in this Continent prevailed against the South, and conquered Mexico, which was afterward subdued again by Cortese; and by later discovery of our English nation we are given to understand that the people about Terra de Laboradore are a fierce warlike people, in so much as rather then they would yield themselves to be taken captive by our men, they have been seen to make away themselves. To go no further than our own country, who knows not how many famous overthrows have in later Ages▪ been given to the Spaniards and the French; especially to the later, who have feared the utter undoing of their State: yet neither of these two great Kingdoms could ever attempt any thing against the English▪ worthy Chronicle or observation: If any man object the actions of King William the Conqueror, we can answer many ways: first that he won the sovereignty not merely by the sword, but by Agreement and composition, challenging a promise from King Edward the predecessor, and being fortified with a strong faction of the nobility of the Realm: and moreover the malice of the Subjects against Harald being an usurping Tyrant, gave great spurs to his victory: wherefore we cannot judge this a true Conquest: yet hath England been conquered of the Danes a more Northern people, and suffered many inconveniences of the Scots, but yet were never able to conquer them utterly, or bring them under subjection; although fewer in number, and near their Confines. Now for the second clause▪ that the people of the Middle Region are more provident in preservation of Commonwealths is warranted out of the same grounds: for to this two things are necessary, to wit, Arms and Counsel: whence they used to paint Pallas armed, to signify that not only strength, but Counsel was necessary for the establishment of Kingdoms. The Southern people (as we have showed) being altogether addicted to contemplation, have been unable either to defend themselves, or repel an enemy. On the other side the people of the North having strength sufficient to assault, for want of prudence and counsel could never long enjoy their Conquests, so that we shall seldom read of any great Empire established of either. But the middle people having strength to subdue the Southern, and policy enough to overcome the strength of the North, have established many great and famous Empires. Here for an ample example we may produce the State of the Roman Empire, which borrowed Laws and discipline from the Grecians, nautical Sciences from the Sicilians and Punicks, military discipline from their daily exercise: and therefore was it no great wonder, that in state and glory they surmounted all other Nations. On the other side we find many famous victories achieved by the Northern people, yet could they never leave behind them any large Empire, but as easily lost as won their Kingdoms. Thus fared it with the Goths, the Huns, the Heruli, and the Vandals, which with so many strong Armies invaded Europe, and Asia, who nevertheless for want of Wisdom and foresight, could not hold what they got, or settle therein any state of long continuance. 4 The extreme Regions in manners, actions, and customs, are clean opposite, the one to the other. The middle partake of mixture of both. That the manners of men depend on the natural complexion and temper, is warranted as well by experience as approved testimony of our best Philosophers. For howsoever gr●ce o● education may make a change; yet this is extraordinary, and these raines once loosed men easily return to their former disposition: How much the Northern man differs from the Southern in natural constitution, we have formerly ●aught; out of which we cannot but conclude, a great disparity in manners and customs▪ Yet ●o show a mo●e special and evident demonstration, we will make a particular enumeration of such affections as are incident to the Northern & Southern man, & out of the comparison make ou● judgement▪ First therefore, it is manifest out of ancient and modern observation, that the Northern man hath been ●axed of too much levity and inconstancy: The Southern man chose of too much perverse stubborness, as well in opinion as affection. The reason of both we have before specified, to be their natural complexion: which in the former is inclined to sanguine, in the later to Choler Adust, and melancholy: whereof the one is the more subject to change or impression, than the other. Galen deriving all virtues from the humours of the body, makes Choler the mother of prudence, melancholy of constancy, blood of mirth, phlegm of mansuetude: Out of the mixture of which humours, infinite variety ariseth. And because these humours are seldom equally, or proportionally combined, and tempered together; they become the sources of infinite vices: Which Inequality of temperament is rather found in the extreme regions: And therefore no marvel if they are observed, to have been subject to greater vices than those of the middle region: For the mutability and levity of the Northern Nations, we can have no greater argument than the change of religion: It is written of the Ostrogothes and Visigothes, that being expulsed by King Attila, they besought Valens that he would grant them a dwelling place: conditionally promising, that they would submit themselves, as well to the laws of the Empire, as to the Christian Religion. Which having obtained, they fled from their promise and perfidiously burnt the Emperor alive. The Goths, as soon as they came into Italy, embraced the Christian Religion, but soon ran into Arianisme: The people of Gr●enland according to M●●sters relation, being of a wavering disposition, soon liked the Christian Religion, but soon relapsed to Idolatry. The Turks being a kind of Scythians, as soon as they came into Asia, without any great constraint, embraced Mah●metanisme. The Tartars likewise, without any enforcement yielded first to Christianity, and soon fell back to the Arabian rites. The Normans coming into France although very rude and barbarous, rejecting Gentilism, Paganism, subscribed to the Christians. As soon or sooner the Islanders fell from Idolatry to the true Religion. The Bohemians and Saxons first cast off the Roman yoke; which were seconded by all Saxonic, the Cities of the Baltic sea, Denmark, Norway, Suedia, Helvetia, and Britanny. The revolt of these Nations from the Roman subjection, I cannot term levity or inconstancy in their chief leaders and teachers: Being such as upon long deliberation and mature advice attempted that, which they knew to be most consonant to truth and reason: to whom without doubt God Almighty's hand was not wanting. But for the rude and vulgar people to be so soon won, and turned from one opinion to aonther, without longer deliberation, was argument of a mutable disposition: Sith there can be no greater token of Inconstancy then to make an absolute change of Religion in all points in so short a space; whereas the Religions being so nearly affined, the one to the other, no man at first sight, out of reason and discourse would embrace or reject all grounds together, but by degrees: No less argument of levity in those Northern people, is the distraction and division of them into so many sorts and factions of Religion, as we find now in Germany, Belgia, Polonia, and elsewhere, which no doubt at first proceeded from one or few beginnings. But on the contrary side, if we look on the Africans and Southern people, we shall find them as obstinate and perverse in standing to their own propositions, as ready to tax the Northern people of levity and Inconstancy. For such hath been the settled constancy of these nations, as well Africans as asiatics; that no means could be invented to draw them from their opinion, but either heavenly miracles or force of arms. Which constancy hath been apparent, no● only in men but also in women and children: which made Antiochus even mad when he by all cruelty tortured the seven Sons (as we find in the bo●ke of the Maccabees) yet was as far from turning them from their Ceremony of forbearing the eating of Swine's flesh, that both the mother invited them, and the Children willingly submitted themselves to Martyrdom. Against this constancy Mahomet, when neither by feigned miracles no● persuasion, he saw he could prevail, betook himself to Arms, for the establishment of his discipline which otherwise he could no ways have brought to p●sse. And it is strange to see the jews at this day, which being a people dispersed over the face of the whole Earth, groaning under the servile yoke of subjection, having no King, or supreme governor of their own, have so obstinately retained their religion, for these three thousand years. What shall I speak of the mahometans in Africa and Asia; of the Indians, the Chinois and other Southern people, which having once settled a platform of Religious discipline, are impregnable against all persuasion, mainly opposing themselves against the grounds of our Religion, having not so much as the principles of nature to support their own. To let pass the ordinary commerce and traffic, with Christian nations, which in so evident a case, might probably beget some fruits; the admired Industry of the Jesuits, erecting their Colleges amongst them, might seem to promise greater matters. But as I have credibly been enforced, by such as have travailed, as well into Turkey as Africk● and India, the event of their labours hath come so far short of expectation, that they have by their conference rather engendered a worse opinion of Christianity. Which though some may impute probably to their indirect means and superstitious rites, imposing on the conscience, what God never commanded, but rather forbade: Yet who so shall observe the cunning and subtlety of these Sophisters will rather ascribe it to the perverse and stubborn disposition of the people, unapt to receive any new impression: For else, who could imagine they could be so powerful in perverting and infecting others with their Roman superstition in these parts, having their consciences better informed out of God's Word, and their understandings ordinarily better taught, in principles, and every way more strongly fenced against temptation. As these Southern nations always boasted of their own Constancy as a prime virtue, so ceased they not to upbraid the Northern man with inconstant levity. This the Italians object to the French and Germans (as we find in Tacitus.) The greeks heretofore to the Italians, the Cretians to the Grecians, the Hebrews and Egyptians to the greeks and Cretians; On the other side the other ha●e so much complained of their perverse and settled superstitions. For to judge indifferently of either, they are both vices declining from that golden mediocrity, which we call Constancy. For the defect is levity, the excess Pertinacy: and as it is very culpable in any man to turn with every wind; so it is as great an indiscretion, to be so wedded to our own opinions or affections as to turn on no occasion: Because all things under the sun are subject to change and alteration: And therefore it is the part of a wise man to accommodate himself unto the object, and not in a fond dream to wrest all the world to his own fancy. For a wise Seaman will rather obey the storm then seek his ruin, and when he cannot recover the port, will turn to any other point for his own preservation. I speak here only of matters of state and policy, and not of religious actions, otherwise then concern the external rites and Ecclesiastical discipline, the most part of which, by wise men have been esteemed no other, than matters indifferent which may admit of change & alteration. But here some one might object that the French of all Nations, have been generally taxed of lightness and inconstancy, being notwithstanding in the middle region, more North than the Africans, yet more South than the Germans or Scythians; I cannot altogether excuse them of this national blemish, yet with their countryman Bodin, I hold it more fitly termed temerity then levity, being a people very quick and agile, as well in speech, as action in so much as the executions of matters with them many times are past, ●re the Spaniard can enter into consolation: for as the Spanish counsel is over slow, and full of delays, so is the French too heady and hasty: and as delay to the one, so rashness to the other hath proved dangerous. The mediocrity betwixt both being a promptitude or alacrity in effecting matters▪ is to be esteemed as a virtue, which we find in the Italians, whose action is quick enough, yet commonly grounded on sufficient deliberation; yet if we compare the two extremes, we shall find the Spanish delays to have overcome the French hastiness, being far less subject to error, than the other. Another difference betwixt the Northern and Southern man is discovered in the Affection of Anger and Revenge. The Northern man though quickly moved to anger, and very furious, provokes his enemy to the open field, and after a little time is quickly pacified, forgetting the injury. The Southern man contrariwise is not so quickly incaged, but being once provoked, pursueth his revenge by secret stratagems, rather than open fury, and will never or very hardly be drawn to reconciliation: which base and brutish disposition ariseth not so much out of their evil education (as some have imagined) as out of melancholy ill tempered. A proof whereof we have in most men amongst us, of a melancholy disposition, which according to our common proverb, threaten danger and hatred implacable: of this disposition were Aiax and M. Coriolanus, whereof the former for want of revenge, in a distracted fury fell on the herds of cattle: the other would by no means be reconciled to his Countrymen, till he saw all their Cities in flames. Of the cruelty of the Africans many histories have given testimonies, especially Leo Afer, speaking of the Carthaginian dissension: and with later Writers most memorable is the story of miserable muleasses deposed of his Crown, his eyes burnt out, and his face disfigured, tendering his complaint to the Emperor Charles. This cruelty hath no less been observed in the most Southern Ameri●ans, with whom it is ● custom to ●athe their children in the blood of their slaughtered enemies, o drink their blood, and banquet with their carcases: And if we examine the original of tortures and severe laws, we shall find them originally derived from the Southern people, which the Northern Man hath seldom used but unwillingly in matters of horrible treason. And not without good reason have our Laws taken other courses for the conviction of malefactors in cases of felony and murder, than the extortion of confession by extreme tortures, a thing common with the Italian; because (as some of our Statists have observed) our Nation is by nature more apt to confession without torture, and so fearful of torment, that they will more willingly be brought to the block or gallows, than the rack: whereas the Southern people by their melancholy temper more fearful of death, and obstinate in their opinion, will yield rather to the greatest torture than confession. Thirdly we shall find as great a disparity betwixt the Northern and Southern man in the sluttish carelessness of the one, and the cleanly neatness of the other. Tacitus reports of the old Germans, that they lived at home in their houses in sordid manner, almost naked, and that they used the same rooms as receptacles as well of their beasts as of themselves: which custom we shall not find much changed amongst some, if we read Lipsius speaking of the Westphalians, or have so much patience elsewhere to make experiment. It is also reported that the Scythians whensoever they found themselves oppressed on the way, or in the wars by hunger or thirst, were wont to open a vein under their horses ears, and to suck out their blood, and to banquet with the flesh, as we read of Tamerlanes Army on the like occasion: but the Southern people are of a neat and cleanly disposition, abhorring all sordid and uncleanly action, using often bathe & washings, not only in sacred and Ecclesiastical matters, but also in private. And therefore no wonder if (as Xenophon among the Ancients reports) that amongst the Persians it were accounted a very unmannerly thing to spit; or that amongst the Abyssines (as Aluarez writes) it should be deemed a most heinous and flagitious crime, to drop any filth or spittle in any of their temples. An argument of this may be their extraordinary affection of neat & dainty delicates, which (as Athen●us relates) is most noted in the Asiatickes and Egyptians, by which means M. Anthony a luxurious spendthrift, finding himself by Cleopatra surmounted, he smiled at his own ambition in that kind, and laughed at the Romans his own Nation as ignorant and barbarous. Of the Persian Theophrastus writes, that by a certain Law certain great rewards were promised to such men as had invented any new kinds of Delicates or pleasures, which is a great argument of the liquorous affection of this Nation. A fourth difference may be discovered in the conversation of the Northern and Southern Man. For the Scythian and Northern man is naturally addicted to company and society, as may appear by the communion of many men in one place in the fields, who amongst the ancients were termed Nomades, and are now called Hordes▪ in which manner the Tartars live at this day▪ also it is well known how much the Germans, Britons, Danes are addicted to company, in so much as they can hardly live long without companions. But the Southern man being (as we have proved) of a melancholy disposition, chooseth rather to live solitary, and to lurk in woods and deserts, then amongst people: near to which nature come the Italians and Spaniards, who affect rather a retired Gravity, than an open Society▪ and converse but at a distance, rather for formality the friendship▪ 5ly, no less disparity in the disposition of these nations shall we find aswel in the Languages they ordinarily use, as the kinds of music which they affects for the former we may generally observe in the Northern Languages a rough collision of consonants and aspirations, as in the Germane and Bohemian Tongues. Neither is this observed only in their native Tongues, but also in their use of the Latin Tongue, in pronunciation of which they cannot but mix rough aspirations; as I have observed oftentimes in the Northern Germans▪ who commonly pronounce firum for virum; fulgus for vulgus, Pipi for bibi, with divers other of the like nature: as unable they are on the other side to give any soft aspiration his due sound, but commonly leave it out altogether, or pronounce either the vocales media for vocales tenues, and aspiratae for mediae, which proceeds altogether from the immoderate strength of hea● and force of the spirits: But the Southern people chose wanting that degree of heat, in their pronunciation abstain from these hard aspirations and collision of many consonant together, without vowels to mollify the harshness▪ as we find, in the Greek, Latin, Spanish, and I●alian tongues, which ly● nearer to the South. Also the Turkish, Arabian, and Persian tongues are by such as are experienced in them, said to be sweet and elegant. Also it is to be noted, that as often as the Colonies of the North have invaded the South, although retaining the same foot steps and original, have notwithstanding much altered their pronunciation not only through the mixture and impression of other languages, but also through the nature of the place, as we find the Goatish tongue of the Spaniards to be changed to a smother and sweeter pronunciation, then that which is retained in Scythia. I speak not of the Latin mixture, out of the mere Goatish words, which we shall perceive mollified with more vowels, and set to a sweeter termination. The like may be observed in the Hebrew tongue, which (as josephus Abudachnon, sometimes, a Reader in this University observed) to the ear sounded far sweeter in the Arabian, Turkish, and Persian dialects then its own original; not that it is in them more perfect (which were impiety to believe) but because men in pronouncing of a language preferring pleasure before significancy, have mollified it, with soft vowels and aspirations, rather to serve the ear then understanding. No less affectation shall we find of divers sorts of music, ●orting with divers dispositions. The Northern man's humour consortes best with the Phrygian measure, a loud and stirring harmony. The Southern man having his spirits more mollified affects the Lydian: The people of the middle region, are most of all delighted with the Doric, a music heretofore used in sacred exercises. They who know these measures exactly, and which is agreeable to this or that man's fancy, will give a probable guess unto his natural disposition. To run over all the differences in manners and customs of the Northern and Southern nations were a matter infinite; wherefore it shall suffice to wrap up all in general recapitulation. If we compare the Northern man with the Southern, we shall find the one white and red, the other bl●cke or tawny; the one big-boned, the other small and dwarfish; the one strong▪ but eas●e to be deceived; the other weak, but witty and circumspect. The one given much to wine▪ the other exceeding sober▪ the one neglecting both himself and others, the other careful and ceremonious: The one rustically arrogant, the other high minded; the one prodigal, the other parsimonious▪ The one temperate, the other lecherous; the one a sloven; the other neat and hand some; the one plain and simple, the other crafty; the one a Soldier, the other a Priest, the one a Workman, the other a Philosopher; the one standing on the strength of his ●ands; the other of his wit. Out of the mixture of these extremes, it is no difficult matter to draw the disposition of the middle Nations. For finding the two extreme nations of the North and the South to be not only divers, but for the most part opposite one to the other, in disposition and manners; it were very rational to judge the middle to have a mixture of both, which, observation we will prove▪ For if we compare the middle region with either) the extremes, we shall find no such apparent diversity▪ as betwixt the extremes themselves▪ Here Monsieur B●di● dreams of a golden mediocrity to magnify his own Country, which he finds in his middle region. For sithence both these extremes challenge an extremity of disposition, he imagine● this middle tract only reserved for virtue and temperance. But if he justly weigh all in the balance of impartial judgement, he shall find no such advantage. For first out of his own grounds, to which we have hitherto assented, he ascribes to the extreme nations an eminency both of vice and virtue: Then cannot the middle challenge these qualities otherwise then remitted, and of less force. If therefore he would have their inclination to vice more moderated, and corrected; he must also confess their disposition to virtuous actions to be of less validity. Again these middle nations are to be accounted either directly situate betwixt both the extremes, or more inclining to the one than the other▪ For these directly in the middle, we must imagine them to partake of both dispositions, as well to vice as to virtue, borrowing from either extreme as well good as bad: Here therefore can be found no disadvantage: For if they will boast of the virtues of either, they must likewise be ashamed of either vices: If they plead a moderation of the former, they must lose so much reputation in the later. For these which more nearly incline to the one than the other, it will be apparent that as they approach the one in one quality, so they are farther off in another: as if they approach nearer in contemplative wit to the Southern people, so will they come so far short of the Northerns' valour. For by how much more they come near the virtue of the one, so much come they short of the others Affections. The like may be judged of their Imperfections; so weighing reason with reason we shall find no such inequality and disproportion to magnify the one, or upbraid the other: for that Almighty Creator of all things is wont to distribute his blessings in proportion: and Nature his sovereign handmaid triumphs in nothing more than variety. Thus have we spoken as far as history and observation can justify, of the laws, customs, and manners of the Extreme and middle Nations, in which we have chiefly tied our discourse to the Northern and Southern people in this Hemisphere, having few histories to lead us to the consideration of the other opposite on the Southern Hemisphere: yet the causes being like, we may out of the former be able to give a judgement of the later. 8 Hitherto have we treated of the people of the Northern and Southern Hemispheres, with the special subdivision of each into Extreme or middle: It now remains that we speak of the division of Inhabitants according to the Longitude. 9 According to the Longitude, Inhabitants are either in the Eastern Hemisphere, or Western. Those I term of the Eastern which live betwixt the Canaries and the Molucco Lands on this side: The Western those which dwell betwixt those two on the other. These two Hemispheres of the Earth have by some been called the Old and New-world; because the former containing Europe, Asia, and Africa, hath been known to the ancients as the portions of Noah's three Sons, Shem, Ham, and japhet, whereof (as the Scriptures testify) Shem had Asia, japhet Europa, and Ham Africa. The other containing America the South-continent, and some other Lands, have been since discovered. Of the comparison of the Inhabitants of these two Hemispheres we will insert this Theorem. 1 The people of the Eastern Hemisphere in Science, Religion, Civility, Magnificence, and almost every thing else, are far superior to the Inhabitants of the Western. For demonstration of this point we need not spend much time; first, it is manifest that this Hemisphere was peopled a long time before the other, which is a probable argument of their culture and civility: because all these matters have commonly their growth & perfection with Time, the mother of all perfection. That this part was peopled a long time before the other, is most credible: for it is plain out of the Holy Scriptures, that the first offspring of mankind was in Asia; whence it could not disperse itself into America and other parts of the Earth, till such time as their populous growth had required larger bounds. The passage from Asia into America without doubt had been performed either by sea or land. By Sea it was improbable they should adventure in that infancy of the World, when the Art of Navigation was in her swathing bands, and neither the Chart or Compass as yet invented. If by land they made their passage, it was doubtless through the North of Asia, supposing America with Asia to be one Continent. But this people coming out of a pleasant and temperate Country, would without question first attempt the places of the like quality, as most pleasing their eye, and fitting their disposition, before they would enforce their passage to the Icy and frozen Climates of the North, which can only be beholding to necessity for habitation. Hence without doubt it came to pass, that those Nations wand'ring far from their first fountain, and leaving no sufficient monument to instruct their posterity in their first original, came short of the other, as well in revealed as acquired knowledge in revealed knowledge, either sought in Holy Scriptures, or Traditions, they could not but come short; as being most distant from the first head and fountain where it was to be found in greatest perfection. In Acquired knowledge gotten by industry and experience they could not come so far as the other; because all such knowledge having its beginning from observation, and its growth with age, could not be brought to that perfection amongst them, who came more lately to be a people, and scarce ever endowed with any settled government: but whatsoever the causes may be thought of this diversity betwixt the people of the Western and Eastern Hemisphere, certain I am that the effect itself is most apparent. Of the happy endowments of Europe, Asia, and a good part of Africa, both in Arts liberal and mechanical, state, policy, magnificence, and Religion, we have often spoken, and need make no repetition. To this if we compare America, being (as it were) the only portion of this Hemisphere, we shall amongst them find few or no Arts either invented or taught, the use of letters scarce ever known; state and magnificence little regarded, and the Light of Christian Religion scarce ever seen, or at least through the dim clouds of Roman superstition. He that would know more in this matter, let him read Peter Martyr, Cortesius, Acosta, and others, of the natural disposition of the people of America. 10 The Inhabitants of such Hemispheres are again subdivided into the Eastern and Western: the Western in the Eastern Hemisphere, are they who live nearer the Canaries: the Eastern are such as are situate towards the Moluccoes: to which those other in the Western Hemispeare are correspondent. 1 The Western people have been observed to be more happy and able in martial discipline: the Eastern in witty contemplation, and speculative Sciences. There is no small affinity (as we have before touched) betwixt the West and the North, as betwixt the East and the South; as well in the temperament of the Air, as the disposition of the Inhabitants: which cognation will appear more fully by the proof and demonstration of this Theorem. Of the strength and valour of the Western people▪ many records give evidence; we read of innumerable Colonies of the Celtes a people situate on the West of France, sent into Italy, Grece, & Asia. But the Italians durst never invade France, till such time as their Empire was at the height under Caesar, taking also advantage of the homebred enmities of the Inhabitants among themselves, whence Tully the Orator took occasion to praise Caesar for subduing those Nations, and reducing them to the Romans obedience, whose strength the Roman Empire could hardly sustain. The Italians have oftentimes molested the Grecians, yet from them suffered little or small inconvenience▪ so the Grecians having with their Arms cut out a large way through Asia, scarce ever dared to come into Italy but once under the conduct of Pyrrhus▪ who being almost defeated of his Army, was enforced to save himself by ●light. In like sort Xerxes who brought men enough into Greece to dry up the Rivers, was notwithstanding defeated by a few Grecians to his great dishonour. Wherefore Cato had good reason to object to Muraena, and Caesar to Pompey, that their wars waged against the people of Asia in respect of others were (as it were) rather against Women then Men. This without doubt gave Alexander his greatest happiness and victory, that he turned his Arms against the Eastern people, which were either altogether barbarous, wanting martial discipline, or all over delicate, not able to resist such hardness: whereas if he had opposed the Western people (by the censure of Livy) he had at least failed of those many Conquests, if not purchased ● fatal overthrow. The observation perhaps of which courageous valour in the Western people was the cause why the Turks heretofore were wont to choose their janissaries, and chief men of war out of the Europaeans, accounting them more strong and able than the asiatics, being of temper more soft and delicate. To this accords julian in his book against the Christians: the Celtes (saith he) are Bold & Adventurous: the Greeks and Romans both warlike and civil: the Egyptians more industrious and subtle, although weak and tender. The Syrians with great alacrity conform themselves to discipline: And a little after hath these words: What shall I declare (saith he) how coue●ous of liberty and impatient of servitude the Germans are how quiet and tractable the Syrians, Persians, Parthians, and all the Nations situate towards the East and South parts of the World. Tacitus reports, that the Baravians lying on the West of Germany of all the Germans are the strongest and most valiant: which Plutarch also confirms in the life of Marius, that the most warlike people of all France are these which are most Western. The like opinion had Caesar of the Western Nations: of all the people of Europe (saith he) the Western people of the Britons and Spaniards are the strongest. Now as the Western people justly challenge to themselves this prerogative of strength and valour, so must they yield to the Eastern, that of Religion and contemplation. To let pass the Indians, which a long time gone, were enriched with knowledge, if we believe ancient writers; who can deny the Hebrews, Chaldaeans, Syrians, Egyptians, Arabians, and others of the East their just trophies of learning and contemplation, which they have erected to after ages? From these fountains have the greeks and Latins derived those large streams, wherewith they have (as it were) watered all Europe. It is written, That there came wise men from the East to worship Christ; which must needs be understood of Chaldaea or the places near adjoining, where the Magis or Wisemen were had in great reputation. If any object the decay both of Learning and Religion at this day, in the eastern parts of the world; We answer that this in most parts is merely Accidental, caused by the hostile invasion of the usurping Turks, which profess themselves to be utter enemies to Learning and the true Religion. To which, we may add the ignorance of the Christian Religion in many places, which is the greatest ground of solid knowledge. For amongst all religions in the world, there is none which giveth more way to learning then the Christian: Whereas some others altogether forbid the study of such matters; yet is not this inclination so absurd in the Eastern people, but that everywhere some marks and footsteps will discover their disposition. For in the East shall we find no small number of Christian Churches and Monasteries, professing Christianity and other good learning. But to speak no more of the Christian Religion, which we hold rather by God's special grace, than nature: the superstitious devotion of these heathen nations to their own false religions, is a sufficient argument of their natural inclination to religious exercises. How obstinately perverse, Ceremonious, and superstitious the Indians are found in Idolatrous Religions, I have often wondered to hear some travailers report: Of the other Hemisphere comprehending America, I have as yet small evidence out of History, whereon to ground any certainty; all we can say shall be comprised in this Theorem. 2 The eastern part of the western Hemisphere was peopled before the western. This proposition seems probably warranted, as well by reason as authority; for first, supposing as an infallible ground, that the first offspring of all nations was in Asia, towards the East; it must needs follow, that to people America, there should be a passage thereunto out of Asia; because America was a long time not inhabited ere it was discovered to the Europaeans. This passage then, was either by Sea or Land: Were it by sea, the first part whereat they could arrive was the eastern side. If we suppose it to be by land (as is most likely in those ancient times) yet was it most probable it should be on the North-east side from the Pole, because it is found by observation that on the Northwest side it is divided from Asia by streites, then must they first touch on the Eastern part. To this we may add the experience of the Castilians and portugals (who first discovered this part) who affirm that the people dwelling on that side, have been observed to surpass the western by far in civility of manners, knowledge, and such endowments, which may be an argument of the antiquity of their plantation. CHAP. XV. 1. THe second diversity of disposition of inhabitants ariseth from the divers nature of the Soil: Here four distinctions of Nations are remarkable. 1 Of the Inhabitants of the Mountains and plaine-countreyes'. 2 Of marish and dry. 3. Of windy and quiet. 4. Of sea-borders and Iland-people. That men's dispositions are diversely varied according to the temper of the soil, every man's own experience may easily inform him; for to reserve particular instances to their proper places, it is most manifest that all the vital operations of the soul depends as well upon the corporeal and organical parts, as the spirits; which being diversely affected by the qualities of the Air, and Earth must needs vary and suffer a change. Plain and evident disparity is found: first betwixt two nations situate in the same Parallel or climate in respect of the heavens. Secondly, betwixt two men borne in several Countries living together for some time, in the same region. Thirdly, of one and the selfsame man living at divers times in diverse regions. Fourthly, of a man living in the same Country at divers seasons and times; all which being heretofore demonstrated will declare unto us the great Sympathy, and operation the Air and his divers qualities, hath with, and on our corporeal spirits and organs. But the temperament of the Air (as we have formerly showed) depends on the temperature of the soil: whence it must needs follow that the natural disposition of men should be varied somewhat in respect of the soil. This disposition of the soil being manifold, we have reduced only to three heads: leaving other curiosities to such, as have more leisure: What we judge in this, shall be declared in these Theorems. 1 Mountain people are for the most pa●t more stout, warlike and generous than those of plain Countries: yet less tractable to government. Of the warlike disposition of the mountanists and their strange Impatience to subjection, many Histories give testimony Geographers repor, that setting aside the people of the North (to whom for strength and valour we have given the palm,) the Inhabitants of the mountain Atlas are great and strong, out of whom the Kings of Numidia and Mauritania in time of war are wont to levy their forces. And it is worthy admiration to consider the mountain people of Arabia, who could never be drawn to yield to subjection, but being fortified not somuch by the benefit of the place (as some might happily imagine) but rather by natural strength and valour, have always lived in liberty. To whom (as is reported) the Turks give a yearly stipend to keep them off from invading the Territories of Palestine and Damascus. Of the Ma●sians the ancient inhabitants of the Apennine mountains in Italy, the Romans were wont so well to conceive, that it grew into a proverb: Sine Marsis triumphasse neminem. Gostane, when he went about to invade the kingdom of Succia, chose his legions of soldiers, out of the Dalecarly, who inhabit the Succian mountains. But amongst all, no nation hath purchased a greater opinion and reputation than the Heluetians, living amongst the Alps. These men are originally descended from the Succians, which for valour, have ●o far approved themselves, that they have not only kept themselves free from foreign jurisdiction, but have often delivered their neighbouring countries from slavery and oppression▪ Against the house Austria they have not once displayed their banners, and triumphed in their overthrow. A great part of Germany hath smarted under their valour; and such an honourable opinion have they won, that they are accounted (as it were) the Censors and moderators to decide controversies in matters of state and kingdoms. Cicero gives grrat commendations of strength to the Ligurgians inhabiting the mountains: It is well known how long and tedious wars the mountain Cilicians and Acr●cerauneans had with the Turks: how long with small damage they endured affront, and drove them back▪ Here we might add the examples of the Biscanes and Cantabrians in Spain, who under the conduct of Pelagius their King, withstood the Saracens, and preserved both their language and religion. The like aught to be spoken of the Welsh & Cornish people amongst us, as of the Scottish Highlander: all which living in mountainous countries have withstood the violence of foreigners, and for many years preserved their own liberty. And howsoever it may be objected that the advantage of the place gave them courage, yet can we not deny their disposition due commendation; having not only thus for a time protected their own rights, but made many hostile invasions on their enemies. Hence Bodin would make a certain Harmony betwixt the mountain people, and the Northern, esteeming the inhabitants of the Alps, the Pyraeneans, the Acroceraunij the inhabitants of Haemus, Carpathus, Olympus, Taurus, Stella, Caucasus, Imaeus, with divers others of the same nature, albeit situate in the temperate part, to be accounted northern people: as also farther towards the South, the inhabitants of A●las, of the Arabian mountains, of Pirus, and Seraleona, are (as it were) by him excepted from the Southern inhabitants, in regard of their high and mountainous situation; which recompenseth the other, and challengeth as much cold, as by the heavens it should seem to receive heat. This conceit of a Monsieur Bodin, I admit without any great contradiction, were he not over peremptory in overmuch censuring all mountainous people of blockishness and barbarism, against the opinion of Auerroes a great writer; who finding these people nearer heaven suspected in them a more heavenly nature. Neither want their many reasons, drawn from nature and experiment, to prove mountainous people, to be more pregnant in wit and gifts of understanding than others, inhabiting low and plain Countries. For howsoever wit and valour are many times divided, as we have showed in the northern and southern people, yet were they never so much at variance, but they would sometimes meet. First therefore what can speak more, for the witty temper of the mountain people, than their clear and subtle Air being far more purged and rarified, then that in low countries: For holding the vital spirits to be the chiefest instruments in the soul's operation, no man can deny but they sympathrize, especially with the air their chiefest foment. Every man may by experience find his intellectual operations more vigorous in a clear day, and on the contrary most dull and heavy when the air is any way affected with foggy vapours. What we find in ourselves in the same place at divers seasons, may we much more expect of places, diversely affected in constitution. A second reason for the proof of our assertion, may be drawn from the thin and spare diet, in respect of those others. Forpeople living on plains, have commonly all commodities in such plenty, that they are much subject to surfeiting and luxury, the greatest enemy and underminer of all intellectual operations. For a fat-belly commonly begets a gross head, and a lean brain: But want and scarcity the mother of frugality, invites the mountain dwellers to a more sparing and wholesome diet. Neither grows this convenience only out of the scarcity of viands, but also out of the nature of the diet. Birds, Fowls and Beasts, which are bred upon higher places, are esteemed of a more cleanly and wholesome feeding, than others living in fens and foggy places: And how far the quality of our diet prevails in the alteration of our organs and dispositions; every naturalist will easily resolve us. A third reason may be drawn from the cold Air of these mountainous regions, which by an Antiperistasis keeps in, and strengthens the internal heat, the chief instrument in natural and vital operations. For who perceives not his vital, and by consequence his intellectual parts, in cold frosty weather to be more strong and vigorous, then in hot and sultry seasons, wherein the spirits are more diffused and weakened. This disparity in the same region, at divers times, in regard of the disposition of the air, may easily declare the disparity of divers Regions, being in this sort diversely affected. A fourth reason may be taken from the customary hardness, whereunto such people enure themselves from their infancy; which (as Huartus proves) begets a better temper of the brain, in regard of the wit and understanding; which we happen to find clean otherwise with them, who have accustomed themselves to delicateness. These reasons perhaps would seem only probable, and of no great moment, were they not strengthened with foreign and Domestic observation. Have not the Heluetians situate amongst the mountains, given sufficient testimony; especially in the infancy of our Reformation? Have not the Suevians and Silesians showed themselves able enough, to wipe off the blot of a blockish disposition; yet having a situation wild and mountainous? Had that great Doctor Reu●lin judged well of the nature of such people, he would not have made it so great a wonder as he did, that wild Suevia should produce such learned Men. Foreign influences elsewhere wherein all histories abound, I forbear to relate; desirous rather to be accounted deficient then tedious. Should I draw home to my native Western Confines, to which I owe my breath, I should perhaps by some be taxed of partiality or affectation. Should I mention our ancient Britons, inhabiting the Mountainous Country of Wales, or the greater part of the Scottish Nation, enjoying the like condition of life, and disposition of the Soil; I might at once win love, and stir up envy. Nevertheless, as a man by nature borne careless of Detraction, yet most respective of Friendship, I had rather venture my credit, than prejudice the truth: betwixt both which with me the choice is easy. Mine own Country of Devon, which duty commands me to make the first Instance, I had rather set on the stage of Envy, then Dishonour. I am not of the opinion of the vainglorious greeks, who boasting too much of their own perfections, esteemed all Nations else Barbarians. Yet to check Mr Bodins bold conjecture, out of which he could find but one Anacharsis in all Scythia; I will demonstrate that our mountainous Provinces of Devon and Cornwall, have not deserved so ill, as to be so sharply censured for Blockishness or Incivility. Barren Countries have been known to nourish as good wits, as Bodin, Aristippus the Philosopher, Callimachus the Poet, Eratosthenes the Mathematician, have not been ashamed to call Cyrene in Egypt their native Country, a Mountainous and Rocky Region. Neither can it be styled our reproach, but glory, to draw our offspring from such an Air which produceth wits as eminent as the Mountains, approaching far nearer to Heaven in Excellency, than the other in height transcend the Valleys. Wherein can any Province of Great Britain challenge precedency before us? Should any deny us the reputation of Arts and Learning: the pious Ghosts of jewel, Raynolds, and Ho●ker, would rise up in opposition; whom the World knows so valiantly to have displayed their Banners in defence of our Church and Religion. Should they exclude us from the reputation of knowledge in State and Politic affairs? who hath not acquainted himself with the name of S ● William Petre our famous Benefactor, whose desert chose him chief Secretary to three Princes of famous memory? Who hath not known or read of that prodigy of wit and fortune S ● Walter Raleigh, a man unfortunate in nothing else but the greatness of his wit and advancement? whose eminent worth was such, both in Domestic Policy, Foreign Expeditions, and Discoveries, Arts and Literature, both Practice and Contemplative, which might seem at once to conquerre both Example & Imitation. For valour and chivalrous Designs by Sea▪ who reads not without admiration the acts of Sr Francis Drake, who thought the circuit of this Earthly Globe too little for his generous and magnanimous Ambition? Of Sr Richard Grenuill, who undertaking with so great a disadvantage, so strong an Enemy▪ yet with an undaunted Spirit made his Honour legible in the wounds of the proud Spaniard: and at last triumphed more in his own honourable Death, than the other in his base conquest? Of Sr Humphrey Gilbert, Sr Richard Hawkins, Davies, Fr●bisher, and Captain Parker, with many others of worth, note, & estimation, whose names live with the Ocean? In the Catalogue of able and worthy Land-Souldiers, whose eye would not at first, glance on my Lord Belfast, who lately deceased to the great grief of his Country, because in such a time which most requires his assistance? Courage, & Wisdom. which are often at odds, and seldom meet, in him shook hands as friends, and challenged an equal share in his perfections. His wife managing of his affairs in Ireland, so well commends his own Loyalty, and his Master's choice, that the whole Realm may truly be said for the most part to owe her present Peace to his industry. should I speak of Generous Magnificence and Favour of Learning, showed by Heroical Spirits in the general Munificence extended to our whole University; what Age or Place can give a Parallel to renowned Bodley, whose name carries more persuasion than the tongue of the wisest Orator? His magnificent Bounty, which showed itself so extraordinarily transcendent, aswell in erection of his Famous Library, which he (as another Ptolemy) so richly furnished, as other munificent Largesses, exhibited to our English Athens, was yet farther crowned by his wise choice, as proceeding from one, who being both a great Scholar, and a prudent Statist, knew aswell how to direct as bestow his liberality. If Founders and Benefactors of private Colleges may find place in this Catalogue of Worthies, the sweet hi●e and receptacle of our Western wits can produce in honour of our Country a famous Stapledon Bishop of Excester, and worthy Founder of Exon College: whose large bounty was afterward seconded (next to Edm▪ Stafford Bishop of Sarum, a Western Man) by the pious charge and liberality of Mr john Peryam, Sr john Acland, & very lately by Mr Dr Hakewill, whose worthy Encomium, (though unwillingly) leave out, lest I should seem rather to flatter them commend his Worth. But what needs he my poor mention? His learned works published to the World, & his Pious Monument bestowed on our House, speak in silence more than I can utter out of the highest pitch of Invention. To all which I might add Mr Nicholas Wadham▪ whose liberal hand having augmented the number of our Colleges with an absolute and complete Foundation, have left Muses enough to preserve his Name unto eternity. Had I the like privilege to mention the living as the dead, we should not find wanting out of the ashes of these generous Heroes, of our Devonian confines, many genuine and worthy Sons standing up in their Father's places, to show the world a succession aswell of wits as times. There would appear at once upon the stage our famous Dr Sutcliffe, the worthy Dean of Excester, whose magnanimous endeavours, aswell in his learned conflicts with our pernicious Romanists, as in erecting a College to oppose our sworn enemies, the Jesuits, will (no doubt) lengthen out the end of his declining age with Fame and immortality. I could offer to your admiration the Worth and Works of our renowned Rector, Dr Prideaux, His Majesty's learned Professor of Divinity in our University, in whom the Heroical wits of jewel, Rainolds, and Hooker, as united into one, seem to triumph anew, and threaten a fatal blow to the Babilonish Hierachie: Insomuch that he may justly challenge to himself that glory, which sometimes Ovid speaking of his own country; Mantua Virgilium laudet, Verona Catullum, Romanae gentis gloria dicar ego. Mantua Virgil, Verone Catullus praise, I will the glory of the Romans raise. Neither want the laws of our Land, out of this one source, sufficient props to defend their Countries and the Kingdom's right. The admired sufficiency of justice Doddrige, testified to the world by so large a report, and expressed in his incomparable skill in the Laws (besides his endowments of Arts and other Learning, seconded by the deserved Fame of Mr William Noy) can hardly scape my pen, being so deeply dipped in the middle of my Native Country. I care not what envy I stir up in others, so my mother Excester College, which sometimes cherished in her bosom these two worthy Darlings, and since found her courtesy returned back with interest, indulgently permit me this liberty. Besides these choice flowers cropped from our Hesperian garden, no question but many more would be found out alive or dead; whom fame, if not injurious, cannot suffer to sleep without deserved memory. I have hitherto touched such eminent wits and persons, of whom for their profession sake the Church or Commonwealth have greater reason to take especial notice. Many inferior faculties are yet left wherein our Da●o● hath displayed her abilities aswell as in the former, as in Philosophers, Historians, Orators and Poets, the blazoning of whom to the life, especially the last, I had rather leave to my worthy friend Mr. W. Browne; who as he hath already honoured his country in his elegant and sweet Pastorals▪ so questionless will easily be entreated a little farther to grace it, by drawing out the line of his Poetic Ancestors, beginning in josephus Iscanus, and ending in himself. Bodin perhaps might oppose against us the eminency of his Parisian territoy, as some with us the glory of our Metropolis and Universities, disdaining all comparison: But to this it is not hard to shape an answer, 1. That a Metropolis or University is to be imagined as a common receptacle of the most selected wits derived rather from other places then the temperament of their own Air: Insomuch as they may be said to owe their abilities, for the most part, to those to whom they owe their wealth. Neither can they challenge a greater interest in this glory, than our Townsmen here in Oxford in the eminent gifts of our choicest Scholars; beside, that often happens in our great Metropolitan cities by the promiscuous concourse of divers dispositions; which is reported of the beasts once a year coming together to drink of Nilu●, of divers sorts; that by unnatural commixture, they yearly beget new monsters: Africa aliquid semper oportat novi. 2. The ready means of Advancement to high and eminent dignities in Metropolitan cities, which are commonly the ordinary seats of Princes, sets many a brain a work although In vita Minerva, to show itself in public: wherein he hath the advantage of estimation sooner than sufficiency: whereas many a towardly wit in places far remote, never finds opportunity so propitious as to present him to popularity. I fear I shall be too tedious in this point, recalling to mind that I shall find few of my readers in this matter so affected as myself: yet should I not have spun out this theme so long, but to stop their mouths who being sooner taught to speak then understand, take advantage of the rude lang●age●nd ●nd plain attire of our countrymen, admiring nothing more than themselves or the magnificent splendour of their own habitation: As though all the wit in the world were annexed to their own schoooles, and no flowers of science could grow in another garden: But a rude dialect being more indebted to Custom then Nature, is a small argument of a blockish disposition: and a homely outside may shroud more wit than the Silkworms industry. I have sometimes heard a rude speech in a Freeze habit, express better sense than at other times a scarlet Robe: And a plain Yeoman with a mattock in his hand speak more to the purpose, than some Counselors at the bar: And what other prorogative can such men appropriate to themselves above us, but toys and formalities, the Idols of Gulls and fools, and the laughter of solid understandings? But now after all this bickering with Mr Bodin to grow to a reconcilement, ere we part, we will part stakes, and in the way of kindness give him this one distinction, which I hope for quietness sake, he will accept. The natural disposition of men and their gifts of understanding and mental faculties, arise either from their natural Temper, or their Discipline and education: For the former I have small reason to give (as I have said) the excellency to the inhabitants of plain and low Countries, rather than to the mountain people: But in discipline and education I must confess others commonly to be happier. 1. Because the Fertility and increase of the Earth inviting men to such an Habitation, it must needs happen that such countries must be more populous, and by consequence settle to themselves a better form of government, than those which by reason of their barren soil are more neglected: 2. Because, most Cities and Towns, where are found the chiefest means of Institution of youth, are founded in plain Countries and valleys. This Perfection that such regions boast of, is owed rather to Institution then Nature: Hence appears the reason of the last clause of our Theorem, to wit, why they should be less tractable to government: Because being (as it were) borne to too much liberty, they cannot so well enure themselves to subjection, as other who perhaps know no Condition but servitude of the mountainous people of Wales and Scotland, I cannot speak so much as ● intended: Both because I have (I fear) tired already my reader's patience, as also for that, being not to conversant in their Histories as mine own, as an ill herald, I may chance to marshal all amiss. Who ●o list to read the courage of our ancient British nation, he shall find enough as well in the Roman Story, as our English Chronicles, to set them far enough above contempt, and place them an eye sore in the sight of envy. But to leave Antiquities & come to these times, we may easily amongst many other deserving men single out some, whose eminence so obvious to the eye of common observation, is able to dash detraction out of countenance. Who hath not heard not many years since of Dr Holland the King's Professor in our University, and Sr Roger Williams a famous Colonel in the French and Belgic wars? The Scholastical Learning of the one, and the martial prowess of the other, was too well known to require a Panegyricke. Neither is Wales at this day below herself, but that she can triumph in two of the most Honourable and Generous Peers of this Land, (to whose acceptance I owe these my poor labours) and the greatest administrator of justice in our Courts: the two former, borne as well to hereditary virtue as greatness: the later advanced no higher than his own ability, whom the world knows beyond my expression. Scarce had I shut up this tedious discourse, spent for the most part in defence of my native Country, but surprised with a deep melancholy, I entered into a serious consideration of what I had too rashly spoken: I called my meditations to a strict account, to examine what motive should make me run so far beyond my intended purpose, to meet the Ambition of my Country or mine own affection. The remembrance of some grievances, seconded by mine inbred Nature, never taught to fawn on misprision, began to check my officious pen, as guilty of too much weakness or adulation: when suddenly as in a vision there appeared unto me my Mother Oxford ushered in by Isis & all his Muses, who with a discontented countenance and harsh language, seemed to chide me in this manner: Fond Son, who taught thy undeserved praise, To crown thy country with these thankless Bayss? What owest thou unto that barren Earth But harsh reproach, sad cares, and hapless Birth? What Legacy bequeathed that soil to thee, But fruitless Hopes, and helpless Poverty? What thou hast spoken of thy Western strands▪ Will sooner plough up mine, then cure thy wounds. Had thy neglected Muse without a Name, Spent half this industry to spin my fame, Isis had graced thee with Muses more Than ever tripped on thy Devonian shore. Which of these Worthies whom thou crownest with praise Will ere thy wants relieve, or Fortunes raise? All the proud wooers of the Sisters Nine, Like Pilgrims come to worship at my shrine: And vauntest thou on Devons part their Names Who owe to me their worth, to her their shames? The prime and choice of all thy glorious flowers Cropped from my gardens and admired Bowers, Ought to return the tribute of their praise Unto my golden tongue and learned Lays: Nor had thy Western Confines ever found A Muse to sing of thy Devonian ground, Had not I touched her ambitious tongue First taught to chant amongst my learned throng. How oft hast thou drawn out thy precious time To tutor in my arms their youthly prime, Who like respectless and vntutoured swains, With loss and obloquy reward thy pains? Such are thy Darlings whom thou mak'st to ride In a triumphant car by Honour's side: As if proud Honour which can Kings command, As a poor servant waited on thy hand. Thus thou unwise giv'st immortality To those, whose base reproaches follow thee. Had thine Ambition waited on my springs, The breath of Princes, and the power of Kings Had seconded thy Hopes, which now accuse To my disgrace and grief thy hapless Muse. Thy wants enforce thee still with me to stay, When each Pedant or makes or finds his way. To play and stake it at that lawless Game, Selling my Honours for to buy their shame: Unhappy purchase owed to Charity, Bought by connivance, sold to Perjury; By griping Brokers, since the fatal time That fair Astraea left thy thankless Clime. Thus thy admired Devons charity Sets strangers in her lap and shuts out Thee. Hast thou been honoured by my sacred Breath, Amongst rude Arcadians thus to beg a Death? What greater glory can thy ashes have, Then in my flowery groves to dig thy grave? Although the least among my learned sons, Thy fortunes told thee that I loved thee once, And so do still: although my hapless Bayss Taught thy despair to spin out careless days, And to compose thy discontented Head To slumber softly on the Muses Bed. Be ruled by me my poor, yet loved Son, Trust not their smiles whose wrongs have thee undone: Thy fair Hopes grounded on thy place of birth, Will fly in Atoms or consume in Earth; Before within that Hemisphere of thine, Thy Devons Sun on thee shall ever shine. Then trust unto my bounty, turn thy sight From thy dark Confines to my golden light. All thy endowments owed to my womb, Return them back, and there erect thy tomb. If no Maecenas crown thee with his Rays, Teach thy content to sleep out quiet days. Let Contemplation with transpiercing eyes, Mount thee a pitch beyond the starry skies. And there present thee that eternal glass, Wherein the greatness of this wondrous mass, Shrinks to an A●ome▪ where my Astrolube Shall show thee stars beyond thy painted Globe: Where thou aloft as from a mountain steep, Shalt see the greatest men like Ants to creep: Thy days shall minister thee choicest Themes, Which night shall render in delicious dreams▪ And thy severe Philosophy the while, In amorous kind shall court thee with her smiles, Or if thy nature with constraint, descends Below her own delight, to practic ends; Rise with my morning Phoebus, slight the West, Till furrowed Age invite thee to rest. And then perchance, thy Earth which seldom gave, Thee Air to breath, will lend thy Corpse a grave, Soon the last trumpet will be heard to sound, And of thy load Ease the De●o●ian ground. Mean time if any gentle swain come by, To view the marble where thy ashes lie, He may upon that stone in fewer years, Engrave an ●●i●●ph with fretting tears, Then make men's frozen hearts with all his cries Drink in a drop from his distilling eyes: Yet will I promise thy neglected bones A firmer monument then speechless stones, And when I pin● with age, and wits with rust, Seraphic Angels shall dreserue thy dust, And all good men acknowledge shall with me Thou lov'st thy Country, when she hateth thee. This strange reproof of an indulgent mother, I could not entertain without passion: In so much as without fear or wit, I adventured in this sort, to answer her, in her own language. Ad Matrem Academiam. 〈…〉 have my former years So much 〈…〉 on thy hate, or these my tears? Thus to divorce me from my place of birth, To be a stranger to my native Earth? Wilt thou expose him on thy common stage, To strive and struggle in an Iron age; Whose low ambition never learned of thee The curious Arts of thriving policy? Thy golden tongue from which my younger days Sucked the sweet music of thy learned lays, Was better taught thy office then my fate, To make me thine, yet most unfortunate. Why was I fostered in thy learned schools, To study with for the reward of fools: That while I sat to he●re the Muses sing, The Winter suddenly ore-took my Spring: Have I so played the truant with my hours, Or with base riot stained thy sacred Bowers, Or as a Viper did I ever strive, To gnaw a passage through thy womb to thrive: To pluck me thus from Devons breast, to try What thou canst do when as thy dugs are dry? When my short thread of life is almost spun, Thou biddst me rise up with thy morning Sun; And like a Heliotrope adore the East, When my care-hastened Age arrives at West. Could I encounter (as I once did hope,) The God of learning in the Horoscope, My Ph●bu● would auspicious looks incline, On my hard fate, and discontents to shine: Now lodged in a luckless' house, rejects My former suits, and frowns with sad aspects. Had I been borne when that eternal hand Wrapped the infant world in her first swaddling band, Before Philosophy was taught the way, To rock the cradle in which Nature lay, My Learning had been Husbandry: My Birth Had owed no toll but to the virgin Earth: No● ha● I courted for these thi●●y years, Thy seven proud minions with officious tears: To live had been my industry: no tongue Had taxed thy honours, guilty of my wrong. Had I been shepherd on our Western plains, I might have sung amongst those happy swains; Some shepherdess hearing my melody, Might have been charmed kind as charity, And taught me those sad minutes to reprieve, Which I have lost in studying how to thrive. Had I aduetured on the brinish foam, And sworn myself a stranger to my home Till time the Harvest reaped my youth did owe, And Ages winter had spent all her snow Upon my hairs; what worse could I have, Then lose thy frowns to find a wished grave? The Scythian hewed from Caucasus would ask ●efore my slaughter, why a needle's task Of Travail I should undertake, to see Their Country's bounds and my sad misery? But hearing my harsh bondage under thee, Would thine unkindness hate and pi●ty me. To see thy Child far severed from thy womb The Cannibal would make himself my tomb; And till his own were spent preserve my dust, In his dear urn which thou hast slightly lost. Canst thou neglected see his Age to freeze, Whose youth thou dandl'st on indulgent knees? The fowl aspersions on my Devon thrown, Thou mightst in right acknowledge for thine own Only this difference: to men wanting worth They sell preferments, and thou sends them forth. Canst thou be bribed to honour with a kiss Thy guilded folly which deserves the hiss? If thy foxed wants and flattery conspire, To sell thy Scarlet to a worthless Squire, Or grace with minivere some proselyte Who ne'er knew arts, or read the Stagirite; Yet should thy hand be frugal to preserve That stock for want of which thy sons may starve. Have I served out three prenticeships, yet find Thy trade inferior to the humblest mind? And that outstripped by unthrifts, which were sent Free with indentures ere their years were spent? Then cease, ye sisters of the Thespian springs, Thalia burn thy books and break thy strings, And mother make thyself a second Tomb For all thy offspring, and so shut thy womb. Accuse not my just anger, but the cause Nature may urge, but fury scorns her laws. I fawned too long on justice: Sith that fails, Storm Indignation and blow up my sails; Ingenious choler armed with Scorpions stings Which whippest on Peasants, and commandest Kings, And giv'st each milky soul a pen to write Though all the world turned a parasite; O Temper my brains, thy bitterness infuse, Descend and dictate to my angry Muse. O pardon mother something checks my spleen, And from thy face takes off my angry teen: Revolted Nature by the same degrees Goes and returns; begs pardon on her knees: Thou art a mirror by reflection taught To feign defects, yet guilty art of naught. Thy stewards which by thy indulgence thrive Were they as just, as thou art free to give, We all might share a portion of that store, Which now thy sons deserve, thy slaves devour. Thy will is seldom measured by the Law, But power, whose greatness thy Edicts can awe, Slights thy decrees: O would Imperial jove But once descend from his high Court above, To see thy innocent and maiden hands, By thine own servants basely shut in bands: These Caterpillars by his three-forkt Rays, Would soon be scorched from of● thy sacred Bays; And thou restored unto that pristine-hue, Which ancient times admired ours never knew. All this time as in a fit of frenzy I have spoken, I scarce know what myself: I fear me too much, to, or of, my Country and University, and too little for the present purpose. Now as one suddenly awaked out of sleep, no otherwise then in a dream I remember the occasion: We have all a semel Insanivimus, and as a learned man of this University seems to maintain, no man hath ever had the happiness to be exempted from this imputation: And therefore I hope my Reader will pardon me this once, if in such a general concourse and conspiracy of mad men, I sometimes show myself mad for company. 3 Windy Regions produce men of wild and instable dispositions; but quiet regions more constant and courteous. The cause of this disparity is apparent; because a quiet mind, and apt for contemplation, cannot be in such a man, as is perpetually tossed to and fro. For no man can well contemplate, except he have his mind purged and free from motion of the body; and it is noted by Physiognomers that wiser men are slower in the motion of their body and mind, whereas mad and frantic men are always busied in body and mind. Hence a reason may be given why Mariners and seamen being continually tossed with the wind, are observed to be more barbarous, inhuman, and inconstant. Another reason of this inconstancy and change, may be drawn from the change of the Air, caused by diversity of winds; For wind being an exhalation affecting the air and derived from the Earth, must needs be divers in regard of the divers regions, from whence it bloweth. what cause soever be imagined, it is most certain that people in windy regions have been more warlike, though perhaps less humane: As in Thracia, France, Circassia, Lybia, Portugal, Persia, Noruegia, and Polonia: But in places in the same tract where the wind hath a less domination we shall find them more tractable, but less valiant, as Asyria, Asia minor, Italy for the most part, and Egypt. In like manner the people of Gallia Nar●onensis, Aquitany, and Provence in France, are observed to be the most warlike, although situate in a more Southern tract: Being daily infested, partly by the Vulturnus, partly by the Corus, which in these parts hath great power. 4 Sea-borderers are generally more witty and adorned with more knowledge, than Inlanders, though subject to greater vices. That Arts, Civility, and many inventions are owed to the sea, as the mother of increase, seems a matter out of question: For sith all nations have not found out all arts and inventions it must follow necessarily, that they have been propagated by traffic, and commerce with foreign nations: Whence it comes to pass many times that Sea-borderers by conference with outlandish people, have gotten that knowledge and experience of things, for which others have with great cost and danger adventured on long and tedious travails: Which I take to be the reason why Themisto●les would have a City depending on the sea, and not as Caelius Rhodoginus imagines, that he might transfer the power from the Nobility, to the Shipmasters. Thus we find sciences and learning to have been derived from the Chaldeans to the Egyptians, from the Egyptians to the Phaenicians, from them to the Grecians and Romans: And in our days every man can speak how much the industry of the Venetians, Spaniards, Hollanders, English, and portugals have effected in both Indies, in trafficking with them, deriving together with their merchandise, much of their own knowledge and religion. But as the Islanders and sea-bordering people have excelled the Inland nations in skill and knowledge, so also in vices: Which stands with reason, whether we ascribe it to their natural wit or condition of life, or education. For the greatest wits are commonly matched with the greatest vices, as depending on such a temper of the brain whose smallest change may beget madness: according to that proverb, Nullum magnum ingenium sine mixtura insaniae. Also Arts and Sciences turned to the worst use, become more dangerous, then naked simplicity; for there is nothing to be feared more than armed fury. This might be the cause why Plato in his book de Republica warns men to avoid the Sea, as the mother of wickedness. Which is seconded by Strabo, who derives the offspring of Robbery, pillage, and murder, from the Sea: By which argument, the old Athenians were induced to draw the Inhabitants as much as they could from Sea-trafficke to husbandry and tillage of the Earth: Whence came at first (as some imagine) that fable of Neptune striving with Minerva for victory, against whom she prevailed, by showing the judges a mandrake's apple as an especial rarity of the land. CHAP. XVI. Of the dispositions of Inhabitants according to their Original and Education. 1 IN the third place there may be a diversity of Inhabitants in disposition, either in respect of their Offspring, or their Education. In the former we are to consider the dispositions of nations so far forth, as it depends from their first stock and original. By the first stock and original of nations, we understand not here either the first offspring from the loins of Adam, or the second from Noah; because these two are common to all nations of the world, and therefore cannot vary the several dispositions of people: But the more mediate or special stock whence they sprang, which is found to have no small power in the nature and temper of posterity. In this offspring two things are chiefly remarkable; first, how people suffer an alteration in respect of their several Transplantations: Secondly, in the mixture of colonies, both which we will show in these Theorems. 1 Colonies transplanted from one region into another, far remote, retain a long time their first disposition, though by little and little they decline and suffer alteration. All mutation requires a certain distance of time: Sith no motion according to Aristotle is in an instant, neither is it a small time can alter the natural complexion of men: For as much as the children for the most part derive their nature from their parents, and every man's constitution is commonly radically grounded, and not easily subject to external change: Thus we see the Children of Blackmores being transplanted into Europe for divers descents to continue black: Yet so as they by little and little declining from their former hue, will in time become white; as the rest of the European Inhabitants: For otherwise it must needs follow, that Scythia should at this day breed many Blackmores, and Ethiopia many white; because no question can be made, but that all nations almost of the world since the beginning have suffered mixture. We read that the Goths, being a warlike people of the North, long after their first invasion of Spain, France, Italy, and other Territories of Europe, retained their own disposition and nature, altogether disagreeing with the nations, amongst whom they lived: governing (as is the manner of Northern Potentates) rather by Strength then Policy, better able to win then establish an Empire. But in process of time it came to pass, that putting off their harsh temper they grew into one nation with the native Inhabitants, as in France and Italy, or at least as in Spain, establishing a government of their own, by little and little declined from their rudeness to civility, turning their arms to Arts, their strength to stratagemmes, having of late years by witty policy established a greater empire, than ever their Ancestors could achieve by multitudes of men, and strength of arms. And it is worth observation, that as these have suffered a change of Laws, customs, government, which they owe more to the nature of the Climate then to Education; so in their very language. For the language of the Goths heretofore, differed little from the language of the ancient Germans, which (as most Northern languages) was very rough, consisting of many hard and harsh aspirations, with unpleasant collision of many consonants together: But at this day is changed into a very elegant tongue pleasant to the ear, consisting of many vowels and the softest aspirations. Finally such have been the alterations of this people, that being heretofore far North and branded with all the marks of Northern rudeness, they are now esteemed in the Catalogue of Southern Inhabitants: Not in regard, as much of place, as nature. The like may we observe of the Turks and Tartars, who spreading their empire from the North towards the South, a long time retained their rude barbarous nature, which they have not at this day altogether cast off; yet so much hath time and place gained upon their temper, that they are much mollified and far more tractable to humanity, addicting themselves every day more and more to the study of arts and civility: in so much that (as one observes) had they not preserved their strict discipline in training up their youth to arms, they had long since lost much of their large empire, and have yielded to the Polonian and Muscovite. This change may we find not only in mankind, but also in beasts and plants, which being transported into other regions, though a long time retaining their native perfection, will notwithstanding in time by little and little degenerate: As I have heard by relation of some of our Virginian colony in America: who find a great alteration in our Corn and Cattle, translated thither. This might also be observed in the Danes, Saxons, and Angles, coming into Britanny, who partly by the Climate, partly by mixture with them, by little and little deposed their disposition, and became more civil. The like may be spoken of the Saxon-colonies sent by Charles the great into Belgia, who since that time becoming more ci●ill have proved less warlike, losing as much by the one, as they obtained by the other. This point I will no further prosecute, because I hold it sufficiently demonstrated out of that I have spoken of the variety of natural dispositions according to the heavenly situation, and the soil. For sith all nations came at first from one original, we must needs ascribe this mutation to the places which they inhabit. 2 The mixture of Colonies begets in the same nation a greater disparity and variety of the Inhabitants amongst themselves This proposition is by natural consequence deduced from the former: Because all Colonies transplanted retaining somewhat of their former nature, the Mixture must produce variety. First, because the number of people of any region by this is supposed to consist of more kinds of dispositions: Secondly, because the promiscuous mixture of these kinds being unequally tempered, must according to their several combinations produce people, as unlike one to the other, as to the former. Hence a reason may be given, why the Inhabitants of the extreme regions, either North or South are found to be amongst themselves as well in temper, as in external face and habit more like one to the other: whereas the middle partake of more variety. For the Cimbrians, Danes, and other Scythians, are for the most part of a whitish hue, with flaxen, and yellow hair; on the other side the Ethiopians for the most part are blacke-haired and curled. The French, Germans, and the English, admit of all variety, having some white-haired, some black, some yellow, some tawny, some smooth and some curled-pates. This diversity the Stoics would ascribe to the fantasy, or image conceived in the minds of men. Whence they would give a cause, why beasts commonly bring forth young, more like one the other than men; because (say they) wanting a reasonable soul they are not stirred up as men with sundry cogitations, but only with sense. So the Scit hian and Northern man being by nature more simple, and affecting those pleasures which are agreeable to nature, and less distracted by variety of thoughts, is found to beget children more like their parents then those of the middle climate. This cause we should admit probable enough, but for a reason urged by Bodin and others, that in Aethiopia, where the people of all other is more Acute, and more violent in lust, they are most like one to the other. For even all are found to be small of stature, curl-pated, black-skinned, flat-nosed, smooth-skinned, great-liped, white-toothed, black-eyed: Wherefore this infinite diversity in the middle region, we cannot well ascribe to any other reason, than the manifold intermixtion and combination of both the extremes. Whence it comes to pass, that by how much more we wander from the middle region, so much the more shall we find the people amongst themselves: In so much as Tacitus spoke of the Germans, that amongst themselves they were very like in respect of other nations. This mixture in the middle region out of the extremes, may easily be showed out of divers Colonies, which from the extremes, have been translated into the middle region, as the better place of habitation. For hither came the great and extraordinary armies of the Scythians, Goths, Turks and Tartars; None besides the Vandals passed into Africa, from whence they were in short time expulsed. The Arabians and Punicaeans called by the ancient Saracens, leading their Colonies into Europe and Asia, settled themselves in the middle region; None came into Scythia: for when they had invaded Spain, Italy and France, they were in France altogether broken, and cut off: After which, Spain and Italy found a means to free themselves from their bondage. Likewise the Colonies of the Celtes and Romans, endeavoured always to settle themselves in the middle Regions, and never ventured as far as Scythia Northward, or Southward as far as Aethiopia: Whence the middle charged with intermixture of both extremes begat a great diversity. For we find by experience, that out of the mixture of divers kinds, divers Forms and Natures are engendered: As of the Mule, Leopard, Crocuta, Lycisca, and Camelopardus; which being mixed Creatures are unlike their Sires: So may we judge of the various mixture of divers kinds of men. A Mastiff or Lycisca, little differs from a Wolf, because he was conceived of a Wolf and a Dog; So that a Wolf is (as Varro noteth) nothing else then a wild Dog. But on the other side, a Mule from an Ass and a Horse, As a Camelopardus from a Panthor and a Camel, differ very much; so that if people very near in Nature be linked together, they produce an offspring very like themselves: But if two very unlike in nature, as an Ethiopian and a Scythian should match together, they must needs bring forth a birth very unlike to themselves: like a Personated man brought upon the stage by Ptolomaeus Philedephus, who (as Athenaeus writes) was of two colours, on one side white, on the other black. 2 The second point whereby the disposition of people is varied, is Education. Education is the exercise of many people in religions, or moral discipline. Amongst all external causes of the change of dispositions, there is none greater than Education. For as a good nature is oftentimes corrupted with evil conversation, so an ill disposition with good institution hath in some sort been corrected. The chief objects of discipline are Religion and Morality: Whereof we give the chiefest prerogative to Religion, as that which more immediately bindeth the consciences of men, even against nature. In the second place Civility; whose end is worldly happiness. How far each of these prevail, shall be showed in these Theorems. 1 Education hath great force in the alteration of natural dispositions: yet so as by accident remitted, they soon return to their former temper. The force of institution hath been so great, that by some it hath been thought to equal, if not surmount Nature; whence they have termed it a second nature: For as we see all sorts of plants and Herbs by good husbandry, to grow better, but left to themselves to grow wild and barren; So shall we find it, if not much more, in mankind▪ which though never so Savage and Barbarous, have by discipline been corrected and reform, and though never so Polite and civil neglecting discipline, have degenerated, and grown barbarous. For if the external lineaments of the body may be by art (as it were) wrought into another mould, much more may we ascribe this to the habits and operations of the mind, being of a more agile nature, and apt to receive impression. The ancients amongst the French (as Bodin testifies) deemed a long visage the most handsome: Whence the Midwives endeavoured to frame most faces to this fashion, as may be seen in most ancient statues and images. In India (as we also read) a great nose and a broad face was most admitted: which caused their Midwives to effect it as near as they could in their tender infants. In like manner it hath been the endeavour and ambition of most teachers, and informers of youth, to frame the wits of their novices to such disciplines and perfections, as in the same country found most honour & best acceptance. Hence it came to pass that custom prevailing beyond nature, many nations situate in a ruder climate, wanting that benefit of the Heavens which others plentifully enjoy, have surpassed them in Arts, Sciences, and many other Endowments of the mind. In so trivial a matter we will not rove far for example. It is recorded by the ancients as well of the Germans, as of our own nation, that they lived almost in the condition of wild beasts in Woods and Deserts, feeding like swine on herbs and roots, without law or discipline: In so much as their Bards or learned men (as they deemed them) wanting the use of letters, challenged their chiefect perfection in the composure of certain rhymes of trivial subjects to please the people. Their houses were caves, their palaces bracks and thickots, their tables rocks (as one saith of them) Antra lares, dumeta thoros, caenacula rupes, They were (as justine speaks of the infancy of the world) rather careful to keep their own, then ambitious to conquer others; and more studious to preserve life then seek honour. Their only law was nature, or some few customs preserved by tradition, not writing: Little differing from the present Americans, not yet reduced to civility. But time and discipline prevailing against barbarism, they are (God be praised) reduced to such a height of civility, that they may (as it were) read other men's wants in their own perfections, and measure other men's loss by their own gains. Insomuch as they seem to have robbed the asiatics of humanity, the Romans of military Discipline, the Hebrews of Religion, the Grecians of Philosophy, the Egyptians of Geometry, the Phoenicians of Arithmetic, the Chaldaeans of Astrology, and almost all the world of curious Workmanship. This their excellency hath been so fortunate, as to set them in the envy of other nations, who notwithstanding have been fain to borrow of their store. The Italians are censured by Machiavelli the Florentine for sending for Germans to measure their land, challenging to themselves the prerogative of wit, above other nations. Likewise Pope Leo dispatched his Ambassador into Germany for Mathematicians, to rectify the calendar, as sometimes Caesar into Egypt. This force of discipline how great soever being for a time neglected, nature is notwithstanding found to return to her own corruption. A prime example of it we have in the Romans and Italians, heretofore for Arts and Military discipline carrying away the palm from the whole world: But now degenerated so much, as it may seem the image of baseness; submitting their necks to the pride of an insulting Prelate, far more abject than the loss of their liberty under Caesar, or the Gothish usurpation of Alaricus. The like effect of this neglect of discipline may we find in the Hebrews, Chaldaeans, Phaenicians, Egyptians, Grecians, and Indians, who were sometimes admired for learning and Eloquence, and set in the highest top of perfection. Wherefore Aristotle had good reason in his first book de Coelo to affirm, that Arts and Sciences with all nations had been subject to ebbs and flows, sometimes flourishing in great perfection, and sometimes languishing and contemned. And to this and no other cause, can we ascribe the present Ignorance and Barbarism of the Americans: Their descent being from Noah and his posterity, they could not at first but have some form of discipline, which afterwards being by long process of time or incertainty of tradition neglected and obliterated, they fell back into such ways as their own depraved nature dictated or the devil maliciously suggested. 2 By Discipline nations become mo●e wise and politic in the preservations of states, yet less stout and courageous. As Discipline hath been the chief cause of the establishment of all states, so hath it on the other side been occasion to soften and weaken the courage of many nations: For it hath been many times seen, that such people who have been commended for wit, have yielded to such who are of a ruder disposition: as at this day the Greeks and Macedons to the Turks, the ancient Gauls to the French, the Egyptians to the Persians, the Chaldeans to the Saracens. Hence some give a reason why the French did invade and run over Italy without control under Charles the 5; because the Italian Princes at that time were given to study and learning; and it is observed that the ancient courage of the Turk is much abated, since the time that they grew more civil and more strictly embraced discipline. And this some think to have given occasion to Alexander the great, to conquer the Persian Monarchy, the Persians having been before reduced to civility, and lost their hardness. And we daily see by experience, that no men are more desperate and adventurous; then those which are rude and barbarous, wanting all good manners and education. None more fearful and many times more cowardlike than such as are most wise and politic: an example of the former we have in Aiax, of the other in Ulysses, whereupon the wisest l●aders and commanders have not been esteemed the most valiant. A certain English gentleman writing military observations affirms the French nobility to be more valorous and courageous than the English: Because of the looseness of their discipline and the strictness of ours. But I will neither grant him the one or the other, neither can I aver their courage to be greater, or our discipline stricter. If their valour be more, it must needs follow their wit is less out of this ground. But how soever it be, I am sure that Caesar and Tacitus give the cause of the great stature and courage of the Germans to be their looseness and liberty, which howbeit it be not the sole cause, it must needs be a great help. For we plainly find by experience that those countries which be most mountainous where is less discipline, are found to produce men for the most part, most warlike: Such as the Suitzers in Germany and Biscayn●s and Arragonians in Spain●. Whence (as some observe) such countries as are partly Mountainous, partly plain are seldom at quiet, the one part willingly submitting themselves to government, the other affecting war and rebellion. Which hath been the cause of the troubles of Naples, and in England before Henry the eight's time betwixt the Welsh and English. Why discipline should in this sort mollify and weaken the courage of men, many causes may be given. The first and greatest is Religion, than the which, there is no greater curb to the courage: not merely of itself, but by accident; Because Death being the greatest hazard of a soldier, religion gives a more evident apprehension and sense of the immortality of the soul of man, and sets before the eye of his understanding, as it were the images of Hell-paines and Celestial joys, weighing in an equal scale the danger of the one, and the loss of the other. Whereas ignorant people wanting all sense of religion lightly esteem of either, holding a temporal death the greatest danger. Whence grew the usual Proverb amongst profane Ruffians; that conscience makes cowards. But this (as I said) is merely accidental: For as much as nothing spurs on a true resolution more than a good conscience, and a true touch of religion: witness the holy Martyrs of the Church of all ages, whose valour and constancy hath outgone all heathen precedents. But because soldiers for the most part, being a most dissolute kind of people, having either a false religion which can suggest no settled resolution, or an ill conscience grounded upon no assurance, Religion must needs beget in them a more fearful disposition. Another cause may be the severity of discipline, which especially in the training up of youth, is mixed with a kind of slavery: without which our younger years are very untractable to taste the bitter roots of knowledge. This fear (as it were) stamped in our affections cannot but leave behind it a continual impression, which cannot suddenly be razed out. Such as we find in us of our masters and teachers, whose friendship we rather embrace, than familiarity. A third reason, why discipline would weaken and mollify a Nation, may be the delight which men reap in Contemplative studies, and moral or politic duties, whence follows a neglect of the other. For people of knowledge must needs find a greater felicity in gifts of the mind, which is usually seconded with a contempt of external and military affairs. The last cause may be the want of use and practise of military affairs in most commonwealths; for many states well established continue a long time without wars, neither molesting their neighbours, nor dissenting amongst themselves; except very seldom, and that by a small army, without troubling the whole state: whence the general practice being less known, becomes more fearful. Notwithstanding, all this it were brutish to imagine discipline any way unnecessary or hurtful, either to a Captain or Statesman. For as much as it more strengthens the wit than abates the courage of a nation. Neither is it properly said to break and weaken, but rather to temper and regulate our spirits. For it is not valour, but rather rashness or fierceness, which is not managed with policy and discretion. And although it hath sometimes been attended with notable exploits, as that of Alexander the great, of the Goths, the ancient Gauls and many other. Yet shall we observe such conquests, to be of small continuance: For what they atcheived by strength, they lost for want of policy. So that it is well said by one: that moderation is the mother of continuance, to States and Kingdoms. Thus have we run over (by God's assistance) the chief causes of diversity of dispositions of Nations: Wherein if any man will inform himself (as he should) he must compare one circumstance with another, and make his judgement not from a man but a nation; and not censure any Nation out of one observation: For practise in Art cannot always come home to speculation. So experience in this kind will oftentimes cross the most general rules we can imagine. 'tis enough to judge as we find, and walk where the way is open; If any man will desire more curiosity, he may spend more labour to less purpose. Let every man by beholding the national vices of other men, praise Almighty God for his own happiness: and by seeing their virtues, learn to correct his own vices. So should our travail in this Terrestrial Globe be our direct way to Heaven: And that eternal guide should conduct us which can never err: To whom be ascribed all Glory, Praise, and Power, for evermore. Deo triuni Laus in aeternum. FINIS.